FEMAP

User Guide

Version 2020.2
Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notice

This software and related documentation are proprietary to Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
© 2020 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Siemens and the Siemens logo are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. NX is a trademark or registered trademark
of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in other coun-
tries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks belong to their respective holders.

Siemens PLM

Web: http://www.femap.com

Customer Support

Phone: (714) 952-5444, (800) 955-0000 (In US & Canada)

Web: http://support.ugs.com

The following copyright refers only to the “bmp2raster.exe” executable distributed with FEMAP:
NeuQuant Neural-Net Quantization Algorithm
Copyright (c) 1994 Anthony Dekker
NEUQUANT Neural-Net quantization algorithm by Anthony Dekker, 1994.
See “Kohonen neural networks for optimal colour quantization” in “Network: Computation in Neural Systems”
Vol. 5 (1994) pp 351-367 for a discussion of the algorithm.
See also http://members.ozemail.com.au/~dekker/NEUQUANT.HTML
Any party obtaining a copy of these files from the author, directly or indirectly, is granted, free of charge, a full and
unrestricted irrevocable, world-wide, paid up, royalty-free, nonexclusive right and license to deal in this software
and documentation files (the “Software”), including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, pub-
lish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons who receive copies from any
such party to do so, with the only requirement being that this copyright notice remain intact.
Conventions
This manual uses different fonts to highlight command names or input that you must type.

a:setup Shows text that you should type.

OK, Cancel Shows a command name or text that you will see in a
dialog box.

Throughout this manual, you will see references to Windows. Windows refers to Microsoft® Windows 7, Windows
8, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 (64-bit versions only). You will need one of these operating environments to run
FEMAP for the PC. This manual assumes that you are familiar with the general use of the operating environment.
If you are not, you can refer to the Windows User’s Guide for additional assistance.
Similarly, throughout the manual all references to FEMAP, refer to the latest version of our software.
Table of Contents

Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notice

Table of Contents
1. Introduction
2. Product Configurations
3. Getting Started
3.1 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Installation - Stand Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Security Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2 Setup Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3 Upgrading Your Security Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Network Installation - PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.1 Obtaining a License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2 License Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.3 Configuring Network Client Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.4 Monitoring Network Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.5 Copying FEMAP from one machine to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4 Starting FEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4.1 Errors Starting FEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
3.4.2 Improving Performance (RAM Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
3.5 Licensing Conversion Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
3.6 Initialization and Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
3.7 Performing a Silent Installation of Femap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
3.8 Femap Product Excellence Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
3.9 Release Management and Service Bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
4. User Interface
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 The FEMAP/Windows Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 The FEMAP Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Accessing FEMAP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.1 FEMAP Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.2 FEMAP Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.3 Quick Access Menu (Right Mouse Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
4.2.4 Shortcut Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
4.2.5 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
4.2.6 The Select Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4.2.7 Context Sensitive Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4.2.8 Dockable Pane Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
4.3 FEMAP Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
4.3.1 Entity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
4.3.2 Coordinate Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
4.3.3 Vector Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
4.3.4 Plane Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
4.3.5 Color Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
4.3.6 Library Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
4.4 The Workplane and Other Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
4.4.1 The Workplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
4.4.2 The Cursor Position Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63
4.4.3 Snap To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63
4.4.4 Selecting Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
4.4.5 Selecting Entities by their Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
4.4.6 Numerical Input - Real Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
4.4.7 Numerical Input - The FEMAP Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
4.4.8 Equation Editor - Ctrl+E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
5. The FEA Process
 TOC-2 Table of Contents

5.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1.1 Methods and Snap To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 The Workplane (2-D and 3-D Geometry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.3 Basics - Points, Lines and Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.4 Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.5 Curves from Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.6 Modifying the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.7 Surfaces, Boundary Surfaces, Volumes, Solids. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Elements and Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.1 Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.2 Element Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3 Hexahedral Modeling and Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.1 Geometry Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.2 Mesh Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3.3 Hex Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.3.4 Hex Mesh From Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4 Midsurface Modeling and Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.1 Creating Midsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4.2 Preparing for Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5 Materials and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.1 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.2 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.6 Loads and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.6.1 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.6.2 Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7 Connections and Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8 Aeroelasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.9 Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.10 Simulation Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.11 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.12 Groups, Layers and Viewing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.12.1 Working with View Select and View Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.12.2 Groups and Layers Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.12.3 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.13 External Superelements Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.13.1 Creation of an External Superelement using FEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.13.2 Referencing an External Superelement using FEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.14 Post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.14.1 Deformed and Contour Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.14.2 XY Plotting using the Charting pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.14.3 Reporting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.15 Stress Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.15.1 A Simple Analysis: Step 1 - Importing the Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.15.2 A Simple Analysis: Step 2 - Constraining the Model . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.15.3 A Simple Analysis: Step 3 - Loading the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.15.4 A Simple Analysis: Step 4 - Analyzing and Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
6. Element Reference
6.1 Line Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Rod Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Tube Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3 Curved Tube Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.4 Bar Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.5 Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.6 Link Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.1.7 Curved Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.1.8 Spring/Damper Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.9 DOF Spring Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.1.10 Gap Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.1.11 Plot Only Element (Line). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2 Plane Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.2.1 Shear Panel Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.2.2 Membrane Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.3 Bending Only Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.4 Plate Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
 Table of Contents TOC-3

6.2.5 Laminate Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14

6.2.6 Plane Strain Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
6.2.7 Axisymmetric Shell Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
6.2.8 Plot Only Element (Plane) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
6.3 Volume Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
6.3.1 Axisymmetric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
6.3.2 Solid Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
6.3.3 Solid Laminate Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
6.3.4 Solid Cohesive Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
6.4 Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.4.1 Mass Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.4.2 Mass Matrix Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.4.3 Spring/Damper to Ground Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.4.4 DOF Spring to Ground Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
6.4.5 Rigid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
6.4.6 General Matrix Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
6.4.7 Slide Line Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
6.4.8 Weld/Fastener Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
6.4.9 Nastran General Matrix Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
7. Translation Tables for Analysis Programs
7.1 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 ANSYS (Legacy) Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
7.1.2 ANSYS Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
7.1.3 NASTRAN Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
7.1.4 MSC Patran Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
7.2 Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS . . . . . . . . . .7-23
7.2.1 ABAQUS Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
7.2.2 LS-DYNA Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
7.2.3 MSC.Marc Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
7.2.4 I-DEAS Translation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
8. Analysis Program Interfaces
8.1 FEMAP Neutral Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.1 Writing a FEMAP Neutral File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 Reading a FEMAP Neutral File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2 ABAQUS Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.1 Writing an ABAQUS Model with Model, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.2 Writing an ABAQUS Model with File, Export . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
8.2.3 Performing an ABAQUS Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
8.2.4 Reading ABAQUS Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
8.2.5 Post-processing ABAQUS Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
8.3 ANSYS Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
8.3.1 Writing an ANSYS Model with Model, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
8.3.2 Performing an ANSYS Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
8.3.3 Reading ANSYS Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-51
8.3.4 Reading ANSYS Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-51
8.4 ANSYS Interfaces (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52
8.4.1 Writing an ANSYS Model with Model, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52
8.4.2 Writing an ANSYS Model with File, Export . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-62
8.4.3 Performing an ANSYS Analysis (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-65
8.4.4 Reading ANSYS Models (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-66
8.4.5 Reading ANSYS Analysis Results (Legacy). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-66
8.5 I-DEAS Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-67
8.5.1 Writing an I-DEAS Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-67
8.5.2 Reading an I-DEAS Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-68
8.6 LS-DYNA Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-69
8.6.1 Writing an LS-DYNA Model with Model, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .8-69
8.6.2 Writing an LS-DYNA Model with File, Export . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-74
8.6.3 Performing an LS-DYNA Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
8.6.4 Reading an LS-DYNA Analysis Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
8.6.5 Post-processing LS-DYNA Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
8.7 Marc Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-77
8.7.1 Writing an MSC.Marc Model with Model, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .8-77
8.7.2 Writing an MSC.Marc Model with File, Export . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-85
8.7.3 Performing an MSC.Marc Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-90
 TOC-4 Table of Contents

8.7.4 Reading an MSC.Marc Analysis Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91

8.7.5 Post-processing MSC.Marc Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8.8 Nastran Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8.8.1 Writing a Nastran Model with Model, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8.8.2 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-177
8.8.3 Performing a Nastran Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-188
8.8.4 Reading Nastran Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-188
8.8.5 Post-processing Nastran Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189
8.8.6 Reviewing Messages and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-192
8.9 Patran Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-193
8.9.1 Writing a MSC.Patran Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-193
8.9.2 Reading a MSC.Patran Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-193
8.9.3 Post-processing MSC.Patran Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-193
8.10 Vendor-Supported Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
8.10.1 Analysis Software Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
8.10.2 Using the Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
8.10.3 Reading Analysis Results into FEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
8.11 Comma-Separated Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-195
8.11.1 Writing a Comma-Separated Table File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-195
8.11.2 Reading or attaching to a Comma-Separated File . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
8.11.3 The Comma-Separated Table Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-197
8.11.4 The Extended Comma-Separated Table Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-197
9. Geometry Interfaces
9.1 ACIS Interfaces (*.SAT Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.1 Reading ACIS (SAT) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2 Writing ACIS (SAT) Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2 Parasolid Interfaces (*.X_T Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.1 Reading Parasolid (X_T) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.2 Writing Parasolid (X_T) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 STEP Interface (*.STP files) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3.1 Reading STEP (*.STP) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3.2 Writing STEP (*.STP) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4 IGES File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4.1 Reading IGES Files... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4.2 Writing IGES Files... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5 JT Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.6 DXF Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.7 CATIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.7.1 Reading CATIA V4 Files... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.7.2 Reading in CATIA V5 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.8 Pro/ENGINEER Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.8.1 Reading Pro/E Files... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.9 Solid Edge Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.10 NX Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.11 SolidWorks Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.12 Stereolithography Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
10. Customization
10.1 FEMAP Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Customizing Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3 Introduction to the FEMAP API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
A. Using the Keyboard
B. Using the Mouse and Touch
C. Function Reference
D. Converting Old Models
1. Introduction

FEMAP is finite element modeling and post-processing software that allows you to perform engineering analyses
both quickly and confidently. FEMAP provides the capability to develop sophisticated analyses of stress, tempera-
ture, and dynamic performance directly on the desktop. With easy access to CAD and office automation tools, pro-
ductivity is dramatically improved compared to traditional approaches.
FEMAP automatically provides the integration that is necessary to link all aspects of your analysis. FEMAP can be
used to create geometry, or you can import CAD geometry. FEMAP provides powerful tools for meshing geometry,
as well as applying loads and boundary conditions. You may then use FEMAP to export an input file to over 20
finite element codes. FEMAP can also read the results from the solver program. Once results are obtained in
FEMAP, a wide variety of tools are available for visualizing and reporting on your results.
Geometry
FEMAP can directly import geometry from your CAD or design system. In fact, FEMAP can directly import a
solid model from any ACIS-based or Parasolid-based modeling package. If your modeling package does not use
either of these geometry engines, you can use the FEMAP IGES or STEP reader. These files can be read and then
stitched together to form a solid. This typically requires using one command.
If you do not have CAD geometry, you can create geometry directly in FEMAP using powerful wireframe and
solid modeling tools. Solid modeling directly in FEMAP uses the powerful Parasolid modeling engine. You can
build or modify solid models using the Parasolid engine, and then export the geometry out of FEMAP. This is very
convenient if you need to export geometry to CAD packages that are Parasolid-based.
Finite Element Modeling
Regardless of the origin of your geometry, you can use FEMAP to create a complete finite element model. Meshes
can be created by many methods ranging from manual creation, to mapped meshing between keypoints, to fully
automatic meshing of curves, surfaces and solids. FEMAP can even work with your existing analysis models. You
can import and manipulate these models using the interfaces to any of the supported analysis programs.
Appropriate materials and section properties can be created or assigned from FEMAP libraries. Many types of con-
straint and loading conditions can be applied to represent the design environment. You can apply loads/constraints
directly on finite element entities (nodes and elements), or you can apply them to geometry. FEMAP will automat-
ically convert geometric conditions to nodal/elemental values upon translation to your solver program. You may
even convert these loads before translation to convince yourself that the loading conditions are appropriate for your
model.
Checking Your Model
At every step of the modeling process, you receive graphical verification of your progress. You need not worry
about making a mistake because FEMAP contains a multi-level undo and redo capability.
FEMAP also provides extensive tools for checking your model before you analyze it to give you the confidence
that you have properly modeled your part. It constantly examines input to prevent errors in the model, and provides
immediate visual feedback. FEMAP also provides a comprehensive set of tools to evaluate your finite element
model and identify errors that are often not obvious. For example, FEMAP can check for coincident geometry, find
improper connections, estimate mass and inertia, evaluate your constraint conditions, and sum your loading condi-
tions. Each of these methods can be used to identify and eliminate potential errors, saving you considerable time
and money.
Analyzing Your Model
When your model is complete, FEMAP provides interface to over 20 popular programs to perform finite element
analysis. You can even import a model from one analysis program and automatically convert it to the format for a
different analysis program.
The Simcenter Nastran for FEMAP solver is a general finite element analysis program for structural and thermal
analysis that is integrated with FEMAP.
 1-2 Introduction

Post-processing
After your analysis, FEMAP provides both powerful visualization tools that enable you to quickly interpret results,
and numerical tools to search, report, and perform further calculations using these results. Deformation plots, con-
tour plots, animations, and XY plots of Data Series are just some of the post-processing tools available to the
FEMAP user. FEMAP supports OpenGL, which provides even more capability for post-processing, including
dynamic visualization of contours through solid parts. You can dynamically rotate solid contoured models with one
push of your mouse button. Section cuts and isosurfaces can be viewed dynamically by simply moving your cursor.
Documenting Results
Documentation is also a very important factor with any analysis. FEMAP obviously provides direct, high quality
printing and plotting of both graphics and text. Frequently, however, graphics or text must be incorporated into a
larger report or presentation. FEMAP can export both graphics and text to non-engineering programs with a simple
Windows Cut command. You can easily export pictures to popular programs such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft
Power Point, and Adobe FrameMaker. You can export to spreadsheets, databases, word processors, desktop pub-
lishing software, and paint and illustration programs. These links enable you to create and publish a complete
report or presentation, all electronically, right on your desktop.
With support for AVI files, you can even include an animation directly in your Power Point Presentation or Word
document. FEMAP also supports VRML and JPEG format so anyone can easily view results with standard view-
ers.
FEMAP Documentation
The FEMAP on-line help includes the contents of these manuals, as well as several additional books. The complete
set includes:
• FEMAP Examples: Step-by-step examples for new users.
• FEMAP User Guide: General information on how to use FEMAP, including an overview of the finite element
modeling process. Also contains reference information for the FEMAP analysis program and geometry inter-
faces.
• FEMAP Commands: Detailed information on how to use FEMAP commands.
• FEMAP API Reference: Information on how to write your own applications that work with FEMAP.
• What’s New: New features for this release.
When Simcenter FEMAP with Nastran is installed, on-line help includes all of the above, as well as a full set of
current Simcenter Nastran documentation, to assist you during the solving portion of the analysis process.
2. Product Configurations

To best address the needs of our customers, FEMAP is available in two configurations: Simcenter FEMAP and
Simcenter FEAMP with Nastran. Each configuration contains a license of FEMAP, giving you full access to all of
the powerful modeling and post-processing capabilities of FEMAP. Simcenter FEAMP with Nastran also includes
the industry standard Simcenter Nastran Finite Element Analysis solver to provide you a total analysis solution.
Simcenter FEMAP
FEMAP includes automatic and manual meshing, automatic generation of beam cross section properties, support
for a wide variety of material data, loading conditions, and analysis programs. FEMAP also includes automatic
contact detection, advanced post-processing features, and robust solid and surface modeling using the Parasolid
geometry engine.
FEMAP contains the Parasolid solid modeling engine. Parasolid is a solid modeling engine developed by UGS
Corporation, and is the underlying modeling engine in many CAD and solid modeling engines such as Solid Edge,
Unigraphics, and SolidWorks. FEMAP allows you to use powerful Parasolid-based geometry tools contained in
FEMAP to create your own complex 3-D models from scratch. These 3-D models can be used to validate structural
integrity inside of FEMAP, then exported out of FEMAP and imported into any Parasolid-based CAD systems for
further manipulation, drawing creation, or incorporation into large assemblies of parts.
The ACIS-to-Parasolid geometry converter in FEMAP provides the ability to import solid models created with the
ACIS Geometry Engine. ACIS is the solid modeling engine developed by Spatial Technology, Inc., and is used by
several popular CAD systems including AutoCAD. If you frequently receive solid CAD data from ACIS-based
CAD and solid-modeling systems, the ACIS geometry can be imported into FEMAP, will be converted to Parasolid
automatically, modified inside of FEMAP, then used in the creation of effective FEA models. Parasolid geometry
from FEMAP can also be exported out in ACIS format for use with ACIS-based CAD systems.
Finally, FEMAP includes direct interfaces to major CAD programs such as I-DEAS, CATIA, PRO/Engineer, Solid
Edge (Parasolid), Unigraphics (Parasolid), and VDA, as well as the ability to both import and export geometry in
the industry standard IGES or STEP formats.
FEMAP is the ideal solution for the analysts who receive CAD data from an outside source as well as create their
own. The ability to import Parasolid, ACIS, IGES, and STEP files covers a wide variety of CAD systems. To ideal-
ize thin structures created as solids, FEMAP even provides excellent automatic and semi-automatic mid-planing
capability. Therefore, you can import a thin solid from a CAD system, create a mid-plane surface representation of
the part, and then mesh these surfaces with plates.
Leading firms recognize that it is unlikely a single analysis technology will meet all of their requirements. More-
over, by integrating multiple analysis technologies in a single modeling and visualization environment, they can
make better designs faster.
Simcenter FEMAP with Nastran
Simcenter FEAMP with Nastran combines the power of the industry standard Nastran solver with the equally pow-
erful modeling and post-processing capabilities of FEMAP.
Simcenter FEAMP with Nastran currently supports:
• statics analysis solves for linear, static stress, and deflection results when thermo-mechanical loads are present.
• dynamic (normal modes) solves for natural frequencies and mode shapes of either restrained or free-free struc-
tures.
• advanced dynamics capabilities such as transient response, frequency response, response spectrum analysis,
random response,
• nonlinear static and transient analysis lets you handle large deformations and material nonlinearity.
• both steady-state and transient heat transfer analysis solves for temperatures due to convection, conduction,
heat generation and radiation.
2-2 Product Configurations

• linear buckling analysis

• design optimization helps you to find more efficient design solutions
• advanced nonlinear capabilities including surface-to-surface contact using Simcenter Nastran Solution 601 and
explicit transient dynamics using Simcenter Nastran Solution 701.
• advanced multi-step nonlinear structural capabilities including using Simcenter Nastran Solution 401 and
multi-step nonlinear kinematics using Simcenter Nastran Solution 402.
3. Getting Started

Welcome to FEMAP! This section will help you to setup your computer so that you can immediately begin to
explore the many capabilities of FEMAP.
This section contains information specific to getting started on a PC, which includes 64-bit versions for Windows
8, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10.
The FEMAP installer contains only the 64-bit version of FEMAP, as a 32-bit version is no longer available.

Note: You MUST be logged in with Administrator privileges when installing FEMAP for the installation to
proceed.

3.1 Hardware Requirements

There are no special hardware requirements for FEMAP beyond those imposed by Windows. There are many types
of hardware that will allow you to use FEMAP. Proper choice of hardware however, can often make the difference
between frustration and productivity. Here are a few suggestions:
Memory, RAM:
You will need at least 128 Mbytes of RAM to run FEMAP and the Parasolid solid modeling engine, which is the
default. Obviously, the more amount of RAM the better. Adding RAM can be one of the most cost effective means
of increasing performance.

Note: If using the “Standard” geometry Engine in FEMAP, you can actually run with as little as 32 Mbytes of
RAM. This is not a recommended configuration.

Memory, (Hard Disk):

Required hard disk space is very difficult to estimate, but in general you will never have enough. Analysis results
will be the main driver of any disk space requirement. Models are typically relatively small. A model with 1000
nodes and 1000 elements would typically be less than 1 Mbyte in size. Output from an analysis of that model how-
ever could be 5 Mbytes, 10 Mbytes or even much larger, depending on the output you request. To estimate total
disk space, you need to first estimate how many models you will have on-line simultaneously, the approximate size
of those models, and the type of output you will request.
Graphics Boards:
Although Femap can be run with software OpenGL provided by the Operating System (OS), to get reasonable per-
formance with large, complex models, graphics specific hardware is required. FEMAP supports NVIDIA Quadro
(but not Quadro NVS), AMD Radeon Pro, and some older AMD professional cards for all Femap capabilities. Intel
hardware is supported for all Femap graphics capabilities except Performance Graphics. Other graphics cards, such
as NVIDIA GeForce and AMD Radeon (not Pro), may work but support from the OEM's is not available for these
cards, therefore it is unlikely FEMAP development can help with any issues which may be encountered.
Abaqus ODB Requirements:
The Microsoft MPI (Message Passing Interface) is required to load Abaqus ODB files. This interface is no longer
included during the FEMAP installation. Beginning with FEMAP 2019.1, Siemens PLM Software can no longer
redistribute the Microsoft MPI. Anyone who requires Abaqus ODB files in their work-flow will need to take extra
steps to ensure the necessary MPI is installed. The download and installation instructions are available from Micro-
soft using the following link:
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=57467

3.2 Installation - Stand Alone

This section describes the procedure that you should follow to install the stand alone (security device) version of
FEMAP on your PC.
 3-2 Getting Started

3.2.1 Security Device

In order to run the Stand Alone (Security Device) version of FEMAP a Rainbow SuperPro USB Port or Parallel
Port (pictured below) dongle is required. In order for your PC to be able to see the dongle, a driver must first be
installed. Installation of the driver requires Administrator privileges for your PC. During installation, if the current
user has Administrator privileges, the installation program will automatically prompt for installation of this driver.
Computer

FEMAP USB FEMAP DONGLE

Printer

If the installer does not have Administrator privileges, someone with Administrator privileges may log in and
install the driver manually. The driver installation program can be found in the SentinalDriver directory of the
FEMAP installation media (download or DVD). On any supported Windows platform, run Sentin-
alDriver\SSD769.exe. It is highly recommended that you do not have any security devices attached to your com-
puter while you are installing the driver. Once the driver has been installed, you can plug a USB security device
directly into an open USB port and it should be recognized.

3.2.2 Setup Program Execution

Windows 8/8.1/10
1. Log in to your computer as Administrator. As detailed above, this will make installation of the driver required to
talk to the FEMAP dongle possible.
2. If installing via DVD, insert the FEMAP DVD into the drive. If installing via a downloaded installation package,
unzip the contents of the download to a temporary location on the machine. In either case, manually run the
SETUP.EXE program in the root directory of the FEMAP DVD or temporary location.
Once setup is running you will see a license agreement. Assuming that you agree with the license agreement,
choose “I accept the terms of the license agreement” and press Next to continue and select the directory where you
would like to have the FEMAP program files installed. You will be prompted for the selection of additional
FEMAP options, please choose any optional modules and components that you wish to have installed.
 Setup Program Execution 3-3

Notice that the installation will tell you the amount of disk space required for the chosen options to be installed and
how much space is available on the drive where FEMAP will be installed.

Note: If you plan on licensing FEMAP with a dongle (security key), not a network license, then you will prob-
ably want to UNCHECK the FLEXlm License Manager option as it is not used by the dongle.

The next dialog box allows you to Select FEMAP GUI Language. Select from:
• English
• German,
• Simplified Chinese
• Traditional Chinese
• Japanese
Once the language is selected, click Next.
Now, a dialog box allows you to Select Licensing Method. Choose Nodelocked Dongle - Rainbow SuperPro as the
licensing method.

Setup Type Description

Nodelocked Dongle - Installs FEMAP for use with a Rainbow Parallel Port or USB don-
Rainbow SuperPro gle. If you have the dongle version of FEMAP, choose this setup
type.

Network Client - Installs the Network Client version of FEMAP. This setup is for use
FLEXlm where FEMAP is licensed via the FLEXlm license management
software. With the Network Client version of FEMAP, one machine
on your network will be designated as the license server. The fol-
lowing “Network License Server” setup will have to be run on that
machine.
 3-4 Getting Started

Node-Limited Demo Installs the 300-Node demonstration version of FEMAP. This ver-
License sion requires no licensing, but is limited to very small models. It is
intended for new users to try FEMAP and all its options.

After choosing Nodelocked Dongle and pressing Next, the program will be installed and then a driver required for
the dongle will automatically be installed. Finally, if you are installing the Simcenter FEMAP with Nastran option
you will be prompted to specify a “scratch” directory for the solver. You will need to have read/write access to this
directory to be able to properly use Simcenter Nastran.

3.2.3 Upgrading Your Security Device

FEMAP dongles are shipped good for 30 days from the first time they are run. In order to remove the time limit
from your new FEMAP dongle, or upgrade an older dongle or network license, you must contact the Siemens Prod-
uct Lifecycle Management Software Inc. Global Technical Access Center (GTAC). Upgrade codes and updated
license files are now available via Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. GTAC (Global Technical
Access Center) WebKey system available on-line at https://plmapps.industrysoftware.automation.siemens.com/
webkey/ FEMAP customers can use WebKey for both licensing support and product technical support.

3.2.3.1 Obtaining a Webkey Account from Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
To request a WebKey account, you can attempt to use the Help, Technical Support, Request Webkey Account
command or simply access the web page using this URL:
https://plmapps.industrysoftware.automation.siemens.com/webkey/
Then provide the following information:
• Your Installation ID
• WebKey Access Code
Your Installation ID is directly under the “Sold To” information on your shipping order. For dongle-based FEMAP
customers, your WebKey Access code is the unique portion of your FEMAP serial number, i.e. 3H-NT-1234, which
is displayed in your current FEMAP in the Help - About dialog box, for this license as 1000-3H-NT-1234, with the
version information at the beginning of the serial number removed.

3.2.3.2 Obtaining Upgrade Codes or a new License File

1. Via the Web, using your WebKey Account -Upgrade codes or an updated license file can be e-mailed to you
from the Customer Support (GTAC) web site http://www.plm.automation.siemens.com/support/gtac. In the
Explore GTAC section, expand “License Management” and select “Current Licenses”. If prompted, enter WebKey
and password. Click Passwords and License Files link. Select “Femap” as the Product and set Version to the appro-
priate version. For LM Host or Dongle ID, enter either the unique portion of you FEMAP serial number (3H-NT-
1234 in this case) if using a dongle or fill in the Ethernet address of your FEMAP license server if using FLEXlm
network licenses. Your license or access codes will be e-mailed to the address supplied during WebKey registra-
tion.

2. Via the Phone - You can call GTAC at 714-952-5444 (US and Canada residents may use 800-955-0000) and
enter option 1, 1, for your CSR or option 1, 2, for Software Product Delivery (SPD). You should then request a
copy of the license upgrade for a specific Installation ID and serial number or Ethernet Address.
For dongle versions of FEMAP, the information returned to you to upgrade the dongle will be in the form of two
case insensitive alpha numeric codes. They will appear something like:
 Network Installation - PC 3-5

Access Code 1: 08aeca3f0f52639179

Access Code 2: 362ff63c3426d943
Use the Help, About command, then click the Security button. Cut and paste (to avoid errors) or type these two
codes in to the appropriate fields and press OK. The FEMAP dongle is an EPROM, and these codes are used to
update the memory of the dongle. Once these codes have been entered, you will never need to enter them again,
with changes made to the memory of the dongle, they will either be useless, or simply write the same thing to mem-
ory again.

3.3 Network Installation - PC

The “Network Client” version of FEMAP utilizes the FLEXlm License Manager software from Flexera Software.
This licensing approach requires some software to be installed on a server machine and other software to be
installed on one or more clients. The clients then request and obtain licenses from the server. In a simple situation,
both the client and server could be the same computer, but more likely they are different systems connected by a
network.

3.3.1 Obtaining a License File

License files are obtained through the same procedure as defined above for getting the upgrade codes for a dongle
license. Call GTAC, or use your WebKey account to request your FEMAP license file. The only difference in Net-
work Licensed FEMAP is that you need to enter the LMHostID (Ethernet Address) of your license server when
prompted instead of the FEMAP Serial Number. When you receive your license file information, you need to
extract just the valid FLEXlm license entries, and copy them into a file called “license.dat”. Please make sure that
your license.dat looks something like the one show below. For FEMAP, you will have one SERVER line, one
DAEMON line, and one or more FEATURE lines depending on how many options you have purchased with your
FEMAP.
A couple of things to make sure of:
1. Make sure that the entry immediately following the word “SERVER” is the name of the license server where you
are installing the license server software. If it is a temporary name, i.e. ANY, or THISHOST, change it to the cor-
rect machine name. This is one of the two things in the license file that you can change.
2. Make sure that the third entry on the SERVER line matches the LMHostID of license server. This number is the
key to the whole license file. If this does not match the LMHostID of the license server, the licensing will not work.
3. The “DAEMON esplmd” line calls out the actual programs that hands out FEMAP licenses. If you have installed
all the license server pieces in the same directory, it is fine as is. If the esplmd.exe program is not in the same direc-
tory as LMTOOLS.EXE, you will have to edit this line to tell LMTOOLS.EXE where to find it. This is the other
part of a license file that you can change.

3.3.2 License Server

This section provides instructions on installing the network license manager and configuring your server.

3.3.2.1 Installing the FLEXlm License Manager

To begin the server installation, simply insert the FEMAP DVD or unzip the contents of the download to a tempo-
rary location and run “setup.exe”. FEMAP will ask which “features” should be installed. If you only want to install
 3-6 Getting Started

the license server, then UNCHECK all the options except “FLEXlm License Manager”. Once FEMAP has installed
the software, copy your license file (usually called “license.dat”) to the same directory where you installed the
license server components.
License, options and log files
For security purposes please follow the principle of least privilege (POLP) for configuration options, logs and
license files
For these files use a folder within the "C:\ProgramData" directory such as:
C:\ProgramData\FLEXlm\lmgrd
...or another custom directory with appropriate privileges.
Security
We highly recommend running the license server with a user other than root, since processes started by root can
introduce security risks. The best practice would be to create a user and group with proper security, and use that
user for running the license server.

Note: If the existing FlexNet license service is running as “Local System” then you should delete it and recre-
ate using the license manager binaries shipped with Femap 11.4 or later.

3.3.2.2 Configuring the FLEXlm License Manager

You can run the LMTOOLS program from the FEMAP entry on your start -> All Programs - >FEMAP v2020.2 ->
FLEXlm License Manager, or manually run LMTOOLS.EXE from its installed directory.
Once LMTOOLS is running, select the “Config Services” Tab.

Fill in a Service Name, specify a path to the lmgrd.exe file (a required FLEXlm component) that can be found in
the installation directory, and specify the path to the license file. Finally, check the “Use Services” option, and then
the “Start Server at Power Up”. Press the “Save Service” button.
Answer “Yes” to the question: “Would you like to save the settings for the service: FEMAP?”. If another question
appears: “Windows preferred path <SystemDrive>\ProgramData to store service data is not set.”, simply click OK.
 Configuring Network Client Machines 3-7

You must start the license server manually the first time, press the “Start/Stop/Reread” tab.

Select the FEMAP service that you just created, and press the “Start Server” button. At this point FLEXlm will be
handing out FEMAP licenses on your network. To verify that everything is working fine from the license server
standpoint, press the “Server Status” tab.
Press the “Perform Status Enquiry” button and the text window will be filled with status information about your
FLEXlm license server. In the text window you will find information about how many licenses are available, and
once user start checking out licenses, how many are in use.

3.3.3 Configuring Network Client Machines

Once your network license server is up and running, configuring FEMAP Network Client machines is very easy.
Make sure that FEMAP is installed on the local machine using the “Network Client” setup type. To configure client
machines to access the network license:
You have two options for telling network client machines how to find licenses on the license server:
1. Place a copy of the “license.dat” file in the FEMAP directory on the cli-
ent machine. FEMAP will extract the name of the license server from the
license file, and check out a license and run. The only drawback to this
approach is that you must remember to update every copy of the license
file when you receive a new one from Siemens Product Lifecycle Manage-
ment Software Inc. (updates, licensing changes, etc.). To avoid this prob-
lem, you can type in the full network path to the License File in the
“License File” field used below for HostName/IP Address location of the
license server.
2. Tell FEMAP the name or IP address of the License Server.
a. Start FEMAP
b. Go to Help - About - Security
c. In the “License File” field, enter the name of the license server, preceded by an ampersand. In the example
below, FEMAP is told to check out licenses from a network machine named PLSRV2:
d. In order for this machine name approach to work, the client computer must be able to see the license server com-
puter via TCP/IP networking. To verify this, you can open a Command Prompt and ping the license server. In this
case, one would type “ping PLSRV2”. The ping command will let you know if it can talk to the machine name indi-
 3-8 Getting Started

cated. If the client computer cannot find the license server by its name, you can also enter the IP address of the
license server, preceded by an ampersand and licensing should also work.

3.3.4 Monitoring Network Usage

In a multi-user environment, sometimes you will not be able to get a license simply because all available licenses
are in use. You can find out who is using licenses, which computers they are using and when they started their
license simply by going to Help, About, and pressing the Security button. At the bottom of the dialog box you will
find information that will give you this information.
If you fail to get a license because none are available, you will not be able to work in FEMAP. You do not however,
have to leave FEMAP. You can simply stay there and periodically try a command. Whenever a license becomes
available it will be assigned to you and your command will succeed. If there are still no licenses available, you will
simply get a message that says try again later.

3.3.5 Copying FEMAP from one machine to another

In previous versions, the FEMAP directory created from a proper installation could simply be copied from one
machine to another, then with the proper licensing, could be run on the new machine. For FEMAP 11 and above,
there are some additional steps which must be done in order for a copied version of FEMAP to be able to run.

Note: You must have Administrator privileges on the machine FEMAP is being copied to in order to complete
these additional steps.

First, you will need to run “vcredist_x86.exe”, then also run a 64-bit version of the executable called “vcred-
ist_x64.exe”. You need to run both because FEMAP still uses some 32-bit applications. Additional redistributable
executables may need to be run on certain operating systems.
Next, you must start FEMAP using the “Run as Administrator” option available by right-mouse clicking on the
“femap.exe” file. Running FEMAP from an Administrator account is typically not sufficient to properly write to
the registry.
Finally, using a DOS prompt, navigate to the FEMAP install directory, then type:
femap/register
...then press Enter. This will fully resister the application on this machine. This only needs to be done once, then
FEMAP should run normally and API capabilities will be available.

3.4 Starting FEMAP

There are several command line options to launch FEMAP. The simplest method to launch FEMAP is to create a
shortcut for FEMAP on your desktop and double-click the icon when you want to launch FEMAP. This will use the
command line contained under the shortcut to launch FEMAP. You can modify this command line by right-clicking
on the FEMAP icon, selecting properties, and changing the command line option on the shortcut.
The command line will contain the executable (and its path). After the femap.exe, there are several options which
may be used to determine the mode in which FEMAP will operate. A list of these command line options are pro-
vided below.
c:\FEMAPv###\femap.exe [-R] [-NEU] [-NOSPL] [-D dxf_file] [-N neu_file]

[-PRG program_file] [-SE Solid Edge_file] [-NX nx_file] [-L port] [-SAT sat_file]

[-XMT x_t file] [-SCA scale_factor] [-IGES iges_file] [-JT jt_file] [modfile or ?]

where all of the arguments in [ ] are optional command line parameters. They are:

The remaining parameters can be specified in any order.

-R Read Only Mode. With this option set, the Save, Save As and Timed Save commands are
disabled. You will not be able to save changes to any model you access. All other com-
mands remain active. Any changes you make will be made in the temporary scratch file,
and will be lost when you exit FEMAP.
 Starting FEMAP 3-9

-NEU Automatically writes a neutral file with the same name (just .NEU extension) as your
.MOD file every time you save a model. In addition, when you open a model, if a neutral
file exists with a newer date than the model, it will be read.

-NOSPL Starts FEMAP without the splash screen.

-D dxf_file This option automatically reads the specified DXF file when you start FEMAP. Make sure
you leave at least one space between the two arguments.

-N neu_file This option automatically reads the specified FEMAP neutral file when you start FEMAP.

-PRG program_file This option allows you to run a specified FEMAP program file (*.PRO or *.PRG file)
when FEMAP is started.

-SE Solid Edge_file Automatically creates a new FEMAP file and calls the File, Import Geometry command to
read the Solid Edge part file (*.prt file) or assembly file (*.asm file). When you use
FEMAP with this command option, you will see the Solid Model Read Options dialog
box, which will contain the title of the solid model file contained in the SAT file.

-NX nx_file Automatically creates a new FEMAP file and calls the File, Import Geometry command
to read the NX part file (*.prt file) or assembly file (*.asm file). When you use
FEMAP with this command option, you may see a dialog box asking “OK to Adjust
Geometry Scale Factor to Match Value from Part File? If you do not adjust, the scale fac-
tor you selected will be used”

-SAT sat_file Automatically creates a new FEMAP file and calls the File, Import Geometry command to
read the ACIS solid model file *.SAT file [sat_file]. When you use FEMAP with this com-
mand option, you will see the Solid Model Read Options dialog box, which will contain
the title of the solid model file contained in the SAT file.

-XMT xmt_file Automatically creates a new FEMAP file and calls the File, Import, Geometry command
to read the Parasolid solid model file *.X_T file [xmt_file]. When you use FEMAP with
this command option, you will see the Solid Model Read Options dialog box which will
contain the title of the solid model file contained in the X_T file.

-L port Specifies the parallel port where the FEMAP security device has been installed. This is not
typically needed unless FEMAP has difficulty accessing the device. If you want to attach
the security device to parallel port 1 (LPT1:), use -L 1, for parallel port 2 (LPT2:) use -L 2.
If your system is non-standard, or uses some other parallel port convention, you can spec-
ify the actual parallel port address. For example, if your parallel port was at address
03BCH (hexadecimal), you would convert the address to a decimal value, in this case 956,
and specify -L 956.

If you need to specify the -L option, you can change the default command line associated
with the FEMAP icon on the Desktop by selecting Properties. First, right-click on the
FEMAP icon. Then choose the File, Properties command (or press Alt+Enter). Move
down to the command line option, and just add the appropriate -L options. From then on
FEMAP will look for the security device on the specified port.

-SCA scale_value This option is used in conjunction with the -XMT and -SAT to specify a scale factor for
the solid model. If this option is used, FEMAP will automatically import and scale the
solid model. The Solid Model Read Options dialog box will not be shown.

-IGES iges_file Automatically creates a new FEMAP file and calls the File, Import, Geometry command
to read the file [iges_file]. When you use FEMAP with this command option, you will see
the IGES Read Options dialog box, where you can specify options for reading the file.

-JT jt_file Automatically creates a new FEMAP file and calls the File, Import, Geometry command
to read the file [jt_file]. When you use FEMAP with this command option, the JT file
will be imported without user interaction.
 3-10 Getting Started

- INI filename Specify a specific femap.ini file to use. The femap.ini file contains specific options which
can be used to customize many aspects of the program, such as a specific set of values for
File, Preferences.

modfile Normally FEMAP will start with a new, unnamed model. If modfile is the filename of an
existing model however, FEMAP will start using that model. If the file does not exist, you
will see an error message, and FEMAP will start a new model with that name.

? If you add a question mark to the command line instead of specifying a model name,
FEMAP will automatically display the standard file access dialog box and ask you for the
name of the model that you want to use. If you want to begin a new model, just press New
Model or the Escape key. When you want to work on an existing model, just choose it
from the dialog box, or type its name.

You should never specify both the ? and model_file options.

3.4.1 Errors Starting FEMAP

Security Device Not Found

Symptom:
You see an error indicating that the security device cannot be found.
Resolution:
Go to Section 3.2.1, "Security Device", and confirm all steps have been followed. Try to run FEMAP again.
Choose Server or File

Symptom:
If you are attempting to start a network client and see the Error dialog box from FEMAP, FLEXlm cannot find a
valid license file.
Resolution:
Press Cancel in this dialog box. Pick Help, About, Security to define the location of the license file, as instructed
above in Section 3.3.3, "Configuring Network Client Machines"
 Improving Performance (RAM Management) 3-11

Unable to get license error message

LM_LICENSE_FILE Environment variable message:

LM_LICENSE_FILE environment variable defined. It overrides all license file paths, and if it points to a license
for a different product, it will cause this licensing failure. You must either redefine or remove this definition, or
merge your license file with the one specified.
This error will ONLY occur when the environment variable LM_LICENSE_FILE has been set. For example, this
environment variable may have been set by another application for licensing purposes. Be careful when removing
or altering this environment variable as it may cause other applications to no longer function properly.
Other Error Messages
Symptom:
If you receive an “Unable to access {directory path}. Either this directory does not exist or you do not have proper
permissions. Check the directory and your preferences” error or have any other difficulty starting FEMAP where
abnormal termination occurs, you either do not have enough disk space, or your Windows TEMP is not set to a
valid, accessible directory.
Resolution:
You may either change your Windows TEMP directory environment variable, or specify a path for the FEMAP
scratch files (which default to the Windows TEMP directory set by the environment variable) to a valid directory.
This and all other FEMAP preferences are stored in a file called femap.ini that is typically located in the FEMAP
executable directory. You will have to create this file or modify it to include the appropriate lines as shown below:
DISKMODELSCR=C:\FEMAP112
where C:\FEMAP111 can be any valid path. The DISKMODELSCR parameter is case sensitive and must be defined
exactly as above. Once you make these changes and FEMAP starts, you can use the File, Preferences, Database
command to modify this path.

3.4.2 Improving Performance (RAM Management)

FEMAP determines the amount of available memory a machine and sets it to a default level automatically (20%).
FEMAP performance may improve on Windows personal workstations by modifying the default settings that
FEMAP uses to manage RAM. To view or change these settings, use the File, Preferences command, then click the
“Database” tab.
Database Performance
These options control how FEMAP uses your computer’s RAM. Setting these properly can greatly improve perfor-
mance.
Database Memory Limit
The Database Memory Limit sets the maximum amount of system memory that FEMAP will use to hold parts of
your model and results in memory. If your model is larger than the amount of memory that you choose, FEMAP
will automatically read data from your disk as it is needed, replacing data that is not being used. While this “Swap-
ping” process can slow down overall performance, it does let you work with much larger models than would other-
wise fit into your available memory.
The Database Memory Limit DOES NOT control the total amount of memory that FEMAP will be using. FEMAP
uses memory for many different operations – this is just one of them. Almost every command temporarily uses
some small amount of additional memory. Some commands, like meshing, node merging and reading results can
 3-12 Getting Started

temporarily use fairly significant amounts of memory. Other operations, like loading large amounts of data into the
Data Table require memory for a longer period of time – in this case as long as the data is in the table. Finally, the
largest use of additional memory, and one which normally persists the entire time you have a model open is for
drawing your model. For optimal performance, FEMAP uses OpenGL graphics, and keeps copies of the data to be
drawn in memory at all times. You must always have sufficient free memory available for all of these uses, or the
operations will not be able to execute properly. In the very worst case scenario, running out of memory could cause
FEMAP to crash. It is for this reason that the default Database Memory Limit is set fairly low – 20% of the memory
in your computer (The 32-bit version is also restricted by the 2 GByte limit for any program). This does not mean
that you can not increase the limit beyond its default, but the further into the yellow and red zones you push the
slider, you are increasing the chance of running out of memory.

Note: Changing the Database Memory Limit does not change the amount of memory used for the current ses-
sion. For this selection to take effect, you must exit and restart FEMAP.

Using the Control

The slider control allows you to choose the amount of memory to use for the database. Move the slider to the left to
reduce the limit, to the right to increase it. As you move the slider, the memory limit is updated and displayed
above the slider.

The colored bar below the slider gives you an indication of the risk of running out of memory if you use this set-
ting. The yellow and red regions should be used with caution since there is a good chance of causing problems with
other operations like meshing and graphics. The small line along the top edge of the green section indicates the
default memory limit. It is simply displayed to make it easy for you to go back to that limit if you try other settings.
The blue bar along the bottom edge indicates the amount of memory that the database is currently using.

Note: The blue bar in the above figure shows the amount of memory used by a 1,000,000 element model (4-
noded plate elements) on a 32-bit machine with 2 GB of RAM. Most potential problems with exceeding
the 2 GB memory limit only occur with very large models.

With this option, you are simply setting the maximum amount of memory available for the database. If you are
working with a smaller model, FEMAP will not use memory that it does not need and the blue bar will not extend
the entire way to the slider setting. If you look at this control with an empty model, or if you have a small model
and a large amount of memory in your system, the blue bar may not be visible – because it is too short to be seen
along the bar.
Max Cached Label
Sets the largest label that FEMAP will reserve memory for. This option must be set to a ID higher than any entity in
the model. Default value is 99,999,999 for 64-bit FEMAP, which is the highest allowable value.
Blocks/Page
This value sets the “page” size. The optimum setting of this number often depends on the speed of your disk and
controller.

Note: The default value of “4” was determined via testing to produce the best performance over a wide range
of values for Database Memory Limit and using the default settings for a number of different types of
disk drives. You may want to try other values from 1 to 15 if you have changed any speed/caching set-
tings on your drive or have “high-speed” drives to determine if performance is improved.

For more information, see Section 3.4.2, "Improving Performance (RAM Management)" in the FEMAP User
Guide.
 Licensing Conversion Methods 3-13

Setting Guidelines for older versions of FEMAP (7.0 to 9.3)

To access the internal FEMAP memory management system, follow the procedure below:
1. Choose the File, Preferences command and click the Database tab.

2. Change Cache Pages and Blocks/Page in the dialog box.

3. Max Cached Label should be set to a number that is higher than any entity you will create in your model file.
This sets aside a small portion of memory that stores all of the IDs in FEMAP.
4. Select OK.
The total amount of memory that FEMAP can allocate is the product of the Cache Pages, Blocks/Page, and 4096
bytes/block (i.e. the values shown, 12000 x 2 x 4096 will allow FEMAP to access just under 100 Mbytes of RAM)
and use entity IDs up to 6,000,000.

Note: You should never allow FEMAP to allocate more than the physical memory of the machine. The inter-
nal memory management (swapping) in FEMAP will allow the program to run much faster than Win-
dows memory swapping. Therefore, you should set the Cache Pages and Blocks/Page at a level which
is comfortably below the physical memory of the machine. Also, to optimize performance, you should
always increase Cache Pages (max 15000) to its limit before increasing Blocks/Page.

3.5 Licensing Conversion Methods

Please read this section very carefully before changing your licensing method. If you are going to convert your
licensing method you MUST HAVE FEMAP AND SIMCENTER NASTRAN CLOSED (not running) before you
use the files described below.
You can change your licensing method (i.e., from using a security key to using a network license) using specific
“batch” files located in the FEMAP directory. The files are named “go_licensing method”.bat and require mini-
mum user input to change your licensing method. In general, the “go” batch files change your current
“auth_###.dll” to use the appropriate licensing method (auth_licensing method.dll) and may create or alter some
other required files. FEMAP will open a “command prompt” and let you know if the conversion of the auth_###.dll
has been successful. The various “go” files are explained in greater detail below:
• go_apionly.bat - converts your current licensing method to the “API Only” version of FEMAP
• go_demo.bat - converts your current licensing method to the FEMAP Node-Limited Demonstration version.
• go_dongle.bat - converts your current licensing method to use a security key.
• go_network.bat - converts your current licensing method to use the FlexLM Network Client.

3.6 Initialization and Configuration Files

Please read this section very carefully, as FEMAP versions 2019.1 and above use a dramatically different method-
ology compared to versions 12.0.1 and earlier to locate two configuration files, “FEMAP.INI” and “CONFIG.INI”.
Finding FEMAP.INI and CONFIG.INI are independent of the licensing method and apply to all installations. In
addition to these files however, if FlexLM licensing is being used, Nastran needs to find the FlexLM license file
independently of FEMAP. This is accomplished by the auth_fx.dll which is launched by Nastran. For other licens-
ing methods, Nastran launches those DLLs but there is no need to find a .INI or license file.
Locating the “FEMAP.INI” file
FEMAP will attempt to find the “FEMAP.INI” file in this order:
1. -INI command line argument
2. FEMAP.INI environment variable
3. User Directory
 3-14 Getting Started

If no FEMAP.INI is found, as will be typical for the first run by any user, then a default one that was created during
install will be copied from the FEMAP install directory. This allows any localization or other settings to be propa-
gated to every user. Currently this file must be called “LOCAL.INI”, but is copied to “FEMAP.INI” in the User
Directory.
This update was also applied to the Borrow utility. It uses the same approach to find the FEMAP.INI file.
Locating the “CONFIG.INI” file
FEMAP will attempt to find the “CONFIG.INI” file in this order:
1. User Directory
2. FEMAP Install Directory
CONFIG.INI is created in the FEMAP Install Directory during installation and is never edited/changed. The User
Directory is only provided so someone with no access to the FEMAP Install Directory can override the original set-
tings.
Nastran will take the following approaches to find a FlexLM license.
Search order for Subscription licensing is as follows:
1. ESP_LICENSE_FILE environment variable
2. LICENSE.DAT in the Auth DLL (FEMAP Install) directory
Search order for all other licensing is as follows:
1. ESP_LICENSE_FILE environment variable
2. From the FEMAP.INI file located by the FEMAP_INI environment variable
3. From the FEMAP.INI in the User Directory
4. From the FEMAP.INI in the Auth DLL (FEMAP Install) directory
5. LICENSE.DAT in the Auth DLL (FEMAP Install) directory
If Nastran is launched from FEMAP, the FEMAP_INI environment variable will always be set to the FEMAP.INI
file that is being used, no matter how it was located. This variable is passed through the inherited environment that
Nastran receives when it is launched. So, options #3, #4, #5 are only used if Nastran is launched manually outside
of FEMAP. In this case, if the default FEMAP.INI files remain in the default location, then #3 should allow users to
find their FEMAP.INI file with no further setup.

3.7 Performing a Silent Installation of Femap

Femap uses InstallShield for package deployment, so standard InstallShield command line syntax may be used to
install a new, modify an existing, or uninstall an existing Femap installation. The basic process for any silent instal-
lation is to manually run the installation procedure in order to create a response file, then replay that response file
on the target computer.
Performing a silent installation
1. From the command line, run:
setup.exe /r
Proceed with the installation as-normal using the on-screen prompts. Any modification to the setup will be
recorded during this step. When the installation is complete, a file “setup.iss” file will have been created in C:\Win-
dows\. To override the default save location for the setup.iss file, use the /f1 option as shown below:
setup.exe /r /f1“c:\my_directory\setup.iss”
2. On the target computer, copy the setup.iss file to the same location as “setup.exe” and from the command line,
run:
setup.exe /s
The setup will continue in headless mode using the same options as specified in step 1. Should the installation com-
plete successfully, a “etup.log” file will have been created in the same directory as “setup.exe” that contains the line
“ResultCode=0”
 Femap Product Excellence Program 3-15

As with the recording step, an alternate location may be specified for the response file using the /f1 option. Addi-
tionally, the /f2 option may also be used to specify an alternate log file location.
Note that any additional command line parameters that are specified when recording that affect the installation
(such as the /z or /v command options) will also be specified during playback. Likewise, additional command line
parameters that affect the installation that are specified during playback must have been specified during the initial
record.
Performing a silent uninstallation
To perform a silent uninstallation, simply add the /x parameter. Otherwise, the process is the same as performing a
silent installation.
Record uninstall: setup.exe /x /r
Playback uninstall: setup.exe /x /s
Additional information on InstallShield command line parameters can be found here:
https://helpnet.flexerasoftware.com/installshield22helplib/helplibrary/IHelpSetup_EXECmdLine.htm?

3.8 Femap Product Excellence Program

Privacy Statement
The Product Excellence Program helps Siemens Digital Industries Software understand how customers use our
products and assists us in improving our products. The program is anonymous and participation is voluntary.
The Product Excellence Program is designed to protect the privacy of the user and the intellectual property created
through the use of Siemens Digital Industries Software products.
No proprietary or personally identifiable information is collected, This data is solely for the use of Siemens
Digital Industries Software to improve our products and is never shared with a third party.
How to manage participation
Participation settings may be found in FEMAP under the Help, Femap Product Excellence menu. Participation set-
tings are recorded on an individual user basis.
Examples of data NOT collected
This is not a comprehensive list of the type of data collected, but rather a broad example of the type of information
that is not collected. As previously stated, at no time is any proprietary or personally identifiable information col-
lected.
• No model data is collected, including, but not limited to: Material Properties; Properties; Nodal and elemental
attributes, such as locations or IDs
• No user-entered values are collected
• No results data is collected
• No preferences with character values, such as library names, are collected
• No directory structures are collected
• No user-identifiable information is collected
• No serial numbers are collected
There is no contact information in the data and Siemens Digital Industries Software will not contact you by phone
or email as a result of the data collected.
What data is collected?
Various usage metrics are gathered, ranging from machine information to individual command usage, in order to
provide quantitative data that will be used to determine future FEMAP enhancements and new functionality. Quan-
titative analytics data are intended to complement qualitative data (such as enhancement requests, user engagement
events, etc) used for development planning purposes and not intended to supplant it.
 3-16 Getting Started

This table lists examples of Data that will be collected and how FEMAP Development plans to use the information:

Data Collected How That Information is Used

Machine Information
• CPU, RAM GPU
By having a better understanding of the type of hardware used in
• Operating System version
the field, FEMAP can be optimized for the majority of hardware
• Graphics information including
configurations. Additionally, determining the adoption of new
resolution
technologies, such as touch, can prioritize support.
• Number of monitors, touch points,
stylus, etc
Program-Specific Information Version usage and license type (no serial numbers) gives us
• FEMAP Version insight into how FEMAP is deployed, including adoption rate.
• License Type (no serial numbers) This can help determine optimal release timing and release
cadence.
User Preferences User preferences will provide data about the most popular settings
and/or the most changed settings. This data can be used to update
preference defaults and improve the out-of-box experience.

Note: No preference data containing any character values (i.e,

directories or filenames) are collected.
Command History Command history provides insights into which are our most-used
and least-used commands, as well as which ones are undone most
frequently. This can help allocate development resources as well
as place emphasis on areas requiring additional user training
Pane and Toolbox Usage How are panes and toolboxes used, and how are they used when
duplicate menu functionality exists
Geometry Translators Used Determine which geometry translators are the most frequently
used in FEMAP. This can help determine which translators may
require additional development resources for functionality such as
geometry manipulation and cleanup.
Analysis Translators Used
Determine which solvers and solutions are most frequently used
• Solver
by FEMAP users and help direct development resources.
• Solution Sequences
Neutral File Writes Neutral writes provide information on how often neutral files are
used to transfer model data between versions. This data can be
used to enhance inter-version interoperability.

Future Disclosure
Future releases of FEMAP will include information in the documentation about how data from the Femap Product
Excellence program was used to help shape product direction and improve the user experience

3.9 Release Management and Service Bulletins

Important information regarding current and future releases of FEMAP is often distributed electronically by Sie-
mens PLM Software. To subscribe to the various mailing lists, please use the following link:
https://www.plm.automation.siemens.com/en_us/support/gtac/email-subscription.shtml
4. User Interface

This section describes the FEMAP user interface. It is divided into four major sections:
• The first section describes the overall graphical interface, as well as its relationship to FEMAP.
• The second section involves accessing commands in FEMAP. There are eight major methods of accessing com-
mands: Main menu, Toolbars (Standard and Custom), Quick Access menu (right-mouse button in graphics win-
dow when Select Toolbar is not active), Shortcut keys, Status bar, The Select Toolbar (alternative gateway to
many useful commands), Context Sensitive menus, and Dockable Pane icons.
• The third section describes common dialog boxes in FEMAP.
• The fourth section provides information on the FEMAP workplane and other tools.

4.1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the graphical user interface for FEMAP. Explanations of FEMAP’s connec-
tions with Windows, as well as a general overview of the Windows which comprise the graphical user interface are
provided. This section is divided into a brief description of the overall FEMAP interface, the FEMAP main win-
dow, the FEMAP Messages window, and the FEMAP Graphics window.

4.1.1 The FEMAP/Windows Team

FEMAP is a true Windows program. Therefore, if you have any experience running a Windows program, you will
understand the FEMAP format. Careful implementation of Windows standards makes learning to use multiple
Windows applications much easier since there are many similarities in the user interface.
The other distinct advantage of being a true Windows program is you can easily export information directly from
FEMAP to other Windows programs. This is extremely useful when generating reports with graphical information
such as color contours. You can simply use a File, Picture, Copy to generate a Metafile copy on the clipboard, and
use an Edit, Paste Special in such programs as Microsoft Word to paste the picture into a Word document. You can
then even scale this picture in Word since it is contained in Metafile format. Similarly, you can copy information
from the FEMAP Messages windows to such programs as EXCEL for further manipulation of data.

4.1.2 The FEMAP Windows

The two most basic visible parts of any Windows application are its window and the dialog boxes that it uses for
input. Dialog boxes are typically only displayed when input is required, and then disappear. Conversely, windows
usually remain visible, sometimes even floating or docked into position, to present text or graphical information
until you decide to close, hide, or destroy them.
FEMAP uses three distinct types of windows: the FEMAP Main window (also referred to often as the Interface or
Application window), multiple “tabbed” Graphics windows, and other “dockable pane” windows. The dockable
panes include the Messages window, Entity Editor, Data Table, and Model Info tree. Other specialty FEMAP fea-
tures appear in dockable panes such the Stress Wizard and the Analysis Monitor.
The figure below notes the location of the all three window types, some of the dockable panes in optional configu-
rations, as well as other features inside of these windows. A description of each of these window types is provided.

Note: No toolbars are show in this view to make it easier to view the different types and configurations of
FEMAP windows. Standard and Custom Toolbars will be covered later in this section.
 4-2 User Interface

FEMAP Main Menu FEMAP Title Bar

The FEMAP Main Window is pictured.

Named Tab for graphics windows

Docked and Tabbed (Retracted) dockable pane

FEMAP Graphics Window

Tabs for Stacked dockable panes

Floating dockable pane

FEMAP Status and Tray bar

Current Model Status (FEMAP Menu Help when in command) FEMAP Trays

4.1.2.1 The FEMAP Main Window

The FEMAP main window is the “parent” or “application window” for FEMAP. When you begin FEMAP, this
window will occupy your entire screen. It can be resized and moved using the standard Windows methods, but it
cannot be closed or destroyed (unless you exit FEMAP).
The main window defines the “FEMAP Desktop”, the portion of the screen that will be used by starting FEMAP.
Although you can manually move FEMAP's other windows outside of the boundaries of the main window, their
default sizing and position will always be inside this window. Similarly, if you minimize this window turning it into
an icon, all other FEMAP windows (Graphics and Dockable Panes) will disappear. They will automatically reap-
pear when the icon is restored to its original form or maximized to full screen.
The most important function of the FEMAP main window is to provide you with easy access to the many powerful
tools in FEMAP. It provides access through several methods, including the FEMAP main menu, toolbars (Standard
and Custom), the dockable panes, and trays on the Status bar at the bottom right portion of the main window. Each
of these areas will be discussed in more detail in Section 4.2, "Accessing FEMAP Commands".
In addition to command access, the main window also serves to identify the model currently active, as well as pro-
vide status and help information. The FEMAP title bar at the top of the window will show the name of the model
which is currently active. When multiple models are open, the FEMAP title bar will display the name of the active
model and the active view in the following manner, Model Name.MOD : View Name.
 The FEMAP Main Window 4-3

Each window in the main FEMAP graphics area has a named “Tab”. By right
mouse clicking this tab, several options are available. Create/Manage will bring
up the View Manager dialog box. New will open up a new view, while Close will
close down the active view. Tab Location allows you to choose from 4 different
locations for the tab (Top, Right, Bottom, or Left). Show Full Path will show the
full path to the directory where the active model is currently located on the tab.
Toggle Tabs allows you to toggle the tabs on and off and Toggle Title Bars turns
the title bars on and off, when they are visible. Clicking the “X” next to the title of
the view in the tab will close the view.
The Status bar at the bottom of the FEMAP main window has several functions.
When performing commands that require more than a few seconds, such as
importing a large amount of analysis results, the Status bar will demonstrate the percentage completed. This pro-
vides feedback that FEMAP is still importing the file, and is still active. When not performing commands, the Sta-
tus bar will serve as the menu Help location and contain trays which allow you to access FEMAP commands to
activate a specific property, load set, constraint set, group, and output set.
To use menu Help, simply move your cursor to
a menu or toolbar command. A brief descrip-
tion of the command will be provided in the
Status bar location. If you maintain the cursor
above one of the toolbar commands, you will
also see the command name appear next to the
cursor in a “Tooltip”. This is in addition to the
description in the Status bar location.
You also have control over whether any num-
ber of toolbars (Standard and Custom) and
dockable panes are displayed inside the main
FEMAP interface.
Each toolbar can be made visible or hidden
using the Tools, Toolbars... menu, then choos-
ing a particular toolbar from the list. When the
toolbar is visible, it will have a check mark
next to the toolbar name on the menu. By
default, when a toolbar is made visible for the
first time, it will be placed (“docked”) at the
top of the FEMAP interface and below the
main menu as a starting position. Any toolbar
can be moved around the edge in the FEMAP
interface and remain docked in the “Toolbar
Docking Areas” or be “peeled” (clicked and
dragged) away from a Toolbar Docking Area
to “float” inside the FEMAP interface.

Note: The Toolbar Docking Areas refer to

the areas around the edge of any
FEMAP Graphics windows and all
open or retracted Dockable Panes in
the FEMAP interface. This means
you can place the toolbars above,
below, to the left, or to the right of
the Graphics windows and Dock-
able Panes.

FEMAP contains “Dockable Panes” that offer different tools used to create and modify models, as well as, evaluate
and sort data, create reports, and view specific entities. Each dockable pane can be either visible or hidden by
selecting the specific dockable pane from the Tools... menu. The dockable panes are not active when hidden, so
they must be made visible for use. When visible, the dockable panes can appear in one of three states: Docked,
 4-4 User Interface

Docked with a Tab (pane is retracted until fly-out), or Floating. There are specific positions dockable panes can be
docked inside the interface and these positions are marked with Docking Position Indicators which only appear
when the pane is being moved around the interface. A docked pane can be retracted, in which case it will appear as
a “Named Tab” around the edge of the interface or “peeled” off to float in the interface, much like the toolbars.
Both the toolbars and dockable panes are explained in much greater detail below.
The Status Bar can also be made visible or hidden using the Tools, Status Bar command.
4.1.2.2 FEMAP Dockable Panes
FEMAP contains several “Dockable Panes” that offer different tools used to create and modify models, evaluate
and sort data, create reports, and view info of specific entities. There are others which allow creation of customized
features by recording macros or creating advanced programming routines by directly accessing the FEMAP data-
base using the FEMAP API (Applications Programming Interface). Visibility of each dockable pane is controlled
by the Tools... menu command corresponding to the specific dockable pane and must be visible to function.
The Dockable Panes are each individually documented in the FEMAP
Commands manual. They are:
•Model Info: See Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info"
•Meshing Toolbox: See Section 7.2.2, "Tools, Meshing Toolbox"
•PostProcessing Toolbox: See Section 7.2.3, "Tools, PostProcessing
Toolbox"
•Charting: See Section 7.2.4, "Tools, Charting"
•Entity Editor: See Section 7.2.5, "Tools, Entity Editor"
•Data Surface Editor: See Section 7.2.6, "Tools, Data Surface Editor"
•Function/Table Editor: See Section 7.2.7, "Tools, Function/Table
Editor"
•Mesh Point Editor: See Section 7.2.8, "Tools, Mesh Point Editor"
•Connection Editor: See Section 7.2.9, "Tools, Connection Editor"
•Entity Info: See Section 7.2.10, "Tools, Entity Info"
•Data Table: See Section 7.2.11, "Tools, Data Table"
•Programming, API Programming: See Section 7.2.12, "Tools, Pro-
gramming, API Programming"
•Programming, Program File: See Section 7.2.13, "Tools, Program-
ming, Program File"
•Other Windows, Messages: See Section 7.2.14, "Tools, Other Win-
dows, Messages"
•Other Windows, Status Bar: See Section 7.2.15, "Tools, Other Win-
dows, Status Bar"
When visible, the dockable panes can be in one of three states:
Docked, Docked with a Tabbed (pane is retracted until “fly-out”), or
Floating. For help with TMG Thermal/Flow Analysis, use Help, TMG
Thermal and Flow. For Structural Analysis Toolkit use the Help menu in the add-in.
Docked dockable panes
When a dockable pane is docked, it resides around the edge of any FEMAP graphics windows and inside of any
docked toolbars or “docked and tabbed” (retracted) dockable panes. There are a number of different “docking posi-
tions” and “docking methods” available to “dock” a dockable pane. A dockable pane can be dragged on to any of
the “docking position indicators” (arrow-like icons located within the FEMAP interface, only visible when a dock-
able pane is being moved) and, once there, dropped into a predetermined “docking position”. This allows place-
ment of dockable panes above, below, to the left, or to the right of the graphics windows. The size of any of the
dockable panes can be updated by placing the cursor on the border of any pane until the “typical windows double-
sided resizing arrow” appears, then dragging it until it reaches the desired size.
 FEMAP Dockable Panes 4-5

You can “stack” the dockable panes on top of one another by dragging one pane onto the “stacked” docking posi-
tion indicator inside another dockable pane. Once stacked, you can toggle between different “stacked” dockable
panes by clicking on the titled tab of a specific dockable pane. When “stacked”, the dockable pane which was used
last will remain visible until the tab of another “stacked” dockable pane is clicked, the active dockable pane is
“peeled” off to become a floating dockable pane, or docked into a different position.
“Docked and Tabbed” (Retracted) dockable panes
In order to have a dockable pane become “docked and tabbed”, toggle the push pin icon on the title bar of a specific
pane (the “pin” icon will appear to be “pulled out” of the screen). The pane will now appear as a titled tab on the
top, bottom, left, or right (based on the pane’s docked position) of all open graphics windows and other dockable
panes. If the push pin is “pulled out” on a “stacked” set of dockable panes, they will appear as a “stacked” set of
tabs, with only the most recently used pane showing the title and the other panes only showing an identifying icon.
“Docked and Tabbed” (Retracted) Dockable Panes can be located on the top, bottom, left, or right of the FEMAP
interface. These panes remain retracted until you place the cursor over them, at which point they will “fly out” to a
certain size (fly-out size depends on which of the dockable pane is flying out). Once the dockable pane has “flown-
out” it can be used, resized, and adjusted just as it would if it was simply docked or floating. You can continue to
use the “flown-out” pane until you move the cursor off the pane and onto any visible graphics window, when it will
“retract” back to a “tabbed” state. A “docked and tabbed” pane can become simply “docked” again by toggling the
push pin icon on the title bar (the “pin” icon will now appear to be “pushed into” the screen).
Floating dockable panes
When a dockable pane is “peeled” (clicked and dragged) from a docked position and dropped anywhere on the
screen other than a “docking position indicator”, it becomes a “Floating Dockable Pane”. A Floating dockable pane
can be positioned anywhere on the desktop during an open FEMAP session. You can return a floating toolbar to a
docked position by dragging it onto a docking position indicator or by double clicking the Title bar of a floating
dockable pane. A floating pane can be closed by clicking the “X” in the Title bar in the upper right hand corner.

Push Pin Icon

Docked and Tabbed (Retracted) Dockable Pane

Floating Dockable Pane

Stacked Dockable Panes
(Retracted State)

Tabs for Stacked

Dockable Panes
 4-6 User Interface

Outside All Open Graphics Windows and Open

Dockable Panes - Docking Position Indicators

Outside Graphics Windows Only

Docking Position Indicators

Docking Position Indicators

The docking position indicators appear when a dockable pane is being “dragged” around the FEMAP interface.
The direction the arrow is pointing represents which side of the other open windows (graphics window and/or
dockable panes) that a dockable pane will be docked. In order to get the window to the correct docked position, you
must drag the dockable pane until the cursor is over the appropriate docking position indicator. Once the cursor is
over an indicator, a preview “shadow” will appear representing the position where the dockable pane will be placed
when the mouse button is let go.

Stacked Dockable Panes

Docking Position Indicator

There are three different sets of docking position indicators:

 The FEMAP Tabbed Graphics Windows 4-7

The “Outside All Open Graphics Windows and Open Dockable Panes” set appears every time you begin dragging
a dockable pane. This allows you to dock the panes above, below, to the left, or to the right of all graphics windows
and open dockable panes.
One of the other two sets of docking position indicators will also appear depending on where you have the cursor
positioned inside the FEMAP interface. If you have the cursor over the graphics window, the “Outside Graphics
Windows Only” docking position indicators will appear. If you have the cursor over another dockable pane, the
“Stacked Dockable Panes” set of indicators will appear.

Note: A floating dockable pane can only be changed into a “docked and tabbed” pane by first docking it into
position to make it a simply “docked” pane AND then toggling the push pin icon in the title bar. Vice
versa, a “docked and tabbed” pane can only be changed into a floating pane by first toggling the push
pin (to pushed-in status) to dock the pane, then drag it out

4.1.2.3 The FEMAP Tabbed Graphics Windows

The last type of window used by FEMAP is the Tabbed Graphics window. Just like the main window and the active
Dockable Panes, one Graphics window is automatically created when you start FEMAP. By default, it will cover
the area of the main window which is not occupied by the “docked” dockable panes and toolbars. Unlike the other
windows, you can create multiple graphics windows (Window, New Window command) if you want to see multiple
views of one or multiple models in FEMAP.
At the top of each view, there will be a solid color Tab which will show the name of that view. When multiple mod-
els are open, the tab will give the Model name and view name in the following format: Model Name.MOD : View
Name. If you would like to turn the tabs off and on you can use the Window, Toggle Tabs command or right mouse
click on the tab and select Toggle Tabs.

When you right mouse click on a Tab you will also find options to set the active view, create a new view, close the
view, change the tab location (Top, Right, Bottom, or Left) or color, show the “Full Path” to the directory where the
model is currently being stored, and toggle the title bar (when title bar is visible). Clicking the “X” next to the title
of the view in the tab will close the view.
The FEMAP View and Window menu commands control all aspects of graphics windows. There is a one-to-one
correspondence between the FEMAP views and the graphics windows. Every graphics window has its own unique
FEMAP view, which is stored with your model. When a graphics window is originally created using the Window,
New Window command, a FEMAP view is created in the model database. When that window is closed, the view
remains in your database (unless you use the Delete, View command). To open one window at a time you simply
use the View, Create/Manage command and select the desired view. The window will reappear in its former size
and position, using the same options as when it was last displayed, while closing the view that was previously
active.
If you would like to turn on many closed views at the same time, use the Window, New Window command. Choose
Load Views in the View Definition section of the New Window dialog box and then select the desired views from
the list of current views. To select multiple views one at a time, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting or to select
a range of views hold down the Shift key and highlight the first view and a last view.
 4-8 User Interface

Just like the Messages window, the contents of graphics windows can be exported to a file, or to other Windows
applications. For graphics windows, however, you must use the File, Picture, Save... or File, Picture, Copy... com-
mands.
Sizing the Graphics Windows
Also like the dockable panes, there are several ways to size the graphics windows including grabbing the border,
pressing maximize, the Window, Tile Horizontal, Window, Tile Vertical, or Window, Cascade commands.

4.2 Accessing FEMAP Commands

As mentioned in the FEMAP main window description, there are several ways of accessing FEMAP commands.
Most of these are contained on the main window, such as the main menu, toolbars, and Status bar. There are several
other methods as well, including using the right mouse button, as well as keyboard input. There are eight basic
methods of accessing FEMAP commands.
• Main menu - See Section 4.2.1, "FEMAP Main Menu"
• Toolbars (Standard and Custom) - See Section 4.2.2, "FEMAP Toolbars"
• Quick Access menu (right-mouse button in graphics window when Select Toolbar is not active) - See Section
4.2.3, "Quick Access Menu (Right Mouse Button)"
• Shortcut keys - See Section 4.2.4, "Shortcut Keys"
• Status bar - Section 4.2.5, "Status Bar"
• The Select Toolbar (alternative gateway to many useful commands) - See Section 4.2.6, "The Select Toolbar"
• Context Sensitive menus - Section 4.2.7, "Context Sensitive Menus"
• Dockable Pane icons - Section 4.2.8, "Dockable Pane Icons"
 FEMAP Main Menu 4-9

4.2.1 FEMAP Main Menu

At the top of the main window, under the Title bar, is the FEMAP menu. This menu provides access to all of the
available commands. You can execute these commands through any of the standard Windows methods - picking
with the cursor/mouse, pressing Alt and one of the underlined letters or the direction keys, or by using one of the
shortcut/accelerator keys shown to the right side of the menu.
Often, some commands on the menu are displayed in gray. These commands are temporarily disabled. For exam-
ple, the List, Nodes command is disabled if you do not have any nodes in your model to list. Disabled commands
will automatically enable themselves when the data they need is available in your model.
All of the commands shown on the menu bar (at the top of the main window) cause another menu to “drop-down”
to display additional commands. You will notice that some of the commands on this drop-down menu have a small
arrow on the right side of the menu. Selecting one of these commands will display a third menu level. The FEMAP
main menu never goes below this third level, and many commands are at the second level. This minimizes the time
and effort involved in selecting commands. Each command is documented in the FEMAP Commands. This manual
will concentrate more on the general use of FEMAP.

4.2.2 FEMAP Toolbars

FEMAP has many useful toolbars that help you perform a variety of different functions. The toolbars contain icons
representing certain commands and are grouped together by functionality. Each toolbar can be made visible or hid-
den using the Tools, Toolbars... command, then choosing a particular toolbar from the list. When the toolbar is vis-
ible, it will have a check mark next to the toolbar name on the menu. By default, each toolbar will be placed
(“docked”) at the top of the FEMAP interface and below the main menu as a starting position.
Once the toolbars are visible, they can either be “docked” around the edge of the FEMAP interface or “floating”
somewhere inside the FEMAP interface. By default, when a toolbar is made visible for the first time, it will be
docked, but is can be “peeled” (clicked and dragged) away from the edge of the FEMAP interface and become a
floating toolbar. Aside from having a docked or floating toolbar, there are several other options, which are
explained here.
4.2.2.1 Toolbar Types
Docked toolbars
When a toolbar is docked, it resides around the edge of any FEMAP graphics windows and all open or retracted
“Dockable Panes” (Entity Editor, Model Info, Data Table, or Messages windows) of the FEMAP interface. This
area is referred to as the “Toolbar Docking Area”. A toolbar can be dragged anywhere inside the Toolbar Docking
Area and still remain docked. This means you can place the toolbars above, below, to the left, or to the right of the
graphics windows and Dockable Panes. Also, any toolbar can be “stacked” above or below horizontal toolbars or to
the left or right of vertical toolbars. Docked toolbars can be shifted around as well to create a user-defined configu-
ration.
Floating toolbars
When a toolbar is “peeled” (clicked and dragged) off the edge of the FEMAP interface and placed on top of the
graphics window or dockable panes, it is now a floating toolbar. A floating toolbar can be positioned anywhere you
would like to put it within the limits of an open FEMAP session. You can return a floating toolbar to a docked posi-
tion by dragging it back onto the edge of the FEMAP interface or by double clicking the Title bar of a floating tool-
bar. A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking the “X” in the title bar in the upper right hand corner. If reopened,
the floating toolbar will appear in the last position it was in before being closed.
A floating toolbar can be also “reshaped” to better fit your modeling needs. To reshape a floating toolbar, place the
cursor over the edge of a toolbar (you will see a two-headed resizing arrow common to many windows programs),
click the mouse, and drag the toolbar into the desired rectangular shape. When a “reshaped” floating toolbar is
docked, it will return to the original shape while docked. If it is later undocked (or reopened), it will appear in the
“reshaped” configuration.
 4-10 User Interface

The following figure shows some sample positions you can place docked and floating toolbars. (It also shows
dockable panes in both docked and retracted states)

Stacked Toolbars
Top

Customize Triangle (Floating)

Customize Triangle (Docked)

Reshaped Floating Toolbar

Floating Toolbars

Left

Right

Bottom

Note: The toolbars can be turned on and off more than one place. The most obvious way to turn them off is
through the Tools, Toolbars, ... command. A second way to turn them on and off is by clicking the right
mouse button anywhere in the “Toolbar Docking Area” around the edge of the FEMAP interface, which
will bring up a menu of toolbars to switch on and off one at a time. The third way to turn the toolbars on
and off is by clicking the right mouse button on the title bar of a floating toolbar. Finally, the last place
to turn them on and off is when using the “Customize” menu available on all the toolbars and described
in greater detail in the “Customizing toolbars” section.
 Customizing toolbars 4-11

4.2.2.2 Customizing toolbars

FEMAP gives you the ability to customize the toolbars in several different ways.
The simplest form of customization available on the toolbars is repositioning the currently visible icons on the tool-
bars which are currently open. In order to reposition an icon to a new position, hold the “Alt” key down, left mouse
click the icon you would like to move, then drag it to a new position on either the icon’s original toolbar or any
other open toolbar. Let the mouse button go and the icon will be dropped into the new position. You can also use
this process to remove icons from a toolbar by dragging a chosen icon to a place on the screen with no toolbars and
then dropping it there. A small “x” will appear next to “dragged” icon when it is in a position where it can be
dropped and removed.
All other customization begins by clicking on the small triangle (“Customize” triangle) that is on every visible tool-
bar (the triangle appears in a different place depending on whether the toolbar is docked or floating). When the
“Customize” triangle is clicked, a menu will drop down which says “Add or Remove Buttons”. When the “Add or
Remove Buttons” menu is highlighted, it will bring up a second level menu with two options; Add/Remove from
any of the toolbars currently in the same toolbar “row” or “Customize”.

Customize Triangle
Add/Remove List
Add/Remove Option

Add or Remove Buttons Menu

Customize option (Opens

Customize Dialog Box)

Reset command (restores defaults)

Add/Remove option
The add/remove option will show the name of the toolbars currently in the same row, which when highlighted will
bring up another menu level which allows you to individually turn existing icons on or off (You can turn multiple
icons on or off while the menu is open and the toolbar will dynamically change). When the icon and command
name have a check mark next to them, the icon is visible on the toolbar. To restore the default settings for a toolbar,
choose Reset at the bottom of the menu.
Customize... option
The Customize... option will bring up the Customize dialog box when clicked. Once open, this dialog box contains
five different tabs which represent various methods to customize your toolbars. Also, while the Customize dialog
box is open, you can right mouse click on any icon in any visible toolbar and a “Customize Icon” menu will appear.
We will discuss the Customize dialog box and Customize Icon menu in greater detail below.
Customize Dialog Box
...The Customize dialog box is broken into five different sections: Toolbars, Commands, Keyboard, User Com-
mands, and Options. Each of these sections pertains to a specific area of toolbar customization. There is a tab for
each heading that can be clicked to bring up the specific options for each section.
4-12 User Interface

Toolbars
...Allows you to turn toolbars on and off by clicking the check box next to the toolbar name. This allows you to turn
multiple toolbars on and off while in the same command.
As each toolbar is checked or unchecked, it will appear or disappear in the FEMAP interface. This tab also allows
you to create new, personalized toolbars by pressing the New button. FEMAP will prompt you to give the new tool-
bar a name and will bring up a “blank” toolbar in the FEMAP interface. You can then add icons for exiting com-
mands or user commands to the new toolbar. “Personalized” toolbars can be renamed at any time using the Rename
button or deleted using the Delete button. Using the Reset button will reset the toolbar currently highlighted in the
list to the default configuration.
 Customizing toolbars 4-13

Commands
...The Commands tab contains all the commands available in FEMAP through the Main Menu structure. Choose
the type of command you are looking for from the Categories list, then locate the specific command in the Com-
mands list. Once the specific command is located, click and hold the left mouse button to “grab” the command.
Now you can drag the “grabbed” command onto a visible toolbar and place it on that toolbar. Along with the com-
mands available through the Main Menu structure, categories such as “Additional Commands” and “View Popup”
allow access to specific view options and “right mouse menu” selections. You may also add an entire existing
FEMAP menu to a toolbar using the “Built-in Menus” category or create a new menu of existing and user com-
mands by dragging the New Menu command onto a toolbar and then filling the blank menu with commands. Any
user commands will show up in the “User Commands” category. Any combination of icons and commands can be
put together on a “personalized” toolbar.

Many commands have icons which do not appear on any existing standard toolbar. These icons are in FEMAP spe-
cifically so you can add commands to existing toolbars and create your own “personalized” toolbars.
An example of a “personalized” toolbar can be seen in the next figure. Notice that there is a “New Menu” contain-
ing a few existing commands from different menus and toolbars that appear on a drop-down menu. Also included
on this Custom toolbar are the Visibility icon from the “View” category, View Regenerate All command from the
“Additional Commands” category, the Snap to Point and Snap to Node icons from the “View Popup” category, the
entire Mesh menu from the “Built-in Menus” category, and Spider (a user command) from the “User Commands”
category.
4-14 User Interface

Keyboard
This option allows you to define letter keys in FEMAP as FEMAP commands. You can also assign currently
unused function keys and keyboard combinations (i.e., CTRL, SHIFT, ALT + letter or function keys) as FEMAP
commands as well.
You can therefore quickly customize FEMAP to use letter and function keystrokes, as well as keyboard combina-
tions, as your most often used FEMAP commands.

This option allows you to define any of the keys on your keyboard and keyboard combinations as FEMAP com-
mands, thereby enabling you to define many different shortcut keys.
To define a shortcut key, first choose the Category from the drop down list, then highlight the command from the
Commands list. After the command is highlighted, click in the “Press new shortcut key:” field and press a key or
keyboard combination. Once you have chosen the correct key or keyboard combination, click the Assign button.

If the key or keyboard combination has already been defined, FEMAP will let you know and bring up a dialog box
stating “This shortcut is currently assigned. Do you want to re-assign this shortcut?” By clicking the Yes button, the
key or keyboard combination will be added to the “Key assignments:” list and REMOVED from the command that
was previously using that shortcut key or keyboard combination. Clicking the No button allows you to select an
unused shortcut key or keyboard combination and leaves all other shortcut keys unchanged.
 Customizing toolbars 4-15

Shortcut keys can be saved by clicking the Save All button. FEMAP will prompt you to create a “Keyboard Short-
cut File” (*.KEY file). This file will contain all of the keyboard shortcuts you have currently set in FEMAP. You
can then click the Load button to load a *.KEY file and your shortcuts will be restored. For FEMAP versions 9.3
and above, you can load a *.KEY file from the previous version and quickly customize the new version.
Shortcut keys can be manually removed by highlighting a key or keyboard combination from the “Key Assign-
ments:” list and then clicking the Remove button. The Reset All button will return all shortcut keys to their default
commands.
Defining shortcut keys for your most used commands, you can save time moving through the FEMAP menu struc-
ture. Shortcut keys are only available from the FEMAP menu level. If you are already in another command or dia-
log box, pressing these keys will not have the desired effect. In most cases, it will simply result in typing the letter
which was pressed.

Hint: If you are typing in the Messages window, anytime you type a shortcut key, the command will be
invoked.

User Commands
...The User Commands tab allows you to create command names for user commands created using the FEMAP
Applications Programming Interface (API).

In order to locate a file to be used as a program, you can browse through windows directories using the “...” browse
button next to the Program field. Choose the file to be used as the “program” file, click OK, and then the entire
directory path will be shown in the Program field. There are several different files which can be used as a “Pro-
gram” files including Executable (*.exe), Command (*.com), Information (*.pif), and Batch (*.bat, *.cmd) files
Once the file for the actual command has been located, the command must be given a unique Command Name.
After the command has been given a name, click the Add button to place it into the list of User Commands.
If you would like to change the name or directory path of a User Command, highlight it in the list, make any modi-
fications, then click the Update button to confirm the change. To remove a User Command from the list, highlight
it, then click the Remove button.
4-16 User Interface

Along with the “Program” file itself, you may optionally enter other necessary files and command line entries into
the Arguments field. In addition, if any program file needs to use an external directory, the path to that directory can
be entered into the Initial Directory field.
Once the commands and are added to the User commands list, they will appear in the “User Commands” category
in both the Commands and Keyboard sections of the Customize dialog box. User commands can now be added to
existing toolbars or “Personalized” toolbars using the methods described in the Toolbars and Commands sections.
Options
....Allows you to select options to make the toolbars more useful. At the current time, the “Personalized Menus and
Toolbars” options in the Options tab have no effect on any existing or custom FEMAP menus or toolbars. These
options will be available in future versions.

To make the icons on all the toolbars larger, select the “Large icons” option.
By default, the “Show ScreenTips on toolbars” option is on, you can uncheck the box to turn the ScreenTips off. If
you would like the ScreenTips to also show all associated shortcut keys, use the “Show shortcut keys in Screen-
Tips” option.
You can select the style of how the menus drop-down by selecting a style from the drop-down “Menu animations”
list. The options are (System default), Unfold, Slide, Fade, or None for a particular style or choose Random, for a
different “drop down” style each time.
You can turn off all of the icons in the menus using the Turn Off Menu Icons button.
 Customizing toolbars 4-17

Customize Icon menu

...The Customize Icon Menu is available only when the Customize dialog box is open. In order to use the com-
mands on the Customize Icon Menu, right mouse click any icon on any visible toolbar. Only the icon that you
selected will be altered by the commands on the Customize Icon Menu. This menu contains commands used to
delete icons from a toolbar, reset the default icon, and change the name of an icon. It also allows you to copy, paste,
reset, edit, or change the button image of an icon. Along with these functions, icon style can be selected, and icons
can be separated into “groups” on toolbars using partitions.

A brief description of the commands on the Customize Icon Menu:

• Reset - Resets all icon options (name, button image, style, group) to default values.
• Delete - Removes icon from the toolbar it is currently on. If the icon appears on multiple toolbars, it will only
be deleted from the toolbar that you initially right mouse clicked to open the Customize Icon Menu.
• Name - Allows you to change the name of an icon. This name will appear on the toolbar when the Icon style is
set to Text Only or Image and Text
• Copy Button Image - Copies the button image to the clipboard.
• Paste Button Image - Once an icon image is on the clipboard, it can be pasted onto to another icon to replace
that icon’s current image.
• Reset Button Image - Resets the button image to the default button image.
4-18 User Interface

• Edit Button Image - Brings up the Button Editor dialog boxIn this dialog box, there are many tools to alter the
appearance of a button image.

Button Image size is limited to a 16 X 16 square “picture”.The existing picture can be modified by changing the
colors or moving the image, a new picture can be drawn, a copied button image can be pasted in, or a picture from
a file can be imported. Any combination of these methods can be used to create custom icons. There is a preview
window that dynamically changes as you modify the icon and Undo and Redo tools to help modification. Once the
image is finished, it can be copied to the clipboard as well.

Note: Any imported image will be reduced to a 16 X 16 pixel resolution image, so be sure to inspect all
imported images to make sure they still resemble the image after the resolution reduction

• Change Button Image - Allows you to choose a button image from a set of 110 images provided by FEMAP.
• Default Style - Resets the icon style to the default setting. (Usually Button Image only)
• Text Only - Shows Icon Name only (no Button Image)
• Image and Text - Shows both the Button Image and the Icon Name together. (View Orient toolbar default)
• Begin a Group - When checked, creates toolbar partition line to the left (horizontal toolbars) or above (vertical
toolbars) the icon being customized.
 Customizing toolbars 4-19

Standard toolbars
There are 23 “standard” toolbars that can be made visible from the Tools, Toolbars... command. The Standard
Toolbars are listed below. For more information, see the referenced section of the FEMAP Commands Manual
Model Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.1, "Tools, Toolbars, Model"
View Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.2, "Tools, Toolbars, View"
View - Simple Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.3, "Tools, Toolbars, View - Simple"
View Orient Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.4, "Tools, Toolbars, View Orient"
Entity Display Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.5, "Tools, Toolbars, Entity Display"
Select Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.6, "Tools, Toolbars, Select"
Draw/Erase - Section 7.3.1.7, "Tools, Toolbars, Draw/Erase"
Cursor Position Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.8, "Tools, Toolbars, Cursor Position"
Panes Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.9, "Tools, Toolbars, Panes"
Format Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.10, "Tools, Toolbars, Format"
Solids Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.11, "Tools, Toolbars, Solids"
Surfaces Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.12, "Tools, Toolbars, Surfaces"
Lines Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.13, "Tools, Toolbars, Lines"
Circles Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.14, "Tools, Toolbars, Circles"
Splines Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.15, "Tools, Toolbars, Splines"
Curves On Surfaces Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.16, "Tools, Toolbars, Curves On Surfaces"
Curve Edit Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.17, "Tools, Toolbars, Curve Edit"
Mesh Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.18, "Tools, Toolbars, Mesh"
Loads Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.19, "Tools, Toolbars, Loads"
Constraints Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.20, "Tools, Toolbars, Constraints"
Post Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.21, "Tools, Toolbars, Post"
Custom and User Tools Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.22, "Tools, Toolbars, Custom and User Tools"
Aeroelasticity Toolbar - Section 7.3.1.23, "Tools, Toolbars, Aeroelasticity"
Some toolbar commands can be accessed at any time - even while you are in the middle of another command. Of
special note are all of the commands on the View Toolbar (Dynamic Rotate, Pan, Zoom, Model Style, View Select,
View Style, etc.) and the “Snap Modes” on the Select Toolbar. These commands allow you to dynamically orient
your model in the active view with just a few mouse clicks. These commands are very powerful for positioning
your model while in other commands and are most useful for graphical selection of your entities. Since they can be
accessed while in other commands, you can actually change orientations in the middle of the selection process to
obtain a better angle for picking the appropriate entities. Utilizing the Dynamic Rotate and other View Toolbar
commands can significantly reduce the time required to graphically select entities.

Note: View Toolbar commands are available at any time during FEMAP, even in the middle of another com-
mand. The only exception is that no View Toolbar commands are available if you are in any other View
command.
 4-20 User Interface

4.2.3 Quick Access Menu (Right Mouse Button)

The right mouse button provides another option to access certain FEMAP commands that are used often. Just like
the toolbars, these commands can be accessed while in other commands, or as their own command. Simply point
the cursor inside (not in the title bar or border) any graphics window, or inside the FEMAP main window, and press
the right mouse button. A small menu will appear on your screen at the cursor location. You can choose any of the
shortcut commands from this menu with either the keyboard or the left mouse button.

This shortcut menu will not appear when an entity type is active in the Select Toolbar. Instead, a context sensitive
menu will appear giving you quick access to frequently used commands related to the active entity type. If you
would like to override the context sensitive menus to display the Quick Access Menu while in the graphics win-
dow, hold down Alt, then click the Right Mouse Button. (For more information about the context sensitive menus
available with the Select Toolbar, see Section 7.3.1.6, "Tools, Toolbars, Select")
This shortcut menu also cannot be accessed if you have the cursor in any of the dockable panes. In fact, most of the
dockable panes have special context sensitive menus which will appear and perform functions specific to the dock-
able pane your cursor is currently inside. (For more information about the context sensitive menus available with
the in the dockable panes, see Section 7.2.14, "Tools, Other Windows, Messages", Section 7.2.11, "Tools, Data
Table", and Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info").

Note: Some commands below will be “grayed out” on the Quick Access menu at certain times. If a command is
not currently available, it will be grayed out and non-selectable. For instance, post data will be grayed if
you are in another command, and OK and Cancel will only be selectable when in a command.
 Quick Access Menu (Right Mouse Button) 4-21

The commands that are on the shortcut menu are described in the following table

Command Description
OK only available while you are in a command dialog box. It simply presses the dialog box
OK button.
Cancel only available while you are in a command dialog box. It simply presses the dialog box
Cancel button.
Previous Command only available when not in another command. It accesses the last menu command.
Stop API Tool only available when an API script is currently running. Stops the API script and dis-
plays information about what might happen to the model when stopping the API script.
Workplane... same as the Tools, Workplane command. It lets you redefine the location and orienta-
tion of the workplane
Show Tooltips when this mode is activated, a Tooltip note will pop up with useful information about
the entity which is currently highlighted. To toggle this option off, select it from the
menu again. It can also be turned on and off using the Selector Modes menu of the
Select Toolbar. (see Section 7.3.1.6, "Tools, Toolbars, Select" and Section 5.14.3.1,
"Show Tooltips" of the FEMAP User Guide)
Layers/Groups in when on, includes Layer and Group information in the Tooltip note.
Tooltips
Smart Snap snap to the nearest node, point, midpoint of a curve, or center point of an arc based on
proximity to cursor when specifying a coordinate location (always uses “Normal” pick
mode, even if “Query” or “Front” is selected as the pick mode)
Snap to Screen snap to the nearest screen location when specifying a coordinate location
Snap to Grid snap to the nearest grid location when specifying a coordinate location
Snap to Point snap to the nearest point when specifying a coordinate location
Snap to Node snap to the nearest node when specifying a coordinate location
Pick Normal selects normal picking where closest entity is selected
Pick Query selects all entities that are behind the cursor as you go through the depth of the model
and places them in a list located lower right corner.
Pick Front allows the selection of only the front most entity
Pick all Inside controls how entities are selected with a box pick. If checked, the entity must be com-
pletely inside the box. If unchecked, only a part of the entity must be inside the box.
Select This menu of options allows you to control which coordinates will be selected when
you use the graphics cursor to pick a location. This is the same as capability provided
with the Cursor Position dialog box.
Rotate View... accesses the View Center commands (see Section 6.2.1.4, "View, Rotate, Rotate About
View Center", Section 6.2.1.5, "View, Rotate, Rotate About Rotation Center...", Section
6.2.1.6, "View, Rotate, Rotate Around View Axes", Section 6.2.1.7, "View, Rotate,
Rotate Around Model Axes", Section 6.2.1.8, "View, Rotate, Rotate Around Coordinate
System...", Section 6.2.1.9, "View, Rotate, Rotate Around Vector...", Section 6.2.1.10,
"View, Rotate, Roll-Thru...", Section 6.2.1.11, "View, Rotate, Advanced Rotate...", Sec-
tion 6.2.1.12, "View, Rotate, Single Axis Rotation" in the FEMAP Commands manual
Equations... calls the Equation Editor. This is only available when you are working in a dialog box,
and in an edit or drop-down list control.
Visibility... calls the View, Visibility command. This one interface allows you to control the visibil-
ity of entity types and entity labels, groups, layers, loads and constraints, and elements
based on element type, element shape, or associated to materials or properties.
Post Data... allows you to choose the output set and vectors which are used for post-processing. This
is the same as the Deformed and Contour Data button which is available from the View
Select command. It is not available when no output exists or when you are already in
another command.

These commands are most useful in two circumstances. The first circumstance is to modify the Snap To setting
when coordinate input is required. If a node or point exists at the appropriate coordinate location, you can change to
Snap to Node or Snap to Point, select the node or point, and FEMAP will automatically use the position value as
 4-22 User Interface

the input coordinates. Smart Snap may also be useful, as it will automatically select the location of a node, a point,
the midpoint of a curve, or the center of a circular arc.
You could actually use the right mouse button to access the Workplane command, and then use the right mouse
button to change the Snap To setting when defining the coordinates of the plane. You could even use three different
methods to define the three different coordinate locations.
The other major advantage to the right mouse button is that it enables you to quickly access commands for viewing
your model that are several menu commands deep. For instance, the Visibility command allows you to change from
viewing the entire model to just viewing a group or multiple groups. If you are continuously changing the groups to
view, this could become tedious to use the command from the main menu or the View toolbar. Instead, you can sim-
ply press Visibility and change to the Group tab. Another shortcut is to use Post Data (Deformed and Contoured
Data under View Select) to access the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box.

4.2.4 Shortcut Keys

FEMAP has both certain keys defined as commands for quick implementation as well as providing you the capabil-
ity to define your own shortcut keys. Commands which can be accessed through standard shortcut keys have the
shortcut key listed next to their name. Some of the most commonly used shortcut keys include F5 for View Select,
F6 for View Options, and Ctrl+Q for View, Visibility. These shortcut keys enable you to access these commands
without going through the menu substructure.
In addition to the standard shortcut keys, FEMAP also allows you to define letter keys in FEMAP as FEMAP com-
mands. You can also assign currently unused function keys and keyboard combinations (i.e., CTRL, SHIFT, ALT +
letter or function keys) as FEMAP commands as well. You can therefore quickly customize FEMAP to use letter
and function keystrokes, as well as keyboard combinations, to represent your most often used FEMAP commands
To set up your own shortcut keys, click the “customize” triangle on any toolbar and choose the Customize... com-
mand or use the Tools, Toolbars, Customize... menu. In both cases, the Customize... command is at the bottom of
the menu. Once in Customize dialog box, choose the Keyboard tab.
To define a shortcut key, first choose the Category from the drop down list, then highlight the command from the
Commands list. After the command is highlighted, click in the “Press new shortcut key:” field and press a key or
keyboard combination. Once you have chosen the correct key or keyboard combination, click the Assign button.
If the key or keyboard combination has already been defined, FEMAP will let you know and bring up a dialog box
stating “This shortcut is currently assigned. Do you want to re-assign this shortcut?”

By clicking the Yes button, the key or keyboard combination will be added to the “Key assignments:” list and
REMOVED from the command that was previously using that shortcut key or keyboard combination. Clicking the
No button allows you to select an unused shortcut key or keyboard combination and leaves all other shortcut keys
unchanged.
Shortcut keys can be manually removed by highlighting a key or keyboard combination from the “Key Assign-
ments:” list, then click the Remove button. The Reset All button returns all shortcut keys to their default commands.
Defining shortcut keys for your most used commands, you can save time moving through the FEMAP menu struc-
ture. Shortcut keys are only available from the FEMAP menu level. If you are already in another command or dia-
log box, pressing these keys will not have the desired effect. In most cases, it will simply result in typing the letter
that you pressed. See Section 4.2.2.2, "Customizing toolbars" for some more information on creating shortcut keys.
 Status Bar 4-23

A few of the more useful, but less obvious, shortcut keys are listed below. These keys work within a text or drop
down list box in a FEMAP dialog box or list boxes in FEMAP. They do not apply to other Windows applications
except for those noted as Windows commands. For a complete list, see Section A, "Using the Keyboard".

Key(s) Function
Ctrl+A Measure an angle
Ctrl+C Copy (Windows command).
Ctrl+D Measure a distance
Ctrl+E Display FEMAP Equation Editor for interactive definition of variables
and equations.*
Ctrl+F List, Functions*
Ctrl+G Snap cursor selections to snap grid.
Ctrl+I Measure the radius of a circular arc
Ctrl+L Display a list of the existing entities of the desired type.*
Ctrl+M Measure the length of a selected curve
Ctrl+N Snap cursor selections to nearest node
Ctrl+P Snap cursor selections to nearest point
Ctrl+R Enable Smart Snap, which snaps cursor selections to the nearest point,
node, midpoint of a curve, or center point of a circular arc
Ctrl+S Snap cursor selections to screen (snap off)
Ctrl+T Redefine snap grid.
Ctrl+V Paste (Windows command).
Ctrl+W Redefine workplane.
Ctrl+X Cut (Windows command).
Ctrl+Z Use standard coordinate selection dialog box to define location.*

One of the most commonly used options is to use these keys to perform measurements when you want to input
coordinates. Since these keys are available when you are in another dialog box, you can perform the measurement
and obtain the result as the input to the dialog box value. There is no need to perform your measurements, write the
information down, and then go into the command to define the position.

4.2.5 Status Bar

The Status bar is contained at the bottom of the FEMAP main window. By default, the left side of the Status bar
keeps a running tally of the number of nodes and elements in your model. This will be overwritten by a command
description if menu Help is active, but it will return when you are not accessing or pointing at a command.
In addition to the menu Help and node and element counts that appear on the left side of the bar, the right side pro-
vides one button access to:
• current property
• current load set
• current constraint set
• current group (also used to choose Show Full Model, Show Active group, or Show Multiple groups)
• current output set
The current property, load set, constraint set, group, and output set can be changed, or a new one created, by left-
clicking the mouse. Left-clicking will bring up a drop-down menu that will contain a list of the current entities or
sets in the model that you can choose to activate, or you can choose Create/Manage... to access the “Set Type”
Manager dialog box for the four set based items, or a simple selection box to change the current property.
The Group option has the added feature to toggle displaying between the full model, the active group, or multiple
groups. Thus, not only can you use this feature to rapidly switch between groups when only viewing the Active
group, you can also toggle between displaying the active group, multiple groups, or the entire model as a short cut
to using the Group tab on the View, Visibility command (or right mouse button Visibility command).
 4-24 User Interface

4.2.6 The Select Toolbar

The Select Toolbar allows you to select entities one at a time or create a list of selected entities that will remain
active until you toggle off or clear the selection list. This functionality allows you to choose entities of different
types first and then perform multiple commands from the menus or the toolbars on the selected entities. To make
the Select Toolbar visible, choose Tools, Toolbars, Select.
Selector Entity Menu Selector Actions Menu

Snap Modes
Selector Modes Menu Selector Clear Menu

Selecting entities with the Select Toolbar is somewhat different than using dialog boxes, even though the two entity
selection approaches share many of the same capabilities. The main difference is the Select Toolbar is designed to
be used BEFORE any specific commands are selected. The Select Toolbar is also essential when using the dock-
able panes, especially the Entity Editor and Data Table, because it is often the most efficient method to place enti-
ties into either of these panes. Again, it was designed with this functionality in mind, so take advantage of the
Select Toolbar’s capabilities.
When an entity type is active for selection, you can access a context sensitive menu by clicking the right mouse
button in the graphics window. Each context sensitive menu contains a set of frequently used commands for the
selected entity type. These context sensitive menus can be used to help you model more efficiently.
Finally, the Select Toolbar has a mode known as Show Tooltips which allows you to query the entities in your
model in a dynamic manner by simply turning the option on and highlighting entities for selection. When activated,
a Tooltip note will pop up with useful information about the entity which is currently highlighted. This option can
be toggled on and off and is very helpful in making sure you have the right element selected for selection or prob-
ing specific nodes and elements during post-processing.
For more information, see Section 7.3.1.6, "Tools, Toolbars, Select" and Section 5.14.3.1, "Show Tooltips"of the
FEMAP Commands manual.

4.2.7 Context Sensitive Menus

There are many Context Sensitive menus in FEMAP. A Context Sensitive menu appears when the right mouse but-
ton is clicked:
• when an entity is highlighted in the Model Info tree
• when cursor is on top of various items in the Charting pane
• when a row or column header is highlighted in the Data Table, Data Surface Editor, Function/Table Editor,
Mesh Point Editor, or the Connection Editor
• inside the Entity Info and Messages window
• while a particular entity type is active in the Select Toolbar
• anywhere in the Toolbar Docking Area not currently occupied by a Toolbar (bring up Tools, Toolbars,... menu)
The Context Sensitive menu in the Messages window contains general commands to help you use the dockable
panes. Also, when a row is highlighted in the Data Table, a menu will give you the ability to show, filter, and delete
rows from the table.
When an entity in the Model Info tree is selected, you can right mouse click on the selected entity and a Context
Sensitive menu will appear for that particular entity type. These Context Sensitive menus provide a quicker path to
many frequently used commands for the specific entity type.
While a certain entity type is active in the Select Toolbar, only that entity type will be available for picking in the
graphics window. Since FEMAP is only highlighting one specific entity type at a time, there are context sensitive
 Dockable Pane Icons 4-25

menus for each entity type. These menus can be accessed by highlighting an entity and then clicking the right
mouse button. These Context Sensitive menus contain frequently used commands for each entity type.
Finally, you have the ability to quickly turn toolbars on and off one at a time by right clicking anywhere in the Tool-
bar Docking Area (above, below, to the left, or to the right of the graphics windows and Dockable Panes) not being
occupied currently by a toolbar. The Tools, Toolbars, ... menu will come up and all the currently visible toolbars
will be designated with a check mark.
For more information and lists of the Context Sensitive menus, see Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info", Section
7.2.4, "Tools, Charting", Section 7.2.7, "Tools, Function/Table Editor", Section 7.2.9, "Tools, Connection Editor",
Section 7.2.10, "Tools, Entity Info", Section 7.2.11, "Tools, Data Table", Section 7.2.12, "Tools, Programming, API
Programming", Section 7.2.13, "Tools, Programming, Program File", Section 7.2.14, "Tools, Other Windows, Mes-
sages", Section 7.3.1.6, "Tools, Toolbars, Select", and Section 7.4, "Other FEMAP Tools" in the FEMAP Com-
mands manual.

4.2.8 Dockable Pane Icons

Many of the dockable panes contain icons to perform specific commands used by the particular panes. These com-
mands are often not available through the menu structure, and only deal with what is found in the particular dock-
able pane.
For more information about the dockable pane icons, see Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info", Section 7.2.2, "Tools,
Meshing Toolbox", Section 7.2.3, "Tools, PostProcessing Toolbox", Section 7.2.4, "Tools, Charting", Section 7.2.5,
"Tools, Entity Editor", Section 7.2.6, "Tools, Data Surface Editor", Section 7.2.7, "Tools, Function/Table Editor",
Section 7.2.8, "Tools, Mesh Point Editor", Section 7.2.9, "Tools, Connection Editor", Section 7.2.10, "Tools, Entity
Info", Section 7.2.11, "Tools, Data Table", Section 7.2.12, "Tools, Programming, API Programming", and Section
7.2.13, "Tools, Programming, Program File" in the FEMAP Commands manual.

4.3 FEMAP Dialog Boxes

Many FEMAP commands require additional input to control its actions. Some commands require you to select
geometry or other entities. Others require you to specify coordinates or choose from a list of available options. In
all of these cases, one or more dialog boxes is displayed to request and accept that input.

4.3.1 Entity Selection

In FEMAP, similar to other Windows applications, a dialog box is often displayed to select one or more options
and/or enter text/numeric input. To select an option, or specify some input, first move to that field/control using
either the keyboard (TAB, Direction or Alt+underlined_letter keys) or, more directly, by selecting it with the cursor.
If the current control is a button or list box, select an option using either the keyboard or the cursor. If the current
control is a text box or drop-down list box, many applications offer no choice but to use the keyboard and type
input. With FEMAP, that is still possible, but in most cases (IDs and coordinates) it is possible to enter the text/
numeric input graphically using the cursor.
FEMAP has several standard dialog boxes, but the most common is the Entity Selection dialog box:
Enter Entity IDs here. Select picking method
Display list of entities Preview selected entities

Choose entire groups here.

List of selected Use Method Use OK

Use More to to select an when you
entities: add entities
+ Add, - Remove, alternate are done.
specified via approach for
x Exclude ID fields to list. selection.
 4-26 User Interface

Many FEMAP commands require selection of one or more entities which will be used for the command. For all
commands which support the selection of multiple entities, FEMAP uses a common entity selection dialog box.
This dialog box can be used to select any number of entities in the model using any combination of methods. As
entities are selected or removed, they appear in the list of selected entities located near the center of the dialog box.
Since this dialog box appears whenever entities need to be selected for the chosen command, it is very important to
become as familiar with this dialog box as possible. A brief explanation of each feature is provided below.
Choosing a Picking Method
Details regarding the entity selection box are provided below, however the most important things to remember are:
• how to orient the model
• picking methods
• using alternative methods to speed picking
Orienting the Model
When the Entity Selection dialog box is open, you may need to rotate, pan, or zoom the model to get a better view
while you are picking entities. You can use the middle mouse button (or wheel) to dynamically view the model.
You can:
• rotate by pressing the middle mouse button
• pan by pressing the middle mouse button and holding the Ctrl key
• zoom by pressing the middle mouse button and holding the Shift key or spinning the wheel of a Wheel mouse
If you have a two-button mouse, you can use the Dyn Rotate icon on the View Toolbar instead.
Picking Methods
The Pick button offers access to many different types of picking including Normal, Query, Front, Box, Circle,
Polygon, Freehand, Coordinate, Around Point, Around Vector, and Around Plane picking. There are several modes
for picking Combined Curves and Boundary Surfaces which act like “filters” to determine what can be selected
when Combined Curves and/or Boundary Surfaces exist in the model. There are also two commands on this menu,
Add Connected Fillets and Add Tangent Surfaces, which first require selection of an entity, then add more entities
of that kind based on the specified criteria.
By default, the entity selection box allows selection of entities in the graphics windows one by one. To select all
entities inside a box, select Box (or alternatively hold down the Shift key, and then press and hold down the left
mouse button), then drag the cursor on screen to select all entities within a rectangle. Alternatively, using Circle (or
the Ctrl key instead of the Shift key) will circle pick.
The Query pick displays a list of entities that have a similar XY screen location in a stand-alone Select dialog box,
allowing selection of a particular entity after clicking in a general area. It is then possible to use the scroll wheel on
the mouse to move up and down the list of entities which appear in the Select dialog box. Query can be accessed
temporarily by holding down the Alt key while clicking. The Front mode selects only the entities that are in the
front of the model (i.e., closest to the user in the graphics window).
The Polygon and Freehand options are just what they suggest. Polygon allows selection of locations in space to
form a polygon area for picking, while freehand allows drawing of any shape for picking in the graphics window.
The Coordinate option allows selection of entities using a combination of X,Y, and/or Z values referencing a
selected coordinate system along with various limiting criteria (Above or Below a single value; Between or Outside
two values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).
The Around Point and Around Vector options allow selection of entities using each entity’s position in 3-D space,
in relation to a specified “definition entity” (Specified Point in 3-D space or Specified Vector) along with various
limiting criteria (Farther Than or Closer Than a single value; Between or Outside two values; or At Location,
within a specified Tolerance).
The Around Plane option allows selection of entities using each entity’s position in 3-D space, in relation to a
Specified Plane along with various limiting criteria (Positive Side or Negative Side of Plane with offset value;
Between or Outside two offset values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).
The next section contains the Select Visible Only toggle, along with methods to pick By... or Add... entities related
to entities which are already selected. When Select Visible Only is disabled, which is the default, any entity in the
 Entity Selection 4-27

model which fit the criteria entered for a By... method or are related via an Add... option will be selected. When
Select Visible Only is enabled, only entities which are currently visible in the active view and fit the criteria or are
related will be selected.
By Color allows selection of a color from the Color Palette, then adds all entities of the current type which are also
that color to the selection list.
By Size is used to select curves by length, surfaces by area, or solids by volume using various limiting criteria
(Larger Than or Smaller Than a single value; Between or Outside two values; or of a Specific Size, within a speci-
fied Tolerance).
By Model Data Value allows selection of entities in the model which all use a specific material/property/element
value or have values which fall within a range of values for a particular material/property/element entry (i.e., Plane
Element Thickness, Young’s Modulus, BEAM End A Area, Element ID range, etc).
By Output allows selection of nodes or elements using output values, while
Add Connected Tangent Curves will add all curves which are connected and tangent to any number of curves
which are already selected, to the selection list.
Add Connected Fillets will add all of the “connected fillets” to any number of surfaces representing fillets in the
model which are already selected. In a similar manner, Add Tangent Surfaces will add all surfaces tangent to any
number of surfaces already selected, to the selection list.
Add Connected Elements will add all elements connected by at least one node to any of the elements already
selected, regardless of element type. Add All Connected Elements does something similar, but continues to add ele-
ments until there are no more connected elements to be added, which can be useful to select an entire “part”.
Using Alternative Methods to Facilitate Picking Multiple Entities
Individually picking each entity, or even multiple picking options are not always the most efficient method to select
FEMAP entities. Familiarize yourself with the various methods that are available via the Methods button in the
entity selection dialog box. For example, when selecting elements, there are methods that make it very easy to
select; all elements referencing a node, all element referencing a certain material, all elements of a certain type, all
elements on a surface, etc.
Entity Selection Options
Add, Remove, Exclude:
These options control whether the next entity will be added to, or subtracted from, the list of selected entities. The
default is always to add entities to the list. The Add and Remove options are order dependent. If you remove an
entity, and then later add it again, the entity will be included in the list since the add occurred last. The Exclude
option is the same as Remove, except that it is not order dependent. If you exclude an entity, and then later add it, it
will not be included in the list no matter how many times you attempt to add it. Any of the options can be chosen
any number of times, even for the same entity. For example, you can add the same entity 10 times if you want,
although it will be treated just as if you had added the entity one time.
When entities are shown in the selection list, the first character indicates whether that entry adds, removes or
excludes the entity. All added entities will be preceded by a +. “Remove” selections are indicated by a - and
“Exclude” selections by an x.
ID, to, by:
These three text boxes are the primary input controls. In many cases, you will simply want to select a single entity.
In this case, just enter the entity's ID into the ID text box. If you want to select a range of entities, enter the mini-
mum (into ID) and maximum ID (into To), and the increment (most often 1).

Select From List Button:

For entities which can have “Titles” (includes Solids, Coordinate Systems, Materials, Properties, Layups, Load
Sets, Constraint Sets, Connection Properties, Regions, Connectors, Functions, Analysis Sets, Groups, Views, Aero
Panel/Bodies, Aero Properties, Aero Splines, Aero Control Surfaces, Freebody entities, and Output Sets) the
“Select from List” button can be used to choose “Titled” entities from a “Multi-select” dialog box. Any number of
existing entities can be selected from the list by checking them individually or highlighting the titles and using the
Selected On icon button to check multiple items. Additional icon buttons exist to perform All On, All Off, and
 4-28 User Interface

Selected Off operations. The number of items in the list can be reduced using a “matching text” filter by entering
text in the field above the list, then clicking the Filter icon button to show only items containing the entered text.
Simply click the Clear Filter icon button to restore the full list.

Note: This command differs slightly from clicking Ctrl+L in a dialog box field to bring up a list of “Titled” enti-
ties, as only one entity at a time can be selected using that method.

Group:
If you have defined one or more groups in your model (using the Group menu) you can use them to quickly iden-
tify the list of entities to be selected. Use the drop-down list to view all of the available groups. If you choose More,
all entities from the group will be loaded into the list of selected entities.
Type (Type and Shape methods only):
The ID fields will be replaced by a drop-down list of available Types (Coordinate System, Element, Material, and
Property Types) or Shapes (Element Topologies).
Pick:
The Pick button provides access to various methods of graphical selection. A menu will appear with various
options.
The Normal option simply allows you to select one entity at a time from the screen. The other options provide for
multiple entity selection and are explained more fully below. It is important to note that the Box and Circle picking
options can be accessed in Normal mode by holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys, respectively, clicking and hold-
ing the left mouse button, and dragging the cursor across the graphics screen.
Query
This option selects all entities that are behind the cursor as you go through the depth of the model and places the
IDs in a list located in the lower right corner of the screen by default. When an entity ID is selected in the list, the
associated entity will be highlighted in the Graphics window allowing you to distinguish between coincident or
nearly coincident entities.

You can scroll the list in three ways, using the up down arrow keys, the roller on the mouse, or clicking the right
mouse button to move to the next ID in the list. When the entity you wish to select is highlighted you can select the
left mouse button or press OK in the Query list box.

Note: You can either turn on the Query mode by selecting it from the Pick menu, or you can use it for a single
pick by simply holding down the Alt key while clicking. When you release the Alt key, the picking mode
will return to its previous state (either Normal or Front).

Front
This option also uses the depth of the model, but instead of bringing up a list like Query, it only allows you to select
the entity that is “closest” to you. Once an entity is chosen, the one behind it becomes available to pick and so on.
Box Picking
If you select this option, simply click on the left mouse button at one end of the box, drag the cursor to the other end
of the box, and release the mouse button. This will select all entities inside the box. FEMAP provides a graphical
preview of the box when you drag the cursor. If you do not want to select any entities in the box, press Cancel.
Circle Picking
This option works much like box picking except the original click of the left mouse button defines the center of the
circle (instead of the corner of the box), and the location at which you release the button is a point on the circle.
 Entity Selection 4-29

Polygon Picking
This option is an extension of the box picking, except instead of holding the left mouse button down, you click on
specific locations. FEMAP will create a polygon from click to click for the entity selection. You can press Done
after your last location, or double click the last point, or close the polygon by repicking the first location (the dotted
line changes to solid when you are over the first location).
Freehand Picking
This option provides the most flexible input. Simply drag the cursor by holding the left mouse button down. When
you have completed the area you want to select, simply release the button. FEMAP will then automatically select
those entities in your freehand sketch.

Note: The picking method always returns to Normal after you have performed a picking procedure. If you need
to create another polygon or freehand sketch for picking, simply select this option again under Pick.

Coordinate Picking
The Coordinate option allows you to select entities using a combination of X,Y, and/or Z values referencing a
selected coordinate system along with various limiting criteria (Above or Below a single value; Between or Out-
side two values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).

You can choose any coordinate system in your model and then select X, Y, and/or Z and a “limiting criteria” for
each coordinate. You can click the “Graphical Pick” Icon button next to any active field and this allows you to get
a value for that field by graphically picking in the model.
When using the At Location criteria, a “Tolerance” is used and can be manually entered. By default, this value is set
to the “Merge Tolerance” of your model and “expands” the selection area +/- that value (See Section 7.4.1, "Tools,
Parameters..." for how “Merge Tolerance” can be defined). You can also enter a larger value to “expand” the selec-
tion area further in both directions.
Any value entered in a field as selection criteria WILL be included in the selection.
For example, say you want to list all nodes with an X coordinate “above” a value of “1.0” in the Global Rectangu-
lar Coordinate System in your model. In order to do this, check the box next to X to make it “active” (make sure the
Y and Z boxes are “unchecked”), choose the Above criteria, then enter a value of “1.0” into the Max field. When
you click OK, ALL nodes with an X value of “1.0” AND Above will be selected.
If you do not want the nodes at “1.0” to be included in the selection, you would want to enter a slightly higher value
(i.e.,“1.000001”) OR use an “mathematical operator” to slightly increase the value (i.e.,“1.0+1E-8”).
Around Point
The Around Point option allows you to select entities using each entity’s position in 3-D space in relation to a
“Specified Point” along with various limiting criteria (Farther Than or Closer Than a single value; Between or Out-
4-30 User Interface

side two values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance). Essentially, a “sphere” will be created around the
“Specified Point” and selection will be based on the defined limiting criteria.
FEMAP will first prompt you for a point using the standard Locate dialog box and any “coordinate definition
method” can be used. Once the “Point” has been specified, the Select by Distance From Point dialog box will
appear

You can click the “Graphical Pick” Icon button next to any active field and this allows you to get a value for that
field by graphically picking in the model.
When using the At Location criteria, a “Tolerance” is used and can be manually entered. By default, this value is set
to the “Merge Tolerance” of your model and “expands” the selection area +/- that value (See Section 7.4.1, "Tools,
Parameters..." for how “Merge Tolerance” can be defined).
Any value entered in a field as selection criteria WILL be included in the selection.
For example, say you want to list all nodes closer than “1.0 unit” away from a specified point in space. In order to
do this, choose the Closer Than criteria, then enter a value of “1.0” into the Min field. When you click OK, ALL
nodes within a “1.0 unit” sphere AND any nodes exactly “1.0 unit” in any direction will be selected.
If you do not want the nodes at “1.0 unit” to be included in the selection, you would want to enter a slightly lower
value (i.e.,“.9999999”) OR use an “mathematical operator” to slightly increase the value (i.e.,“1.0-1E-8”).
Around Vector
The Around Vector option allows you to select entities using each entity’s position in 3-D space in relation to a
“Specified Vector” along with various limiting criteria (Farther Than or Closer Than a single value; Between or
Outside two values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance). Essentially, a “cylinder” will be created around
the “Specified Vector” and selection will be based on the defined limiting criteria.

First, select a vector using the standard Vector Locate dialog box using any “vector definition method”. Once the
“Vector” has been specified, the Select by Distance From Vector dialog box will appear.
The Graphical Pick icon button, found next to any active field, allows a value for a field to be determined via the
graphics window.
When using the At Location criteria, a “Tolerance” is used and can be manually entered. By default, this value is set
to the “Merge Tolerance” of the model and “expands” the selection area +/- that value (See Section 7.4.1, "Tools,
Parameters..." for how “Merge Tolerance” can be defined).
Any value entered in a field as selection criteria WILL be included in the selection.
For example, you want to list all nodes farther than “1.0 unit” away from a specified vector. To do this, choose the
Farther Than criteria, then enter a value of “1.0” into the Max field. When you click OK, ALL nodes outside a “1.0
unit” cylinder AND any nodes exactly “1.0 unit” away from the vector in the radial direction will be selected. If
 Entity Selection 4-31

you do not want the nodes at “1.0 unit” to be included in the selection, you would want to enter a slightly higher
value (i.e.,“1.000001”) OR use an “mathematical operator” to slightly increase the value (i.e.,“1.0+1E-8”).
Around Plane
The Around Plane option allows you to select entities using each entity’s position in 3-D space in relation to a
“Specified Plane” along with various limiting criteria (Positive Side or Negative Side of Plane with offset value;
Between or Outside two offset values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).

FEMAP will first prompt you for a plane using the standard Plane Locate dialog box and any “plane definition
method” can be used. Once the “Plane” has been specified, the Select by Distance From Plane dialog box will
appear.
The “Positive Side” is the side of the “Specified Plane” with the “positive normal direction” (based on the right
hand rule) and the other side is the “Negative Side”. You can enter an Offset Distance from the plane in either the
Positive or negative direction.
You can click the “Graphical Pick” Icon button next to any active field and this allows you to get a value for that
field by graphically picking in the model.
When using the At Location criteria, a “Tolerance” is used and can be manually entered. By default, this value is set
to the “Merge Tolerance” of your model and “expands” the selection area +/- that value (See Section 7.4.1, "Tools,
Parameters..." for how “Merge Tolerance” can be defined).
Any value entered in a field as selection criteria WILL be included in the selection.
For example, say you want to list all nodes between “-1.0 Unit” and “+1.0 Unit” offset from the specified plane. In
order to do this, choose the Between criteria, then enter a value of “-1.0” into the Min field and “1.0” into the Max
field. When you click OK, ALL nodes between “-1.0 unit” and “+1.0 Unit” from the plane AND any nodes exactly
“+/-1.0 unit” away from the plane will be selected.
If you do not want the nodes at “1.0 unit” +/- the plane to be included in the selection, you would want to enter a
slightly lower value (i.e.,“+/- 0.999999” in the appropriate fields) OR use an “mathematical operator” to slightly
increase the value (i.e.,“1.0-1E-8”).
Combined Curves pick mode
There are four modes when selecting Combined Curves in FEMAP, Default, All Points/Curves, Points/Curves
Eliminated by Combined Curves, and Combined Curves Only. Once Entity Selection dialog has been closed by OK
or Cancel, this pick mode always returns to Default. Here is a brief description of each:
• Default - In this mode, all “individual curves” used to create Combined Curves can no longer be selected. The
Combined Curves are now available for selection along with any “individual curve” currently not being used by
any Combined Curves. Also, the end points of any “internal” curves of a Combined Curve can no longer be
selected.
• All Points/Curves - All “underlying” points and curves used by Combined Curves are available for selection, as
well as the Combined Curves themselves and any “individual curves” in the model.
• Points/Curves Eliminated by Combined Curves - Only “underlying” points and curves used by Combined
Curves are available for selection.
• Combined Curves Only - Only Combined Curves can be selected.
4-32 User Interface

Boundary Surfaces pick mode

There are also four modes when selecting Boundary Surfaces in FEMAP, Default, All Curves/Surfaces, Curves/
Surfaces Eliminated by Boundary, and Boundary Surfaces Only. Once Entity Selection dialog has been closed by
OK or Cancel, this pick mode always returns to Default. Here is a brief description of each:
• Default - In this mode, all “individual surfaces” used to create Boundary Surfaces can no longer be selected.
The Boundary Surfaces themselves are now available for selection along with any “individual surface” cur-
rently not being used by any Boundary Surfaces. Also, the “internal” curves of Boundary Surfaces can no lon-
ger be selected.
• All Curves/Surfaces - All “underlying” surfaces and curves used by Boundary Surfaces are available for selec-
tion, as well as the Boundary Surfaces themselves and any “individual surfaces” in the model.
• Curves/Surfaces Eliminated by Combined Curves - Only “underlying” surfaces and curves used by Boundary
Surfaces are available for selection.
• Boundary Surfaces Only - Only Boundary Surfaces can be selected.
By Faces
Picking By Faces is only available when you are selecting Nodes or Elements. It provides access to the face selec-
tion methods described in the Model, Load, Elemental command, including selection of Adjacent Faces. When you
use this method of selection during Node selection, all nodes on the element faces that you pick are selected.
During element selection, the elements containing the faces are selected.
Select Visible Only toggle
When Select Visible Only is disabled, which is the default, any entity in the model which fit the criteria entered for
a By... method or are related via an Add... option will be selected. When Select Visible Only is enabled, only entities
which are currently visible in the active view and fit the criteria or are related will be selected.

Note: When the Select Visible Only toggle is enabled, the icon next to the toggle will be highlighted and all
items on the Pick^ menu which follows the toggle will be appended with (Visible Only).

By Size (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)

Only available when selecting curves, surfaces, or solids. Curves are selecting by Length, Surfaces by Area, and
Solids by Volume.

The same options exist for each type of geometric entity: Larger Than a maximum value, Smaller Than a minimum
value, Outside or Between two values, or a Specific Size within a specified Tolerance.
By Color (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
The By Color option allows you to select a color from the Color Palette, then adds all entities of the current type
which are also the selected color to the selection list. Options also exist to Match Color, Match Pattern/Transpar-
ency, and Match Line Style options which may turned on/off to either broaden or narrow the selection criteria. By
default, all Options are on.
For Example, if you wanted all elements in the model which are Red (specifically Color 4), regardless of the
selected Pattern/Transparency or Line Style, you would probably want to “uncheck” the Match Pattern/Transpar-
ency, and Match Line Style options if the colors in the model use any of these options.
By Model Data Value (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
The By Model Data Value option allows you to choose entities in the model with values Equal to a specific element
quality value or material/property value (i.e., Plane Element Thickness, Young’s Modulus, BEAM End A Area
 Entity Selection 4-33

etc.) or have values within a range (Above or Below a single value; Between or Outside two values) for a particular
material/property entry.

When using the Equal criteria, a “Tolerance” is used and can be manually entered. By default, this value is set to
the 1.0E-8 and “expands” the selection area +/- that value
Any value entered in a field as selection criteria WILL be included in the selection.
By Output (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
Like By Faces, this method is only available when picking nodes or elements, and only if you have loaded analysis
results into your model. Usage of this selection method is just like the Group, Operations, Generate With Output
command (See Group, Operations, Generate With Output... in Section 6.4.3.2, "Group, Operations Menu" of the
FEMAP Commands manual). In this case however, the selection is not used to create a group, rather it is directly
added to the selection dialog box.
Add Connected Tangent Curves (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
Using the Add Connected Tangent Curves command allows you to quickly add “connected tangent curves” to the
selection list by first selecting any number of curves. This is a helpful picking tool when using the Geometry, Curve
- From Surface, Offset Curves/Washer command. Only available when selecting curves.
Add Connected Fillets (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
Using the Add Connected Fillets command allows you to quickly add “connected fillets” to the selection list by
first choosing any number of surfaces which represent fillets in your geometry. This is a helpful picking tool when
using the Geometry, Solid, Remove Face (see Section 3.4.1.16, "Geometry, Solid, Remove Face...") to try and
remove fillets from geometry. Only available when selecting surfaces.
Add Tangent Surfaces (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
Like Add Connected Fillets, the Add Tangent Surfaces command adds surfaces based on their relationship to sur-
faces which have already selected. In this case, surfaces “tangent” to any number of surfaces already in your selec-
tion list will be added to the list. This is a helpful command when you would like to pick all of the surfaces on “one
side” of a part. Only visible when selecting surfaces.
Add Connected Elements (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
Using the Add Connected Elements command allows you to quickly add “connected elements” to the selection list
by first choosing any number of elements. Any element which is connected by at least one node to the already
selected elements will be added. Only visible when selecting elements.
Add All Connected Elements (follows Pick Visible Only toggle)
Using the Add Connected Elements command allows you to quickly add all of the “connected elements” to the
selection list by first choosing any number of elements. Any element which is connected by at least one node to the
already selected elements will be added, then any element connected by at least one node to those elements will
also be added, until there are no more connected elements to add. Only visible when selecting elements.
Copy, Copy as List, and Paste
In some cases, you may want to transfer selection lists (the IDs being selected) to other programs. By choosing
Copy, the IDs that have been selected (already in the list) will be copied to the Clipboard, and will be available to
be pasted as text into another application. If there are any IDs which have been removed or excluded from the
 4-34 User Interface

selection list (designated with a “-” or a “x” before the ID or an ID range), they will NOT be copied to the clip-
board. The format on the Clipboard is a simple, startID, stopID, increment - just as it is shown in the list.
Copy as List uses the same methodology as Copy for choosing which IDs will be copied to the clipboard, but will
send only the IDs (no range notation) to the clipboard. For example, you select a range of elements which appear in
the dialog box like this: “+1,5,1” (using the startID, stopID, increment format). By choosing Copy as List, FEMAP
will copy this range to the clipboard as individual entities (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) instead of using the range format.
Pressing Paste is the opposite of Copy. A list of IDs is copied from the Clipboard and then added, removed, or
excluded from the selection list depending on the current mode selected in the dialog box. When the mode is set to
Add, the entities will have a “+” in front of the IDs after being pasted into the dialog box, when set to Remove they
will be designated with a “-”, and when set to Exclude with a “x”. You can use these commands together to Copy a
selection into another application, edit the IDs, then Paste it back into the selection dialog.
Send to Excel
Send to Excel automatically opens Microsoft Excel and transfers the IDs currently selected in the dialog box
directly to Excel, as a list of IDs (for more information, see Copy as List in section above).

Select All:
Choosing this button selects all entities of the desired type. The selection mode is independent of the Add, Remove,
Exclude options. The entities are always added. You will see a single entry in the list of selected entities which
looks like:
+ minID,maxID,1

...where minID and maxID are the minimum and maximum entity IDs respectively. Do not worry if you have gaps
in your numbering, FEMAP will only choose existing entities between (and including) minID and maxID.

Visible Only Button:

Using this button will select all entities of the desired type which are currently “visible” in the active view. In this
case, “Visible” means the entity, in the active view, is: A) not hidden by any setting for Visibility (i.e., overall entity
type; individual entity; elements based on type, shape, or which reference hidden materials and/or properties); B)
not hidden by the Draw/Erase Toolbar in any way; C) displayed based on the current Group display settings; and
D) on a visible Layer.

Note: This includes any entities which are “visible”, but may not currently appear in the graphics window
due to zooming, panning, or rotating in the view to only display a portion of the model.

Clear Selections Button:

If any selections have already been made, this will erase all and start over (i.e., entity selection list will be blanked).

Preview Button:
Use this option to highlight - like the Window, Show Entities command - all of the entities that you have picked so
far. Each of the entities that you have placed into the selection list will be highlighted on the screen. After preview-
ing your selection, you can change your selection and preview again. The color and style of highlighting are con-
trolled by your current settings in the Window, Show Entities command. If you want to change them, simply go to
that command, pick a new color or new options, and they will be used for future previews.
Preview is only available for the same entity types that are available in Window, Show Entities. When selecting
other entities, Preview will be disabled. If you are not using ID selection, but have switched to some other method,
you will see the selection list go blank when you press Preview. Your entities are still selected; they have simply
been converted to an ID list - just like they would be if you switched to a new method. You can continue to select
using this method, but if you want to remove a selection, you must switch to Exclude mode.
 Entity Selection 4-35

Previous:
Whenever you complete a selection and press OK, FEMAP remembers the list of selected entities. The next time
that you need to select entities of the same type, you can choose this button to reuse your previous selections. The
previous IDs are placed into the selection list depending on which mode, Add (“+”), Remove (“-”), or Exclude
(“x”), is currently selected in the dialog box. A separate list is saved for each type of entity, but the appropriate list
is overwritten every time the Entity Selection dialog box is displayed and you choose OK.
Delete:
This is a more selective version of Reset which allows you to edit the list of selected entities. First, select the entry
in the list that you want to eliminate, either by using the Tab key to move to the list, then using Up or Down to
make the selection, or more simply by clicking on the entry with the mouse. Then choose Delete - the selected
entry will be removed from the list, and those entities will no longer be selected (or deselected if the entry you
deleted was a remove/exclude entry).
Method:
The Method button will enable you to change the way entities are selected. When the dialog box first appears, you
will always be selecting entities by their ID. If you press the Method button, you will see a popup menu that con-
tains additional ways to select entities. For example, if you are choosing elements, you will be able to choose ele-
ments by selecting them by their ID, Material, Property, the Type of Element, or even based upon the nodes used.
You may even select one method, choose the desired entities, switch methods, and add additional entities. FEMAP
will automatically choose the ID of the elements which are referenced by these other entities and place them in the
selection box under the ID method. All operations such as Add, Remove, and Exclude are still applicable even when
mixing the Methods selection. A list of the available methods for the applicable entities are provided below.

What You
Entity Rule / Command What is Selected
Define
Point ID Point IDs IDs you select.
Color Point ID All points with same color as a selected point
Layer Point ID All points on same layer as a selected point
Property Property ID All points with selected property as a mesh attribute
Definition CSys CSys IDs Any points defined relative to IDs you select.
on Curve Curve IDs Any point used to define a selected curve.
Curve ID Curve IDs IDs you select.
Color Curve ID All curves with same color as a selected curve
Layer Curve ID All curves on same layer as a selected curve
in Region Region IDs Any curves referenced by a selected region
Property Property ID All curves with selected property as a mesh attribute
using Point Point IDs Any curve which references a selected point.
on Surface Surface IDs Any curve used to define a selected surface.
on Solid Solid ID Any curve used to define a selected solid
Surface ID Surface IDs IDs you select.
Color Surface ID All surfaces with same color as a selected surface.
Layer Surface ID All surfaces on same layer as a selected surface
in Region Region IDs Any surfaces referenced by a selected region
Property Property ID All surfaces with selected property as a mesh attribute
using Curve Curve IDs Any surface which references a selected curve.
on Volume Volume IDs Any surface used to define a selected volume.
on Solid Solid ID Any surface used to define a selected solid
Solid ID Solid IDs IDs you select.
Layer Solid IDs All solids on same layer as a selected solid(s)
Property Property IDs All solids with selected properties as a mesh attribute
Type Solid Types Any solid of a selected type.
using Curve Curve IDs Any solid which references a selected curve.
using Surface Surface IDs Any solid which references a selected surface.
 4-36 User Interface

What You
Entity Rule / Command What is Selected
Define
Mesh Point ID Mesh Point IDs IDs you select.
Color Mesh Point IDs All mesh points with same color as a selected mesh point(s)
Layer Mesh Point IDs All mesh points on same layer as a selected mesh point(s)
on Point Point IDs Any mesh point located on the selected point(s)
on Curve Curve IDs Any mesh point located on the selected curve(s)
on Surface Surface IDs Any mesh point located on the selected surface(s)
on Solid Solid IDs Any mesh point located in the selected solid(s)
Connection ID Connector ID IDs you select.
Property Color Connector ID All connection properties with same color as a selected connec-
tor(s)
Layer Connector ID All connection properties on same layer as a selected connec-
tor(s)
On Connector Connector ID All connection properties used by selected Connector(s)
Region ID Region IDs IDs you select.
Color Region ID All Regions with same color as a selected Region
Layer Region ID All Regions with same layer as a selected Region
on Connector Connector ID All Regions used by selected Connector(s)
on Solid Solid ID All Regions which reference a Surface, Curve, Node, or Ele-
ment on or associated to the selected Solid(s)
referencing Node Node ID All Regions defined using selected Node(s) OR the regions
which will include selected Node(s) when “expanded for
export” to a solver
referencing Element Element IDs All Regions defined using selected Element(s) and/or Faces of
Element(s) OR the Regions which will include selected Ele-
ment(s) and/or Faces of Element(s) when “expanded for export”
to a solver
using Curve Curve ID All Regions defined using selected Curve(s)
using Surface Surface ID All Regions defined using selected Surface(s)
using Property Property ID All Regions defined using selected Property(s)
Connector ID Connector ID IDs you select.
Color Connector ID All connectors with same color as a selected connector.
Layer Connector ID All connectors with same color as a selected connector.
Property Connector ID All connectors with same connection property as a selected con-
nector
using Region Region IDs Any connector using the selected Region(s)
Coordinate ID CSys IDs User-defined Csys IDs you select.
System Color CSys IDs All User-defined Csys with the same color as the selected Csys.
Layer Csys IDs All User-defined Csys on the same layer as the selected Csys.
Definition CSys CSys IDs Any User-defined CSys defined relative to IDs you select.
Type CSys Types Any User-defined Csys of selected type.
(0,1,2)
on Point Point IDs All User-defined Csys located at a point
on Node Node IDs All User-defined Csys located at a node
on Element Element IDs All User-defined Csys used by the selected element
on Property Property IDs All User-defined Csys used by the selected property
on Csys CSys IDs All User-defined Csys used by the selected Csys as definition
Coordinate System
 Entity Selection 4-37

What You
Entity Rule / Command What is Selected
Define
Node ID Node IDs IDs you select.
ID - Free Edge Node IDs IDs you select but only those on free edges
ID - Free Face Node IDs IDs you select but only those on free faces
ID - Constrained Node IDs IDs you select but only those that are constrained
ID - Constraint Node IDs IDs you select but only those that are attached to constraint
Equation equations
ID - Loaded Node IDs IDs you select but only those that have loads
Color Node IDs All nodes with same color as a selected node
Layer Node IDs All nodes with same layer as a selected node
Definition CSys CSys IDs Any node defined relative to IDs you select.
Output CSys CSys IDs Any node with output CSys equal to IDs you select.
on Element Element IDs Any node used to define a selected element.
Element Element IDs Any node used to define a selected element’s orientation (i.e.,
Orientation bars and beams)
Superelement ID Node IDs Any node having the same Superelement ID as the selected
nodes
in Region Region IDs Any nodes referenced by a selected region
on Point Point ID Any node which references a selected point
on Curve Curve ID Any node which references a selected curve
on Surface Surface ID Any node which references a selected surface
in Solid/Volume Solid/Volume ID Any node which references a selected solid/volume
Element ID Element IDs IDs you select.
ID - Free Edge Element IDs IDs you select but only those with free edges
ID - Free Face Element IDs IDs you select but only those with free faces
ID - Loaded Element IDs IDs you select but only those that have loads
Color Element IDs All elements with same color as a selected element
Layer Element IDs All elements with same layer as a selected element
Material Material IDs Any element which references a material (via a property) you
select.
Property Property IDs Any element which references a property you select.
Layup Layup IDs Any element using the selected layup(s)
Type Element / Prop- Any element of a selected type.
erty Types
Shape Element Shape Any element with same shape as the selected element.
using Node Node IDs Any element which references a selected node.
using Orientation Node IDs Any element which uses a selected node as an orientation node.
Node
All Nodes Node IDs Any element for which ALL nodes used to define that element
have been selected.
in Region Region IDs Any elements referenced by a selected region
on Point Point ID Any element which references a selected point
on Curve Curve ID Any element which references a selected curve
on Surface Surface ID Any element which references a selected surface
in Solid/Volume Solid/Volume ID Any element which references a selected solid/volume
Material ID Material IDs IDs you select.
Color Material IDs All materials with same color as a selected material
Layer Material IDs All materials with same layer as a selected material
on Property Property IDs Any material which is referenced by a selected property.
on Element Element IDs Any material which is referenced (via a property) by a selected
element.
Type Material Types Any material of a selected type.
 4-38 User Interface

What You
Entity Rule / Command What is Selected
Define
Property ID Property IDs IDs you select.
Color Property IDs All properties with same color as a selected property
Layer Property IDs All properties with same layer as a selected property
on Element Element IDs Any property which is referenced by a selected element.
Material Material IDs Any property which references a selected material.
Layup Layup IDs Any property which references a selected layup
Type Element / Prop- Any property of a selected type.
erty Types
in Region Region IDs Any property referenced by a selected region
on Point Point ID Any property used as a meshing attribute on a selected point
on Curve Curve ID Any property used as a meshing attribute on a selected curve
on Surface Surface ID Any property used as a meshing attribute on a selected surface
in Solid/Volume Solid/Volume ID Any property used as a meshing attribute on a selected solid
The Method button appears not only in the Entity Selection dialog box, but also in most standard dialog boxes, such
as defining a coordinate location, a vector, or a plane. There are currently 18 methods available to define a coordi-
nate location, 13 methods to define a vector, and 11 methods to define a plane. If you need to define a point, vector,
or plane, and you think there is an easier method than simply inputting the coordinates of the locations, there prob-
ably is. Check the Methods button to see what options are available to you. It can save you tremendous amounts of
effort by using different methods.

Hint: The method’s ID-constrained and ID-loaded dialog boxes set up rules that allow you to only select enti-
ties related to a specific load or constraint. First select the filter you wish to use, then use the graphical
selection methods such as box pick to select a large area of the model. FEMAP will then apply the filter
to all of the entities in the box and only select those entities that pass the filter.

More, OK:
These options select the entities specified by ID, to, by or the entities in the selected group. The entities will be
included in the selection list based on the setting of Add, Remove, Exclude. The only difference between More and
OK is that OK finishes your selection while More lets you select additional entities or simply review the list.
4.3.1.1 Graphical Selection
One of the most powerful features of the entity selection dialog box is its ability to select entities graphically.
Before you can select entities graphically, you must make sure that the keyboard focus is set to the ID field,
just as if you were going to type an ID. This is always the case when the dialog box is first displayed. You can
check however by looking for the blinking vertical bar cursor. If it is in the ID field you are ready to go, otherwise
click with your mouse in the ID field before selecting.
Selecting Single Entities
Whenever you want to select entities one at a time (even if you want to pick several of them) do the following:
1. Move the cursor through the screen. FEMAP will highlight different entities as you move the mouse over the
screen.
2. Click the left mouse button when the entity you want is highlighted. This action places the entity ID directly into
the selection list.
3. If you made a mistake by picking the wrong entity, you can either use the Delete button to remove it, or change
to Remove/Exclude mode and pick it again.
4. Repeat the previous step until all entities have been selected (or use any of the other selection methods), then
press OK to complete the selection. You will notice that once an entity has been chosen, it is no longer dynami-
cally highlighted, so you may more easily choose from the remaining entities on the screen.
Or, alternatively:
1. Move the cursor to point at the entity and double click the left mouse button. This places the entity directly into
the selection list and presses OK. No further input is required, but you will not be able to correct any mistakes.
 Graphical Selection 4-39

2. You can use this technique in combination with the previous “single click” method by just “double-clicking” the
last entity that you want to select.
Remember, by changing the Add, Remove, Exclude setting, you can either select or deselect entities.
When you are selecting single entities, the entity that is selected is based on where you point in the Graphics win-
dow, and what you have previously selected. Any entity that is already in the selection list will be skipped as
FEMAP looks for the entity closest to your selection. This means that you can pick three times at the same location
to choose the three entities which are closest to that location. FEMAP will not pick the same entity three times.
Selecting Multiple Entities
One of the most powerful graphical selection capabilities of FEMAP is the use of the pick method described in the
Entity Selection dialog box explanation above. You have access to Box, Circle, Polygon, and Freehand picking.
Each of these methods were explained above and will not be reiterated here. The Box, Circle, and Polygon picking
are unique, however, in that they can be accessed while in normal mode. By pressing the Shift or Ctrl keys (or both
at once), you can select all entities which lie inside a desired area. The Shift key enables you to define a box, while
the Ctrl key will allow you to define a circular area. Holding both Shift and Ctrl at once, will allow you to define an
area in the shape of a polygon. To perform graphical selection, simply follow the steps below:
1. Press and hold down the Shift key if you want to select inside a rectangular area, the Ctrl key if you want a circu-
lar area, or both the Shift and Ctrl keys at the same time if you want to begin creating a polygon.
2. Point at one corner of the rectangular region (or the center of the circular region). For polygon picking, choose
the location of the first point of the polygon.
3. Press and hold the left mouse button. For polygon, click the left mouse button to begin choosing the points of the
polygon.
4. Move the cursor. As you move, you will see a box/circle which represents the area that you are selecting. When
the box/circle surrounds the area that you want, release the left mouse button. This will select all entities inside
the area and add them to the selection list. You do not have to press More. For polygon picking, choose any
number of points to define an area in the shape of any polygon.
5. Make additional selections, or click the OK button when you have selected all of the desired entities.
6. To abort a selection of this type, just release the Shift or Ctrl key prior to releasing the left mouse button. No
selection will be made.
The Freehand picking method works almost identically to the circle and box picking except it actually traces the
history of your movement (as opposed to just using the two end points). Polygon picking is just slightly different in
that it is not based upon dragging the cursor, but rather you must select each individual location of the polygon.
The following tips will help you get started with graphical and multiple entity selection.
1. If you need to select many entities in a complex region, you can combine the area selection techniques with the
Add, Remove, Exclude options. By choosing add, you can combine multiple overlapping square, circular, poly-
gon, and freehand regions. By choosing remove or exclude, you can subtract additional selections, effectively
cutting holes in your selection region.
2. Since entity selection is used by so many commands, you may find yourself wanting to select the same entities
over and over again for multiple commands. If you just want the same selection for a few commands, the Previ-
ous button will recall your selections. If you need to come back to this selection sometime later, it is best to use
the Group options to define those entities as a group. Every time you need them, you can simply use the Group
drop-down list to retrieve the selection no matter how complicated it might have been. Remember to give the
group a title so you can remember which one to pick!
3. If you are working with a complex model, cursor selection can take a while both for you and for the computer to
determine which entity is closest to your pick. If you define a part of your model as a group, and then only dis-
play that group (use the Group tab of the View, Visibility command or the “visibility check boxes” for groups in
the Model Info tree), the process can be much simpler.
4. The cursor snap mode is used for all cursor selections including selection of entities. If you are snapping to a
grid, node or point, you must remember that the entity to be selected will be the one closest to the grid, node or
point that was “snapped-to”, not necessarily the one closest to the location you picked. The same principle
applies to area picking. The corners of the area are changed by the snapping action.
 4-40 User Interface

4.3.2 Coordinate Definition

One of the most common actions in FEMAP is to define the coordinates of a desired location. In the most basic
form this simply involves specifying the three-dimensional (X, Y, Z) coordinates of the location in the global rect-
angular coordinate system. In addition, coordinates can be specified in global cylindrical, global spherical or rela-
tive to any other coordinate system you create.

Note: Changing the snap mode to Smart Snap, Snap to Point, or Snap to Node can aid in selection of coordi-
nates by using entities which already exist in the model. Smart Snap, in particular, can help minimize
how often the Method needs to be changed by allowing “smart snapping” to any node, any point, the mid-
point of any curve, or the center point of any circular arc.

The following figure shows the conventions for entering coordinates in any type of FEMAP coordinate system.
The conventions shown in this figure are used throughout FEMAP. Whether you are actually specifying a coordi-
nate, defining a vector, defining a plane or entering some other coordinate related data, these conventions are your
key to interpreting the input which is required.
Rectangular Spherical
( X, Y, Z ) ( R,  )
Z Z

Cylindrical
( R, , Z ) p

Z
p Rp p

Zp
Yp Y Y
X Xp X
p p

Zp  degrees
Rp Y
X
p

Note: Throughout FEMAP, all angular dimensions must be specified in degrees.

In many cases, it is not easy to determine coordinates. For these times, FEMAP provides numerous alternative
coordinate definition methods which allow specification of the coordinates in terms of quantities or known entities.
With any of the methods, use any of the global or user defined coordinate systems to further simplify input. All of
the coordinate definition methods provide a Method button which allows you to switch to another coordinate defi-
nition method. Switching methods involves selecting an option from the popup menu.
 Coordinate Definition 4-41

When you start a model, some of the methods will be unavailable. For example, you cannot use On Node if you do
not have any nodes. All of the methods will automatically become available as soon as the required entities are cre-
ated.
FEMAP is a full three-dimensional modeling program. All coordinates are always specified with three coordinates,
relative to one of the global or user-defined coordinate systems. The FEMAP workplane is only used for graphical
selections and to orient geometry created by certain geometry creation commands.
The Locate method is the default when you start FEMAP and the Locate coordinate definition dialog will be dis-
played by every command that requires coordinates. If you switch to a different method, that method will become
the default for all commands until you switch again.
Features for All Methods
Located near the bottom and right of all of the coordinate definition dialog boxes are several common controls.
ID:
Indicates the ID of a point or node to be created. If you are not creating a point or node, this field will be disabled.
The ID will automatically increment after each creation, or you can enter the ID of any point or node which does
not already exist.
CSys:
Specifies the definition coordinate system in which you will enter the X,Y,Z location (or other method). The drop-
down list will contain all of the available coordinate systems for your choice, or you can select a coordinate system
from any graphics window using the cursor. Changing the definition coordinate system will automatically trans-
form any coordinates that you have already entered into the new system. The X,Y,Z titles will also change, based
on the type of the active definition coordinate system. For cylindrical systems, XYZ will become RTZ (R, Theta,
Z). For spherical systems, XYZ will become RTP (R, Theta, Phi).
Parameters:
This is another option that is only available when you are creating points or nodes. It allows you to specify addi-
tional parameters for those entities. For more information, see Section 3.1.1, "Geometry, Point..." and Section
4.2.1, "Model, Node..." in FEMAP Commands.
Preview:
Draws a dot in the graphics windows at the location currently being defined. You can use this option to see where
the coordinate will be prior to choosing OK to accept the value. Choosing Preview after you select coordinates with
the cursor does not provide any new information. Cursor selection automatically shows the location being picked.
If you type input, or modify a cursor selection however, Preview will show you the location.
Coordinate Locate Method

This method allows you to directly specify a location. As always, coordinates are relative to the definition coordi-
nate system. When using this method, you are simply specifying the coordinates directly, as shown in the previous
coordinate definition conventions picture. Remember however, that the various cursor snapping modes can be use
to adjust the coordinates that you choose graphically.
 4-42 User Interface

Coordinate Locate In Workplane Method

This method is very similar to the Locate method, except only two coordinates are required, X and Y in the work-
plane.
Coordinate Between Method

The Between method allows you to interpolate between two other locations. In addition to the two endpoints, the
coordinates are determined from a percent of the distance from the first location to the second location. Just as the
endpoint locations are specified in the definition coordinate system, the interpolation is also done in that coordinate
system. If the definition coordinate system is non-rectangular, the resulting point may not lie along a straight line
between the endpoints. For example, in a cylindrical system (R, Theta, Z), a location 50% of the way between the
endpoints (1,0,0) and (1,90,0) is (1,45,0). The interpolation was carried out along the cylindrical arc.

Point 1 P Point 2

X% (100-X)%

Y
X

Hint: Use this method to locate coordinates based on the positions of two existing nodes or points. Set your
cursor snap mode to Node or Point and select the endpoints with the cursor. Complete your selection by
typing the desired percentage from the first endpoint.

Coordinate Locate Center Method

 Coordinate Definition 4-43

The Locate Center method requires three specified locations which are not colinear to determine a “circle”. The
“center” location is then determined by finding the center point of the “circle”. A geometric circular curve is NOT
created.

Center of ‘circle’

Location 3

Location 2
Location 1

Coordinate Offset Method

Offset coordinates are a variation of the Locate method. You must specify a Base location (just like Locate), but in
addition, you can specify an offset from that location. The offsets are delta coordinates which are added to the base
location, they are not a vector. In rectangular coordinates this distinction does not make any difference. In cylindri-
cal or spherical coordinates however it can change the resulting location. For example in cylindrical coordinates (R,
Theta, Z), if the base is (1,0,0) and the offset is (0,90,0), then the resulting location is (1,90,0), which is not in the
Theta tangent vector direction from (1,0,0)
.
Z
In Cylindrical Coordinates
Y
(1,90,0)
P
offset = (0,90,0)
Base
dX
dZ Zbase
Y (1,0,0)
X Ybase Xbase X
dY

Use this method if you want to specify coordinates which are offset from a node or point. Set the base location by
picking the desired node or point (with the cursor snap mode set to Node or Point). Then just type the desired offset

Coordinate At Distance Method

 4-44 User Interface

This method is similar to the offset method. You still specify a base. Instead of an absolute offset however, these
coordinates are defined by a vector direction and a distance. This approach is useful when you want to offset a spe-
cific distance along some direction. This method does not use delta coordinates. It always offsets along the vector.
Z
In Cylindrical Coordinates
Y
P
(1,1,0)
length
offset = (0,90,0)
Base
dX length = 1
Not this
dZ Zbase
Y (1,0,0)
X Ybase Xbase X
dY

Coordinate On Point Method

This method defines coordinates which are identical to the location of the selected point and requires input of the
Point ID only. On Point is disabled unless you have at least one existing point. If you set the cursor to snap to the
nearest point, you can specify the same coordinates as On Point using the Locate method. Be careful if you are
using this method to create new points or nodes. They will be coincident with the point you select, and difficult to
see.

Coordinate On Node Method

This is identical to the On Point method except that the coordinates are chosen at the location of a selected node.

Coordinate Onto Curve Method

The Coordinate Onto Curve method projects a location onto a curve. The direction of the projection is always per-
pendicular to the curve. For example if you are projecting onto an arc or circle, the specified coordinates are first
projected onto the plane of the curve and then toward (or away from) the center of the curve, to a location on the
perimeter.
P
Curve

Base

Note: Remember, all curves are considered infinite. If you choose a base location past the end of a line seg-
ment, it will be projected onto the extended line, not to the endpoint of the segment.
 Coordinate Definition 4-45

Coordinate Along Curve Method

The Along Curve method allows you to select coordinates along a curve. You must identify the curve and a per-
centage along the length of the curve. The location is calculated using the percentage of the curve length from the
end of the curve which is closest to the End Near location. This is a quick method to define a location at any posi-
tion along a curve.

Z
Curve
P

X% (100-X)%

Y
X

Coordinate Length Along Method

The Length Along method allows you to select coordinates at a distance from one end of a curve. You must select
the curve and the distance along the curve. The location is determined by moving along the curve the Length Along
value from the end of the curve closest to the End Near Location.

( 0.25” )

Note: If you select the curve with the mouse, the End Near location will be automatically updated to the point
where you made your selection. By selecting the curve near the end that you want to measure from, you
can automatically specify End Near with no further input.
 4-46 User Interface

Coordinate Mesh Location Method

The Mesh Location method selects coordinates based on the mesh size which you have defined for a curve or its
points. If no mesh size is defined for the selected curve, the mesh size will be determined from the mesh size
defined for the curve points or the default mesh size. In addition to the curve, you must specify a location near to
the mesh location that you want to select. FEMAP first selects the curve, and then finds the closest mesh location to
the coordinates that you specified.

Mesh Locations

Near is automatically defined as the location you pick if you select the curve graphically. You do not have to spec-
ify any additional input.

Coordinate Center Method

This method is a quick way to select the center of an arc or circle. Simply identify the arc or circle you want to use.
You cannot choose any other type of curve for this method. Refer to the Midpoint method for other curve types. As
an alternative for arcs and circles you can use the On Point method, since the center of the arc or circle is always
defined by a point.

Coordinate Midpoint Method

The Coordinate Midpoint method is a simple way to select coordinates in the middle of a curve. These coordinates
always lie along the curve. For example, they lie on the perimeter of an arc, at an equal arc length from the begin-
ning and end of the arc. For a line, the point is simply half way between the endpoints.

The only input required for this method is to select the curve that you want to use.
 Coordinate Definition 4-47

Coordinate Intersect - Curves Method

The Coordinate Intersect method defines coordinates at the intersection of two curves. You must select the curves
that you want to intersect. In addition, you must specify a location near the intersection. In fact, this location is not
required if you are intersecting lines since there is only one possible intersection location. For other curves how-
ever, where multiple intersection locations can exist, the intersection which is closest to the coordinates that you
specify is computed.

P
Not this intersection
Near since it is farther from
the “Near” location

This method considers all curves as infinite. That is, lines are extended in both directions to infinity and arcs are
extended into circles. The intersection location does not have to fall between the endpoints of the original curves.

Hint: The Nearest To location is automatically updated if you select the second curve graphically. By select-
ing the curve near the point of intersection, you will not have to specify any further input.

Coordinate Onto Surface Method

The Coordinate Onto Surface method is similar to Onto Curve. It projects the base location onto a surface. In this
case the projection is toward the point on the surface which is closest to the original. Typically this direction is per-
pendicular to the surface, but for some spline surfaces it might not be
Base

Surface
 4-48 User Interface

Coordinate In Surface Method

The Coordinate In Surface allows you to define a location based upon a parametric location on a surface. The only
input required for this command is the surface ID and the u,v location. The values for u,v must be between 0 and 1.

Coordinate GC of Surface
The Coordinate - CG of Surface allows you to define a location at the center of gravity of a selected surface.

Coordinate Intersect Curve/Surface

The Coordinate Intersect Curve/Surface option allows you to define a location based upon the intersection of a
solid model surface (Parasolid) and a curve. This option cannot be used if you do not have Parasolid surfaces in
your model and will be grayed. Neither boundary surfaces or FEMAP standard surfaces can be used with this com-
mand.
Simply select the surface and curve, and a location near the intersection (in case of multiple intersection points) and
FEMAP will compute the location of intersection

4.3.3 Vector Definition

Just as there are many methods to enter coordinates, there are many methods for defining a vector in FEMAP.
Some vectors in FEMAP are just used for determining a direction. They do not require a length. The axis around
which you rotate a group of nodes is an example of this type of vector. Other vectors not only require a direction,
but also a length. The vector which you translate nodes along in the Move By command is an example of this vector
type. For either vector type, all methods are available. Some methods, like Locate, implicitly define their length
based on the normal vector input. Other methods, like Axis, require you to define an explicit length whenever the
vector requires a length.
All coordinates and vector components required for various vector definition methods must be input in the active
definition coordinate system. A drop-down list (CSys) is available in each of the dialog boxes to choose the coordi-
nate system. In addition, when you change coordinate systems (or methods), current entries are transformed to an
equivalent vector in the new system. Therefore, you can enter part of the data using one coordinate system or
method, and then switch to a new coordinate system or method to complete the definition.
Just like coordinates, you can use the cursor to define the vector. For methods that let you define the vector tip, in
addition to the graphics cursor, you will see a vector coming from the base location and attached to the cursor. For
more complex methods, Bisect and Normal, additional construction lines are visible. In some methods, it is possi-
ble to use the most recently used vector again, by clicking the Previous button. To see the vector prior to accepting
the input, click the Preview button or icon button. This will draw the vector in all graphics windows.
 Vector Definition 4-49

Vector Locate Method

This method defines a vector which goes from a base coordinate to a tip coordinate. The vector length, if required,
is the distance between the two coordinates. As always, all input is in the active definition coordinate system.

Tip

Base

Zbase

Ybase Y
X Xbase

Use this method when you know two existing points that the vector should go between.
Vector Locate/Length Method
This method is very similar to Vector Locate, as described above. You still specify two points, but you also specify
a length. This specified length is used instead of the distance between the two points.
Vector Components Method

This method creates a vector by specifying a base location and the components of a vector. The vector length is
determined by the magnitude of the components that you specify. Use this method when you want to specify a vec-
tor or direction with specific offsets from a base location.
Z

Base
dX
dZ Zbase
Ybase Y
X Xbase
dY
 4-50 User Interface

Note: When using a non-rectangular coordinate system, vector components are measured along principal
directions at the base location. For example, if in global cylindrical coordinates, you specify a base of
(1,45,0), and vector components of (0,90,0), this implies a vector of 90 inches (length units) in the pos-
itive theta direction at (1,45,0), or 135 degrees from the global X axis. It does not imply a change in
theta of 90 degrees.

Vector Direction Method

This method is identical to the Vector Component method if you are defining a direction vector (one with no
length). If length is required, this method allows you to specify it explicitly. It is not determined from the delta
coordinates. Use this method when you want to specify a vector in a certain direction of a specific length.

length

dZ dX
Zbase

Ybase Y
X Xbase
dY

Vector Points Method

This method is identical to Vector Locate, except that the vector lies between two existing points. You can mimic
this method using Locate by setting the cursor to snap to points and selecting the same two points. To use this
method, simply select the two points (you must have at least two points in your model to use this method).

Vector Nodes Method

Again, this method is identical to Vector Locate, except that the vector lies between two existing nodes. You can
mimic this method using Locate by setting the cursor to snap to nodes and selecting the same two nodes. To use
this method, you must have at least two nodes in your model.
 Vector Definition 4-51

Vector Bisect Method

This method will define a vector which bisects two other vectors. The two “construction” vectors are defined by a
common base location and the location of their respective tips. The bisecting vector always lies in the plane formed
by the three points, which must not be colinear. You must explicitly define the length of the bisecting vector if it is
required. It is not determined from the lengths of the “construction” vectors
.

Tip 2

Tip 1
Base

Vector Normal Method

This method is similar to Vector Bisect and requires the exact same input. Instead of bisecting the “construction”
vectors however, this is oriented normal to the plane formed by the “construction” vectors. It is still located at the
base location. The positive vector direction is determined by the “right-hand rule” from the first “construction”
vector toward the second. Again when it is required, you must explicitly define the length. It is not determined from
the “construction” vectors.

Tip 2

Tip 1

Base Perpendicular Angles

Vector Axis Method

 4-52 User Interface

This method is unlike all preceding methods in that the only coordinates you specify are for the base point. The
direction of the vector defined by this method is based on one of the positive or negative axis directions of the
active definition coordinate system. When required, the length must be specified explicitly. If you have already
defined coordinate systems in the desired direction(s), this is one of the easiest and quickest methods to define a
vector.
If the active coordinate system is non-rectangular, the axis locations refer to the coordinate directions at the base
point. For example, in a cylindrical coordinate system (R, Theta, Z), the Y axis refers to the Theta direction at the
selected base point.

Vector Global Axis Method

This method is much like Vector Axis, except that the vector is always in one of the axis directions of the global
rectangular coordinate system. The definition coordinate system is only used for convenience in entering the base
point. It has no effect on the vector direction. For this reason, it does not matter whether it is rectangular, cylindrical
or spherical. Again, with this method, you must explicitly define the length whenever it is required.

Vector Tangent or Along a Curve Method

This method allows you to create a vector which is tangent to a curve. If you choose a line, the vector will be along
the length of the line. In addition to the curve, you must choose a location. This location is projected onto the curve,
and serves as the base for the vector. The vector direction is determined automatically from the tangent to the curve
at the projected location.

Curves

Near

Normally, tangent vector always goes from the start (first end) of the curve toward the end of the curve. If you
check Reverse Direction the tangent will go in the opposite direction. If you are unsure of how the curve was cre-
ated, press Preview. Then, if the vector is pointing in the wrong direction, reverse the current direction by clicking
Reverse Direction. If you use this method to specify a vector that requires a length, you must explicitly define the
length since no length is implied by the tangent direction.
 Vector Definition 4-53

Vector Normal To Surface

This method defines a vector which is normal to a surface at a particular location. The input for this method is sim-
ply the surface, the point, and length (if required). You may also choose to reverse the direction of the vector so it
points in the negative normal direction.

Vector Axis of Revolution

This method defines a vector which is the axis of revolution for a revolved surface. The input for this method is
simply the surface and a length (optional). You may also choose to reverse the direction of the vector so it points in
the negative direction of the surface’s axis of revolution.

Vector Normal To View Method

This method defines a vector which is normal to the active Graphics window. If there are no graphics windows, it
defines a vector parallel to global Z. The direction of the vector is either into the view or out of the view (screen),
depending upon the option chosen. When required, the length must be explicitly specified.
This method is often very useful in combination with the various View Align and View Rotate commands to specify
vectors in skewed directions. You can first align the view correctly, see that everything is correct, and then easily
choose the vector with a minimum amount of input without worrying about the direction.
 4-54 User Interface

Vector Saved Method

This method allows selection of a vector which has been saved to the database using the Tools, Vector Manager
command (Section 7.1.3, "Tools, Vector Manager") or from the 5 vectors most recently defined during a command.
Once a vector is highlighted in the list, a preview of the vector will be displayed in the graphics window. In addi-
tion, the Selected Vector Info section displays the Base and Direction of the highlighted vector in the coordinate
system currently selected in the CSys drop-down, along with the Length. Finally, The Reverse option can be used to
reverse the direction of the highlighted vector, while maintaining the Length.
To reduce the number of vectors being displayed in the list, enter text into the field below the list, then click the Fil-
ter icon button and only those vectors that contain the specified text will remain in the list. If additional text is
entered and the Filter icon button is clicked again, the number of vectors in the list may be further reduced. To dis-
play all available vectors in the list again, click the Clear Filters icon button.

4.3.4 Plane Definition

FEMAP also provides multiple methods to define planes. All definition methods create a plane which passes
through an origin location and which is oriented by a vector normal to the plane. In most cases, like specifying a
plane to reflect about, coordinate directions in the plane are not required. When they are required however, (for
example, when you define the workplane), “in-plane” coordinate directions are automatically determined based on
your existing input.
When you use the cursor to define a plane you will see several additions to the graphics cursor. As you specify the
first vector used to define the plane, you will see a vector attached to the cursor. Then as you specify the final vec-
tor/direction, the plane will be dynamically shown on the screen. Just as in vector definitions, the more complex
methods, Bisect and Normal, will also draw additional construction lines. In some methods, it is possible to use the
most recently used plane again, by clicking the Previous button. If you want to see the final plane prior to accepting
your input, whether you used the keyboard or mouse, click the Preview button or icon button. This will draw the
plane in all graphics windows.

Note: Unlike vector definition, it is often necessary to press Preview to see an accurate orientation of the plane
- even if you use the cursor to define the plane. This is especially true if you are using cursor snapping.
Small movements of definition locations due to snapping can make large changes in plane orientation.

Plane Locate Method

This method is the default plane definition method. It involves specifying three, non-colinear locations which
define the plane, a base (origin) and two other locations. The plane normal is determined from the cross-product of
 Plane Definition 4-55

the vector from the plane origin to the first location and the vector to the second location. The vector from the ori-
gin to the first location also defines the in-plane X direction. All input is in the definition coordinate system.

Tip 2

Tip 1
Plane X
Base

Plane Components Method

Defining a plane by components requires specifying an origin and the components of a vector which is normal to
the plane. The local X direction in the plane is automatically determined by calculating the cross product of the
global Y axis and the plane normal. If the plane normal lies along the global Y axis, then the local X direction is set
to lie along the global X axis.

dZ

X Y
dX Base

dY

Plane Normal Method

 4-56 User Interface

The plane normal method is similar to the Plane Components method. In this case however, you must specify the
base/origin and a point at the tip of the normal vector (as opposed to the components of the normal vector). The in-
plane X direction is determined in the same manner as for the Plane Components method.
Z

Tip

Base Y
X

Plane Points Method

Plane Points is just like the Plane Locate command except that the locations are specified using existing Points.

Plane Nodes Method

Plane Nodes is just like the Plane Locate command except that the locations are specified using existing nodes.

Plane Bisect Method

The Plane Bisect method is similar to the Vector Bisect method of specifying a vector. It requires specifying a base
and two other vector tip locations. The resulting plane bisects those two vectors. It is normal to the plane formed by
the two vectors and oriented such that it lies midway between the vectors, through the plane base/origin. The nor-
mal to the plane is in the plane formed by the construction vectors, and points toward the first vector. The in-plane
X direction is defined in the plane of the construction vectors.

Tip 2

Tip 1

Base
 Plane Definition 4-57

Plane Csys Plane Method

This method simply chooses one of the principal planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) of the definition coordinate system. The
normal can face in either the positive or negative direction. The in-plane X direction is determined by the first letter
in the plane definition. That is, the X direction for an XY plane is along the X axis, the X direction for a YZ plane
is along the Y axis and for a ZX plane, along the Z axis.
If you choose a plane in a non-rectangular coordinate system, the plane normal is defined by the direction of the
coordinate tangent at the base/origin location. For example, in a cylindrical coordinate system, with the origin set to
(1,45,0), a ZX plane is rotated 45 degrees from where it would be if the coordinate system were rectangular. This
method is very convenient if you already have a coordinate system defined that is properly aligned to the directions
you need to select.

Plane Global Plane Method

The Global Plane method is identical to the CSys Plane method, except that it always chooses a plane aligned with
the principal directions of the global coordinate system instead of the selected definition coordinate system. Since
the global system is rectangular, the special cases for non-rectangular coordinate systems do not apply to this
method. This is the easiest method to align a plane with the global axes.

Plane Align to Curve Method

This method allows you to quickly move the workplane, or set any other plane to the plane of an arc or circle. Other
types of curves cannot be used. The workplane origin will be moved to the center of the arc or circle that you
choose. The workplane normal will be along the normal to the curve and the workplane X direction will be toward
the first point on the curve boundary. The only input required for this method is the curve ID.
 4-58 User Interface

Plane Surface Normal Method

This method allows you to quickly align the workplane, or set any other plane to a specific surface. The only input
required for this method is the Surface ID and the point of the origin (At Point). You may also specify an axis point
to align the X axis of the plane. Other options include an Offset Value, Reverse Direction of the Plane Normal, and
force the first quadrant of the plane to contain the surface (this may flip the plane normal as well).
Plane Align to View Method

This method is just like the Vector definition method Normal to View. The resulting plane will pass through the
specified base/origin and will be parallel to the plane of the screen. The normal direction can be specified as either
into or out of the view. The in-plane X direction is aligned with the View X (horizontal) direction.

Plane Saved Method

This method allows selection of a plane which has been saved to the database using the Tools, Plane Manager com-
mand (Section 7.1.3, "Tools, Vector Manager") or from the 5 planes most recently defined during a command.
Once a plane is highlighted in the list, a preview of the plane will be displayed in the graphics window. In addition,
the Selected Plane Info section displays the Base location, Normal vector, and Axis vector of the highlighted plane
in the coordinate system currently selected in the CSys drop-down. Finally, The Reverse option can be used to
reverse the direction of the highlighted plane’s normal vector.
To reduce the number of planes being displayed in the list, enter text into the field below the list, then click the Fil-
ter icon button and only those planes that contain the specified text will remain in the list. If additional text is
entered and the Filter icon button is clicked again, the number of planes in the list may be further reduced. To dis-
play all available planes in the list again, click the Clear Filters icon button.
 Color Palette 4-59

4.3.5 Color Palette

Throughout FEMAP you will see many dialog boxes with one or more text fields which allow specification of a
color. If ID of the color is known, simply enter it into the text field. To the right of these text fields, however, is a
“color block” button or one of a few icon buttons (typically next to a field where color can be entered). Choosing
the “color block” button will display the standard FEMAP Color Palette allowing graphical selection of a color.
After selecting the color, choose OK, and the text field will automatically be filled with the ID of the selected color.
The color palette consists of 140 defined colors (IDs 0-124 and 150-164) which, by default, span the entire color
spectrum, plus an additional 25 Gray-scale colors (IDs 125-149). There are also 10 “open colors” (IDs 165-174),
which can be specified by the user and stored in the default palette. The Color Palette is saved with the model file.
This is the Color Palette dialog box:

For filled areas, one of the available hatched patterns can be used instead of the solid fill. Hatched patterns use the
line color, not the dithered fill color. In addition, the second row of patterns are transparent colors, which can be
used to make areas “see through”, as they are filled with one of these patterns. Eight different transparency levels
are provided by the eight patterns. These range from completely transparent to nearly opaque. The partially trans-
parent colors will combine with colors from any other geometry and will overpaint to produce a tint. These trans-
parent colors however use the “solid” line colors.

Note: The eight “transparency” patterns apply to all entities which can have color (i.e., nodes, elements,
points, lines, surfaces, regions, etc.).

For lines, select a style which is either patterned (long and short dashes) or thick. If one of the patterned linestyles
is selected, it may look solid when drawing very short line segments. This can often happen with arcs, circles and
splines if the value for Curve Accuracy (in View Options) is very small. Since FEMAP approximates these curves
with straight lines, setting a very small accuracy results in many very short line segments. To see patterning on
curves, increase the Curve Accuracy value, resulting in fewer line segments and less precise curve representations.

Note: Only the default Pattern/Transparency and Line Style are supported by Performance Graphics.

If using a mouse, make palette selections (color, pattern and line style) simply by pointing at an item with the cur-
sor and clicking the left mouse button. A square, most likely black, will surround the selected color, pattern or style.
This indicates that item is now selected.
 4-60 User Interface

The keyboard can also be used to select items from the palette. Press the direction/arrow keys to move from color
to color. As the direction keys are pressed, a small square will appear inside the color boxes. When the square is
visible in the desired color, pattern or line style, press the Space bar. This has the same effect as pressing the left
mouse button. The color that was indicated by the small box will be selected. Just like when using the mouse, a
larger square will appear surrounding the selection.
Using the keyboard to select from the palette works just as well as using the mouse. The only drawback is the extra
time and keystrokes which are required to move the selection to the desired color.
Editing Current Colors
The FEMAP palette colors can be changed by selecting a color to change, then adjusting the red, green and blue
values for that color. Choosing Reset will set the selected color back to its defaults. These color changes only apply
to the current FEMAP model, and are not saved across models or even the next time working on the same model.
Working with Palette Libraries
Palette libraries overcome the limitations which were just described. By pressing the Save command button, the
current palette, including any modifications, can be written to a file. In a future FEMAP session, or even a different
model, press Load to reload the saved palette from the file. When pressing either Save or Load, the standard file
open dialog box is displayed to select a library file. The default file extension is *.PAL for all palette libraries, but
any filename or filename extension can be used. Unlike some other FEMAP libraries, only one palette can be
stored per library file, therefore a new filename must be used to save multiple custom palettes.

4.3.6 Library Selection

When selecting materials, properties, views, or other entities from a FEMAP library, the Select From Library dia-
log box will be displayed:

Library Description

Library Contents
Title and Description

Clear All Filters

Filter icon button Icon button
 Library Selection 4-61

Depending on which preferences have been specified on the Library/Startup tab of the Preferences dialog box, the
Select From Library dialog box will contain two tabs (Personal and Femap Standard Libraries) or three tabs
(Startup Shared Libraries preference potentially adds a Shared tab). For more information on setting the various
Library preferences, see Section 2.6.2.10, "Library/Startup" in the FEMAP Commands manual.
All tabs share some functionality, including:
• The Path field, which displays the directory path to available libraries for a particular tab
• Ability to change the currently library for a tab, on-the-fly, via the Library drop-down
• A Contents list, which contains the items available from current library
• Ability to reduce the number of items in the Contents list via the Filter options
• Icon buttons which can be used to show an overall description of the selected library (Library Description) or a
description of a particular entity in the library (Library Contents Title and Description).
Each tab also offers some unique functionality, which is described here in greater detail.
Personal
The Personal tab offers the ability to load an item from a library file (*.esp file) which is maintained by the user.
This indicates items can be saved to a library, at any time, via the Save button in the creation dialog boxes for a spe-
cific entity type, or deleted from a library using the Delete from Library icon button to the right of the Contents list.
The Set Location of Library icon button can be used to select a different directory path, using the standard File
selection dialog box, to find libraries for a specific entity type. The selected path will persist until the FEMAP
application is closed completely. The Delete Library button deletes the entire library file which is currently speci-
fied by the Library drop-down.

Set Location
of Library

Delete Item
From Library
 4-62 User Interface

Any entity which is saved when the Personal tab is active will be saved to the library file currently specified via the
Library drop-down. In addition, the default library on the Personal tab for each entity type, at least when FEMAP
is initially started, can be specified using the File, Preferences command, choosing the Library/Startup tab, and
selecting an appropriate *.esp file for an entity type in the Startup Personal Libraries section.

Note: By default, when saving an entity of a certain type for the first time to a library, a new *.esp file, with a
generic name, such as material.esp, will be automatically created in the user’s windows user directory,
which is typically similar to the following: “C:\Users\[username]\AppData\Local\Femap\[femap ver-
sion]”. In some organizations, these file may be stored somewhere different, therefore, please consult
someone within the organization for confirmation.

Shared
The Shared tab actually contains all the same controls as the Personal tab, but is somewhat different. First, the
libraries which appear on the Shared tab for the various entity types must all reside in the same directory. This
directory path can be specified via File, Preference, choosing the Library/Startup tab, then specifying a Shared
Library Path in the Startup Shared Libraries section. Second, it is common for “shared” libraries to reside some-
where, such as a directory on a shared server, where a user’s specific level of permissions may or may not allow the
user to use a Save button in a creation dialog box for a specific entity type to save to that file.

Note: If items cannot be saved from the Shared tab, please check with someone in the organization to deter-
mine if the user should be allowed to save to the directory in general or the files in the directory.

Femap Standard Libraries

The FEMAP Standard Libraries tab offers the ability to load an item from a library file (*.esp file) which has been
distributed with FEMAP. These library files reside in the FEMAP installation directory and items cannot be saved
to or deleted from these libraries at any time. Also, there is no way to change the path to these libraries.

Note: Values in Library files distributed with FEMAP are believed to be correct, but have not been verified.
You must verify these values are correct and appropriate before using them for any purpose.

4.4 The Workplane and Other Tools

This section describes the workplane, as well as other tools for both graphical selection and numeric input.

4.4.1 The Workplane

Graphical selection on most models requires selecting entities from a 3-dimensional model from a 2-dimensional
screen. FEMAP uses definition of a workplane to locate a 2-dimensional pick in 3-dimensional space.
When you make cursor selections or define two-dimensional geometry, the workplane is used to define the ultimate
location in three-dimensional space. There are four methods of accessing the Tools, Workplane command to define
the location and orientation of the workplane:
1. Tools, Workplane command
2. Ctrl+W shortcut key
3. Right mouse button - Workplane
4. Solid Toolbar
The last three shortcut methods allow you to redefine the workplane in the middle of another command. Using this
technique, you can use the cursor to select one point projected onto one workplane, then realign the workplane for
additional selections.
The workplane is a two dimensional plane which you can locate and align anywhere in three-dimensional space.
By default, the origin of the workplane is at the global origin and the plane is aligned with the Global XY plane.
When you make a graphical selection, the screen location which you selected is projected along a vector normal to
the screen onto the workplane. The resulting three dimensional coordinates are located at the intersection of the
projection vector and the workplane.
As stated above, the workplane can be aligned to any orientation. It is not restricted to be normal to the current
view (although it can be easily set to that orientation). If you are using a workplane that is not normal to the current
view, be careful when you make selections. As long as the workplane is not rotated too far from the screen normal
 The Cursor Position Toolbar 4-63

you will have no problems accurately defining coordinates by picking. However, If the plane is rotated so that it is
nearly “edge-on” to the view, the projection of the screen location will be nearly parallel to the plane. The resulting
intersection can have very large coordinates. In any case, picking with this alignment will be relatively imprecise.
If your workplane is exactly “edge-on” to the view, there would not be any intersection with the projection vector.
In this case, FEMAP automatically projects onto a plane which is normal to the view, but which goes through the
real workplane origin. This feature allows you to have multiple windows which are all displaying orthogonal views
and still use all of them for selecting coordinates.

4.4.2 The Cursor Position Toolbar

FEMAP only fills in the dialog box coordinates after you make a selection. Until that time you can only tell the pre-
cise location of the cursor by its relationship to other entities drawn in your Graphics window. The Tools, Toolbars,
Cursor Position command can provide more information on the cursor position, and provide additional graphical
selection capability. Activating this command will display the Cursor Position toolbar.

With this dialog box active, as your cursor travels through any of the graphics windows, the displayed coordinates
will be dynamically updated. You can make your graphical selections whenever you see the coordinates that you
want.
In addition to displaying the coordinates, you will see three check boxes (X, Y and Z) which are all initially on. If
you turn any of these boxes off (by clicking on them), you will notice that the corresponding coordinate disappears.
In addition, when you make a graphical selection, only the coordinates which are enabled (on) will be selected and
entered into the dialog box. Furthermore, after you make a selection with some coordinates disabled (off), the coor-
dinates which were disabled are automatically enabled, and the coordinates which were enabled are automatically
disabled.
This process is somewhat complex and is best explained with an example and a picture.
1 2 100

Pick Node 2
with YZ enabled Final coordinates will
be here YZ of 2, X of 3

6 5 4 3

then pick Node 3

automatically picks
Y
just the X coordinate
10 9 8 7
Z X

Suppose you want to select coordinates which match the Y and Z coordinates of Node 2 and the X coordinates of
Node 3. With the cursor position displayed, turn off the X-coordinate and make sure that you are snapping to a
node location. Then simply select Node 2 (this fills in the Y and Z coordinates of Node 2) and finally select Node 3
(this will fill in the X-coordinate of Node 3, since FEMAP automatically reversed the enabled/disabled coordinates
after the first pick). If you need to do more complex selections involving all three coordinates you must enable/dis-
able them manually, but it still only involves 1 or 2 clicks.

4.4.3 Snap To
The Snap To method of picking is a very powerful tool to locate your graphical selections at an exact position in the
model. You may access this command, and/or change the Snap To method in five ways:
1. Right mouse button - Smart Snap, Snap to Screen, Snap to Grid, Snap to Point, and Snap to Node
2. Select Toolbar
3. Individual Snap To and Smart Snap shortcut keys
4. Tools, Workplane, Snap Options (Smart Snap not available)
5. Ctrl+T (when in another dialog box) (Smart Snap not available)
 4-64 User Interface

The last two methods allow you to change the snap mode, and to redefine the spacing and orientation of the snap
grid. The first three methods allow you to simply change the snap mode. The shortcut keys (including Ctrl+T), the
right mouse button, and the toolbar can be accessed while in other commands.
There are five modes available for the Snap, each with its own shortcut key for a quick change to the mode when
you are inputting coordinates in a dialog box.
1. Smart Snap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl+R
2. Snap To Screen (Snap Off). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ctrl+S
3. Snap To Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl+N
4. Snap To Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ctrl+P
5. Snap To Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl+G
If you simply want to change the snap mode, one of the preceding will enable you to change the snap mode imme-
diately. They do not display any dialogs for further input. A message will be written to the Messages window, and
the graphics cursor will change shape to identify the active snap mode.
By changing the Snap To mode, you can change the precision of your selection, specifically by snapping to previ-
ously defined Points or nodes with exact locations. This will enable you to obtain the preciseness you need for your
operation, while still providing the ease and speed of graphical selection. This is extremely valuable when defining
planes or vectors for such things as rotating and reflecting elements, where precise coordinate are required, and
when nodes or points are already defined in appropriate locations. A brief description of each Snap To method is
provided below.
Smart Snap
Picking snaps to the nearest node, point, midpoint of a curve, or center point of an arc based on proximity to cursor.

Note: Smart Snap always uses “Normal” pick mode to select coordinates, even when pick mode is set to
“Query” or “Front”.

Snap to Screen (Snap Off):

This is the default mode. In this mode, no snapping is done. The location selected is based purely on the spot you
pick in the Graphics window and, if you are picking coordinates, the position of the workplane.
Snap to Grid:
This mode uses an XY grid in the workplane. All cursor selections will be snapped to the closest grid point/line.
Since you can control both the X and Y spacing of the grid points/lines, and the rotation of the grid in the work-
plane, you can use this method to round all cursor selections to the precision of the grid spacing. For example, if
you specify a 1 inch spacing, all coordinate selections will be in increments of 1 inch from the origin of the work-
plane. Be careful if you are using this mode to select entities. Your pick is first snapped to the grid location, and
then the closest entity is chosen.
For display purposes, you can change the grid to either dots or lines, or even make it invisible (not displayed). The
style you choose has no effect on how the snapping is done.
Snap to Node:
This mode will adjust the location you select to the coordinates of the closest node. This mode is very useful if you
need to reference your selections to other existing nodes. Be careful though if you are using this to create nodes.
The one you create will be coincident. The same warning applies to picking IDs in this mode. Your selection will
first be snapped to the node location, and then the closest entity will be chosen. You must have at least one node in
your model, and it must currently be visible in the window where you make your selection to use this method.
Snap to Point:
This mode is identical to Snap to Node, except that the location is adjusted to the location of the closest point. You
must have at least one point in your model, and it must currently be visible in the window where you make your
selection to use this method.
When to Snap
By default, FEMAP will only use the snap mode that you choose when you are defining a coordinate. If you would
like it to snap every time you pick in the Graphics window, use the Tools, Workplane, Snap Options command and
turn off the Coord Only option.
 Selecting Coordinates 4-65

4.4.4 Selecting Coordinates

Coordinates are defined throughout FEMAP for many purposes. In most cases you input coordinates through one
of the standard coordinate, vector or plane dialog boxes described previously, but a few other dialog boxes do
accept coordinate data. In any of these cases, you may supply the coordinates either by typing with the keyboard, or
graphically selecting a location from any active graphics window.
To select coordinates graphically, follow the following steps:
1. Select any of the three (X, Y, Z) coordinate fields/controls.
2. Move the cursor to the desired location in the Graphics window
3. Press the left mouse button.
FEMAP will automatically fill in the coordinates which correspond to that location. Refer to the discussion of snap
modes in the previous section for additional information regarding “snapping” the selected coordinates.
Normally when you select graphically, FEMAP will fill in the dialog box with the numerical coordinates of the
location that you select. If you are snapping to a point or node however, FEMAP will insert equation functions. For
example, if you snap to node 4, you would see XND(4), YND(4) and ZND(4). Similarly if you snap to a point, the
XPT(), YPT(), and ZPT() functions are used. FEMAP uses these functions instead of the coordinate values to
increase precision. When FEMAP loads the dialog box with a numerical value, those coordinates are only as pre-
cise as the number of digits in the dialog box. Typically, this is around six or seven significant digits. These func-
tions reference the full, double-precision coordinates which are stored in the FEMAP database.
Since the six or seven significant digits is usually more accurate than you desire, you may want to disable this fea-
ture, so you can actually see the coordinate values. Just go to the Tools, Snap To command, and turn off the Full
Precision feature. FEMAP will then always use the coordinate values, no matter how you snap. Turning Full Pre-
cision on will cause FEMAP to use the function references again.

4.4.5 Selecting Entities by their Titles

Many times, FEMAP will display a list of entities in a combo box. There are many ways that you can select entities
from these lists:
• You can type an entity ID.
• You can select the entity graphically as described above.
• You can click the down-arrow (or the Alt+Down key) to view the list and select an entity.
• You could select the entity by typing its title.
• You can bring up a list of entities using Ctrl + L. This will only work if the entity you are selecting can have
titles.
You have two choices to enter the title. You can either prefix (or enclose) the title with a single quote (') or a double
quote (“). If you use a double quote, the title that you enter must exactly match the title of the entity. If you use a
single quote, FEMAP will search all of the available titles and try to find the string that you enter. Any title that
contains that string will be matched. Both methods are insensitive to case (i.e. Steel matches STEEL or steel). You
can never select untitled entities using this method.
You will receive an error message if the title that you type does not match any of the entities in the list, or if it
matches more than one. FEMAP will only make the selection if the title that you type uniquely identifies an entity.
This restriction eliminates potential errors that could occur if FEMAP selected a different entity that happened to
have a matching title.

4.4.6 Numerical Input - Real Number Formats

When you enter a real (floating point) number into a dialog box, FEMAP expects it to be in the International Num-
ber Format that you have chosen for Windows. Using the Windows Control Panel, if you pick the International
option, you can set the Number (not Currency, Time or Date) Format that you want to use. FEMAP only uses the
1000 Separator (Thousands separator) and Decimal Separator settings. If you choose a 1000’s Separator, that char-
acter is simply ignored. You do not even have to enter it, but if you do, it will be skipped. The Decimal Separator,
on the other hand, is used to defined the location of the decimal portion of the number. All numbers must be entered
with the proper decimal separator, not necessarily “.”. The Leading Zero and Decimal Digits options are not used.
 4-66 User Interface

4.4.7 Numerical Input - The FEMAP Calculator

Any time you need to specify numeric input, whether it is a coordinate value or an ID, instead of simply typing the
value, you can enter an equation. FEMAP will evaluate the equation and use the result as your value. Equations can
consist of numeric values, variables, arithmetic operators (+,-,*,/), parentheses, and many other functions (SQRT(),
SIN(), COS() and many more). For a description of available functions, see Section C, "Function Reference".
When you want to enter an equation, you can simply type the equation, or you can use the Equation Editor. You
can access the Equation Editor by pushing Ctrl+E when you are in another command, and the Equation Editor will
appear. It presents all existing variables, arithmetic operators and functions, and lets you preview the result prior to
inserting the equation into the dialog control.
When using variables in an equation, you must predefine or create them using the Tools, Variables command
before they can be used. When you want to use a variable in an equation simply precede the variable name by either
an exclamation point (!) or an “at-sign” (@). The exclamation point (!) simply denotes the following character(s) as
a variable, while the @variable_name operation allows an equation to reference current value of another equation.
Using Variables
Variable Definition Result
!variable_name Uses the value of the variable when it was created or last updated.
@variable_name Evaluates the equation which was used to define the variable, and uses the
result of that equation.

Recursive Equations
The @variable_name operation allows an equation to reference the current value of another equation. When you
use this capability, FEMAP must reevaluate all of the referenced equations. If you create multiple levels of equa-
tions, all using the @ operator, you can create a rudimentary “subroutine” capability, where you refer to the subrou-
tine (an equation), simply by its variable name. We refer to this capability as a recursive equation because FEMAP
must “recursively” reevaluate the resulting equation until it eliminates all of the @ operators. FEMAP allows you
to create equations with up to 5 levels of “nested” @ operators. There is no limit on the number of @ operators in a
single equation, just on the number of levels.
For example, you can define the following equations:
!x = 5*sin(45)
!a = 2.5*@x
and
!b = @x+@a
This is equivalent to typing (5*sin(45))+2.5*(5*sin(45)).

Note: Be careful not to create a situation where two variables reference each other using the @ operator. Eval-
uation of either variable would cause an infinite loop and will therefore fail when it reaches the limit of
5 nested operations. If you reach the nesting limit, either by this type of error or any other, FEMAP will
display a series of error messages which represent a traceback of all of the evaluations that were taking
place. You will have to repeatedly press OK to display these messages and continue.

Advanced Editing and Shortcut Keys

Windows provides extensive capabilities to enter and edit the text and numeric input which is required by FEMAP.
You can use the various editing capabilities (direction keys, insert/delete,...) to create the input that you desire. You
can also use other options such as copy (Ctrl+Ins) and paste (Shift+Ins) to duplicate the input from one dialog con-
trol into another control, or even to insert data from a different application. For controls that accept typed input
(text boxes and drop-down lists) FEMAP supplements these basic Windows capabilities with the ability to display
additional dialog boxes for advanced editing or entity selection, and the ability to execute certain commands. These
additional capabilities are accessed through keyboard shortcut keys or the Quick Access menu described above.
 Equation Editor - Ctrl+E 4-67

4.4.8 Equation Editor - Ctrl+E

Whenever you need to enter numeric input, you can always enter an equation in place of the actual numeric result.
The Equation Editor dialog helps you create equations.

First, it contains a much wider edit control so you can simultaneously see much more of the equation text. More
importantly however, it presents all existing variables, arithmetic operators and functions, and lets you preview the
result prior to inserting the equation into the dialog control.
Variables:
This shows a list of all of the variables which are defined in the current model. When a variable is created, both the
defining equation and the result of that equation are stored. Choosing Insert Variable will modify the current equa-
tion using the selected variable and variable option. If “Stored” is selected, !variable_name will be inserted. When
the equation is evaluated, this will use the stored numeric value of the variable. If Current is selected, @vari-
able_name will be inserted. In this case, the stored defining equation will be reevaluated when the new equation is
evaluated, and the new value will be used. If Equation is selected, the entire defining equation will be inserted. This
will let you view and modify the equation. If the variable to be inserted was defined using a simple numeric value,
then all of these options will have the same result.
Ops:
This section simply allows you to see and insert a list of the available arithmetic operators. Using this option,
parentheses are always inserted in pairs and balanced.
Functions:
In addition to numbers, FEMAP equations can contain arithmetic, trigonometric and model query functions, all of
which can be inserted using this list. Some of the model query functions require an argument which is an entity
type number. They are all shown with a “->” in the function list. For those functions, the argument is automatically
inserted based on the entity type selected from the second list. For more detailed descriptions of each function, see
Section C, "Function Reference".

Note: Please be very careful when using the SQR and SQRT functions in different portions of FEMAP. When
working within the FEMAP interface, such as creating an equation for loading, SQR is “square”, while
SQRT returns the “square root”. When creating a “script” using the API Programming window (see
Section 7.2.12, "Tools, Programming, API Programming"), SQR will actually return the “square root”,
not “square” the value.

Calculate:
This button will automatically evaluate the equation that you are defining and display the result.
Save Variable:
If you want to save this equation (and its result) as a variable, simply enter the name of a new variable in this text
control. Then if you choose OK, the variable will be created.
If you are using your mouse with the equation editor, you do not have to press the various Insert buttons. Instead,
you can simply double-click with the left mouse button in any of the lists. The entry that you are pointing at will be
inserted into the equation.
4-68 User Interface
5. The FEA Process

This topic gives a general overview of the steps used to create a finite element analysis model. There are descrip-
tions of some commands and processes for creating geometry, elements, materials and properties, loads and con-
straints, and other viewing and model manipulation commands used in FEMAP. This topic is just an overview of
the process. For in-depth information on all FEMAP commands, see FEMAP Commands. You may also refer to the
FEMAP Examples for sample step by step instruction in building, using and manipulating models.

5.1 Geometry
Geometry for FEA is different than most other modeling applications. The only reason for creating geometry in
FEMAP is so you can more easily generate an accurate mesh. Keep this in mind when creating models that may be
used for FEA. An example of how FEA geometry may differ from the actual part can be as simple as a corner on a
part.
Good engineering practice dictates that a corner be filleted, to relieve stress concentrations and to match the radius
of the cutting tool being used to manufacture the part. However, a small fillet in FEA can significantly complicate
the problem. Accuracy in FEA depends on element size and aspect ratio, and an efficient transition between ele-
ments of different sizes. It takes a very small mesh and many more elements in the area of the fillet to properly ana-
lyze it. It is much easier and much faster to leave the corner as a corner and use the stress concentration that appears
there as an upper bound. If an area is so critical that the fillet or whatever other feature you are modeling must
remain, take care to create a good mesh.

5.1.1 Methods and Snap To

As discussed in Section 4, "User Interface", many FEMAP dialog boxes contain a Method button. This button
allows you to access a drop-down menu that can be used to change the way you specify coordinate locations, as
well as other information. It allows you to choose the way you want to define a location, vector, or plane. There are
many more options depending on which command you are using and what geometry you have created. Always
check the Method menu first when you think there should be easier ways to define locations, vectors or planes
because most likely there are.
Changing your Snap To method can save you significant time and effort, especially in creating geometry. Snap To
sets the cursor mode. It can be set to snap to the screen (snap off), to nodes, to points or to the grid. There is also a
“Smart Snap” option, which will automatically snap to the closest point, closest node, the midpoint of a curve, or
the center of a circular curve. It can be changed at any time using the quick access (right mouse) menu or the Select
toolbar. It is especially valuable to change the Snap To mode when defining vectors or planes. You could actually
define a plane by defining three locations by snapping to a point in space (screen), a node, and a point.

Note: Remember to change your Snap To mode when you have nodes and points already defined that are in
appropriate positions to define vectors and planes. It will save you considerable time by replacing the
keyboard coordinate input.

5.1.2 The Workplane (2-D and 3-D Geometry)

The workplane allows you to create two dimensional geometry in a three dimensional world. The workplane is a
user-defined plane in FEMAP on which the results of certain commands will be placed. The workplane becomes
very important when generating geometry.
When creating geometry, you have the option to work in 2-D or 3-D space. The geometry creation commands for
the basic entities such as line, arc, circle, and spline are separated into two major sections, 2-D and 3-D. Each sub-
menu for these creation commands are divided into a top section, which is 2-D, and a bottom section which is 3-D.

Note: When you use a command that is above the separator line in these Geometry commands, the entity will
always be created in the workplane. Any coordinates you define, if not already in the workplane, will be
projected onto the workplane.
 5-2 The FEA Process

If your line is not drawn where you expected it to be, most likely it has been projected onto the workplane. All
commands below the separator line perform operations in 3-D so your coordinate inputs will be used without mod-
ification.
Geometry creation for a large 3-D model can seem like a difficult task, especially when you are new at modeling.
However, most parts can be created by visualizing them as a series of 2-D sections. Furthermore, many individuals
have difficulty picturing objects in 3-D when viewing inherently 2-D monitors. For this reason, it is important that
you become familiar with moving your workplane so you may work in a series of 2-D steps and simplify the model
creation process.
You may also want to align the workplane to your current view to coordinate the viewing/creation process. This is
simply done by using Tools, Workplane. Pick Select Plane, click on the Method button, and change the Method to
Align to View, and provide the appropriate data. You may also align the view to the workplane with View, Align By,
Workplane.
You may also define a new workplane based upon its relative position to the current workplane. The Move Plane
section of the Tools, Workplane command enables you to define the new workplane by an offset translation and/or
a rotation from the current workplane. You may move the workplane in its Z direction and rotate it around its Z
axis. This is a quick way to change the location and azimuth of the workplane without having to define three new
points.
Another method for defining a workplane is using an existing surface. You first pick a surface, the normal of which
is used to define the normal of the plane. Then define a point to use as the origin. The normal of the surface and the
origin point completely define the plane. You may also define the X and Y directions on the workplane. You pick a
point that will be projected onto the plane to define the X direction and the Y direction will be the cross product of
this X direction and the normal from the origin.

5.1.3 Basics - Points, Lines and Curves

FEMAP gives you many options for creating points, lines and curves. These options are contained under the Geom-
etry command. Points, lines, and curves are generally the starting blocks for any model, and therefore it is import-
ant to have a good understanding of the different creation methods. The simplest method to create a point is to
define its coordinates. However, by pressing the Method button, you can access 15 different methods of defining
that coordinate location. Some of these methods will not be available if the required entities do not exist (i.e. you
cannot use the Onto Surface method if you have no surfaces in your model). Simply select the most appropriate
Method for your circumstance and input your values.
There are also a large number of ways to create a line. The four most basic are horizontal, vertical, points and coor-
dinates. Points and coordinates differ in that Point commands create a line between existing points and the Coordi-
nates command will create a line between any two specified locations. FEMAP will automatically generate points
at the end of all lines during the creation process. When creating a line with either the Geometry, Curve-Line,
Points or the Geometry, Curve-Line Coordinates, command, you will create a line in 3-D space. When using a
command such as Geometry, Curve-Line, Coordinates, remember that you may still use the Method button to
access other ways to input the coordinates, exactly as you would if you were creating a point.
Horizontal and vertical lines are created to a length specified under the parameters of the line at a location on the
workplane (horizontal is along the x-axis of the workplane and vertical is along the y-axis of the workplane).
Remember, commands above the line are created on the workplane, and those below it are created in 3-D space.
Other commands under Geometry, Curve-Line enable you to create lines by inputting their relationship to other
curves or points in your model.
Arcs and circles can also be created in the workplane or in 3-D space using a variety of commands. All arcs are typ-
ically created by specifying three entities such as center - start - end, start - end - radius, three points etc. Arcs in the
workplane are drawn as positive in the counter clockwise direction (input of a negative angle when using an angle
as one of the inputs will cause FEMAP to draw a clockwise arc). 3-D arcs have no convention. Their direction will
be specified in other ways. All of the methods can be used to create equivalent arcs. The various commands simply
ease the input process. Once again, when specifying coordinates, you can change the method of specification to
further simplify the input.
Circles are created in much the same way as arcs except, of course, they are complete circles. Again, they can be
created in the workplane or in 3-D space. Most methods are self explanatory. For more details, see Section 3.2,
"Creating Curves".
 Splines 5-3

5.1.4 Splines
Splines are complex curves of at least four points. In FEMAP splines of four points as well as those created with
the ellipse, parabola, hyperbola, equation, tangents and blend options will be stored as cubic Bezier curves. All
other splines will be stored as B-splines. The actual curve of the spline will pass through the first and last control
points but not through the others. The other points influence the curvature of the spline. The farther a control point
is from the previous control point the more the spline is ‘pulled’ in that direction. Splines can also be created on the
workplane or in 3-D space. A number of methods are available, the simplest being Geometry, Curve-Spline, Points,
where you select 4 to 110 points on the spline and the control points are automatically calculated.

Note: The Cancel button on the dialog box is utilized to both cancel the creation of the spline as well as create
it. If less than four points have been chosen, the Cancel button will enable you to terminate the process
without creating a spline. Once four points have been defined, however the Cancel button is used to ter-
minate input of more points and a spline is created. If you make an input error after four points have
been defined, you cannot cancel the procedure without creating a spline. Simply use the Tools, Undo
command to remove the spline if it is inaccurate. This is true for all procedures under Geometry, Curve-
Spline that enable you to create B-splines.

5.1.5 Curves from Surfaces

The curves from surfaces are only available when the Parasolid solid modeling engine is active. There are several
different methods to obtain curves from existing surface data and two modes available. If Update Surfaces is
checked, new curves will break the surfaces with which they interact, essentially imprinting onto the surfaces. If
Update Surfaces is Off, they are simply curves.
The various types of curves from surfaces are listed below:
• Intersect - Create curves at the intersection of two surfaces.
• Project - Project a curve onto a surface using the point on the surface closest to the point on the curve.
• Project Along Vector - Project a curve onto a surface using a specified vector.
• Parametric Curve - Create a curve from a constant U or V parametric value of a surface.
• Slice - Create a curve at the intersection of the surface and a specified cutting plane.
• Split at locations - Create a curve from one location to a second location following the underlying surface.
• Offset Curves/Washer - Create curves around holes or selected curves (edges, slots, etc.).
• Pad - Create a square pattern around a hole which is broken into four equal regions.
• Point to Point - Create a curve from one existing point to another following the surface.
• Point to Edge - Create a curve from an existing point to the closest point on a selected curve.
• Edge to Edge - Create curves from the end points of selected curve(s) to closest locations on a different selected
curve.

5.1.6 Modifying the Basics

If you are creating geometry directly in FEMAP, use the Geometry menu commands to generate the original geom-
etry, but the Modify commands allow you to both change original geometry, as well as create new geometry
between existing entities (such as fillets).
The Modify menu has three separate sections. The following topic focuses on the top section, the commands for
modifying lines and curves in this section. The following six commands are available to quickly modify geometry:
• Trim - cuts curves at the locations where they intersect other curves.
• Extend - moves the midpoints of one or more curves to a specified location.
• Break, At Location - splits one or more curves into two pieces at a location you specify.
• Break, At All Intersections - splits all selected curves at all intersection locations.
• Join - extends or shortens two selected curves to their intersection.
• Fillet - connects two curves with an arc of a specified radius.
 5-4 The FEA Process

• Chamfer - trims two intersecting curves at a specified distance from their endpoints, and connects the trimmed
area with a new line.
These commands can be used to quickly change a model from a set of intersecting and overlapping lines to an
accurate representation of your part. In fact, once you are familiar with these commands, you can start your model
with lines in the proper directions, and simply trim, fillet, etc. until your model is complete. For example, it can be
much faster to draw the outline of the part with straight lines and then fillet where required, rather than producing
each individual arc with the Geometry, Curve-Arc command.
The second section of the Modify menu command allows you to move objects, including geometry. You can Proj-
ect, Move To a point, Move By a vector, Rotate To a point, Rotate By an angle, Align or Scale. These commands can
operate on coordinate systems, points, curves, surfaces, volumes, solids, nodes, and elements. Moving one entity
will automatically move all associated entities. For example, moving a curve will also move all points connected to
that curve but not those coincident to it. You may also move an entire mesh by moving the coordinate system that
define the nodes.
You may make copies of existing entities utilizing commands under the Geometry menu. You can make copies of
points, curves, surfaces, volumes, and solids. You can copy along a vector, in a radial direction, by rotating around
a vector, reflecting across a plane, and scaling from a location. The procedures for executing the above commands
are straightforward and the exercises in the Examples guide will show you the usefulness of many of these com-
mands.

Note: The Modify Trim, Extend, etc. commands are not available for solid geometry curves. These curves
must be manipulated with the Geometry, Solid and Curve from Surface commands.

5.1.7 Surfaces, Boundary Surfaces, Volumes, Solids

For all models the ultimate goal of the preprocessing portion of FEA is meshing. For most models you will use sur-
faces, volumes, solids and boundary surfaces to create the mesh. Therefore, it is important to have a good under-
standing of how they work. Most often you will create these entities from already existing geometry (surfaces and
boundary surfaces from lines and curves, volumes from surfaces, solids from surfaces and boundary surfaces). Sur-
faces (including boundary surfaces) are used to create 2-D elements and volumes and solids are used for 3-D ele-
ments.
5.1.7.1 Surfaces
There are several general methods to create a surface:
• Select 3 or 4 corners and a planar surface (tri or quad) will be created between them.
• Use existing curves to create a surface from “bounding” curves.
Edge Curves - three or four bounding curves coincidentally ended.
Aligned - four control curves aligned in the same parametric direction.
Ruled - create a ruled surface between two curves.
• Move a curve along a path.
Extrude - straight line path
Revolve - uses an angle around a center vector.
Sweep - follows the path of a chosen curve.
• Analytical (Predefined Shape) - planar, cylindrical, conical, tubular or spherical surfaces.
• Offset - creates a copy of an existing surface and locates it using specified offset from original surface.
• Convert - attempts to convert a boundary surface into a parasolid surface.
• Remove Hole - removes internal loop (holes, slots, cutouts) from a surface.
• Create “General Bodies” of NonManifold Geometry
NonManifold Add - adds nonmanifold geometry (typically surfaces at “t-junctions” relative to one another)
together into a one “general body”.
Recover Manifold Geometry - creates several manifold geometric bodies from a single “general body”.
 Boundary Surfaces 5-5

Extract - extracts any number of selected surfaces from solids or “general bodies” and creates appropriate new
general bodies, when needed.
• From Mesh - creates a surface by selecting shell elements from an existing mesh.
• Using existing solid geometry.
Explode - create individual surfaces for all faces of a solid. The solid is lost.
Midsurfaces - create midsurfaces between surfaces of thin-walled solids.
Four sided surfaces are considered optimum for meshing purposes because you can easily generate a nicely
mapped mesh of planar elements. During the meshing of surfaces or solids (which mesh the surfaces first) FEMAP
will determine which surfaces can be map meshed and will do so accordingly. You can also use the Mesh, Mesh
Control, Approach On Surface command to dictate a mapped mesh on a surface.
5.1.7.2 Boundary Surfaces
You may use the Geometry, Boundary Surface command to create a boundary. A series of lines and curves with
coincident endpoints are selected. Holes can be added by picking existing curves inside the boundary curves that
form closed holes.
You may also create a boundary automatically by using the Sketch command. The Sketch command will allow you
to use the Geometry creation commands to draw lines, arcs, etc. When you press Finish Sketch, FEMAP will auto-
matically take these curves and produce a boundary. This is a very convenient method to quickly define a boundary.
Boundaries are created from any number of continuous curves. These curves must be either joined at the ends or
have coincident points and be fully enclosed. They cannot just intersect.
Boundaries can contain holes, as long as the area of the hole is completely contained within the boundary and they
do not overlap. FEMAP will automatically determine which curves if any represent holes in the boundary. Because
of the arbitrary geometric nature of boundaries, many models may require you to be more careful in the mesh gen-
eration process to obtain a good mesh. For more information on the boundary mesher, see Section 5.2, "Elements
and Meshing".
5.1.7.3 Volumes
There are three basic methods to create volumes. They are:
• Multiple existing entities as components
Corners - locate four to eight corners.
Surface - four to six bounding coincident edged surfaces.
Between - two surfaces of the same shape.
• Move a surface along a path:
Extrude - straight line.
Revolve - angle around a central vector.
• Analytical (predefined shapes) - cylinder, cone, tube, or sphere.
The only reason to create a volume is to create a mesh. If you can create a volume that accurately represents your
part, you can readily create a good mesh. However, volumes have two important restrictions:
• No more than six surfaces or eight corner points can be used to define a volume.
• A volume must be continuous. No voids are allowed.
These restrictions limit the usefulness of volume meshing. For this reason, this manual will concentrate on other
methods to obtaining 3-D meshing including the Mesh, Extrude, the Mesh, Revolve, and the solid meshing com-
mands. They all have the characteristic capability to create a solid element mesh from a 2-D mesh. Since it is
impossible to obtain a good 3-D mesh by starting with a bad 2-D mesh, it is even more important that you under-
stand how to generate good 2-D meshes. The mesh generation topic will go more fully into this aspect of FEA.
5.1.7.4 Solids
The solid meshing commands are available in all configurations of FEMAP. They allow you to create solid models
in the Parasolid Solid Engine. You may also import solid models created in other CAD programs using the Paraso-
 5-6 The FEA Process

lid engine, and then modify or mesh them using FEMAP. There are additional options that allows you to import
IGES trimmed surface data that can be stitched into a FEMAP solid, or import STEP AP203 solid data.
In FEMAP there are two basic ways to create solids:
• Using primitives - Create blocks, cylinders, cones, and spheres.
• Using surfaces/boundaries - Extrude/Revolve to create a new solid or Add/Remove material from an existing
solid. Sweep to create a solid which follows a “drive curve” or Sweep Between to create a solid between two
selected surfaces. Stitch to create a solid from surfaces that completely enclose a volume.
There are also a number of ways to modify existing solids.
• Fillet - Fillet an edge/edges of a solid with a specified radius.
• Chamfer - Chamfer an edge/edges of an existing solid to a specified length.
• Shell - Convert a solid to a thin walled shell by offsetting faces.
• Thicken - Thicken Sheet bodies into solids or increase/decrease thickness of solids.
• Extend - Choose a face on one solid and extend it to the chosen face of a different solid.
• Fill Hole - Choose a face of a cavity and a new solid will be created to “fill” the entire cavity.
• Remove Face - Choose faces to remove from geometry to de-feature the solid.
• Add - Join two solids to form a single solid.
• Remove - Subtract one solid from another.
• Common - Create a solid from the intersecting volumes of two solids.
• Embed - Create two solids, one from solid from the intersecting volumes of two solids
• Intersect - Intersects the surfaces of the selected solids.
• Slice - Cut a solid with a specified plane; with a specified plane, but leave matching surfaces on both solids:
with existing face(s) of sheet solids; or with existing curves using the normal vector or a specified vector.
• Embed Face - Extrude a face into a new solid and embed it into the existing one.
Three utility commands exist for solid modeling.
• Stitch - Sew surfaces into a FEMAP solid. Particularly useful for IGES files.
• Explode - Explode a solid into individual surfaces created from each face. The original solid data will be lost.
• Cleanup - Remove extra curves/points that are not required to define the solid.

5.2 Elements and Meshing

As mentioned above, the entire reason for creating geometry is to produce a good finite element mesh. This section
describes the different element types contained in FEMAP, as well as meshing procedures to obtain these elements.

5.2.1 Element Types

There are four basic element groups in FEMAP. They are line, plane, volume and “others”. A list of all the ele-
ments currently supported by FEMAP, including a brief description, is provided below.
5.2.1.1 Line Elements
• Rod - Uniaxial element with tension, compression and torsional stiffness. No bending or shear. Typically used
to model trusses.
• Tube - Rod element with tubular cross section. Some analysis programs will support bending and shear. Often
used to model pipes.
• Curved Tube - Tube element with an arc for the neutral axis.
• Bar - Uniaxial element with tension, compression, torsion and bending. Used to model general beam/frame
structures. Similar to beam.
• Beam - Uniaxial element with tension, compression, torsion and bending. It can be tapered and have different
properties at each end. Used to model beam/frame structures.
 Plane Elements 5-7

• Link - Rigid link with six stiffnesses at each end. Used to represent members that are very stiff compared to
their connections.
• Curved Beam - Beam element with an arc for the neutral axis.
• Spring/Damper - Stiffness and damper element. Can be torsional or axial. Used to represent purely torsional or
axial structural members. Also, used to create CBUSH element in Nastran.
• DOF Spring - Spring element used to connect any one degree of freedom from one node to any one degree of
freedom of another node with a specified stiffness.
• Gap - Nonlinear element with different tension, compression and shear stiffness. Used to represent surfaces or
points which can separate, close or slide relative to each other.
• Plot Only - Nonstructural. Used to represent structural features that are not being analyzed but aid in the visu-
alization of the model. Also used to define ABAQUS rigid elements for contact.
5.2.1.2 Plane Elements
• Shear Panel - Resists only shear forces. Used to model structures which contain very thin elastic sheets, typi-
cally supported by stiffeners.
• Membrane - Resists only in plane normal forces. Used to represent very thin elastic sheets.
• Bending Only - Resists only bending forces. Used to model plates that will only resist bending.
• Plate - Resists membrane, shear and bending forces. Used to model structures comprised of thin plate shells.
• Laminate - similar to the plate element, except that this element is composed of one or more layers (lamina).
Each layer can represent a different material. To create a laminate you need a Layup to specify the material,
thickness, orientation angle and global ply ID (optional) of each ply and a Laminate property.
• Plane Strain - Biaxial plane element. Create a 2-D model of a solid which does not vary through its depth.
Used to model very thick solids which have a constant cross section.
• Axisymmetric Shell - 1 dimensional element used to represent surfaces of revolution.
• Planar Plot Only - Nonstructural. Used to represent structural features that are not being analyzed but aid in
the visualization of the model. Also used to define ABAQUS rigid elements for contact.
5.2.1.3 Volume Elements
• Axisymmetric - Two dimensional element used to represent volumes of revolution.
• Solid - Three dimensional solid element used to represent any three dimensional structure.
• Solid Laminate - Similar to three-dimensional solid element, except that this element is composed of one or
more layers (lamina). Each layer can represent a different material. To create a solid laminate you need a Layup
to specify the material, thickness, orientation angle and global ply ID of each ply and a Solid Laminate property.
• Solid Cohesive - Similar to three-dimensional solid element, except that this element is used to create a cohe-
sive layer between layers of other elements, which can be used to determine progressive ply failure (i.e., delam-
ination) in Simcenter Nastran.
5.2.1.4 Other Elements
• Mass - Three dimensional mass and/or inertia element located at a node. Used to represent parts of a structure
which contain mass but do not add stiffness.
• Mass Matrix - Generalized mass element. Mass and inertia properties are defined as a 6x6 mass matrix.
• Spring/Damper to Ground - Used to create CBUSH element on a single node connected to “ground”.
• DOF Spring to Ground - Spring element to connects any one degree of freedom to “ground”.
• Rigid - Rigid connection between a master and unlimited number of slave nodes. Used to model connections
which are very stiff compared to the rest of the model.
• General Matrix - General stiffness, damping, or mass element defined by a 6x6 or 12x12 stiffness matrix.
Models custom stiffness connections not adequately represented by other stiffness elements.
• Slide Line - Contact element which allows input of frictional and stiffness contact information between nodes
and surfaces. Modeling of finite sliding surface interaction between two deformable bodies.
 5-8 The FEA Process

• Weld/Fastener - Connection element between two sets of shell elements which uses weld diameter, length, and
an isotropic material to determine the stiffness of the connection. Can also be used to simulate “Spot” welds.
Fastener elements are available for certain solvers which allow several options for modeling specific behavior.
• Nastran General Matrix - Used to support the “general element”, GENEL, for Simcenter and MSC Nastran
solvers. This element allows stiffness/deflection influence coefficients to be input for pairs of nodes and their
associated DOFs.
5.2.1.5 Mesh Sizing
Before you create elements, you should first determine the mesh size using the Mesh, Mesh Control command. You
can set a default mesh size or default number of elements, which is used for all geometry where a specific size or
number of elements is not defined. You can also define a specific mesh size or number of elements along a line or
on a surface.
Mesh sizes can also be biased so that a finer mesh can be obtained at either end or in the middle. Mesh sizes can be
set interactively. You can also define hard points on curves or surfaces to ensure a node is placed at that location.
You can even define a particular mapped meshing approach on a surface.
Always define mesh sizes carefully to ensure good element aspect ratios, high resolution in areas of large stress
gradients and proper matching of nodes where curves, surfaces, boundaries or volumes/solids meet. The last point
is especially important because if nodes are not coincident, your model will have free edges or faces at these points
and will not solid mesh or solve properly. Remember to always merge coincident nodes before attempting to solid
mesh or analyze your model.
5.2.1.6 Mesh Attributes
If you are meshing geometry with different element types or properties you may find it helpful to set meshing attri-
butes. These commands allow you to specify various meshing parameters directly on geometry in FEMAP. This
can save you time by allowing you to select multiple entities to mesh at the same time while still meshing with dif-
ferent parameters. Parameters that can be set include: properties, offsets, releases, orientations.

5.2.2 Element Creation

In FEMAP there are seven methods to create elements:
1. Create an element one at a time - Model, Element command.
Useful for simple geometry, line elements, and to fix areas of distorted elements.
2. Create multiple elements on geometry (curves, surfaces, solids and volumes).
Mesh, Geometry - line elements on curves, plane (or axisymmetric) elements on surfaces, and solid elements in
volumes and solids. When meshing surfaces, you can also combine multiple surfaces by creating a multi-surface
boundary which will be meshed to ignore interior features.
3. Copy existing elements.
Mesh, Copy - make copies of existing elements along a vector.
Mesh, Radial Copy - similar to copy except in a radial direction.
Mesh, Scale - create a scaled copy of the element around a given location.
Mesh, Rotate - rotate the duplicate copies around a vector (axis of rotation).
Mesh, Reflect - reflect (or flip) elements through a plane.
4. Convert 2-D model (curves or elements) into a 3-D model of planar or solid elements.
Mesh, Extrude - often used to generate 3-D solids from a 2-D mesh.
Curve - creates 2-D elements by moving existing curves along a vector or curve.
Element - creates 2-D from 1-D and 3-D from 2-D elements by moving along a vector, a curve, or element nor-
mals.
Mesh, Revolve - similar to Mesh, Extrude, except revolves around a vector. Often used to solid mesh volumes of
revolution.
5. Use non-geometry meshing commands.
 Surface Meshing Guidelines 5-9

Mesh, Between - produces meshes (1-D, 2-D or 3-D) between corners.

Mesh, Region - creates a ruled region of nodes and/or elements between patterns of nodes.
Mesh, Transition - produces an automatic mesh between existing nodes. Useful to “fix” regions between surface
meshes that are improperly connected.
Mesh, Connect - zip or unzip elements at the nodes. Connect with line elements, rigid elements, or constraint
equations.
Mesh, Editing - split existing elements with pre-defined patterns, interactively, based on multiple selection, or
nodal connectivity to specific element.
Mesh, Remesh/Smooth - used to modify an existing mesh. Useful for fixing or “cleaning-up” a distorted area of a
mesh.
Mesh, Edge Members - creates 1-D elements from 2-D or 2-D elements from 3-D using selected nodes found on
the edges of selected elements.
6. Use solid meshing - automatic meshing with 3-D tetrahedral elements.
Most useful when a 3-D solid mesh of a fairly complex geometry is required.
Mesh a solid created in FEMAP with the Parasolid modeling engine.
Automatically mesh any enclosed volume of planar elements.
Import and mesh geometry from any ACIS or Parasolid-based CAD package.
Import, stitch and mesh IGES trimmed surface data.
Import STEP solid body entities and mesh automatically.
The solid mesher also incorporates the capability to import a triangular surface mesh from a Stereolithography
file. The triangular surface representation found in most STL files is not of sufficient quality (element shape and
aspect ratio) to be fed directly into the automatic mesher. The Mesh, Remesh menu contains commands which
can help you transform the poor triangular surface mesh into a better one.
7. Use solid meshing - semi-automatic meshing with 3-D hexahedral elements.
Useful for creating partial or full solid hexahedral meshes.
Subdividing of solid into hex meshable regions is required.
Mesh sizes on all solids to be hex meshed must be set at the same time using the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On
Solid command with the hex meshing option chosen. Matching surfaces are linked and mesh sizes set so the hex
mesh can propagate between solids.
5.2.2.1 Surface Meshing Guidelines
The mesh generation tools above provide a wide array of methods to generate your mesh. Examine your part before
you begin the meshing process to determine which method is most applicable to your part. The guidelines below
provide a few handy tips for the mesh generation process for surface element meshing.
• Most meshes involve creating geometry first. Define these accurately from the beginning, keeping in mind you
are using it for meshing purposes only (i.e., remove small features if they are not critical to the analysis).
• Use the Geometry, Surface command to create four(4)-sided surfaces whenever possible, specifically for criti-
cal stress areas. Subdivide your part into regions if required. Four-sided surfaces enable an all quad mapped
mesh with little or no distortion.
• Use the Geometry, Boundary Surface command to define boundaries that cannot be generated as surfaces.
Remember the boundary mesher will work best with areas that have similar length and width dimensions (glob-
ular as opposed to long and thin).
• If you have solid geometry that has surfaces that are highly skewed, or you just have surfaces that are split at
places that you do not want to split the mesh, use the Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Surfaces on Solid
command to create a multi-surface boundary. This boundary surface will then be meshed, and will ignore the
“interior” curves and other features. Many surface models will generate much better meshes using this
approach.
• Define your default mesh size before you start meshing by using Mesh, Mesh Control, Default Size.
 5-10 The FEA Process

• Use the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Curve/Surface command to individually define mesh sizes for curves and
surfaces that are used in more than one mesh region. Do this before you start meshing to prevent misalignment
between meshes in your model.
• Once mesh sizes are established, use Mesh, Geometry, Surface/Solid commands to mesh your model. When
performing a free/boundary mesh, take note of allowable distortion for quad elements. You may want to change
the default to allow more or less distortion.
• Use Mesh Control, Approach on Surface to link surfaces or specify mapped meshes on surfaces that would oth-
erwise be free meshed.
• You can use the Mesh, Revolve/Extrude command to generate 2-D elements from 1-D elements or curves
whenever possible. This can be useful for cylindrical shapes.
• Utilize symmetry whenever possible to reduce meshing effort. Model size is significantly reduced (and there-
fore run time) if the loading/constraints are also symmetrical. If loads/constraints are not symmetrical, you can
use the Mesh, Reflect Element command to reflect the mesh through a plane.
• Remember, you may also want to use Mesh, Copy and Mesh, Rotate to produce replica elements instead of per-
forming more surface or boundary meshing.
• Use the Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes command to merge coincident nodes and connect the meshes.
• Use the View Select command and change the View to Free Edge to verify that you do not have any unwanted
free edges in the model.
The above guidelines provide a good basis for surface element meshing. It is critical, even when solid meshing is
the ultimate goal, that you establish a good surface mesh.
5.2.2.2 Solid Meshing Guidelines
• Often times you can avoid using volumes or solids by simply extruding or revolving truly planar elements into
solid elements. If your part has a consistent third dimension, use Mesh, Extrude or Mesh, Revolve to create solid
elements.
• Use the Mesh, Edge Members command if planar elements are required on faces of solid elements. Once planar
elements are created, you can extrude them into solid elements.
• For simple solid parts, use volume meshing, Mesh, Between, or Mesh, Region to create a solid mesh. These pro-
cedures cannot be used, however, if there are voids in the volume.
• If you have solid models with holes or other complicated intricacies, use the solid tetrahedral mesher. This
mesher creates a surface mesh first, so all items applicable to surface meshing apply. If you have purchased
FEMAP you may import in ACIS, Parasolid, IGES, STEP, or STL files or use the FEMAP solid modeling com-
mands to define geometry to create 3-D meshes.
• If you do frequent hexahedral meshing, become familiar with the types of solid shapes that can be hexahedral
meshed, and focus on slicing your solid models into shapes of those types. When slicing your solid, take care to
avoid creating sliver surfaces or solids.
• If some portions a geometric part can be subdivided easily for hexahedral meshing, but it is too difficult or time
consuming for other portions, consider creating hex elements on the easy portions and tetrahedral elements on
the others, by using pyramid elements automatically generated at the transitions between the various portions.
This can be accomplished by sizing all portions of the model for hex meshing, hex meshing portions which can
be hex meshed, then tet meshing the remaining portions using Meshing Approach set to Tet/Pyramid Mesh.
• There are a wide array of solid and surface modification and combining tools. Take the time to learn what each
one does. Used in combination they can be very powerful and accomplish many different tasks useful for solid
meshing preparation. In addition, as a first step before solid tetrahedral meshing, try using Mesh, Geometry
Preparation to “prepare” geometry using a combination of “smart” surface splitting, feature suppression, and
creation of combined curves/boundary surfaces.
• Use the Explode command to create surfaces that you can cleanup, and then stitch back into a solid for meshing.
If you follow the above guidelines for both surface and solid meshing, creating high quality element meshes can be
a simple task. Simply select where to create the elements, what type to create, and with what property and FEMAP
will do the rest. Typically, you must define the property before creating the elements, although if no property is
specified, FEMAP will prompt you to create one.
 Element Shape Quality 5-11

5.2.2.3 Element Shape Quality

Once you have created a mesh, always check all elements for distortion with the Tools, Check, Element Quality
command. You can set maximum distortion criteria and make a group of any distorted elements. Fix all distorted
elements, if possible, before adding any loads or constraints. This is especially important if the distorted elements
are in a key region of the model.

5.3 Hexahedral Modeling and Meshing

The following section gives an explanation of the steps necessary to perform solid hexahedral meshing. For more
information, see FEMAP Commands.

5.3.1 Geometry Preparation

Preparing the geometry is the most critical part of the hex meshing process. Complex solids cannot be automati-
cally hex meshed, but if divided properly into simpler solids, a full or partial hex mesh can easily be generated.
5.3.1.1 Identifying Hex-Meshable Solids
The first step in solid hex meshing is to be able to identify hex-meshable solids or regions within solids. These
would include, but are not necessarily limited to, six sided solids, extruded solids and revolved solids. Some exam-
ples are shown below.
Examples of solids that can be hex meshed:

You must follow a fairly strict procedure for most solids to create a hex mesh.
1. Subdivide your model into hex-meshable solids.
2. Set the mesh sizes using Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid, with the hex meshing option.
3. Verify that all solids are hex-meshable, and are properly linked to adjacent solids. If not, return to step 1, and
continue dividing your solids.
4. Hex mesh using the Mesh, Geometry, Hex Mesh Solids command.
Each of these steps is extremely important if you are going to succeed in creating a complete, correct hex mesh.
5.3.1.2 Subdividing the Solid
Once you are familiar with the types of solids that are hex-meshable you must divide your solid into these regions.
FEMAP offers a number of commands for this process.
 5-12 The FEA Process

They include the following commands all contained on the Geometry, Solid menu (refer to the commands manual
for descriptions and use): Add, Remove, Common, Embed, Slice, Embed Face.
The Slice and Embed commands are particularly useful when attempting to create hex- meshable regions. If you
need to clean up particular surfaces on solids you can use Geometry, Solid, Explode. You can then modify these
surfaces or create new surfaces with the surface modeling commands. The Geometry, Solid, Stitch forms the sur-
faces back into a solid.

5.3.2 Mesh Sizing

Consistent mesh sizing throughout the model is necessary for hex meshing. It is not possible to transition from a
large number of elements to a small number of elements with hexahedral elements. Sizes of elements can change
but the number must be consistent. This consistent sizing must propagate through the model, across the multiple
solids that you have created. For this reason, local mesh sizing operations have little use in hex meshing. Global
sizing and mapped surface approaches and surface linking are much more important.
The Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid command (with the Hex Meshing option selected) is the primary mecha-
nism to setup the necessary mesh sizing for successful hex meshing. Since many surfaces on your solids must be
mapped meshed, curves on opposite sides of those surfaces must have the same number of element divisions. Once
you have properly subdivided your part, the Size on Solid command handles all sizing automatically. Simply spec-
ify a nominal size.
If further mesh grading is required, or you want to modify the sizes that Size on Solid has created, you must use
great care. If you manually change the mesh size along a curve, you must also manually change the mesh sizes (to
the same settings) on all other curves in your solids that must match the first curve to maintain mapped meshable
surfaces.
5.3.2.1 Ensuring Surface Linking
If you have subdivided your solid surface, linking is required to guarantee a continuous mesh. This is done when
you specify the Hex Meshing size with Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid.

If you select Hex Meshing in the Size For area, Adjacent Surface Matching is checked and grayed. FEMAP auto-
matically looks at all surfaces in all selected solids and finds any coincident ones.
 Specifying Sizes and Surface Approaches 5-13

If Adjust Colors is checked, you can visualize which surfaces have been linked, and what solids are hex-meshable.
Remove Previous Slaving will delete any surface approaches.

Note: It is important to remember that FEMAP will only look at the solids you select. If this command is run
multiple times on different regions of the subdivided solid, the meshes will not match. To hex mesh the
whole part, you must select all subdivisions at the same time.

5.3.2.2 Specifying Sizes and Surface Approaches

FEMAP has the ability to use several different meshing approaches on surfaces via the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Approach on Surface command. These approaches can be used to map mesh surfaces that would otherwise free
mesh, and to match surface meshes. These methods are very useful in getting a solid to hex mesh or simply to get a
better hex mesh. See Section 5, "Meshing" in FEMAP Commands for information on the different approaches that
are available.

Free Mesh Four Corner

Mapped Approach

Specifying individual mesh sizes on curves or surfaces in hex meshing is not recommended. The nature of hex
meshing dictates that changes in the number of elements in one area must propagate throughout the model. FEMAP
will not automatically update other sizes based on a change. You must do this manually. Be very careful, however,
since because you can easily get a discontinuous hex mesh, or no hex mesh at all.

5.3.3 Hex Meshing

If you have properly subdivided your solid, and set mesh sizes and surface linking correctly the actual hex meshing
is easy. Use Mesh, Geometry, Hex Mesh Solids and select the solids. The nodes on the linked surfaces can be auto-
matically merged.

5.3.4 Hex Mesh From Elements

There are times when the hex meshing fails due to bad geometry or adjacent solids with different edge lengths. The
command HexMesh From Elements provides a way to mesh geometry that has become corrupt thus causing the
normal hex meshing technique to fail. This command allows you to individually map mesh the surfaces that make
up the solid and then generate solid hexes from the surface mesh.

5.4 Midsurface Modeling and Meshing

Midsurfacing is a tool designed for use in certain instances. It is not a general purpose design tool. The solids used
must be thin in relation to overall size, sheet metal parts or plastic injection molding parts are good examples.
Although, it is only useful for these type of “thin-walled” parts, it is an extremely valuable modeling tool for these
parts. You can produce a much smaller and much more accurate model by meshing midsurfaces formed from a
“thin-walled” part, than solid meshing the thin-wall. Differences in model sizes can literally be an order of magni-
tude in some cases, thereby significantly reducing run time. You even get the added benefit of a more accurate
solution in most cases.
The tools for creating midsurfaces are contained on the Geometry, Midsurface menu. Their operation is discussed
more fully in the FEMAP Commands manual, but a general overview is provided below.
 5-14 The FEA Process

Note: In addition to creating midsurfaces and meshing them, FEMAP provides another capability that can be
helpful in creating midsurface meshes on constant thickness parts. In this case, you can simply mesh the
outer or inner surfaces of the part, and use the Modify, Move By, Offset Element command to move the
elements to the midsurface. For more information, see Section 4.9.1.4, "Modify, Move By Menu" in
FEMAP Commands manual.

5.4.1 Creating Midsurfaces

The ease of midsurface creation depends greatly on the geometry of your model. Thin flat parts will be nearly com-
pletely automatic. Parts with widely varying curvature, small features and/or fillets etc. will take longer and require
manual work. Become familiar with FEMAP’s midsurfacing capabilities and attempt to prepare your model ahead
of time for easy midsurface generation.
5.4.1.1 Automatic
• Fully automatic - the Geometry, Midsurface, Automatic command uses a Parasolid face pairing algorithm to
create appropriately trimmed and intersected midsurfaces based on pairs of faces. Trying different options
available in the command may improve the created midsurfaces.
• Fully automatic (using Pre-V11.1 Midsurface Method) - the Geometry, Midsurface, Automatic command has an
option that runs the three steps of the midsurface sequence. Be careful when running this command because the
delete process may delete surfaces that you need, and they may be hard to recreate.
• Three-step automatic - Generate midsurfaces, Intersect them and then cleanup unnecessary midsurfaces. The
Cleanup command, when run manually, does not actually delete the surfaces. It places them on a separate layer
so you can review them to be sure you want to delete all of them. This approach is often better for very complex
solids.
With either of these automatic approaches chances are good you will still need to do some manual cleanup unless
the part is a simple thin-walled solid.
5.4.1.2 Manual
Manual midsurface creation and cleanup will involve all facets of geometry modeling in FEMAP. You need to be
familiar with all curve, surface, and solid modification tools.
A good general approach for midsurfacing a model is provided below.
1. Perform the three-step automatic process above.
2. Compare midsurface geometry with the solid geometry
3. Manually trim pieces which are not needed to represent the solid.
4. Manually create midsurfaces it the automatic procedure did not produce them. This may require modifying the
solid and/or its surfaces.
5. Run Geometry, Solid, Cleanup on the midsurfaces to remove internal slices. (This option will require you to then
re-intersect all surfaces so nodes match when you mesh).
6. Carefully check your midsurface geometry.

5.4.2 Preparing for Meshing

5.4.2.1 Mesh Attributes
Automatically assigning mesh attributes will create properties of the correct thickness for any midsurface that was
generated from a section of constant thickness in your model. The same material will be used for all of these prop-
erties, so if you are using different materials edit the properties or assign mesh attributes manually. If you have sur-
faces that vary in thickness you will have to mesh the surface and then use Modify, Update Elements, Adjust Plate.
For more information, see FEMAP Commands manual.
5.4.2.2 Mesh Sizing
Mesh sizing is carried out in the same manner as for any plate mesh. Use approaches on surfaces to get mapped
meshes. Specify sizes along curves, custom sizes, and use hard points if necessary. Remember to check that mesh
sizes match along coincident curves and surfaces.
 Meshing 5-15

5.4.3 Meshing
If you have set up your mesh sizes properly and assigned mesh attributes to all of the surfaces, meshing is simple.
Select all the surfaces and FEMAP will use their associated attributes. If you have not assigned mesh attributes you
will have to mesh surfaces with different properties separately. Once meshing is complete, merge coincident nodes
and check your model for free edges. If you have done a good job with the geometry creation there should be no
internal free edges, otherwise you will have to fix them. Use the manual meshing commands or go back to the
geometry and perform further manipulations.

5.5 Materials and Properties

The following section provide an overview of material and property information required for input in FEMAP.
These sections do not provide a comprehensive description of all options of properties and materials. For more
information, see Section 4, "Finite Element Modeling" in FEMAP Commands.

5.5.1 Materials
FEMAP supports four regular material types and a general tabular data type:
• Isotropic:
Constant properties in all directions.
All properties entered as a single value.
• Orthotropic (Both 2-D and 3-D):
Material properties are direction dependent
Parameters defined in two planar directions or three principal directions.
• Anisotropic (Both 2-D and 3-D):
Similar to Orthotropic except more general.
Specify parameters as a general 3x3 (2-D) or 6x6 (3-D) elasticity matrix.
• Hyperelastic:
Materials subject to large deformations, such as rubber.
Input distortional and volumetric deformation or stress/strain data.
Limited solver support - many solvers do not support this material type - check your solver before using this
material type.
• General (Other Types):
Solver specific types - LS-Dyna, MARC, Abaqus, Simcenter Nastran, and MSC Nastran. Refer to solver docu-
mentation for uses and variables
User defined types - Accessible only in the FEMAP neutral file or through the API.
Isotropic, orthotropic, and anisotropic materials can also have nonlinear material properties associated with them.
You set the type of nonlinearity (Linear Elastic, Elastic/Plastic, or Plastic) and input material data such as yield
stress and stress-strain curves.
FEMAP is shipped with a few different libraries containing a number of material types, which can be accessed via
the Femap Standard Libraries tab in the Select From Material Library dialog box. Although by no means com-
plete, the material libraries shipped with FEMAP do contain common materials with their respective properties
derived from the U.S. Government’s MIL-HDBK-5 and other sources. Materials defined by a user can be saved to
libraries which can then be accessed via the Personal or Shared tab of the Select From Material Library dialog box.
For more information about loading materials from a library, see Section 4.3.6, "Library Selection".
Always check Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" to be certain a material will translate correctly into your
analysis program.

5.5.2 Properties
Properties are used to define additional analysis information for elements. Most property data is geometric (thick-
ness, area, etc.) but some types will also include inertia, stiffness or mass, as well as other data depending on the
type of element/property. There is a direct relationship between the element type and the property type. All ele-
 5-16 The FEA Process

ments, except for certain specialized elements like Plot Only or Rigid, must reference a property. Therefore, when-
ever you want to use a particular element type, you should first create the corresponding property. Similarly, most
properties require a reference to a material, so you should create your materials first, and then create properties.
Like materials, various property libraries are shipped with FEMAP and can be accessed via the Femap Standard
Libraries tab in the Select From Property Library dialog box. Properties defined by a user can be saved to libraries
which can then be accessed via the Personal or Shared tab of the Select From Property Library dialog box. For
more information about loading properties from a library, see Section 4.3.6, "Library Selection".
Always check Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" to be certain the property will translate correctly into your
analysis program.

5.6 Loads and Constraints

It is very important to accurately simulate the real world loads and constraints that are applied to your model.
FEMAP provides an extensive array of load types, constraints and methods that make this possible.

5.6.1 Loads
FEMAP provides a wide variety of load types and a wide variety of methods for placing these loads on your FEA
model. Loads and constraints are set based, making it possible to categorize them into different cases for different
analyses. Four main load categories exist, with several types of loads under each category, to choose from:
1. Body or global loads:
Acceleration - translational (i.e. gravity), rotational, and varying translational
Velocity - rotational
Thermal - default temperature
2. Nodal loads:
Force/Moment
Follower Force/Follower Moment
Displacement/Enforced Rotation
Velocity/Rotational Velocity
Acceleration/Rotational Acceleration
Temperature
Heat generation (heat energy/unit volume)
Heat flux (heat energy/unit area)
FEMAP Flow/FEMAP Thermal/FEMAP Advanced Thermal specific loading conditions
3. Elemental loads:
Distributed (load/length across a line element)
Pressure
Temperature
Heat generation (heat energy/unit volume)
Heat flux (heat energy/unit area)
Convection
Radiation
4. Geometry-based loads:
Points
Lines
Surfaces - includes Bearing Load and Torque, which may only be applied via a surface-based load.
All four load categories can be used for static, nonlinear or dynamic analyses.
 Loads 5-17

Body loads are applied to the entire body, therefore only one block of body load information can be specified for
each load set. The body loads are most often used to simulate gravity, or to define default temperatures for thermal
analyses.
Nodal loads can be applied by both the Model, Load, Nodal and Model, Load, Nodal on Face commands. With
Model, Load, Nodal, you directly select the nodes for load application. With Model, Load, Nodal on Face, you
select a particular face of elements, and nodes on that face will be automatically selected by FEMAP. The Model,
Load, Nodal on Face command also enables you to select the Adjacent Faces method for load application. This
method will be discussed further below.
Elemental loads can be distributed, pressure, temperature, heat generation, heat flux, convection or radiation. The
distributed loads allows you to define a load/length value for line elements, while pressure defines a load/area for
faces of planar elements or volumetric elements. Heat flux, convection, and radiation loads are also applied directly
to a face, while temperature and heat generation loads are applied just to the element itself.
Geometry based loads can be either nodal or elemental. You apply the loads to geometry (points, curves, surfaces)
and use the geometry to orient the loads. Any nodes or elements that are associated with the geometry will have the
loads applied to them appropriately upon export for analysis. You may check how your geometry based loads actu-
ally apply to existing nodes and elements using the Model, Load, Expand command.
Nodal, elemental and geometry based loads can be time, temperature, or frequency dependent. You must first cre-
ate the function with the Model, Function command or the Function/Table Editor dockable pane. Both require you
to choose the appropriate types (vs. Time, vs. Temperature, or vs. Frequency). You simply need to define the mag-
nitude variation as a function of one of these types, and then reference this function when applying the loads. There
will be more on functions, nonlinear and transient analyses later in this manual.
When creating nodal loads on faces or most elemental loads, you must supply the face of the element(s). There are
6 methods available to you in FEMAP:
• Adjacent Faces - the most powerful method for solid or planar elements, see below...
• Individual Faces - selects individual element faces
• Near Surface - selects element faces near selected surface
• Near Coordinates - selects element faces near specified coordinates
• Face ID - selects the same element face for all selected elements
• Model Free Faces - similar to Adjacent Faces, see below...
The Adjacent Faces method is the most often-used method. Here you choose just one face, easily done graphically,
and then specify a tolerance angle. FEMAP will search all the selected elements for faces that are connected to the
face you chose and that are within the specified tolerance from being coplanar with an already selected face. This
can be used to easily find all faces on an outer surface of a solid, regardless of the surface shape, or other similar
operations. Model Free Faces is similar, but places the load on all “Free Faces”, even on “voids” inside the model.
It is possible to use multiple methods to select elements faces, just be sure to click the More... button before chang-
ing methods.
Geometry-based loads can be oriented in a number of ways depending upon the load and geometry type. Some typ-
ical methods are normal to surface, components, along curve, etc. The different methods will be available in the
Create Load dialog box depending on what is chosen. These methods are also available for orienting nodal loads.
There are also other methods of load creation available on the Model, Load menu including:
• Nonlinear Forces - can be used to creates forces based upon results from values at other nodes.
• From Output - especially valuable when results such as forces and temperatures are returned to the model. You
may convert them to the appropriate load type for further analysis.
• Map Output From Model - offers the ability to choose output data from one model and “map” it onto the nodes
or elements of another model to create loads of a selected type.
• From Freebody - allows selection of user-defined Freebody entities in the model to use for creation of forces
and/or moments. This can be useful when trying to run only a portion of the model. In addition, a Multi-Model
option exists which allows the forces and/or moments of Freebody entities in one model to be used to create
forces and/or moments in another model. This mode also offers some helpful options to facilitate load applica-
tion if the two models do not share the same mesh or overall topology.
 5-18 The FEA Process

The other major commands under Model, Load are Heat Transfer Analysis, Dynamic Analysis, and Nonlinear
Analysis. These commands control options for heat transfer (steady state and transient), dynamic (transient, fre-
quency response, and random response) and nonlinear (static and transient) analysis types, respectively. When per-
forming any of these analyses, you must first define the appropriate conditions for your load set with these
commands. It is also important to note which options are supported by your solver, since FEMAP does not support
all these options for the different analysis types. For more information, see Section 4.3, "Creating Loads And Con-
straints" in FEMAP Commands.

5.6.2 Constraints
Like loads, constraints must be created in sets. You can create nodal constraints, geometry based constraints or
constraint equations. You can use either the Model, Constraint, Nodal command or the Model, Constraint, Nodal
on Face command to apply constraints to prevent nodes from moving in any of six degrees of freedom (DOF), X,
Y, and Z translation, and rotations about the X, Y, and Z axes. The only difference between the two commands is
that for Model, Constraint, Nodal, you select the nodes directly, and for Model, Constraint, Nodal on Face, you
select the elements and their faces and FEMAP automatically determines the nodes.
With either of the nodal constraint commands, you may also constrain the DOF in any coordinate system. This
enables you to more easily simulate real world conditions, as well as take advantage of symmetry in your model. It
would be an extremely difficult modeling task if you had to build all models such that they are constrained only in
a global coordinate system. In addition, you can specify “Non-Zero” constraints, which can be used to create
enforced displacements and/or enforced rotations in the model.
Geometry-based constraints allow you to select points, curves or surfaces to constrain before or after nodes are on
them. Geometry-based constraints have three options, fixed, pinned or no rotations. This command does not allow
you as much flexibility as the Model, Constraint, Nodal command but is more efficient for large or complex areas
with simple boundary conditions.
Constraint equations, unlike constraints, do not fix the DOF to a zero value, but they relate the motion or displace-
ment of different degrees of freedom. You can specify as few as two degrees of freedom or up to a total of 70.
Both load sets and constraint sets may be duplicated (Model, Load/Constraint, Copy) or combined with other sets
(Model, Load/Constraint, Combine).

5.7 Connections and Regions

Connections allow you to create connections between multiple entities in FEMAP. A common type of connection is
creating a Connector (contact pair) between two sets of entities. Contact conditions can be used to model interac-
tions between Connection Regions on different parts created from Surfaces, Element Faces, Properties, Curves, and
Nodes.
Each Solver FEMAP supports has different options for representing contact conditions and these can be specified
by creating a Connection Property. Many solver also support the ability to use contact conditions to Glue (Bond or
Tie) parts together. This can very helpful in assembly modeling because it allows you to connect different parts
with dissimilar meshes together without having to match nodes and element faces up at the interfaces between the
parts.
FEMAP has the ability to create contact conditions automatically using specified parameters or manually between
two Connection Regions using a particular Connection Property.
There are basically three steps in creating contact for these programs. They involve three different entity creations:
• Connection Property (Section 4.4.3, "Connect, Connection Property..." of FEMAP Commands manual)
• Connection Region (Section 4.4.4, "Connect, Connection Region..." of FEMAP Commands manual)
• Connectors (Section 4.4.5, "Connect, Connector... (Contact Pair)" of FEMAP Commands manual)
This type of contact is currently supported for Simcenter Nastran, ABAQUS, ANSYS, MARC, LS-DYNA, and
NEi/Nastran. In most cases, the solver you are using determines which Connection Property will need to be used to
create appropriate contact conditions.
The Connection Editor dockable pane can be used to view and modify Connectors using a table control.
In addition to the Connection Regions used for creating Connections, FEMAP has additional regions which are
each used for a specific analysis purpose in Nastran.
 Aeroelasticity 5-19

These four Regions are:

• Fluid Region - Creates the MFLUID Entry used in Nastran to create a region of elements to simulate either a
finite volume “internal” fluid (i.e. a fluid in a contained area) or an infinite volume “external” fluid (i.e., ship
floating in a body of water).
• NonStructural Mass Region - Creates NSM1, NSML1, and possibly NSMADD entries used in Nastran to apply
non-structural mass to specific elements or properties. Non-structural is used to represent the mass of non-struc-
tural components such as paint, coatings, wiring, thermal blankets, etc. May be used in conjunction with or as
an alternative to specifying non-structural mass on individual properties.
• Bolt Region (Simcenter Nastran and ANSYS Only) - Creates a region of elements where you would like to
apply a bolt “pre-load”. The “pre-load” is a specified torque which has been translated into an axial load, arising
from components in an assembly being bolted together.
• Rotor Region (Simcenter Nastran Only) - Creates a region of nodes which you would like to specify as a
“rotor” for Rotor Dynamics in Simcenter Nastran. There are also options to set the rotation axis, damping val-
ues, and individual rotor load sets

5.8 Aeroelasticity
Aeroelastic analysis enables the simulation of structural models in the presence of an air stream. Aeroelasticity is
applicable in the design of airplanes, helicopters, missiles, suspension bridges and even tall chimneys and power
lines. With the Aeroelasticity module, an optional add-on module to the Femap with Simcenter Nastran base mod-
ule, you have access to static aeroelastic capabilities for stress, load, aerodynamic, along with control system anal-
ysis and design, using a common finite element representation.
For Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran, aeroelasticty essentially consists of the ability to couple the loads and
damping from aerodynamic loading, which are determined by specific “aero model” entities, to a structural model
via “aerodynamic splines”.
FEMAP has the ability to create four specific entity types for aeroelasticty:
• Panel/Body (Section 4.5.1, "Model, Aeroelasticity, Panel/Body..." of FEMAP Commands manual)
• Property (Section 4.5.2, "Model, Aeroelasticity, Property..." of FEMAP Commands manual)
• Spline (Section 4.5.3, "Model, Aeroelasticity, Spline..." of FEMAP Commands manual)
• Control Surfaces (Section 4.5.4, "Model, Aeroelasticity, Control Surface..." of FEMAP Commands manual)
These entities can then be used in either of the two of the Nastran solution sequences currently supported by
FEMAP, which are both available in either Simcenter or MSC Nastran:
Static Aeroelasticity (SOL 144) – Enter basic flight characteristics, angle of attack, turn rate, pitch rate, etc, then
Nastran uses these inputs to calculate and apply approximate aerodynamic loads to the structural model. For more
information about specifying SOL 144 analysis parameters, see Section 8.8.1.31, "Static Aeroelasticity Analysis".
Aerodynamic Flutter (SOL 145) – Flutter is a self-feeding and potentially destructive vibration where aerodynamic
forces on an object couple with a structure's natural mode of vibration to produce rapid periodic motion. For more
information about specifying SOL 144 analysis parameters, see Section 8.8.1.32, "Aerodynamic Flutter Analysis".

5.9 Optimization
The commands on the Model, Optimization menu are used to create required input for Design Optimization (SOL
200 in Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran) or Topology Optimization (SOL 200 in Simcenter Nastran only).
Design Optimization is used to have the solver modify individual values on any number of properties and/or mate-
rials, within a given range, in an attempt to reach a defined solution goal. Additional options are specified to limit
the response of selected entities in the model, which allows greater control of how the model will be optimized.
Typically, the overall shape of the structure remains the same, but thickness is added or taken away from various
areas of the model to
Topology Optimization is somewhat different, as it uses an approach where the solver partially or completely
removes stiffness from “Active” elements in the model, while maintaining the full stiffness of all elements speci-
fied as “Frozen”. The idea is to remove volume from portions of the model meshed with solid elements and remove
area from portions of the model meshed with shell elements, changing the overall shape, or topology, of the model.
 5-20 The FEA Process

FEMAP has the ability to create three specific entity types for optimization:
• Variables and Topology Regions (Section 4.6.1, "Model, Optimization, Variables and Topology Regions" of
FEMAP Commands manual)
• Limits (Section 4.6.2, "Model, Optimization, Limits" of FEMAP Commands manual)
• Manufacturing Constraints (Section 4.6.3, "Model, Optimization, Manufacturing Constraints" of FEMAP Com-
mands manual)
It is possible to select a subset of the Optimization Variables and/or Optimization Limits defined in FEMAP for a
particular Design Optimization analysis using an Analysis Set manager. Similarly, it is also possible to select a sub-
set of the Topology Regions and/or Manufacturing Constraints defined in FEMAP for Topology Optimization. To
understand more about setting up a Design Optimization or Topology Optimization analysis run for a Nastran
solver, see Section 8.8.1.21, "NASTRAN Design/Topology Optimization".
Finally, there is a command to update the model automatically using output from a “punch file” created by a
Simcenter Nastran or MSC Nastran SOL 200 Design Optimization analysis (see Section 4.6.4, "Model, Optimiza-
tion, Update from Punch" of FEMAP Commands manual).

5.10 Simulation Entities

The commands on the Model, Simulation Entities menu are used to create, edit, or manage entities, Monitor Points
or Direct Matrix Input entities, which can be useful in certain types of analysis performed with Simcenter Nastran
or MSC Nastran. These entities are somewhat unique, thus are typically used for more advanced types of analysis
and/or by advanced users of Nastran solvers. If these entity types are defined in an existing Nastran input file which
has been imported into FEMAP, appropriate entities will be created in FEMAP.
FEMAP has specific support for these two entity types:
• Monitor Points - There are two main types. Load Monitor Points create MONPNT3 entries with associated
entries. Aero Monitor Points create MONPNT1 entries with associated entities. See Section 4.7.1, "Model,
Simulation Entities, Monitor Points..." of FEMAP Commands manual. To have Monitor Points be included in
the Nastran input file, they must be selected in the Analysis Set Manager (see Section 8.8.1.6, "Monitor
Points").
• Direct Matrix Inputs - There are two types, single Direct Matrix Input entities and combinations of multiple
Direct Matrix inputs. See Section 4.7.2, "Model, Simulation Entities, Direct Matrix Input..." of FEMAP Com-
mands manual. To have Direct Matrix inputs be included in the Nastran input file, they must be selected in the
Analysis Set Manager (see Section 8.8.1.9, "NASTRAN Matrix Input Selection").

5.11 Functions
Functions allow you to create general X vs. Y tables of information. They are usually used for time or frequency
dependent loads or to attach nonlinear information to material properties. Functions are very specialized in their
application in FEMAP. If you are planning on doing any nonlinear or transient analyses, you should review this
section. If instead you are planning to concentrate on static, modal, or buckling analyses, you may want to skip this
section.
There are many types of functions available. They are listed below with the type of analysis or application for
which they are most often used.
• 0..Dimensionless
• 1..vs. Time - time dependent loads for transient analysis
• 2..vs. Temperature - temperature dependent material properties
• 3..vs. Frequency - frequency dependent loads for frequency response analysis.
• 4..vs. Stress - stress dependent curves for nonlinear material properties
• 5..Function vs. Temperature - multiple stress/strain curves as a function of strain rate for nonlinear material
properties
• 6..Viscous Damping vs. Frequency - damping for transient/frequency response analysis
• 7..Critical Damping vs. Frequency - damping for transient/frequency response analysis
 Groups, Layers and Viewing Your Model 5-21

• 8..Q Damping vs. Frequency - damping for transient/frequency response analysis

• 9..vs. Strain Rate - yield stress as function of strain rate for nonlinear material properties
• 10..Function vs. Strain Rate - multiple stress/strain curves as a function of strain rate for nonlinear material
properties
• 11..vs. Curve Length - define load magnitude as a function of curve length.
• 12..vs. Parametric Length - define load magnitude as a function of parametric length.
• 13..Stress vs. Strain - stress/strain curve for nonlinear material properties (It may be beneficial to use 46..True
Stress vs. Strain in some instances for Simcenter Nastran SOL 401 and SOL 402)
• 14..Stress vs. Plastic Strain - stress/strain curve for nonlinear material properties for export to those analysis
codes that require input in plastic strain (It may be beneficial to use 47..True Stress vs. Plastic Strain in some
instances for Simcenter Nastran SOL 401 and SOL 402)
• 15..Function vs. Value - multiple curves associated with a given quantity
• 16..Function vs. Critical Damping - tables obtained for/from response spectrum analysis
• 17..vs. Angle of Incidence - used in Advanced Themal Interface
• 18..vs. Direction of Incidence - used in Advanced Themal Interface
• 19..vs. Temp (TABLEM1 Linear,Linear) - temperature dependent material properties for Nastran
• 20..vs. Temp (TABLEM1 Log,Linear) - temperature dependent material properties for Nastran
• 21..vs. Temp (TABLEM1 Linear,Log) - temperature dependent material properties for Nastran
• 22..vs. Temp (TABLEM1 Log,Log) - temperature dependent material properties for Nastran
Function types 23-33 are used for output functions created by the Model, Output, Forced Response command.
Function types 34 and 35 are input functions for Nastran Static Aeroelasticity and/or Aerodynamic Flutter. Func-
tion type 36 is used to specify “Acceleration vs. Location”, which required to create a Varying Translational Accel-
eration body load. Finally, Function types 37-45 are used to create input for FEMAP Flow, FEMAP Thermal, and
FEMAP Advanced Thermal solvers.
It is important to identify the proper type for the function you are defining, otherwise it will not be properly used
when you attempt to analyze your model.
There are three ways to create data for a function in FEMAP. You can choose single value to enter the X and Y val-
ues one at a time. You can use a linear ramp where you pick a starting X and Y value, an ending X and Y value and
a delta X. The data points will then be interpreted linearly from the start to end for each delta X. The last is an equa-
tion. For an equation, you simply enter the starting and ending values of X and the delta X. Then enter Y as a func-
tion of X using the !x variable, e.g. sin(!x). These type of equations can be created easily with the Equation Editor.
Press Control-E in a text box to activate the Equation Editor. For more information on the Equation Editor, see Sec-
tion 4.4.8, "Equation Editor - Ctrl+E".
You can also use the Paste From Clipboard and Copy to Clipboard commands to transfer data from and to other
Windows programs such as Excel. In addition to loading conditions, functions can also be used to define material
properties. You may create the functions first or use the New Function icon button found in the bottom left hand
corner of the Define Material dialog box. Choose the Function Reference tab and select the function from the drop-
down list next to the correct material property.
Again, functions are highly specialized for properly pre-processing nonlinear or transient analyses.

5.12 Groups, Layers and Viewing Your Model

In addition to the numerous pre- and post-processing options provided by FEMAP to make the generation and
interpretation of FEA easier, FEMAP also provides a wide array of viewing options that play a key role in increas-
ing your FEA productivity.
The options and methods for controlling how your model is displayed on screen can be divided into two broad cat-
egories:
 5-22 The FEA Process

View Select, View Options, and View, Visibility:

View Select controls the top level display options. With View Select you can control whether your model is dis-
played in hidden line or plain wireframe mode, turn on and off stress contours, animations and deformed plots, etc.
View Options provides the detailed control over how entities are displayed, i.e. what color elements are drawn with,
whether or not labels for nodes are displayed, whether or not perspective is turned on, etc. View Options also pro-
vides extensive control over the display of post-processing options. View, Visibility provides a single “tabbed”
interface to control the visibility of different entity types and/or labels, groups, layers, loads and constraints. View,
Visibility also has options to toggle on/off the display of elements based on element type, element shape, and/or
associated to materials or properties.
Groups and Layers:
By using groups and layers, you can segment your model into smaller, more manageable, discrete pieces. These
pieces can then be used to minimize the amount of information presented in the graphics windows or in printed
reports by specifying which group(s) will be seen or which group(s) will be used to create a report. Groups and lay-
ers also make it easier to manipulate, update, and apply loads to your model.

5.12.1 Working with View Select and View Options

5.12.1.1 View Select
View Select provides top level control of how your model is displayed.

This section describes the Model Style options. The Deformed Style, and Contour Style options are discussed in
Section 5.14, "Post-processing".
 View Select 5-23

FEMAP provides numerous styles in which you can display your model. Each style provides certain benefits.
Choice of the best style depends upon what you need to accomplish. The following table describes all of the styles,
their advantages and disadvantages:

Style Description Advantages Typical Usage

Draw Simply displays all entities. Fast. Everything visible. Usu- Complex 3D models can be hard to visual-
Model ally best “working mode”. ize. Entities drawn on top of each other may
Good for screen selection. make it difficult to locate a particular detail.
Hidden Sorts all elements, then displays Good for final display and Not usually best for picking - many entities
Line from the back of view. Only visualization of complex 3D are not visible.
shows entities which are visible models. Can be helpful for
- hidden lines are removed. screen selection in compli-
cated models.
Free Finds and displays all element Can quickly point out holes or Usually not used for a working mode.
Edge edges which do not join to disconnections in your model. Intended for checking model.
another element.
Free Finds and displays all element Can quickly point out discon- Usually not used for a working mode.
Face faces which do not join to nections between solid ele- Intended for checking model.
another element. ments. Reduces complexity of
solid model plots. Can help to
find duplicate plate elements.

The pictures below show examples of the various model styles.

Draw Model Hidden Line

Free Edge Free Face

Although the hidden line removal options do require substantial calculations, and are therefore somewhat slower,
they can often be the best approach to understanding a complex model. This is especially true for 3D models. After
you make the first hidden line display, FEMAP retains a display list of the sorted information. This dramatically
speeds up redrawing hidden line views. For more information, see Section 6.3.2.1, "Window, Redraw..." and in
FEMAP Commands manual.
For solid element models, you can also use the Free Face option to simulate a hidden line view. In fact, you can
even use this mode to show hidden lines in a different line style (like dashed), instead of removing them. To
remove backfaces, use the Fill, Backfaces and Hidden option, under the View Options command, and chose one of
 5-24 The FEA Process

the “Skip” methods. Choose the Show All Faces method to show hidden lines as a different color/style, then go to
the Free Edge and Face option and set the Free Edge Color to Use View Color. Finally, choose the color and line-
style that you want to use.
5.12.1.2 View Options
The View Options command in FEMAP provides detailed control of the display of all entities in the FEMAP
Graphics window(s). Each view in FEMAP is independent, and the View Select and View Options changes will
affect only that view, unless you select the All Views option. The quickest method to assess how View Options can
help you tailor the display of a finite element model is to experiment with the various settings.

As you can see from the View Options dialog box, there is an enormous amount of control over how your model is
displayed. Describing how each option affects the display of your model is beyond the scope of this manual. For
more information, see Section 6.1.5.3, "View, Options..." of the FEMAP Commands manual.
5.12.1.3 View Visibility
Controls the visibility of Entity Types and Entity Labels, Groups, Layers, Loads and Constraints, Regions and
Connectors, Solid Geometry, Freebody entities, Aero Entities, and Elements using various shape, type, and associ-
 View Visibility 5-25

ation criteria (elements referencing Materials or Properties) all in one “tabbed” interface. Please see Section 6.1.4,
"View, Visibility..." of the FEMAP Commands manual for a full description
 5-26 The FEA Process

5.12.2 Groups and Layers Overview

Some main points about groups and layers that will help you understand them better:
• Each entity in FEMAP can have only one layer reference.
• An entity can be in more than one group.
• Any combination of layers from none to all can be displayed at any time.
• A model can have only one “active” group at a time.
• FEMAP graphics windows can use the entities in a group to display one of the following:
- Entities from the active group.
- Entities from a single specified group.
- Entities from a any number of selected groups.
- Whole Model, i.e., no group.
Groups are designed to mimic how FEA models were numbered and arranged when there were built by hand. For
example, in the aircraft industry, a model of a complete aircraft would be very carefully numbered. All the nodes
and elements at a frame at a particular location along the fuselage would be numbered in such a way to clearly
identify them as belonging to that frame. FEMAP grouping makes it very easy to isolate portions of a finite element
model that are numbered in such a manner.
Layers are designed similar to layering in most CAD systems. The name layer comes from the clear sheet of paper
analogy for CAD layering, where all the entities associated with a given layer would be drawn on a clear sheet of
paper, and only the “active” clear sheets would be overlaid to produce a visual image.

Automatic Generation of Groups

Once you become proficient in FEMAP, you will probably find yourself creating groups as you build a finite ele-
ment model to keep important areas of the model together for use downstream. If you do not do this, or if you
import an existing model, FEMAP has several tools for automatically grouping together portions of your model
based on changes in material properties, element properties or even geometric regions.
Combining Grouping, Layers and View Options
Between grouping, layers, the View, Visibility command, and the wide array of View Options, you have a tremen-
dous amount of control over how your model will be displayed on screen. However, with all these different meth-
ods of control you can have problems. These three methods of view controls are not exclusive. They each affect
one another.
For example, say you create a new group, add all elements of property 1, and all the nodes associated with these
elements, and then use View, Visibility command, Group tab, to display just that group. You would expect to see the
exact entities that you just put in the group. The problem arises out of the fact the layering and the options picked in
View Options also come into play. If all the nodes that were added into this group were on a layer that is not cur-
rently being displayed, they will still not be displayed. Similarly, if the nodes have been turned off in View Options,
they will not be displayed.
If you ever get into the situation where you think something should be visible on the display and it is not, first
check View Options and verify that it is on. Next, check View Layers and verify that the layer associated with the
missing entities is being displayed. Finally, make certain that if a group is being used for the view, that the missing
entities are actually in the group. Once you become more familiar with FEMAP and the various options which con-
trol the model display, the benefits of the multiple view options methods will become apparent.
 Printing 5-27

5.12.3 Printing
As a Windows application, FEMAP provides What You See is What You Get (WYSIWHG) printing. By default,
graphics sent to any printer are vector images, the actual lines, curves and polygons that comprise the graphical
representation of your model on screen. As a vector image, the printer driver will break the components down into
the colored (or gray scale) dots that form that actual print out. In this manner, FEMAP takes full advantage of the
resolution of the output device. Traditional DOS-based FEA (and some Windows ones too), simply dump the bit-
map of the screen to the printer. By doing so you are limited to the resolution of the screen, and not that of the
printer.
To print any graphics window or text based “dockable pane”, select File, Print from the FEMAP menu. If you have
more than one graphics windows displayed, you will need to make the window that you want to print from the
active graphics window. To do so, simply click the mouse in the window.
File, Print displays the Print dialog box, which provides control over how your FEMAP graphics or “dockable
pane” (i.e. Chart, Messages, Program File, Entity Info, API Program or Data Table) will be printed.

You can quickly add a header and footer to describe the plot being made in more detail, as well as adjust the Page
Setup and Printer Setup.
Printer Setup is most useful for changing the orientation of the plot between landscape and portrait and for con-
trolling aspects particular to your printer.
Page Setup
Page Setup controls aspects more closely related to FEA, including the Plot and Metafile Style. Here, you find the
Swap Black and White very useful if you work in the FEMAP default black and blue shaded background with white
elements. Without Swap Black and White, any prints made would be “What You See is What You Get”, including
the black and blue shaded background. With Swap Black and White, all black entities are switched to white and
vice-versa, which saves you toner and makes the plot easier to see.
 5-28 The FEA Process

5.13 External Superelements Modeling

FEMAP supports Superelements for both Simcenter and MSC Nastran. In general, a particular project and/or
model will dictate whether or not Superelements should or must be used for the analysis.

Note: Superelement modeling is an advanced analysis and modeling technique and should really only be done
by individuals familiar with using Nastran Superelement technology.

What is a Superelement?
Superelements evolved from the technique known as sub-structuring. It is a method to solve a Finite Element
Model (FEM) in a partitioned manner. In other words:
1. Partition the model into parts
2. Reduce/solve each part in terms of its boundary matrices
3. Combine the boundary matrices into what is called the residual
4. Solve for the “residual”/assembly results.
The extra input to NASTRAN (in addition to normal FEM) identifies what nodes and elements belong to which
superelement, how the different parts are connected, and then what operations are performed on each part. Basi-
cally a superelement is just a collection, subset, or group of nodes, elements, loads, and constraints in an FEM.
Why use Superelements?
Limited Computer Resources - When computers were less powerful, a partitioned solution was needed to allow
large problems to be solved one piece at a time. While not as important as it once was, this may still be an issue.
Partial Redesign Solution Efficiency - A partitioned solution allows for partial redesign solution efficiency. If the
solution database is saved, only needing to redo the modified superelement could save lots of time.
 Creation of an External Superelement using FEMAP 5-29

Model Creation Efficiency - Partitioned input allows different groups of people to work on different parts then a
system integrator or integration group can assemble the parts.
Limiting Output to Relevant Data - Partitioned output might be needed or preferred, as it offers the ability to
send only relevant results to a particular group.
Security or Confidentiality - With external superelements, only matrix data can be transmitted and system inte-
grator only knows how a part behaves and interacts, not the shape of the part/assembly or other specifications.
Dynamic Solution Efficiency - Allows creation of a much smaller model for dynamic analysis, but one that fully
represents the dynamic behavior of all components interacting.
Global – Local Analysis - Allows refinement of a local area which then replaces only a portion of the model.
Facts about Superelements
• Nastran performs a static or Guyan reduction to reduce the superelement to it’s boundary nodes.
• For Statics, the solution is exact. The FEM is divided into superelements by the user in any manner and will
produce exactly the same answer as a non-superelement solution.
• For any dynamics solution, solution is not exact, accuracy depends on how boundaries are chosen and what
methods are used to supplement the model.(The mass and damping reduction is not exact).
• All solution sequences in Nastran in the 100 range (for instance, SOL 101 for Static Analysis, SOL 103 for
Normal Modes Analysis, etc.) are superelement solutions. By default, the entire model is put into superelement
0, also called the residual, and solved as a single superelement problem. This is also called a residual only run.
• The residual or superelement 0 processing and solution is always performed last. All other superelements are
called “upstream” superelements.
• Nastran determines superelement membership based on nodes. The user specifies what nodes belong to each
superelement, any nodes not listed belong to residual (Superelement 0). Nastran then determines where ele-
ments, loads, constraints go based on the nodes.
Superelement Terminology
Types of superelements (SE):
Main Bulk Data SE (Supported by FEMAP) - SE defined by SEID on GRID entry or SESET entry in the normal
main bulk data section of the model.
External SE (Supported by FEMAP) - SE saved as boundary node and matrix data only, created in a standalone
solution and saved in one of several formats(*.pch, *.op2, *.op4, *.db).
Part SE - SE defined by delimiters in bulk data “BEGIN SUPER” bulk data is partitioned by these delimiters. The
input file is now order dependent.
Primary SE (Supported by FEMAP) - SE that references regular bulk data nodes, elements, etc.
Secondary SE - SE that references a Primary SE with some transformation added (mirror, rotate, translate)

5.13.1 Creation of an External Superelement using FEMAP

This section takes a step-by-step approach for setting up an External Superelement analysis in FEMAP. There are
typically 2 approaches to properly create an External Superelement model. One is to only have nodes and elements
from the portion of the overall structure in the model file. The other is to select a group from the “Portion of Model
to Write” drop-down list in the NASTRAN Bulk Data Options dialog box found in the Analysis Set Manager to limit
what is written to the Nastran input file. The “External Superelement Creation” run does nor require a Superele-
ment license for Nastran

Note: If using the group approach, it is probably best to first add nodes or elements into the group, then use
the “Group, Operations, Add Related Entities” command to include any materials, properties, loads,
and boundary conditions associated with the nodes or elements already in the group. Turning on
“Group, Operations, Automatic Add” may also be a good idea.

Specify a Nastran ASET using a FEMAP Constraint Set

For a basic model, Nastran requires the definition of the physical components to be retained by the reduction pro-
cess. This is accomplished with ASET Bulk Data entries. The nodes constrained in the ASET are known as the
“boundary nodes” of the Superelement.
5-30 The FEA Process

To create the ASET, create a normal constraint set using Model, Constraint, Create/Manage Set and optionally set
the title to “ASET”.
Now, apply “fixed” constraints to the desired nodes using Model, Constraint, Nodal, to specify the ASET DOFs.

Selection of the ASET nodes is very important. They are really the only nodes that can transfer motion to the rest of
the model from the Superelement. Any nodes which represent a connection to the residual structure should be
included. Also, enough nodes should be selected to insure all of the required modes are recovered from the Guyan
reduction. Finally, it may be useful to include any nodes which have nodal loads applied in the model.
Create Analysis Set and Specify Options for External Superelement Creation Run
Create a Normal Modes analysis using Simcenter Nastran as the solver in the Analysis Set Manager. Click OK to
return to the Analysis Set Manager, then expand the Master Requests and Conditions branch, highlight External
Superelement Creation, then click Edit. The External Superelement Creation dialog will be displayed:
 Creation of an External Superelement using FEMAP 5-31

Step 1 - Check the Create External Superelement check box to make the other options in the dialog box available.
These options will be used to create the EXESEOUT Case Control for Nastran. Also, use the EXTID filed to spec-
ify an ID for the External Superelement.
Step 2 - Select the desired output matrices and output format using the Output To drop-down. By default, the
STIFFNESS, MASS, K4DAMP, and LOADS output matrices will all be included in the output file. When either
“1..DMIGOP2” or “2..MATOP4” are used, a File Name must also be entered. The appropriate .op2 or .op4 exten-
sion will be supplied if not included in the File Name. A UNIT ID must also be specified and is needed when set-
ting up the “Assembly” run.
Step 3 - Select Output Options. Creates data blocks in the selected output file format. ASMBULK is on by default,
and any combination of GEOM, ASMBULK, and EXTBULK may be selected. This section is not available when
Output To is set to “0..DMIGPCH”, as EXTBULK is ignored and the other data blocks are always included.
Step 4 - Select the ASET constraint set using the Master (ASET) drop-down. Optionally, specify a QSET using the
QSET drop-down.

Note: If Craig-Bampton modes are needed, a QSET must also be selected. To easily create a QSET, click the
“...” button next to the QSET drop-down. In the Create SPOINTS dialog, enter the Number of SPOINTs
(each represents a Craig-Bampton mode) and the Start ID for the SPOINTs. If using the group
approach, any SPOINTs and constraints created by the Create SPOINTs dialog box will automatically
be added to the group specified in “Portion of Model to Write”, regardless of the setting of “Group,
Operations, Automatic Add”. If the group specified in “Portion of Model to Write” is changed, it may
be required to use the Create SPOINTs dialog box again if the original SPOINTs and constraints have
not been manually added to the newly selected group.

Step 5 (Optional) - Enter an upper and lower bound of Node IDs and/or Element IDs in the Entity ID Range
Checks section to make sure there is no overlap between different Superelements. This is not required by the Exter-
nal Superelement Creation run, but may be a good check in some instances.
For this example, all the Output Matrices are included, “1..DMIGOP2” has been selected, and a File Name of
“SE10_extse.op2” provided. Only ASMBULK is checked in Output Options and the ASET constraint set was
already selected in the Boundary Conditions dialog box, thus is automatically selected in this dialog box:
5-32 The FEA Process

This concludes the setup of the EXTSEOUT entry for the “External Superelement Creation” Nastran run.
Review Boundary Conditions
In the Master Requests and Conditions branch, highlight Boundary Conditions, and click Edit. In the Boundary
Conditions dialog box, set Constraints to “0..None”, then check to be sure the ASET constraint set is selected in the
Master (ASET) drop-down, then click OK.

Setting up appropriate Output Requests

The *.pch, *.op2, or *.op4 file created by the “External Superelement Creation” run will include the Output Matri-
ces selected in the External Superelement Creation dialog box and “Output Transformation Matrices” (OTMs) for
all output requested in the Case Control. The OTMs can make the output file VERY large, so requested output
should be limited to only what is absolutely needed in the final “assembly” run.
Also, the “External Superelement Creation” run will automatically create the required *.op2 file, therefore, there is
no reason to have a *.op2 file created by the PARAM, POST, -1 entry, which is the default for a new Analysis Set.
To do this in FEMAP, groups containing only nodes and/or elements of interest should be created. In the Analysis
Set Manager, highlight Output Requests in the Master Requests and Conditions section, then click Edit. In the Nas-
tran Output Requests dialog box, turn on only the desired output types, then select Groups using the drop-down list
next to each output type. Also, set the Results Destination option to “1..Print Only” to have Nastran only produce
the printed output file (*.f06) for possible later examination
 Referencing an External Superelement using FEMAP 5-33

The “External Superelement Creation” run is now ready to be sent to Nastran.

5.13.2 Referencing an External Superelement using FEMAP

Once “External Superelements” have been created, they can now be “referenced” by an Analysis Set for use in an
“Assembly” analysis run. In the Analysis Set Manager, create a new Analysis Set with the desired analysis type.
Expand the Options branch, highlight External Superelement Reference, then click Edit. Running the “Assembly”
in Nastran requires a Superelement license.

Note: If the “Create External Superelement” option is on in the External Superelement Creation dialog box,
then External Superelement Reference will not appear in the Options branch.
5-34 The FEA Process

The External Superelement References dialog box provides tools for selecting “External Superelements”:

This dialog box has for icon buttons on the right hand side. From top to bottom, there are:
New - Creates a new “External Superelement Reference” beginning with selection of the output file (*.pch, *.op2,
or *.op4), followed by setting the Unit ID (must be the same Fortran Unit specified during “External Superelement
Creation”), the Type, and which Output Matrices to use (*.pch file only). In addition, when using either a *.op2 or
*.op4 file, a *.asm file corresponding with the *.op2 or *.op4 file must be selected to complete the reference.
Edit All - Used to edit the selected External Superelement Reference, starting with selection of the output file.
Edit Options - Used to potentially edit the selected External Superelement Reference, starting with Unit ID, Type,
and Matrices, then possibly the selected *.asm file.
Delete Reference - Simply deletes the selected External Superelement Reference.
Each External Superelement Reference has a unique ID and any number can be placed into the list.
Across the bottom of the list, options to toggle on/off PARAM, SECOMB, Write Full Path, and Duplicate Node Tol-
erance exist. A value may also be entered for Duplicate Node Tolerance if the default is not appropriate.
A reference shown using a *.op2 file, a selected *.asm file, and a specified Unit ID:

Once all references have been entered, the “Assembly” run is now ready to be sent to Nastran.
 Post-processing 5-35

5.14 Post-processing
The first step in post-processing is to obtain the results. If your analysis program does not launch from FEMAP and
automatically return the results, you must import them. Use File, Import, Analysis Results and select the proper for-
mat. Select the results file for your model from the standard file selection box using the default file extension for
your analysis program.
Similar to loads and constraints, output data is also stored in sets. If you run your model with several different load-
ing conditions or through several different analysis types, FEMAP will keep the output data from each analysis,
each mode shape, or each time step in a different output set. Post-processing can be divided into two main catego-
ries, graphical and report. Graphical post-processing can be further divided into:
1. Deformation plots
2. Contour/criteria plots
3. Free body plots
4. XY plots
Deformation and contour/criteria plots can be combined in the same view. All model style options (such as Hidden
Line) are available for deformed and contour styles. Free body plots can be shown in any view with either a
deformed and/or contour plot on or off.
Report based post-processing is fairly straight forward, providing text output of results data in a variety of formats,
printing options, and sorting options.

5.14.1 Deformed and Contour Plots

The first step in post-processing is to define the type of plot desired, and the data to be used in the display. The
View Select command is the main control for how your model is displayed, including what post-processing options
are being used.

From View Select you can invoke five different types of deformed style plots:
• Deform - Show a plot of the deformed shape.
• Animate - Animate the deformed shape.
• Animate Multi-Set - Perform animation across several sets. Good for transient, nonlinear and frequency
response analyses.
• Arrow - Show arrows representing direction and magnitude of output.
• Trace - Similar to Animate Multi-Set, except displays trace lines connecting historical positions of nodes.
• Streamline - View results from flow analysis (i.e., CFD) using streamlines
 5-36 The FEA Process

For multi-set animation and trace plots, you may also decide to only animate the contours by selecting the Skip
Deformation option. This can be extremely useful for heat transfer and similar types of analyses.
From View Select you can invoke six general contour style options:
• Contour - Provides smooth representation of data.
• Criteria - Elemental values displayed at centroid of element.
• Beam Diagram - Similar to 3-D shear and bending moment diagrams. Display results along the length of line
elements.
• IsoSurface - Provides interior surfaces of constant values in solid models.
• Section Cut - Shows contours through any planar cut of a solid model.
• Arrow - Arrows at centroids of elements or on nodes.
Specialized Post-processing Features
The following are some specialized post-processing features in FEMAP.
• View, Select - Deformed and Contour Data - Section Cut - Multiple Sections: Works in undeformed, deformed,
or animate contour plot modes, but only with solid elements. This allows you to choose up to three inde-
pendently oriented cutting planes. The location of these planes can be controlled by the View, Advanced Post,
Dynamic Cutting Plane dialog box.
• View, Advanced Post, Dynamic Cutting Plane: Works in undeformed or deformed contour plot mode only, and
only with solid elements. Allows you to choose an arbitrary cutting plane and dynamically pass it through a
solid model. The value associated with the plane is the distance from the global origin to the plane along the
normal vector of the plane. Colors indicate the value associated with the corresponding color on the contour
legend.
• View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface: Works in undeformed or deformed contour plot mode only, and
only with solid elements. Allows you to dynamically change the value of the isosurface being shown. The value
is from the current output set and vector chosen as the contour vector. The color of the isosurface is controlled
in the view options post-processing category. If contour deformed is chosen, the vector for the deformed data is
contoured across the isosurface. Otherwise it is a single color chosen from the palette.
• View, Advanced Post, Beam Cross Section: Works on beam elements with cross-sections only. Uses results typ-
ically recovered from a beam analysis to calculate one of 7 available types of stress, then shows the calculated
stress output on the cross-section of the beam. Many options are available to modify the display.
• Dynamic rotation of animations: You can dynamically rotate during animation. However, the animation will
pause until dynamic rotation is finished.
Selecting the Data to use for Post-Processing
Control over what data is used in deformed or contour plots is provided by the Select PostProcessing Data dialog
box. This dialog box is accessed through the View, Select command or the Quick Access Menu (right mouse) menu
as Post Data. It allows you to control the output set and output vectors shown with the deformed and contour plots.
To choose what data is used in the display, choose the output set (A in figure), the data vector to use for deforma-
tion (B), and the data vector to use for contouring (C). You can limit the category and type of output you see in the
drop-down lists with the Output Set and Output Vector filters. If you are animating multiple sets, you can choose
the Final Output Set and the Output Set Increment to animate as well.
The Transform buttons are used to transform nodal output into another coordinate systems of choice or into each
node’s output coordinate system and/or to transform elemental output into each element’s material direction, into
another coordinate system, or into a specified vector.
Vector Info displays the Output Vector Info dialog box, which provides Max/Min values and the node/element ID
where these values occur. In addition, you can also choose to see the values for Component/Corner Vectors, if
available for the selected vector and other Vector Statistics, such as Sum, Number of Entries, and Average value.

Note: For dynamically changing Max/Min values in this dialog box without having to go into Vector Info,
turn on Dynamic Max/Min. Please be aware there may be some delay when changing output sets or out-
put vectors while the Max/Min values are calculated and displayed, especially in larger models.
 Deformed and Contour Plots 5-37

The Multiple Contour Vectors button allows selection of up to two additional output vectors for display at the same
time as the output vector selected using the Contour drop-down (i.e., 3 total). The Double-Sided Planar Contours
option can be used to automatically show the “bottom” vector when the “top” vector is selected (or vice versa) on
the “top” and “bottom” of planar elements.
The Section Cut button allows you to select options for Section Cut display. In the Section Cut Options dialog box,
click the Section button to define a “cutting plane” with the standard plane definition dialog box. If you have the
Multiple Sections option on, then you may define up to three different cutting planes using the Section # buttons.
Other buttons exist for choosing Contour Vectors, creating Trace Locations, setting up display of Laminate results,
and selection of Streamline Options.

B
C

Select PostProcessing Data dialog box showing Dynamic Max/Min option turned on:
 5-38 The FEA Process

Contour Options
The Contour Options dialog box allows access to the type of contour and data conversion to perform. When you
select this option, The Select Contour Options dialog box appears.
These options are very important to understand since they control the type of contour and how the data is converted
from pure discrete numbers to a visual representation. Improper selection of contour type or data conversion can
lead to erroneous interpretation of the results.

This dialog box is separated into six major sections:

• "Contour Type"
• "Contour Fill Mode"
• "Contour Group"
• "Data Selection"
• "Data Conversion"
• "Elemental Contour Discontinuities"
Each of these areas are discussed more fully below. All of these options can also be accessed through the View
Options command (Category - PostProcessing, Option - Contour Type).
Contour Type
This section allows you to pick from either nodal or elemental contouring. Nodal contouring simply averages all
values at the nodes and cannot account for any discontinuities in material or geometry. When Nodal is selected, a
relatively smooth contour will appear, although the results will not be accurate at material boundaries or property
breaks. In addition, the Other Options section will not be available. Nodal contouring should not be used across
material boundaries or changes in properties such as plate thickness since averaging stresses across these areas
results in inaccurate results at the interface.
If elemental contouring is chosen, you can specify which discontinuities in the model to use in the contouring to
obtain an accurate representation of the results. This type of contouring is very useful for multiple material models
as well as models with plates with that intersect at large angles or have varying thickness. Stresses will not be aver-
aged across these values. The resulting graphics may not be as “smooth” as nodal contouring, especially at material
breaks, but it provides a more accurate representation of the results when discontinuities exist in the model. In addi-
tion, element contouring allows you to view both top and bottom stresses of plates on one plot, as well as up to two
additional output vectors.
 Deformed and Contour Plots 5-39

Note: Element contouring has the additional feature that if you select No Averaging under Element Contour
Discontinuities, the pure data at the element centroid and corners is plotted without any manipulation.
This provides a graphical representation of the pure data. For more information, see "Elemental Con-
tour Discontinuities".

Contour Fill Mode

This section allows you to choose between Continuous Colors and Color Levels for Contour Fill Mode.
Contour Group
You can choose to contour a group while showing the rest of the model with no contours. By default, this option is
set to None/Visible Group(s), which simply shows a contour on the entire model or the “visible group(s)”. You can
contour the Active group or choose a group from the drop-down list next to Select.

Note: When using a Contour Group, the Contour Type will automatically be set to “Elemental” and can not be
changed as long as a Contour Group is being used.

Data Selection
This section allows you to choose which output data is used to determine the Max/Min values on the “Contour Leg-
end”. The All Data/Full Model option will use data for all nodes or elements in the entire model. Visible Group(s)
will only use the output data from the “visible” group(s) to determine the Max/Min values, while Contour Group
will use the single group specified in the Contour Group section.
In addition, the Use Corner Data option allows you to choose if you would like to use any elemental corner data (if
it has been recovered from the analysis program) or to skip it for any of these methods.
Data Conversion
This section controls how FEMAP converts the results from pure data at element centroids, corners, and nodes to
the actual continuous graphical representation. There are three options to convert the data: Average, Max Value,
and Min Value.
If Average is on, FEMAP will take an average of the surrounding values to obtain a result, whereas Max or Min
Value will just use the max or min value, respectively, of the pertinent surrounding locations. The Min Value option
should only be used when performing contours for vectors where the minimum values are actually the worst case,
such as safety factor or large compressive stresses. You can also choose to use any elemental corner data (if it has
been recovered from the analysis program) or to skip it for any of these methods.
The easiest way to understand the data conversion process is through an example. If an interior node of a continu-
ous mesh (no geometric or material breaks and averaging is on) is attached to four elements, there will be four val-
ues associated with it for a given stress vector (either corner data or if Use Corner Data is off elemental centroidal
data). If these values are 100, 200, 300 and 400, an Average conversion would result in 250 at that node, a Max
conversion with 400, and a Min conversion of 100. This procedure would be used at all nodal locations to get the
basis of the plot, and then FEMAP would produce the corresponding colors between locations. Thus, the data con-
version can significantly affect the results if there is a large gradient across adjacent elements.

Hint: You can use the difference in Max, Min and average results to make a quick estimate of the fidelity of
the model. If there is a large difference between these two contours, especially at locations that do not
have sharp corners or breaks in the model, your FEA model may require a finer mesh.

Elemental Contour Discontinuities

This section controls averaging for elemental contouring.
 5-40 The FEA Process

It is only available when Contour Type is Elemental. If No Averaging is selected, contours for each element will be
created without consideration to any connected elements. This can lead to a very discontinuous plot but is useful
for certain models such as variable thickness plate models to speed the data conversion process. It is also useful to
obtain a graphical representation of the pure data, both centroidal and corner data, since only pure data is plotted. If
this option is not checked, the user can create averaged elemental contours, and must therefore choose the type of
discontinuities across which they do not want to average.
Valid discontinuities include Property, Material, Layer, Color, or Angle Between. If Angle Between is selected, you
must enter a tolerance. This can be very important with plate models that have intersecting edges. For example, you
do not want to average stresses of plates that intersect at right angles.
If Property is selected, the material option will be grayed since Property is a more discrete choice than Material (a
material can be on multiple properties, but typically a property can only reference one material). Again, you do not
typically want to average across material or property boundaries. If Property is off, you can select to use Material
as the break.
In addition, layers and colors are also available since many users separate their model into specific key areas based
upon layer or color, even if they contain the same property.
Specifying Detailed Post-Processing Display Options
Options for controlling the detailed aspects of post-processing can be found in the View Options command. Each
graphics window can have its view options modified independent of other views. The number and depth of the var-
ious view options is such that a full discussion of each is not possible in this manual. For more information, see
Section 8.3, "View Options - PostProcessing" in FEMAP Commands.
 Deformed and Contour Plots 5-41

Post Titles
controls whether an additional legend is displayed for deformed or contour views.

Post
Titles

This legend contains information about the output set and output vectors being displayed, with additional options to
include the current averaging options, min/max values, and/or the full directory path and file name, along with time
and date information, for the output file used to create displayed results. For Legend Style, choose from “0..IDs
Only”, “1..Titles” (Default), “2..Titles and Average Data”, “3..Titles and Min/Max Data”, “4..Titles and Min/Max/
Average”, “5..Titles, File Name and Date”, “6..Titles/File/Average”, 7..Titles/File/Min/Max”, or “8..Titles/File/
Min/Max/Average”. In order to see “Max/Min” information, Label Mode for the Contour/Criteria Style option
must be set to “2..Max Min”, “3..Max Only”, or “4..Min Only”.
There are 9 options in the Position list: Options 0-7 display the post titles in a “standard” position, while “8..Cus-
tom” can be used to place the post titles in a “custom” position, To specify a “custom” position via the View
Options dialog box, click the Custom Position... button to display the Select View Position - Post Titles dialog box:

The X and Y positions are the relative distances, as a percentage of overall screen size, from the upper left hand cor-
ner of the “post titles area” to the upper left hand corner of the view where the post titles are being displayed. For
instance, a value of X = 0 and Y = 0 positions the post titles as far to the left and as close to the top of the view as
possible, while X = 100 and Y = 100 positions the post titles as for to the right and as close to the bottom as possi-
ble. In addition, the text within the “post titles area” can be Left Justified, Right Justified, or Center Justified. There
is also an option to show all text on a Single Line, but be careful when using this option, as the graphics window
5-42 The FEA Process

needs to be wide enough to display the entirety of the text, otherwise the beginning and end may not be visible.
Finally, The justification can also be “locked” by enabling the Lock Justification option.
All of the “standard” options for Position simply specify specific values and options in the Select View Position -
Post Titles dialog box, which are detailed in the following table:

Option X% Y% Justification
0..Top Left 0.0 0.0 Left Justification
1..Top Center 50.0 0.0 Center Justification
2..Top Right 100.0 0.0 Right Justification
3..Center Left 0.0 50.0 Left Justification
4..Center Right 100.0 50.0 Right Justification
5..Bottom Left 0.0 100.0 Left Justification
6..Bottom Center 50.0 100.0 Center Justification
7..Bottom Right 100.0 100.0 Right Justification

Note: If opening a model file saved in version 11.4.2 or earlier and Position was set to “1..Top Center” or
“6..Bottom Center”, then Single Line will be selected and the Lock Justification option will be enabled.
If desired, simply click the Custom Position... button to change these options. This will also happen if
importing a FEMAP neutral file exported in version 11.4 format or earlier.

The Post Titles are also a “live screen entity”. When not engaged in a command, simply click anywhere in the “post
titles area” in the graphics window to make the entity “live”. Once the entity is live, it can be “dragged” to any
location within the current graphics window. In addition, when the entity is live, the Post Titles Options symbol
(i.e., “down arrow” symbol) appears:

Post Titles
Options

...which when clicked, will open the View Options dialog box with Category set to PostProcessing and Post Titles
selected in the Options list.
By default, the justification will automatically change from Left Justification to Center Justification to Right Justi-
fication as the Post Titles entity is dragged from the left side of the graphics window to right. To have the justifica-
tion remain the same as the entity is dragged around the graphics window, simply click the “down arrow” symbol,
click the Custom Position... button, and enable the Lock Justification option, then click OK to all dialog boxes.
Deformed Style View Options
The following options control the deformed plot:
• Deformed Style - determines on-screen scale of deformations.
• Vector Style - controls % of vectors displayed and arrowheads for Deformed Vector Plots as well as color for
Deformed Vectors.
• Animated Style - number of frames, delay, and shape of the animation (Sine, Linear, etc.)
• Deformed Model - controls colors for Deformed Style display.
• Undeformed Model - can display or remove the undeformed model, as well as set its color.
• Trace Style - controls labeling and display of trace plots.
 Freebody Plots 5-43

Contour Style View Options

• Contour Type - controls type of contour and Contour Fill mode levels option (for more information, see "Con-
tour Options" above).
• Contour/Criteria Style - allows choice of solid/filled or line contours, controls data conversion between nodal
and elemental data, and controls labeling options.
• Contour/Criteria Levels - controls number and spacing of levels for a contour or criteria plot. You may define
your own levels (and colors), or have FEMAP automatically scale the plot.
• Contour/Criteria Legend - controls style, color, and visibility of the contour legend.
• Criteria Limits - selects criteria for criteria plots.
• Beam Diagrams - controls direction of beam diagram plots.
• Criteria-Elements that Pass - controls display of elements and their values that pass criteria.
• Criteria-Elements that Fail - controls display of elements that fail criteria.
• IsoSurface - controls color and mode for isosurface plots.
• IsoLine - controls color and mode for isoline plots.
• Streamline - controls color and mode for streamline plots.
• Contour Arrow Style - allows you to choose where vectors are located, displayed as “wireframe” or “solid”
arrows, and if the additional contour vector(s) and Arrow Type are automatically selected by the program. You
can also specify an overall length, specify a minimum value for display, and if they are shown using “contour
colors” or “arrow colors”.
• Contour Arrow Options - allows you to choose whether the length of each arrow is adjusted based on magni-
tude, if the arrows are labeled, how many digits to display, and a minimum length, as a percentage of a Length
specified in Contour Arrow Style.
For information about the Freebody View Options, see Section 5.14.1.1, "Freebody Plots".
5.14.1.1 Freebody Plots
Freebody information for an entire body, selected elements, or a specific group of elements can be displayed in
FEMAP. The Freebody display can be performed at any time, whether you are showing a deformed and contour
plot, or a simple undeformed plot. You can setup and control the Freebody display through the Freebody tool in the
PostProcessing Toolbox.

Note: The Freebody Elements and Peripheral Elements in the Freebody Contributions From section will only
be available if you have recovered grid point force balance from Nastran. If you are not using Nastran,
or have not recovered the grid point force balance, you will only have access to the Applied and Reac-
tion loads (including MultiPoint), thereby limiting the overall usefulness of freebody displays.

The Freebody tool in the PostProcessing Toolbox is shown here. Following is a general overview of using this
command. For more information, see Section 7.2.3.3, "Freebody tool" in the FEMAP Commands manual.
5-44 The FEA Process

The most typical use of this command is to examine the forces across a specific interface in your model to check
the load transfer path, examine the results and their validity, and possibly even create loads to drive another analy-
sis. To do this, elements should be selected on one side of the interface. In the Freebody tool, element selection
(and optionally node selection for “Interface Loads”) is done in the Entities section. When the Entity Selection
Mode to “Entity Select”, simply click the Add Elements icon button to use the standard selection dialog box. When
the Entity Selection Mode to “Group Select”, choose an existing group from the drop-down list (“-1..Active” will
always use the “Active” group).
The picture shown below is a simple example of a freebody diagram using Display Mode set to “Freebody” in the
Freebody tool. The eight elements in the two columns on the right of the diagram were selected (could also be
placed in a group), and the freebody displayed. The result was a diagram containing the external plate forces at the
interface, and the original applied loads on the ends (there were no constraints on this section of the model).
 XY Plotting using the Charting pane 5-45

By turning all options “on” in the Freebody Contributions From section of the Freebody tool, you could check that
the total loads summed to zero to verify that equilibrium conditions were met and “leaking” of loads did not occur.
If you change the Display Mode to “Interface Load”, you then will want to specify a Location to calculate the Total
Force and Total Moment of the force balance at a particular point in space.

When Display Mode is set to Section Cut, a plane is defined using the standard plane definition dialog box, then
elements and nodes are automatically selected for calculation of the “Interface Load” based on both proximity to
the specified plane and other selected options.
You could also examine results using component vectors and/or in any desired coordinate system. If you wanted to
create loads at particular locations to replace portions of your model, you could employ the Model, Load, From
Freebody command to automatically create these loads.
Freebody View Options
There are several view options to control the overall display:
• Freebody - overall on/off for Freebody display and Label options (labels appear at Location of “Total” vectors).
• Freebody Node Markers - controls Color Mode and Symbol Size of the node markers.
• Freebody Vectors - controls the Length, Label Mode, and Label Format of all freebody vectors and whether
their lengths are adjusted.
• Freebody Total Force/Freebody Total Moment - specify the Color Mode, Vector Style, and Factor
• Freebody Nodal Force/Freebody Nodal Moment - specify the Color Mode, Vector Style, and Factor

5.14.2 XY Plotting using the Charting pane

All XY plotting of output and functions is done using the Charting pane. Any number of Chart entities may exist in
a FEMAP model and any number of Data Series entities may be plotted on an individual Chart entity. Only one
Chart at a time may be displayed by the Charting pane and selection of which Chart to display is controlled via the
Chart Selector drop-down list.
A Chart Manager may be accessed for creation, editing, copying, deleting, and renumbering of Charts. A Data
Series Manager, with similar functionality, exists for Data Series as well.
See Section 7.2.4, "Tools, Charting" in the FEMAP Commands manual for detailed information about using the
Charting pane effectively.
 5-46 The FEA Process

Controlling an XY Plot
Creation of a new Chart and overall control of the current Chart is handled by the tabbed Charting dialog box.
Each tab (Chart Options, Chart Axes, Chart Title, and Labels and Marker) controls a different part of the Chart.
The Chart Data Series dialog box is used to specify the Data (Type, Group, Output Data, Location, Position, or
Function) and Style (Labels, Markers, and Colors) for each Data Series.
In addition, the Chart Options icon menu allows creation of a new Data Series, selection of which Data Series to
display in the current Chart, and selection of a particular Style. A number of other icon menus across the top of the
Charting pane control the overall display and options for Chart Axes, Chart Title, Chart Legend, Data Series Mark-
ers, Data Series Labels, and Chart Colors. Icons for Show Tooltips, Copy to Clipboard, and Load From Library/
Save to Library complete the Charting pane toolbar. For more information about using libraries, see Section 4.3.6,
"Library Selection"
Finally, a context-sensitive menu for the current Chart is available, along with context-sensitive menus which
appear when the cursor is placed over a particular entity (Data Series, Axes, Legend, Chart Title, Markers, or
Labels) in a Chart.
Example plot of Data Series:

5.14.3 Reporting Results

In addition to the graphical post-processing capabilities of FEMAP, there is also a powerful set of report based tools
for examination of FEA results.

Directing Output
Reports are created using the command in the List Output submenu:
 Show Tooltips 5-47

By default, all listings go to the Messages window. You can also direct listings to a printer and/or a file. To control
where listings appear, choose List, Destination and select the desired options.

Note: Make certain to toggle off listings to printer or file when you finish listing the desired information.
FEMAP will continue to send all listings to whatever destinations have been chosen until they are
turned off.

Listing Formatted Output

The most powerful commands associated with listing output are List, Output, Standard and List, Output, Use For-
mat. Both are used to process the nodal and elemental data recovered from a finite element analysis and repackage
that data into standard formats or ones you define, and then list that data in printed format.
One of the easiest methods of creating your own format is to load a standard format and then edit it. For more
details, see Section 7.5, "List Menu Commands" in FEMAP Commands.
Querying Your Model
There are two methods to quickly query your model for post-processing information: the List, Output, Query com-
mand, and the Show Tooltips command. If you would like to examine large amounts of data for a single entity, sim-
ply use the List, Output, Query command. This command provides a quick method for retrieving the output results
for a particular node or element, or group of nodes or elements in your model. The results, as always, will be writ-
ten to the List File Destination area(s).
5.14.3.1 Show Tooltips
To access the Show Tooltips capability, you must select the command from either the Quick Access Menu, or the
Select Toolbar’s Selector Modes Menu. When toggled on, this mode will be available whenever the Select Toolbar
has an active entity or you are using a dialog box to select a certain type of entity.

If you are graphically post-processing while Show Tooltips is activated and have an active selection entity in the
Select Toolbar, the exact information that is being used to create the graphic is also displayed in the pop-up win-
dows. The same is true when selecting entities with a dialog box while graphically post-processing.

Note: You can set how long your tooltips will take to appear and how long they will remain displayed on
your screen using File, Preferences, clicking the User Interface Tab, then assigning values for “Tool-
tip Delay” and “Tooltip Duration”. Both values should be entered in tenths of a second.

The following commands only work when the Select Toolbar is being used with Show Tooltips on:
While a “Tooltip” pop-up window is displaying information, if you click the left mouse button, the information will
be sent to the Entity Editor and/or Data Table dockable panes, as long as the panes are visible in the FEMAP inter-
face AND unlocked.
If you click the right mouse button inside the current “Tooltip”, a short menu will appear:
List - sends the information in the Tooltip to the Messages window. Using this capability, you can quickly walk
around the model and recover important information at specific nodes and elements. You can now copy this infor-
mation from the Messages window or use List, Destination, to send the data to Rich Text Format file outside of
FEMAP. Either method can help you can easily create a report in another program.
Convert To Text - creates a text entity identical to the Show Tooltips box at that location to help annotate your
model. You MUST have Text visible to see the yellow text entities. Text can be made visible using either View,
Options or View, Visibility.

Hint: Pressing Alt + clicking the right mouse button in the graphics window will bring up the Quick Access
Menu instead of the context sensitive menu when there is an active entity in the Select Toolbar. Using
this method, you can toggle the Show Tooltips command on and off without having to use the Select
Toolbar’s Selector Modes Menu.
 5-48 The FEA Process

For more information on see Section 7.3.1.6, "Tools, Toolbars, Select" of the commands manual and Section 4.2.3,
"Quick Access Menu (Right Mouse Button)"

5.15 Stress Wizard

The Stress Wizard (SW) provides you with quick insight into the mechanical behavior of engineering parts.
Through a simple four-step process, the SW makes it possible to connect to a single solid or multi-solid assembly,
specify how the solid/assembly is held, how it is loaded, and recover the resulting deformed shape and stress distri-
bution. In reality, the SW provides access to several different areas of FEMAP functionality from within a dockable
pane. The Stress Wizard does not add any functionality over what is offered within other FEMAP commands; it
simply consolidates the commands required for the pre- and post-processing and analysis of single solid parts or
multi-solid assemblies. For more information on specific commands in the Stress Wizard see Section 7.4.7, "Tools,
Stress Wizard".
A Simple Analysis Example using the Stress Wizard
Before we get into the details, a step-by-step walk-through example will be used to familiarize you with the Stress
Wizard. Start the Stress Wizard (Tools, Stress Wizard from the FEMAP menu) the screen should look like:
 A Simple Analysis: Step 1 - Importing the Geometry 5-49

5.15.1 A Simple Analysis: Step 1 - Importing the Geometry

Step 1 of the Stress Wizard has only one option, to import geometry. Select the button shown below to select a
Parasolid geometry file for import.

Navigate to the directory where the FEMAP example files have been installed and select the file
“BATH_125.X_T” for import. Once selected, press the “Open” button to load the part.
You will now be prompted to select a material for this part, simply select one from the Select From Material
Library dialog box.

NOTE: Do not worry if the material that you wish to use for your part is not in the library, you will have the option
of editing the material properties later on, and the ability to add the new edited material to the library for future use.
For more information about using libraries, see Section 4.3.6, "Library Selection".
After you press OK in the Select From Material Library box, you will see the Stress Wizard performing some of
the traditional Finite Element Analysis tasks in the background. You will see messages regarding the meshing of
the part.
 5-50 The FEA Process

5.15.2 A Simple Analysis: Step 2 - Constraining the Model

After the part has been imported in Step 1, the Stress Wizard automatically jumps to Step 2. In Step 2 we will spec-
ify how the part is constrained.
To get the part into an isometric view, you can press and drag the left mouse button in the graphics window and
rotate the model as shown below, or press the “Iso” button in the “View Control” section of the Stress Wizard dia-
log box.

Step 2 provides access to constraining the surfaces of your solid part. Once the finite element analysis is started,
FEMAP will convert surface based constraints into nodal based constraints. For this example, we will try to
approximate a bolted connection in the three bottom holes of our part. Press the button seen below “Pick cyl.
Surf(s) that can only rotate about their axes”. This will create nodal constraints on cylindrical surfaces where the
 A Simple Analysis: Step 2 - Constraining the Model 5-51

nodes will not be allowed to move radially from the center axis of the cylinder and not allowed to move in the plus
or minus axial direction.
NOTE: A hole constrained this way is a significant engineering approximation. Accurately modeling the constraint
of a pre-loaded bolted connection is beyond the capability of this simple wizard. Please be advised that the stress
distribution around this constrained area will not be correct.
After you have selected these six surfaces and pressed OK, each will receive a small “CRS”, the CRS indicates that
the “C”ylindrical surface has been constrained “R”adially and from “S”liding.
 5-52 The FEA Process

5.15.3 A Simple Analysis: Step 3 - Loading the Model

Press the “Step 3" button to move on to loading this solid model. We will apply a pressure load to the inside face at
the back of the fitting. Press the button shown below to apply a pressure load to one or more surfaces.

FEMAP will now prompt you with the standard entity selection box and ask you to pick a surface. Pick the inside
face at the back side of our fitting (surface shown in red below).

Press “OK” in the standard entity selection box, you will then be prompted for a pressure value, enter 100 and press
“OK” to continue.
 A Simple Analysis: Step 3 - Loading the Model 5-53

You will now see the pressure load on the surface selected. Remember, if you make a mistake constraining or load-
ing your model, you can use the Tools - Undo (Ctrl-Z) feature of FEMAP to undo your last couple of actions.
 5-54 The FEA Process

5.15.4 A Simple Analysis: Step 4 - Analyzing and Post-Processing

At this point we are ready to run this model and recover deflections and their associated stresses. The Stress Wizard
does provide feedback that the first three steps of the FEA process are complete with the red check marks next to
Steps 1, 2 and 3. Press Step 4 so that we can run this model.
Before the model has been run (an input file is created and submitted to any of the FEMAP supported batch solv-
ers), there is only one option available in Step 4 “Run this Model and Recover Answers”. In order for the automatic
execution of a solver to be possible, you must first have configured FEMAP in File-Preferences to point to specific
FEA solver. Press the run button to process your FEA model.
If your run was successful, the remaining options in Step 4 will be available. Including displaying contours of the
Stress or Displacement distributions.
One that I will point out that is extremely useful, but not in the usual colorful stress/deformation plots, is the ability
to sum reaction forces on the surfaces of your solid model. With this tool, you can recover the forces associated
with holding your model down, this is extremely useful in determining if the fasteners or welds used to hold your
part are sufficiently strong.
To try this option, press the “List Reaction Forces on Surface(s) button. Next, select the two halves of one of the
base holes that you constrained in Step 2. FEMAP will display some dialog boxes detailing the Global X, Y and Z
values of force that were required to hold the selected surfaces as specified.

Update the Solid Model and Re-run

With four simple steps, the Stress Wizard has allowed us to go from solid model to answers. The most powerful
feature is the ability to update the solid model in your CAD system, and rerun the analysis to determine the effect of
any design changes. To experiment with this capability, Press the Step 1 button and return to Step 1. You will now
notice that the caption for the button reads “Select Updated Solid for Analysis”. Through FEMAP's ability to
import an updated solid and slip it under the boundary conditions and loads previously specified, we can bring in a
design update and quickly evaluate its consequences. Press the “Select Updated Solid for Analysis” button and
import BATH_25.X_T. This file is identical to our first one with an increased blend radius on the inside of our fit-
ting.
You will see the solid change on screen. The constraints and loads previously specified are transferred to the
updated solid. You can now go directly back to Step 4, re-run the model, and look at the results of the design
change.
6. Element Reference
This topic describes the FEMAP element library, the geometry used to create the elements and apply loads, and the
properties which can be specified. The descriptions given for the various element types define typical characteris-
tics of the elements as they are translated to various analysis programs. Check your analysis program documenta-
tion for additional capabilities or limitations of each element type in that program.
There are several element types based on the general shape of the elements as well as other types and “connector
elements. They are divided into 4 sections:
• Section 6.1, "Line Elements"
• Section 6.2, "Plane Elements"
• Section 6.3, "Volume Elements"
• Section 6.4, "Other Elements"

6.1 Line Elements

All of the elements in this section structurally connect two nodes. The different types represent different structural
conditions. See Section 6.1.1, "Rod Element", Section 6.1.2, "Tube Element", Section 6.1.3, "Curved Tube Ele-
ment", Section 6.1.4, "Bar Element", Section 6.1.5, "Beam Element", Section 6.1.6, "Link Element", Section 6.1.7,
"Curved Beam Element", Section 6.1.8, "Spring/Damper Element", Section 6.1.9, "DOF Spring Element", Section
6.1.10, "Gap Element", and Section 6.1.11, "Plot Only Element (Line)"

6.1.1 Rod Element

Description
Uniaxial element with tension, compression and torsional stiffness, but does not have any bending or shear capabil-
ity.

Application
Typically used to model truss, or other “pin-ended” members.
Shape
Line, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
The element X axis goes from the first node to the second.
Properties
Area (of cross-section), Torsional Constant, Coefficient for Torsional Stress, Nonstructural Mass/Length.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, the only option is to enable Hybrid. When Hybrid is enabled, it only
affects ABAQUS export (hybrid TRUSS).
 6-2 Element Reference

On Ansys tab, when “0..LINK180” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Cross section is scaled
when stretching” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Cross section does not change” to set KEYOPT(2) to 1.
On Ansys tab, when ““1..LINK8” or“2..LINK10” is selected in the Ansys Options section:
Creates elements which are no longer officially documented in the ANSYS Element Reference and should only be
used when trying to match results from older versions of ANSYS.

6.1.2 Tube Element

Description
Variation of the rod element with a tubular cross section. It is also a uniaxial element with tension, compression,
and torsional stiffness. Some analysis programs also include bending and shear stiffness when they use this type to
represent a pipe.

Application
Often used to model pipes. Also used as a more convenient way to specify properties for a rod element if the cross
section is tubular.
Shape
Line, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
The element X axis goes from the first node to the second.
Properties
Inner Diameter, Outer Diameter, Nonstructural Mass/Length.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, the only option is to enable Hybrid. When Hybrid is enabled, it only
affects ABAQUS export (hybrid PIPE) and MARC export (element 14 when enabled, otherwise 31).
On Ansys tab, when “0..PIPE288” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Use linear shape func-
tion” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Use quadratic shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 2, or “2..Use cubic
shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(4). Use “0..Hoop Strain is
based on thin pipe theory” to sect KEYOPT(4) to 1 (default) or “0..Hoop Strain is based on thick pipe theory” to set
KEYOPT(4) to 2.
On Ansys tab, when “0..PIPE16” is selected in the Ansys Options section,
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(2), while the second drop-down sets KEYOPT(7).
 Curved Tube Element 6-3

6.1.3 Curved Tube Element

Description
Another tube type element. This element is curved. The neutral axis is an arc, not a line, which goes between the
nodes. You can often use multiple tube elements, arranged in an arc, instead of this element.
Application
Modeling of bends and elbows in piping systems, or other curved members.
Shape
Arc, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
Same as beam/curved beam element. The element is curved in the elemental XY plane, with the outward radius
pointing toward the third node (or in the direction of the orientation vector). For a picture of the element definition,
see Section 6.1.7, "Curved Beam Element".
Properties
Inner Diameter, Outer Diameter, Nonstructural Mass/Length.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, none.
On Ansys tab when “0..ELBOW290” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Uniform radial expan-
sion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default), “1..0..Nonuniform radial expansion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 1, or “#..Num-
ber of General section definition = #” to set KEYOPT(2) to 2 through 8, based on the selected option.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Internal and exter-
nal pressure cause load on end caps” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default), “1..Internal and external pressure does not
cause load on end caps” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1, “2..Internal and external pressure cause load on the first end” to
set KEYOPT(6) to 2, or “3..Internal and external pressure cause load on the second end” to set KEYOPT(6) to 3.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness
stress=0” to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..PIPE289” is selected in the Ansys Options section:
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(4). Use “0..Hoop Strain is based on
thin pipe theory” to sect KEYOPT(4) to 1 (default) or “1..Hoop Strain is based on thick pipe theory” to set
KEYOPT(4) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Internal and exter-
nal pressure cause load on end caps” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Internal and external pressure does not
cause load on end caps” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..PIPE18” is selected in the Ansys Options section:
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(3), while the second drop-down sets KEYOPT(8).
Additional Notes
Unlike the beam element, offsets, stress recovery locations, and releases are not supported for this element type.

6.1.4 Bar Element

Description
Uniaxial element with tension, compression, torsion, and bending capabilities. The more general beam element is
often used instead of this element. The figure at the end of this section, defines both element types. For some anal-
ysis programs, FEMAP translates both types to the same element type.
Application
Used to model general beam/frame structures.
 6-4 Element Reference

Shape
Line, connecting two nodes. A third node can be specified to orient the element Y axis.
Element Coordinate System
The element X axis goes from the first node to the second. The element Y axis is perpendicular to the element X
axis. It points from the first node toward the orientation (or third) node. If you use an orientation vector, the Y axis
points from the first node in the direction of the orientation vector. The element Z axis is determined from the cross
product of the element X and Y axes.
Properties
Area, Moments of Inertia (I1, I2, I12), Torsional Constant, Shear Areas (Y, Z), Nonstructural Mass/Length, Stress
Recovery Locations. All required input properties for this element can be automatically calculated for standard or
arbitrary shapes by using the FEMAP beam property section generator (accessed under Model, Property, Shape).
The Shear Areas calculated by the beam property section generator and the input to FEMAP are the effective areas
for shearing, not a shear factor. If you are inputting values directly and have a shear factor, simply multiple it by the
actual area to obtain the shear area.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
Nine available formulations for DYNA (1..Hughes-Liu is default) defining value for ELFORM on *SEC-
TION_BEAM card.
Standard (MARC - 98, ABAQUS - B21, B31) or Euler-Bernoulli (MARC - 52, ABAQUS B23, B33) options.
The Hybrid formulation option only affects ABAQUS export by adding an “H” to the element name, thereby call-
ing the ABAQUS hybrid form of the element.
On Ansys tab when “0..BEAM188” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..DOF: UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (default) or “1..DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP”
to set KEYOPT(1) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Cross section is
scaled when stretching” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Cross section does not change” to set KEYOPT(2)
to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Use linear shape func-
tion” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Use quadratic shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 2, or “2..Use cubic
shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(11). Use “0..Use pre-integrated
section property if possible” to set KEYOPT(11) to 0 (default) or “1..Integrate section property numerically” to set
KEYOPT(11) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..BEAM4” is selected in the Ansys Options section:
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(2), while the second drop-down sets KEYOPT(7).
On Ansys tab when “1..BEAM44” is selected in the Ansys Options section:
Creates elements which are no longer officially documented in the ANSYS Element Reference or Legacy Elements
and should only be used when trying to match results from older versions of ANSYS.
Additional Notes
For further descriptions regarding Releases, Offsets and Stress Recovery Locations, see Section 6.1.5, "Beam Ele-
ment".
 Beam Element 6-5

6.1.5 Beam Element

Description
Uniaxial element with tension, compression, torsion, and bending capabilities. This element can be tapered. You
can specify different properties at each end of the beam.

Application
Used to model beam/frame structures.
Shape
Line, connecting 2 or 3 nodes. An orientaion node can be specified to orient the element Y axis.
Element Coordinate System
The element X axis goes from the first node to the second. The element Y axis is perpendicular to the element X
axis. It points from the first node toward the orientation (or third) node. If you use an orientation vector, the Y axis
points from the first node in the direction of the orientation vector. The element Z axis is determined from the cross
product of the element X and Y axes.
Properties
Area, Moments of Inertia (I1, I2, I12), Torsional Constant, Shear Areas (Y, Z), Nonstructural Mass/Length, Warp-
ing Constant, Stress Recovery Locations, Neutral Axis Offsets (Nay, Naz, Nby and Nbz). All required input prop-
erties for this element can be automatically calculated for standard or arbitrary shapes by using the FEMAP beam
cross section generator (accessed under Model, Property, Shape). The Shear Areas calculated by the beam property
section generator and the input to FEMAP are the effective areas for shearing, not a shear factor. If you are input-
ting values directly, and have a shear factor, simply multiple it by the actual area to obtain the shear area. If the
beam is tapered, you can specify different properties at each end of the element.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
Ten available formulations for LS-DYNA. “1..Hughes-Liu” (default), “2..Belytschko-Schwer Resultant”,
“3..Truss”, “4..Belytschko-Schwer Full Cross-Section Integration”, “5..Belytschko-Schwer Tube”, “6..Discrete
Beam/Cable”, “7..Plane Strain Shell”, “8..Axisymmetric Shell”, “9..Spotweld”, and “13..Timoshenko”, which
define value for ELFORM on *SECTION_BEAM card.
Standard (MARC - 98, ABAQUS - B21, B31) or Euler-Bernoulli (MARC - 52, ABAQUS B23, B33) options.
The Hybrid formulation option only affects ABAQUS export by adding an “H” to the element name, thereby call-
ing the ABAQUS hybrid form of the element.
On Ansys tab when “0..BEAM188” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for linear elements):
 6-6 Element Reference

Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..DOF: UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (default) or “1..DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP”
to set KEYOPT(1) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Cross section is
scaled when stretching” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Cross section does not change” to set KEYOPT(2)
to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Use linear shape func-
tion” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Use quadratic shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 2, or “2..Use cubic
shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(11). Use “0..Use pre-integrated
section property if possible” to set KEYOPT(11) to 0 (default) or “1..Integrate section property numerically” to set
KEYOPT(11) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..BEAM44” is selected in the Ansys Options section (linear elements only):
Creates elements which are no longer officially documented in the ANSYS Element Reference or Legacy Elements
and should only be used when trying to match results from older versions of ANSYS.
On Ansys tab when “0..BEAM189” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..DOF: UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (default) or “1..DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP”
to set KEYOPT(1) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Cross section is
scaled when stretching” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Cross section does not change” to set KEYOPT(2)
to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Use linear shape func-
tion” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Use quadratic shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 2, or “2..Use cubic
shape function” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(11). Use “0..Use pre-integrated
section property if possible” to set KEYOPT(11) to 0 (default) or “1..Integrate section property numerically” to set
KEYOPT(11) to 1.
Three formulations for Legacy ANSYS:
BEAM44 - default. Always sets KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(8) to appropriate values for beam releases.
BEAM188/section shape - creates BEAM188 and uses SECTYPE, (section shape) when possible, to have ANSYS
calculate cross-section property values. Uses SECTYPE, ASEC if “section shapes” does not exist in ANSYS. Also,
always sets KEYOPT(3) = 3
BEAM188/ASEC - creates BEAM188 and SECTYPE, ASEC for all beams with this formulation, then exports
cross-section property values calculated in FEMAP. Also, always sets KEYOPT(3) = 3
Additional Notes
You can specify releases which remove the connection between selected element degrees of freedom and the
nodes.
Offset vectors defined on the element move the neutral axis and shear center from the nodes. Neutral Axis Offsets
(Y,Z) defined on the property card move the neutral axis away from the shear center. If there are no neutral axis off-
sets, the neutral axis and shear center are coincident. If there are no offsets, both the neutral axis and shear center lie
directly between the nodes.
Stress Recovery Locations define positions in the elemental YZ plane (element cross-section) where you want the
analysis program to calculate stresses.
Specifying moments of inertia for beam (and bar) elements can sometimes be confusing. In FEMAP, I1 is the
moment of inertia about the elemental Z axis. It resists bending in the outer Y fibers of the beam. It is the moment
of inertia in plane 1. Similarly, I2 is the moment of inertia about the elemental Y axis. If you are familiar with one
of the analysis program conventions, the following table may help you convert to FEMAP's convention.
 Link Element 6-7

FEMAP I1 I2
NASTRAN Izz Iyy
ANSYS IZ1 IY1
ABAQUS I22 I11
MARC Iyy Ixx
LS-DYNA Itt Iss

6.1.6 Link Element

Description
This element is a rigid link with six spring (bushing) stiffnesses at each end. Link elements are only supported by
MSC/pal and CDA/Sprint I.
Application
Can be used to represent members that are very stiff compared to the stiffness of their connections. Can also simu-
late a rigid connection if you specify large spring stiffnesses.
Shape
Line, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
The elemental X axis goes from the first node to the second.
Properties
Six stiffnesses at each node.
Formulation
None.

6.1.7 Curved Beam Element

Description
Another beam type element. This element is curved. The neutral axis is an arc, not a line, which goes between the
nodes. You can often use multiple beam elements, arranged in an arc, instead of this element.

Application
Modeling of bends and elbows in piping systems, or other curved members.
Shape
Arc, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
Same as beam element. The element is curved in the elemental XY plane, with the outward radius pointing toward
the third node (or in the direction of the orientation vector).
 6-8 Element Reference

Properties
Bend Radius, Area, Moments of Inertia (I1, I2, I12), Torsional Constant, Shear Areas (Y, Z), Nonstructural Mass/
Length, Stress Recovery Locations. All required input properties for this element can be automatically calculated
for standard or arbitrary shapes by using the FEMAP beam cross section generator (accessed under Model, Prop-
erty, Shape). The shear areas calculated by the beam property section generator and the input to FEMAP are the
effective areas for shearing, not a shear factor. If you are inputting values directly and have a shear factor, simply
multiple it by the actual area to obtain the shear area.
Additional Notes
For descriptions regarding Offsets and Stress Recovery Locations, see Section 6.1.5, "Beam Element". Note that
releases are not supported for this element type.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, none.
On Ansys tab when “0..BEAM189” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..DOF: UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (default) or “1..DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP”
to set KEYOPT(1) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Cross section is
scaled when stretching” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Cross section does not change” to set KEYOPT(2)
to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(11). Use “0..Use pre-integrated
section property if possible” to set KEYOPT(11) to 0 (default) or “1..Integrate section property numerically” to set
KEYOPT(11) to 1.

6.1.8 Spring/Damper Element

Description
A combined stiffness (spring) and damper element. It can be either axial or torsional. The DOF spring is an alterna-
tive element. The Type specified on the Property for each element is used to determine which element is created.
Application
Used to represent any purely axial, or purely torsional, structural member. Other use is to specify a bushing.
Shape
Line, connecting two nodes. CBUSH Type has circular symbol, “Other” Type has rectangular symbol. Only sym-
bol will appear if nodes are coincident.
Element Coordinate System
The element X axis goes from the first node toward the second.
Type on Property set to CBUSH:
If Orientation is set to CSys on the element itself, then the element Csys is equal to the selected Csys. If instead, Ori-
entation is set to From Property on the element AND Orientation CSys on the property is enabled, then the element
Csys is equal to the selected Csys on the property. If the Orientation Csys is not used, then the element Csys is defined
with the X axis going from the first node to the second. The element Y axis is perpendicular to the element X axis. It
points from the first node toward the orientation (or third) node. If you use an orientation vector, the Y axis points
from the first node in the direction of the orientation vector. The element Z axis is determined from the cross product
of the element X and Y axes. The BUSH element also has offsets that are defined in the output coordinate system.
Properties
If Type of referenced Property is set to Other (NASTRAN CVISC/CROD), enter a Stiffness and/or Damping.
If Type is CBUSH, then Stiffness, Damping, and Structural Damping values can be defined for individual degrees
of freedom, along with Spring/Damper Location (can also be specified on element), Orientation Csys (can also be
specified on element), Stress/Strain recovery coefficients. For Frequency or nonlinear analysis function depen-
dence can be defined for stiffness and damping values.
 DOF Spring Element 6-9

Formulation
No longer used. They have been replaced by the Type specified in the Property referenced by each element. In Pre-
vious versions of FEMAP, 2 formulations were available for Simcenter Nastran and MSC.Nastran. “0..Default”
would write a CROD if stiffness was defined on the property or a CVISC if a damping value was defined.
“1..CBUSH” would write the spring element as a CBUSH and the corresponding property as PBUSH and
PBUSHT.

6.1.9 DOF Spring Element

Description
A combined stiffness (spring) and damper element. This element connects any (of six) nodal degree of freedom at
the first node, to any nodal degree of freedom at the second node. The spring/damper element is an alternative ele-
ment for axial members.
Application
Used to connect two degrees of freedom with a specified stiffness. Depending on the degrees of freedom and the
position of the nodes, this can be an axial member or something much more complex.
Shape
Connects two nodes. Drawn as a line with a “jagged” symbol by FEMAP. Only symbol will appear if nodes are
coincident.
Element Coordinate System
Determined by nodal degrees of freedom.
Properties
Degree of Freedom (at each node), stiffness, damping.
Formulation
There are 2 formulations available for Simcenter Nastran and MSC.Nastran. “0..Default (CELAS2/CDAMP2)”
will write a CELAS2 or CDAMP2 which have both “property” (i.e. stiffness value in the “K” field for CELAS2 or
damping value in the “B” field for CDAMP2) and “connection” (i.e., node/grid IDs) information in a single Nas-
tran entry. When “1..CELAS1/CDAMP1” is chosen, a CELAS1 or CDAMP1 will reference an appropriate Prop-
erty (PID) for a spring (PELAS) or damper (PDMAP). The PELAS and PDAMP are not written at all when using
the default formulation.

6.1.10 Gap Element

Description
A nonlinear element which has different tension, compression, and shear stiffnesses. Check your analysis program
for further descriptions. The exact capabilities of this element type vary widely between analysis programs.
Application
Used to represent surfaces or points which can separate, close, or slide, relative to each other.
Shape
Line, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
The element X axis goes from the first node to the second. The element Y axis is perpendicular to the element X
axis. It points from the first node toward the orientation (or third) node. If you use an orientation vector, the Y axis
points from the first node in the direction of the orientation vector. The element Z axis is determined from the cross
product of the element X and Y axes.
Properties
Initial Gap, Compression Stiffness, Tension Stiffness, Transverse Stiffness, Y and Z Friction Coefficients, Preload
Force, Interface Plane Normal (ABAQUS Only), Interface Width/Area (ABAQUS Only). The ABAQUS Thermal...
button can be used to set options for *GAP CONDUCTANCE and/or *GAP RADIATION entries. Many of these
properties are not supported by all analysis programs.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, none.
 6-10 Element Reference

On Ansys tab when “0..CONTA178” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set the value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Unidirectional Gap”
to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (default), “1..Cylindrical gap” to set KEYOPT(1) to 1, or “2..Spherical gap” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Augmented
Lagrangian” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default), “1..Penalty Function” to set KEYOPT(2) to 1, “2..Lagrange Multi-
plier in normal and penalty in tangent” to set KEYOPT(2) to 3, or “3..Lagrange Multiplier” to set KEYOPT(2) to 4.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..No weak spring across
an open gap” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Use weak spring across an open gap” to set KEYOPT(3) to 1,
“2..Weak spring stiffness when contact open or sliding” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3, “3..Weak spring stiffness and
force when contact open” to set KEYOPT(3) to 4, or “4..Weak spring stiffness and force when contact open or slid-
ing” to set KEYOPT(3) to 4.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(4). Use “0..Gap size based on
real constant GAP + initial node locations” to set KEYOPT(4) to 0 (default) or “1..Gap size based on real constant
GAP only” to set KEYOPT(4) to 1.
Use the fifth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(7). Use “0..Time step is not con-
trolled in contact” to set KEYOPT(7) to 0 (default), “1..A reasonable time step the next substep” to set
KEYOPT(7) to 1, “2..A minimum time step the next substep” to set KEYOPT(7) to 2, or “3..Use impact con-
straint” to set KEYOPT(7) to 4.
Use the sixth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Standard contact” to
set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default), “1..Rough contact” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1, “2..No separation contact” to set
KEYOPT(10) to 2, “3..Bonded contact” to set KEYOPT(10) to 3, “4..No separation contact always” to set
KEYOPT(10) to 4, “5..Bonded contact always” to set KEYOPT(10) to 5, “6..Bonded contact initial” to set
KEYOPT(10) to 6, or “7..Rigid Coulomb friction” to set KEYOPT(10) to 7.
On Ansys tab when “1..CONTAC52” is selected in the Ansys Options section:
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(1), the second sets KEYOPT(3), the third sets KEYOPT(4), and the fourth sets KEYOPT(7).

6.1.11 Plot Only Element (Line)

Description
This element is nonstructural. It does not add any stiffness to your model. It is only used for plotting.
Application
Used to represent structural features that are not being analyzed, but that aid in the visualization of the model. Plot-
only elements are also used by the ABAQUS interface to create interface elements and rigid bodies.
Shape
Line, connecting two nodes.
Element Coordinate System
None
Properties
None
Formulation
None.
 Plane Elements 6-11

6.2 Plane Elements

The plane elements are used to represent membrane, shell, and plate structures. They all follow the same shape and
numbering conventions. The simplest formulation of these elements are just a three-noded triangle and a four-
noded quadrilateral. In addition, six-noded “parabolic” triangles and eight-noded “parabolic” quadrilaterals are also
available.

In most cases, loads on plane elements will be applied to face 1. In this case positive pressure acts in the same
direction as the face normal (as determined by the right-hand rule). Conversely, if loads are applied to face 2, their
positive direction will be opposite to the face normal. Therefore a positive pressure on face 2 is equivalent to a neg-
ative pressure on face 1. If you need to apply edge loads, they can be applied to faces 3 through 6 as shown. Their
positive direction is inward, toward the element center.

Whenever possible, you should try to use elements which closely resemble equilateral triangles or squares. These
shapes will usually result in the best analysis accuracy. Consult your analysis program documentation for specific
shape limitations of that program. See Section 6.2.1, "Shear Panel Element", Section 6.2.2, "Membrane Element",
Section 6.2.3, "Bending Only Element", Section 6.2.4, "Plate Element", Section 6.2.5, "Laminate Element", Sec-
tion 6.2.6, "Plane Strain Element", Section 6.2.7, "Axisymmetric Shell Element", and Section 6.2.8, "Plot Only
Element (Plane)".

6.2.1 Shear Panel Element

Description
A plane element that only resists shear forces, tangential forces applied to the element edges. Some analysis pro-
grams also allow this element to resist normal forces through the use of effectiveness factors.
Application
Representing structures which contain very thin elastic sheets, typically supported by stiffeners.
Shape
Planar, three-noded triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-noded triangle, eight-noded quadrilateral. Some shapes
are not available for all analysis programs.
Element Coordinate System
Refer to the figure in Section 6.2, "Plane Elements". The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis.
 6-12 Element Reference

Properties
Thickness, Nonstructural mass/area, Effectiveness Factors (not supported by many analysis programs).
Formulation
None.

6.2.2 Membrane Element

Description
A plane element that only resists in-plane normal (membrane) forces. In some analysis programs this is a degener-
ate form of the general plate element.
Application
Used to represent very thin elastic sheets.
Shape
Planar, three-noded triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-noded triangle, eight-noded quadrilateral. Some shapes
are not available for all analysis programs.
Element Coordinate System
Refer to the figure in Section 6.2, "Plane Elements". The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis.
Properties
Thickness, Nonstructural mass/area.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
In DYNA Options choose between “1..Belytschko-Tsay Membrane” or “1..Belytschko-Tsay Fully Integrated”.
For ABAQUS choose to create “1..Standard” or 2..Reduced Integration” Membrane elements.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL181” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for linear elements):
Always writes KEYOPT(1) set to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Reduced integration
with hourglass control” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default) or “1..Full integration with incompatible modes” to set
KEYOPT(3) to 2.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(5). Use “0..Standard shell” to set
KEYOPT(5) to 0 (default) or “1..Advanced shell considering initial shell curvature” to set KEYOPT(5) to 1.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0”
to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..SHELL63” is selected in the Ansys Options section (linear elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. Always writes KEYOPT(1) set to 1. The
second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section sets KEYOPT(2), the third sets KEYOPT(3), the fourth sets
KEYOPT(6), the fifth sets KEYOPT(7), and the sixth sets KEYOPT(8).
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL281” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Always writes KEYOPT(1) set to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0”
to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.

6.2.3 Bending Only Element

Description
A plane element that resists only bending forces. In some analysis programs this is a degenerate form of the general
plate element.
Application
Used to model plates that will only resist bending.
 Plate Element 6-13

Shape
Planar, three-noded triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-noded triangle, eight-noded quadrilateral. Some shapes
are not available for all analysis programs.
Element Coordinate System
Refer to the figure in Section 6.2, "Plane Elements". The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis.
Properties
Thickness, Nonstructural mass/area, Bending Stiffness parameter (Nastran only), Fiber distances for stress recov-
ery.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, none.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL63” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for linear elements):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. Always writes KEYOPT(1) set to 2. The
second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section sets KEYOPT(2), the third sets KEYOPT(3), the fourth sets
KEYOPT(6), the fifth sets KEYOPT(7), and the sixth sets KEYOPT(8).
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL281” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, or “2..Element is for stress/strain evaluation only” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0”
to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.

6.2.4 Plate Element

Description
A combined planar shell element. This element typically resists membrane (in-plane), shear, and bending forces.
Some analysis programs also include transverse (through the thickness of the element) capabilities.
Application
Any structure which is comprised of thin plates/shells.
Shape
Planar, three-noded triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-noded triangle, eight-noded quadrilateral. Some shapes
are not available for all analysis programs.
Element Coordinate System
Refer to the figure in Section 6.2, "Plane Elements". The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis.
Properties
Thickness (average, or varying at each corner), Nonstructural mass/area, Bending Stiffness parameter (Nastran
only), Transverse shear/Membrane thickness (Nastran only), Bending, Shear and Membrane-Bending Coupling
Materials (Nastran only), Fiber distances for stress recovery.
Additional Notes
Many analysis programs do not support tapered plate elements. For those that do, you can specify a different thick-
ness for each corner of the plate. You can always specify a single thickness for all corners simply by entering the
average thickness.
Plate Offsets (Nastran, ANSYS, LS-DYNA Only) can be defined to offset the plate a particular distance from its
nodes. Only one offset may be specified, and it will be in the plate’s positive or negative normal direction.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
DYNA choice of 21 different element formulations. User selection is written to the SECTION_SHELL card.
Default is “2..Belytschko-Tsay”
No MARC options are available for this element type.
 6-14 Element Reference

ABAQUS Plate options for Standard (S3, S4, STRI65, S8R), Reduced Integration (S3R, S4R, S8R5, S8R), or Thin
shells (STRI35, S4R5, STRI65, S8R5) can be defined. In addition, you can select Flat Triangles to export STRI3
elements instead of STRI35. The Warping option is only applicable to ABAQUS EXPLICIT, which causes
S4RSW elements to be written instead of S4RS elements.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL181” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for linear elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, or “2..Element is for stress/strain evaluation only” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Reduced integration
with hourglass control” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default) or “1..Full integration with incompatible modes” to set
KEYOPT(3) to 2.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(5). Use “0..Standard shell” to set
KEYOPT(5) to 0 (default) or “1..Advanced shell considering initial shell curvature” to set KEYOPT(5) to 1.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0”
to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..SHELL63” is selected in the Ansys Options section (linear elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(1), the second sets KEYOPT(2), the third sets KEYOPT(3), the fourth sets KEYOPT(6), the
fifth sets KEYOPT(7), and the sixth sets KEYOPT(8).
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL281” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, or “2..Element is for stress/strain evaluation only” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0”
to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.

6.2.5 Laminate Element

Description
Similar to the plate element, except that this element is composed of one or more layers (lamina).

Each layer can represent a different material. To create a laminate you need a Layup to specify the material, thick-
ness, orientation angle and global ply ID (optional) of each ply and a Laminate property.
Application
Usually used to represent laminated composite shells.
Shape
Planar, three-noded triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-noded triangle, eight- noded quadrilateral. Some shapes
are not available for all analysis programs.
 Laminate Element 6-15

Element Coordinate System

Refer to the figure in Section 6.2, "Plane Elements". The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis. In
addition, the material axes of each layer can be rotated in the element XY plane, relative to the element X axis.
Properties
For each laminate property, a Layup (a separate FEMAP entity containing material, orientation angle, thickness,
and global ply ID for each ply) must be created and referenced by the property. Also, Bottom Surface, Nonstruc-
tural mass/area, Options, Bond Shear Allowable, and a Failure Theory. Not all options are available for all analysis
programs
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
DYNA choice of 21 different element formulations. User selection is written to the SECTION_SHELL card.
Default is “2..Belytschko-Tsay”
No MARC options are available for this element type.
ABAQUS Plate options for Standard (S3, S4, STRI65, S8R), Reduced Integration (S3R, S4R, S8R5, S8R), or Thin
shells (STRI35, S4R5, STRI65, S8R5) can be defined. In addition, you can select Flat Triangles to export STRI3
elements instead of STRI35. The Warping option is only applicable to ABAQUS EXPLICIT, which causes
S4RSW elements to be written instead of S4RS elements.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL181” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for linear elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, or “2..Element is for stress/strain evaluation only” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Reduced integration
with hourglass control” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default) or “1..Full integration with incompatible modes” to set
KEYOPT(3) to 2.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(5). Use “0..Standard shell” to set
KEYOPT(5) to 0 (default) or “1..Advanced shell considering initial shell curvature” to set KEYOPT(5) to 1.
Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(8). Use “0..Store element data at
bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer” to set KEYOPT(8) to 0 (default), “1..Store element data for TOP and
BOTTOM, for all layers” to set KEYOPT(8) to 1, or “..Store element data for TOP, BOTTOM and MID, for all
layers” to set KEYOPT(8) to 2.
Use the fifth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0” to
set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL281” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, or “2..Element is for stress/strain evaluation only” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(8). Use “0..Store element data at
bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer” to set KEYOPT(8) to 0 (default), “1..Store element data for TOP and
BOTTOM, for all layers” to set KEYOPT(8) to 1, or “..Store element data for TOP, BOTTOM and MID, for all
layers” to set KEYOPT(8) to 2.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0” to
set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.
 6-16 Element Reference

6.2.6 Plane Strain Element

Description
This is a biaxial plane element. It creates a two-dimensional model of a solid structure which does not vary through
its depth, the plane strain condition.

Note: Some analysis programs use two-dimensional elements for plane strain analysis. Those programs usu-
ally require that the elements be located in a specific global plane. The required planes for each program
are given in Section 6.3.1, "Axisymmetric Element". See also Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces"
and your analysis program documentation for more information about which programs use two dimen-
sional elements. You must build your model in one of the listed planes if you plan to use one of these
analysis programs.

Application
Modeling of very thick solids which have one constant cross section.
Shape
Drawn as planar, but really a volume. Triangles represent wedges, quadrilaterals represent hexahedra. Three-noded
triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-noded triangle, eight-noded quadrilateral. Some shapes are not available for
all analysis programs.
Element Coordinate System
Refer to the figure in Section 6.2, "Plane Elements". The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis.
Properties
Thickness and fiber distances (often not needed), Nonstructural mass/area.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
DYNA choice between “1..PLANE STRAIN” or “2..PLANE STRESS” elements.
Simcenter Nastran offers specialized Plane Strain and Plane Stress elements for Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 601)
only. Set the NASTRAN option to “1” for Plane Strain or “2” for Plane Stress.
For ABAQUS and MARC, the elements will be written as Plane Strain unless the Plane Stress option is selected.
The following table provides the elements associated with the different options. These elements correspond to lin-
ear and parabolic triangular and quadrilateral topologies. Certain options only effect specific element topologies.

Analysis Program--> ABAQUS ABAQUS MARC MARC

Plane--> Strain Stress Strain Stress
Standard CPE3, CPE4, CPS3, CPS4 6, 11, 125, 27 3, 124, 26
CPE6, CPE8 CPS6, CPS8
Reduced Integration CPE3, CPE4R, CPS3, CPS4R, 6, 115, 125, 54 114,53
CPE6, CPE8R CPS6, CPS8R or 58
Incompatible Modes CPE3, CPE4I CPS3, CPS4I Standard 3 (Assumed Strain)
Modified Contact CPE6M CPS6M No effect No effect
Hybrid Add “H” Add “H” 6, 11, 128, 32 or No effect
58

On Ansys tab when “0..PLANE182” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for linear elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Full integration with
Bbar method” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Reduced integration with hourglass control” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, “2..Enhanced strain” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2, or “3..Simplified Enhanced Strain” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 3.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Plane stress” to set
KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Axisymmetric” to set KEYOPT(3) to 1, “2..Plane Strain” to set KEYOPT(3) to 2,
“3..Plane stress with thickness” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3, or “4..Generalized plane strain” to set KEYOPT(3) to 4.
 Axisymmetric Shell Element 6-17

Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displacement
formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..PLANE42” is selected in the Ansys Options section (linear elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(1), the second sets KEYOPT(2), and the third sets KEYOPT(3).
On Ansys tab when “0..PLANE183” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Plane stress” to set
KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default), “1..Axisymmetric” to set KEYOPT(3) to 1, “2..Plane Strain” to set KEYOPT(3) to 2,
“3..Plane stress with thickness” to set KEYOPT(3) to 3, or “4..Generalized plane strain” to set KEYOPT(3) to 5.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.

6.2.7 Axisymmetric Shell Element

Description
This element is line element used to represent shells of revolution.
Application
Modeling of axisymmetric shell structures with axisymmetric constraints and loading, deforming in the radial
plane.
Shape
Linear and parabolic lines defined by 2 or 3 nodes.
Element Coordinate System
Element orientation for Abaqus: (SAX1, SAX2)
For Abaqus these elements must be modeled in the XY plane with the r-direction positive. The r-direction is
aligned with global X-direction and the z-direction corresponds to the global Y-direction.
The “top” surface of the shell is defined as the positive normal direction from node 1 to 2 of the loaded element.
Pressure Loads can be defined on the “top” or bottom surface of the shell
See the figure above (in this section).
Properties
Thickness
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, none.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL208” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for linear elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default) or “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Element does not
include torsion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Element includes torsion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(3). Use “0..Element does not
include internal node” to set KEYOPT(3) to 0 (default) or “1..Element includes internal node” to set KEYOPT(3)
to 2.
 6-18 Element Reference

Use the fourth drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0”
to set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “0..SHELL209” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Element has bending
and membrane stiffness” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default) or “1..Element has membrane stiffness only” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Element does not
include torsion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (default) or “1..Element includes torsion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(10). Use “0..Thickness stess=0” to
set KEYOPT(10) to 0 (default) or “1..Calculate thickness stress from load” to set KEYOPT(10) to 1.

6.2.8 Plot Only Element (Plane)

Description
This element is nonstructural. It does not add any stiffness to your model. It is only used for plotting. Planar plot-
only elements are also used by the ABAQUS interface to create interface elements and rigid bodies.
Application
Used to represent structural features that are not being analyzed, but that aid in the visualization of the model.
Shape
Linear quadrilateral and linear triangular shapes are allowed (midside nodes cannot be created) connecting 3 or 4
nodes.
Element Coordinate System
None
Properties
None
Formulation
None

6.3 Volume Elements

These elements are all used to model three-dimensional solid structures. They can provide very detailed results, but
usually require additional modeling and analysis time and effort. See Section 6.3.1, "Axisymmetric Element", Sec-
tion 6.3.2, "Solid Element", Section 6.3.3, "Solid Laminate Element", and Section 6.3.4, "Solid Cohesive Element"

6.3.1 Axisymmetric Element

Description
The axisymmetric element is a two-dimensional element used to represent volumes of revolution.
 Axisymmetric Element 6-19

Note: Before using axisymmetric elements, it is very important to consult your analysis documentation. Most
analysis programs require you to construct your model in a specific global plane.

The following table lists the required conventions for the supported programs:

Program Global Model Plane Radial Direction

NASTRAN XZ Global X
ANSYS XY Global X
ABAQUS XY Global X
MARC XY Global Y
LS-DYNA XY Global X
FEMAP Structural XZ Global X

The following table lists the required conventions for the obsolete programs:

Program Global Model Plane Radial Direction

MSC/pal & CDA/Sprint XZ Global X
STARDYNE XY Global X
COSMOS XY Global X
ALGOR, mTAB & SAP YZ Global Y
WECAN XY Global X

If possible, you should always build your model in the convention of the analysis program you plan to use. To
properly translate your model to any of the programs, FEMAP requires that you build the model using one of the
listed conventions. When writing the model, FEMAP checks to see if the model is in the correct plane for that pro-
gram. If it is not, you will be given several options to automatically rotate it into the correct plane. If you do not use
one of the above conventions, FEMAP will translate your model, but the results may be incorrect.
Application
Modeling of axisymmetric solid structures with axisymmetric constraints and loading.
Shape
Drawn as planar, but really represent axisymmetric rings. Three-noded triangle, four-noded quadrilateral, six-
noded triangle, eight-noded quadrilateral. Some shapes are not available for all analysis programs.
Element Coordinate System
See the figure above (in this section). The material angle can be used to rotate the element X axis. Note the differ-
ences between the axisymmetric element coordinate angles and those for the plane elements. In this case, the
angles are from a global axis, not from the first side of the element.
Properties
None.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
For Nastran, there are three options:” 0..Default”, “1..CTRIAX6, CTRAIX, CQUADX”, and “2..CTRAX3,
CQUADX4, CTRAX6, CQUADX8”. When “0..Default” is selected, Simcenter Nastran will use “2..CTRAX3,
CQUADX4, CTRAX6, CQUADX8”, while all other Nastrans will use “1..CTRIAX6, CTRAIX, CQUADX”. You
can choose the “1..CTRIAX6, CTRAIX, CQUADX” formulation when exporting for Simcenter Nastran, but set-
ting the formulation to “2..CTRAX3, CQUADX4, CTRAX6, CQUADX8” will cause an error in all other versions
of Nastran, as these element types do not exist.
For DYNA you can choose between an Area or Volume Weighted formulation.
Both ABAQUS and DYNA have typical axisymmetric elements (2-DOF) as well as axisymmetric elements with
twist. The 2-DOF elements will be used unless the Twist option is selected. The following table provides the ele-
 6-20 Element Reference

ments associated with the different options. These elements correspond to linear and parabolic triangular and quad-
rilateral topologies. Certain options may only affect specific element topologies

Analysis Program--> ABAQUS ABAQUS MARC MARC

Type--> 2-DOF Twist 2-DOF Twist
Standard CAX3, CAX4 CGAX3, CGAX4 2, 10 20
CAX6, CAX8 CGAX6, CGAX8 126, 28 67
Reduced Integration CAX3, CAX4R CGAX3, CGAX4R 2, 116, Standard
CAX6, CAX8R CGAX6, CGAX8R 126, 55
Incompatible Modes CAX3, CAX4I Standard Standard Standard
Modified Contact CAX6M” No effect No effect No effect
Hybrid Add “H” Add “H” 2, 10 66
126, 33
Hybrid+Reduced 2, 116 66
(MARC) 129, 59

On Ansys tab when “0..PLANE182” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for linear elements):
Always writes KEYOPT(3) set to 1.
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(1). Use “0..Full integration with
Bbar method” to set KEYOPT(1) to 0 (Default), “1..Reduced integration with hourglass control” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 1, “2..Enhanced strain” to set KEYOPT(1) to 2, or “3..Simplified Enhanced Strain” to set
KEYOPT(1) to 3.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displacement
formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..PLANE42” is selected in the Ansys Options section (linear elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(1), the second sets KEYOPT(2), and always sets KEYOPT(3) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “0..PLANE183” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for parabolic elements):
Always writes KEYOPT(3) set to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.

6.3.2 Solid Element

Description
A three-dimensional solid element.
Application
Modeling of any three-dimensional structure.
Shape
Four-noded tetrahedron, five-noded pyramid, six-noded wedge, eight-noded brick (hexahedron), ten-noded tetrahe-
dron, thirteen- noded pyramid, fifteen-noded wedge, and twenty-noded brick. Some shapes are not available for all
analysis programs.
 Solid Element 6-21

Element Coordinate System

Can be aligned based on the node locations or aligned to a coordinate system. Check your analysis program docu-
mentation for supported options.
Properties
Material axes, integration order (not all programs).
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab:
For DYNA you can choose between 17 element formulations, although you will typically want to choose one of
these for 4-noded tetrahedrals: (1) 1-Stress Point, (2) Fully Integrated S/R, (3) Fully Integrated 6-DOF/Node, (4)
Tetrahedral 6-DOF/Node or (10) 1-Point Tetrahedron (default). For 10-noded tetrahedrals: (1) 1-Stress Point, (16)
10 Node Tetrahedron, or (17) 10 Node Composite Tetrahedron (Default). The default is (18) EQ -1: Fully Integ S/
R for Poor Aspect Ratio, Efficiency. The selected option is output to the *SECTION_SOLID card.
Both ABAQUS and DYNA have element metric elements with twist. The 2-DOF elements will be used unless the
Twist option is selected. The following table provides the elements associated with the different options. These ele-
ments correspond to linear and parabolic triangular and quadrilateral topologies. Certain options may only affect
specific element topologies.

Analysis Program--> ABAQUS MARC

Standard C3D4, C3D6, CRD8 134, 7
C3D10, C3D15, C3D20 127, 21
Reduced Integration C3D4, C3D6, C3D8R 134, 117
C3D10, C3D15, C3D20R 127, 57
Incompatible Modes C3D4, C3D6, C3D8I 7 (Assumed Strain)
Modified Contact C3D10M No effect
Hybrid Add “H” 2, 10
126, 33
Hybrid+Reduced (MARC) 2, 116
129, 59

On Ansys tab when “0..SOLID185” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for linear elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Full integration with
Bbar method” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (Default), “1..Reduced integration with hourglass control” to set
KEYOPT(2) to 1, “2..Enhanced strain” to set KEYOPT(2) to 2, or “3..Simplified Enhanced Strain” to set
KEYOPT(2) to 3.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
 6-22 Element Reference

On Ansys tab when “1..SOLID45” is selected in the Ansys Options section (linear elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(1), the second sets KEYOPT(2), and third sets KEYOPT(4)
On Ansys tab when “0..SOLID186” is selected in the Ansys Options section (default for parabolic elements):
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..2x2x2 reduced integra-
tion” to set KEYOPT(2) to 0 (Default) or “1..Full integration” to set KEYOPT(2) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “1..SOLID187” is selected in the Ansys Options section (parabolic tetrahedral elements only):
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
On Ansys tab when “2..SOLID95” is selected in the Ansys Options section (parabolic elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes. The first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt
section sets KEYOPT(11).
On Ansys tab when “3..SOLID92” is selected in the Ansys Options section (parabolic tetrahedral elements only):
Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes.
Additional Notes
If you want to apply pressure loads to solid elements, you must specify a face number. The previous and following
figures, show the face numbers (F1 through F6, in the circles) for each element shape. Positive pressure is always
directed inward, toward the center of the element.

Linear and Parabolic Pyramid elements are only supported for Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran.

6.3.3 Solid Laminate Element

Description
Similar to three-dimensional solid element, except that this element is composed of one or more layers (lamina).
Each layer can represent a different material. To create a solid laminate you need a Layup to specify the material,
thickness, orientation angle and global ply ID of each ply and a Solid Laminate property.
Application
Usually used to represent laminated composites using a single layer of solid elements through the thickness.
Shape
Six-noded wedge, eight-noded brick (hexahedron), fifteen-noded wedge, and twenty-noded brick. When using
wedge elements, the triangular faces must be on the top and bottom face of the laminate. Some shapes are not avail-
able for all analysis programs.
 Solid Cohesive Element 6-23

Element Coordinate System

Aligned to a material coordinate system where a ply/stack direction is also selected (one axis is designated as the
ply orientation direction, while another is designated as the stacking direction). Check your analysis program docu-
mentation for supported options.
Properties
For each solid laminate property, a Layup (a separate FEMAP entity containing material, orientation angle, thick-
ness, and global ply ID for each ply) must be created and referenced by the property. Also, Material Coordinate
System, Ply/Stack Direction, Bond Shear Stress Allowable, Bond Normal Stress Allowable for Failure Theory. In
addition, a Ply Failure Theory, a Bond Failure Theory and the required values for each may be specified on the Ply/
Bond tab of several material types. Not all options are available for all analysis programs.
Formulation
On Nastran/Abaqus/LS-Dyna/MSC.Marc tab, none.
On Ansys tab when “0..SOLID185” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for linear elements):
Always writes KEYOPT(3) set to 1.
Use the first drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(2). Use “0..Enhanced strain” to set
KEYOPT(2) to 2, or “1..Simplified Enhanced Strain” to set KEYOPT(2) to 3.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(8). Use “0..Store element data at
bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer” to set KEYOPT(8) to 0 (default), or “1..Store element data for TOP
and BOTTOM, for all layers” to set KEYOPT(8) to 1
On Ansys tab when “0..SOLID186” is selected in the Ansys Options section (only option for linear elements):
Always writes KEYOPT(2) set to 0and KEYOPT(3) to 1.
Use the second drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(6). Use “0..Use pure displace-
ment formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 0 (default) or “1..Use mixed u-P formulation” to set KEYOPT(6) to 1.
Use the third drop-down in the Ansys Keyopt section to set a value for KEYOPT(8). Use “0..Store element data at
bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer” to set KEYOPT(8) to 0 (default), or “1..Store element data for TOP
and BOTTOM, for all layers” to set KEYOPT(8) to 1

6.3.4 Solid Cohesive Element

Description
Similar to three-dimensional solid element, except that this element is used to create a cohesive layer between lay-
ers of other elements. To create a cohesive element you need a Solid Cohesive property.
Application
Modeling of a layer of cohesive elements that bond two layers of elements together or between two layers of solid
laminate elements to determine progressive ply failure (i.e., delamination) in Simcenter Nastran.
Shape
Six-noded wedge, eight-noded brick (hexahedron), fifteen-noded wedge, and twenty-noded brick. When using
wedge elements, the triangular faces must be on the top and bottom of the cohesive layer. In addition, the nodes of
the top and bottom faces can be coincident.
Element Coordinate System
Can be aligned based on the node locations or aligned to a coordinate system. Check your analysis program docu-
mentation for supported options.
Properties
Material axes and thickness of cohesive layer, which is used in calculations instead of the physical thickness of the
element. Also, can only reference Isotropic, Orthotropic (3D), or Simcenter Nastran Cohesive (MATCZ Sol 401,
402) material types.
 6-24 Element Reference

Formulation
None

6.4 Other Elements

This category of elements allows you to define masses, rigid connections, general stiffnesses, contact pairs and
slide lines. See Section 6.4.1, "Mass Element", Section 6.4.2, "Mass Matrix Element", Section 6.4.3, "Spring/
Damper to Ground Element", Section 6.4.4, "DOF Spring to Ground Element", Section 6.4.5, "Rigid Element",
Section 6.4.6, "General Matrix Element", Section 6.4.7, "Slide Line Element", Section 6.4.8, "Weld/Fastener Ele-
ment", and Section 6.4.9, "Nastran General Matrix Element".

6.4.1 Mass Element

Description
A generalized three-dimensional mass and/or inertia element located at a node. The center of mass can be offset
from the node. An even more general form is the mass matrix element.
Application
Representing parts of a structure which contain mass, but which do not add any stiffness.
Shape
Point, connected to one node. Symbol is a square separated into 4 smaller squares (2 shaded, 2 unshaded).
Element Coordinate System
Aligned with a coordinate system that you specify. Some analysis programs require that you define masses relative
to global rectangular coordinates or the nodal degrees of freedom.
Properties
Mass (or MassX, MassY, and MassZ for some programs), Inertias (Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Iyz, Izx), Offsets.
Formulation
None

6.4.2 Mass Matrix Element

Description
A generalized three-dimensional mass and/or inertia element. The mass and inertia properties are defined as a 6x6
mass matrix. In most cases, the mass element is easier to define.
Application
Representing parts of a structure which contain mass, but which do not add any stiffness.
Shape
Point, connected to one node. Symbol is a square separated into 4 smaller squares (2 shaded, 2 unshaded) inside [ ].
Element Coordinate System
Aligned with a coordinate system that you specify. Some analysis programs require that you define masses relative
to global rectangular coordinates or the nodal degrees of freedom.
Properties
Upper triangular portion of a 6x6 mass matrix.
Formulation
None

6.4.3 Spring/Damper to Ground Element

Description
A combined stiffness (spring) and damper element to ground. The DOF spring to ground is an alternative element.
Application
Used to specify a bushing element which is “grounded”
 DOF Spring to Ground Element 6-25

Shape
Has a circular symbol with a line beneath the symbol, at a single node.
Element Coordinate System
If Orientation is set to CSys on the element itself, then the element Csys is equal to the selected Csys. If instead,
Orientation is set to From Property on the element AND Orientation CSys on the property is enabled, then the ele-
ment Csys is equal to the selected Csys on the property.
Properties
Stiffness, Damping, and Structural Damping values can be defined for individual degrees of freedom, along with
Spring/Damper Location (can also be specified on element), Orientation Csys (can also be specified on element),
Stress/Strain recovery coefficients. For Frequency or nonlinear analysis function dependence can be defined for
stiffness and damping values.
Formulation
None

6.4.4 DOF Spring to Ground Element

Description
A combined stiffness (spring) and damper element. This element can use any (of six) nodal degree of freedom at
the only node. The spring/damper to ground element is an alternative element to create a bushing.
Application
Used to connect a degree of freedom with “ground”, having a specified stiffness.
Shape
Drawn as a “jagged” symbol with a line beneath the symbol, at a single node.
Element Coordinate System
Determined by Connect to DOF degree of freedom.
Properties
Degree of Freedom (at single node), stiffness, damping.
Formulation
There are 2 formulations available for Simcenter Nastran and MSC.Nastran. “0..Default (CELAS2/CDAMP2)”
will write a CELAS2 or CDAMP2 which have both “property” (i.e. stiffness value in the “K” field for CELAS2 or
damping value in the “B” field for CDAMP2) and “connection” (i.e., node/grid ID) information in a single Nastran
entry. When “1..CELAS1/CDAMP1” is chosen, a CELAS1 or CDAMP1 will reference an appropriate Property
(PID) for a spring (PELAS) or damper (PDMAP). The PELAS and PDAMP are not written at all when using the
default formulation.

6.4.5 Rigid Element

Description
Represents a rigid connection between a master node and one or more other nodes. FEMAP has no limit on the
number of additional nodes, or the degrees of freedom which may be connected on these additional nodes. Weight-
ing factors for these connections may also be defined.
Some analysis programs require that the rigid element connects all six degrees of freedom. Other programs let you
limit the connection to selected degrees of freedom. In addition, support for the rigid element weighting factors in
analysis programs is limited.
Application
Modeling connections which are very stiff relative to the remainder of the structure.
Shape
One master node, connected to any number of additional nodes. If element formulation for Nastran is set to
1..RSPLINE then the element will have at least two independent nodes and at lest 1 dependent node.
 6-26 Element Reference

Element Coordinate System

None, depends on nodal degrees of freedom.
Properties
None.
Formulation
Rigid element formulations are only currently supported for Nastran, ABAQUS, MSC.Marc, and ANSYS. These
formulations allow you to export FEMAP rigid elements as Nastran RSPLINEs, ABAQUS MPC type, both meth-
ods for using MPC184 as a “Link/Beam” using the legacy ANSYS translator, or MSC.Marc TYING command.
Simcenter Nastran or MSC.Nastran
There are 2 formulations available for Nastran. The default “0..Default” defines RBE2 or RBE3 elements. If the
formulation is set to “1..RSPLINE” then FEMAP will define the RSPLINE element.
ABAQUS
There are currently thirteen different ABAQUS *MPC types supported by FEMAP. The following table provides a
list of the different supported MPCs, the number of required slave nodes, whether the order of the slave nodes are
important, the total number of MPCs written for each rigid element, and the output format. If any of these options
are unclear, please cross-reference this table with the Multi-Point Constraints section in the ABAQUS/Standard
users manual. The references to Node a, b, S, etc. are taken directly from this manual.

No. of Slave
No. of
MPC Type Nodes/ Output Format/Comments
MPCs
Order
BEAM, TIE, PIN >0/Unimport- No. Slave Same master (2nd node in ABAQUS MPC) for all
LINK, ELBOW ant Nodes MPCs but different slave node.
SS LINEAR Master node as Shell Node, S.
SS BILINEAR >1/Important Single Slave nodes exported as Solid Nodes, p values.
SSF BILINEAR
First 2 slave nodes (s1, s2) written as Pipe Axis.
SS BEAM >2/Important Single Master then written as beam node, b.
Remaining slaves (s3, etc.) written after master.
Master as Node a.
REVOLUTE 2/Important Single First Slave as Node b.
Second slave as Node c to define rotation.
Master node as Sliding Node, p
SLIDER 2/Important Single
First 2 Slave Nodes as sliding axis, a, b.
Master as First Edge Node a
CYCLSYM 3/Important Single First Slave as Second Edge Node b.
Second and Third Slaves as cyl symmetry axis c, d
Master as First Node a.
UNIVERSAL 3/Important Single First Slave as Node b.
Second and Third Slaves (c, d) define rotation.
Master as Velocity Constrained Node a.
V LOCAL 3/Important Single First Slave defines local rotation direction (Node b)
Second Slave defines velocity (Node c)
MSC.Marc
Currently there are three TYING options supported. If formulation is set to 0..None then Femap will write MPC
types 1-6 if specific degrees of freedom are selected or type 100 if all six dof are selected.
 General Matrix Element 6-27

If formulation is set to Marc MPC Type 80 then type 80 will be used for the TYING option.

MSC.Marc No. of Slave No. of

Output Format/Comments
MPC Type Nodes MPCs
No. Slave Same master for all MPCs but different slave node.
1-6 >0
Nodes
Dependent (slave) node is the node to be tied.
100 >1 Single Independent (master) node is written as retained
node.
Dependant (slave node) written as tied node.
Independent (Master) written as retained node. A
80 >1 Single third Extra node not connected to the structure is
created automatically to account for the rotational
dof.
ANSYS
There are no formulations available for the typical ANSYS translator.
RBE2 Elements are written with Element Type = MPC184, with KEYOPT(1) set to 1, which indicates Rigid Beam
Element, and KEYOPT(2) set to 1, which indicates the Kinematic Method is Lagrange Multiplier. Also, the CTE
can be taken into consideration.
Each RBE3 Element is written as 2 *DIM entries, which are set to ARRAY, and specify the number of “Nodes to
Average” and “Weight Factors”. After the *DIM entities, a corresponding number of *SET entries which specify
Node ID and the Weighting Factor for that Node ID are written. After all of the *SET entries, a RBE3 entry is writ-
ten with ID, the Degrees of Freedom, and which *DIM arrays are used for this particular RBE3.
ANSYS (Legacy)
There are 3 formulations available for ANSYS. The default is “0..ANSYS CP/CERIG” which creates CP (set of
coupled degrees of freedom) or CERIG (rigid region) elements depending on what is selected during export of the
analysis model.
The other two formulations create MPC184 elements (link/beam type elements only). You can choose to use the
“Direct Elimination” method for imposing kinematic constraints (1..MPC184 Direct Elimination) or the “Lagrange
Multiplier” method (2..MPC184 Lagrange Multiplier). Elements must be 2-noded rigid elements only in FEMAP
(1 independent node to 1 dependent node).

Type of MPC184 Kinematic Method Use

DOFs
KEYPOT(1) KEYOPT(2) CTE?
TX, TY, TZ = 0, Rigid Link Element = 0, Direct Elimination No
TX, TY, TZ = 0, Rigid Link Element = 1, Lagrange Multiplier Yes
TX, TY, TZ
= 1, Rigid Beam Element = 0, Direct Elimination
No
RX, RY, RZ
TX, TY, TZ
= 1, Rigid Beam Element = 1, Lagrange Multiplier
Yes
RX, RY, RZ

6.4.6 General Matrix Element

Description
A general matrix element which can be used to define a stiffness matrix, damping matrix, or mass matrix. This ele-
ment lets you define a 12 x 12 matrix or a 6x6 stiffness matrix that will be symmetrically applied (expanded to a
12x12 matrix) to two nodes.
Application
Modeling of custom stiffness, damping, or mass connections between two nodes that cannot be adequately repre-
sented by other available element types, typically, in ANSYS and ABAQUS.
Shape
Drawn as a line with a symbol which is “X” inside [ ]. Real shape is undefined. Only symbol will appear if nodes
are coincident.
 6-28 Element Reference

Element Coordinate System

Depends on nodal degrees of freedom.
Properties
Select a Coordinate System, a Matrix Type, and enter values into the upper triangular portion of a 12x12 or 6x6
stiffness matrix.
Formulation
None

6.4.7 Slide Line Element

Description
A contact element which allows input of frictional and stiffness contact information between nodes on surfaces.
Input includes a series of master and slave nodes to define geometry of surface contact.
Application
Modeling of finite-sliding surface interaction between two deformable bodies.
Shape
Drawn as lines between master and slave nodes.
Element Coordinate System
None. Depends on coordinate system of nodes.
Properties
Width of contact surfaces and stiffness/frictional data including Stiffness Scale Factor, Nonsliding Frictional Stiff-
ness, and Static Friction Coefficient.
Formulation
None

6.4.8 Weld/Fastener Element

Description
A weld element allows you to connect “entities” (Elements, Nodes, or patches of Nodes) which connect the nodes
of the “entities” with an element of a specific diameter, material, and assigned orientation. A fastener element uses
a similar type of connection, though the fastener has fewer definition options. There a quite a few more options on
the corresponding property for a fastener such as mass, structural damping, and material coordinate system to go
along with a specified diameter.
Application
Simulates a spot weld between two groups of finite element “entities” (Elements, Nodes, or patches of Nodes).
Shape
Drawn as a lines connecting the nodes of each group of finite element “entities” (Elements, Nodes, or patches of
Nodes) to the spot where the weld/fastener orientation intersects the “entity”. The two sets of lines are then con-
nected using a “tube” the size of the assigned diameter.
Note: If a weld endpoint is a single Element Vertex, (i.e., a node) then the “tube” will go from that Element Vertex
to the lines or another Element Vertex, depending on the type of weld specified.
Element Coordinate System
By default, for both welds and fasteners, this depends on coordinate system of nodes. A separate material coordi-
nate system can be specified for fasteners, which can be absolute or relative.
Properties
For Weld, Diameter of weld connection, Spot Weld designation (Yes/No), and whether to Eliminate M-Set DOF or
not.
For Fastener, Diameter of the faster connection, Translational Stiffness values (KTX, KTY, and KTZ), Rotational
Stiffness values (KRX, KRY, and KRZ), Material Coordinate System in which Translational and Rotational Stiff-
 Nastran General Matrix Element 6-29

ness are applied, whether the Material Coordinate System is Absolute or Relative, Mass of fastener, and Structural
Damping.
Formulation
None

6.4.9 Nastran General Matrix Element

Description
A Nastran general matrix element allows you to define a general element, GENEL, whose properties are defined in
terms of deflection, influence coefficients, or stiffness matrices which can be connected between any number of
degrees-of-freedom.
The Nastran general matrix element is really not an element in the same sense as the Beam, Plate, or Solid element.
There are no properties explicitly defined and no data recovery is performed. These type of elements can very use-
ful when you want to include a substructure in a model that is difficult to model using the standard elements.
Application
Similar to a DMIG entry, this type of element allows you to directly input stiffness matrices, which have already
been calculated and exist externally, into a model without providing all of the modeling information. Normally this
is not a recommended procedure since it requires additional effort. However, there are occasions where the avail-
ability of this feature is very useful and in some cases is extremely crucial.
You can use this type of element to describe a substructure that has an arbitrary number of connection grid points or
scalar points. You can derive the input data entered for the element from a hand calculation, another computer
model, or actual test data.
Shape
The element is comprised of one required list of node and DOF pairs, an associated set of stiffness or deflection
influence coefficients, and optional list of unconstrained node and DOF pairs.
Drawn as a collection of solid lines starting at each node that is part of the element which meet at a single location
between the nodes. The element also has an overall symbol, which is “X” inside [ ]. In addition, it is possible to
draw a “filled-in square” symbol at each node in the Connected DOFs (Nodes to Connect) list, while at the same
time an “outline-of-a-square” symbol is drawn at each node in the Constrained DOFs (Reference) list.
Element Coordinate System
None
Properties
None
Formulation
None
6-30 Element Reference
7. Translation Tables for Analysis
Programs
This topic defines the entities that the FEMAP interfaces transfer to finite element analysis programs. Two transla-
tion tables list the entities for these FEMAP interfaces:
• Section 7.1, "Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran"
• Section 7.2, "Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS"
See also:
• Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces"
Using the Translation Tables
The following pages contain tables that show how FEMAP entities are translated to and from the supported analy-
sis programs.
The numbered notes in the tables refer to the notes that follow the tables. You will find the notes are numbered
from 1-N for each analysis program. Therefore, if you see note 6 in the column for ANSYS Write translator, that
refers to Note 6 for ANSYS, not note 6 for one of the other programs.
You will see numerous <— symbols listed for the various read translators. Wherever you see this symbol, it means
that the read translator supports the same entities as the corresponding write translator. The column for the write
translator is to the left of the column for the read translator, hence the <— symbol. In some cases, the read transla-
tor will support more entities than the write translator. In those cases you will see “<— +” followed by the addi-
tional entities that are supported. Whenever an entity is not supported by the corresponding read or write translator
(or by the analysis program), you will see “---”
 7-2 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

7.1 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran
FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Coordinate Systems
Rectangular LOCAL <—— LOCAL <—— + CORD2R1 <—+ CORD1R Type 51 <——
(KCS=0)6 (KCS=0)1 CLOCAL
CS
CSKP
CSWPLA
Cylindrical LOCAL <—— LOCAL <—— + CORD2C1 <— +CORD1C Type 51 <——
(KCS=1)6 (KCS=1)1 CLOCAL
CS
CSKP
CSWPLA
Spherical LOCAL <—— LOCAL <—— + CORD2S1 <— + CORD1S Type 51 <——
(KCS=2)6 (KCS=2)1 CLOCAL
CS
CSKP
CSWPLA

Nodes
All N, NROTAT1 <——+ N, NROTAT2 <—— + GRID <—— Type12 <——
NMODIF1 NANG SPOINT
NKPT EPOINT
NMODIF
NBLOCK

Elements
Rod EN (LINK8)29 <—— + E12 EN (LINK 180) <—— + CROD <—— + Packet 23 <——
LINK10) 32 LINK83, 5 EMORE CONROD (Cfg=3)
LINK103, 6 EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Bar EN (BEAM4)2,23 <——+ E12 EN (BEAM 188)9 <—— + CBAR40 <—— Packet 23 <——
BEAM44 EMORE (Cfg=1)
BEAM443, 8 EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Tube EN (PIPE16) <—— + E12 EN (PIPE288) <—— + CTUBE (not <—— --- ---
PIPE164, 11, 12 EMORE UAI, Cosmic)
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Curved Tube EN (PIPE18) <—— + E12 EN (ELBOW290)7 <—— + CBEND (not <—— --- ---
PIPE289 EMORE UAI, Cosmic)
PIPE184, 13,14 EMODIF
E
EBLOCK

Link --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Beam EN (BEAM442, <—— + E12 EN (BEAM188) <—— + CBEAM40 <—— Packet 23 <——
BEAM188 BEAM443, 8 EMORE (Cosmic-CBAR) (Cfg=2)
ko[3]=3)41 EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Parabolic Beam --- --- EN (BEAM189)10 <—— + --- --- --- ---
EMORE
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Spring/Damper EN (COMBIN14) <——+ E12 EN (MATRIX27) <—— + CROD3, CVISC, as Rod, CVISC, --- ---
ko[3]=0,1 COMBIN1415 EMORE CBUSH25 CBUSH25
EN (MATRIX27) EMODIF
ko[1]=0 E
ko[2]=0 EBLOCK
ko[3]=4,5
DOF Spring EN (COMBIN14) <—— + E12 EN (COMBIN14)16 --- CELAS1, <—— + Packet 23 <——
ko[2]=1-67 CELAS2, CELAS1, (Cfg=6)
CDAMP1, CDAMP123
CDAMP24
Curved Beam --- --- EN (BEAM189)10 --- CBEND5(not <—— --- ---
UAI, Cosmic)
Gap EN (CONTAC52) <—— + E12 EN (CONTAC178) <—— + CGAP (not <—— --- ---
ko[1]=1 CONTAC524 EMORE Cosmic)
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran 7-3

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Plot Only KNODE, L --- EN (MESH200) <—— + PLOTEL <—— --- ---
EMORE
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Shear EN (SHELL28) <—— + E12 EN (SHELL28)3, 17 <—— + CSHEAR quad <—— Packet 23 <——
quad only3 EMORE only (Cfg=7)
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Parabolic Shear --- --- EN (SHELL281) <—— + --- --- Packet 23 <——
EMORE (Cfg=7)
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Membrane EN (SHELL63) <——+E12 EN (SHELL181) <—— + CTRIA3, <——+ Packet 23 <——
ko[1]=19 + (PLANE42) ko[1] = 1 EMORE CQUAD4, CTRMEM, (Cfg=5)
ko[3]=0,3 SHELL634 EMODIF CQUADR, CQDMEM
ko[1]=1 E CTRIAR
EBLOCK
Parabolic --- EN + E12 EN (SHELL281) <—— + CTRIA6, <—— Packet 23 <——
Membrane + (PLANE82) ko[1]=1 EMORE CQUAD822 (Cfg=5)
ko[3]=0,3 EMODIF (not Cosmic)
E
EBLOCK
Bending EN (SHELL63) <—— + E12 EN (SHELL63)4 <—— + CTRIA3, <—— Packet 23 <——
ko[1]=29 ko[1]=2 EMORE CQUAD4, + CTRPLT, (Cfg=10)
EMODIF CQUADR, CQDPLT
E CTRIAR
EBLOCK
Parabolic Bend- --- --- EN (SHELL281) <—— + CTRIA6, <—— Packet 23 <——
ing EMORE CQUAD822, (Cfg=10)
EMODIF (not Cosmic)
E
EBLOCK
Plate EN (SHELL63, <—— + E12 EN (SHELL181) <—— + CTRIA3, <—— + Packet 23 <——
SHELL57, stif43) SHELL634, 18 EMORE CQUAD4, CTRIA1, (Cfg=4)
ko[1]=09 EMODIF CQUADR, CQUAD1,
E CTRIAR CTRIA2,
EBLOCK CQUAD2
Parabolic Plate EN (SHELL93)9 <—— + E12 EN (SHELL281)18 <—— + CTRIA6, <—— Packet 23 <——
EMORE CQUAD822 (Cfg=4)
EMODIF (not Cosmic)
E
EBLOCK
Laminated Plate EN (stif53) <—— + E12 EN (SHELL181)19 <—— + CTRIA3, <—— --- ---
ko[3]=NL tri EMORE CQUAD4,
only8,9 EMODIF CQUADR,
E CTRIAR
EBLOCK
Parabolic EN(SHELL91, <—— + E12 EN (SHELL281) <—— + CTRIA6, <—— --- ---
Laminated Plate SHELL99) EMORE CQUAD822
ko[3]=NL9, 33 EMODIF (not Cosmic)
E
EBLOCK
Plane Strain EN (PLANE42, <—— + E12 EN (PANE182) <—— + CTRIA3, <—— Packet 23 <——
PLANE55, stif56) (do not read PLANE424 EMORE CQUAD4, (Cfg=11)
ko[3]=23 any hyper) EMODIF CQUADR,
E CTRIAR (not
EBLOCK UAI, Cosmic)
CPLSTN3, CPLSTN4,
CPLSTN6, CPLSTN8
CPLSTS3, CPLSTS4,
CPLSTS6, CPLSTS852
Parabolic Plane EN (PLANE82, <—— + E, EN (PLANE183)20 <—— + CTRIA6, <—— Packet 23 <——
Strain PLANE77, stif74) +(stif2)12 EMORE CQUAD822 (Cfg=11)
ko[3]=23 EMODIF (not UAI,
E Cosmic)
EBLOCK
Axisymmetric --- --- EN (SHELL208) <—— + --- --- --- ---
Shell EMORE
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Planar Plot Only --- --- EN (MESH200) <—— + --- --- --- ---
EMORE
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
 7-4 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Axisymmetric EN (PLANE42, <—— + E12 EN (PLANE182) <—— + CQUADX438 <—— Packet 23 <——
PLANE55, stif56) ko[3]=1 EMORE CQUADX838 (Cfg=8)
ko[3]=13 PLANE42 EMODIF CTRAX338
E CTRAX638
EBLOCK CTRIAX6,
CTRIARG,
CTRIAX,
CQUADX7
Parabolic EN (PLANE82, <—— + E, EN (PLANE183) <—— + CTRIAX6, <—— Packet 23 <——
Axisymmetric PLANE77, stif74) +(stif2)12 ko[3]=1 EMORE CTRIAX, (Cfg=6)
ko[3]=13 EMODIF CQUADX7
E (not UAI,
EBLOCK Cosmic)
Solid EN (SOLID45 or <—— + E12 EN (SOLID185) <—— + CTETRA, <—— + Packet 23 <——
stif73, SOLID70, + (stif72) SOLID454, 21 EMORE CPYRAM CHEXA1, (Cfg=0)
stif58), EMODIF CPENTA, CHEXA2,
ko[4]=122 E CHEXA CWEDGE
EBLOCK MATCID
(Cosmic-
CTETRA,
CWEDGE,
CHEXA1,
CHEXA2,
CIHEX1)
Parabolic Solid EN (SOLID95, <—— + E12+ EN (SOLID186) <—— + CTETRA <—— + Packet 23 <——
SOLID87, SOL- SOLID187 EMORE CPYRAM CHEX20 (Cfg=0)
ID90, SOLID954 EMODIF CPENTA
SOLID92) SOLID924, 21 E CHEXA
EMORE22 EBLOCK MATCID76
(Cosmic-
CIHEX2)
Solid Laminate --- --- EN (SOLID185) <—— + CPENTA, <—— --- ---
ko[2]=2 ko[3]=1 EMORE CHEXA
EMODIF MATCID76
E
EBLOCK
Parabolic Solid --- --- EN (SOLID186) <—— + CPENTA, <—— --- ---
Laminate ko[3]=1 EMORE CHEXA
EMODIF MATCID76
E
EBLOCK
Solid Cohesive --- --- --- --- CPENTCZ,74 <—— --- ---
CHEXCZ74
MATCID76
Parabolic Solid --- --- --- --- CPENTCZ,74 <—— --- ---
Cohesive CHEXCZ74
MATCID76
Mass EN (MASS21) <—— + E12,13 EN (MASS21) <—— + CONM28 <—— Packet 23 <——
ko[3]=010 ko[2]=122 EMORE (Cfg=7)
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Mass Matrix EN (MATRIX27) <—— + E2,20 EN (MATRIX27) <—— + CONM1 <—— --- ---
ko[3]=220 ko[3]=223 EMORE
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Spring/Damper EN (COMBIN14) <——+ E12 EN (MATRIX27) <—— + CBUSH25 <—— --- ---
to Ground ko[3]=0,1 ko[3]=424 EMORE
EN (MATRIX27) EMODIF
ko[1]=0 E
ko[2]=0 EBLOCK
ko[3]=4,5
DOF Spring to EN (COMBIN14) <—— + E12 EN (COMBIN14) <—— + CELAS1, <—— + Packet 23 <——
Ground ko[2]=1-67 ko[1]=124 EMORE CELAS2, CELAS1, (Cfg=6)
EMODIF CDAMP1, CDAMP123
E CDAMP24
EBLOCK
Rigid EN(mpc184)38 <——14 CE <—— + RBE1, RBE2, RBE341, <—— + --- Packet 146
ko[1]=0 or 1 EN (MPC184) EMORE (CRBE2, CRBE3 -Cos- RBAR2
ko[2]=0 or 139 ko[1]=1, ko[2]=1 EMODIF mic) (CRBAR-
CP, CEAVE, CERIG E RSPLINE26 Cosmic)
CERIG24 RBE325 EBLOCK
11,12
General Matrix EN (MATRIX27) <—— + E EN (MATRIX27) <—— + --- --- --- ---
ko[3]=2,4,511 ko[3]=4 EMORE
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran 7-5

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Slide Line --- --- EN (CONTA171) <—— + BLSEG, --- --- ---
(TARGE169)26 EMORE BCONP
EMODIF
E
EBLOCK
Weld/Fastener --- --- --- --- CWELD, CFAST --- --- ---
Nastran General --- --- --- --- GENEL <—— --- ---
Matrix

Properties
Rod R (1)29 <——15 SECTYPE, , LINK <—— PROD <—— Packet 44 <——
SECDATA
SECCONTROL
Bar R (1-6,8- 10,12) <— + R(7)15 SECTYPE, , BEAM <—— PBAR <—— Packet 44 <——
RMODIF SECDATA PBARL42,77
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Tube R (1,2) <——15 SECTYPE, , PIPE <—— PTUBE10 <—— --- ---
SECDATA
SECCONTROL
Curved Tube R (1-3) <——15 SECTYPE, , PIPE <—— PBEND <—— --- ---
SECDATA
SECCONTROL
Link --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Beam R (1- 24,55) <—— + SECTYPE, , BEAM <—— PBEAM11 <—— Packet 44 <——
RMODIF R(53)15 SECDATA PBEAML42,77
SECTYPE40 SECCONTROL
SECDATA40 SECOFFSET
SECOFFSET40
SECCONTROLS40
SECNUM40
Spring/Damper R (1,2) <——15 R <—— PROD3, PVISC, PBUSH, as Rod, PVISC, --- ---
RMODIF(1-78) RMORE PBUSHT25 PBUSH,
PBUSHT25
DOF Spring R (1,2) <——15 R <—— on Elem <—— Packet 44 <——
PELAST
47
PELAS
PDAMP47
PDAMPT
Curved Beam --- --- SECTYPE, , BEAM <—— PBEND5 <—— --- ---
SECDATA
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Gap R (1,2), MU4 R (1,2)4,15 R <—— PGAP <—— --- ---
RMORE
Plot Only --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Shear R (1) <—— + R <—— PSHEAR <—— Packet 44 <——
ESYS15 ESYS
Parabolic Shear --- --- SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— --- --- Packet 44 <——
SECDATA
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Membrane R (1,5) <—— + SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PSHELL12 <—— +PTRMEM, Packet 44 <——
ESYS15 SECDATA PQDMEM,
SECCONTROL PQDMEM1,
SECOFFSET PQDMEM2
Parabolic --- --- SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PSHELL12 <—— Packet 44 <——
Membrane SECDATA
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Bending R (1,5) <—— + R <—— PSHELL12 <—— + Packet 44 <——
ESYS15 RMORE PTRPLT,
PQDPLT
Parabolic Bend- --- --- SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PSHELL12 <—— Packet 44 <——
ing SECDATA
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Plate R (1-5) <—— + SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PSHELL12 <—— + Packet 44 <——
SECTYPE40 ESYS15 SECDATA PTRIA1,
40
SECDATA SECCONTROL PQUAD1,
SECOFFSET40 SECOFFSET PTRIA2,
SECCONTROLS40 PQUAD2
SECNUM40
 7-6 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Parabolic Plate R (1-4,6) <—— + SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PSHELL12 <—— Packet 44 <——
SECTYPE40 ESYS15 SECDATA
40
SECDATA SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET40 SECOFFSET
SECCONTROLS40
SECNUM40
Laminated Plate R (1-60)37 <—+ ESYS15 SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PCOMP13,29 <—— --- ---
SECDATA PCOMPG46
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Parabolic R (1-3,7- 9, <—— + SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— PCOMP13,29 <—— --- ---
Laminated Plate 13-15 ...)21,37 ESYS15,21 SECDATA PCOMPG46
SECCONTROL
SECOFFSET
Plane Strain none ESYS15 --- --- PSHELL, <—— Packet 44 <——
PLPLANE12
PPLANE61
Parabolic Plane none ESYS15 --- --- PSHELL, <—— Packet 44 <——
Strain PLPLANE12
PPLANE61
Axisymmetric --- --- SECTYPE, , SHELL <—— --- --- --- ---
Shell SECDATA
SECOFFSET
Planar Plot Only --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Axisymmetric none ESYS15 --- --- PLPLANE <—— Packet 44 <——
Parabolic none ESYS15 --- --- PLPLANE <—— Packet 44 <——
Axisymmetric
Solid ESYS <——15 --- --- PSOLID14 <—— Packet 44 <——
(+PIHEX-
Cosmic),
PLSOLID
Parabolic Solid ESYS <——15 --- --- PSOLID14 <—— Packet 44 <——
(+PIHEX-
Cosmic),
PLSOLID
Solid Laminate --- --- SECTYPE <—— PCOMPS65 <—— --- ---
SECDATA
Parabolic Solid --- --- SECTYPE <—— PCOMPS65 <—— --- ---
Laminate SECDATA
Solid Cohesive --- --- --- --- PSOLCZ74 <—— --- ---
Parabolic Solid --- --- --- --- PSOLCZ74 <—— --- ---
Cohesive
Mass R (1-6) <——15 R <—— on Elem <—— Packet 44 <——
Mass Matrix R (1-78)20 R (1-6, R <—— on Elem <—— --- ---
13-17, RMORE
24-27,
34-36
43,44,51)15,20
Spring/Damper R (1,2) <——15 R --- PROD3, PVISC, PBUSH, as Rod, PVISC, --- ---
to Ground R(1-78) RMORE PBUSHT25 PBUSH,
RMODIF42 PBUSHT25

DOF Spring to R (1,2) <——15 R --- on Elem <—— Packet 44 <——

Ground N PELAST
D PELAS47
PDAMP47
PDAMPT
Rigid none none none none none none --- ---
General Matrix R (1-78) <——11,15 R <—— --- --- --- ---
RMODIF11, 42 RMORE
Slide Line --- --- R <—— BFRIC, --- --- ---
RMORE BOUTPUT,
BWIDTH
Weld/Fastener --- --- --- --- PWELD, PFAST --- --- ---
Nastran General --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Matrix
 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran 7-7

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Materials
Isotropic EX, GXY, <—— + MP - EX, GXY, <—— MAT1, MAT4, <—— + Packet 3 <——
NUXY, DENS, MPDATA, NUXY, DENS, MATT1, TABLEM1
ALPX, DAMP, MP16 DMPR ALPX, KXX, MATT4, TABLEM2
TREF, REFT, TB, TABLEM128 TABLEM3
REFT(R5), MELAS27 TABLEM228
KXX, C, CREEP,
MPTEMP, MATS175,
TB(BKIN, TABLES1,
MKIN, MISO, TABLEST
BISO, DP, MATFT66
MELAS)
Orthotropic -2D EX, EY, GXY, <—— + MP - EX, EY, EZ, <—— MAT8, MAT5, <— + Packet 3 <——
NUXY, DENS, MPDATA, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, MATT8, MATT5, TABLEM1,
ALPX, ALPY, MP16,30 PRXY, PRYZ, TABLEM1,28 TABLEM3
DAMP, TREF, PRXZ, DENS, TABLEM228
REFT(R5), ALPX, ALPY,
KXX, KYY, C, ALPZ, DMPR,
MPTEMP30 REFT, KXX, KYY,
KZZ28
Orthotropic -3D EX, EY, EZ, <—— + MP - EX, EY, EZ, <—— MAT3, MAT5, <——9+ Packet 3 <——
GXY, GYZ, MPDATA, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, MATT3, TABLEM1,
GXZ, NUXY, MP16,30 PRXY, PRYZ, MATT5, TABLEM3
NUYZ, NUXZ, PRXZ, DENS, TABLEM128 TABLEM582
DENS, ALPX, ALPX, ALPY, TABLEM228
ALPY, ALPZ ALPZ, DMPR, MAT11, MATT1148
DAMP, TREF, REFT, KXX, KYY, MAT12, MATT1249
REFT(R5), KZZ MATFT66
KXX, KYY, MATS175
KZZ, C, MATDMG82
MPTEMP30
Anisotropic -2D EX, EY, GXY, <—— TB, ANEL <—— MAT2, MAT5, <—— + Packet 3 <——
NUXY, DENS, TBTEMP MATT2, TABLEM1,
ALPX, ALPY, TBDATA29 MATT5, TABLEM3
DAMP, TREF, TABLEM128
REFT(R5), TABLEM228
KXX, KYY, C, CREEP,
TB(BKIN, MATS1,
MKIN, MISO, TABLES1,
BISO, DP, TABLEST
MELAS),
MPTEMP5,30
TB 34,36
Anisotropic -3D EX, EY, EZ, <—— TB, ANEL <—— MAT9, MAT5, <—— + Packet 3 <——
GXY, GYZ, TBTEMP MATT9, TABLEM1,
GXZ, NUXY, TBDATA29 MATT5, TABLEM3
NUYZ, NUXZ, TABLEM128
DENS, ALPX, TABLEM228,
ALPY, ALPZ CREEP,
DAMP,TREF, MATS175,
REFT(R5), TABLES1,
KXX, KYY, TABLEST
KZZ, C, MATFT66
TB(BKIN, (Cosmic
MKIN, MISO, MAT6)
BISO, DP,
MELAS),
MPTEMP5,30
TB 34,36
Hyperelastic --- --- TB, HYPER <—— MATHP <—— --- ---
TBOPT (POLY)
Fluid --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Other --- --- TB, HYPER, <—— MATHE30 --- --- ---
MOONEY MATHEM58
FOAM MATHEV59
OGDEN MATVE60
BOYCE30 MATG34
MAT1037
MATMSA56
MATCZ74
NITONAL57

Functions
All --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
 7-8 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Constraints
Constraint --- --- --- --- SPCADD, <—— --- ---
Combination MPCADD43
Nodal D (=0.), M <——17,18 D, UX, UY, UZ, <—— SPC, ASET, BSET, <—— Packet 85 <——
ROTX, ROTY, CSET, QSET, OMIT, + SPC1,ASET1,
ROTZ = 031 SUPORT1,SUPORT16 BSET1,CSET1,
QSET1,OMIT1,
Nodal NonZero D (not 0.) <——17,18 D, UX, UY, UZ, <—— SPC1 <—— Packet 8 <——
ROTX, ROTY,
ROTZ not 0
Equation CE <——19 CE <—— MPC17 <—— --- ---

Nodal Loads
Load --- --- --- --- LOAD44 <—— --- ---
Combination
Force and F <——18 F31 <—— FORCE, <—— Packet 7 <——
Moment MOMENT,
SLOAD27
Follower Force FORCE1, <——
and Follower FORCE2,
Moment MOMENT1,
MOMENT2
Displacement --- ---17,18 D, UX, UY, UZ, <—— SPCD18 <—— Packet 8 <——
and Enforced ROTX, ROTY, TIC
Rotation ROTZ, non zero
Velocity and --- --- D, VELX, VELY, <—— TIC --- --- ---
Rotational VELZ, OMGX,
Velocity OMGY, OMGZ32
Acceleration and --- --- D, ACCX, ACCY, <—— ACCEL170 <—— --- ---
Rotational ACCZ, DMGX,
Acceleration DMGY, DMGZ32
Temperature T(R4), <—— BF, Lab = TEMP <—— TEMP, Heat Transfer <—— --- ---
BF(R5)25 SPC, TEMPBC
Heat Generation BF(HGEN) <—— --- --- SLOAD <—— Packet 10 <——
Heat Flux F(HEAT) <—— --- --- QHBDY <—— --- ---
Nonlinear --- --- --- --- NOLIN1, NOLIN2, --- --- ---
Transient Force NOLIN3, NOLIN4,
TF

Elemental Loads
Distributed Load SFBEAM <—— SFBEAM <—— PLOAD1 <—— --- ---
Pressure EP(R4), <—— SFE, Lab = PRES <—— PLOAD, <—— Packet 6 <——
SFE(R5)26 SURF15335 PLOAD2, PLOAD3,
SURF15435 PLOAD4, PLOADX1,
SURF15635 PLOADE163
Temperature TE(R4), <—— BFE, Lab = TEMP <—— TEMPRB, TEMPP119 <—— Packet 6 <——
BFE(R5)27
Heat Generation BFE(HGEN) <— --- --- QVOL <—— Packet 11 <——
Heat Flux SFE(HFLUX) --- --- --- QBDY1 <—— --- ---
Convection SFE(CONV) --- --- --- CONV, CONVM, CONV --- ---
PCONV, PCONVM PCONV
Radiation --- --- --- --- RADBC, RADM, <—— --- ---
RADMT, VIEW,
VIEW3D, RADCAV,
RADSET

Body Loads
Translational ACEL <—— ACEL <—— GRAV <—— --- ---
Acceleration
Rotational DCGOMG <—— DCGOMG <—— RFORCE21 <—— --- ---
Acceleration
Rotational CGOMGA <—— CGOMGA <—— RFORCE21 <—— --- ---
Velocity
Rotation Origin CGLOC <—— CGLOC <—— RFORCE <—— --- ---
Varying --- --- --- --- ACCEL64 <—— --- ---
Translational
Acceleration
Default TUNIF <—— + TUNIF <—— TEMPD <—— --- ---
Temperature BFUNIF,
TEMP(R5)
Heat Transfer --- --- --- --- PARAM,TABS --- --- ---
and SIGMA
 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran 7-9

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read

Optimization
Variables --- --- --- --- DESVAR, DVPREL1, <—— --- ---
DVMREL1, DVEREL1,
GROUP
Topology --- --- --- --- DVTREL1, GROUP <—— --- ---
Regions
Limits --- --- --- --- DRESP1, DCONSTR, <—— --- ---
DCONADD
Manufacturing --- --- --- --- DMNCON <—— --- ---
Constraints
Goal --- --- --- --- DRESP1 <—— --- ---
Cycles --- --- --- --- DOPTPRM <—— --- ---

Aeroelasticity
Aero Panel/Body --- --- --- --- CAERO1, CAERO2 <—— --- ---
Aero Property --- --- --- --- PAERO1, PAERO2 <—— --- ---
Aero Splines --- --- --- --- SPLINE1, SPLINE2, <—— --- ---
SET1
Aero Control --- --- --- --- AESURF, AELIST <—— --- ---
Surfaces
Static Aero --- --- --- --- AEROS, AESTAT, <—— --- ---
TRIM, AEROF, APRES
PARAM,AUNITS
Flutter --- --- --- --- AERO, MKAERO2, <—— --- ---
FLUTTER, FLFACT, MKAERO1
FMETHOD

Simulation Entities
Monitor Point --- --- --- --- MONPNT178 <—— --- ---
MONPNT379
GROUP79
AECOMP
AELIST
SET179
Direct Matrix --- --- --- --- DMIG81 <—— --- ---
Input INCLUDE81

Contact and Regions

CONTACT RMODIF RMODIF R <—— BSURF31 <—— --- ---
CONTA171, CONTA173 RMODIF BCTSET31
CONTA172, CONTA174 TARGE169 BCTADD31
CONTA173, TARGE170 TARGE170 BCTPARM31
CONTA174, CONTA171 BCTPARA31
TARGE169, CONTA173 BCRPARA31
TARGE170, CONTA174 BCPROP31
ko[2,4-9, CONTA17733 BCPROPS31
11-12]31 BGSET31
BGADD31
BGPARM31
NXSTRAT31
BCONTACT71
BCBODY71
BCTABLE71
BCPROP71
BCPARA71
NLPARM71
BSSEG24
BSCONP
BLSEG39,50
Fluid Region --- --- --- --- MFLUID53 <—— --- ---
Bolt Region --- --- PSMESH <—— BOLT32 <—— --- ---
PRETS179
Bolt Preload --- --- SLOAD <—— BOLTFOR32 <—— --- ---
BOLTFRC32
NonStructural --- --- --- --- NSM1, NSML1, <—— --- ---
Mass Region NSMADD67 NSM, NSML
Rotor Region PRETS179 --- --- --- ROTORG33 <—— --- ---

Miscellaneous
Groups NSEL, ESEL, CM <—— NSEL, ESEL, CM <—— --- --- --- ---
 7-10 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
CSYS, MAT, <—— + CSYS, MAT, <—— CHBDYP, --- --- ---
REAL, ET, NUMSTR REAL, ET, CHBDYG,
KEYOPT, (elem only) KEYOPT, PHBDY,
TYPE, TYPE, ESYS TLOAD1,
ESYS28 SECTYPE DLOAD,
LOAD20
Rev 4 only: RSIZE, --- --- EIGR <—— --- ---
CPSIZE, EIGRL
CESIZE EIGC
EXTRACTMETHOD62
Case Control for --- --- --- --- MONITOR80 <—— --- ---
Monitor Points
Case Control for --- --- --- --- K2GG,M2GG, <—— --- ---
Direct Matrix K2GG, K42GG,
Input entities P2G, K2PP,
M2PP, B2PP
Case Control for --- /SOLU --- DLOAD <—— --- ---
Dynamics and ANTYPE, STATIC STATSUB
Nonlinear AUTOTS TSTEP
Analysis NSUBST TSTEPNL
NROPT NLPARM
NEQIT NONLINEAR
CNVTOL SDAMPING
NLGEOM FREQUENCY
ARCLEN RANDOM
LNSRCH
PRED
ANTYPE, TRANS
TRNOPT, TINTP
ALPHAD, BETAD
DMPSTR, DMPRAT
LUMPM, TIME
DELTIM34
ANTYPE, HARMIC
HROPT, HARFRQ
HROUT
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SPOPT
PSDUNIT
PSDFREQ
PSDVAL
PFACT
PSDCOM
Case Control for --- --- --- --- ANALYSIS <—— --- ---
Multi-Step NLCNTL
Structural (401) SEQDEP
and Multi-Step TSTEP
Kinematic (402) For SOL 401 only:
RIGID
NLARCL
PARAMs Rev 4: LWRITE, <—Rev4: /SOLU <—— PARAM - <—— --- ---
TEDELE, LWRITE ANTYPE, STATIC AUTOSPC, WTMASS6
TDELE, FDELE, Rev5: ANTYPE, MODAL GRDPNT,
EPDELE, LSWRITE, ANTYPE, BUCKLE WTMASS, K6ROT,
DDELE, CEDELE SOLVE MODOPT MAXRATIO, NDAMP,
Rev 5: BFED- BUCOPT INREL54, LANGLE,
ELE,BFDELE, EQSLV LGDISP, LGSTRN,
FDELE, SFED- DDELE PRGPST, OGEOM,
ELE,DDELE, BFEDELE AUTOMPC35 , DDRAM,
CEDELE BFDELE MATNL, MODACC,
SFEDELE RESVEC, RESVINER
SFDELE RIGIDELEM2ELAS,
FDELE RIGIDELEMTYPE55
CGLOC SWPANGLE73
ACEL MGRID72 , MDOF72
DCGOMG NOFISR35
CGOMGA SRCOMPS,
BOLTFACT35
ENFMOTN51
BAILOUT
SECOMB
APLHA1, ALPHA2
 Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran 7-11

ANSYS (Legacy) ANSYS NASTRAN MSC Patran

FEMAP
Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read
Other PARAM36 - COUPMASS, --- ---
COUPMASS, RSPECTRA,
RSPECTRA, W3, W4, W3, W4, KDAMP
CURVPLOT, KDAMP, LMODES, FZERO,
FZERO, WMODAL, WMODAL,
LMODES, LFREQ, LFREQ, HFREQ,
HFREQ, G, SCRSPEC, G, SCRSPEC,
OPTION (ABS, SRSS, OPTION (ABS,
NRL, NRL0) SRSS, NRL,
CLOSE, ROTGPF, NRL0)
ROTCSV, MULTBC, CLOSE, NMLOOP,
BODYLOAD, LGSTRN,
GPFORCE, OPTION(CQC)45
MPCFORCE,
PELMCHK, NOOUT,
NOSTR, NOELF,
NODIS, NOLOD,
NOSPC,
DSA, OPTIM,
OLDSEQ, NMLOOP,
BUCKLE, LGSTRN,
OPTION(CQC)45
GRDSET, --- ---
BAROR,
BEAMOR
/PREP7, /NOPR, /PREP7 TSTEP, TSTEPNL, TSTEP, TSTEPNL, --- ---
/GOPR, /NOPR, NLPARM, NCPCI, NLPARM, NLPCI,
/VIEW, /ANGLE, /GOPR FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ, FREQ1,
TOTAL, /VIEW, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5, FREQ2, FREQ3,
FINISH /ANGLE, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, FREQ4, FREQ5,
Rev 4: KAN, ITER, /ZOOM DPHASE, LSEQ, RLOAD2,
AFWRITE TOTAL RANDPS, RANDT1, TLOAD1,
Rev 5: ANTYPE, FINISH DTI, TABDMP1, RANDPS,
OUTPR, WEIGHTCHECK, RANDT1,
OUTRES GEOMCHECK, DTI, TABDMP1,
GROUNDCHECK, GEOMCHECK,
OMODES WEIGHTCHECK,
GROUNDCHECK
Multi-step --- --- --- NLCNTL <—— --- ---
Structural TSTEP1
NLARCL
Multi-step --- --- --- NLCNTL2 <—— --- ---
Kinematic TSTEP1
External --- --- --- EXTSEOUT, <—— --- ---
Superelement ASSIGN, OUTPUT2
Creation ASSIGN, OUTPUT4
External --- --- --- ASSIGN, INPUTT2 <—— --- ---
Superelement UNIT
Use PARAM,SECOMB
NASTRAN Line --- --- --- --- SYSTEM(442) ITER --- ---
commands and SYSTEM(319) ELEMITER
51
System Cells ITER, ELEMITER ENFMOTN
(Simcenter PARALLEL
51
Nastran) ENFMOTN
Iterative Solver --- --- --- SMETHOD69 <—— --- ---
(MSC Nastran)
TB 35 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Case Control and --- --- --- --- SUBCASE <—— --- ---
Bulk Data SUBCOM68
Delimiter cards BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
 7-12 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

7.1.1 ANSYS (Legacy) Translation Notes

1. FEMAP defines the directions of nodal degrees of freedom using an output coordinate system. At each node, the
directions of the nodal degrees of freedom in the output coordinate system are used to calculate nodal rotations
(on N or NROTAT) for ANSYS. FEMAP supports either the ANSYS Rev 4 or Rev 5 angle definition. FEMAP
permanent constraints are merged with the nodal constraints in each constraint set translated.
2. For beam (STIF44) elements, Keyopts 3 and 4 are used to represent the FEMAP beam releases in ANSYS Rev
4. Only the elemental rotational degrees of freedom can be released. In ANSYS Rev 5, Keyopts 7 and 8 are used
and any combination of DOF can be released. Releases on translational DOF will generate a warning. Releases
on bar elements (STIF4) are not supported. These elements should be converted to beams, or if possible modify
the properties to eliminate the stiffness in the released direction. For Rev 5, FEMAP will translate nonstructural
mass to and from the additional mass real constant.
3. FEMAP orients the material coordinate system for planar elements using a specified angle for each element.
Certain elements in ANSYS do not readily support this approach. For the shear (STIF28), plane strain and
axisymmetric (STIF42, STIF82 and STIF2) elements, FEMAP does not support elemental material angles. For
these elements, you must enter all material properties in global coordinates. ANSYS does not recommend using
triangular STIF42 elements. You should convert to triangular STIF82 (parabolic) elements, or use the linear tri-
angles with great care.
4. When FEMAP writes a GAP (STIF52) property which has a coefficient of friction a MU command is written.
Only the Y-direction coefficient of friction is used. You will receive an error message if you specify a different
coefficient of friction in the Y and Z directions. The MU command is not supported by the read translator and all
friction will be ignored. FEMAP will write compression stiffness, gap distance, and transverse stiffness for gap
elements. You will receive an error message if you specify a nonzero tension stiffness since it is not supported
by STIF52. The starting condition is not supported and is left blank. It will be skipped by the read translator.
5. When anisotropic materials are translated to ANSYS, the full matrix representation that you input is lost. The
matrix input is converted to an effective orthotropic representation prior to translating. You should review this
approximation carefully.
6. FEMAP does not support elliptical coordinate systems, or the elliptical factors on the LOCAL command.
FEMAP does support the differences in angle definitions between ANSYS Rev 4 and Rev 5. ANSYS coordinate
systems must be numbered between 11 and 40 for ANSYS Rev 4, or 11 and 999999 for ANSYS Rev 5. Other
coordinate systems are not supported for translation. Also, note the difference between ANSYS spherical coor-
dinate systems and FEMAP spherical coordinate systems. The angular coordinates, and therefore, the degrees of
freedom, are switched, and reoriented. For all entities which FEMAP handles in spherical coordinates, the dif-
ferences are automatically corrected for you, but the switches can lead to confusion. It is often best to avoid
spherical coordinates, if possible.
7. DOF spring elements in ANSYS (STIF14) must connect to the same DOF at both nodes.
8. This element is not recommended. It is only supported in ANSYS Rev 4, it has been dropped from Rev 5. Use
the parabolic laminated plates (STIF91) instead.
9. FEMAP supports material angle definition for each element but ANSYS defines these angles with real con-
stants. A model with an irregular mesh (many different angles) will have to generate many sets of real constants.
You should use this capability with caution. For laminate plates, any material orientation angle specified for the
element is combined with the angles specified for each layer when the real constants are defined.
10. When you translate for ANSYS Rev 4, mass elements must be defined in global coordinates unless they are
specified as a pure lumped mass. That is, mass in all directions is the same, and there is no inertia. If specified,
mass offsets and products of inertia are skipped. For ANSYS Rev 5, they can also be defined in the output coor-
dinate system of the node where they are located.
11. FEMAP's general matrix element allows entry of a 12x12 matrix or a 6x6 matrix. The 6x6 matrix is automati-
cally expanded to a 12x12 during translation to the STIF27 real constants. The expansion however does not take
into account the geometric transformations required for non-coincident nodes. You will therefore receive a
warning for each stiffness matrix element using only the 6x6 matrix that you translate which connects non-coin-
cident nodes. When reading these elements, you will receive an error message if the 12x12 real constants are not
equivalent to the internal 6x6 representation.
12. FEMAP reads the normal EN command format as well as the E command format. The NUMSTR,ELEM com-
 ANSYS (Legacy) Translation Notes 7-13

mand is also supported to define the element ID for the E command. In addition to these normal PREP7 com-
mands, FEMAP also supports a variation of the EN command that is generated by the CDWRITE command.
The format of this variation is:
EN,4.4, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
where the first line is EN, ANSYS Version, Order number (not read), MATL, ETYPE, REAL, Element ID,
ESYS, and Select Key (not read). The next two lines contain up to 20 nodes which define the element. Unused
nodes are 0.
13. Only 3D mass elements (KEYOPT 3 = 0 or 2) are read.
14. FEMAP rigid elements only support up to 20 nodes per element. If you have more nodes in a coupled DOF set,
the set will be broken into multiple rigid elements. This limitation no longer exists and should be reviewed in a
future release.
15. In addition to the R commands that FEMAP writes, The RMODIF and RMORE commands are also supported
when reading an ANSYS model. In addition, if you set a material direction via the ESYS command, it sets the
element orientation in FEMAP.
16. FEMAP can read the various material constant commands that it writes and also the MPDATA command (1st
term only) which is generated by CDWRIT. FEMAP can also read the constant term from the MP command.
17. When reading D (displacement) commands, FEMAP creates constraints if the displacement value is 0.0, or
NonZero constraints if value is non-zero.
18. When reading loads and constraints (D, M, F), FEMAP only reads the first fields which define the node, degree
of freedom, and value. The other fields which specify additional DOF, IDs, or other data are simply skipped
without generating warnings.
19. FEMAP can only read constraint equations (CE) which reference 20 or fewer degrees of freedom. Entering a
negative node ID to remove nodes from the equation is not supported.
20. FEMAP mass matrix elements only allow specification of mass at one node, and are therefore represented as a
6x6 matrix. ANSYS STIF27 (KEYOPT 3=2) mass matrices connect to two nodes, and are therefore a 12x12.
When FEMAP writes mass matrix elements, the second node is simply connected to the minimum node number
in your model. Only the 6x6 real constants connect to the first node are entered with the values you specified -
all others are entered as 0.0. Since the ANSYS Weight Generator looks at the center of the two nodes, this
approach results in incorrect CG and inertia estimations from mass matrix elements, you will receive an error
message if there is any nonzero mass or inertia associated with the second node point. In fact the second node is
completely skipped and the mass is only connected to the first node.
21. FEMAP does not support writing or reading tapered laminate elements. Only a single thickness is allowed for
each ply.
22. FEMAP always writes the STIF45 ET command with KEYOPT(4)=1. That is the material axes aligned with
the element IJ nodes. Then, if your model contains properties that align the material axes to a specific coordinate
system, FEMAP writes ESYS commands to override this specification. If you align with global rectangular
coordinates (CSys 0), FEMAP will create a local coordinate system at the origin which is aligned to the Global
axes and use it for the orientation. STIF73 and STIF95 elements do not support material axes which are aligned
to the element IJ side, so you will receive an error message if you attempt to translate elements using this con-
vention.
23. FEMAP always writes beam (STIF44) and bar (STIF4) elements with a third node to define the orientation.
When reading these elements however, either the third node, or angular orientation method can be used.
24. FEMAP supports translating rigid elements to either CP or CERIG commands. If you have rigid elements in
your model, FEMAP will ask which method you prefer to use in the translation. Normally CERIG commands
are preferred since they generate the proper equations for rotational coupling, rather than just connecting speci-
fied DOF. In ANSYS Rev 4, however, they can only represent fully coupled (all 6 DOF) or translationally cou-
pled (all 3 translational DOF) connections. If you need other connections, you must either use CP commands, or
use constraint equations instead of rigid elements. In ANSYS Rev 5, CERIG commands support any combina-
tion of rigid DOF.
25. FEMAP uses T commands when translating nodal temperatures to ANSYS Rev 4. BF,,TEMP commands are
7-14 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

used for Rev 5.

26. FEMAP uses EP commands when translating pressures to ANSYS Rev 4 and SFE,,PRES commands for Rev
5. Varying pressures at different corners of an element are not supported. Similarly, pressures on the edges of
planar elements are not supported.
27. FEMAP uses TE commands when translating elemental temperatures to ANSYS Rev 4. BFE,,TEMP com-
mands are used for Rev 5. FEMAP only supports one constant temperature for each element. In Rev 4, FEMAP
translates the proper number of identical temperatures to define a uniform element temperature. In Rev 5, only
one temperature is translated, since other temperatures will all default to the first, and automatically produce uni-
form element temperature.
28. In ANSYS Rev 4, element types were selected with a numeric value (e.g. 44 for STIF44 beams). In Rev 5, this
changes to a combined name and numeric (e.g. BEAM44 for STIF44 beams). FEMAP writes the appropriate
method for each version and can read either format.
29. Any rod torsional properties will be lost when translating to ANSYS STIF4 elements. STIF4s do not have any
torsional stiffness.
30. The Poisson's ratio coefficients NUXY, NUYZ, and NUXZ follow a different convention than used by most
other programs and FEMAP. The values that you enter are therefore converted to the ANSYS convention when
you write an ANSYS file, and converted to the FEMAP convention when you read an ANSYS file. This
involves the following conversion: NUij(ANSYS) = NUij(FEMAP) * Ej / Ei.
31. Surface-to-surface contact is defined in ANSYS using a combination of contact surface and target segment ele-
ments. ANSYS looks for contact only between contact surfaces and target segments which share the same real
constant set. The real constant set is defined using the Connect, Connection Property command. By clicking the
ANSYS tab, you can modify the KEYOPTs.
32. Supports both the tension only and compression only KEYOPT 3. FEMAP uses the CABLE property; For the
Compression-only (Gap) option, turn the Compression Only Gap option on and set the Initial Tension value >=
0.0. For the Tension-only (Cable) option turn the Compression Only Gap option off and set the Initial Slack
value <= 0.0.
33. FEMAP 8.1 and greater supports reading and writing of bottom surface offset for Analyses defined using the
Analysis Case Manager only. Bottom surface offset is entered on the laminate property and is defined as the dis-
tance from the bottom of the element to location where the reference plane (or nodes) are located. A bottom sur-
face value of (-0.5*t) or (“0.0” the default) will offset the nodes to the middle surface of the element, for nodes at
the bottom surface enter a value 1E-15, and for nodes at the top surface enter ( -t ).
34. When exporting to ANSYS using the Analysis Case Manager, FEMAP will write the 2D and 3D Anisotropic
material definition using the TB command. Anisotropic materials are supported for shell elements 181,182,183
and solid elements 185,186. When writing the TB card with the ANEL argument for Anisotropic materials,
FEMAP does not support TBOPT option 1 (inverted stiffness matrix). When exporting an analysis file without
using the Case Manager, FEMAP will write an effective orthotropic representation (See note 5).
35. Supports reading of the TB command, but only for the ANEL argument needed to read Anisotropic materials.
36. ANSYS requires only ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ for thermal expansion. FEMAP will only use the first three coeffi-
cients in the FEMAP definition material definition. ANSYS requires only KXX, KYY, KZZ for thermal conduc-
tivity. FEMAP will use the first row of the FEMAP material definition.
37. The “Options” in the Laminate Definition portion of the dialog box other than “1..Symmetric” are not sup-
ported.
38. MPC184 elements can only be specified with all translational DOFs checked or all DOFs checked. If this is not
specified in the rigid element, you will get an error during translation, but the element will be written out as hav-
ing all translational DOFs by default (KEYOPT(1)=0).
39. If you want the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (CTE) specified for a rigid element in FEMAP to be taken
into account during analysis, you must set the formulation for the rigid element to “2..MPC 184 Lagrange Multi-
plier”. This will write KEYOPT(2)=1 to the ANSYS file for the corresponding MPC184 element type.
40. “SEC” entries only used for beams with formulations set to “1..BEAM188/Section Shape” or “2..BEAM188/
ASEC” and linear and parabolic plate elements with offsets.
41. When beam element formulation is set to “1..BEAM188/Section Shape” or “2..BEAM188/ASEC”,
 ANSYS Translation Notes 7-15

KEYOPT(3)=3 is always written to specify cubic shape function (KEYOPT, ‘element type ID’, 3, 3).
42. For Spring/Damper elements with Type set to CBUSH, Stiffness values for MATRIX27 written with
KEYOPT(2)=4, while Damping values written for MATRIX27 with KEYOPT(2)=5. For Spring/Damper to
Ground elements, an additional node is created, constrained in all 6 DOF, then used as node 2 of the
MATRIX27. For General Matrix elements, Matrix Type set to “0..Stiffness” writes MATRIX27 with
KEYOPT(2)=4, Matrix Type set to “1..Damping” writes MATRIX27 with KEYOPT(2)=5, and Matrix Type set
to “2..Mass” writes MATRIX27 with KEYOPT(2)=2.

7.1.2 ANSYS Translation Notes

1. FEMAP does not support elliptical coordinate systems, or the elliptical factors on the LOCAL command.
ANSYS coordinate systems must be numbered between 11 and 40 for ANSYS Rev 4, or 11 and 999999 for
ANSYS Rev 5. Other coordinate systems are not supported for translation. Also, note the difference between
ANSYS spherical coordinate systems and FEMAP spherical coordinate systems. The angular coordinates, and
therefore, the degrees of freedom, are switched, and reoriented. For all entities which FEMAP handles in spher-
ical coordinates, the differences are automatically corrected for you, but the switches can lead to confusion. It is
often best to avoid spherical coordinates, if possible.
2. FEMAP defines the directions of nodal degrees of freedom using an output coordinate system. At each node, the
directions of the nodal degrees of freedom in the output coordinate system are used to calculate nodal rotations
(on N or NROTAT) for ANSYS. FEMAP supports either the ANSYS Rev 4 or Rev 5 angle definition. FEMAP
permanent constraints are merged with the nodal constraints in each constraint set translated.
3. Element is no longer officially documented in the ANSYS Element Reference and should only be used when
trying to match results from older versions of ANSYS.
4. Creates a legacy element which should only be used for specific purposes.
5. When “Cable” is checked on the Rod property card and the ANSYS formula is set to LINK8, FEMAP will
default to writing a LINK180.
6. LINK10 does not support nonlinear material. FEMAP will default to writing LINK180 element type if nonlinear
material is used.
7. ELBOW290 elements requires the input of 3 nodes. FEMAP will automatically calculate the position of the
middle node using the radius given in the property card.
8. If element formulation is set to BEAM4 or BEAM44, FEMAP will only translate the section properties and no
shape information. If a nonlinear material is used on an element with either of these formulations, FEMAP will
default to writing a BEAM188. FEMAP will write BEAM188 with SECTYPE which holds the shape of the
cross section. If the beam is cross, H, or hex shaped no SECTYPE will be written as ANSYS does not support
these shapes. Tapered beams are supported through BEAM188 and BEAM44. BEAM44 will not support
tapered with an “I12 or Izy” input.
9. Bar elements can be written as BEAM188 element types however the shape will not be written.
10. FEMAP translates curved beams as BEAM189 element types in ANSYS. It calculates the middle node from
the radius value in the property card. When reading a BEAM189 element type from ANSYS, FEMAP will cre-
ate a parabolic beam.
11. PIPE16 does not support nonlinear material. If a tube elements is set to PIPE16 as the formulation with a non-
linear material, FEMAP will default to writing a PIPE288 element.
12. If internal pressure is specified in the property card for tubes, FEMAP will write the pressure as an elemental
pressure in the ANSYS boundary conditions.
13. PIPE18 does not support nonstructural mass (NSM) and will be ignored if entered.
14. Curved Tube elements do not translate entries from the “Nastran Pipe/Elbow Options” from the property card.
15. If CBUSH is selected in the Spring/Damper property card the element will be translated to a MATRIX27. If it
is set to Other, the element will be translated to a COMBIN14. The properties are calculated based on the initial
position of the element.
16. A DOF Spring element will only translate if End A and End B have the same degree of freedom selected.
FEMAP will issue an error message if inconsistent. Functions in the DOF Spring damper property are not sup-
ported for translation.
7-16 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

17. FEMAP translates a Shear element as a SHELL28 in ANSYS. If the effectiveness factors are specified in the
Shear element property card, FEMAP will write an equivalent LINK180 element along the edges of the shear
element.
18. SHELL181 and 281 do not support nonuniform thickness. Only “Tavg or T1” is supported. SHELL63 does
support nonuniform thickness. SHELL63 elements type will only be written if the material type used is elastic.
Elements using nonlinear materials will be translated to SHELL181 by default. Shell elements set to use 3 inte-
gration points and this cannot be changed. “Additional Options” under the plate element property card are not
supported and will be ignored in translation.
19. Laminate shell elements translate to a SHELL181 and for each layup a SECDATA command will be written to
translate the layer information.
20. If Plain Strain element is 3 noded, FEMAP will automatically write the PLANE183 ANSYS element type with
keyopt[1] = 1.
21. Tetra 10 elements with the formulation set to SOLID186 or the legacy SOLID95 will default to write SOL-
ID187 or SOLID 92 respectively for better accuracy.
22. Mass offset is not supported for mass element translation. Mass elements are written with keyopt[2] = 2 set as
the default.
23. The mass matrix is written to a 12x12 matrix. The MATRIX27 element type is written with keyopt[3] = 2 as
default.
24. Spring/Damper to Ground and DOF Spring to Ground elements write a node with a fixed constraint in the
ANSYS boundary conditions and are read in with the extra node and the element becomes a General Matrix Ele-
ment.
25. RBE1 elements are translated to constraint equations in ANSYS using the CE command. RBE2 elements with
all 3 translation DOFs checked, or all 6 DOFs checked, are translated to MPC184 with keyopt[1] and keyopt[2]
= 1 as a default. All other RBE2 elements with DOF combinations will be written using the CERIG command
for each node linked to the master node. RBE3 elements are translated to ANSYS RBE3 elements.
26. FEMAP translates slide line elements to an ANSYS general contact. The master nodes of the slide line are
written as CONTA171 element type and the slave nodes are written as TARGE169 element type. When
imported, becomes a Connector (contact pair) instead of a slide line.
27. The stiffness entries (E, G, and Nu) follow the same relationship as Nastran and only two of the three entries
are required. The limit stress entries in the material card are ignore in translation to ANSYS. Conductivity (k),
specific heat (Cp), heat generation factor, and Damping (2C/Co) of the thermal properties in the material card
are ignored in ANSYS translation. If the expansion coefficient and reference temperature are defined, these val-
ues will be considered in the ANSYS solution. Temperature dependent material properties are supported for
translation. If the material uses a temperature dependent property, all temperature dependent functions must
have consistent ranges of temperatures. Nonlinear materials are supported for ANSYS translation and used the
FEMAP stress vs. strain function type for function dependence. This is written as TB, MELAS.
28. ANSYS does not support 2D orthotropic materials. FEMAP will automatically write a 3D orthotropic material
in the ANSYS input. From the material card, E1 is written as EX and E2 is written as EY. EZ is calculated from:
E1  E2

G12 from the material card is written to GXY. G1z is written to GXZ and G2z is written to GYZ. The Poisson ratio (nu) value
in the material card will be written for all PRXY, PRYZ, and PRXZ ANSYS input values.
29. FEMAP writes 2D and 3D anisotropic material using the TB, ANEL command and then a TBDATA command
for the values of the material data table. 2D anisotropic materials are written as 3D anisotropic materials in
ANSYS. FEMAP will automatically create a 6x6 matrix for translation.
30. The “Other” material cards that are supported for ANSYS translation are “501..Mooney-Rivlin”, “502..Hyper-
elastic Hyperfoam”, “503..Hyperelastic Ogden”, “504..Hyperelastic Arruda-Boyce”, and “505..Gasket Mate-
rial”. Shape Memory Alloy is not supported in translation.
31. Constraints and Loads translated to ANSYS must be defined in the nodal output coordinate system of the node.
32. Velocity and Acceleration loads are only translated if the ANSYS solution type is Transient. Use the accelera-
tion entry in body load to set gravity. This will write in static solution sets.
 NASTRAN Translation Notes 7-17

33. FEMAP writes R to create a real constant set, followed by RMODIF to define the real constants. The elements
of the master connection region are written as TARGE element type and the elements of the slave connection
region are written as CONTA. Contact between faces, whether it be solid or shell elements are written as
TARGE170 in conjunction with CONTA173 elements. If the elements are parabolic the slave region is written
as CONTA174 elements. 2D contact such as edge to edge contact is written as TARGE169 in conjunction with
CONTA171. Surface to element edge contact is written as TARGE170 in conjunction with CONTA177 ele-
ments.
34. For nonlinear static solution sets, FEMAP will write ANTYPE, STATIC. For nonlinear transient response
solution sets, FEMAP will write ANTYPE, TRANS. If the “Number of Steps” is selected, FEMAP will write a
NSUBST command or if “Size of Steps” is selected, FEMAP will write a DELTIM command. FEMAP defaults
to writing the equation solver type to SPARSE. This can be changed in the ANSYS Load Step dialog.
35. Non-normal pressure loads on the edges/faces of 2D/3D elements will create a SFE command with correspond-
ing SURF153, SURF154, or SURF156 elements.

7.1.3 NASTRAN Translation Notes

The following translation notes apply to translations for Simcenter Nastran, MSC Nastran, CSA/NASTRAN, UAI/
NASTRAN, Cosmic/NASTRAN, ME/NASTRAN, Autodesk Nastran (NEi/Nastran), and SSS/NASTRAN. All
programs use similar file formats.
1. Coordinate systems 1 and 2 are predefined in FEMAP. They are always written to your Nastran data file, but use
a special continuation field that tells FEMAP's Nastran read translator to skip them. If you read a Nastran model
which has a coordinate system 1 or 2 (and does not have the special continuation field) those coordinate systems,
and all entities which reference them will be automatically renumbered.
2. FEMAP will read RBAR elements if all six independent elemental DOF are connected to one node. This is the
typical case for a true rigid bar. If the model is then translated back to Nastran, the elements will be converted to
RBE2 elements.
3. FEMAP spring elements are automatically converted to equivalent CROD elements during write. A representa-
tive PROD and MAT1 card are generated based on the element length and specified spring constants. Damping
is not supported.
4. The stress coefficient, S, is not supported for CELAS2 elements. If you specify the spring stiffness as 0.0,
FEMAP will write a CDAMP2 element instead of the CELAS2. To have FEMAP export CELAS1 and
CDAMP1 entries and corresponding PELAS and PDAMP entries to the input file, the element formulation must
be changed to “1..CELAS1/CDAMP1”.
5. Type 3 CBEND cards are written. Type 1, 2 or 3 can be read, but for type 1 or 2, the radius on the PBEND card
must be 0. Only the primary CBEND format is supported. The ThetaB field is not supported on the PBEND
card.
6. If you have a PARAM,WTMASS entry in your model, FEMAP will automatically multiply all material densi-
ties, mass, and inertias for CONM2 elements, and matrix entries for CONM1 elements by the WTMASS factor.
When FEMAP writes a Nastran model, the WTMASS parameter is not written.
7. CQUADX elements are only written when a hyperelastic material is referenced by an Axisymmetric Property
and the formulation is set to “1..CTRIAX6, CTRAIX, CQUADX” (Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran) or
“0..Default” (MSC Nastran). In addition, the nodes of the CQUADX must lie on the XY plane instead of the XZ
plane, which is different from other Axisymmetric elements in Nastran. The user will be prompted to automati-
cally move the nodes to the XY plane, should they not already be there, then set the proper elements normal
direction.
8. Nastran only supports one mass component on CONM2. FEMAP uses the X-direction mass for this value on
write, and sets all three components equal on read.
9. 3D Orthotropic materials that are used by axisymmetric elements are translated to MAT3 commands. Most data
is directly translated for this command, but the NUXY term must be converted as it is translated to or from the
NUZX MAT3 term. The conversion is required because NUZX would really correspond to NUYX, not NUXY.
The MAT3 NUZX is set equal to NUXY * EY / EX.
10. FEMAP's tube element is not tapered, so the OD2 field is not supported.
11. FEMAP does support tapered beams, with properties at both ends, but does not support intermediate property
7-18 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

data. In addition, FEMAP only supports shear center and neutral axis offsets. The additional nonstructural mass
center of gravity offset is not supported.
12. PSHELL is used for all of the plate-like element properties. The various MID fields control the type of plate.
For a plane strain representation MID2=-1. For a membrane MID2=0 and MID3=0. For a bending representation
MID1 and MID2 are not 0, but MID3 is 0. For a full plate representation none of the MIDs are 0. FEMAP also
supports full definition of all of the material IDs.
13. No Longer Valid - In FEMAP versions prior to 9.3, the number of laminate plies was restricted to 90 plies.
This is no longer the case with the introduction of the Layup entity.
14. Only the material and integration network are supported for PSOLID.
15. No Longer a Limitation
16. The type of Nastran card written by the nodal constraints is controlled by your selections during the translation
process. Any FEMAP constraint set that is not selected as one of the other sets will automatically be translated
as SPC cards. FEMAP does not support nonzero displacements, which are defined on SPC cards.
17. FEMAP only supports MPC equations with up to 70 terms.
18. Nodes referenced on SPCD cards must also be selected by a nodal constraint. FEMAP does not do this auto-
matically for you. You must create nodal constraints for all nodes using SPCDs.
19. FEMAP only supports gradient information (TPRIME) on the TEMPP1 entry. All other information on the
TEMPP1 and TEMPRB entries (i.e., T1/T2 on TEMPP1 and TA/TB/TP on TEMPRB) are ignored.
20. LOAD cards are automatically generated if you combine body and nodal/elemental loads in the same FEMAP
case. The LOAD card takes the ID of the FEMAP load case, and all of the actual loads are renumbered to nonex-
isting cases which are then combined by LOAD. Temperatures remain in the original case.
21. For MSC and UAI/Nastran, both tangential acceleration and rotational velocity are supported on the RFORCE
command, but they must be along/around the same vector.
22. For parabolic plate elements, Nastran evaluates the material axis orientation at each interior integration point,
along the constant parametric lines of the element. FEMAP orients, based on the edge going from nodes 1-2 on
the element. As long as your elements have straight sides, with the midside nodes “at the midside”, these are
equivalent. If not, the Nastran representation will not match what you defined in FEMAP. In fact, the Nastran
formulation will point in different physical directions at each interior integration point.
23. FEMAP does not support spring/damper elements that refer to scalar points to indicate a constrained coordi-
nate.
24. For NEi/Nastran, contact can be defined by creating Connectors. The Connection Region type must be set to
Deformable. If the Connection Regions are defined using nodes then the Output must be set to Nodes. When
Connection Regions are defined by Elements or Surfaces the output must be set to Elements. Connection
Regions will be read from the input file and may be read as node lists or converted to element faces.
25. CBUSH elements are defined using a element formulation. There are two formulations for a Spring element.
0..Default defines CROD or CVISC elements. When the formulation is set to 1..CBUSH then the Nastran
CBUSH element and corresponding PBUSH will be written to the input file. If the Orientation Csys defined in
the property is ON then the element Csys is equal to the selected Csys. If the Orientation Csys is OFF then the
element Csys is defined with the X axis going from the first node to the second. The element Y axis is perpen-
dicular to the element X axis. It points from the first node toward the orientation (or third) node. If you use an
orientation vector, the Y axis points from the first node in the direction of the orientation vector. The element Z
axis is determined from the cross product of the element X and Y axes. Element offsets are only supported using
the nodal output coordinate system and will be transformed when read into FEMAP.
26. The RSPLINE element is defined using a FEMAP Rigid element and setting the Element Formulation to
“1..RSPLINE”. The First and last terms in the RSPLINE must be defined as independent.
27. SLOAD's are 1 dimensional concentrated loads. They can only be applied to SPOINTs in FEMAP by defining
the X component of a Nodal Force. FEMAP will read SLOAD(s) as a Nodal Heat Generation load from a ther-
mal analysis or a Nodal Force from all other solution types.
28. Simcenter Nastran Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (SOL 601) does not support TABLEM2 entries for material
function dependence. It does however support the use of TABLEM1 entries, which do NOT use specific field
 NASTRAN Translation Notes 7-19

values on material entries (MAT1, MAT4, etc.) as multipliers. Therefore, all functionally-dependent material
properties for SOL 601 should be defined with the actual values in the function and a “1” should be placed in
those fields of the MAT* entry to produce the TABLEM1 entry. For TABLEM2, which is exported from
FEMAP for many types of analysis, the values specified in the General tab of the material dialog box represent
scalars, so it is recommended to also place the material values in the function directly and simply use the scalars
as multipliers to these values.
29. FEMAP 9.1 and greater supports reading and writing of bottom surface offset for Analyses defined using the
Analysis Case Manager only. Bottom surface offset is entered on the laminate property and is defined as the dis-
tance from the bottom of the element to location where the reference plane (or nodes) are located. A bottom sur-
face value of (-0.5*t) or (“0.0” the default) will offset the nodes to the middle surface of the element, for nodes at
the bottom surface enter a value 1E-14, and for nodes at the top surface enter ( -t ).
30. FEMAP 9.3 and greater supports reading and writing of the hyperelastic materials for Simcenter Nastran Solu-
tions 601 and 701 (MATHE). These materials are found in “Other Types” and the supported types are the
Mooney-Rivlin, Hyperfoam, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, an Sussman-Bathe. Also, the MATHEs for MD/MSC Nas-
tran Solution 600 are supported.
31. Contact entities for linear contact, glued contact, and advanced nonlinear contact are only supported for
Simcenter Nastran.
32. Bolt Preload entities supported for Simcenter Nastran only. BOLTFRC is supported for SOLs 101, 103, 105,
107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 401, and 402. Also, the STRAIN type is only supported for SOL 401 for BOLT
entries which have ETYPE set to 3.
33. Rotor Dynamics entities supported for Simcenter Nastran only.
34. The MATG is supported for Simcenter Nastran Solution 601 only. Also, “Gasket Results” can only be
reviewed in FEMAP by requesting results in the Nastran binary output file (.op2).
35. AUTOSPC (“1..Singular Value Decomposition” option), AUTOMPC, BOLTFACT, and NOFISR PARAMs
are supported for Simcenter Nastran Only.
36. These PARAMs are created by setting options in various commands of FEMAP for different analysis types and
other options, not using the NASTRAN Bulk Data dialog box in the Analysis Set Manager
37. The MAT10 material is a Fluid Material and can only be used with solid elements.
38. These Axisymmetric element types are only available when using Simcenter Nastran version 6.0 and above.
39. Connection Regions for 2-D contact in Solution 601 of Simcenter Nastran (usually in conjunction with axisym-
metric elements) must be defined using nodes only and are written out to the Nastran file as BLSEG entries. The
nodes must be selected in proper order with contact occurring to the “left side” of the region. The BCTSET entry
is used to specify which BLSEG entries are in contact with one another. If a BLSEG is specified as “Rigid”, it
must be the “target” in the Connector (Contact Pair). BLSEG entries in Nastran input files for solution
sequences other than Solution 601 represent “slideline” elements.
40. When a bar or beam property has been created in FEMAP using the “Shape” button to define the cross-section,
the cross-section definition values will also be exported as a comment to the Nastran file. For example, the
Height; Width, Top; Width, Bottom; Thickness, Top; Thickness, Bottom; and Thickness values would be
exported for an I-Beam and appear in as a comment such as this:
$ Femap Property 1 : BEAM Property (I-Beam or Wide Flange (W))
$ Femap PropShape 1 : 9,0,1.,1.,1.,0.1,0.1,0.1
$ Femap PropMethod 1 : 9,0,1,0.3
$ Femap PropOrient 1 : 9,0,0.,1.,2.,7.,8.,-1.,0.,0.
If a Nastran input file containing these type of comments is imported, the type of cross-section and correspond-
ing values will also be entered into the “Cross Section Definition” dialog box and the beam/bar cross-sections
can then be viewed graphically in your FEMAP model.
41. To use the CTE on rigid elements, you must check the “Rigid Element Thermal Expansion” option in the
“Plate, Beam, and Rigid Options” section of the NASTRAN Bulk Data Options dialog box of the Analysis Set
Manager (Model, Analysis command). Otherwise, the CTEs will be ignored.
42. When PBARL and PBEAML properties are imported into FEMAP from a Nastran input file, the beam prop-
7-20 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

erty section values will be calculated in FEMAP using the same algorithm Nastran uses to evaluate PBARL and
PBEMAL entries when solving. This is done for consistency and efficiency purposes.
43. SPCADD and MPCADD constraint combinations are available for all solution sequences except Steady-State
and Transient Heat Transfer.
44. LOAD load combinations are available for Linear Static, Nonlinear Static, and Buckling Analysis.
45. Method available for NEi Nastran only
46. PCOMPG entries are only generated when all plies also have a Global Ply ID set. If any ply doesn’t have a
Global Ply ID defined, then a PCOMP will be generated instead. When results are imported into FEMAP from a
Nastran run which contained PCOMPG entries, the results ply-by-ply results will be associated with the Ply ID
in FEMAP, not the Global Ply ID.
47. FEMAP can write PELAS, PELAST, PDAMP, and PDAMPT entries in combination with CELAS1 and
CDAMP1 elements by setting the element formulation to “1..CELAS1/CDAMP1
48. For Simcenter Nastran, FEMAP writes out MAT11 and MATT11 (if needed) bulk data entries when there are
solid elements which use a 3-D Orthotropic material.
49. For NEi Nastran, FEMAP writes out MAT12 and MATT12 (if needed) bulk data entries when there are solid
elements which use a 3-D Orthotropic material.
50. For “Edge-to-Surface” glued contact in Simcenter Nastran, the Connection Region for the “edge region” must
be defined with nodes from elements of certain topology (3 or 6-noded triangles, 4 or 8- noded quads) and set as
the Source in the Connector. This will create a BLSEG entry, which is used to define the “edge region” that can
be glued to the “face” of solid or shell elements. The shell or solid element face region (creates a BSURF,
BSURFS, BCPROP, or BCPROPS entry) must be entered as the Target in the Connector.
51. Turning on ENFMOTN in the PARAM section of the NASTRAN Bulk Data Options writes out different
things for Simcenter Nastran and MSC/MD Nastran. For Simcenter Nastran, a “System Cell”, ENFMOTN =
(value), is created, with “value” equal to 0 for “Constraint Mode”, 1 for “Absolute”, or 2 for “Absolute, Viscous
Damping”. For MSC/MD Nastran, PARAM,ENFMOTN,ABS is created for “Absolute”, while
PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL is created for “Relative”.
52. For Simcenter Nastran only, FEMAP can write out specialized Plane Strain or Plane Stress elements by setting
the element formulation to “1..CPLSTN3, CPLSTN4, CPLSTN6, CPLSTN8” (Plane Strain) or “2..CPLSTS3,
CPLSTS4, CPLSTS6, CPLSTS8” (Plane Stress).
53. For NEi Nastran only, the XZ Plane, YZ Plane, and the options in the Region Options section (Characteristic
Length and Exact Integration Factor) on the MFLUID are not available.
54. For NEi Nastran only, setting the value to -2..Automatic(Statics) will write out PARAM,INREL,AUTO.
55. For NEi Nastran only, when the “Rigid Element Thermal Expansion” option in on, two additional PARAMs are
written to Bulk Data, PARAM,RIGIDELEM2ELAS,ON and PARAM,RIGIDELEMTYPE,BAR. In conjunction
with this, RIGID = LAGRAN is NOT written to the Case Control section.
56. For Simcenter Nastran only, is a “shape-memory alloy” material.
57. For NEi Nastran only, is a “shape-memory alloy” material, specifically, Nitinol.
58. For Simcenter Nastran only, allows you to enter Mullins effect for hyperelastic materials for SOL 601/701
59. For Simcenter Nastran only, allows you to enter Viscoelastic effect for hyperelastic materials for SOL 601/701
60. For Simcenter Nastran only, is a non-hyperelastic Viscoelastic material for SOL 601
61. For Simcenter Nastran only, is a property which does not reference a hyperelastic material for Plane Strain or
Plane Stress Elements. The formulation of the elements must be set to “1..CPLSTN3, CPLSTN4, CPLSTN6,
CPLSTN8” (Plane Strain) or “2..CPLSTS3, CPLSTS4, CPLSTS6, CPLSTS8” (Plane Stress) in order to export
this property type. The “Mean Dilatational Formulation” switch on the property may be used for nearly incom-
pressible materials, but is ignored for SOL 601. Also, Nonstructural mass/are is ignored for SOL 601.
62. For NEi Nastran only, instructs the modal solution which eigenvalue extraction method to use. Choices are
Lanczos, Subspace, and Auto.
63. For Simcenter Nastran only, used to place pressure loads on the edge of CPLSTNi and CPLSTSi elements.
 NASTRAN Translation Notes 7-21

64. For Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran only, used to create an acceleration load which varies along a partic-
ular axis of a specified coordinate system. Requires creation of an “Acceleration vs. Location” function (Type =
36).
65. For Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran only. Selection of Ply Failure Theory and Bond Failure Theory, along
with specification of limits for each is done using the Ply/Bond Failure tab of the Define Material dialog box.
66. For Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran only. Created using Ply/Bond Failure tab for Isotropic, 3D Orthotro-
pic, and 3D Anisotropic material types. Used only for Solid Laminate Elements.
67. No longer valid
68. The SUBCOM subcase combination does not support thermal loads defined in the referenced subcases.
FEMAP will NOT automatically move the loads but instead warn the user that these loads need to be manually
redefined as a load directly in the SUBCOM subcase.
69. For MSC Nastran only. SMETHOD = MATRIX will be written for when “Iterative Solver” is set to “1..On” in
the NASTRAN Executive and Solution Options dialog box, while SMETHOD = ELEMENT will be written when
“Iterative Solver” is set to “2..Elemental Iter”.
70. The Simcenter Nastran solver has a predefined limit of 10,000 individual ACCEL1 entries. If more than 10,000
nodal acceleration loads are defined in a single load set, then the nodal acceleration loads will be combined,
when possible, to minimize the overall number of ACCEL1 entries written to the Nastran input file. If more than
10,000 “unique” nodal acceleration loads are defined in a single load set, they will be combined into a few
ACCEL1 entries as possible, then written to the Nastran file.
71. For MSC Nastran only. The BCONTACT entry is written to the Case Control section and in most cases points
to a BCTABLE which contains the various “contact pairs”. For BCTABLE, the HHHB item, used for Heat
Transfer, is not supported. The NLPARM entry, which must be explicitly enabled in the “Master” case or indi-
vidual subcase(s), is only used when Linear contact is defined and is used for convergence purposes.
72. For Simcenter Nastran only. MGRID is used to specify a specific node and MDOF a degree of freedom (1-6) to
monitor during a direct frequency or direct transient response, plotted in the Simcenter Nastran Analysis Moni-
tor.
73. For Simcenter Nastran only. SWPANGLE is angular increment in degrees at which failure indices and strength
ratios are computed and output for laminates in direct frequency (SOL 108) and modal frequency (SOL 111)
analysis.
74. For Simcenter Nastran only. Solid Cohesive Elements can only reference a Solid Cohesive Property. In addi-
tion, Solid Cohesive Properties can only reference an Isotropic (MAT1), 3D Orthotropic (MAT11), or Cohesive
Element Material (MATCZ). MATCZ is found in Other Types when creating a material.
75. For Simcenter Nastran only. When creating an input file for SOL 401 and Nonlinearity Type is set to Plastic on
the Nonlinear tab of the Define Material dialog box, the type of function specified via the Function Dependence
drop-down determines what is written to the TYPE field on the MATS1 entry. Using a function of type
“13..Stress vs. Strain”, writes PLASTIC to the TYPE field, while using a function of type “14..Stress vs. Plastic
Strain” writes PLSTRN to the TYPE field.
76. For Simcenter Nastran only. Use the Modify, Update Elements, Solid Material CSys command to specify a
MATCID for an element, which overrides the material coordinate system for CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, and
CPYRAM solid elements when the elements reference a PSOLID property; the material coordinate system for
CHEXA and CPENTA solid elements when the elements reference a PCOMPS property; and/or the material
coordinate system for CHEXCZ and CPENTCZ solid elements.
77. For MSC Nastran only. In MSC Nastran 2005R3, the default method of section evaluation used to evaluate
PBEAML/PBARL section properties changed from thin walled analytic theory to a finite element method.
FEMAP supports both its own list of sections plus the Nastran PBEAML/PBARL sections. The latter can have
their section properties evaluated using one of two finite element approaches plus the original PBEAML/
PBARL thin walled theory. If Nastran sections are evaluated inside FEMAP using PBARL/PBEAML thin
walled theory, they will be written to a Nastran deck as PBEAML/PBARL cards unless the Skip Beam/Bar Cross
Sections is selected in the NASTRAN Bulk Data Options dialog box, which causes PBEAM entries be written
using the section properties evaluated using the PBEAML/PBARL thin walled theory when the property was
created in FEMAP. As the default in MSC Nastran is to mesh the section and not use thin walled theory, this can
lead to differences in results, especially with beam sections with non-zero neutral axis offsets. To avoid these
 7-22 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

issues, users are advised to either select the Skip Beam/Bar Cross Sections is selected in the NASTRAN Bulk
Data Options dialog box, which forces the sections to be written as PBEAM cards using thin walled theory or to
avoid using the PBEAML/PBARL section evaluator when creating the property.
78. The MONPNT1 is available in both Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran, but there are some differences in
how it is implemented. For Simcenter Nastran, the MONPNT1 does not support setting a different coordinate
system in the Summation Axes Results section of the NASTRAN Aerodynamic Control Monitor Point dialog box
and is only available for SOL 144. For MSC Nastran, the MONPNT1 does support setting a different output
coordinate system and is available for SOLs 101, 108, 109, 111, 112, 144, 146, 200, and 400.
79. The MONPNT3 is available in both Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran, but there are some differences in
how it is implemented. For Simcenter Nastran, the MONPNT3 references GROUP entries which contain the IDs
of the included nodes and elements and is only available for SOL 101 and SOL 103. For MSC Nastran, the
MONPNT3 references SET1 entries which contain the IDs of the included nodes and elements and is available
for SOLs 101, 103, 108, 109, 111, 112, 144, 146, 200, and 400.
80. The MONITOR case control entry is available in both Simcenter Nastran and MSC Nastran, but there are some
differences in how it is implemented. For Simcenter Nastran, the MONITOR request only can only be used to
suppress the output of MONPNT2 (not currently supported in FEMAP) and/or MONPNT3 in SOL 101 and SOL
103. In addition, it can be used to suppress the output of a MONPNT3 in the Master Case or any subcase. For
MSC Nastran, the MONITOR request can only be specified in the Master Case of any supported analysis type. It
can be used to suppress the output of MONDSP1 (not currently supported in FEMAP), MONPNT1, MONPNT2
(not currently supported in FEMAP), and/or MONPNT3. It can also be used to control if complex output for
monitor points should printed as real and imaginary or magnitude and phase values. In FEMAP, this is controlled
by selecting Magnitude/Phase or Real/Imaginary in the NASTRAN Output Requests dialog box.
81. Direct Matrix Input entries have two options in the Source Data section, External File and Internalized Data.
When Source Data is set to External File, an INCLUDE statement which contains the file path to an external
*.pch or *.op2 file is written to the Nastran input file. When Source Data is set to Internalized Data, a DMIG
entry is written to the Nastran input file. Matrix Combinations are supported by writing a scale factor and DMIG
NAME for each referenced Direct Matrix Input entity to Case Control.
82. The MATDMG and TABLEM5 entries are only supported for Simcenter Nastran Multi-Step Structural (SOL
401) and Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematics (SOL 402). In order for a MATDMG entry to be written, a material
type found in Other Types, either “512..Sim. Nastran UD Ply Failure (MATDMG Sol 401,402)” or “513..Sim.
Nastran EUD Ply Failure (MATDMG Sol 401,402)”, must exist and reference an Orthotropic (3D) material
using Material ID - MID. For a function to create a TABLEM5 entry, the function must have Type set to
“48..Shear Damage vs. Thermodynamic Force (TABLEM5)” and by referenced by the Damage Evaluation -
TID field of a “512..Sim. Nastran Unidirectional Ply Failure (MATDMG Sol 401,402)” material.

7.1.4 MSC Patran Translation Notes

1. FEMAP Coordinate System 0 is not written to the MSC Patran file, but Coordinate Systems 1 and 2 are always
written.
2. All coordinates are written to MSC Patran in global rectangular coordinates (CSys 0).
3. All element types are written with the appropriate shape and number of nodes to match your definition in
FEMAP. The MSC Patran Element Configuration (CONFIG) is set to the value shown (Cfg=).
4. Properties are written to (and read from) the MSC Patran neutral file in the same format used by the NASPAT
translator. The property values match the order used by Nastran. This format may be incompatible with inter-
faces from MSC Patran to other programs.
5. Constraints are written to the MSC Patran neutral file as enforced displacement loads. When reading a neutral
file, FEMAP converts an enforced displacement of 0.0 to a constraint, and all others to loads.
6. Only RB2 and RBE3 elements will be imported.
 Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS 7-23

7.2 Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS
FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
Coordinate Systems
Rectangular --- --- *DEFINE_COORDINATE_ ---1 Dataset 24201 <——
SYSTEM
Cylindrical --- --- --- ---1 Dataset 24201 <——
Spherical --- --- --- ---1 Dataset 24201 <——

Nodes
All *NODE,*TRANSFORM1 <—— *NODE COORDINATES1 Dataset 2411 <——
TRANSFORM CYLIN-
DRICAL

Elements
Rod T2D2, T2D2H, T3D2, <—— *ELEMENT_BEAM1 9 Dataset 2412 <——
T3D2H, DC1D2, C1D2, (fe 11)
C1D2H4
Bar B21, B23, B21H, B23H, <—— *ELEMENT_BEAM1 52, 983 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
B31, *ELEMENT_BEAM_ 2412 (fe 21)
B33, B31H, B33H2 ORIENTATION7
*RELEASE
Tube PIPE21, PIPE21H, PIPE31, <—— *ELEMENT_BEAM1 14, 312 Dataset 2412 <——
PIPE31H5 (fe 21)
Curved Tube ELBOW315 <—— --- 31 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
2412 (fe 23)
Link --- --- --- --- --- ---
Beam B21, B23, B21H, B23H, <—— *ELEMENT_BEAM1 52, 983 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
B31, *ELEMENT_BEAM_ 2412 (fe 22)
B33, B31H, B33H2 ORIENTATION7
*RELEASE12
B22, B22H, B32, B32H
Spring/Damper SPRINGA, DASHPOTA, <—— *ELEMENT_DISCRETE --- Dataset 2412 <——
MATRIX INPUT, MATRIX *CONNECTOR (fe 136, 137)
ASSEMBLE6 SECTION
BUSHING20
BEAM20
DOF Spring SPRING2, DASHPOT26 <—— --- SPRINGS --- ---
Curved Beam --- --- --- 31 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
2412 (fe 23)
Gap GAPUNI7 <—— --- --- --- ---
Plot Only R2D2, RAX2, RB2D2, R2D2, RAX2, --- --- Dataset 2431 <——
ISL21, ISL21A, ISL31, RB2D2,
IRS21, IRS21A9 RB3D2, SAX1,
FAX2,
SAXA1
Shear --- --- --- 68 --- ---
Parabolic Shear --- --- --- --- --- ---
Membrane M3D3, M3D4, M3D4R8 <—— *ELEMENT_SHELL2 18 Dataset 748, <——
*ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 2412 (fe 41,
*ELEMENT_SHELL_OFFSET 44)
Parabolic M3D6, M3D8, M3D8R8 <—— (+ *ELEMENT_SHELL2 30 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
Membrane M3D8R, M3D9, *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 2412 (fe 42,
M3D9R) *ELEMENT_SHELL_OFFSET 45)
Bending --- --- --- --- --- ---
Parabolic Bending --- --- --- --- --- ---
Plate S3, S4, STRI3, STRI35, S3, S3R, S4, *ELEMENT_SHELL2 75, 138, 139, 1403 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
S3R, S4R, S4R5, *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 2412 (fe 91,
S4R, S4RF, S4R5, DS4, STRI3, STRI35, *ELEMENT_SHELL_THICKNESS 94)
DS38 DS4, DS3 *ELEMENT_SHELL_OFFSET
Parabolic Plate STRI65, S8R, S8R58, DS6, STRI65, S8, *ELEMENT_SHELL2 22 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
DS8 S8R, S8R5, S9 *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 2412 (fe 92,
DS6, DS8 *ELEMENT_SHELL_THICKNESS 95)
*ELEMENT_SHELL_OFFSET
Laminated Plate STRI3, STRI35, S4, S4R, <—— + (S3, S4, *ELEMENT_SHELL2 753,138, 139, 140 --- ---
S4RF, S4R58,10 S4R, S4R5) *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA
Parabolic STRI65, S8R, S8R58,10 <—— (+ STRI6, --- 22 --- ---
Laminated Plate S9R5)
 7-24 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS

FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
Plane Strain CPE3, CPE4, CPE4I, CPE3, CPE4, *ELEMENT_SHELL2 6, 11, 1153, 3, 114 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
CPE4R, CPS3, CPS4, CPE4H *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 2412 (fe 51,
CPS4I, CPE4R, *ELEMENT_SHELL_OFFSET 54)
CPS4R, DC2D3, DC2D4 CPE4RH,
CPE4I,
CPE4IH,
CGPE6, CPS3,
CPS4, CPS4I,
CPS4R, DC2D3,
DC2D4
Parabolic Plane CPE6, CPE8, CPE8R and CPE6, CPE6H, *ELEMENT_SHELL2 27, 54, 1253, 32, 58, 128 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
Strain hybrid8, CPS6, CPS8, CPE8, *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 26, 53, 124 2412 (fe 52,
CPS8R, DC2D6, DC2D8 CPE8H, *ELEMENT_SHELL_OFFSET 55)
CPE8RH, CPS6,
CPS6M, CPS8,
CPS8R,
CGPE8,
DC2D6, DC2D8
Axisymmetric --- --- --- --- --- ---
Shell
9
Planar Plot Only R2D3, R3D4, IRS3, IRS4 <—— +(R3D3, --- --- Dataset 2431 <——
F3D3, F3D4)
Axisymmetric CAX3, CAX4, CAX4I, <—— + *ELEMENT_SHELL2 2, 103, 116, 20 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
CAX4R, hybrid, DCAX3, (CAXA4, *ELEMENT_SHELL_BETA 2412 (fe 81,
DCAX4, CGPE6, CGPE6R, CGAX3, 84)
CGPE6RH, CGPE6H, CGAX4 hybrid
CGPE6I, CGPE6IH, and reduced
CGPE5, CGPE5H, SAX114 integration),
SAX1
Parabolic CAX6, CAX8, CAX8R and <—— + --- 28, 553, 66, 67, 33, 59 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
Axisymmetric hybrid, DCAX6, DCAX8, (CAXA8, 126, 129 2412 (fe82,85)
CGPE10, CGPE10R, CGAX6,
CGPE10H, CGPE10HR, CGAX8) hybrid
CGPE8, CGPE8H, SAX214 and reduced
integration),
SAX2
Solid C3D4, C3D6, C3D8, C3D8I, C3D4, C3D6, *ELEMENT_SOLID 7, 1343, 117 Dataset 748, <——
C3D8R and hybrid3, C3D8, C3D8I, 2412 (fe 111, +2(2438)
DC3D4, C3D8R and 112, 115)
DC3D6, DC3D8 hybrid3
Parabolic Solid C3D10, C3D15, C3D20, <—— + --- 21, 57, 1273,35, 61, 130 Dataset 748, <——
C3D20I, C3D20R and (C3D27R and 2412 (fe 118, +2(2438)
hybrid3, DC3D10, DC3D15, hybrid) - 113, 116)
DC3D20 (DC3D10,
DC3D15,
DC3D20)
Solid Laminate --- ---
Parabolic Solid --- ---
Laminate
Solid Cohesive --- ---
Parabolic Solid --- ---
Cohesive
Mass MASS, ROTARYI3,11 <—— *ELEMENT_MASS- MASSES Dataset 2412 <——
(fe 161)
Mass Matrix --- --- --- --- --- ---
Spring/Damper to SPRINGA, DASHPOTA, <—— --- --- --- ---
Ground MATRIX INPUT, MATRIX
ASSEMBLE 6

DOF Spring to SPRING1, DASHPOT16 <—— --- SPRINGS --- ---

Ground
Rigid *KINEMATIC COU- <—— *CONSTRAINED_NODAL_ TYING4 Dataset 748, <—— +(2438)
PLING16 RIGID_BODY6 2412 (fe 122)
*MPC17 *CONSTRAINED_
INTERPOLATION
General Matrix MATRIX INPUT, MATRIX --- --- --- --- ---
ASSEMBLE
Slide Line --- --- --- --- --- ---
Weld/Fastener --- --- --- --- --- ---

Properties
Rod *SOLID SECTION <—— *SECTION_BEAM GEOMETRY Dataset 776, <—— +3(789)
2437
 Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS 7-25

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS

FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
Bar *BEAM GENERAL <—— *SECTION_BEAM BEAM SECT Dataset 776, <—— +3(789)
SECTION, 2437
*SECTION POINTS,
*CENTROID,
*SHEAR CENTER
Tube *BEAM SECTION (PIPE) <—— *SECTION_BEAM GEOMETRY Dataset 776, <—— +3(789)
2437
Curved Tube *BEAM SECTION <—— --- GEOMETRY Dataset 776, <—— +3(789)
(ELBOW) 2437
Link --- --- --- --- --- ---
Beam *BEAM GENERAL <—— + *SECTION_BEAM BEAM SECT GEOME- Dataset 776, <—— +3(789)
SECTION, (*TRANS- TRY 2437
*SECTION POINTS, VERSE
*CENTROID, SHEAR STIFF-
*SHEAR CENTER NESS)
Spring/Damper *SPRING, <—— *MAT_SPRING_ELASTIC, --- Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
*DASHPOT *CONNECTOR *MAT_DAMPER_VISCOUS
SECTION
BUSHING20
BEAM20
DOF Spring *SPRING, <—— --- SPRING --- ---
*DASHPOT
Curved Beam --- --- --- BEAM SECT GEOME- Dataset 776, <—— +3(789)
TRY 2437
Gap *GAP, <—— --- --- --- ---
*FRICTION,
*GAP
CONDUCTANCE18,
*GAP RADIATION19
Plot Only --- --- --- --- --- ---
Shear --- --- --- GEOMETRY --- ---
Parabolic Shear --- --- --- GEOMETRY --- ---
Membrane *SOLID SECTION <—— *SECTION_SHELL GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Parabolic *SOLID SECTION <—— GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Membrane
Bending --- --- --- GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Parabolic --- --- --- GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Bending
Plate *SHELL SECTION <—— *SECTION_SHELL GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Parabolic Plate *SHELL SECTION <—— *SECTION_SHELL GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Laminated Plate *SHELL SECTION <—— *PART_COMPOSITE GEOMETRY COMPOS- --- ---
*SECTION_SHELL (pre-version ITE
11.1.1)
*INTEGRATION_RULE (pre-ver-
sion 11.1.1)
Parabolic *SHELL SECTION <—— --- GEOMETRY COMPOS- --- ---
Laminated Plate ITE
Plane Strain *SOLID SECTION <—— *SECTION_SHELL GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Parabolic Plane *SOLID SECTION <—— --- GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Strain
Axisymmetric --- --- --- --- --- ---
Shell
Planar Plot Only R2D3, R3D4, IRS3, IRS49 <—— +(R3D3, --- --- --- ---
F3D3, F3D4)
Axisymmetric *SOLID SECTION <—— *SECTION_SHELL GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Parabolic *SOLID SECTION <—— --- --- Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Axisymmetric
Solid *SOLID SECTION <—— *SECTION_SOLID GEOMETRY Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Parabolic Solid *SOLID SECTION <—— --- --- Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Solid Laminate --- --- --- --- --- ---
Parabolic Solid --- --- --- --- --- ---
Laminate
Solid Cohesive --- --- --- --- --- ---
Parabolic Solid --- --- --- --- --- ---
Cohesive
Mass *MASS, <—— *ELEMENT_MASS MASSES Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
*ROTARYINERTIA
Mass Matrix --- --- --- --- --- ---
Spring/Damper to SPRING, DASHPOT, <—— --- --- Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
Ground MATRIX INPUT, MATRIX
ASSEMBLE6
DOF Spring to SPRING, DASHPOT6 <—— --- SPRINGS --- ---
Ground
 7-26 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS

FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
Rigid none none --- none none none
General Matrix MATRIX INPUT, MATRIX <—— --- --- Dataset 2437 <—— +3(789)
ASSEMBLE
Slide Line --- --- --- --- --- ---
Weld/Fastener --- --- --- --- --- ---

Materials
Isotropic *MATERIAL, *MATERIAL, ELASTIC, ISOTROPIC, Dataset 1710 <—— 4
*ELASTIC (ISO), *ELASTIC ISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_ WORK HARDENING,
*EXPANSION, (ISO), PLASTIC, TEMPERATURE
*DENSITY, *EXPANSION, PLASTIC_KINEMATIC, EFFECTS,
*SPECIFIC HEAT, *DENSITY, ELASTIC_PLASTIC_THERMAL STRAIN RATE
*DAMPING, *SPECIFIC
*CONDUCTIVITY, HEAT,
*PLASTIC15, *DAMPING,
*CREEP, *CONDUCTIV-
*DRUCKER PRAG, ITY,
*PLASTIC, *PLASTIC15,
*MOHR COULOMB *DRUCKER
PRAGER,
*DRUCKER
PRAGERH,
*MOHR COU-
LOMB,
*MOHRCOU-
LOMBH
Orthotropic -2D *MATERIAL, *MATERIAL, ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC, ORTHOTROPIC, Dataset 1710 <—— 4
*ELASTIC (LAMINA), *ELASTIC COMPOSITE_DAMAGE WORK HARDENING,
*EXPANSION, (LAMINA), TEMPERATURE
*DENSITY, *EXPANSION, EFFECTS,
*SPECIFIC HEAT, *DENSITY, STRAIN RATE
*DAMPING, *SPECIFIC
*CONDUCTIVITY, HEAT,
*PLASTIC15, *DAMPING,
*CREEP, *CONDUCTIV-
*DRUCKER PRAG, ITY,
*MOHR COULOMB *PLASTIC15,
*DRUCKER
PRAGER,
*DRUCKER
PRAGERH,
*MOHR COU-
LOMB,
*MOHRCOU-
LOMBH
Orthotropic -3D *MATERIAL, *MATERIAL, ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC3, ORTHOTROPIC, Dataset 1710 <—— 4
*ELASTIC (ENGR *ELASTIC COMPOSITE_DAMAGE WORK HARDENING,
CONST), (ENGINEER- TEMPERATURE
*EXPANSION, ING EFFECTS,
*DENSITY, CONSTANTS, STRAIN RATE
*SPECIFIC HEAT, ORTHRO),
*DAMPING, *EXPANSION,
*CONDUCTIVITY, *DENSITY,
*PLASTIC15, *SPECIFIC
*CREEP, HEAT,
*DRUCKER PRAG *DAMPING,
*MOHR COULOMB *CONDUCTIV-
ITY,
*PLASTIC15,
*DRUCKER
PRAGER,
*DRUCKER
PRAGERH
*MOHR COU-
LOMB,
*MOHRCOU-
LOMBH
 Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS 7-27

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS

FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
Anisotropic -2D *MATERIAL, *MATERIAL, ANISOTROPIC_ELASTIC ANISOTROPIC, Dataset 1710 <—— 4
*ELASTIC(ANISO), *ELASTIC WORK HARDENING,
*EXPANSION, (ANISO), TEMPERATURE
*DENSITY, *EXPANSION, EFFECTS,
*SPECIFICHEAT, *DENSITY, STRAIN RATE
*DAMPING, *SPECIFIC
*CONDUCTIVITY, HEAT,
*PLASTIC15, *DAMPING,
*CREEP, *CONDUCTIV-
*DRUCKER PRAG, ITY,
*PLASTIC *PLASTIC15,
*MOHR COULOMB *DRUCKER
PRAGER,
*DRUCKER
PRAGERH,
*MOHR COU-
LOMB,
*MOHR COU-
LOMBH
Anisotropic -3D *MATERIAL, *MATERIAL, ANSIOTROPIC_ELASTIC3 ANISOTROPIC, Dataset 1710 <—— 4
*ELASTIC(ANISO), *ELASTIC WORK HARDENING,
*EXPANSION, (ANISO), TEMPERATURE
*DENSITY, *EXPANSION, EFFECTS,
*SPECIFIC HEAT, *DENSITY, STRAIN RATE
*DAMPING, *SPECIFIC
*CONDUCTIVITY, HEAT,
*PLASTIC15, *DAMPING,
*CREEP, *CONDUCTIV-
*DRUCKER PRAG, ITY,
*MOHR COULOMB *PLASTIC15,
*DRUCKER
PRAGER,
*DRUCKER
PRAGERH,
*MOHR COU-
LOMB,
*MOHR COU-
LOMBH
Hyperelastic *HYPERELASTIC <—— --- MOONEY --- ---
Other *HYPERELASITIC, <—— *MAT (various values between 1 to OGDEN (300), FOAM --- ---
OGDEN (200) 181)3 (301)
*HYPERFOAM(201)

Functions
All *AMPLITUDE <—— *DEFINE_CURVE --- ---

Constraints
Constraint Combi- --- --- --- --- --- ---
nation
Nodal *BOUNDARY <—— *BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE FIXED DISP, Dataset 791 <—— 5
DISP CHANGE
Nodal NonZero --- --- *BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_ --- Dataset 791 <—— 5
MOTION_NODE
Equation *EQUATION <—— *CONSTRAINED_LINEAR4 SERVO LINK Dataset 754 <—— 6

Nodal Loads
Load Combination --- --- --- --- --- ---
Force and Moment *CLOAD <—— *LOAD_NODE_POINT POINT LOAD Dataset 790 <—— 7
Displacement *BOUNDARY,TYPE= <—— *BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_ FIXED DISP, --- ---
DISPLACEMENT (not 0.) MOTION DISP CHANGE
Velocity *BOUNDARY, TYPE= <—— *BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_ INITIAL VELO --- ---
VELOCITY MOTION,
*BOUNDARY_INITIAL_
VELOCITY_NODE
Acceleration *BOUNDARY, TYPE= <—— *BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_ FIXED ACCE --- ---
ACCELERATION MOTION
Temperature *BOUNDARY (DOF 11), <—— *INITIAL_TEMPERATURE_ POINT TEMP Dataset 792 <—— 7
*TEMPERATURE LOAD, INITIAL TEMP
*LOAD_THERMAL_
CONSTANT_NODE
Heat Generation --- --- --- --- --- ---
Heat Flux *CFLUX --- --- --- --- ---
Nonlinear --- --- --- --- --- ---
Transient
 7-28 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS

FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
Elemental Loads
Distributed Load *DLOAD(PX, PY, PZ, P1, <—— LOAD_BEAM_ELEMENT DISP LOADS (1,2,3) --- ---
P2)
Pressure *DLOAD (P) <—— *LOAD_SEGMENT, DISP LOADS Dataset 790 <—— 7
TRVEC *LOAD_SHELL_ELEMENT
Temperature --- --- --- --- --- ---
Heat Generation *DFLUX(BF) --- --- --- --- ---
Heat Flux *DFLUX(Sn) --- --- --- --- ---
Convection *FILM --- --- --- --- ---
Radiation *RADIATE --- --- --- --- ---

Body Loads
Translational *DLOAD (GRAV) <—— LOAD_BODY_X5 DISP LOADS (102) Dataset 790 <—— 8
Acceleration LOAD_BODY_Y
LOAD_BODY_Z
Rotational *DLOAD (ROTA) <—— --- --- Dataset 790 <——
Acceleration
5
Rotational Veloc- *DLOAD(CENT) <—— LOAD_BODY_RX DISP LOADS (103) Dataset 790 <——
ity LOAD_BODY_RY,
LOAD_BODY_RZ,
*INTIAL_VELOCITY
_GENERATION
Rotation Origin --- --- On Above ROTATION A Dataset 790 <——
Varying Transla- --- --- --- --- --- ---
tional Acceleration
Default *INITIAL CONDITIONS, <—— --- --- Dataset 792 <——
Temperature TYPE= TEMPERATURE,
VELOCITY
---
Heat Transfer *PHYSICAL CONSTANTS --- --- --- ---

Aeroelasticity
Aero Panel/Body --- --- --- --- --- ---
Aero Property --- --- --- --- --- ---
Aero Splines --- --- --- --- --- ---
Aero Control Sur- --- --- --- --- --- ---
faces
Static Aero --- --- --- --- --- ---
Flutter --- --- --- --- --- ---

Miscellaneous
CONTACT *CONTACT PAIR <—— *CONTACT, CONTACT, Dataset 164
*GAP *CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_ CONTACT NODE,
CONDUCTANCE18, GENERAL, CONTACT TABLE
*GAP RADIATION19 *CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE,
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_
SINGLE_SURFACE_MORTAR,
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_
MORTAR,
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_
MORTAR_TIED,
*CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_
NODES_TO_SURFACE_
SMOOTH,
*CONTACT_CONSTRAINT_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE,
*CONTACT_ERODING_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE,
*CONTACT_FORCE_
TRANSDUCER_PENALTY,
 Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS 7-29

ABAQUS LS-DYNA MSC.Marc I-DEAS

FEMAP
Write Read Write Write Write Read
CONTACT (cont) --- --- *CONTACT_FORMING_ --- --- ---
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE,
*CONTACT_FORMING_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE
_MORTAR
*CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_
TWO_WAY_TO_RIGID
_BODY,
*CONTACT_SINGLE_EDGE,
*CONTACT_SLIDING_
ONLY_PENALTY,
*CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_
SURFACE,
*CONTACT_TIEBREAK_
SURFACE_TO_SURFACE,
*CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_
EDGE_TO_SURFACE
*CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_
EDGE_TO_SURFACE_
BEAM_OFFSET,
*CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_
TO_SURFACE,
*DEFINE_BOX,
*DEFORMABLE_TO_RIGID
Groups --- --- --- --- --- ---
Fluid Region --- --- --- --- --- ---
Bolt Region --- --- --- --- --- ---
Bolt Preload --- --- --- --- --- ---
NonStructural --- --- --- --- --- ---
Mass Region
Rotor Region --- --- --- --- --- ---
*NSET, *NSET, *CONTROL_SOLUTION DEFINE,END OPTION,
*ELSET, *ELSET, *CONTROL_TERMINATION CONTINUE,
*SLIDE LINE, *RIGID SUR- *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_AUTO8 DYNAMIC RECOVER,
*INTERFACE, FACE *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_ MODAL SHAPE,
*RIGID SURFACE, GENERAL8 BUCKLE
*VERTEX, *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_
*PATCH SOLUTION,
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLVER,
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_
TERMINATION,
*DAMPING,_GLOBAL,
_PART_STIFFNESS
*ORIENTATION, *ORIENTA- --- CONTROL, SOLVER,
*NORMAL TION AUTO INCREMENT
AUTO STEP
*STEP, *STEP, *SET,_SOLID_LIST, PLASTICITY, --- ---
*END STEP, *END STEP, _SHELL_LIST, ELASTICITY,
*AMPLITUDE, *AMPLITUDE _PART_LIST, LARGE DISP,
*VISCO, _NODE_LIST, UPDATE,
*STEADY STATE _BEAM_LIST ELASTIC
DYNAMICS,
*MODAL
DYNAMIC,
*DYNAMIC
*HEADING, *INCLUDE *DATABASE, _BINARY, TIE, DIST LOADS, SIZ-
*STATIC, _D3PLOT, ING, FOLLOW FOR,
*FREQUENCY, _BINARYD3THDT, PROCESSOR
*BUCKLE, _NODOUT, _ELOUT, ELSO SETNAME,
*EL PRINT, _HISTORY TITLE,
*NODE PRINT, SHELL SECT
*FILE FORMAT,
*EL FILE,
*NODE FILE
 7-30 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

7.2.1 ABAQUS Translation Notes

1. Nodal coordinates are always written by FEMAP in the global Cartesian coordinate system, no matter how they
are defined in FEMAP. However, if output coordinate systems are selected, additional *TRANSFORM com-
mands are written to properly orient the degrees of freedom.
2. Beam/bar offsets are supported, but all offsets at both ends of the element must be equal, and they must not have
any components along the length of the beam. Nonstructural mass and tapered beams are likewise not supported.
Beam/bar offsets can only be applied to ABAQUS 3-D beam elements.
3. Solid elements can use coordinate systems to orient their material axes, and mass elements use coordinate sys-
tems to orient their inertial axes. The coordinate systems that you pick are written as *ORIENTATION com-
mands. You should not typically use spherical coordinate systems for this purpose because the ABAQUS
spherical degrees of freedom are different than the FEMAP degrees of freedom.
4. Rod elements do not support torsional properties or nonstructural mass.
ABAQUS link elements C1D2 and C1D2H were replaced by the TnDn series of truss elements in ABAQUS
v5.4. C1D2 and C1D2H elements will only be written if pre-version 5.4 format is checked.
5. Tube and curved tube elements do not support nonstructural mass.
6. Spring/dashpot elements are axial only - torsional springs/dampers are not supported.
FEMAP Spring/Damper elements, when the Spring/Damper property has Type set to Other (NASTRAN CROD/
CVISC) and FEMAP DOF spring elements must be defined in one of two ways. Elements that reference a prop-
erty card with a non-zero stiffness value (property written as *SPRING) will be written as ABAQUS spring ele-
ments. Elements that reference a property with zero stiffness and non-zero damping (property written as
*DASHPOT) will be written as ABAQUS dashpot elements. Both spring and dashpot properties can be speci-
fied on the same property card for export, but will be exported as two elements and two properties. DOF springs
can be used to connect any degrees of freedom.
FEMAP Spring/Damper elements, when the Spring/Damper property has Type set to CBUSH, will create a Stiff-
ness Matrix and/or a Viscous Damping Matrix with appropriate values. The values entered for Damping and
Structural Damping in the Spring/Damper property are both considered when creating the Viscous Damping
Matrix. The various Matrix elements are only supported for Linear Static and Modal Analysis. Spring/Damper
to Ground elements using the CBUSH type and will only have the top-left quarter sub-matrix written.
7. Gap friction can be specified. It is translated to GAP FRICTION ANISOTROPIC.
8. Nonstructural mass is not supported for membrane, plate or laminate elements.
9. Plot Only and Plot Planar elements are only translated if they are selected as part of a contact segment (rigid),
slide line, rigid surface or rigid body.
10. The “Options” in the Laminate Definition portion of the dialog box are not supported. All laminate plys must
be specified directly in FEMAP.
11. A mass element can be defined in one of two ways: If you define mass and inertia on the same FEMAP prop-
erty then FEMAP will create synthetic properties and elements necessary to support writing the *MASS and
*ROTARY INERTIA commands. The second method requires the user define either pure mass or pure inertia.
Elements that are defined with a Mass, Mx term will be translated to *MASS commands. Other mass elements
will be translated to *ROTARY INERTIA commands. If *MASS is written, only the Mass, Mx term is sup-
ported. If *ROTARY INERTIA is written, the Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Izx, and Iyz terms are supported, and Ixy, Izx, and
Iyz will be written with the opposite sign from what is specified in the dialog box.
12. Beam releases are only supported in the elemental rotational degrees of freedom. Also, DOF 5 in FEMAP cor-
responds to M2 in ABAQUS and DOF 6 corresponds to M3.
13. STRI35, ISL21, ISL21A, ISL31, and SS BEAM in ABAQUS STANDARD are not available for ABAQUS
6.1. They can be written by using File, Export, Analysis Model command rather than the Analysis Set Manager
(Model, Analysis).
14. SAX1 and SAX2 elements must be modeled in the XY plane. The r-direction is aligned with global X-direction
and the z-direction corresponds to the global Y-direction. The “top” surface of the shell is defined as the positive
normal direction from node 1 to 2 of the loaded element. Pressure Loads are defined on the “top” or bottom sur-
face of the shell. For Distributed loads the direction must set to Global X, Y, or Z.
 LS-DYNA Translation Notes 7-31

15. The Stress/Strain curve for plasticity is defined in FEMAP using function type 14..Stress vs. Plastic Strain.
ABAQUS requires that the first data pair of the function be the onset of plasticity (the plastic strain value must
be zero in the first pair), for correct translation you must also define the value of “Initial Yield Stress” in the
Nonlinear Material dialog box. If you require a temperature dependent Stress Strain curve you must define 3
types of functions. (Function 1, 14.. Stress vs. Plastic Strain for each temperature; Function 2, 5..Function vs
Temp. The Y value is the ID of the Stress vs Plastic Strain curve and the X value is the corresponding tempera-
ture at which that curve is valid; Function 3, Define a type 2..vs Temperature where Y is the yield stress at each
temperature X. If a yield point does not exist for all temperatures then FEMAP will interpolate this function to
find a yield stress.)
16. When a rigid element is defined using formulation “0..None - Ignore” and is not an interpolation elelment,
FEMAP will write *KINEMATIC COUPLING to the ABAQUS input file with the Independent Node specified
as the REF NODE and all dependent nodes specified with appropriate degrees of freedom. When a formulation
is specified for rigid elements, FEMAP will write them out as *MPC entries with the appropriate options.
17. All “Interpolation” elements created in FEMAP are written to ABAQUS input files as *MPC entries using the
TIE option.
18. Accessed via the ABAQUS Thermal... button found in the Define Property - GAP Element Type dialog box or
the ABAQUS tab of the Define Connection Property dialog box. When Active is enabled in the CONDUCTANCE
section, Basis is set to Clearance, and a function of type “15..Function vs. Value” is specified vs. Clearance,
Temperature, a *GAP CONDUNCTANCE entry and list of Conductance, Clearance, Temperature (k[#], d[#],
T[#]) entries are written, as needed, to define the functions in the ABAQUS input file. If Basis is set to Pressure
and a function of type “15..Function vs. Value” is specified for vs. Pressure, Temperature, a *GAP CONDUNC-
TANCE, PRESSURE entry and list of Conductance, Pressure, Temperature (k[#], P[#], T[#]) entries are written,
as needed, to define the functions in the ABAQUS input file.
19. Accessed via the ABAQUS Thermal... button found in the Define Property - GAP Element Type dialog box or
the ABAQUS tab of the Define Connection Property dialog box. When Active is enabled in the RADIATION sec-
tion and a function is specified for vs Gap Clearance, a *GAP RADIATION entry, an entry containing Emissiv-
ity A, Emissivity B (Ea, Eb), and Effective View Factor, Gap Clearance (F[#], G[#]) entries are written, as
needed, to define the functions in the ABAQUS input file.
20. When importing a *CONNECTOR SECTION entry with BUSHING Type, Spring/Damper elements will be
created along with an corresponding Spring/Damper Property with stiffness values read from the input file.
When importing a *CONNECTOR SECTION entry with BEAM Type, Spring/Damper elements will be created
along with a corresponding Spring/Damper Property with very large stiffness values specified in all directions.

7.2.2 LS-DYNA Translation Notes

1. Rod, tube, bar, and beam elements are all written as LS-DYNA BEAM elements, although with different ele-
ment formulations. Also, FEMAP will create synthetic nodes for all beam elements that do not have third node
referenced for orientation. Also, beam offsets are not currently supported for LS-DYNA.
2. Membrane, plate, laminate, plane strain, and axisymmetric elements are all written as LS-DYNA SHELL ele-
ments.
3. In general it is best to use the Other Type materials for all LS-DYNA materials since this enables you to specify
exactly what material to use instead of FEMAP selecting a material.
4. FEMAP writes constraint equations to LS-DYNA, but all coefficients for the DOFs of a given node in the con-
straint equation must have the same value.
5. Body loads can only be applied to the entire structure. Also, LS-DYNA conventions are directly opposite of
FEMAP, so FEMAP will automatically reverse the sign of the body loads. Also, functionally-dependent body
loads are supported in version 11.2 and above.
6. If the box next to Factor in the Interpolation section of the Define RIGID Element dialog box is “checked”,
FEMAP will export a *CONSTRAINED_INTERPOLATION entry. If not, FEMAP will simply export a *CON-
STRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY entry.
7. Default formulation for BAR and BEAM elements is 1..Hughes-Liu, which uses a vector to define beam orien-
tation instead of a third node. These elements use the *ELEMENT_BEAM_ORIENTATION entry.
8. All values for *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_AUTO and *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_GENERAL can be specified by
 7-32 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs

clicking the Advanced... button in the Solver Options section of the LS-DYNA Analysis Control dialog box.

7.2.3 MSC.Marc Translation Notes

1. Nodal coordinates referencing a rectangular coordinate system for their output coordinate system will be written
in global rectangular (CSys 0) and corresponding TRANSFORM is written for those not in global rectangular.
Nodes referencing a cylindrical system are written in that coordinate system with a corresponding CYLINDRI-
CAL option.
2. Type 14 element is only chosen if Hybrid Formulation is selected.
3. For many FEMAP elements, MSC.Marc has several different types for each element. To determine which ele-
ment will be used for a specific formulation, see Section 6, “Element Reference”.
4. Rigid elements connecting all 6 DOFs are translated as TYING, type 100. If all 6 DOFs are not connected, sepa-
rate TYING cards are written for each connected DOF.
 I-DEAS Translation Notes 7-33

7.2.4 I-DEAS Translation Notes

1. FEMAP writes all coordinate systems, including the global systems, to the I-DEAS file. The global systems are
renumbered, but are titled “FEMAP Global ...". If you read a universal file with these titles, FEMAP remaps
them back to the global. Likewise, if you read a universal file that contains CSys 1 or 2, they are renumbered to
valid FEMAP coordinate system IDs.
2. FEMAP can write, but not read, solid element material orientation vectors.
3. FEMAP supports a limited number of structural element properties for all element types. Any other properties
that are written in the file will be skipped without warning.
4. Only I-DEAS constant material properties are supported. If your file contains other types of materials, or mate-
rial constants that FEMAP does not support, FEMAP will still attempt to read universal file dataset 1710.
5. Constant zero displacement constraints are supported as normal nodal constraints in FEMAP. All non-zero val-
ues for constraints will be written and read assuming global rectangular coordinate system. Temperature and
time varying constraints will be skipped.
6. Only constraint equations with up to 13 terms can be read. In addition, the constant term must be zero. Only real
terms are read.
7. Time varying loads are not supported; they will be read as constants. Shell temperatures will be read as a single
nodal value using the top temperature. FEMAP only reads the loading universal datasets if they correspond to
one of the available FEMAP load types.
8. Gravity loads are skipped. Only the translational acceleration loads are read.
9. FEMAP only supports IDs up to eight digits. Any entities with IDs greater than eight digits will be lost when
reading a universal file.
10. Beam neutral axis offsets from the shear center are not supported when translating data through the universal
file. Property values are correct, but element offsets are not computed to reattach the nodes correctly. In addition,
curved beam properties do not support neutral axis offsets from the shear center. If you have any of these condi-
tions, transfer data via a Nastran file.
11. If you export a complete part from I-DEAS, coordinate systems will be written in Dataset 1961, which is not
supported. To properly transfer, simply export only the FE data.
12. If you export multiple FE models in the same universal file, only the first one will be read.
7-34 Translation Tables for Analysis Programs
8. Analysis Program Interfaces

This topic describes the FEMAP interfaces to specific analysis software. Each section describes how you can write
or read data from an analysis software program.
Analysis Software Interfaces
The following table lists the current analysis software interfaces and supported versions.

Analysis
Software Latest Supported
Section FEMAP Interfaces
or Interface File Version
Type
FEMAP neutral Section 8.1, "FEMAP • Write FEMAP neutral files -
files Neutral Files" • Read FEMAP neutral files
ABAQUS Section 8.2, • Write FEMAP model to ABAQUS ABAQUS 2020
"ABAQUS Interfaces" • Read ABAQUS model or analysis
results into FEMAP
ANSYS Section 8.3, "ANSYS • Write FEMAP model to ANSYS ANSYS 19.4
Interfaces" • Read ANSYS model or analysis
Section 8.4, "ANSYS results into FEMAP
Interfaces (Legacy)"
I-DEAS Section 8.5, "I-DEAS • Write FEMAP model to I-DEAS uni- I-DEAS 9.0
Interfaces" versal file
• Read I-DEAS model into FEMAP
LS-DYNA Section 8.6, "LS- • Write FEMAP model to LS-DYNA LS-DYNA R11.1.0
DYNA Interfaces" • Read LS-DYNA mesh or analysis
results into FEMAP
MSC Marc Section 8.8, "Nastran • Write FEMAP model to MSC.Marc MSC Marc 2005
Interfaces" • Read MSC.Marc mesh or analysis
results into FEMAP
Simcenter Nastran Section 8.8, "Nastran • Write FEMAP model to Simcenter Simcenter Nastran
(NX Nastran) Interfaces" Nastran 2010.1 (Includes all
• Read Simcenter Nastran model or versions of NX
analysis results into FEMAP Nastran)
Autodesk Nastran Section 8.8, "Nastran • Write FEMAP models Autodesk Nastran
(NEi Nastran) Interfaces" • Read models or results into FEMAP 2019 R2
MSC Nastran Section 8.8, "Nastran • Write FEMAP model to MSC.Nas- MSC Nastran
Interfaces" tran 2019.0
• Read MSC.Nastran model or analysis
results into FEMAP
MSC Patran Section 8.8.1.30, • Write FEMAP model to MSC.Patran 2.5+
"Multi-Step Nonlinear • Read MSC.Patran model or analysis
Kinematic Analysis results into FEMAP
(Simcenter Nastran
Only)"
CAEFEM Section 8.10, "Vendor-
• Write FEMAP models interface supported
CDA/Sprint2 •
Supported Interfaces" Read models or results into FEMAP by analysis program
CFDesign vendor
SINDA/G
Comma-separated Section 8.11, "Comma- • Write FEMAP results as comma-sep- -
tables Separated Tables" arated tables
• Read comma-separated tables as
results into FEMAP
 8-2 Analysis Program Interfaces

Other Analysis Program Interfaces

This table lists other available FEMAP interfaces. These interfaces are available, but are not maintained. The inter-
faces may not support more current versions of the analysis programs.

Latest
Analysis
Section FEMAP Interfaces Supported
Program
Version
ALGOR Section E.2, “ALGOR • Write FEMAP model to ALGOR ALGOR 11
Interfaces” in Appendix • Read ALGOR model or analysis
E, FEMAP User Guide results into FEMAP
online help
CDA/Sprint 1 Section E.7, “MSC/ • Write FEMAP model to CDA/Sprint 1 -
PAL2 (CDA/SPRINT 1) • Read CDA/Sprint 1 models or analysis
Interfaces” results into FEMAP
COSMIC Section E.3, “COSMIC • Write FEMAP model to COSMIC -
NASTRAN NASTRAN and ME/ NASTRAN
NASTRAN” • Read COSMIC NASTRAN models or
analysis results into FEMAP
COSMOS Section E.4, “COSMOS • Write FEMAP model to COSMOS COSMOS 1.71
Interfaces” • Read COSMOS model or analysis
results into FEMAP
CSA/NAS- Section E.5, “CSA/NAS- • Write FEMAP model to CSA/NAS- CSA/NAS-
TRAN TRAN Interfaces” TRAN TRAN 98
• Read CSA/NASTRAN model and
results into FEMAP
GENESIS Section E.6, “GENESIS • Write FEMAP model to GENESIS GENESIS 2.0
Interfaces” • Read GENESIS model or analysis
results into FEMAP
ME/NAS- Section E.3, “COSMIC • Write FEMAP model to ME/NAS- -
TRAN NASTRAN and ME/ TRAN
NASTRAN” • Read ME/NASTRAN models or anal-
ysis results into FEMAP
MSC/pal2 Section E.7, “MSC/ • Write FEMAP model to MSC/pal2 MDA/pal2 v. 4
PAL2 (CDA/SPRINT 1) • Read MSC/pal2 and CDA/Sprint 1
Interfaces”
mTAB*STRESS Section E.8, • Write FEMAP model to mTAB*
“mTAB*STRESS Inter- mTAB*STRESS STRESS 6.1
faces” • Read mTAB*STRESS model or anal-
ysis results into FEMAP
SSS/NAS- Section E.9, “SSS/NAS- • Write FEMAP model to SSS/NAS- -
TRAN TRAN Interfaces” TRAN
• Read SSS/NASTRAN model or analy-
sis results into FEMAP
STAAD Section E.10, “STAAD • Write FEMAP model to STAAD STAAD 2.1
Interfaces” • Read STAAD model or analysis
results into FEMAP
STARDYNE Section E.11, “STAR- • Write FEMAP model to STARDYNE STARDYNE
DYNE Interfaces” • Read STARDYNE model or analysis 4.41
results into FEMAP
UAI/NAS- Section E.12, “UAI/ • Write FEMAP model to UAI/NAS- UAI/NAS-
TRAN NASTRAN Interfaces” TRAN TRAN 20
• Read UAI/NASTRAN model and
results into FEMAP
weCan Section E.13, “weCan • Write FEMAP model to weCan weCan 5.0
Interfaces” • Read weCan analysis results into
FEMAP
 FEMAP Neutral Files 8-3

8.1 FEMAP Neutral Files

FEMAP neutral files provide a way for you to access all of the data in your FEMAP model. If you are using your
own analysis programs, or other programs that FEMAP does not directly support, you can write your own inter-
faces to or from the neutral file formats. Neutral files are also used to transfer information from one version of
FEMAP to another. The neutral file format is described in a document contained on your FEMAP CD. The remain-
der of this section will concentrate on how to work with neutral files in FEMAP.

8.1.1 Writing a FEMAP Neutral File

To create a FEMAP neutral file, choose the File, Export, FEMAP Neutral command. You will see the standard file
access dialog box, where you can choose the name of the file to create. The default extension is always “.NEU”.
After you choose the file, you will see the Neutral File Write Options dialog box.
Entity Options
This group of options controls what data will be written to your neutral file. By default, the first five options on the
left are on, so your entire model will be written. You can selectively skip parts of your model by turning one or
more of these options off.

The Write Additional Info option will write a list of the free faces, free edges and the views which are currently on
your screen. This information will not be read by FEMAP if you read the neutral file. It is only provided as infor-
mation for some third-party applications that work with FEMAP.
Expand Geometric Loads and Constraints will convert all geometry-based loads into nodal and elemental loads,
and all geometry-based constraints into nodal constraints. This option can be used to transfer load and constraint
data which was originally geometry-based, without actually exporting the geometry with the neutral file.
Also, by default the Full Model option is on. This indicates that the entire model will be written.
If you just want to transfer a portion of your model to the neutral file, switch to Group Only, and select a group
from the drop-down list. Only those entities that are selected in the group (and that are enabled by the options on
the left) will be translated. To work properly, you must take some care in defining the group. For example, if you
translate a group that just contains certain elements, only those elements will be written to the file. The materials,
properties, and nodes that those elements reference will not be written. If you try to read the neutral file into a new
FEMAP model, you will get errors telling you that those entities are missing. To avoid this, you must include all of
those entities in the group before you write the neutral file. One good method of doing this is to use the Group,
Node, Property, and Material on Element commands to automatically group all entities referencing the chosen ele-
ments.
File Format
These options allow you to choose the format of the neutral file that you will write.
 8-4 Analysis Program Interfaces

• Formatted files lose some precision, but are easily read, printed, and modified with any text editor. If you want
to eliminate spaces between fields in a formatted file, turn on the Minimize File Size option. Leaving this option
off makes the files a bit easier to look at with a text editor or print. Formatted files are always written in comma-
separated, free-format. Your interfaces should never assume any particular column sizes or alignment.
• You should typically write the latest version of the neutral file to save all the data contained in the model. The
only time to write older versions are if you are using an analysis program that uses an older FEMAP neutral file
format, or you are transferring a model to someone who has an earlier version of FEMAP. For these cases, you
should always write their specific neutral file version, because it will guarantee proper reading of the file. How-
ever, model data which did not exist in the previous version will obviously be lost in the translation.

8.1.2 Reading a FEMAP Neutral File

To read a neutral file, choose the File, Import FEMAP Neutral
command, and choose the appropriate file from the file access
dialog box. When OK is pressed, the Neutral File Read Options
dialog box will be displayed.
Entity Options
The first five options are identical to similar options when writ-
ing a neutral file. They allow selective skipping over certain
types of entities that are in the neutral file. Obviously, if entities
were not written to the neutral file, they will not be read, even if
these options are enabled. But if they are in the file, they can still
be bypassed by disabling these options.
Having Status Messages on, will NOT write the detailed inven-
tory of what FEMAP has read in from the neutral file to the Mes-
sages window.
Model Merge Options
One popular use for neutral files is to merge multiple compo-
nents into a single model. Since FEMAP requires unique IDs,
you could have problems merging models unless you planned
ahead and built them all with unique IDs. To avoid any ID con-
flicts, you can specify a nonzero ID Offset that will be added to
all IDs that are read from your model. The same number is
applied to all entity types.
For example, if the file you are reading has nodes and elements with IDs between 100 and 200, and you specify an
ID Offset of 1000, the resulting FEMAP model will have nodes and elements with IDs between 1100 and 1200. By
specifying a different ID Offset for each component model that you read, you can avoid any potential conflicts. If
you are unsure of the ID ranges used by your models, the List, Model Info command will provide the information
that you need

Note: All of the FEMAP translators will autoscale the model when reading a file. This ensures that all entities
that have been read are visible. When reading a neutral file, however, in addition to reading entities,
view information is read, as it may be beneficial to not autoscale the model. To prevent FEMAP from
changing the scale of any views, simply close all of the graphics windows prior to reading a neutral file.
When the translation is complete, use View, Activate to open the desired views.

Renumber Layers and Renumber Load and Constraint Sets will offset the IDs of the layers, load sets, and constraint
sets so no existing layers, load sets, or constraints sets will be overwritten.
Always Create New Output Sets will read in any output sets in the neutral file as new output sets instead of over-
writing output sets currently in the FEMAP model.
 ABAQUS Interfaces 8-5

8.2 ABAQUS Interfaces

FEMAP provides direct interfaces to the ABAQUS file formats. Topics include:
• Section 8.2.1, "Writing an ABAQUS Model with Model, Analysis"
• Section 8.2.2, "Writing an ABAQUS Model with File, Export" (Obsolete)
• Section 8.2.3, "Performing an ABAQUS Analysis"
• Section 8.2.4, "Reading ABAQUS Models"
• Section 8.2.5, "Post-processing ABAQUS Results"
For more information on the entities that this interface translates, see:
• Section 7.2, "Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS"

8.2.1 Writing an ABAQUS Model with Model, Analysis

The Model, Analysis command opens the Analysis Set Manager, which enables you to write a FEMAP model to
ABAQUS. The interface supports ABAQUS versions 5.4 and above. See table in "Analysis Software Interfaces"
for latest supported version.
If you have an version of ABAQUS older than 5.4, use the File, Export, Analysis Model command instead.

8.2.1.1 Preparing the Model for Analysis

For some types of analysis (contact, nonlinear, and dynamic), you may need to set special parameters in your
FEMAP model. For other types of analysis, you will follow the steps in Section 8.2.1.2, "Analysis Process Over-
view".
Preparing a Model for Contact Analysis
To set up a contact analysis in ABAQUS, you need to:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints and loads.
2. Define contact in FEMAP. When you define a contact property, set the ABAQUS-specific parameters. For
details, see Section 4.4, "Creating Connections and Regions"in the FEMAP Commands Manual.
3. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. Choose ABAQUS as the analysis program. For more
details, see Section 8.2.1.2, "Analysis Process Overview".
4. On the ABAQUS STEP Options dialog box, set the options for contact.
Defining Contact Pair Parameters
For each contact pair, you can use the ABAQUS APPROACH and/or SLIDE DISTANCE parameters. These
parameters can also be modified between steps. To use APPROACH and SLIDE DISTANCE, you must select
them in two places: first, when you define the contact property, and second, when you define each individual time
step. The procedure is:
1. Define the contact property: pick Model, Contact, Contact Property.
2. On the Define Property dialog box, set parameters for the property.
3. Pick the ABAQUS button.
4. On the ABAQUS Advanced Contact Property Options dialog box, pick the Max Slide Distance and/or Approach
options. These options must be selected here if you want to use them when you define the time steps.
5. Set up the ABAQUS analysis: pick Model, Analysis. Choose ABAQUS as the analysis program.
6. On the ABAQUS Step Options dialog box, pick the Approach and/or Slide Distance options. You can change
these settings in different time steps.
Preparing a Model for Nonlinear Analysis
To set up a nonlinear analysis in ABAQUS, you need to:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Define nonlinear load sets in FEMAP. Pick Model, Load, Nonlinear to set the nonlinear load set options. For
 8-6 Analysis Program Interfaces

more details, see Section 4.3.6.1, "Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis...".

3. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. Choose ABAQUS as the analysis program. For more
details, see Section 8.2.1.2, "Analysis Process Overview".
4. On the ABAQUS STEP Options dialog box, set the options for time steps.
Using Tolerance Control
You can use tolerance control for some nonlinear analysis types. For *HEAT TRANSFER, you can define
DELTMX; for *DYNAMIC analysis, you can define HAFTOL.
To define these parameters, define a load set containing nonlinear loads:

1. Pick Model, Load, Nonlinear to display the Load Set Options for Nonlinear Analysis dialog box.
2. Pick Transient for the Solution Type.
3. Enter values for Convergence Tolerances.
4. Enter a value for the Max Iterations/Step (INC=), if desired.
For more information, see Section 4.3.6.1, "Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis..." in FEMAP Commands.
Preparing a Model for Dynamic Analysis
To set up a dynamic analysis in ABAQUS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Define dynamic load sets in FEMAP. Pick Model, Load, Dynamic to set the dynamic load set options. For more
details, see Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..." in FEMAP Commands.
3. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. Choose ABAQUS as the analysis program. For more
details, see Section 8.2.1.2, "Analysis Process Overview".
4. On the ABAQUS STEP Options dialog box, set the options for dynamic options.
If you plan to perform a transient or frequency response analysis, it is important to define the dynamic analysis
options for the load set. These options control whether a direct or modal type of analysis is performed. If no solu-
tion method is chosen for the selected load case, or the solution method does not agree with the selected type (i.e.
 Analysis Process Overview 8-7

solution method is a frequency type and you chose transient), the *STEP will not be written and FEMAP will gen-
erate an error message.
ABAQUS also requires that a *FREQUENCY analysis be performed on a previous step when choosing modal
superposition. If a modal solution method is requested on the load case chosen for the *STEP and modal analysis
has not been selected on a previous *STEP, FEMAP will again generate an error message and the *STEP will not
be written.
Specifying Frequencies
When you create the load set for the dynamic analysis in ABAQUS, you can specify a function containing frequen-
cies of interest.
To do this:
1. Pick Model, Function and create a Vs. Frequency function.
2. Pick Model, Load, Dynamic to display the Load Set Options for Dynamic Analysis dialog box.
3. From the Frequencies pull-down menu, select the function. FEMAP will write the values in this table as single
frequency values to be analyzed in ABAQUS.

For more information, see Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..." in FEMAP Commands.

8.2.1.2 Analysis Process Overview

The Analysis Set Manager lets you create an analysis set, which is an input file for ABAQUS. To define an analysis
set:
1. Pick Model, Analyze to open the Analysis Set Manager dialog box.
2. Pick the first item on the list, then pick New. (You can also double-click on the item).
3. On the Analysis Set dialog box, choose 16..ABAQUS as the Analysis Program. Select the Analysis Type:
1..Static, 2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue, 3..Transient Dynamic/Time History, 4..Frequency/Harmonic Response,
7..Buckling, 9..Explicit Transient Dynamics (ABAQUS EXPLICIT), 20..Steady-State Heat Transfer, or 21..Tran-
sient Heat Transfer. These options determine which element types (structural or heat transfer) will be written,
and set the defaults for the other ABAQUS interface dialog boxes.
8-8 Analysis Program Interfaces

You can also choose to use a Linked Solver or VisQ. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section 4.11.2.1, "Run
Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Commands Manual for more informa-
tion. If no version is defined, defaults to version 10.
4. Pick Next to open the ABAQUS Model Options dialog box. (Alternatively, you can pick OK to close the Analysis
Set dialog box. From the analysis set list, you can then double-click on an option to bring up the dialog box
where the option is defined.) Select the version number and set options.
5. Pick Next to open the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box. Enter a title for the Master Requests and Con-
ditions, which correspond to the first ABAQUS *STEP.
6. Pick Next to open the ABAQUS Step Options dialog box, where you can define options (such as analysis type)
for the first step.
7. Pick Next to open the Boundary Conditions dialog box. Select the constraints, loads, and initial conditions that
apply to the first step.
8. Pick Next to open the Output Requests dialog box. Select the output types for the first step.
9. After the first step is created, you can create a case for each remaining step. Each case includes a title, ABAQUS
options, boundary conditions, and output requests. In the Analysis Set Manager, double-click on No Cases
Defined. Pick Next to work through the dialog boxes to create the case.
The graphic shows how an analysis set would be structured for an ABAQUS analysis with two steps.
 Analysis Process Overview 8-9

ABAQUS Model Options

The ABAQUS Model Options dialog box lets you specify ABAQUS version number and set options.

Versions
Pick the version option:
• Version 6.2 and Above
• Version 6.1
• Previous Versions: This option supports ABAQUS versions 5.4 -6.0x. For pre-5.4 versions of ABAQUS, use
the ABAQUS interface available through the File, Export, Analysis Models command.
Set Options
• Write All Groups as Sets: If enabled, this option writes additional *NSET and *ELSET commands to the input
file. These sets include the nodes and elements that you have selected into every group in your model; they can
be very useful if you want to edit the resulting file later. Using these sets can also compact the data specified for
the *SURFACE DEFINITION options.
• Titles as Set Names: If enabled, this option writes ABAQUS sets to the input file using your titles for these
FEMAP entities: coordinate systems, properties, materials, functions and groups. If not checked, FEMAP will
automatically assign a name to these entities.
Model Options
• Write CBUSH as Matrix: Controls how all Spring/Damper Elements which reference a Property set to Type =
CBUSH will be translated. If enabled, writes *MATRIX INPUT and *MATRIX ASSEMBLE entries. If dis-
abled, which is the default, writes *ELEMENT, TYPE = CONN3D2 entry with corresponding *CONNECTOR
SECTION, *CONNECTOR BEHAVIOR, and *CONNECTOR ELASTICITY entries.
Manual Control
Manual Control options include:
• Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface does not write the standard model section in the ABAQUS
input file. If Start and End Text have been defined, they will still be written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the model section of the input file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the model section of the input file.
 8-10 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.2.1.3 ABAQUS Master Requests and Conditions, Analysis Case

Master Requests and Conditions defines the case title for the first ABAQUS *STEP. The data you enter on the next
dialog box, ABAQUS Step Options, further defines this step.

For each different loading condition that corresponds to an ABAQUS *STEP, you must define a new analysis case
in the Analysis Set Manager. You must also define step options, boundary conditions, and output for each case.
The Analysis Case dialog box contains the same fields as the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box. These
fields include:

Title
Enter a title for the step.
Manual Control
The Manual Control options include:
• Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface does not write the standard history section in the ABAQUS
input file. If Start and End Text have been defined, they will still be written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the history section of the input file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the history section of the input file.
 ABAQUS Step Options 8-11

8.2.1.4 ABAQUS Step Options

The ABAQUS Step Options dialog box lets you define options for each case, which corresponds on an ABAQUS
step. It includes the following sections:

Analysis Type
For each case, you can specify a different analysis type, as long as the new selection is consistent with the initial
element type. For example, you can switch between the various structural standard options, or between steady-state
and transient heat transfer, but not between structural and heat transfer types, or between STANDARD and
EXPLICIT options).
The default analysis type is defined on the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box.
Time Step Options
These options are translated directly to the second card of the *STATIC, *DYNAMIC, *MODAL DYNAMIC, and
*HEAT TRANSFER (both steady state and transient) procedures. They control the way that ABAQUS will incre-
ment through the time step.
For most analyses, you need to:
• define the Time Period as the total time for the analysis
• define the Initial Time Increment for the analysis
• define the Min. Time Increment that can be used in automatic cutback
• define the Max Time Increment.
When translating for ABAQUS EXPLICIT, you should typically only define the Time Period and Scale Factor.
You can specify a Max Time Increment, but this may cause the run to fail in many cases.

Note: For some analyses, you can also use tolerance control. For the detailed procedure, see Section 8.2.1.2,
"Analysis Process Overview".

Dynamic Step Options

This information is written to the second card of the *FREQUENCY, *BUCKLE, and *STEADY STATE
DYNAMICS options.
8-12 Analysis Program Interfaces

• For the *FREQUENCY procedure, ABAQUS will extract frequencies until it reaches either the number you
specify or the Max Frequency limit.
• For a normal modes analysis, specify the Max Frequency and the No. of Eigenvalues/Points. You can also spec-
ify a Shift Frequency if you do not want to recover frequencies near 0 Hz.
• For frequency/harmonic response analyses, you can specify the number of points to be used in the analysis, as
well as the minimum and maximum frequencies. These values are translated directly to the second card of the
*STEADY STATE DYNAMICS option.
For additional frequencies, you can use a function when defining the load set options for dynamic analysis. For the
detailed procedure, see Section 8.2.1.1, "Preparing the Model for Analysis".
Amplitude
If the loads do not have an associated time history function, the Amplitude options determine how these loads will
be applied. These options are added to the *STEP command, and include:
• Default: The software bases the default step type on the analysis type.
• Step: This option applies full loading at the beginning of the step.
• Ramp: This option starts amplitude at zero, and increases the magnitude of the loads throughout the step.
Loads
Load options include:
• New: Check this option if you are defining a new, independent load case, or if this is the first step.
• Modify: Check this option if you need to apply additional loads to those already defined for a previous step, as
in a perturbation analysis.
Constraints
Constraint options include:
• New: Check this option to use a new constraint set for the step. This set is specified on the Boundary Conditions
dialog box.
• Modify: Check this option to modify the current constraint set by adding the constraint set specified in the
Boundary Conditions dialog box. Use this option if you have a current constraint set that you want to use as a
kinematic constraint set.
For modal superposition analysis types such as *MODAL DYNAMIC, and *STEADY STATE DYNAMICS (not
Direct), this option is ignored since constraints cannot be modified or created in a modal superposition method.
Furthermore, any constraints defined in a newly chosen constraint set for this *STEP will be ignored.

Note: The settings for the Constraints option will be used for all *BOUNDARY conditions in the ABAQUS
STEP, including certain FEMAP nodal loads such as enforced displacements, velocities, and accelera-
tions.

Other Options
• Write Results for Zero Increment: Check this option to write an initial condition step to the output. This can be
useful when performing multi-set animation.
• Nonlinear Geometry: Check this option to add the NLGEOM option to the *STEP command. This will account
for geometric non-linearity during this and subsequent steps, and is only relevant for stress analysis. This option
is required for models which use hyperelastic materials. FEMAP will recognize that hyperelastic materials exist
in the model, then check this option. If this option is checked when you enter FEMAP, deselecting it will almost
always cause your analysis to fail.
• Linear Perturbation: Check this option to add the PERTURBATION option to *STEP. This indicates that the
current step represents a change from the previous step (as opposed to an independent load step).
Contact Controls
These options write the *CONTACT CONTROLS card to ABAQUS with the following parameters:
• Auto Contact: This parameter writes the AUTO TOLERANCE option.
• Stabilize Contact (APPROACH): This parameter activates automatic viscous damping for a contact pair.
 ABAQUS Boundary Conditions 8-13

• Slide Distance: The SLIDE DISTANCE parameter controls the maximum slide distance for a contact pair.
The APPROACH and SLIDE DISTANCE parameters may be used for each contact pair defined in the model, and
can be modified between steps. These options must be used in conjunction with the corresponding Approach and
Slide Distance options when you define the contact property.
For the detailed procedure, see Section 8.2.1.1, "Preparing the Model for Analysis".

8.2.1.5 ABAQUS Boundary Conditions

The Boundary Conditions dialog box lets you select loads and constraints to apply to the analysis. You can apply
boundary conditions to define the first load case (in Master Requests and Conditions), as well as subsequent cases.

Primary Sets
Depending on your analysis type, you can select constraints and loads.
• Constraints: pick a constraint set for your model.
• Loads: pick a load set for your model
• Initial Conditions: pick a load set to use for initial conditions. This load set also can be used to define the fre-
quencies for calculation of Rayleigh damping in direct transient (EXPLICIT or STANDARD) analysis.
FEMAP currently supports both temperature and velocity initial conditions.
Temperatures from the selected set will be applied to your nodes as “*INITIAL CONDITIONS, TYPE = TEM-
PERATURE. If the load set contains a body load default temperature, it will be applied to all the nodes of the
model. If any nodal temperatures exist, they will then be applied to the appropriate nodes to redefine their initial
temperatures. This will produce a warning in your ABAQUS run, but ABAQUS will utilize the appropriate
temperatures. If elemental temperature loads exist in the selected load set, the software skips them and gener-
ates an error message.
8-14 Analysis Program Interfaces

You can specify velocity initial conditions in a similar manner. Any nodal velocity loads contained in the
selected load set will be written as “*INITIAL CONDITIONS, TYPE=VELOCITY”. Only temperatures and
velocities will be utilized from the selected load set. Since load sets can be selected for each *STEP, and all
loads in these sets are exported, you should create a load set containing just initial temperatures and velocities
so these conditions are not exported in a *STEP along with other loads. The body load default temperature is an
easy method to assign an initial temperature to all nodes in the model, which can then be redefined for any sin-
gle nodes utilizing nodal temperature loads.
For direct transient analysis, FEMAP will calculate the Rayleigh damping values for each material based upon
the material entry, and the frequencies input for System (W3) and Element (W4) Damping under Model, Load,
Dynamic Analysis. The type of analysis must be selected as Direct Transient for FEMAP to properly convert
the values. Alpha damping is computed from the product of W4 and the damping material value. Beta damping
is simply the damping material value divided by W3.
• Constraint Equations: pick a constraint set to define constraint equations. If you choose From Constraint Set,
FEMAP will look for constraint equations in the same set as your nodal constraints. This is a convenient way to
manage most models.
For heat transfer analyses, you will notice that constraint sets are not used. Rather, loads and constraints are both
selected from a load set. FEMAP translates nodal temperatures, in the same set as the other thermal loads, as ther-
mal constraints (boundary conditions).
Other DOF Sets
You can select constraint sets to use as various types of DOF sets.
The Kinematic Constraint Set option allows you to choose a constraint set that will be written prior to your first
analysis *STEP. The interface combines nodal constraints from the selected set with any permanent constraints on
your FEMAP nodes, and writes both. FEMAP will not write the permanent constraints unless you select a set with
this option.
In addition to nodal constraints, the kinematic constraint set can also contain constraint equations which will be
applied with *EQUATION commands. Any constraint equations that are in constraint sets that you select during
Step Definition will be ignored. They must be specified via this option.
 ABAQUS Output Requests 8-15

8.2.1.6 ABAQUS Output Requests

The Output Requests dialog box lets you identify the types of output that you want from the analysis. The type of
output available depends on the analysis program and analysis type:

You can define output requests for the master output request and subsequent cases.
Using Results Destination, you can choose to have results sent to “1..Print Only” (*.dat file and ABAQUS default
*.odb file), “2..PostProcess Only” (*.fil or *.fin file and ABAQUS default *.odb file), “3..Print and PostProcess”
(*dat file, *.fil or *.fin file, and ABAQUS default *.odb file), “7..Output Database” (User requested *.odb file), or
“8..Print and Output Database” (*.dat file and user requested *.odb file). The ABAQUS default *.odb file contains
output automatically selected by the solver, therefore you have no control over results written to this file.
For frequency analyses, you can recover output in either magnitude/phase or real/imaginary format.

8.2.2 Writing an ABAQUS Model with File, Export

Note: This method is obsolete and has been removed from the default configuration of FEMAP. If you need to
use it for any reason, you must use the File, Preferences command, click the Interfaces tab, and check
the option for “Enable Old Analysis Interfaces”. The use of this method for translation is NOT recom-
mended. Use the Model, Analysis method instead.

The File, Export, Analysis Model command allows you to write your FEMAP model into a file that can be analyzed
by ABAQUS. The interface available from this command supports ABAQUS versions 5.4-6.0x, as well as pre-5.4
versions. This interface has not been maintained for ABAQUS version 6.1. For newer versions of ABAQUS, use
the Model, Analysis command instead.

8.2.2.1 Starting to Export

There are eight options available for ABAQUS translation: (1) Static, (2) Modal Analysis, (3) Transient Dynamic/
Time History, (4) Frequency/Harmonic Response, (5) Buckling, (6) Explicit Transient Dynamics (ABAQUS
EXPLICIT) (7) Steady-State Heat Transfer, and (8) Transient Heat Transfer. These options determine which ele-
8-16 Analysis Program Interfaces

ment types (structural or heat transfer) will be written, and set the defaults for the dialog boxes to come. Later, you
will be able to change your selection if you picked the wrong one, as long as the new selection is consistent with the
initial element type (i.e. you can switch between the various structural standard options, or between steady state
and transient heat transfer, but not between structural and heat Transfer types, or between STANDARD and
EXPLICIT options).
Once you make your selection, you will see the standard file access dialog box, where you can specify the name of
the file to be created. The default file name extension for this file is “.INP”, but you can choose any name. After
choosing a file name, you will see the ABAQUS Model Write dialog box.
This dialog box allows you to specify model definition information:
Title
Here you can specify a one-line title that will be written as an ABAQUS *HEADER command. It will appear as the
page header in your print files.
Kinematic Constraint
This option allows you to choose a constraint set that will be written prior to your first analysis *STEP. Nodal con-
straints from the set that you select will be combined with any permanent constraints on your FEMAP nodes, and
both will be written. The permanent constraints will not be written unless you select a set with this option. During
the step definition phase, you can again specify constraints to be applied to the model.
In addition to nodal constraints, the kinematic constraint set can also contain constraint equations which will be
applied with *EQUATION commands. Any constraint equations that are in constraint sets that you select during
step definition will be ignored. They must be specified via this option.
Initial Conditions
This option allows you to select initial conditions for your model. It also can be used to define the frequencies for
calculation of Rayleigh damping in direct transient (EXPLICIT or STANDARD) analysis. FEMAP currently sup-
ports both temperature and velocity initial conditions.
Temperatures from the set you select will be applied to your nodes as “*INITIAL CONDITIONS, TYPE = TEM-
PERATURE”. If the load set contains a body load default temperature, it will be applied to all the nodes of the
model. If any nodal temperatures exist, they will then be applied to the appropriate nodes, redefining their initial
temperatures. This will produce a warning in your ABAQUS run, but ABAQUS will utilize the appropriate tem-
peratures. If elemental temperature loads exist in the selected load set, they will be skipped and an error message
will be printed.
Velocity initial conditions can also be specified in a similar manner. Any nodal velocity loads contained in the
selected load set will be written as “*INITIAL CONDITIONS, TYPE=VELOCITY”. Only temperatures and
velocities will be utilized from the selected load set. Since load sets can be selected for each *STEP, and all loads in
these sets are exported, you should create a load set containing just initial temperatures and velocities so these con-
ditions are not exported in a *STEP along with other loads. The body load default temperature is an easy method
for assigning an initial temperature to all nodes in the model, which can then be redefined for any single nodes uti-
lizing nodal temperature loads.
For direct transient analysis, FEMAP will calculate the Rayleigh damping values for each material based upon the
material entry, and the frequencies input for System (W3) and Element (W4) Damping under Model, Load,
Dynamic Analysis. The direct transient analysis type must be selected in order for FEMAP to properly convert the
values. Alpha damping is computed from the product of W4 and the damping material value. Beta damping is sim-
ply the damping material value divided by W3.
Overrides/Group Contact
This button allows you to access a much larger ABAQUS Model Write dialog box. This dialog box allows you to
override your current element formulations (hybrid, 5DOF plates, etc.), as well as form contact entities via groups.
All options that are available in the larger dialog box are also available by simply changing the element formula-
tion, or by using contact pairs and segments. The group contact has been made obsolete by the contact segment/pair
support. These options remain here to support old models which used this capability.
For more information, see Section 8.2.2.3, "Overrides/Group Contact".
 Starting to Export 8-17

Titles as Set Names

When this option is checked, FEMAP will use the titles given to certain entities in FEMAP when writing ABAQUS
sets to the input file. This functionality is supported for coordinate systems, properties, materials, functions and
groups.
Write All Groups As Sets
This option, if checked, will simply write additional *NSET and *ELSET commands to the file which represent the
nodes and elements that you have selected into every group in your model. These sets are not used except when a
group is selected when defining a rigid surface or contact pair. They can be very convenient if you want to edit the
resulting file later, and will also compact the data on the *SURFACE DEFINITION options by using group sets.
Rigid Surfaces...
...lets you select a FEMAP group that will be translated as a rigid surface, and the associated slave surface or con-
tact node set.
For information on how to define the group, see "Defining a Rigid Surface".
Defining a Rigid Surface
Although FEMAP does not have the equivalent of an ABAQUS rigid surface, the translator can use a FEMAP
group to create one. First, however, you must properly construct your model and the group that you will use. The
required contents of the group is different than the old contact modeling.
To successfully create a rigid surface, a FEMAP group must contain the following entities:
• Either one or more lines or arcs.
• One reference node.
• One or more FEMAP contact segments.
• Optionally, a coordinate system for 3-D contact.
• Optionally, a single contact property.
Lines and Arcs
When you select lines and/or arcs, they must form a continuous path. You must select the lines such that as you
would walk along the lines, the contact is on your left. This can be accomplished by using View Options, Tools and
View Style, Curve and Surface Accuracy to show the direction of the lines. The first line selected must be the start
of the rigid surface, and it must be in the proper direction. FEMAP will automatically form the remaining lines in
the appropriate direction.
The lines and arcs will be converted to SEGMENTS (if there are plane strain or axisymmetric elements in the
model) or a CYLINDER rigid surface. Splines may not be chosen, and if you choose arcs, they must always have
an included angle less than 180 degrees. If you need larger arcs, break the arc into pieces before you export.
Reference Node
You must also select a reference node for the rigid surface and one or more contact segments. The node can (and
usually should) be constrained in your model. The motion, or lack thereof, of this reference node will determine the
motion of the rigid body. The contact segments will be placed as the slave surfaces to the master rigid surface.
Coordinate System
A coordinate system, an optional input, is used to orient 3-D contact in space. If planar or axisymmetric elements
are present, this coordinate system is unnecessary and will be ignored. If these elements are not present, thereby
denoting a 3-D contact problem, FEMAP will use the coordinate system to determine the direction in which the 2-
D cross-section will be extruded to form an infinite 3-D rigid surface. The X axis of the coordinate system should
typically be along the length of contact, with the Y axis denoting the interface normal. The negative Z axis of the
coordinate system is used to extrude the cross section. If no coordinate system is specified, FEMAP will use the Z
axis as the default for the extrusion axis.
Contact Property
A contact property can also be included in the group to define the specific relationship between the rigid surface
and the contact segment. This property information is exported in an identical manner as that for a contact pair.
For more information, see Section 4.2.4.4, "Other Element Properties" in FEMAP Commands.
 8-18 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.2.2.2 Defining Analysis Steps

After you select the model translation options, you will see the ABAQUS STEP Definition dialog box:
It allows you to choose the various options that are available for controlling the ABAQUS analysis steps.
Load Selection
With these options, you can select the constraints and loads that will be used for the current step. In most cases,
only one step will be written at a time. However, if you need to do an analysis of many independent load cases, the
All Loads as Individual Steps option can be convenient. If it is selected, every load set in your model will be written
to a corresponding step. All other options in each step will be identical, including the single constraint set you
select. A selection of a constraint set will be ignored for modal procedures such as *MODAL DYNAMIC and
*STEADY STATE DYNAMICS (modal), which are linear perturbation steps and do not allow you to modify the
boundary conditions.

Note: All loads supported by the ABAQUS translator will be written for the load case selected. No checking
is performed to determine if the load is appropriate for the analysis type chosen. Therefore, when devel-
oping load sets, be careful to place only appropriate loads for your analysis in that load set.

Applying Loads
The Amplitude options determine how loads will be applied for loads which do not have an associated vs. Time
function defining their time histories. These options are added to the *STEP command. Step amplitude applies full
loading at the beginning of the step. Ramp amplitude starts at zero, and increases the magnitude of the loads
throughout the step. Default chooses whichever type is default for the type of analysis you are performing.
Similarly, loads can either be applied as a new load case, or to modify loads that are previously applied. If you are
defining a new, independent load case, or if this is the first step, choose New. If you are trying to apply additional
loads to those already defined for a previous step, as in a perturbation analysis, choose Modify.
Applying Constraints
Constraints can also be applied as either a new constraint set, or to modify current constraints. If you have defined
a kinematic constraint set in the Model Write dialog box with boundary conditions that you would like to remain on
your model, choose Modify. However, if you would like to define completely new constraints, choose New. For
modal superposition analysis types such as *MODAL DYNAMIC, and *STEADY STATE DYNAMICS (not
Direct), this option is ignored since constraints cannot be modified or created in a modal superposition method.
Furthermore, any constraints defined in a newly chosen constraint set for this *STEP will be ignored.

Note: This option will be used for all *BOUNDARY conditions in the ABAQUS *STEP, including certain
FEMAP nodal loads such as enforced displacements, velocities, and accelerations.

Procedure Definition
The options in this group allow you to choose the analysis type to be performed. Remember that you will not be
able to change your previous analysis type selection from structural to heat transfer types (or vice versa).
Type
Your choice here indicates the type of analysis that you want to perform. If you chose a structural STANDARD
analysis type, you may select between Static, Modes, Transient Response/Time History, SS Dynamics/Frequency
Response, Buckling, Explicit Transient Visco (Creep). If you chose a heat transfer type previously, you may choose
between Steady State and Transient Heat Transfer types. You can perform any of the current analysis types, even
different types in different steps. If you previously chose Explicit Transient Dynamics, this will be the only option
available to you.
Depending upon which analysis type you choose, some of the following options must also be specified:
Time Period and Increments
These options are translated directly to the second card of the *STATIC, *DYNAMIC, *MODAL DYNAMIC, and
*HEAT TRANSFER (both steady state and transient) procedures. They control the way that ABAQUS will incre-
ment through the time step.
For most analyses, you need to:
• define the Time Period as the total time for the analysis
 Defining Analysis Steps 8-19

• define the Initial Time Increment for the analysis

• define the Min Time Increment that can be used in automatic cutback
• define the Max Time Increment.
When translating for ABAQUS EXPLICIT, you should typically only define the Time Period and Scale Factor.
You can specify a Max Time Increment, but this may cause the run to fail in many cases.

Note: For some analyses, you can also use tolerance control. For the detailed procedure, see Section 8.2.1.2,
"Analysis Process Overview".

Number of Eigenvectors/Points, Min, Max and Shift Frequency

This information is written to the second card of the *FREQUENCY, *BUCKLE, and *STEADY STATE
DYNAMICS options.
• For the *FREQUENCY procedure, ABAQUS will extract frequencies until it reaches either the number you
specify or the Max Frequency limit.
• For a normal modes analysis, specify the Max Frequency and the No. of Eigenvalues/Points. You can also spec-
ify a Shift Frequency if you do not want to recover frequencies near 0 Hz.
• For frequency/harmonic response analyses, you can specify the number of points to be used in the analysis, as
well as the minimum and maximum frequencies. These values are translated directly to the second card of the
*STEADY STATE DYNAMICS option.
For additional frequencies, you can use a function when defining the load set options for dynamic analysis. For the
detailed procedure, see Section 8.2.1.1, "Preparing the Model for Analysis".
NonLinear Geometry
If checked, this option adds the NLGEOM option to the *STEP command. This will account for geometric non-lin-
earity during this and subsequent steps, and is only relevant for stress analysis. This option is required for models
which use hyperelastic materials. FEMAP will recognize that hyperelastic materials exist in the model, and then
check this option. If this option is checked when you enter FEMAP, deselecting it will almost always cause your
analysis to fail.
Linear Perturbation Step
If you check this option, the PERTURBATION option will be added to *STEP, indicating that the current step rep-
resents a change from the previous step (as opposed to an independent load step).
Requesting Output
Here you can choose the output that will be calculated for each step. The first choice is whether output should go to
the print file, post-processing file, or both. If you plan to use FEMAP for post-processing, you must choose the
Post option (or Both). The print frequency can also be controlled, but must be input as part of the load set for the
nonlinear analysis.
The various output types are self-explanatory.. Be aware, however, ABAQUS does not produce all types of output
for every element or analysis type. If you check an option but do not get output, that is probably the reason.
Finally, you can choose to recover either integration point or nodal output for elemental data. FEMAP will auto-
matically recover centroidal data if you request any elemental output, simply because centroidal values are required
for post-processing.

Note: The Write Zero Increment option allows you to write an initial condition step to the output which can be
useful when performing multi-set animation. This option, however, is only available in ABAQUS 5.6+.

Include File...
...allows you to input a file into the current *.inp file that you are writing to include information which may not
directly supported by FEMAP. This file will be placed at the end of the previous selection. You can select a file
before you even write a step to include information in the model portion of the *.inp file. If you would like to
include a file inside a step, simply select the step, press OK, and then press the Include File button. The file will
then be written before the *END STEP card. If All Load Sets as Individual Steps is chosen, FEMAP will only write
the file at the end of the Last STEP written. It will not include the file in all STEPs. Therefore, the Include File
option should rarely be used with the Load Sets as Individual Steps option.
 8-20 Analysis Program Interfaces

You can even use this option to define a full step for analyses not currently supported by FEMAP. If this file is
included before the first step, you define the step in your file, including the *STEP option as the first line and the
*END STEP as the last line. If steps have already been defined, you must start the file with an *END STEP to com-
plete the previous step, and then define the *STEP information. The *END STEP should not be included in this
case at the end of the file because FEMAP will automatically write this card.
Specifying Additional Analysis Steps
To write the step that you have just defined to the file, press OK. You will notice a momentary flash of the dialog
box, and the window title will change to reflect the new step number that you are defining. You can repeat this pro-
cess as many times as necessary, selecting new loads, constraints, or other options. After writing the final step (by
pressing OK), press Cancel to complete the process and close the ABAQUS input file.

8.2.2.3 Overrides/Group Contact

This section describes element formulation overrides as well as group (old) contact. It is important to note that all
element formulations can be chosen in FEMAP with the Formulation option under the Element/Property Type dia-
log box (under Model, Property), or the Modify, Update Elements, Formulation command. The options in this par-
ticular dialog box cause the element formulations to be overridden by the chosen option.

Note: Group contact (old) was made obsolete by inclusion of contact segments and pairs directly in FEMAP.

This version of the ABAQUS Model Write dialog box allows you to specify options that control how your model
will be written for both structural and heat transfer analysis types. Structural analysis types utilize all these dialog
options, while heat transfer analyses utilize only Title, Initial Conditions, and Write All Groups as Sets.
For information on the options that options are repeated from the main ABAQUS Model Write dialog box, see Sec-
tion 8.2.2.1, "Starting to Export".
Line Elements
These options allow you to choose the element formulation that will be used when FEMAP line (rod, bar, beam...)
elements are written to your ABAQUS file. FEMAP will read the types of elements in your model file, and will
either use ABAQUS planar (2-D) beams, trusses, etc. if plane strain or axisymmetric FEMAP element types are
present, or (3-D) beams and trusses in space if plane strain or axisymmetric element types are not present.
If you choose the Hybrid Elements option, FEMAP will choose the appropriate hybrid type (T3D2H, B31H,
PIPE31H...). If you check Cubic Beams, FEMAP bar and beam elements will be translated to B23 or B33 (B23H or
B33H with hybrid selected), instead of the B21, B31 elements. FEMAP rod elements which where formerly trans-
lated as C1D2, C1D2H elements are now translated as T2D2, T2D2H, T3D2, and T3D2H ABAQUS Truss ele-
ments. The C1D2 series will only be output if pre-Version 5.4 Format is checked.

Note: When performing an axisymmetric or plane stress/strain analysis, all beam orientation vectors will be
written as (0, 0, -1), the negative Z axis, as required by ABAQUS. Be careful to define your inertias
based on this orientation.

Shell and Membrane Elements

These options allow you to choose the element formulation that will be used when FEMAP planar/shell (mem-
brane, plate, laminate,...) elements are written to your ABAQUS file. Each option has specific effects on the writ-
ing of certain elements. These options are each discussed briefly below. Linear triangular elements have the most
available options due to the capability of ABAQUS to use numerous degenerate quadrilaterals as triangular ele-
ments. For this reason, a summary table is provided for the FEMAP triangular planar/shell element in the following
table

pre-
ABAQUS Reduced Thick Flat
5 DOF Version5.4
Element Integration Shell Triangles
Format
STRI35 OFF N/A OFF OFF N/A
STRI3 OFF N/A OFF ON N/A
S3R OFF N/A ON N/A N/A
 Overrides/Group Contact 8-21

pre-
ABAQUS Reduced Thick Flat
5 DOF Version5.4
Element Integration Shell Triangles
Format
S4R ON OFF N/A N/A OFF
S4R5 ON ON N/A N/A N/A
S4RF ON OFF N/A N/A ON
• The Thick Shell Behavior option has an effect on linear triangular, linear quadrilateral, and parabolic quadrilat-
eral elements. If Reduced Integration is off and Thick Shell Behavior is on, linear triangles will be written as
S3R elements instead of STRI3 or STRI35. Quadrilateral linear elements will be written as S43 elements with
“Thick Shell” on, instead of S4R5 or S4RF elements, and parabolic quadrilateral elements will be written as
S8R instead of S8R5 elements.
• Reduced Integration controls the writing of triangular elements as degenerate quadrilateral elements. It has no
effect on true quadrilateral elements. If Reduced Integration is selected, all triangular elements will be written
as degenerate quadrilaterals (S4R, S4R5, or S4RF, and S8R5). If this option is not selected, triangular elements
will be written (S3R, STRI3, or STRI35, and STRI65).
• Choosing the 5 DOF Elements option enables you to choose S4R5 elements instead of S4R or S4RF elements,
as well as S8R5 elements instead of S8R elements for parabolic quadrilaterals. The final option in this section,
Flat Triangles, enables you to write linear triangular elements as STRI3 elements instead of STRI35 elements.
This option has no impact unless neither the Reduced Integration nor Thick Shell options are chosen.

Note: The S4RF elements were combined with the S4R elements in ABAQUS v5.4. These elements are only
written when pre-Version 5.4 Format is checked, and neither the 5-DOF Elements nor Thick Shell
options are selected. If neither of these options are chosen and pre-Version 5.4 Format is not checked,
linear quadrilateral elements will be written as S4R elements.

In addition to choosing the element formulations, you can also set the number of integration points to be used with
planar elements. If you leave this value blank, nothing is written and the defaults for each element type are used. If
you specify a value, it is written to the *SHELL SECTION commands.
Solid Continuum Elements
Just like for line and shell elements, checking Hybrid Elements tells FEMAP to select elements that use a hybrid
formulation (CPxxH, CExxH, CAXxxH and C3DxxH). In addition, you can select from the Standard, Incompati-
ble Modes and Reduced Integration formulations. Incompatible Modes chooses the “I” series (CPxxI, C3DxxI...)
elements, when available. Reduced Integration chooses the “R” series (CPxxR, C3DxxR...) elements, when avail-
able.
You may also choose special modified contact elements for parabolic triangular plane stress/plane strain elements
(CPx6M...) and parabolic solid tetrahedral (C3D10M and C3D10MH) elements. These elements are only available
in ABAQUS v5.6 and higher
Since FEMAP has no 2D plane stress element, you must use plane strain elements, even when trying to model
plane stress problems. Then, to represent plane stress, check the Plane Strain as Plane Stress option, and FEMAP
will use CPSxx elements instead of CPExx elements.
Pre-Version 5.4 Format
This option allows you to select a format for the input file that is compatible with versions prior to ABAQUS 5.4.
This option generates changes involving S4RF elements, truss elements, membrane elements, rigid surfaces, and
rigid bodies,. The element S4RF was combined with element S4R in version 5.4 and is only written if pre-Version
5.4 Format is checked. Truss elements (TnD2 series) now replace the C1D2 series linear link elements. Membrane
elements now have their own *MEMBRANE property card for ABAQUS version 5.4. If the pre-Version 5.4 for-
mat is selected, *SOLID SECTION is used as the property option for membrane elements.
If the Pre-Version 5.4 Format button is not checked, rigid surfaces and rigid bodies can be modeled with the
ABAQUS *CONTACT PAIR approach. If this button is selected, rigid bodies and contact pairs should not be used,
and special interface elements will be generated to model contact with rigid surfaces.
For more information, see "Defining a Rigid Surface".
 8-22 Analysis Program Interfaces

Rigid Surfaces...
...lets you select a FEMAP group which will be translated as a rigid surface, and the associated slave surface, con-
tact node set, or interface elements.
For more information, see "Defining a Rigid Surface".
Slide Lines...
...lets you select a FEMAP group which will be translated as a slide line, and the associated interface elements.
For more information, see "Defining a Slide Line".
Rigid Bodies...
...lets you select a FEMAP group which will be translated as a rigid body, and the associated slave surface or con-
tact node set.
For more information, see "Defining a Rigid Body".
Contact Pairs...
Pressing this button will allow you to utilize FEMAP groups to define a contact pair.
For more information, see "Defining a Contact Pair".
Important Note Regarding Group Contact Modeling
You should review the restrictions concerning contact modeling in ABAQUS. FEMAP performs many checks in
an attempt to prevent you from violating these rules. Even though these checks are quite extensive, they are not all
inclusive. Therefore, you should carefully define the elements in the surfaces of the contact pair.
In addition, FEMAP has three restrictions in addition to those maintained by ABAQUS:
• Structural and continuum elements may not be included in the same slave surface. If this type of contact is
required, two separate contact situations must be created.
• Structural elements will automatically be written with their positive normal (SPOS or S1) as the contact side.
You must create the model in this manner, or reverse the normal direction using either Modify, Update Element,
Reverse or Tools, Check, Normals commands. If contact must be maintained on both sides of these elements,
you must either create two sets of elements with opposite normals, or edit the input file, changing the appropri-
ate SPOS (or S1) to SNEG (or S2).
• Continuum elements must be a subset of the exposed surfaces of the model.
FEMAP will also utilize the ABAQUS defaults for sliding type and trimming. Finite sliding will be used as the
default, while small sliding will be chosen when finite sliding is not available (such as contact between 3-D
deformable bodies). Automatic trimming will also be utilized for slave surfaces containing continuum elements.
Master surfaces with continuum elements will not be trimmed. You must modify these options manually if differ-
ent options are required.
Defining a Rigid Surface
Although FEMAP does not have the equivalent of an ABAQUS rigid surface, the interface can use a FEMAP
group to create one. First, however, you must properly construct your model and the group that you will use. The
entities of the group will differ based upon the Pre-Version 5.4 Format button.
ABAQUS v5.4 or Above (Contact Pair Approach)
To successfully create a rigid surface, a FEMAP group must contain the following entities:
• either one or more lines or arcs, or a surface
• one reference node
• one or more FEMAP elements or nodes defining the slave surface
• optionally, a single GAP property
Lines, Arcs, and Surfaces
If you select lines and/or arcs, they must form a continuous path. You must select the lines such that as you would
walk along the lines, the contact is on your left. This can be accomplished by using View Options, Tools and View
Style, Curve and Surface Accuracy to show the direction of the lines. The first line selected must be the start of the
 Overrides/Group Contact 8-23

rigid surface, and it must be in the proper direction. FEMAP will automatically form the remaining lines in the
appropriate direction.
The lines and arcs will be converted to a segment (if there are plane strain or axisymmetric elements in the model)
or CYLINDER rigid surface. Splines may not be chosen, and if you choose arcs, they must always have an
included angle less than 180 degrees. If you need larger arcs, break the arc into pieces before you export.
If you select a FEMAP surface in the group, it will be converted to a rigid BEZIER surface. The number of surface
divisions that are set for the display of the surface will be used to create the VERTEX and PATCH commands for
the BEZIER surface. If you want a better surface definition, just increase the number of surface divisions. Although
the BEZIER surface with VERTEX and PATCH options are no longer documented in ABAQUS v5.4 and higher,
they are still available. However, for most contact problems, it is recommended that the RIGID BODY approach be
utilized.
Reference Node
You must also select a reference node for the rigid surface. This node can (and usually should) be constrained in
your model. The motion, or lack thereof, of this reference node, will determine the motion of the rigid body.
Elements and Nodes
The final required contents of the group are either one or more elements or nodes defining the slave surface. If ele-
ments are present, FEMAP will attempt to write these elements as a slave surface. If no elements are in the group,
FEMAP will assume that the slave surface is defined with a contact node set. The first node selected in the group is
always used as the reference node for the rigid surface. This node will not be written as part of the contact node set.
All nodes selected in this group after the first (reference) node will be written as part of the contact node set.
FEMAP will only write a contact node set if there are no elements contained in the group.
GAP Property
The GAP property is used to control the *SURFACE INTERACTION command. Out-of-plane thickness or cross-
sectional area will be written on the *SURFACE INTERACTION card if specified in the selected GAP property.
Friction properties can also be specified (including ANISOTROPIC) on the GAP property, and will be written on
the *FRICTION command. If you are performing 3-D contact with plates, you will also have to supply an interface
normal on the GAP property so FEMAP can properly orient the 3-D surface.
pre-ABAQUS v5.4 (Interface Element Approach)
To successfully create a rigid surface, a FEMAP group must contain the following entities:
• either a surface, or one or more lines and/or arcs
• one or more FEMAP line or plane plot-only elements
• one reference node
• optionally, a single GAP property
Surfaces, Lines, and Arc
If you select a FEMAP surface in the group, it will be converted to a rigid BEZIER surface. The number of surface
divisions that are set for the display of the surface will be used to create the VERTEX and PATCH commands for
the BEZIER surface. If you want a better surface definition, increase the number of surface divisions. If instead you
choose lines and/or arcs, they must form a continuous path. They will be converted to a SEGMENT (if there are
plane strain or axisymmetric elements in the model) or CYLINDER rigid surface. Splines may not be chosen, and
if you choose arcs, they must always have an included angle less than 180 degrees. If you need larger arcs, break
the arc into pieces before you translate.
Plot-Only Elements
In addition to the geometry, you must create and select plot-only elements along the edge/face where you want to
check for contact. These are then translated to IRSxx interface elements.
Reference Node
Next, you must select a reference node for the rigid surface. This node can (and usually should) be constrained in
your model. It is referenced by all of the interface elements.
 8-24 Analysis Program Interfaces

GAP Property
The GAP property is used to control the *INTERFACE command. If you specify a coefficient of friction (Y direc-
tion) on this GAP property, it will be written as a *FRICTION command.
Defining a Slide Line
The process to define a slide line is very similar to that for a rigid surface. In this case, however, the group must
contain:
• one or more plot-only line elements
• an ordered series of nodes to represent the slide line
• a GAP property
The plot-only line elements are converted to interface (ISLxx) elements, and the nodes are written as the slide line.
You must be careful to select these items into the group in the proper order. FEMAP translates them in the order
that you select them.
Just as for rigid surfaces, the GAP property is used for friction on the *INTERFACE command.

Note: When selecting items into the group, you should always use the “ID” rules. Selections using other
methods do not allow FEMAP to determine the proper ordering for the output and will be ignored.

Defining a Rigid Body

Similar to rigid surface contact, FEMAP will allow you to create ABAQUS rigid bodies by selecting a FEMAP
group. The procedure is very similar to rigid surface definition, except one or more FEMAP line or plane plot-only
elements must be contained in the group to define the rigid body, instead of lines and arcs.
To successfully create a rigid body, a FEMAP group must contain:
• one or more FEMAP line or plane plot-only elements
• one reference node
• one or more FEMAP elements or nodes defining the slave surface
• optionally, a single GAP property
Plot-Only Elements
The plot-only elements are utilized to define the rigid body. Either line or plane plot-only elements must be
selected, but not both. Planar elements will be translated to R3D3 and R3D4 elements, while line elements will be
translated to R2D2 (if plane strain elements are present), RAX2 (if axisymmetric elements are present), or RB3D2
elements. These elements must be created such that the positive faces of the element define the contact surface.
FEMAP will automatically choose the positive normal to define the master contact surface. All plot-only elements
contained in the group will be written as rigid elements, referencing the rigid body.
Reference Node
The reference node, slave surface, and GAP property are all chosen similar to the rigid surface definition.
For more information, see "Defining a Rigid Surface".
Rigid Elements
Rigid elements can only be used in one rigid body definition. However, this rigid body can be put in contact with
multiple surfaces. To create rigid body contact between several surfaces and the same rigid body, define a group for
each contact pair, and select the same reference node and plot-only elements in each group. You must take care to
select the same plot only elements because FEMAP will assume a new rigid body is being defined if the element
selection is not identical, and errors will result. Once the plot-only elements and reference node are appropriately
selected, you may then select different elements or nodes in each group to define different slave surfaces. FEMAP
will generate the slave surfaces and put them in contact with the rigid body.
Defining a Contact Pair
FEMAP also has the capability to define contact pairs between deformable elements. To successfully create a con-
tact pair, you must create:
• one group containing the elements of the master surface
 Performing an ABAQUS Analysis 8-25

• a second group containing the elements or nodes of the slave surface

• optionally, a GAP property containing width/area and/or friction information
When you select the Contact Pair button, you will be prompted to input the group of the master surface, followed
by a prompt for the slave surface, and finally the property to define the *SURFACE INTERACTION and *FRIC-
TION options.

8.2.3 Performing an ABAQUS Analysis

Once you have written the ABAQUS input file, you can analyze it with ABAQUS as you would with any other
data file.
Alternatively, if you are running both FEMAP and ABAQUS on a Windows operating system, you can have
FEMAP automatically launch ABAQUS, run the solution, and recover the results. In this case, before you start
FEMAP, you must first define an environment variable in Windows. Name the variable ABAQUS_EXE, give it a
value equal to the complete file/path name of the ABAQUS executable. For example:
ABAQUS_EXE = c:\abaqus\v61\abaqus.exe

Once this variable is set, FEMAP will automatically launch ABAQUS when you press Analyze from the Analysis
Set Manager, or once the input file is written from File, Export. FEMAP will monitor the analysis and return
results when it is finished.

8.2.4 Reading ABAQUS Models

Just as you can translate a FEMAP model to ABAQUS, you can also read a ABAQUS model into FEMAP. From
the ABAQUS input file (*.inp), FEMAP can read node and element connectivity along with most material, prop-
erty, load, constraint and contact definitions. FEMAP can also read the *INCLUDE command, which references
external files that include other model data.
To read in a model, pick File, Import, Analysis Model, then choose the input file you want to read. If * INCLUDE
commands are present in the file, FEMAP will also read those files specified in the path.

8.2.5 Post-processing ABAQUS Results

When you have completed your ABAQUS analysis, you can load results into FEMAP for post-processing. You
must also start with a FEMAP model that corresponds to the ABAQUS analysis.
FEMAP reads the ASCII formatted ABAQUS Post File (*.FIL). You must include a *FILE FORMAT, ASCII com-
mand, along with *NODE FILE, *EL FILE, and *CONTACT FILE commands in your model to produce this file.
As long as you built your model in FEMAP, and chose the Post option when you translated, these commands will
be added automatically.

Note: If you have an ABAQUS EXPLICIT binary results file (*.res), you will need to run the ABAQUS con-
vert utilities to convert it to a *.fil file. This, however, is still a binary file, which must then be converted
to an ASCII file (which will have the extension *.fin) using utilities provided with ABAQUS.

To load the results, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command, and select ABAQUS. FEMAP will display
the standard file access dialog box so you can choose the file that you want to read. Before reading data from a file,
you will see a brief description of the file in the Messages window, and you will be asked to confirm that this is the
file you want to read. FEMAP will then read the output data.
Output for Post-processing
The formats and contents of the ABAQUS files are described in the ABAQUS User’s Manual. From the Post file,
FEMAP will read nodal displacements, velocities, accelerations, reaction forces, and loads. In addition, FEMAP
reads elemental temperatures, stress components, stress invariants, section forces and moments, strain energy, and
total strain components. These output types are supported data. FEMAP also has the capability to read many
ABAQUS output types as unsupported data, including nodal temperatures, nodal heat fluxes, and elemental heat
fluxes.
From the values that are read, FEMAP will also compute magnitudes of the nodal values (total translation, total
rotation, etc.). Likewise, if they were not read from the file, FEMAP computes principal, max shear, mean, and
Von Mises stresses whenever possible.
 8-26 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.3 ANSYS Interfaces

FEMAP provides direct interfaces to the ANSYS PREP7 and post-processing file formats. You can write a
FEMAP model to the ANSYS PREP7 format for analysis, read an existing ANSYS model, or read analysis results
for post-processing.
Topics in this section include:
• Section 8.3.1, "Writing an ANSYS Model with Model, Analysis"
• Section 8.3.2, "Performing an ANSYS Analysis"
• Section 8.3.3, "Reading ANSYS Models"
• Section 8.3.4, "Reading ANSYS Analysis Results"
For more information on the entities that are translated, see:
• Section 7.1, "Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran"

8.3.1 Writing an ANSYS Model with Model, Analysis

The Model, Analysis command opens the Analysis Set Manager, which enables you to write a FEMAP model to
ANSYS. The interface supports ANSYS versions 4, 5.x -19.0.
This section includes the following topics:
• Section 8.3.1.1, "General Analysis Process Overview"using the Analysis Set Manager
• Section 8.3.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis"- guidelines on preparing for each analysis type
• Section 8.3.1.3, "Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters" - descriptions of the ANSYS interface dialog boxes

8.3.1.1 General Analysis Process Overview

The Analysis Set Manager lets you create an analysis set, which is an input file for ANSYS. To define analysis set:
1. Pick Model, Analyze to open the Analysis Set Manager dialog box.
2. Click New button or double-click “No Analysis Sets Defined”.
3. On the Analysis Set dialog box, choose 5..ANSYS as the Analysis Program:

Select the Analysis Type: “1..Static”, “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue”, “3..Transient Dynamic/Time History”,
“4..Frequency/Harmonic Response”, “6..Random Response”, “7..Buckling”, “10..Nonlinear Static”, and
“12..Nonlinear Transient Response”.
These options determine which element types (structural or heat transfer) will be written, and set the defaults
for the other ANSYS interface dialog boxes. (For some analysis types, you will see some additional dialog
boxes. See Section 8.3.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis".)
 Preparing the Model for Analysis 8-27

You can also choose between Linked Solver or VisQ. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section 4.11.2.1, "Run
Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in FEMAP Commands Manual for more information.
4. Click Next to open the ANSYS Executive and Solution Control dialog box (Alternatively, you can pick OK to
close the Analysis Set dialog box, highlight an option in the tree structure in the Analysis Set Manager, then
click the Edit button to display a particular dialog box. In this case, highlight “Command Line Arguments”,
then click Edit). Contains information about current ANSYS Version setup to run with FEMAP and allows you
to specify a number of command line arguments. See "ANSYS Command and Model Control".
5. Click Next to open the Ansys Analysis Case dialog box (Alternatively, highlight “Master Requests and Condi-
tions”, then click Edit). When accessed from the Master Requests and Conditions branch of the tree structure in
the Analysis Set, these are the default boundary conditions. Enter a title. See "Master Requests and Conditions
and Cases (Ansys Analysis Case)".
6. Click Next to open the ANSYS Load Step dialog box (Alternatively, highlight “Boundary Conditions”, then click
Edit). Select the constraints and loads, along with optionally specifying other options. See "Boundary Condi-
tions (ANSYS Load Step)".
7. For some analysis types, clicking Next will display additional dialog boxes, which are used to enter specific
information the ANSYS solver requires to run that type of analysis (Alternatively, highlight “Time Step
Options”, “Modal Options”, “Buckling Options”, “Dynamics Options”, “Harmonics Options”, “Nonlinear
Options”, or “Spectrum Options” and click Edit). See "Time Step Options (ANSYS Time Step Options)",
"Modal Options (ANSYS Modal Analysis Options)", "Buckling Options (ANSYS Buckling Analysis
Options)", "Dynamics Options (ANSYS Transient Dynamics Options)", "Harmonics Options (ANSYS Har-
monic Analysis Options)", "Nonlinear Options (ANSYS Nonlinear Options)", and "Random/Spectrum Options
(ANSYS Random Vibration Analysis Options)"
8. If clicking Next displayed analysis-specific dialog boxes, clicking Next will eventually display the ANSYS Out-
put Requests dialog box, which is used to select (Alternatively, highlight “Output Requests”, then click Edit).
See "Output Requests (ANSYS Output Requests)".
9. For most analysis types, you can create cases or subcases. Each case includes a title, options (depending on
analysis type), and boundary conditions. In the Analysis Set Manager, click on No Cases Defined. Pick Next to
work through the dialog boxes to create the case. See "Cases".
For more information, see also:
• Section 8.3.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis" for how to work with each analysis type
• Section 8.3.1.3, "Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters" for descriptions of ANSYS interface dialog boxes
8.3.1.2 Preparing the Model for Analysis
This section describes the steps in preparing for each analysis type. It includes these topics:
Static, Modal, and Buckling Analyses:
• "Preparing for a Static Analysis"
• "Preparing for a Normal Modes/Eigenvalues Analysis"
• "Preparing for Buckling Analysis"
Dynamic Analyses:
• "Preparing for a Transient Dynamic/Time History Analysis"
• "Preparing for a Frequency/Harmonic Response Analysis"
• "Preparing a Random Response Analysis"
• "Notes on ANSYS Dynamic Analyses"
Heat Transfer Analyses:
• "Preparing for Steady-State and Transient Heat Transfer Analysis"
Nonlinear Analysis and Other Topics:
• "Preparing for Contact Analysis"
• "Preparing for a Nonlinear Static Analysis"
 8-28 Analysis Program Interfaces

• "Preparing for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis"

• "Special Cases"
For more information, see also:
• Section 8.3.1.1, "General Analysis Process Overview" for information on how to use the Analysis Set Manager
• Section 8.3.1.3, "Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters" for descriptions of ANSYS interface dialog boxes
Preparing for a Static Analysis
To set up a static analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints and loads.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. As part of this process, you can define cases to per-
form multiple analyses with different combinations of load and/or constraint sets.
Preparing for a Normal Modes/Eigenvalues Analysis
To set up a normal modes/eigenvalues analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. As part of this process, you can define cases to per-
form multiple analyses with different combinations of load and/or constraint sets. You can also control the
method, number of modes, and/or frequency range with the ANSYS Modal Analysis Options dialog box.
(ANSYS command MODOPT)
Preparing for Buckling Analysis
To prepare for a buckling analysis:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply one constraint set and one load set.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. Use the ANSYS Buckling Analysis Options dialog
box to select a modal method and enter the number of buckle modes (ANSYS command BUCOPT).
Preparing for a Transient Dynamic/Time History Analysis
To set up a transient dynamic/time history analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints and loads.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. If Modal is selected in the ANSYS Transient
Dynamics Options dialog box (ANSYS commands TRNOPT and TINTP), you will be able to define additional
parameters in the ANSYS Modal Analysis Options dialog box. These parameters include method, number of
modes to extract, and/or the lowest and highest frequencies (ANSYS command MODOPT).
Preparing for a Frequency/Harmonic Response Analysis
To set up a frequency/harmonic response analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints and loads.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. You can define solution frequencies and output
options using the ANSYS Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box (ANSYS commands HROPT, HARFRQ, and
HROUT). If Modal is selected in the ANSYS Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box, you will be able to define
additional parameters in the ANSYS Modal Analysis Options dialog box. These parameters include method,
number of modes to extract, and/or the lowest and highest frequencies (ANSYS command MODOPT).
Preparing a Random Response Analysis
To set up a random response analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints and loads.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. Use the ANSYS Modal Analysis Options dialog box
to select a modal method and other parameters for a modal analysis (ANSYS command MODOPT). Now, use
the ANSYS Random Vibration Options dialog box to specify Number of Modes and if Element Results are
desired (ANSYS command SPOPT); a FEMAP Function ID to use as the PSD function, PSD Type of the PSD
function, and type of Mode Factors (ANSYS commands PSDUNIT, PSDFREQ, PSDVAL, and PSDFACT); if
Mass is “Lumped” or “Coupled”; damping values, including Mode Ratio; and options and values to used for
 Preparing the Model for Analysis 8-29

Mode Combination (ANSYS command PSDCOM).

Notes on ANSYS Dynamic Analyses
This topic reviews the limitations on transient and frequency response loading conditions in ANSYS. Loads on the
same node or elemental face must have the same time history (transient) or same phase (frequency). If they do not,
FEMAP will write the loading conditions assuming the last time history/phase, and you will most likely get results
for a different loading condition than desired.
Preparing for Steady-State and Transient Heat Transfer Analysis
Steady-State and Transient Heat Transfer are only available via the “Legacy” translator. See "Preparing for Steady-
State Heat Transfer Analysis (Legacy)" and "Preparing for Transient Heat Transfer Analysis (Legacy)".
Preparing for Contact Analysis
Surface-to-surface contact is defined in ANSYS using a combination of contact surface and target segment ele-
ments. ANSYS looks for contact only between contact surfaces and target segments that share the same real con-
stant set. Contact can be used in nonlinear analysis while glued contact (“bonded”) can be used in several different
types of analysis, including static analysis. To define contact for ANSYS:
• Use the Connect, Connection Property command to potentially define a Friction Coefficient, along with various
Real Constants and/or Contact KEYOPTs on the ANSYS tab.
• Define the “target segments” using the Connect, Connection Region command. The target segments
(TARGE169 (2-D) and TARGE170 (3-D)) can be either rigid or deformable. When defining a rigid target, be
sure to only use line elements or Face 1 of a plate element.
• Define the “contact surfaces” using the Connect, Connection Region command. The contact surfaces can be 2-
D (CONTA171 and CONTA172) or 3-D (CONTA173 and CONTA174), and must be deformable.
• Model a contact pair using the Connect, Connector command. The dialog box asks for a Master (Target) (the
target segment) and a Slave (Source) (the contact surface), as well as a Property (set of friction, real constant,
and KEYOPT values which controls contact behavior between each target segment and contact surface).
For more information about these commands, see Section 4.4, "Creating Connections and Regions"in FEMAP
Commands.

Hint: To create a rigid entity, use line elements for 2-D analysis and plate elements with the element nor-
mal direction facing the contact for 3-D analysis.

Preparing for a Nonlinear Static Analysis

To set up a nonlinear static analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. As part of this process, you can define cases to per-
form multiple analyses with different combinations of load and/or constraint sets. Setup time-stepping for the
Master Case or any subcase using the ANSYS Time Step Options dialog box and/or nonlinear options, including
activating Nonlinear Geometry to enable large deformations, in the ANSYS Nonlinear Options dialog box
(ANSYS commands NROPT, CNVTOL, NLGEOM, ARCLEN, LNSEARCH, and PRED).
Preparing for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
Preparing for nonlinear transient analysis is nearly identical to transient dynamic/time history analysis (see "Pre-
paring for a Transient Dynamic/Time History Analysis"), and you can also specify nonlinear options, including
activating Nonlinear Geometry enable large deformations, in the ANSYS Nonlinear Options dialog box (see "Pre-
paring for a Nonlinear Static Analysis").
Special Cases
Depending on the contents of your model, you may see additional questions or warnings as the file is translated.
For example, ANSYS requires certain IDs, especially for coordinate systems. If your model has entities which are
outside of the allowable ID range, FEMAP will ask if you want to renumber prior to translating.
Likewise, axisymmetric and other 2-D elements must lie in the global XY plane for ANSYS. If you have built your
model in a different global plane, FEMAP will ask if you want to automatically realign it to the XY plane. FEMAP
can only “flip” between global planes. You should never build an axisymmetric model in a skewed plane. For
axisymmetric models, you will also have an opportunity to specify a scale factor for loads. This factor is normally
 8-30 Analysis Program Interfaces

1.0, but can be adjusted depending on whether you specified loads on a per radian or per revolution (360 degrees)
basis. This is especially important since the required conventions change between ANSYS Revision 4.4 and 5.0.
8.3.1.3 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters
To set up an ANSYS analysis, you will work through the following dialog boxes:
• "ANSYS Executive and Solution Control (Legacy)"
• "Master Requests and Conditions and Cases (Ansys Analysis Case)"
• "Boundary Conditions (ANSYS Load Step)"
• "Time Step Options (ANSYS Time Step Options)"
• "Modal Options (ANSYS Modal Analysis Options)"
• "Buckling Options (ANSYS Buckling Analysis Options)"
• "Dynamics Options (ANSYS Transient Dynamics Options)"
• "Harmonics Options (ANSYS Harmonic Analysis Options)"
• "Random/Spectrum Options (ANSYS Random Vibration Analysis Options)"
• "Nonlinear Options (ANSYS Nonlinear Options)"
For information on set up for each analysis type, see Section 8.3.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis"
ANSYS Command and Model Control
The ANSYS Command and Model Control dialog box contains information about current ANSYS Version setup
to run with FEMAP and allows you to specify a number of command line arguments.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-31

ANSYS Version
The version number displayed relates to the solver executable specified for Ansys on the Solvers tab of the File,
Preferences command or by the ANSYS_EXE environment variable. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section
4.11.2.1, "Run Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Commands Manual for more
information. If no version is defined, defaults to version 10.
ANSYS Product
Allows choice of a particular ANSYS Product to launch, which may be useful to select only the license(s) needed
for an analysis. Choose from 0..Default, 1..ANSYS Multiphysics, 2..ANSYS Mechanical, 3..ANSYS Structural,
4..ANSYS Mechanical Emag, or 5..ANSYS Mechanical CFL-Flo. Includes “-p” on command line.
Command Line
These options are added to the command line when ANSYS is launched automatically by FEMAP. This is accom-
plished by setting up ANSYS as a “Linked Solver” (see Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" in FEMAP Commands manual).
Jobname
When specified, is the initial “jobname”, a name assigned to all files generated by the program for a specific model.
Includes “-j (specified jobname)” on command line. Has a maximum length of 32 characters and spaces should be
avoided. If not specified, assumes file name is the “jobname”.
Output Directory
When specified, allows you set a location for output to be placed. The “...” icon button can be used to browse to a
directory location. Includes “-dir (specified output directory)” on command line. If not specified, uses default out-
put directory for FEMAP.
Database Memory (MBytes)
When specified as a positive value, defines the initial memory allocation for the database. If specified as a negative
value, defines a fixed memory allocation for the database throughout the run. Includes “-db (value)” or “-db (-
value)” on command line. If no value is specified, “-db” is omitted and default of 1024 MB is used.
Workspace Memory (MBytes)
When specified as a positive value, defines the initial overall memory allocation. If specified as a negative value,
defines a fixed overall memory allocation throughout the run. Includes “-m (value) or “-m (-value)” on command
line. If no value is specified, “-m” is omitted and default of 2048 MB is used.
Other Command Line Options
Allows you to specify other command line arguments. Consult ANSYS documentation for more information.
List Input File in Output
When off (default), includes “-b nolist” on command line and does not include the text of the input file in the
printed output file. When on, includes “-b list” on command line to list text of input file to printed output file.
Model Control
The options in the Model Control section include:
Portion of Model to Write
Allows you to select a previously defined group, then only exports the supported entities in that group to the
ANSYS input file. In some cases, exporting elements without associated nodes or material/property entries may be
desired, but this creates an input file which cannot be run by ANSYS unless additional entities are added to the file.

Note: If a “ready to run” input file is desired, it may be helpful to use the Group, Operations, Add Related
Entities command on the group before selected with this option. See "Group, Operations, Add Related
Entities..." in Section 6.4.3.2, "Group, Operations Menu" of the FEMAP Commands Manual for more
information.

Skip CSys, Skip Nodes, Skip Materials, Skip Properties, Skip Elements, Skip Groups
When enabled, the entity type selected to “skip” will not be written to the ANSYS input file. For example, if Skip
Nodes and Skip Properties are enabled, then no nodes or properties will be exported. When Skip Groups is enabled,
groups will not be written to the ANSYS input file (ESEL, NSEL, and CM entries), but entities contained in those
groups are still exported unless one of the other Skip options is enabled.
 8-32 Analysis Program Interfaces

Skip Shapes
When enabled, all Beam and Bar properties are written to the ANSYS input file as SECTYPE, #, BEAM, ASEC,
along with the corresponding computed property values from the Define Property - BEAM Element Type dialog
box as SECDATA, regardless of how the beams were defined.
Skip Misc
When enabled, comments starting with a single “!”, view settings (/VIEW, /ANGLE,/ZOOM, etc), preprocessor
commands (/NOPR, /FCOMP, /PREP7, /GOPR, etc), solution setting (/SOLU, ANTYPE, EQSLV, etc), SOLVE,
and FINISH are not written to the ANSYS input file.
Result Control (Supported in a Future Release)
The File Compression Level option allows selection of the level of compression to use when creating a results file.
Currently, only “1..No Compression” is available, thus this drop-down is not available.
Manual Control
Start Text, End Text, and Skip Standard
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the ANSYS input file, while End
Text can used to write additional text to the end of the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Command and
Model Control dialog box is written to the ANSYS input file.
Master Requests and Conditions and Cases (Ansys Analysis Case)
In an ANSYS analysis, the master requests and conditions are the default boundary conditions. The analysis will
generate one output set for the master requests and conditions, unless you define a case (see "Cases").
On the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box, you can enter a Subtitle and Manual Control options. Once you
have entered this data, pick Next to set up the boundary conditions.

The Manual Control options include:

Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Analysis Case
dialog box is written to the ANSYS input file for the Master Case
Cases
Cases let you perform multiple analyses with different combinations of load and/or constraint sets and/or using dif-
ferent types of analysis. The analysis program will generate one or more output sets for each case, depending on the
option selected for Analysis Type, which can change from case-to-case.
Also in this dialog box, you can enter a Case ID, Subtitle and Manual Control options. Once you have entered this
data, pick Next to continue defining the case. The selected Analysis Type is used to determine which dialog boxes
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-33

will be displayed as the Next button is clicked to move through the case.The master requests and conditions provide
the defaults for the cases

See above for a description of the options in the Manual Control section. The only difference is the text specified
for an individual case is written to that case in the input file instead of the Master Case.
Boundary Conditions (ANSYS Load Step)
The ANSYS Load Step dialog box is used to specify boundary conditions, loading strategy, and equation solver
parameters for the Master Case or any subcase:

There are several sections and other options in this dialog box which are detailed below.
8-34 Analysis Program Interfaces

Basic Conditions
• Constraints: select a constraint set for the current case (Master or subcase)
• Loads: select a load set for the current case (Master or subcase)
• Temperatures: choose to apply temperatures for the case (Master or Subcase) using the load set currently
selected in the Loads drop-down (“0..From Load Set”) or by selecting a different load set
• Initial Conditions: select a load set to specify initial conditions for the current case (Master or subcase)
• Constraint Equations: choose constraint equations for the case (Master or Subcase) using the constraint set cur-
rently selected in the Constraints drop-down (“0..From Load Set”) or by selecting a different constraint set
• Contact Set: select to use all non-glued Connectors currently enabled in the model (-1..Use Active) for the cur-
rent case (Master or subcase) or select a Connector or Connector Set to specify non-glued contact.
• Glue Set: select to use all glued Connectors currently enabled in the model (-1..Use Active) for the current case
(Master or subcase) or select a Connector or Connector Set to specify glued contact.
• Bolt Preloads: choose to apply pre-loads on “bolts” for the case (Master or Subcase) using the load set currently
selected in the Loads drop-down (“0..From Load Set”) or by selecting a different load set.
Constraints, Loads, Contacts Sections
The option in each section controls if the Constraints, Loads, and/or Contact conditions are going to modified or
completely new for the current case (Master or subcase).
• Constraints: when set to New in a subcase, writes DDELE,ALL,ALL after the ANTYPE entry for the current
case, then the constraints and constraint equations selected via drop-downs in the Basic Conditions section
below the output requests in the current case. When set to Modify, writes only constraints and constraint equa-
tions selected in the Basic Conditions section below the output requests for the current case.
• Loads: when set to New in a subcase, writes BFEDELE,ALL,ALL; BFDELE,ALL,ALL; SFED-
ELE,ALL,ALL; SFDELE,ALL,ALL; CGLOC,0,0,0; ACEL,0,0,0; DCGOMG, 0,0,0; CGOMGA,0,0,0;
FDELE,ALL,ALL; section after the ANTYPE entry, then the loads and temperatures selected via drop-downs
in the Basic Conditions for the current case after the constraints and constraint equations. When set to Modify,
writes only loads and temperatures selected in the Basic Conditions section below the constraints and constraint
equations for the current case.
• Contact: when set to New in a subcase, writes EKILL,CONNECTOR_# below the loads for all Connectors
which were selected via Contact Set and/or Glue Set in the Basic Conditions section of the previous case, then
writes EALIVE, CONNECTOR_# for all Connectors which are selected via Contact Set and/or Glue Set in the
Basic Conditions section for the current case below the EKILL entries. When set to Modify, writes only Con-
nectors selected via Contact Set and/or Glue Set in the Basic Conditions section below the loads for the current
case.
Additional Options
These options are used to specify parameters for the current case (Master or subcase).
Amplitude (KBC) - When disabled, which is the default, nothing is written to the current case and the loads are
linearly interpolated (Ramped) for each substep from the values of the previous load step to the values of this load
step. When enabled, writes KBC,ON below the ANTYPE entry for the current case, which indicates loads are
changed (Stepped) at the first substep of this load step to the values of this load step (i.e., same values are used for
all substeps), which is useful for rate-dependent behavior and transient load steps only.
Include Prestress Effects (PSTRES) - When disabled, which is the default, pre-stress effects are not calculated
(i.e., not included). When enabled, writes PSTRES,ON below the ANTYPE entry for the current case, which calcu-
lates (i.e., includes) pre-stress effects.
Equation Solver (EQSLV) - Specifies the Equations solver. See ANSYS documentation for more information of
each equation solver. “0..Sparse direct” writes EQSLV,SPARSE; “1..Jacobi Conjugate Gradient iterative” writes
EQSLV,JCG; “2..Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient iterative” writes EQSLV,ICCG; “3..Quasi-Minimal
Residual iterative” writes EQSLV,QMR; and “4..Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient iterative” writes EQSLV,PCG.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-35

Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Load Step dialog
box is written to the ANSYS input file for the Master Case or individual case.
Time Step Options (ANSYS Time Step Options)
The ANSYS Time Step Options dialog box is used to specify time step control options for various types of analysis:

The available options will change depending on the type of analysis. In addition, this dialog will only appear when
using the Next or Prev buttons when time-stepping is typically desired for a type of analysis.
Time Step Control
Time duration - Sets total time duration for each “load step” (i.e., case), Default = 1.0 for Master case and value
for Time duration from previous case+1 for each subcase. Writes TIME with corresponding value to current case
(Master or subcase).
Auto Time step (AUTOTS) - Automatic time stepping of load stepping ON/OFF parameter. When enabled, which
is the default, writes AUTOTS, ON. When disabled, writes AUTOTS,OFF.
8-36 Analysis Program Interfaces

Number of Steps option and Number of Steps, Max Number of Steps, and Min Number of Steps values - When
set to Number of Steps, writes NSUBST, Number of Steps, Max Number of Steps, Min Number of Steps for the cur-
rent case (Master or subcase)
Size of Steps option and Time Step, Min Time Step, and Max Time Step values - When set to Size of Steps,
writes DELTIM, Time Step, Min Time Step, Max Time Step for the current case (Master or subcase).
Time Step Bisection (CUTCONTROL)
This section is only available when Analysis Type is set to “10..Nonlinear Static” or “12..Nonlinear Transient
Response”. All items are used to specify a criteria for causing a “cutback” in time stepping (bisection) and write a
CUTCONTROL entry with the specified name (Label) and value. For detailed information, see the ANSYS docu-
mentation for CUTCONTROL. In addition, for all ‘Max” controls, if calculated value exceeds the specified value,
a cutback (bisection) occurs.
Max Plastic Strain - When enabled, writes CUTCONTROL,PLSLIMIT entry with specified value. Maximum
equivalent plastic strain allowed within a time step (substep). Default = 0.15 (15%)
Max Creep Strain - When enabled, writes CUTCONTROL,CRPLIMIT entry with specified value. Sets values for
calculating the maximum equivalent creep strain allowed within a time step (substep).
Max Pressure Change - When enabled, writes CUTCONTROL,DPPLMT entry with specified value. Maximum
pore-pressure increment allowed within a time step (substep). Valid for structural-pore-fluid-diffusion analysis.
Max Disp Change - When enabled, writes CUTCONTROL,DSPLIMIT entry with specified value. Maximum
incremental displacement within the solution field in a time step (substep). Default = 1.0E+7
Bisection Factor - When enabled, writes CUTCONTROL,CUTBACKFACTOR entry with specified value. Speci-
fies the cutback value for bisection. Value must be between 0 and 1.0, Default = 0.5 and is only active when Auto
Time Stepping (AUTOTS) is enabled.
Predict to Bisect - When enabled, writes CUTCONTROL,NOITERPREDICT, 1 entry and the solution will iterate
to value specified for the value specified for Max Iterations in the Stiffness Updates section of the ANSYS Nonlin-
ear Options dialog box before cutback occurs. It can be useful in poorly-convergent problems, but is rarely needed.
Default is to use the auto time stepping to perform a cutback earlier than the value specified for Max Iterations.
Time Step for Transient Dynamics (MIDTOL)
This section is only available when Analysis Type is set to “3..Transient Dynamic/Time History” or “12..Nonlinear
Transient Response”. These two items are use to set mid-step residual criteria values for transient analysis and
write the MIDTOL. When enabled, Midstep Residual and the specified value will write MIDTOL,ON, Midstep
Residual value. When enabled, Response Frequency will write ON to the end of the MIDTOL entry (i.e., MID-
TOL,ON, 0.1, ON), which will cause the response frequency calculation to be used along with the mid-step resid-
ual criterion for automatic time stepping (only used when Auto Time Stepping (AUTOTS) is enabled). For detailed
information, see the ANSYS documentation for MIDTOL.
Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Time Step Options
dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-37

Modal Options (ANSYS Modal Analysis Options)

The ANSYS Modal Analysis Options dialog box is used to specify options for a modal analysis or an analysis type
which performs a modal analysis as a step in the overall solution:

Basic Options (MODOPT)

The options in this section control the mode extraction method, along with number of modes, frequency range, nor-
malization method, and if a check for one of the extraction methods should be performed. Writes the MODOPT
entry with appropriate names, values, etc. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for MODOPT.
Method - Mode extraction method. Use the drop-down to select the desired method, which writes the appropriate
characters to the “Method” field on MODOPT.
• 0..Block Lanczos - Writes MODOPT, LANB
• 1..PCG Lanczos- Writes MODOPT, LANPCG
• 2..Supernode - Writes MODOPT, SNODE
• 3..Subspace - Writes MODOPT, SUBSP
• 4..Unsymmetrical - Writes MODOPT, UNSYM
• 5..Damped - Writes MODOPT, DAMP
• 6..Damped w/ QR - Writes MODOPT, QRDAMP
8-38 Analysis Program Interfaces

Number Frequency Modes - Number of modes to extract. The value can depend on the option specified by the
Method drop-down. Writes the specified integer value to the “NMODE” field on MODOPT.
From - The beginning, or lower end, of the frequency range of interest, in Hertz (Hz). Writes the specified value to
the “FREQB” field on MODOPT.
To - The ending, or upper end, of the frequency range of interest, in Hertz (Hz). Writes the specified value to the
“FREQE” field on MODOPT.
Mode Normalization - Specifies mode shape normalization method. When set to Mass, writes OFF to “Nrmkey”
field on MODOPT. When set to Max=Unity, writes ON to “Nrmkey” field on MODOPT.

Note: If performing a modal frequency response analysis or modal transient analysis, Mode Normalization
should be set to Mass.

Strum Sequence Check - Only considered when Method is set to “0..Block Lanczos”, “1..PCG Lanczos”, or
“3..Subspace” and specifies if the mode extraction solver should perform a Strum sequence check. When enabled,
writes LANBOPTION, ON; PCGOPT,,,,ON; or SUBOPT, ON, respectively, and a Strum sequence check is per-
formed. This requires additional matrix factorization, which can be computationally expensive, but does help
insure that no modes are missed in a specified range. When disabled, which is the default, check is not performed.
Mass Matrix (LUMPM)
When the Lumped option is disabled, which is the default, nothing is written and the analysis uses the element-
dependent mass matrix formulation. When Lumped is enabled, writes LUMPM,ON and the analysis uses a lumped
mass approximation.
Damping Matrix
The values can be used to specify Rayleigh damping for modal analysis. Each item writes an entry and correspond-
ing value. These values are only written when Method is set to “5..Damped” or “6..Damped w/ QR”.
Mass - Specifies Mass Matrix multiplier, Alpha, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C]. Writes the
ALPHAD entry with specified value.
Stiffness - Specifies Stiffness Matrix multiplier, Beta, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C]. Writes
the BETAD entry with specified value.
Super Node Option (SNOPTION)
The options in this section are only available when “2..Supernode” is selected in the Method drop-down in the
Basic Options (MODOPT) section and specifies options used by the SNODE mode-extraction method. Writes
SNOPTION entry with appropriate values. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for SNOPTION.
RangeFact - Factor used to control the range of eigenvalues computed for each “supernode”. Must be between 1.0
and 10.0, Default = 2.0, which means eigenvalues between 0.0 and 2.0*”FREQE”(specified via To field) are com-
puted for each “supernode”. As this value increases, accuracy increases, but so does solution time. Writes the spec-
ified values to the “RangeFact” of the SNOPTION entry.
Blocksize - “Block Size” to be used when computing the final eigenvectors. Must be between 1 and the value spec-
ified for Number of Frequency Modes. Writes the specified values to the “BlockSize” of the SNOPTION entry.
RobustLev - Parameter used to control the “robustness” of the “supernode” mode-extraction solver. Must be
between 0 and 10. Lower values promote optimal performance, while higher values offer greater robustness, which
may be desirable if a problem is detected. Writes the specified values to the “RobustLev” of the SNOPTION entry.
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors - These options control which computation(s) are performed by the “supernode”
mode-extraction solver. When both options are enabled, writes BOTH to the “Compute” field of the SNOPTION
entry. When only Eigenvalues or Eigenvectors is enabled, writes EVALUE or EVECTOR to the “Compute” field,
respectively.
QR Damp Option (QRDOPT)
The options in this section are only available when “2..Damped w/QR” is selected in the Method drop-down in the
Basic Options (MODOPT) section and specifies options used by the QRDAMP mode-extraction method. Writes
QRDOPT entry with appropriate values. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for QRDOPT.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-39

Eigen Reuse - When disabled, the symmetric eigensolution is recalculated at the current load step, while enabling
the option will reuse the symmetric eigensolution from the previous load step or previous solution (writes On to
“ReuseKey” field on QRDOPT).
Mode Extract - Mode extraction method to be used for symmetric eigenvalue problem. Use the drop-down to
select the desired method, which writes the appropriate characters to the “SymMeth” field on QRDOPT.
• 0..Block Lanczos - Writes LANB to “SymMeth” field on QRDOPT
• 1..Subspace - Writes SUBSP to “SymMeth” field on QRDOPT
• 2..Supernode - Writes SNODE to “SymMeth” field on QRDOPT
Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Modal Analysis
Options dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
Buckling Options (ANSYS Buckling Analysis Options)
The ANSYS Buckling Analysis Options dialog box is used to specify options for a buckling analysis:

The options in this dialog box control the mode extraction method, along with number of buckle modes, frequency
range, and if a check for one of the extraction methods should be performed. Writes the BUCOPT entry with appro-
priate names, values, etc for the current case. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for BUCOPT.
Method - Mode extraction method to be used for buckling analysis. Use the drop-down to select the desired
method, which writes the appropriate characters to the “Method” field on BUCOPT.
• 0..Block Lanczos - Writes LANB to “Method” field on BUCOPT
• 1..Subspace - Writes SUBSP to “Method” field on BUCOPT
Number Buckle Modes - Number of modes to extract. Default is 1. Writes the specified integer value to the
“NMODE” field on BUCOPT.
Range Key - Specifies behavior of eigenvalue extraction method. Writes appropriate values to “Shift”,
“LDMULTE”, and “RangeKey” fields to BUCOPT.
• Range Key = Center with Shift and Bound values - Eigenvalue solver computes the Number of Buckle Modes
centered around the value specified for Shift, within the range of +/-value specified for Bound. The value for
Shift acts as the initial shift point about which the buckling modes are calculated (writes specified value to
“SHIFT” field), while the upper and lower bounds of the load multiplier range of interest will stretch from the
“value of Shift - value of Bound” to the “value of Shift + value of Bound” (writes value to “LDMULTE” field).
 8-40 Analysis Program Interfaces

• Range Key = Range with Lower Bound and Upper Bound values - Eigenvalue solver computes the Number of
Buckle Modes using the values specified for Lower Bound and Upper Bound to define the load multiplier range
of interest. Lower Bound writes the value to the SHIFT field, while Upper Bound writes the value to the
LDMULTE field.
Strum Sequence Check - Only used when Method is set to “0..Block Lanczos” and specifies if the mode
extraction solver should perform a Strum sequence check. When enabled, which is the default for buckling analy-
sis, writes LANBOPTION, ON, and a Strum sequence check is performed, which requires additional matrix factor-
ization, which can be computationally expensive, but does help ensure that no modes are missed in the specified
range. When disable, writes LANBOPTION, OFF, and the check is not performed.
Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Buckling Analysis
Options dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
Dynamics Options (ANSYS Transient Dynamics Options)
The ANSYS Transient Dynamics Options dialog box is used to specify options for transient analysis:

Basic Options (TRNOPT)

The options in this section select the method to use for transient analysis. Writes the TRNOPT entry with appropri-
ate names, values, etc for the current case. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for TRNOPT.
Physical option - When set to Physical, writes FULL to the “Method” field on the TRNOPT entry. This indicates
the “full” method for will be used for transient analysis (i.e., uses each specified time step).
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-41

Modal option with Min Mode and Max Mode values - When set to Modal, writes MSUP to the “Method” field on
the TRNOPT, along with the value of Max Mode and Min Mode to the “MAXMODE” and “MINMODE” fields,
respectively. This indicates the “mode-superposition” method will be used for transient analysis. If not specified,
“MAXMODE” will default to the highest modes calculated in the preceding modal analysis.
Mass Matrix (LUMPM)
When the Lumped option is disabled, which is the default, nothing is written and the analysis uses the element-
dependent mass matrix formulation. When Lumped is enabled, writes LUMPM,ON and the analysis uses a lumped
mass approximation.
Damping Matrix
The values can be used to specify damping for dynamic analysis. Each item writes an entry and corresponding
value, except for Excitation Frequency, which is written to the TRNOPT entry.
Mass - Specifies Mass Matrix multiplier, Alpha, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C]. Writes the
ALPHAD entry with value.
Stiffness - Specifies Stiffness Matrix multiplier, Beta, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C]. Writes
the BETAD entry with value.
Struct - Specifies constant structural damping coefficient. Can also be used as an equivalent viscous damping for
“full” transient analysis when value is specified for Excitation Frequency. Writes the DMPSTR entry with value.
Ratio - Specifies constant modal damping ratio (i.e., 2% is entered as 0.02). Writes the DMPRAT entry with value.
Time Integration (TINTP)
HHT and Newark are used to specify the time integration method for transient analysis, and is written to TRNOPT
entry, while the other values are used to define integration parameters, which are written to TINTP entry.
HHT option - Use the HHT algorithm for time integration, which is only valid when the Physical options is
selected in the Basic Options (TRNOPT) section. Writes HHT to “TINTOPT” field for TRNOPT entry.
Newmark option - Use the HHT algorithm for time integration, which is only valid when the Physical options is
selected in the Basic Options (TRNOPT) section. Writes NMK to “TINTOPT” field for TRNOPT entry.
gamma - When enabled, all other options in this section are not available. Specifies the decay factor for 2nd order
transient integration (i.e., structural dynamics). Default = 0.005. Writes specified value to “GAMMA” field of
TINTP entry and no other values. When disabled, all other options become available.
alpha - Specifies 2nd order transient integration parameter, alpha. Default = 0.2525. Writes specified value to
“ALPHA” field of TINTP entry. Not available when gamma is enabled.
delta - Specifies 2nd order transient integration parameter, delta. Default = 0.505. Writes specified value to
“DELTA” field of TINTP entry. Not available when gamma option is enabled.
alphah - Interpolation factor in HHT algorithm for force and damping terms. Default = 0.005. Writes specified
value to “ALPHAH” field of TINTP entry. Only written when HHT option selected. Not available when gamma is
enabled.
alpham - Interpolation factor in HHT algorithm for inertial term. Default = 0.0. Writes specified value to
“ALPHAM” field of TINTP entry. Only written when HHT option selected. Not available when gamma is enabled.
Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Transient Dynam-
ics Options dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
 8-42 Analysis Program Interfaces

Harmonics Options (ANSYS Harmonic Analysis Options)

The ANSYS Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box is used to specify options for frequency response analysis:

Basic Options (HROPT)

The options in this section select the method to use for frequency response analysis. Writes the HROPT entry with
appropriate names, values, etc for the current case. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for
HROPT.
Physical option - When set to Physical, writes FULL to the “Method” field on the HROPT entry. This indicates the
“full” method will be used for frequency response analysis.
Modal option with Min Mode and Max Mode values - When set to Modal, writes MSUP to the “Method” field on
the HROPT, along with the value of Max Mode and Min Mode to the “MAXMODE” and “MINMODE” fields,
respectively. This indicates the “mode-superposition” method will be used for frequency response analysis. If not
specified, “MAXMODE” will default to the highest modes calculated in the preceding modal analysis.
Excitation Frequencies (HARFRQ)
The options in this section specify the range of excitation frequencies. Writes the HARFRQ entry with appropriate
names, values, etc for the current case. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for HARFRQ.
Hz From - The beginning, or lower end, of the range of excitation frequencies, in Hertz (Hz). Writes the specified
value to the “FREQB” field on HROPT.
Hz To - The ending, or upper end, of the range of excitation frequencies, in Hertz (Hz). Writes the specified value
to the “FREQE” field on HROPT.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-43

Log Frequency Span - Logarithm frequency span. Use the drop-down to select the desired span, which writes the
appropriate characters to the “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ.
• 0..Logarithm - Writes LOG to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
• 1..Octave band - Writes OB to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
• 2..1/2 Octave band - Writes OB2 to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
• 3..1/3 Octave band - Writes OB3 to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
• 4..1/6 Octave band - Writes OB6 to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
• 5..1/12 Octave band - Writes OB12 to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
• 6..1/24 Octave band - Writes OB24 to “LogOpt” field on HARFRQ
Cluster - Specifies the “cluster” option. Only used when Modal is selected in the Basic Options (HROPT) section.
When set to Cluster, writes ON to the “Clust” field on HROUT entry, which clusters solution frequencies around
natural frequencies. When set to Uniform, writes OFF to the “Clust” field on HROUT entry, which causes solution
frequencies to be evenly spaced.
Mass Matrix (LUMPM)
When the Lumped option is disabled, which is the default, nothing is written and the analysis uses the element-
dependent mass matrix formulation. When Lumped is enabled, writes LUMPM,ON and the analysis uses a lumped
mass approximation.
Damping Matrix
The values can be used to specify damping for frequency response analysis.
Mass - Specifies Mass Matrix multiplier, Alpha, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C]. Writes the
ALPHAD entry with value.
Stiffness - Specifies Stiffness Matrix multiplier, Beta, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C]. Writes
the BETAD entry with value.
Mode Ratio - Defines constant modal damping ratio. Writes DMPRAT entry with value.
Output Option (HROPT)
This option controls if the complex output from frequency response analysis will be recovered in Real and Imagi-
nary components (Real/Imag option) or Magnitude and Phase components (Amp/Phase option). When set to Real/
Imag, writes ON to “Reimky” field of HROUT entry. When set to Amp/Phase, writes ON to “Reimky” field of
HROUT entry, with the phase angle values being in degrees.
Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Harmonics Anal-
ysis Options dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
 8-44 Analysis Program Interfaces

Random/Spectrum Options (ANSYS Random Vibration Analysis Options)

The ANSYS Random Analysis Options dialog box is used to specify options for frequency response analysis:

Basic Options (SPOPT)

The options in this section specify a the Spectrum Type and other overall options for random response or spectrum
analysis. Writes the SPOPT entry with appropriate names, values, etc for the current case. For detailed information,
see ANSYS documentation for SPOPT.
Spectrum Type - Specifies the type of spectrum for the analysis. Currently, the only available option is “3..Power
Spectral Density”, but other options exist, which may be supported in a future release.
• 0..Single-point Response Spectrum - Writes SPRS to “Sptype” field on SPOPT
• 1..Multi-point Response Spectrum - Writes MPRS to “Sptype” field on SPOPT
• 2..Dynamic Design Analysis Method - Writes DDAM to “Sptype” field on SPOPT
• 3..Power Spectral Density - Writes PSD to “Sptype” field on SPOPT
Number of Modes - Specifies to use only the first “number of modes” from the modal analysis (i.e., value of “5”
means to only use the first 5 modes from the modal analysis). Writes integer value to NMODE field on SPOPT.
Maximum value allowed is 10,000.
Element Result - Element Results Calculation Key. When disabled, which is the default, writes NO to Elcalc field
on SPOPT. When enabled, writes YES to Ecalc field.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-45

PSD Table (PSDUNIT/PSDFREQ/PSDVAL/PFACT)

The options in this section specify various options for the PSD function. For detailed information, see ANSYS doc-
umentation for PSDUNIT, PSDFREQ, PSDVAL and PFACT.
The numbers of the “Correlation Table” correspond to the cases that define the loads for your analysis. Where the
cases listed are the same (i.e, Master=>Master or 1=>1), pick the case from the table, then enter a real factor and
select a PSD function to apply to the case.
Once Apply is clicked to update the “Correlation Table” when the cases are the same (i.e., Master=>Master,1=>1),
the information will appear as follows:
“Real” Factor*(“Real” Function ID) + :PSD Interpolation option (“Real”)
When the cases are different (such as 1=>2), you must decide whether you want to correlate the cases. If you don’t
enter any values for real and imaginary values, the cases will not be correlated. If you do want to correlate the
cases, enter the real and imaginary factors and PSD functions.
Once Apply is clicked to update the “Correlation Table” when the cases are not the same (i.e.,1=>2), the informa-
tion will appear as follows:
“Real” Factor*(“Real” Function ID) + “Imaginary” Factor*(“Imaginary” Function ID) :PSD Interpolation option
(“Real”) :PSD Interpolation option (“Imaginary”)
Damping
The values can be used to specify damping options for random response analysis.
Damp/Mass - Specifies Mass Matrix multiplier, Alpha, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C].
Writes the ALPHAD entry with value.
Damp/Stiffness - Specifies Stiffness Matrix multiplier, Beta, for damping to form the viscous damping matrix [C].
Writes the BETAD entry with value.
Mode Ratio - Defines constant modal damping ratio. Writes DMPRAT entry with value.
Mode Combination (PSDCOM)
The values are to specify the power spectral density (PSD) mode combination method and additional values and
writes PSDCOM entry.
Significance - Specifies a threshold value to be considered for mode combination. Only modes which have a sig-
nificance level above this threshold, which is determined by the modal covariance matrix term divided by the max-
imum modal covariance term, will be combined. If a mode has a significance level below this threshold, it is
considered insignificant and not contributing the modal combination. The higher the value, the less modes will be
used. If set to 0.0, all modes will be combined. Writes the value to the SIGNIF field on PSDCOM entry.
Mode Number - Specifies to use only the first “number of modes” to be combined (i.e., value of “5” means to only
use the first 5 modes for mode combination). Value must always be less than or equal to Number of Modes value in
Basic Options (SPOPT) section. Writes integer value to COMODE field on PSDCOM.
Force Static (Total) - Identifies the forces to be combined. When disabled, which is the default, combines both the
modal static and inertial forces (writes TOTAL to ForceType field of PSDCOM entry). When enabled, combines
only the model static forces (writes STATIC to ForceType field of PSDCOM entry).

Note: Some Ansys random vibration calculations, such as nodal results spectrum (RPSD), are performed in
ANSYS post processors. Those post processing functions are not supported in FEMAP.

Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Random Vibration
Analysis Options dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
 8-46 Analysis Program Interfaces

Nonlinear Options (ANSYS Nonlinear Options)

The ANSYS Nonlinear Analysis Options dialog box, shown below, is used to specify options for nonlinear analysis.
Stiffness Updates
The options in this section specify Newton-Raphson method, as well as the maximum number of equilibrium itera-
tions for nonlinear analysis for the current case. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for NROPT
and NEQIT.
Method - Newton-Raphson method. Use the drop-down to select the desired method, which writes the appropriate
characters to the “Option1” field on NROPT. Default = “0..ANSYS choose”.
• 0..ANSYS choose - Program decides the method. Writes AUTO to “Option1” field.
• 1..Full Newton Raphson - Use full Newton Raphson method. Writes FULL to “Option1” field.
• 2..Modified Newton Raphson - Use Modified Newton Raphson method. Writes MODI to “Option1” field.
• 3..Initial Stiffness - Use the previously computed matrix (initial stiffness). Writes AUTO to “Option1” field.
• 4..Full Newton Raphson Unsymmetrical - Use full Newton Raphson method with unsymmetric matrices of ele-
ments where the unsymmetric option exists. Writes AUTO to “Option1” field.
Max Iterations - Maximum number of equilibrium iterations allowed for each time step. Typically, the maximum
number of iterations should be an integer value between 15 and 26. Writes NEQIT entry with specified value.

Convergence Tolerances (CNVTOL)

This section convergence tolerances for nonlinear analysis. All items are used to specify a tolerance value “cut-
back” in time stepping (bisection) and write a CVNTOL entry with the specified name (Label) and value (Toler).
For detailed information, see the ANSYS documentation for CNVTOL.
Displacement - When enabled, writes CVNTOL,U,, entry with specified value used to specify Displacement con-
vergence tolerance after two commas. Default = 0.05 (5%). When disabled, writes nothing.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-47

Rotation - When enabled, writes CVNTOL,ROT,, entry with specified value used to specify Rotation convergence
tolerance after two commas. Default = 0.05 (5%). When disabled, writes nothing.
Force - When enabled, writes CVNTOL,F,, entry with specified value used to specify Force convergence tolerance
after two commas. Default = 0.005 (0.5%). When disabled, writes nothing.
Moment - When enabled, writes CVNTOL,M,, entry with specified value used to specify Moment convergence
tolerance after two commas. Default = 0.005 (0.5%). When disabled, writes nothing.
Volume Change - When enabled, writes CVNTOL,DVOL,, entry with specified value used to specify Volume
Change convergence tolerance after two commas. Default = 0.01 (1%). When disabled, writes nothing.
Hydro Pressure - When enabled, writes CVNTOL,HDSP,, entry with specified value used to specify Volume
Change convergence tolerance after two commas. Default = 0.05 (5%). When disabled, writes nothing
Solution Strategy Overrides
The values can be used to specify solution strategy overrides for nonlinear analysis, such as allowing large dis-
placements or enabling the arc-length or line search. Each item writes an entry and corresponding value.
Nonlinear Geometry - When enabled, writes NLGEOM,ON, which includes large deflection (large rotation)
effects or large strain effects, according to element type. When disabled, which is the default, these large deflection
effects are ignored.
Arc-Length - When enabled, writes ARCLEN,ON,, which activates the arc-length method. When disabled, which
is the default, does not use arc-length method. Because the “MAXARC” and “MINARC” options for ARCLEN are
not specified, the default values are used (i.e., 25 is maximum multiplier of the reference arc-length radius, while
0.001 is used as the minimum multiplier). For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for ARCLEN.
Line Search - When enabled, writes LNSRCH,AUTO, which activates a line search to be used with the Newton-
Raphson method, which can turn itself on and off depending on the model and/or load step. When disabled, which
is the default unless contact elements are present, does not use a line search. Is not used when the Arc-Length
option is enabled. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for LNSRCH.
Predictor - When enabled, writes PRED,AUTO,, which activates a predictor which can be used or not used in non-
linear analysis depending on the model and/or load step. When disabled, no prediction occurs. Is not used when the
Arc-Length option is enabled. For detailed information, see ANSYS documentation for PRED.
Manual Control
Start Text can be used to enter additional text which is written to the beginning of the appropriate section of the
ANSYS input file, while End Text can used to write additional text to the end of the section in the input file.
When Skip Standard is enabled, only the text entered for Start Text and/or End Text in the ANSYS Nonlinear
Options dialog box is written to the appropriate section of the ANSYS input file.
 8-48 Analysis Program Interfaces

Output Requests (ANSYS Output Requests)

The ANSYS Output Results dialog box is used specify the output recovered for each case (Master Case or subcase):

Binary Results File (OUTRES)

The options in this section specify which types of output should be recovered from the analysis and sent to the
binary result file (*.rst file) for the current case. In addition to choosing the types of output, there are also options to
specify how often (i.e, the frequency or at which substeps) the different types of output are be written to the binary
result file. For certain types of output, there is an option to choose if output should be recovered for the entire
model or only certain nodes or elements (this will be supported in a future release). The selected types and speci-
fied options will write an appropriate number of OUTRES entries.
ITEM
Each output type selected in the ITEM column writes an OUTRES entry with the appropriate characters in the
“Item” field, along with the options specified in the FREQ, OR STEPS, and COMPONENT columns.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters 8-49

All Results - When enabled, which is the default, requests all types of output except Integration Point Locations
(LOCI) and State Variables (SVAR) by writing OUTRES,ALL with the selected option in the FREQ column.
Basic Results - When enabled, requests Nodal DOF Solution (NDOL), Nodal Reaction Loads (RSOL), Nodal
Velocity (V), Nodal Acceleration (A), Element Nodal/Input Constraint/Force Loads (NLOAD), Element Nodal
Stresses (STRS), Element Nodal Gradients (FGRAD), and Element Nodal Fluxes (FFLUX) by writing OUT-
RES,BASIC with the selected option in the FREQ column.
Nodal Reaction - When enabled, requests Nodal Reaction Loads by writing OUTRES,RSOL with the selected
options in the FREQ column.
Nodal DOF - When enabled, requests Nodal DOF Solution by writing OUTRES,NSOL with the selected options
in the FREQ and COMPONENT columns.
Nodal Velocity - When enabled, requests Nodal Velocity by writing OUTRES,V with the selected options in the
FREQ and COMPONENT columns. Only applicable for transient analysis.
Nodal Acceleration - When enabled, requests Nodal Acceleration by writing OUTRES,A with the selected options
in the FREQ and COMPONENT columns. Only applicable for transient analysis.
Element Results - When enabled, requests Element Nodal/Input Constraint/Force Loads (NLOAD), Element
Nodal Stresses (STRS), Element Elastic Strains (EPEL), Element Thermal/Initial/Swelling Strains (EPTH), Ele-
ment Plastic Strains (EPPL), Element Creep Strains (EPCR), Element Diffusion Strains (EPDI), Element Nodal
Gradients (FGRAD), Element Nodal Fluxes (FFLUX), Integration Point Locations (LOCI), State Variables
(SVAR), and Element Miscellaneous Data (MISC) by writing OUTRES,ESOL with the selected options in the
FREQ and COMPONENT columns.
FREQ and OR STEPS
The are four options available for each type of output in the ITEM column. The selected option will be written to
the “Freq” field on the OUTRES entry. Default = “1..Write All”
• 0..Write None - suppresses writing of the specified results item for all substeps of a load step. Writes NONE to
“Freq” field.
• 1..Write All - requests the results of the specifies results item for all substeps of a load step. Writes ALL to
“Freq” field.
• 2..Write Last - requests the results of the specifies results item for only the last substep of a load step. Writes
LAST to “Freq” field
• 3..Write Every Nth - requests the specified results item at every “Nth” substep, along with the last substep, of a
load step. Writes “N” to the “Freq” field, where “N” is the value defined in the OR STEPS column.
COMPONENT (Supported in a Future Release)
The drop-down in the COMPONENT column is used to select if results of a specific type should be recovered for
the entire model or an existing group of nodes or elements. Default = “0..Entire Model”. When a group is selected
in the drop-down, the nodes or elements in that group will be written as a “Component” to the input file with an
arbitrary “Component Name” (CM entries), and then that “Component Name” will be written to the “CName” field
of the OUTRES entry.
Print Results File (OUTPR)
The options in this section specify which types of output should be recovered from the analysis and sent to the
printed result file (*.out file) for the current case. In addition to choosing the types of output, there are also options
to specify how often (i.e, the frequency or at which substeps) the different types of output are be written to the
binary result file. For certain types of output, there is an option to choose if output should be recovered for the
entire model or only certain nodes or elements (this will be supported in a future release). The selected types and
specified options will write an appropriate number of OUTPR entries.
ITEM
Each output type selected in the ITEM column writes an OUTPR entry with the appropriate characters in the
“Item” field, along with the options specified in the FREQ, OR STEPS, and COMPONENT columns.
All Results - When enabled, which is the default, requests all types of output available on the OUTPR by writing
OUTPR,ALL with the selected option in the FREQ column.
 8-50 Analysis Program Interfaces

Basic Results - When enabled, requests Nodal DOF Solution (NDOL), Nodal Reaction Loads (RSOL), and Ele-
ment Solution (ESOL) by writing OUTPR,BASIC with the selected option in the FREQ column.
Nodal Reaction - When enabled, requests Nodal Reaction Loads by writing OUTPR,RSOL with the selected
options in the FREQ column.
Nodal DOF - When enabled, requests Nodal DOF Solution by writing OUTPR,NSOL with the selected options in
the FREQ and COMPONENT columns.
Nodal Velocity - When enabled, requests Nodal Velocity by writing OUTPR,V with the selected options in the
FREQ and COMPONENT columns. Only applicable for transient analysis.
Nodal Acceleration - When enabled, requests Nodal Acceleration by writing OUTPR,A with the selected options
in the FREQ and COMPONENT columns. Only applicable for transient analysis.
Element Results - When enabled, requests Element Solution results by writing OUTPR,ESOL with the selected
options in the FREQ and COMPONENT columns.
FREQ and OR STEPS
The are four options available for each type of output in the ITEM column. The selected option will be written to
the “Freq” field on the OUTPR entry. Default = “1..Write All”
• 0..Write None - suppresses writing of the specified results item for all substeps of a load step. Writes NONE to
“Freq” field.
• 1..Write All - requests the results of the specifies results item for all substeps of a load step. Writes ALL to
“Freq” field.
• 2..Write Last - requests the results of the specifies results item for only the last substep of a load step. Writes
LAST to “Freq” field.
• 3..Write Every Nth - requests the specified results item at every “Nth” substep, along with the last substep, of a
load step. Writes “N” to the “Freq” field, where “N” is the value defined in the OR STEPS column.
COMPONENT (Supported in a Future Release)
The drop-down in the COMPONENT column is used to select if results of a specific type should be recovered for
the entire model or an existing group of nodes or elements. Default = “0..Entire Model”. When a group is selected
in the drop-down, the nodes or elements in that group will be written as a “Component” to the input file with an
arbitrary “Component Name” (CM entries), and then that “Component Name” will be written to the “CName” field
of the OUTPR entry.

8.3.2 Performing an ANSYS Analysis

Depending on where you plan to run ANSYS, the preliminary steps can be somewhat different. For example, if you
are not running ANSYS on the same computer as FEMAP, you will have to transfer the file to the computer where
ANSYS resides, then launch ANSYS, either interactively or in batch mode
If FEMAP is on the machine as ANSYS, the basic approach is to launch ANSYS by clicking the Analyze button in
the Analysis Set Manager. In addition, ANSYS must be properly setup to communicate with FEMAP.
The preferred method is to use the File, Preference command, select the Solvers tab, then use the “...” button in the
Ansys section to browse to the desired ANSYS executable. The full directory path to the ANSYS executable can be
manually entered in the Program field as well. For more information, see Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers"
Alternatively, before you start FEMAP, you can first define an environment variable in Windows. Name the vari-
able ANSYS_EXE, give it a value equal to the complete file/path name of the ANSYS executable. For example:
ANSYS_EXE = c:\ansys\AnsysXX.exe
Where “XX” is the version of ANSYS (ANSYS_EXE = c:\ansys\Ansys190.exe). Once this variable is set, FEMAP
will automatically launch ANSYS when you press Analyze from the Analysis Set Manager or when using the File,
Analyze command. FEMAP will monitor the analysis and return results when it is finished.
 Reading ANSYS Models 8-51

For details on configuring other solvers to run using local settings See: Section 4.11.2.1, "Run Analysis Using
Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Command Guide

Note: Once this environment variable has been defined, FEMAP will be able to launch the analysis program
and monitor the job until it is complete. Section 4.11.2.2, "Analysis Monitors"

8.3.3 Reading ANSYS Models

Just as you can translate a FEMAP model to ANSYS, you can also read ANSYS models into FEMAP. Since
FEMAP reads PREP7 commands, there are several possible files that can be read.
If you built your model with PREP7, you should have an ANSYS log file that contains a list of all of your com-
mands. If you only used commands that FEMAP supports, you can read your log file. In most cases however, this
will not be possible. The log file will probably contain meshing or other model generation commands that cannot
be read. In that case, load your model into ANSYS and use the CDWRIT command to produce an expanded file
(normally FILE28) as follows:
CDWRITE,,,,,,,UNBLOCKED

The CDWRIT command expands meshing and other generation commands into a format that FEMAP can read.
Reading an expanded file does not guarantee that every command will be read, but it certainly increases the number
of commands that are supported.
The only other input required is to select the file that you want to read using the standard file access dialog box.

8.3.4 Reading ANSYS Analysis Results

When you have completed your ANSYS analysis, you can load the results into FEMAP for post-processing. You
must always start with a FEMAP model that corresponds to the ANSYS analysis. If you do not have one, or if you
have changed the ANSYS files since you translated them from FEMAP, you must first start a new FEMAP model
and read the ANSYS model, as described in the previous section.
Revision 4.4
For Rev 4.4 (and before), FEMAP can read two types of ANSYS output files: the binary output found in the stan-
dard ANSYS FILE12, or the “formatted” output produced by the BCDCNV command and typically written to
FILE14. In either case, FEMAP assumes a default file extension of “.DAT”. You do not have to tell FEMAP which
type of file you are reading. You simply specify the file name and FEMAP determines the type based on the con-
tents of the file.
If you are running ANSYS on the same computer as FEMAP, the binary FILE12 is usually the best approach. If
you are running FEMAP on a different computer, or are having trouble reading the binary files, the formatted files
can often provide a more reliable alternative.
Revision 5.0 - 9.0
FEMAP reads the standard binary results file from Rev 5 to Rev 9.0. This file is created automatically by ANSYS,
and FEMAP assumes a default file extension of “.RST” for structural results and “.RTH” for thermal results. The
results file is in ANSYS external file format and can be moved between computers so that FEMAP can read it.
These files are binary and should be transferred between computers as binary files.
To load your results, choose the File, Import Analysis Results command and select ANSYS. After you select the
ANSYS revision, FEMAP will display the standard file access dialog box so you can choose the file that you want
to read. Before reading data from a file, you will see a brief description of the file in the Messages window, and you
will be asked to confirm that this is the file that you want to read.
Revision 10.0 and Above
FEMAP reads the standard binary results file from 10.0 and Above. Similar to 5.0 - 9.0, this file is created automat-
ically by ANSYS, and FEMAP assumes a default file extension of “.RST” for structural results and “.RTH” for
thermal results. The results file is in ANSYS external file format and can be moved between computers so that
FEMAP can read it. These files are binary and should be transferred between computers as binary files.
Output for Post-processing
The format and contents of the ANSYS output files are described in the ANSYS User’s Manual, Programmers
Manual, and in the description of the ANSYS Element Library.
 8-52 Analysis Program Interfaces

You must have a FEMAP model before reading the output file. FEMAP does not read the model information from
your results file. FEMAP does read the displacements, elemental forces, stresses and strains, and reaction forces.

8.4 ANSYS Interfaces (Legacy)

FEMAP provides direct interfaces to the ANSYS PREP7 and post-processing file formats. You can write a
FEMAP model to the ANSYS PREP7 format for analysis, read an existing ANSYS model, or read analysis results
for post-processing.
Topics in this section include:
• Section 8.4.1, "Writing an ANSYS Model with Model, Analysis"
• Section 8.4.2, "Writing an ANSYS Model with File, Export" (Obsolete)
• Section 8.4.3, "Performing an ANSYS Analysis (Legacy)"
• Section 8.4.4, "Reading ANSYS Models (Legacy)"
• Section 8.4.5, "Reading ANSYS Analysis Results (Legacy)"
For more information on the entities that are translated, see:
• Section 7.1, "Translation Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran"

8.4.1 Writing an ANSYS Model with Model, Analysis

The Model, Analysis command opens the Analysis Set Manager, which enables you to write a FEMAP model to
ANSYS. The interface supports ANSYS versions 4, 5.x -19.0. Alternatively, you can also use the File, Export,
Analysis Model command (see Section 8.4.2, "Writing an ANSYS Model with File, Export").
This section includes the following topics:
• Section 8.2.1.2, "Analysis Process Overview" using the Analysis Set Manager
• Section 8.4.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis" - guidelines on preparing for each analysis type
• Section 8.4.1.3, "Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy)" - descriptions of the ANSYS interface dia-
log boxes

8.4.1.1 General Analysis Process Overview

The Analysis Set Manager lets you create an analysis set, which is an input file for ANSYS. To define analysis set:
1. Pick Model, Analyze to open the Analysis Set Manager dialog box.
2. Click New button or double-click “No Analysis Sets Defined”.
3. On the Analysis Set dialog box, choose 5..ANSYS as the Analysis Program:
 Preparing the Model for Analysis 8-53

Select the Analysis Type: 1..Static, 2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue, 3..Transient Dynamic/Time History, 4..Fre-
quency/Harmonic Response, 6..Random Response, 7..Buckling, 10..Nonlinear Static, 12..Nonlinear Transient
Response, 20..Steady-State Heat Transfer, or 21..Transient Heat Transfer. These options determine which ele-
ment types (structural or heat transfer) will be written, and set the defaults for the other ANSYS interface dialog
boxes. (With dynamic and random response analysis types, you will see some additional dialog boxes. See Sec-
tion 8.4.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis".)
You can also choose to use a Linked Solver or VisQ. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section 4.11.2.1, "Run
Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Commands Manual for more informa-
tion.
4. Pick Next to open the ANSYS Executive and Solution Control dialog box (Alternatively, you can pick OK to
close the Analysis Set dialog box. From the analysis set list, you can then double-click on an option to bring up
the dialog box where the option is defined.). Contains information about current ANSYS Version setup to run
with FEMAP and allows you to specify a number of command line arguments. See "ANSYS Executive and
Solution Control (Legacy)".
5. Pick Next to open the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box. The master requests and conditions are the
default boundary conditions. Enter a title. See "Master Requests and Conditions (Legacy)".
6. Pick Next to open the Boundary Conditions dialog box. Select the constraints and loads. See "Boundary Condi-
tions (Legacy)".
7. For some analysis types (Static, Normal Modes/Eigenvalue, Nonlinear Static), you can create cases. Each case
includes a title, options (depending on analysis type), and boundary conditions. In the Analysis Set Manager,
double-click on No Cases Defined. Pick Next to work through the dialog boxes to create the case. See "Cases
(Legacy)".
For more information, see also:
• Section 8.4.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis" for how to work with each analysis type
• Section 8.4.1.3, "Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy)" for descriptions of the ANSYS interface
dialog boxes
8.4.1.2 Preparing the Model for Analysis
This section describes the steps in preparing for each analysis type. It includes these topics:
Static, Modal, and Buckling Analyses:
• "Preparing for a Static Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Preparing for a Normal Modes/Eigenvalues Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Notes on ANSYS Dynamic Analyses (Legacy)"
Dynamic Analyses:
• "Preparing for a Transient Dynamic/Time History Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Preparing for a Frequency/Harmonic Response Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Preparing a Random Response Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Notes on ANSYS Dynamic Analyses (Legacy)"
Heat Transfer Analyses:
• "Preparing for Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Preparing for Transient Heat Transfer Analysis (Legacy)"
Nonlinear Analysis and Other Topics:
• "Preparing for a Normal Modes/Eigenvalues Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Preparing for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Preparing for Contact Analysis (Legacy)"
• "Special Cases (Legacy)"
For more information, see also:
 8-54 Analysis Program Interfaces

• Section 8.2.1.2, "Analysis Process Overview" for information on how to use the Analysis Set Manager
• Section 8.4.1.3, "Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy)" for descriptions of the ANSYS interface
dialog boxes
Preparing for a Static Analysis (Legacy)
To set up a static analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints and loads.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager.
As part of this process, you can define cases to perform multiple analyses with different combinations of load
and/or constraint sets.
Preparing for a Normal Modes/Eigenvalues Analysis (Legacy)
To set up a normal modes/eigenvalues analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager.
As part of this process, you can define cases to perform multiple analyses with different combinations of load
and/or constraint sets.
You can also control the master degrees of freedom and number of modes or frequency range with the ANSYS
Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box.
Preparing for Buckling Analysis (Legacy)
To prepare for a buckling analysis:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply one constraint set and one load set.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager.
Use the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box to enter the number of modes to be extracted and whether
elemental results should be calculated.
Preparing for a Transient Dynamic/Time History Analysis (Legacy)
To set up a transient dynamic/time history analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Define a dynamic load set in FEMAP. Pick Model, Load, Dynamic to set the Load Set Options for Dynamic
Analysis. The options that you pick depend on whether you want a direct or modal analysis.
For a direct analysis, set the Solution Method to Direct Transient.
For a modal analysis, set the Solution Method to Modal Transient. Under Response Based on Modes, enter the
number of modes and lowest and highest frequencies.
For details, see Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..." in FEMAP Commands.
3. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager.
If the modal analysis method is active, you will be able to define additional parameters ANSYS Dynamic Analy-
sis Options dialog box. These parameters include master DOF, number of modes to extract, and the lowest and
highest frequencies (ANSYS command MODOPT).

Note: To prevent translation errors, be careful to set appropriate options for both the dynamic load set and the
analysis set. The interface won’t write the load set to the ANSYS solver if the Solution Method is
turned off. It also won’t write the load set if the Solution Method (for example, Modal Frequency)
doesn’t match the Analysis Type for the analysis set (for example, Transient Dynamic/Time History).

Preparing for a Frequency/Harmonic Response Analysis (Legacy)

To set up a frequency/harmonic response analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Define a dynamic load set in FEMAP. Pick Model, Load, Dynamic to set the Load Set Options for Dynamic
 Preparing the Model for Analysis 8-55

Analysis. The options that you pick depend on whether you want a direct or modal analysis.
For a direct analysis, set the Solution Method to Direct Frequency.
For a modal analysis, set the Solution Method to Modal Frequency. Under Response Based on Modes, enter the
number of modes and lowest and highest frequencies.
For details, see Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..." in FEMAP Commands.
3. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager.
You can define solution frequencies to be expanded (ANSYS command NUMEXP) on the ANSYS Dynamic
Analysis Options dialog box.

Note: To prevent translation errors, be careful to set appropriate options for both the dynamic load set and the
analysis set. The interface won’t write the load set to the ANSYS solver if the Solution Method is
turned off. It also won’t write the load set if the Solution Method (for example, Modal Frequency)
doesn’t match the Analysis Type for the analysis set (for example, Transient Dynamic/Time History).

Preparing a Random Response Analysis (Legacy)

Preparing for random analysis is identical to Frequency/Harmonic Response analysis (see "Preparing for a Fre-
quency/Harmonic Response Analysis (Legacy)"), except that:
• the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box always appears because a modal analysis is required before
every random analysis.
• you can select multiple load sets. All displacement values in the chosen load sets will be exported as base exci-
tations (D), while all forces will be applied as nodal excitations (F).
• you can define output for a random analysis with the ANSYS Output for Random Analysis dialog box. This dia-
log box will appear when you pick Next on the ANSYS Model Write dialog box.

Note: Imported nodal results from a random analysis are read “as is” from ANSYS Results files. The results
are not transformed into the global coordinate system like nodal results from other types of analysis.
Therefore, any command in FEMAP which “transforms” nodal output will produce invalid output val-
ues for the nodal output vectors in these sets..

Notes on ANSYS Dynamic Analyses (Legacy)

This topic reviews the limitations on transient and frequency response loading conditions in ANSYS. Loads on the
same node or elemental face must have the same time history (transient) or same phase (frequency). If they do not,
FEMAP will write the loading conditions assuming the last time history/phase, and you will most likely get results
for a different loading condition than desired.
Also, with regard to Rayleigh damping, you can define alpha and beta damping for frequency analysis by defining
the overall structural damping coefficient (G) and in some cases, the frequencies for element and system damping.
For frequency and random response analyses, FEMAP will automatically compute alpha and beta. If only one fre-
quency is defined for the analysis, FEMAP assumes alpha is 0, and computes beta from G/wi where wi is the fre-
quency. If a range of frequencies are specified, FEMAP will compute alpha and beta based on the equation
G = alpha/wi + beta*wi

by assuming G is constant over the frequency range. Two simultaneous equations are produced at the two frequen-
cies which define the range.
For Rayleigh damping in transient analysis, FEMAP uses the Frequency for System Damping (W3 - HZ) and Fre-
quency for Element Damping (W - Hz) input on the Load Set Options for Dynamic Analysis dialog box (Model,
Load, Dynamic Analysis) to compute alpha and beta damping values. Alpha is simply the product of the overall
structural damping coefficient (G) and W3 (Frequency for System Damping). Beta is G divided by W4 (Frequency
for Element Damping). If G is zero, Rayleigh damping is ignored. Also, if W3 or W4 is zero, alpha or beta, respec-
tively, will not be written.
Preparing for Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis (Legacy)
Preparing for a steady-state heat transfer analysis is just like preparing for static analysis (see "Preparing for a
Static Analysis (Legacy)"), except that instead of defining nodal constraints, you define nodal temperatures (in a
load set) for your boundary conditions.
 8-56 Analysis Program Interfaces

Preparing for Transient Heat Transfer Analysis (Legacy)

To set up a transient heat analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Define time-dependent nodal or elemental thermal loads. To do this, create a function (use Model, Function).
Set the Type to 1. vs Time, and use the Data Entry methods to create the time-dependent thermal load (for
example, heat generation vs. time, heat flux vs. time).
When you create the thermal load (for example, using Model, Load, Nodal, Heat Generation), define the load
using the function (for example, heat generation vs. time).
3. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager. Use the Nonlinear Control Options dialog box to
define step size and the initial time increment.
As part of the process, you can define cases to perform multiple analyses with different combinations of load
and/or constraint sets.
Preparing for a Nonlinear Static Analysis (Legacy)
To set up a nonlinear static analysis in ANSYS:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply constraints.
2. Set up the analysis with the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager.
As part of this process, you can define cases to perform multiple analyses with different combinations of load
and/or constraint sets.
Preparing for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis (Legacy)
Preparing for nonlinear transient analysis is nearly identical to transient dynamic/time history analysis (see "Pre-
paring for a Transient Dynamic/Time History Analysis (Legacy)"), except that:
• the modal transient solution method is not available. If you select the modal transient solution method (on Load
Set Options for Dynamic Analysis), the load set will not be written to the ANSYS input file.
• nonlinear analysis options must also be active, or the load set will not be written to the ANSYS input file
For the first nonlinear load set, you must define nonlinear analysis options. Pick Model, Load, Nonlinear to set
the Load Set Options for Nonlinear Analysis. For details, see Section 4.3.6.1, "Model, Load, Nonlinear Analy-
sis..." in FEMAP Commands.
Once you define the nonlinear load set options for the first load set, the interface will use these options for the
remaining load sets since ANSYS doesn’t allow for modifications during the solution process.
• you can choose to activate Large Deformation Effects on the Analysis Set dialog box
Preparing for Contact Analysis (Legacy)
Surface-to-surface contact is defined in ANSYS using a combination of contact surface and target segment ele-
ments. ANSYS looks for contact only between contact surfaces and target segments that share the same real con-
stant set. Contact can be used in nonlinear analysis while glued contact (“bonded”) can be used in several different
types of analysis, including static analysis. To define contact for ANSYS:
• Define the real constants and any KEPOPTs using the Connect, Connection Property command.
• Define the target segments using the Connect, Connection Region command. The target segments (TARGE169
(2-D) and TARGE170 (3-D)) can be either rigid or deformable. When defining a rigid target, you can use only
line elements or Face 1 of a plate element.
• Define the contact surfaces using the Connect, Connection Region command. The contact surfaces can be 2-D
(CONTA171 and CONTA172) or 3-D (CONTA173 and CONTA174), and must be deformable.
• Model a contact pair using the Connect, Connector command. The dialog box asks for a Master (Target) (the
target segment) and a Slave (Source) (the contact surface), as well as a Property (the shared real constants set).
For more information about these commands, see Section 4.4, "Creating Connections and Regions"in FEMAP
Commands.

Hint: To create a rigid entity, use line elements for 2-D analysis and plate elements with the element nor-
mal direction facing the contact for 3-D analysis.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy) 8-57

Special Cases (Legacy)

Depending on the contents of your model, you may see additional questions or warnings as the file is translated.
For example, ANSYS requires certain IDs, especially for coordinate systems. If your model has entities which are
outside of the allowable ID range, FEMAP will ask if you want to renumber prior to translating. Likewise, axisym-
metric and other 2-D elements must lie in the global XY plane for ANSYS. If you have built your model in a differ-
ent global plane, FEMAP will ask if you want to automatically realign it to the XY plane. FEMAP can only “flip”
between global planes. You should never build an axisymmetric model in a skewed plane.
For axisymmetric models, you will also have an opportunity to specify a scale factor for loads. This factor is nor-
mally 1.0, but can be adjusted depending on whether you specified loads on a per radian or per revolution (360
degrees) basis. This is especially important since the required conventions change between ANSYS Revision 4.4
and 5.0.
8.4.1.3 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy)
To set up an ANSYS analysis, you will work through the following dialog boxes:
• "ANSYS Executive and Solution Control (Legacy)"
• "Master Requests and Conditions (Legacy)"
• "ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options (Legacy)"
• "Boundary Conditions (Legacy)"
• "Cases (Legacy)"
• "Writing an ANSYS Model with File, Export"
For information on how to prepare the model for each analysis type, see:
• Section 8.4.1.2, "Preparing the Model for Analysis"
ANSYS Executive and Solution Control (Legacy)
The ANSYS Executive and Solution Control dialog box contains information about current ANSYS Version setup to
run with FEMAP and allows you to specify a number of command line arguments.

ANSYS Version
The version number displayed relates to the solver executable specified for Ansys on the Solvers tab of the File,
Preferences command or by the ANSYS_EXE environment variable. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section
4.11.2.1, "Run Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Commands Manual for more
information. If no version is defined, defaults to version 10.
 8-58 Analysis Program Interfaces

ANSYS Product
Allows you to choose a particular ANSYS Product to launch, which may be useful to select to only use the
license(s) needed for your analysis. Choose from 0..Default, 1..ANSYS Multiphysics, 2..ANSYS Mechanical,
3..ANSYS Structural, 4..ANSYS Mechanical Emag, or 5..ANSYS Mechanical CFL-Flo. Includes “-p” on command
line.
List Input File in Output Text File
When off (default), includes “-b nolist” on command line and does not include the text of the input file in the
printed output file. When on, includes “-b list” on command line to list text of input file to printed output file.
Jobname
When specified, is the initial “jobname”, a name assigned to all files generated by the program for a specific model.
Includes “-j (specified jobname)” on command line. Has a maximum length of 32 characters and spaces should be
avoided. If not specified, assumes file name is the “jobname”.
Output Directory.
When specified, allows you set a location for output to be placed. The “...” icon button can be used to browse to a
directory location. Includes “-dir (specified output directory)” on command line. If not specified, uses default out-
put directory for FEMAP.
Database Memory (MBytes)
When specified as a positive value, defines the initial memory allocation for the database. If specified as a negative
value, defines a fixed memory allocation for the database throughout the run. Includes “-db (value)” or “-db (-
value)” on command line. If no value is specified, “-db” is omitted and default of 1024 MB is used.
Workspace Memory (MBytes)
When specified as a positive value, defines the initial overall memory allocation. If specified as a negative value,
defines a fixed overall memory allocation throughout the run. Includes “-m (value) or “-m (-value)” on command
line. If no value is specified, “-m” is omitted and default of 2048 MB is used.
Other Command Line Options
Allows you to specify other command line arguments. Consult ANSYS documentation for more information.
ANSYS Model Write (Legacy)
The ANSYS Model Write dialog box sets up the basic parameters for the analysis. It includes the following sections
and fields:

Write All Groups as Components

When enabled, all groups in FEMAP will be written as “components” to the ANSYS input file (default = On). If a
group contains both nodes and elements then two separate components will be created, one for the nodes in the
group and another for the elements in the group. Each of the components in the ANSYS input file will be automat-
ically generated and follow the same naming convention “CM, G(group #), (NODE/ELEM)”.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy) 8-59

Skip Preprocessor Command

When on, the command will cause FEMAP to not write the /PREP7 line to the ANSYS input file (default = Off).
Write Commands for Automatic Solve
If you check this option, FEMAP will write additional commands to the end of your ANSYS file. These commands
automatically perform the analysis when you load the file into ANSYS or run the model in batch mode.
Do not select this option if you are running a static, modal, or nonlinear static analysis and want to load the model
into ANSYS, and then review it in PREP7 before beginning your analysis.
Use Iterative Solver (5.3 and above)
This option invokes the ANSYS iterative solver, and is only applicable for ANSYS v5.3+.
Large Deformation Effects
For nonlinear analysis (both static and transient), you also have the option to calculate Large Deformation Effects.
Manual Control
Manual Control options include:
• Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface will not write the node, element, material, and property data to
the ANSYS input file. Start and End Text will be written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the node, element, material, and property data in the
input file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the node, element, material, and property data in the input
file.
Master Requests and Conditions (Legacy)
In an ANSYS analysis, the master requests and conditions are the default boundary conditions. The analysis will
generate one output set for the master requests and conditions, unless you define a case (see "Cases (Legacy)").
On the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box, you can enter a Title and Manual Control options. Once you
have entered this data, pick Next to set up the boundary conditions.

The Manual Control options include:

• Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface will not write the load, constraint, and load option data to the
ANSYS input file. Start and End Text will be written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the load, constraint, and load option data in the input
file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the load, constraint, and load option data in the input file.
 8-60 Analysis Program Interfaces

ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options (Legacy)

If you chose a modal analysis type, you will see the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box.

The ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog controls the master degrees of freedom that will be used in your
modal analysis, as well as the number of modes or frequencies that will be calculated. It includes the following sec-
tions/fields:
Translate Master DOF Set
If you have defined the master degrees of freedom that you want as a separate constraint set, check Translate Con-
straint Set, and choose the set from the drop-down list. If not, you may need to check the Automatic DOF Selection
Enable option.
Automatic DOF Selection
Enable instructs ANSYS to automatically select the master degrees of freedom. Enter the Number of DOF that you
want ANSYS. If you only want ANSYS to select translational degrees of freedom, check the Exclude Rotational
DOF option.
Modal Expansion
For Rev 5, you can:
• select the Number of Modes to extract
• limit modal extraction to a Min Frequency/Max Frequency range
• calculate elemental results (forces, stresses...) with the Calculate Element Results option; otherwise, only nodal
results (mode shapes) will be computed
These options only apply if you are writing solution commands to the file.
Boundary Conditions (Legacy)
The Boundary Conditions dialog box lets you select the loads and constraints to apply to your analysis. You can
apply boundary conditions as both master boundary conditions or in cases (depending on analysis type). Once you
have entered this data, pick Next to continue setting up the analysis.
 Setting the ANSYS Analysis Parameters (Legacy) 8-61

On this dialog box, the fields available for ANSYS are:

• Constraints: pick a constraint set for your model.
• Loads: pick a load set for your model.
Cases (Legacy)
Cases let you perform multiple analyses with different combinations of load and/or constraint sets. The analysis
program will generate one output set for each case.

On this dialog box, you can enter a Case ID, Title and Manual Control options. Once you have entered this data,
pick Next to continue defining the case. (The master requests and conditions provide the defaults for the cases.
 8-62 Analysis Program Interfaces

The Manual Control options include:

• Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface will not write the load, constraint, and load option data to the
ANSYS input file. Start and End Text will be written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the load, constraint, and load option data in the input
file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the load, constraint, and load option data in the input file.

8.4.2 Writing an ANSYS Model with File, Export

Note: This method is obsolete and has been removed from the default configuration of FEMAP. If you need to
use it for any reason, you must use the File, Preferences command, click the Interfaces tab, and check
the option for “Enable Old Analysis Interfaces”. The use of this method for translation is NOT recom-
mended. Use the Model, Analysis method instead.

The File, Export, Analysis Model command lets you write your FEMAP model into a file that can be read by
ANSYS PREP7. This file contains PREP7 commands, just like the ones you would use if you were going to run
ANSYS directly.
Starting to Export
After you choose File, Export, Analysis Model and select ANSYS, there are ten write options available: Static,
Modes/Eigenvalues, Transient Dynamic/Time History, Frequency/Harmonic Response, Random Response, Buck-
ling, Nonlinear Static, Nonlinear Transient Response, Steady State Heat Transfer, and Transient Heat Transfer.
Pick the type of analysis that you plan to perform. Next, you will see the ANSYS Model Write dialog box.
ANSYS Model Write
This dialog box includes the following fields:
Revision
It is very important that you set this option correctly for the version of ANSYS that you will be using. There are
significant changes in commands and conventions between ANSYS Revisions 4.4 and 5.x And Above. If you
choose the incorrect version, your model will almost certainly fail to run. Revision 5.x And Above is the default.
Furthermore, only static and modal analysis are available for ANSYS Revision 4.4.
Title
Enter a title for the analysis.
Skip Preprocessor Command
If you check this option, FEMAP will not write the /PREP7 line at the top of the file.
Write All Groups as Components
If you check this option, FEMAP will write all groups as ANSYS “Components”.
Write Commands for Automatic Solve
If you check this option, FEMAP will write additional commands to the end of your ANSYS file. These commands
automatically perform the analysis when you load the file into ANSYS or run the model in batch mode.
Do not select this option if you are running a static, modal, or nonlinear static analysis and want to load the model
into ANSYS, and then review it in PREP7 before beginning your analysis.
Use Iterative Solver
This option invokes the ANSYS iterative solver, and is only applicable for ANSYS v5.3+.
Large Deformation Effects
For nonlinear analysis (both static and transient), you also have the option to calculate Large Deformation Effects.
Analysis Memory
Enter the amount of memory to allocate for the analysis. If you leave the default of 0, ANSYS will automatically
calculate the memory needed.
 Writing an ANSYS Model with File, Export 8-63

Specifying the File

When you press OK, you will see the standard file access dialog box. You must specify the name of the file that
you want to create. The default file extension will be “.ANS”, but you can choose any file name.
Preparing for Static and Nonlinear Static Analysis
After you choose a file, FEMAP will write your model geometry to the file, then ask for the constraints and loads
that you want to translate. A series of dialog boxes will be displayed.
1. Pick the constraint set (Select Constraint Set to Translate dialog box).
2. Choose one or more load sets to go with that constraint set (Entity Selection dialog box).
3. Create additional constraint and load sets as desired.
With these dialog boxes, you can combine multiple FEMAP constraint and load sets into any number of ANSYS
loading conditions.
You may also define multiple load and constraint sets for nonlinear static analysis; however, the first load set cho-
sen must have active nonlinear analysis options. Pick Model, Load, Nonlinear to set the Load Set Options for Non-
linear Analysis. For details, see Section 4.3.6.1, "Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis..." in FEMAP Commands.)
If nonlinear analysis options are not defined, FEMAP cannot translate the load sets. If nonlinear analysis options
are defined for the first load set, these options will be used for all following load sets since ANSYS does not allow
modifications after entering the solution process.
Preparing for Modal Analysis
If you chose a modal analysis type, you will see the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box.
The ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog controls the master degrees of freedom that will be used in your
modal analysis, as well as the number of modes or frequencies that will be calculated. It includes the following sec-
tions/fields:
Translate Master DOF Set
If you have defined the master degrees of freedom that you want as a separate constraint set, check Translate Con-
straint Set, and choose the set from the drop-down list. If not, you may need to check the Automatic DOF Selection
Enable option.
Automatic DOF Selection
Enable instructs ANSYS to automatically select the master degrees of freedom. Enter the Number of DOF that you
want ANSYS. If you only want ANSYS to select translational degrees of freedom, check the Exclude Rotational
DOF option.
Modal Expansion
For Rev 5, you can:
• select the Number of Modes to extract
• limit modal extraction to a Min Frequency/Max Frequency range
• calculate elemental results (forces, stresses...) with the Calculate Element Results option; otherwise, only nodal
results (mode shapes) will be computed
These options only apply if you are writing solution commands to the file.
Preparing for Transient and Nonlinear Transient Analyses
Preparing for these types of analyses is very similar to preparing for static and modal analysis except that you may
select only one load set and one constraint set.
To prevent translation errors, be careful to set appropriate options for both the dynamic load set (set from Model,
Load, Dynamic Analysis) and the analysis type (set from File, Export, Analysis Model). The interface won’t write
the load set to the ANSYS solver if the Solution Method is turned off. It also won’t write the load set if the Solution
Method (for example, Modal Frequency) doesn’t match the analysis type (for example, Transient Dynamic/Time
History).
If the analysis type and the solution method for the load set) match, FEMAP will automatically determine whether
to use a FULL (direct) or MODAL analysis method. If a direct method is active in the Dynamic Analysis Solution
 8-64 Analysis Program Interfaces

Option, the Constraint Set dialog box appears and you can select the appropriate constraint set, after which the
translation is completed. If the modal analysis method is active, you will be able to define additional parameters
ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box.
Translating for nonlinear transient analysis is identical to transient analysis, except that the modal transient method
is not available, nonlinear analysis options must be active, and you can choose to activate Large Deformation
Effects. If a modal transient solution method is selected, or nonlinear analysis options are not active, an error mes-
sage appears and the load set is not written.
Preparing for Frequency/Harmonic Response Analysis
Preparing for frequency analysis is identical to transient analysis except for an additional dialog box which appears
at the end of translation. This dialog box is identical to the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box and is
used to select the number of frequencies and the frequency range to be analyzed. If a modal frequency solution
method is chosen, this dialog box will appear twice. The first time you must choose the options for the initial modal
analysis, while the second time it appears you can only choose the Number of Frequencies, Min/Max Frequency,
and whether to calculate element results. All other options are disabled.
Preparing for Random Response Analysis
Preparing for random analysis is identical to transient dynamic/time history analysis, except that:
• the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box always appears because a modal analysis is required before
every random analysis.
• you can select multiple load sets. All displacement values in the chosen load sets will be exported as base exci-
tations (D), while all forces will be applied as nodal excitations (F).
• you can define output for a random analysis with the ANSYS Output for Random Analysis dialog box.
Preparing for Buckling Analysis
Buckling analysis simply requires the writing of a Static Solution followed by a Buckling Solution. Only one load
set and one constraint set may be chosen for Buckling Analysis. The only other input required is the number of
modes to be extracted and whether Elemental Results should be calculated. These are selected in the standard
ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box.
To prepare for a buckling analysis:
1. Build and mesh the FEMAP model. Apply one constraint set and one load set.
2. When you export the model, use the ANSYS Dynamic Analysis Options dialog box to enter the number of modes
to be extracted and whether elemental results should be calculated.
Notes on ANSYS Dynamic Analyses
This topic reviews the limitations on transient and frequency response loading conditions in ANSYS. Loads on the
same node or elemental face must have the same time history (transient) or same phase (frequency). If they do not,
FEMAP will write the loading conditions assuming the last time history/phase, and you will most likely get results
for a different loading condition than desired.
Also, with regard to Rayleigh damping, you can define alpha and beta damping for frequency analysis by defining
the overall structural damping coefficient (G) and in some cases, the frequencies for element and system damping.
For frequency and random response analyses, FEMAP will automatically compute alpha and beta. If only one fre-
quency is defined for the analysis, FEMAP assumes alpha is 0, and computes beta from G/wi where wi is the fre-
quency. If a range of frequencies are specified, FEMAP will compute alpha and beta based on the equation
G = alpha/wi + beta*wi

by assuming G is constant over the frequency range. Two simultaneous equations are produced at the two frequen-
cies which define the range.
For Rayleigh damping in transient analysis, FEMAP uses the Frequency for System Damping (W3 - HZ) and Fre-
quency for Element Damping (W - Hz) input on the Load Set Options for Dynamic Analysis dialog box (Model,
Load, Dynamic Analysis) to compute alpha and beta damping values. Alpha is simply the product of the overall
structural damping coefficient (G) and W3 (Frequency for System Damping). Beta is G divided by W4 (Frequency
for Element Damping). If G is zero, Rayleigh damping is ignored. Also, if W3 or W4 is zero, alpha or beta, respec-
tively, will not be written.
 Performing an ANSYS Analysis (Legacy) 8-65

Preparing for Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis

Preparing for steady-state heat transfer analysis is just like preparing for static analysis, except that instead of defin-
ing nodal constraints, you define nodal temperatures (in a load set) for your boundary conditions.
Preparing for Nonlinear Contact Analysis
Surface-to-surface contact is defined in ANSYS using a combination of contact surface and target segment ele-
ments. ANSYS looks for contact only between contact surfaces and target segments that share the same real con-
stant set. To define contact for ANSYS:
• Define the real constant set using the Model, Contact, Contact Property command. Pick the ANSYS... button to
modify the KEYOPTs.
• Define the target segments using the Model, Contact, Segment Surface command. The target segments
(TARGE169 (2-D) and TARGE170 (3-D)) can be either rigid or deformable. When defining a rigid target, you
can use only line elements or Face 1 of a plate element.
• Define the contact surfaces using the Model, Contact, Segment Surface command. The contact surfaces can be
2-D (CONTA171 and CONTA172) or 3-D (CONTA173 and CONTA174), and must be deformable.
• Model a contact pair using the Model, Contact, Contact Pair command. The dialog box asks for a Master (the
target segment) and a Slave (the contact surface), as well as a Property (the shared real constants set).
• Set up the time steps for a nonlinear analysis using the Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis command.
For more information about these commands, see Section 4.4, "Creating Connections and Regions"in FEMAP
Commands.

Hint: To create a rigid entity, use line elements for 2-D analysis and plate elements with the element normal
direction facing the contact for 3-D analysis.

Special Cases
Depending on the contents of your model, you may see additional questions or warnings as the file is translated.
For example, ANSYS requires certain IDs, especially for coordinate systems. If your model has entities that are
outside of the allowable ID range, FEMAP will ask if you want to renumber prior to translating. Likewise, axisym-
metric and other 2-D elements must lie in the global XY plane for ANSYS. If you have built your model in a differ-
ent global plane, FEMAP will ask if you want to automatically realign it to the XY plane. FEMAP can only “flip”
between global planes. You should never build an axisymmetric model in a skewed plane.
For axisymmetric models, you will also have an opportunity to specify a scale factor for loads. This factor is nor-
mally 1.0, but can be adjusted depending on whether you specified loads on a per radian or per revolution (360
degrees) basis. This is especially important since the required conventions change between ANSYS Revision 4.4
and 5.0.

8.4.3 Performing an ANSYS Analysis (Legacy)

Depending on where you plan to run ANSYS, the preliminary steps can be somewhat different. For example, if you
are not running ANSYS on the same computer as FEMAP, you will have to transfer the file to the computer where
ANSYS resides, then launch ANSYS, either interactively or in batch mode
If FEMAP is on the machine as ANSYS, the basic approach is to launch ANSYS by clicking the Analyze button in
the Analysis Set Manager. In addition, ANSYS must be properly setup to communicate with FEMAP.
The preferred method is to use the File, Preference command, select the Solvers tab, then use the “...” button in the
Ansys section to browse to the desired ANSYS executable. The full directory path to the ANSYS executable can be
manually entered in the Program field as well. For more information, see Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers"
Alternatively, before you start FEMAP, you can first define an environment variable in Windows. Name the vari-
able ANSYS_EXE, give it a value equal to the complete file/path name of the ANSYS executable. For example:
ANSYS_EXE = c:\ansys\AnsysXX.exe
Where “XX” is the version of ANSYS (ANSYS_EXE = c:\ansys\Ansys190.exe). Once this variable is set, FEMAP
will automatically launch ANSYS when you press Analyze from the Analysis Set Manager or when using the File,
Analyze command. FEMAP will monitor the analysis and return results when it is finished.
 8-66 Analysis Program Interfaces

For details on configuring other solvers to run using local settings See: Section 4.11.2.1, "Run Analysis Using
Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Command Guide

Note: Once this environment variable has been defined, FEMAP will be able to launch the analysis program
and monitor the job until it is complete. Section 4.11.2.2, "Analysis Monitors"

It is sometime necessary to set the default ANSYS product so ANSYS uses the appropriately licensed product
when running in batch mode.
To define the startup product for ANSYS add the following environment variable:
ANSYS90_PRODUCT=product_type

where product_type is the variable defining the product for which you are licensed (i.e. set ANSYS90_PROD-
UCT=ANE3FL)
for more on setting the ANSYS product see “Changing the Default Product for Start-up on Windows” in the
ANSYS documentation.
NOTE: When changing environment variables you must close and restart FEMAP before the environment changes
take effect.
• To run interactively, start ANSYS, and enter the command:
/INPUT, filename, ANS

where “filename” is the name of the file that you created. This assumes that the file is in the current directory
and you used the default filename extension.
• To run in batch mode, you can specify the name of your model on the ANSYS command line, as follows:
ANSYS -I filename.ANS

Use the -O command line option to name the output file, and the -J option to name other files. If you are plan-
ning to run in batch mode, make certain you have FEMAP write the commands for automatic solution in your
file.

8.4.4 Reading ANSYS Models (Legacy)

Just as you can translate a FEMAP model to ANSYS, you can also read ANSYS models into FEMAP. Since
FEMAP reads PREP7 commands, there are several possible files that can be read.
If you built your model with PREP7, you should have an ANSYS log file that contains a list of all of your com-
mands. If you only used commands that FEMAP supports, you can read your log file. In most cases however, this
will not be possible. The log file will probably contain meshing or other model generation commands that cannot
be read. In that case, load your model into ANSYS and use the CDWRIT command to produce an expanded file
(normally FILE28) as follows:
CDWRITE,,,,,,,UNBLOCKED

The CDWRIT command expands meshing and other generation commands into a format that FEMAP can read.
Reading an expanded file does not guarantee that every command will be read, but it certainly increases the number
of commands that are supported.
When you begin to read a file, you will be asked for the ANSYS Revision level (4.4 or 5.0 - 9.0) of the file that you
are going to read. Again, just like when you write a file for ANSYS, this is an important selection. Due to the dif-
ferences in conventions, it is very unlikely that your model will translate correctly if you choose the wrong revi-
sion.
The only other input required is to select the file that you want to read using the standard file access dialog box.

8.4.5 Reading ANSYS Analysis Results (Legacy)

When you have completed your ANSYS analysis, you can load the results into FEMAP for post-processing. You
must always start with a FEMAP model that corresponds to the ANSYS analysis. If you do not have one, or if you
have changed the ANSYS files since you translated them from FEMAP, you must first start a new FEMAP model
and read the ANSYS model, as described in the previous section.
 I-DEAS Interfaces 8-67

Revision 4.4
For Rev 4.4 (and before), FEMAP can read two types of ANSYS output files: the binary output found in the stan-
dard ANSYS FILE12, or the “formatted” output produced by the BCDCNV command and typically written to
FILE14. In either case, FEMAP assumes a default file extension of “.DAT”. You do not have to tell FEMAP which
type of file you are reading. You simply specify the file name and FEMAP determines the type based on the con-
tents of the file.
If you are running ANSYS on the same computer as FEMAP, the binary FILE12 is usually the best approach. If
you are running FEMAP on a different computer, or are having trouble reading the binary files, the formatted files
can often provide a more reliable alternative.
Revision 5.0 - 9.0
FEMAP reads the standard binary results file from Rev 5 to Rev 9.0. This file is created automatically by ANSYS,
and FEMAP assumes a default file extension of “.RST” for structural results and “.RTH” for thermal results. The
results file is in ANSYS external file format and can be moved between computers so that FEMAP can read it.
These files are binary and should be transferred between computers as binary files.
To load your results, choose the File, Import Analysis Results command and select ANSYS. After you select the
ANSYS revision, FEMAP will display the standard file access dialog box so you can choose the file that you want
to read. Before reading data from a file, you will see a brief description of the file in the Messages window, and you
will be asked to confirm that this is the file that you want to read.
Revision 10.0 and Above
FEMAP reads the standard binary results file from 10.0 and Above. Similar to 5.0 - 9.0, this file is created automat-
ically by ANSYS, and FEMAP assumes a default file extension of “.RST” for structural results and “.RTH” for
thermal results. The results file is in ANSYS external file format and can be moved between computers so that
FEMAP can read it. These files are binary and should be transferred between computers as binary files.
Output for Post-processing (Legacy)
The format and contents of the ANSYS output files are described in the ANSYS User’s Manual, Programmers
Manual, and in the description of the ANSYS Element Library.
You must have a FEMAP model before reading the output file. FEMAP does not read the model information from
your results file. FEMAP does read the displacements, elemental forces, stresses and strains, and reaction forces.

8.5 I-DEAS Interfaces

There are two direct interfaces between FEMAP and I-DEAS. You can either write a FEMAP model to the I-DEAS
universal file format, or read an existing I-DEAS model. Both of these interfaces use the I-DEAS Simulation
universal file datasets. These datasets may not be compatible with all versions of I-DEAS, or with universal files
created in other applications. You cannot currently transfer geometry (points, curves, surfaces, or volumes)
between I-DEAS and FEMAP using these interfaces.
For more information on the entities that are translated, see Section 7.1, "Translation Table for ANSYS, NAS-
TRAN, and MSC Patran".

8.5.1 Writing an I-DEAS Model

To translate your model to I-DEAS universal file format, choose the File, Export, Analysis Model command, select
the I-DEAS format, and press Write. You will see the standard file access dialog box, with the default extension set
to “.UNV”. Select the file name that you want, and press OK. You will then see the I-DEAS dialog box, which
enables you to control the part name and unit system that I-DEAS will use to interpret the universal file data.
Selection of part name and unit system is very important if you have coordinate systems or material data in your
model.
Part Name:
Here you can specify the name of the part in I-DEAS to contain your coordinate systems. You can specify any
name you want, up to 40 characters.
 8-68 Analysis Program Interfaces

Units:
Since the I-DEAS universal file is written in terms of a
specific unit system, you must choose the same unit sys-
tem that you used to define your FEMAP model.
FEMAP will not convert your model during the transla-
tion, with the following exceptions:
•Coordinate system locations are always written in
meters in I-DEAS universal file datasets.
•Material data is converted to meter newton (SI) if the
unit system is set to User Defined.
All I-DEAS unit systems are available, including User
Defined. If you select User Defined, you can define scale
factors for length, mass (or force) and temperature, and
also define temperature offset.
Temperature Mode:
The temperature mode controls how I-DEAS interprets
FEMAP temperature data. If the system selected is met-
ric, the choice is Celsius or Kelvin. Otherwise the choice
is Fahrenheit or Rankine.
Write Groups:
Checking this option will write FEMAP groups out to the I-DEAS universal file in the proper format.
User Defined Units:
These controls let you: enter a scale factor for length, select whether to define a mass or force scaling factor, enter a
mass or force scaling factor, enter a temperature scaling factor and/or enter a temperature offset
I-DEAS will use these values to interpret the data in the universal file.
After you have selected any appropriate options, FEMAP will immediately write the I-DEAS universal file. You
can read this file into I-DEAS using the File, Import command.

8.5.2 Reading an I-DEAS Model

Reading an I-DEAS Simulation universal file is even easier than writing one. Open a new model, choose the File,
Import, Analysis Model command, and select the I-DEAS format. You will see the standard file access dialog box,
and you can choose the file that you want to read. There are no options when reading an I-DEAS file. FEMAP sim-
ply reads all of the universal file datasets that it can interpret.
Coordinate system data is always written to universal files in meters. Material data is always written in the units it
was created in (not necessarily the same as the units that the rest of the universal file datasets are written in). Both
coordinate system and material data are converted when read into FEMAP.
If you wish to work in FEMAP in units other than those defined in the universal file, several FEMAP units conver-
sion factor files are available to convert between I-DEAS unit systems. Use the Tools, Convert Units command to
apply these to the FEMAP model.
 LS-DYNA Interfaces 8-69

8.6 LS-DYNA Interfaces

FEMAP provides direct interfaces to the LS-DYNA file formats. You can write a FEMAP model for analysis in
LS-DYNA, or read analysis results for post-processing.
Topics in this section include:
• Section 8.6.1, "Writing an LS-DYNA Model with Model, Analysis"
• Section 8.6.2, "Writing an LS-DYNA Model with File, Export" (Obsolete)
• Section 8.6.3, "Performing an LS-DYNA Analysis"
• Section 8.6.4, "Reading an LS-DYNA Analysis Model"
• Section 8.6.5, "Post-processing LS-DYNA Results"
For more information on the entities that are translated, see:
• Section 7.2, "Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS"

8.6.1 Writing an LS-DYNA Model with Model, Analysis

The Model, Analysis command opens the Analysis Set Manager, which enables you to write a FEMAP model to
LS-DYNA. Alternatively, you can also use the File, Export, Analysis Model command (see Section 8.6.2, "Writing
an LS-DYNA Model with File, Export") but this is not recommended.

8.6.1.1 General Analysis Process Overview

The Analysis Set Manager lets you create an analysis set, which is an input file for LS-DYNA. To define an analy-
sis set:
1. Pick Model, Analyze to open the Analysis Set Manager dialog box.
2. Pick the first item on the list, then pick New. (You can also double-click on the item).
3. On the Analysis Set dialog box, choose 28..LS-DYNA as the Analysis Program. Select the Analysis Type:
9..Explicit Transient Dynamics or 13..Implicit Transient Dynamics. Enter a title. The title is simply exported as
the content of the *TITLE command in the LS-DYNA input file.
You can choose to use a Linked Solver or VisQ. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section 4.11.2.1, "Run Analy-
sis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Commands Manual for more information.
4. When you choose 13..Implicit Transient Dynamics, FEMAP will write out the following entries by default:
*CONTROL_TERMINATION with a 0. in the first field
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_TERMINATION with 0.0 in the first 5 fields and a 3 in the 6th field
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_GENERAL with a 1 in the 1st field and a 0. in the 2nd field
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_AUTO with 1 in the 1st field, nothing in the 2nd and 3rd fields, and 0.01 in the 4th
field
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLVER with a 0 in the first 3 fields
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLUTION with 0 in fields 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7 on the first line and the first 4 fields
on the second line along with a 0.0 in the 4th field of the first line
5. Pick Next to open the LS-DYNA Model Options dialog box. (Alternatively, you can pick OK to close the Analy-
sis Set dialog box. From the analysis set list, you can then double-click on an option to bring up the dialog box
where the option is defined.) Select the Export Options for this analysis.
6. Pick Next to open the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box. The “master requests and conditions” are the
default boundary conditions. Enter a title.
7. Pick Next to open the LS-DYNA Analysis Control dialog box. Select the Analysis Conditions, Analysis Info,
Solver Options, and Additional Output requests for this analysis
8. Pick Next to open the Boundary Conditions dialog box. Select the constraints and loads.
See Section 8.6.1.2, "Setting the LS-DYNA Analysis Parameters" for descriptions of the LS-DYNA interface dia-
log boxes
 8-70 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.6.1.2 Setting the LS-DYNA Analysis Parameters

To set up an LS-DYNA analysis, you will work through the following dialog boxes:
• "LS-DYNA Model Options"
• "Master Requests and Conditions"
• "LS-DYNA Analysis Control"
• "Boundary Conditions"
LS-DYNA Model Options
The LS-DYNA Model Options dialog box contains Export Options and a Manual Control section to enter text into
the input file using the Analysis Set Manager.

Export Options
This section controls export options for rigid body reference nodes and plate parts.
Rigid Reference Nodes
Rigid references nodes are used in FEMAP to define motion of a given rigid body, instead of requiring prescribed
conditions on all nodes of the rigid body. Many times this node will be a node in the model that is free (massless)
whose sole purpose is to describe the motion of the rigid body. By default, FEMAP will find these nodes and pre-
vent them from being written to the LS-DYNA input file. The motion of the node, as well as any forces or
moments, will then be assigned to the rigid contact segment that references the node.
There may be times, however, when you would like to export this node. By turning on this option, FEMAP will
export these nodes just like any other nodes in the model.

Note: Prescribed motion and forces are only assigned to the rigid body if you use a material Other Type 20,
LS-DYNA rigid material for the property associated with the contact segment

Material Based Plate Parts

This option will cause FEMAP to write all parts based upon the materials that they reference, not the properties. It
should be typically left off unless you have a variable thickness shell model. This option is very useful in this cir-
cumstance.
Since FEMAP defines the plate thickness on the property card, there is one property for every thickness variation.
FEMAP also typically exports each part based upon the property. If you have a large variable thickness plate
model, there could be literally thousands of PARTs written by FEMAP, possibly accessing the same material. When
this option is checked, however, FEMAP will build the parts based on the common materials, and the output will
contain only as many parts as there are materials. Be careful, however, to define different materials for each part,
 Setting the LS-DYNA Analysis Parameters 8-71

even if they are the same material, because without reference to the property, FEMAP will have no way of telling
the difference between parts, except by material ID.
Model Control
Portion of Model to Write
Allows selection of a previously defined group, then only writes the supported entities in that group to the LS-Dyna
input file. In some cases, exporting elements without associated nodes or material/property entries may be desired,
but this creates an input file which cannot be run by LS-Dyna unless additional entities are added to the file.

Note: If a “ready to run” input file is desired, it may be helpful to use the Group, Operations, Add Related
Entities command on the group before selected with this option. See "Group, Operations, Add Related
Entities..." in Section 6.4.3.2, "Group, Operations Menu" of the FEMAP Commands Manual for more
information.

Skip CSys, Skip Nodes, Skip Materials, Skip Properties, Skip Elements
When enabled, the entity type selected to “skip” will not be written to the LS-Dyna input file. For example, if Skip
Nodes and Skip Properties are enabled, then no nodes or properties will be exported.
Skip Groups
When enabled, groups will not be written as *SET_ entries to the LS-Dyna input file, but entities contained in those
groups are still exported unless one of the other Skip options is enabled.
Skip Functions
When enabled, functions (*DEFINE_CURVE entries) are not written to the LS-Dyna input file. In addition, any
loads or material properties which were functionally-dependent in the model no longer reference functions.
Skip Misc
When enabled, comments starting with “$”, *KEYWORD, *TITLE with corresponding “title”, *CONTROL TER-
MINATION with corresponding value, *DATABASE_BINARY_D3PLOT with corresponding value, *END, and
other entries are not written to the LS-Dyna input file.
Manual Control
• Skip Standard: If enabled, the export options will not be written to the LS-DYNA input file. Instead, only the
text specified for Start Text and End Text in the LS-DYNA Model Options dialog box is written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the Export Options in the input file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the Export Options in the input file.
Master Requests and Conditions
In an LS-DYNA analysis, the master requests and conditions are the default boundary conditions. The analysis will
generate one output set for the master requests and conditions.

On the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box, you can enter a Title and Manual Control options. Once you
have entered this data, pick Next to set up LS-DYNA Analysis Control.
 8-72 Analysis Program Interfaces

The Manual Control options include:

• Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface will not write the load, constraint, and load option data to the
LS-DYNA input file. Start and End Text will be written to the input file.
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to beginning of the load, constraint, and load option data in the input file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the load, constraint, and load option data in the input file.
LS-DYNA Analysis Control
The LS-DYNA Analysis Control dialog box controls many different aspects about the solver:

Analysis Conditions
Initial Body Load Group
When you have an angular velocity defined as a body load in FEMAP (Model, Load, Body) this option allows you
to select a single Group to apply the angular velocity. The Group MUST contain a property.
If you have a Group with a property and an angular velocity body load in the load set designated for Initial Condi-
tions in the Boundary Conditions dialog box, then the *INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION card will be writ-
ten out for this property only instead of the whole model.
Mass Damping Value
If the Mass Damping option is on, FEMAP will export the value you enter to the *DAMPING_GLOBAL card.
This will also override any material-based mass damping associated with the model.
If a mass damping value is not entered, damping will not be considered in the model unless the you specify either
the Frequency for System Damping (W3) or the Frequency for Element Damping (W4) under Model, Load,
Dynamic Analysis, You must also define a damping value for the material. If these values are specified, FEMAP
will export damping values for each part that has a damping value for the material. The mass damping value is sim-
ply the product of the damping value on the material card (2*C/Co) and W4. The results are exported to the
*DAMPING_PART_MASS card. Stiffness damping is obtained by dividing the material damping value by W3.
The result is then exported to the *DAMPING_PART_STIFFNESS card.
Entering a global mass damping value will prevent the export of the DAMPING_PART_MASS card. A*DAMP-
ING_PART_STIFFNESS card, however, will be written for all materials with a damping value as long as W3 is not
zero.
Solver Options
Checking Springback will write out the *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLVER card with a “2” in the first field. If both
are selected, the Springback option takes precedence. In addition, you can specify Memory in Megawords and the
Processor count using an integer value.
 Setting the LS-DYNA Analysis Parameters 8-73

When the Advanced... button is clicked, the LS-Dyna Solver Options - *CONTROL dialog box will appear:

This dialog can be used to enter values for the *CONTROL_TIMESTEP entry (available for both analysis types),
as well as the *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_AUTO entry, and/or the *CONTROL_IMPLICIT_GENERAL entry (only
available when Analysis Type is set to “13..Implicit Transient Dynamics” in the Analysis Set dialog box). Consult
the LS-DYNA Keyword User’s Manual - Volume I for more information.
Analysis Info and Additional Output
These sections let you define Termination Time, Output Time Interval, and Additional Output information. The
Output Time Interval is used to generate the D3PLOT post-processing file. Results for all nodes and elements are
recovered at this time interval. Additional time intervals can be specified for time history (D3THDT), and ASCII
(NODOUT and ELOUT) files. You may also limit output to these files to just nodes and elements contained in a
FEMAP group. If no group is selected, results will be requested for all nodes and elements.

Note: A relatively large time step is typically chosen for the output interval in comparison to the ASCII and
time history files. These outputs are typically used to obtain results at a very fine time step. Thus, output
to these files are typically limited to a few key nodes and elements.

Boundary Conditions
Select the Loads and Constraints to use for this analysis, as well as the Initial Conditions. When you select a load
set for Initial Conditions, only those loads which are pertinent to initial conditions, such as velocities and tempera-
tures, will be exported from this load set. Since velocities and temperatures can also be applied throughout the his-
tory in the load set chosen under Loads, it is best to define a load set specifically for initial conditions
 8-74 Analysis Program Interfaces

On this dialog box, the fields available for LS-DYNA are:

• Constraints: pick a constraint set for your model.
• Loads: pick a load set for your model.
• Initial Conditions: pick a load set representing initial conditions for your model.

8.6.2 Writing an LS-DYNA Model with File, Export

Note: This method is obsolete and has been removed from the default configuration of FEMAP. If you need to
use it for any reason, you must use the File, Preferences command, click the Interfaces tab, and check
the option for “Enable Old Analysis Interfaces”. The use of this method for translation is NOT recom-
mended. Use the Model, Analysis method instead.

The File, Export, Analysis Model command allows you to write your FEMAP model into a file that can be analyzed
by LS-DYNA. Simply choose this command, select LS-DYNA, and Explicit Transient Dynamics under Format.
Once you make these selections, you will see the standard file access dialog box, where you can specify the name
of the file to be created. The default file name extension for this file is “.DYN”, but you can choose any name.
After choosing a file name, you will see the following LS-DYNA Analysis Control dialog box. This dialog box lets
you specify a title for the analysis, the load and constraint sets, specific export options, and time step values.
The title is simply exported as the content of the *TITLE command in the LS-DYNA input file, while the remain-
ing options are defined more fully below.
Analysis Conditions
Select the Loads and Constraints to use for this analysis, as well as the Initial Conditions. When you select a load
set for Initial Conditions, only those loads which are pertinent to initial conditions, such as velocities and tempera-
 Writing an LS-DYNA Model with File, Export 8-75

tures, will be exported from this load set. Since velocities and temperatures can also be applied throughout the his-
tory in the load set chosen under Loads, it is best to define a load set specifically for initial conditions.
Mass Damping Value
If the Mass Damping option is on, FEMAP will export the value you enter to the *DAMPING_GLOBAL card.
This will also override any material-based mass damping associated with the model.
If a mass damping value is not entered, damping will not be considered in the model unless the you specify either
the Frequency for System Damping (W3) or the Frequency for Element Damping (W4) under Model, Load,
Dynamic Analysis, You must also define a damping value for the material. If these values are specified, FEMAP
will export damping values for each part that has a damping value for the material. The mass damping value is sim-
ply the product of the damping value on the material card (2*C/Co) and W4. The results are exported to the
*DAMPING_PART_MASS card. Stiffness damping is obtained by dividing the material damping value by W3.
The result is then exported to the *DAMPING_PART_STIFFNESS card.
Entering a global mass damping value will prevent the export of the DAMPING_PART_MASS card. A*DAMP-
ING_PART_STIFFNESS card, however, will be written for all materials with a damping value as long as W3 is not
zero.
Export Options
This section controls export options for rigid body reference nodes and plate parts.
Rigid Reference Nodes
Rigid references nodes are used in FEMAP to define motion of a given rigid body, instead of requiring prescribed
conditions on all nodes of the rigid body. Many times this node will be a node in the model that is free (massless)
whose sole purpose is to describe the motion of the rigid body. By default, FEMAP will find these nodes and pre-
vent them from being written to the LS-DYNA input file. The motion of the node, as well as any forces or
moments, will then be assigned to the rigid contact segment that references the node.
There may be times, however, when you would like to export this node. By turning on this option, FEMAP will
export these nodes just like any other nodes in the model.

Note: Prescribed motion and forces are only assigned to the rigid body if you use a material Other Type 20,
LS-DYNA rigid material for the property associated with the contact segment

Material Based Plate Parts

This option will cause FEMAP to write all parts based upon the materials that they reference, not the properties. It
should be typically left off unless you have a variable thickness shell model. This option is very useful in this cir-
cumstance.
Since FEMAP defines the plate thickness on the property card, there is one property for every thickness variation.
FEMAP also typically exports each part based upon the property. If you have a large variable thickness plate
model, there could be literally thousands of PARTs written by FEMAP, possibly accessing the same material. When
this option is checked, however, FEMAP will build the parts based on the common materials, and the output will
contain only as many parts as there are materials. Be careful, however, to define different materials for each part,
even if they are the same material, because without reference to the property, FEMAP will have no way of telling
the difference between parts, except by material ID.
Write Groups as Node Sets
Writes all FEMAP groups as Node Sets in the LS-DYNA input file. This option is checked ON by default.
Analysis Info and Additional Output
These sections let you define Termination Time, Output Time Interval, and additional output information. The Out-
put Time Interval is used to generate the D3PLOT post-processing file. Results for all nodes and elements are
recovered at this time interval. Additional time intervals can be specified for time history (D3THDT), and ASCII
(NODOUT and ELOUT) files. You may also limit output to these files to just nodes and elements contained in a
FEMAP group. If no group is selected, results will be requested for all nodes and elements.

Note: A relatively large time step is typically chosen for the output interval in comparison to the ASCII and
time history files. These outputs are typically used to obtain results at a very fine time step. Thus, output
to these files are typically limited to a few key nodes and elements.
 8-76 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.6.3 Performing an LS-DYNA Analysis

FEMAP can launch LS-DYNA and automatically run your analysis, either from the File Analyze command or
pressing Analyze in Model Analysis, if you first setup the analysis program. To do this, before running FEMAP,
you must establish an environment variable named LSDYNA_EXE. Set the value of this environment variable to
the full path to the LS-DYNA solver executable, for example:
SET LSDYNA_EXE = c:\lsdyna\ls960-nsmp.exe

Once this environment variable has been defined, FEMAP will be able to launch the analysis program and monitor
the job until it is complete.

8.6.4 Reading an LS-DYNA Analysis Model

In addition to the ability to write LS-DYNA models and read in results, FEMAP can also read the nodal locations
and element connectivity from the LS-DYNA binary post-processing files (D3PLOT and D3THDT). There are two
ways to read this information. First, you can choose File, Import, Analysis Model, then choose the output file that
you want to read. In addition, if you start with an empty model and select File, Import, Analysis Results, FEMAP
can read both the model and results in one pass.

Note: FEMAP can currently only read nodes and element connectivity from the results file. The elements con-
tain references to LS-DYNA properties and materials, so you can group the model by property or mate-
rial, but actual records on the properties/materials will be all zero.

8.6.5 Post-processing LS-DYNA Results

When you have completed your LS-DYNA analysis, you can load results into FEMAP for post-processing. To load
results, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command and select LS-DYNA. FEMAP will display the standard
file access dialog box so you can choose the file you want to post-process. FEMAP reads the binary D3PLOT and
D3THDT files.
Both D3PLOT and D3THDT files are a series of files which must be imported. Simply select the D3PLOT or
D3THDT file, and FEMAP will automatically read the entire series. If you have not used the default names for
these files, you will need to change the File of Type to DYNA State Database or DYNA Time History Database to
identify the format.
Once you select the file, you may see a question, “OK to read file as double precision format? The file does not
seem to conform to single precision format.”. It is recommended that you answer Yes for this question when it
appears. Next, the DYNA Results dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to specify the type of data that
you want to recover, and the time steps to recover.
Data Recovery Options
There are three main sections under the type of output. Global variables such as kinetic energy can be read and
stored in FEMAP. These values are stored as functions for plotting purposes. You can also specify the typical nodal
and elemental results.
Step Recovery Options
This section allows you to limit the amount of output sets. You can specify the time range (All, Before, After,
Between, Final), as well as every Nth output set and First Step in New File

Note: These options are very useful for quick check of an analysis to significantly reduce the import time and
model size. You could quickly read in the last step, or only a few steps, check the contact conditions,
and then either read in the full results for further post-processing or modify the model and perform
another analysis.

Note: If you have beams in your model that have a vector defined for the orientation instead of a 3rd node,
FEMAP automatically creates dummy nodes for the LS-DYNA input deck. These nodes do not exist in
the FEMAP model, but results may be recovered for them. This will produce an error message when
reading in LS-DYNA results. In this case, this error message (Output contains entities that do not exist
in your model) can be ignored. The results should still be valid.
 Marc Interfaces 8-77

Time History Data

When importing time history data (D3THDT), you will also have the option to import all information as functions.
You will typically want to keep this option on, since most history files contain large amounts of step data for a few
nodes or elements. This type of output is handled much more efficiently as functions than as standard output. The
FEMAP model size could be orders of magnitude larger when you do not save as functions for a time history file
with a large number of steps for only a few entities.
Old Version Import
This option can be used when importing d3plot files from version before v970. If enable, it simply uses an older
version of the import results translator.

8.7 Marc Interfaces

FEMAP provides direct interfaces to the MSC.Marc file formats. You can write a FEMAP model for analysis in
MSC.Marc, or read analysis results for post-processing.
• Section 8.7.1, "Writing an MSC.Marc Model with Model, Analysis"
• Section 8.7.2, "Writing an MSC.Marc Model with File, Export" (Obsolete)
• Section 8.7.3, "Performing an MSC.Marc Analysis"
• Section 8.7.4, "Reading an MSC.Marc Analysis Model"
• Section 8.7.5, "Post-processing MSC.Marc Results"
For more information on the entities that are translated, see Section 7.2, "Translation Table for ABAQUS, LS-
DYNA, MSC.Marc, and I-DEAS".

8.7.1 Writing an MSC.Marc Model with Model, Analysis

The Model, Analysis, command allows you to write your FEMAP model into a file that can be analyzed by
MSC.Marc 2001.
The export process can be separated into three areas: analysis parameters, model definition, and history definition.
• Parameters include options which set up sizing and initial switches for the analysis.
• Model definition include Model options, Contact Table, Boundary Conditions, and Output.
• History definition include History options, Contact Table, and Boundary Conditions.
The remainder of this section describes in detail the steps for defining a MARC analysis with Model, Analysis. You
will:
1. Define an Analysis set. (See Section 8.7.1.1, "Analysis Set".)
2. Define the Solution Parameters. (See Section 8.7.1.2, "Analysis Parameters").
3. Define the Master case. (See Section 8.7.1.3, "Master Requests and Conditions").
4. Define Model Definition options. (See Section 8.7.1.4, "Model Definition")
5. Define a Contact Table. (See Section 8.7.1.5, "Contact Table".)
6. Define Boundary conditions. (See Section 8.7.1.6, "Boundary Conditions")
7. Define Output Requests. (See Section 8.7.1.7, "Output Requests")
8. Optionally, define the History Definition for additional cases that include different load and constraint sets. (See
Section 4.11.1.6, "Cases"in FEMAP Commands. and Section 8.7.1.9, "MARC History Definition")
• History Definition will also include Load Increment options. (See Section 8.7.1.10, "Load Increment Options")
8.7.1.1 Analysis Set
When you create an analysis set, you define the solution parameters, model options, boundary conditions, output
selection and history steps for the MSC.Marc analysis. An analysis set is stored with the model file, so you can
reuse this data. You can also store an analysis set in a FEMAP analysis library.
To define an analysis set:
1. Pick Model, Analyze to open the Analysis Set Manager dialog box.
 8-78 Analysis Program Interfaces

2. Pick the first item on the list, then pick New. (You can also double-click on the item).
3. Choose the Analysis Program and Analysis Type. These options determine which element types (structural or
heat transfer) will be written, and set the defaults for the other NASTRAN interface dialog boxes.
You can also choose to use a Linked Solver or VisQ. See Section 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section 4.11.2.1, "Run
Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Commands Manual for more informa-
tion.This information determines the remaining options that you define.
4. The best way to define an analysis set is to pick Next to work through the dialog boxes in order. Alternatively,
you can pick OK to close the dialog box. From the analysis set list, you can then doubleclick on a parameter to
bring up the dialog box.
8.7.1.2 Analysis Parameters
After choosing a file name, you will see the MARC Write Parameters dialog box. This dialog box controls the writ-
ing of all parameters to MSC.Marc. The specific options are described below.

Title
Enter a title for the analysis. It can be written to both binary and ASCII output files.
Input
This section allows you to obtain an Echo of the input in the output (*.out) file, write the Extended parameter for
extended input, and to Write Groups as Sets. The Extended parameter will be necessary if any IDs in the model are
above five digits. Without this parameter, all nodal, elemental, property, and material IDs must be under 100,000 or
the analysis will fail due to input errors.
You may also choose to write all FEMAP groups as sets. This is a convenient method to obtain sets which you can
then easily apply loading or other conditions by directly manipulating the MSC.Marc input deck.
 Analysis Parameters 8-79

Manual Control
• If the Skip Standard switch is off, the software writes standard Parameter section.
• Pick Start Text to add text to the beginning of the Parameter section.
• Pick End Text to add text to the end of the Parameter section.
Sizing
This section determines the initial memory allocation (in thousands of Words - kWords) for the overall model, as
well as constraints. The constraint value is not necessary unless you will have a History Definition in your model
that contains more constraints than the Model Definition. If this section is left blank then MSC.Marc will determine
the defaults.
Shell Parameters
This section determines whether the Transverse Shear option is chosen for a plate/shell analysis. You may also
specify the number of integration layers through the thickness of plate elements. The default is 11 layers. Any input
must be between 3 and 15, and be an odd number. If the model contains composites, this value is overridden by the
number of composite layers.
Procedures and Parameters
This section enables you to select between many different parameters available in MSC.Marc.
Follower Force (Incremental Load)
This option controls whether follower forces are employed as well as whether loads applied on History Definitions
are incremental or total. There are actually three different options involved with this one parameter: Follower
Force Stiffness on or off, Total or Incremental Loading, and if Follower Force is on, (3) Follower Force is based
upon Displacement at last iteration or beginning of increment. The one selection will set all three options.
Plasticity
This parameter controls the plasticity procedure that is used in MSC.Marc. There are currently five options for this
parameter. They involve use of either the Additive or Multiplicative Decomposition method. If Additive is desired,
you can also choose from two other options: Mean Normal or Radial Return method, and Small or Large Strain
formulation. Multiplicative Decomposition requires radial return and large strain formulation. Multiplicative
Decomposition is more accurate for large elastic and plastic strains, but it requires that all elasticity be isotropic.
The default for this parameter if not set is Additive Decomposition using the mean normal method and small strain
formulation.
Elasticity
This parameter controls the formulation for large strain elasticity. The default is a total Lagrange formulation. You
may also select an updated Lagrange formulation. If you choose the total Lagrange formulation with Mooney or
Ogden material models, the hybrid element formulation (Herrmann) must be used while the Foam material can use
the standard elements. For updated Lagrange formulation, the standard elements may be used for all three material
types.
Elastic
This option can be implemented for elastic analysis with multiple loads. It essentially builds the stiffness matrix
once, and then repeatedly back substitutes the load vectors to obtain the results. This option should not be used in
nonlinear analysis, and will not be written if the Large Displacement option is checked.

Note: This option will also cause any constraint changes in the History Definition section to be ignored. Since
the decomposition matrix is only formed once, at the end of the Model Definition stage (Increment 0),
changes in constraints cannot be allowed.

Large Displacement, Update, Constant Dilation

These options invoke the Large Displacement option, the updated Lagrange procedure (instead of total), and Con-
stant Dilation. Constant dilation is recommended for lower order elements in nearly incompressible analysis. This
option can also be used for the individual elements by specifying a hybrid element formulation for the lower order
standard element types (bricks, plane strain, and axisymmetric).
 8-80 Analysis Program Interfaces

Bandwidth Optimization, Finite

Bandwidth Optimization uses bandwidth optimizers to reduce computer costs for larger problems. Finite uses the
large strain plasticity option to include the effects of large inelastic deformation.
Max Storage Parameters
This section controls memory allocation for several different lists. Many of these parameters will only be required
if a History Definition has a larger number of lists than the model definition.
Distributed Loads
This parameter controls the memory allocation for elemental and nodal loading. FEMAP will determine the num-
ber of entities and write the DIST LOADS option automatically. The user can override FEMAP by simply defining
the numbers for Lists, Elems, and Nodes.
This is only required if you will be applying more loads in a History Definition than was originally on the Model
Definition inputs include the total number of lists for distributed loads, the maximum number of elements in a dist
loads list (pressure, distributed load, gravity), and the maximum number of nodes in a POINT LOAD list. FEMAP
will export each load as its own list, therefore, the number of lists must be equal to or greater than the total number
of loads. The number of nodes and elements in any specific list, however, will typically be 1 since each load has its
own list containing one member. The one exception to this is FEMAP body loads (gravity and rotational velocity),
which will contain the total number of elements in the model in one list.
TYING
This parameter allocates storage for tying data which includes FEMAP rigid elements (MARC Tying Constraints
1-6, 100) and constraint equations (MARC Servo Links).
The maximum number of MARC constraint equations should be set equal to the number of FEMAP rigid elements
in the model, and the number of different types can be safely set to 7 (only 1-6 and 100 are currently supported).
The Servo Nodes should be set to the maximum number of nodes in any constraint equation (set to 2 if no FEMAP
constraint equations), and the Servo Link should be set to the maximum number of FEMAP constraint equations.
Out of Core Storage
This option invokes the ELSTO parameter for large models. It will cause all elemental quantities to be stored in an
auxiliary area (unit 3) to free core memory for calculations. The input for this option is in Words.
Processors
This option enables you to specify the number of CPUs, the vector length and whether the beta matrices are to be
formed in parallel.
8.7.1.3 Master Requests and Conditions
Master Requests and Conditions define the master output requests and boundary conditions (loads and constraints)
for your analysis.

The software will write all of these requests and conditions to the Model section. In addition, you can define cases
which are MSC.Marc history data.
 Model Definition 8-81

8.7.1.4 Model Definition

Once you press Next on the MARC Write Parameters dialog box, the MARC Model Definition dialog box will
appear.

This dialog box is separated into six major sections: Analysis Type, Solver Options Control Definition, Contact
Property, Modal Options, Buckling Parameters.
Analysis Type
Pick the Analysis type to be used in the model definition, choose from 1) Static, 2) Normal Modes/Eigenvalue 3)
Buckling.
Solver Options
This option allows you to chose from several different direct and iterative solvers. When this option is active, you
can also select options for Nonpositive Definite and Nonsysmmetric matrices.
Control Definition
This section determines the type of solution method (including the convergence criteria), and the solver type.
Method
For the solution method choose from either None, the Newton Raphson techniques (Full, Modified, or Strain Cor-
rection) or the Secant method. If you choose a method, you can then also specify bounding parameters for the num-
ber of recycles, as well as the maximum steps for a run. If no values are entered, the defaults will be used.
You may also define the convergence criteria. You have six options in this box, which are really the combination
of two outputs defining the basis of convergence: Force, Displacement, or Strain Energy for either relative or abso-
lute values. The selection of the Nonpositive Definite option in the Solver Options section will force solutions of
problems with a nonpositive definite matrix.
Auto Switch
Enables the Control parameter for switching of convergence testing between residuals and displacements.
Contact Property
All contact segments in MARC are exported to the CONTACT option in MSC.Marc.
 8-82 Analysis Program Interfaces

This option includes contact property information for all contact entities that are written. To define these values,
simply create a contact property in FEMAP, and then select this property under Contact Property. If there are con-
tact segments in the model, FEMAP will use data from the selected contact property as input for the control and
property information on the MSC.Marc CONTACT option. If a contact property is not chosen then the CONTACT
option will not be written.

Note: You do not have to define contact pairs for MSC.Marc. If no contact pairs are present, and the Contact
Property is selected in the Model Definition, FEMAP will export all contact segments to the CON-
TACT option, and all contact segments will be able to contact one another.

If you have defined contact pairs in FEMAP these will only be written to the CONTACT TABLE if the
contact property is referenced under Contact Property. If no property is referenced then FEMAP will
simply use the Contact Table defined in Section 8.7.1.5, "Contact Table"

Static Analysis
When performing a static analysis the Model Definition dialog box is the identical dialog box used for the History
Definition.
If you do not need to define a history for your analysis then there is no need to define the History section. This is
useful in linear analysis when all constraints and loading conditions have been applied in the Model Definition sec-
tion.
The one major difference between the Model Definition and History Definition is that all options in the dialog box
will not be available. The contact property information is only available in the Model Definition.
Modal Analysis Options
Modal Options are only be available for load cases defined in the History Definition (i.e., a “Case” in Analysis Set
Manager).

For modal analysis the eigenvalue extraction is obtained by creating History Definition and setting the Analysis
Type to Modal. Then define the options for the MODAL SHAPE Num of Modes, Min Frequency, Max Frequency,
and set checking to either None or Strum Sequence.
When Modal Analysis is defined for a History step then FEMAP will automatically create a second history which
simply issues the Recover command to retrieve the modes
Buckling Options
Buckling Parameters will be available only in the Model definition and when Buckling has been set as the Analysis
type.

When the Buckling options are defined for the Model Definition FEMAP will write the BUCKLE parameter with
the Max Num Modes and Number of Modes w/ Positive Eigenvalues options.
Then when you want to solve the buckling analysis simply create a History Definition with the Analysis Type set to
Buckle. When buckling is defined in a History step then FEMAP will automatically create a second history which
simply issues the Recover command to retrieve the buckling modes
 Contact Table 8-83

8.7.1.5 Contact Table

The Contact Table allows a user to write a CONTACT TABLE command to activate or deactivate contact between
specific contact segments. Begin by defining contact segments for each area that may be in contact and optionally
define a contact property. The contact property can be chosen in the Marc Model Section 8.7.1.4, "Model Defini-
tion". This will write contact controls defined in the property to the CONTACT option.

The contact table can be defined for the model definition as well as individual history load steps. The table contains
rows and columns that list existing contact segments in your model. Find the row that contains one of the contact
segments that you want to put into contact, then find the column that contains the second contact segment that will
be in contact. Simply press the button in the table where the two segments meet. Select the button to change the
type of contact for this pair of contact segments. You have the choice of Blank (No Contact), Glued, or Tied. You
can make changes to the entire table by pressing the All Touching, All Glued or None buttons.
Parameters that are available for the pairs of contact segments are Distance Tolerance, Separation Force, Friction,
or Interference Closure. These can be defined for each pair of contact segments. The pair is automatically activated
when you press the button in the table to change or activate contact for the pair of contact segments. The Parame-
ters can also be set by selecting the two appropriate segments in the list boxes directly to the left of the parameters.
NOTE:
If the number of contact segments in the model is changed, the next time you enter the Contact Table dialog box
FEMAP will fill in previously defined data and insert new empty cells to accommodate the new segments.
8.7.1.6 Boundary Conditions
The Boundary Conditions dialog box allows you to select the Constraint Set, Load Set, and the Initial Conditions
load set for the Model Definition. Any constraints that are permanent in the model should be applied in a constraint
set and chosen here. Often you may define only one constraint set for the analysis, but multiple loading conditions.
If all loading conditions are to be specified in the History Definition, the Loads section would be left 0..None for
the Model Definition. The loads typically defined in the Model Definition would be those that resulted in only lin-
 8-84 Analysis Program Interfaces

ear displacements, and then incremental loading would be applied in the History Definition to obtain the nonlinear
results.
Initial conditions, such as initial displacement (INITIAL DISP), velocities (INITIAL VELO), and temperatures
(INITIAL TEMP) should be created in their own load set and referenced in the Initial Conditions input box.
8.7.1.7 Output Requests
These options provide choices for the output files to request from MSC.Marc, as well as the type of output con-
tained in the files. There are four choices: Default, PostProcess Only, Print and PostProcess, and Print Only. Either
Default, PostProcess Only or Print and Postprocess must be selected to post-process results of the analysis in
FEMAP. If Postprocess Only is chosen, a NO PRINT statement will be included in the Model Definition to prevent
output of results to the printed (*.out) file.
You may also select what type of output to included in the files. If you select Postprocess Only, however, you will
not be able to select any nodal outputs. MSC.Marc does not allow you to select the types of nodal output for the
post-processing file. It automatically writes nodal information to the post file (*.t16 typically); therefore, these
options are not applicable to the Postprocess Only option. Also, the individual elemental output requests are only
applicable to the post-processing file. If a print option is chosen, the default elemental values will be written to the
print file.

Note: Certain output requests such as heat flux and elemental temperature are not currently supported. These
remain on the dialog box for future incorporation into the translator.

8.7.1.8 Creating Load Cases or History Definition

To create History Definition select No Cases Defined in the analysis set and either double click or press New.

The process is similar to the definition of the model definition. Define the Analysis Case dialog box. The Case ID
is automatically determined.
Manual Control
• If the Skip Standard switch is off, the software writes standard History step.
• Pick Start Text to add text to the beginning of the History step.
• Pick End Text to add text to the end of the History step.
8.7.1.9 MARC History Definition
The History Definition contains the same options available in the Model Definition except that buckling is not
available. See Section 8.7.1.4, "Model Definition"

Note: When selecting a new constraint set in the History Definition, the DISP CHANGE option will be writ-
ten, removing all previous constraints in the model. Therefore, if you simply need to add constraints,
the chosen constraint set must include all previous constraints, as well as new ones. This can be accom-
plished very easily in FEMAP by copying the Model Definition constraint set by using the Model, Con-
straint, Copy command, and then simply adding additional constraints to this set.
 Load Increment Options 8-85

8.7.1.10 Load Increment Options

Load Increment options define the type of time stepping to be used for this load step.

Arc Length Method

If Arc Length Method is set to 0..None (AUTO STEP) then the AUTO STEP option will be used for the analysis.
If the Arc Length Method is set to Crisfield, Riks, Modified Riks, or Crisfield/Modified Riks then AUTO INCRE-
MENT will be used.
As the Arc Length Method is changed the respective control section will be ungrayed and for definition of the avail-
able options.

Note: The preferred time stepping method is to set the Arclength Method to 0..None (AUTO STEP).

8.7.1.11 Contact Table (History definition)

The contact table is defined just as it is in the model definition. See Section 8.7.1.5, "Contact Table"
8.7.1.12 Boundary Conditions (History Definition)
Boundary Conditions are defined just as they were in the Model Definition. See Section 8.7.1.6, "Boundary Condi-
tions"

8.7.2 Writing an MSC.Marc Model with File, Export

Note: This method is obsolete and has been removed from the default configuration of FEMAP. If you need to
use it for any reason, you must use the File, Preferences command, click the Interfaces tab, and check
the option for “Enable Old Analysis Interfaces”. The use of this method for translation is NOT recom-
mended. Use the Model, Analysis method instead.

See Section 8.7.1, "Writing an MSC.Marc Model with Model, Analysis" for the most up to data method of writing
a model for MSC.Marc.
The File, Export, Analysis Model command allows you to write your FEMAP model into a file that can be analyzed
by MSC.Marc. Simply choose the File, Export, Analysis Model command, select MARC, and choose either Static
or Modest. Once you make these selections, you will see the standard file access dialog box, where you can specify
the name of the file to be created. The default filename extension for this file is “.dat”, but you can choose any
name.
 8-86 Analysis Program Interfaces

The export process can be separated into three areas: analysis parameters, model definition, and history definition.
Each of these areas are discussed more completely below.
8.7.2.1 Analysis Parameters
After choosing a file name, you will see the MARC Write Parameters dialog box. This dialog box controls the writ-
ing of all parameters to MSC.Marc. The specific options are described below.

MARC K7/MARC 2000

Use these buttons to choose your version of MARC.
Title
Enter a title for the analysis. It can be written to both binary and ASCII output files.
Sizing
This section determines the initial memory allocation (in thousands of Words - kWords) for the overall model, as
well as constraints. The constraint value is not necessary unless you will have a History Definition in your model
that contains more constraints than the Model Definition.
Input
This section allows you to obtain an Echo of the input in the output (*.out) file, write the Extended parameter for
extended input, and to Write Groups as Sets. The Extended parameter will be necessary if any IDs in the model are
above five digits. Without this parameter, all nodal, elemental, property, and material IDs must be under 100,000 or
the analysis will fail due to input errors.
You may also choose to write all FEMAP groups as sets. This is a convenient method to obtain sets which you can
then easily apply loading or other conditions by directly manipulating the MSC.Marc input deck.
Shell Parameters
This section determines whether the Transverse Shear option is chosen for a plate/shell analysis. You may also
specify the number of integration layers through the thickness of plate elements. The default is 11 layers. Any input
must be between 3 and 15, and be an odd number. If the model contains composites, this value is overridden by the
number of composite layers.
 Analysis Parameters 8-87

Procedures and Parameters

This section enables you to select between many different parameters available in MSC.Marc.
Follower Force (Incremental Load)
This option controls whether follower forces are employed as well as whether loads applied on History Definitions
are incremental or total. There are actually three different options involved with this one parameter: Follower
Force Stiffness on or off, Total or Incremental Loading, and if Follower Force is on, (3) Follower Force is based
upon Displacement at last iteration or beginning of increment. The one selection will set all three options.
Plasticity
This parameter controls the plasticity procedure that is used in MSC.Marc. There are currently five options for this
parameter. They involve use of either the Additive or Multiplicative Decomposition method. If Additive is desired,
you can also choose from two other options: Mean Normal or Radial Return method, and Small or Large Strain
formulation. Multiplicative Decomposition requires radial return and large strain formulation. Multiplicative
Decomposition is more accurate for large elastic and plastic strains, but it requires that all elasticity be isotropic.
The default for this parameter if not set is Additive Decomposition using the mean normal method and small strain
formulation.
Elasticity
This parameter controls the formulation for large strain elasticity. The default is a total Lagrange formulation. You
may also select an updated Lagrange formulation. If you choose the total Lagrange formulation with Mooney or
Ogden material models, the hybrid element formulation (Herrmann) must be used while the Foam material can use
the standard elements. For updated Lagrange formulation, the standard elements amy be used for all three material
types.
Elastic
This option can be implemented for elastic analysis with multiple loads. It essentially builds the stiffness matrix
once, and then repeatedly back substitutes the load vectors to obtain the results. This option should not be used in
nonlinear analysis, and will not be written if the Large Displacement option is checked.

Note: This option will also cause any constraint changes in the History Definition section to be ignored. Since
the decomposition matrix is only formed once, at the end of the Model Definition stage (Increment 0),
changes in constraints cannot be allowed.

Large Displacement, Update, Constant Dilation

These options invoke the Large Displacement option, the updated Lagrange procedure (instead of total), and Con-
stant Dilation. Constant dilation is recommended for lower order elements in nearly incompressible analysis. This
option can also be used for the individual elements by specifying a hybrid element formulation for the lower order
standard element types (bricks, plane strain, and axisymmetric).
Max Storage Parameters
This section controls memory allocation for several different lists. Many of these parameters will only be required
if a History Definition has a larger number of lists than the model definition.
Distributed Loads
This parameter controls the memory allocation for elemental and nodal loading. Again, this is only required if you
will be applying more loads in a History Definition than was originally on the Model Definition inputs include the
total number of lists for distributed loads, the maximum number of elements in a DIST LOADS list (pressure, dis-
tributed load, gravity), and the maximum number of nodes in a POINT LOAD list. FEMAP will export each load
as its own list, therefore, the number of lists must be equal to or greater than the total number of loads. The number
of nodes and elements in any specific list, however, will typically be 1 since each load has its own list containing
one member. The one exception to this is FEMAP body loads (gravity and rotational velocity), which will contain
the total number of elements in the model in one list.
TYING
This parameter allocates storage for tying data which includes FEMAP rigid elements (MARC Tying Constraints
1-6, 100) and constraint equations (MARC Servo Links).
The maximum number of MARC constraint equations should be set equal to the number of FEMAP rigid elements
in the model, and the number of different types can be safely set to 7 (only 1-6 and 100 are currently supported).
 8-88 Analysis Program Interfaces

The Servo Nodes should be set to the maximum number of nodes in any constraint equation (set to 2 if no FEMAP
constraint equations), and the Servo Link should be set to the maximum number of FEMAP constraint equations.
Out of Core Storage
This option invokes the ELSTO parameter for large models. It will cause all elemental quantities to be stored in an
auxiliary area (unit 3) to free core memory for calculations. The input for this option is in Words.
Processors
This option enables you to specify the number of CPUs, the vector length and whether the beta matrices are to be
formed in parallel.
8.7.2.2 Model Definition
Once you press OK on the MARC Write Parameters dialog box, the MARC Model Definition dialog box will
appear. This dialog box is separated into four major sections: Load Selection, Control Definition, Contact Property,
and Output Requests.

Load Selection
The Load Selection area allows you to select the constraint set, load set, and the initial conditions load set for the
Model Definition. Any constraints that are permanent in the model should be applied in a constraint set and chosen
here. Often you may define only one constraint set for the analysis, but multiple loading conditions.
If all loading conditions are to be specified in the History Definition, the load set would be left unchecked for the
Model Definition (in which case you would have had to input values for the Distributed Loads parameter on the
previous dialog box to prevent a fatal error). The loads typically defined in the Model Definition would be those
that resulted in only linear displacements, and then incremental loading would be applied in the History Definition
to obtain the nonlinear results.
Initial conditions, such as initial displacement (INITIAL DISP), velocities (INITIAL VELO), and temperatures
(INITIAL TEMP) should be created in their own load set and referenced in the Initial Conditions input box.
The final option, All Load Sets as Individual Steps, will simply write every load step as an individual History Defi-
nition and will provide no opportunity to change any inputs for the History Definition. If a load set is chosen in the
Model Definition, it will not be repeated in a History Definition.
 History Definition 8-89

Control Definition
This section determines the type of solution method (including the convergence criteria), and the solver type.
Method
For the solution method, you can simply select the default, or choose from either the Newton Raphson techniques
(Full, Modified, or Strain Correction) or the Secant method. If you choose a method, you can then also specify
bounding parameters for the number of recycles, as well as the maximum steps for a run. If no values are entered,
the defaults will be used.
You may also define the convergence criteria as well as choose the Nonpositive Definite option. You have six
options in this box, which are really the combination of two outputs defining the basis of convergence: Force, Dis-
placement, or Strain Energy for either relative or absolute values. The selection of the Nonpositive Definite option
will force solutions of problems with a nonpositive definite matrix.
Solver
This option allows you to chose from several different direct and iterative solvers. When this option is active, you
can also select options for Nonpositive Definite and Nonsysmmetric matrices.
Contact Property
All contact segments in MARC are exported to the CONTACT option in MSC.Marc. This option includes contact
property information for all contact entities contained in the table. To define these values, simply create a contact
property in FEMAP, and then select this property under Contact Property. If there are contact segments in the
model, FEMAP will use data from the selected contact property as input for the control and property information
on the MSC.Marc CONTACT option.

Note: You do not have to define contact pairs for MSC.Marc. If no contact pairs are present, FEMAP will
export all contact segments to the CONTACT option, and all contact segments will be able to contact
one another. If you want to limit contact between the contact segments, simply define contact pairs.
FEMAP will export the contact pairs to a CONTACT TABLE. Once the CONTACT TABLE option is
invoked in MSC.Marc, all contacts are removed, so only those segments placed in contact pairs will be
checked for contact.

Output Destination and Requests

These options provide choices for the output files to request from MSC.Marc, as well as the type of output con-
tained in the files. There are three choices: PostProcess Only, Print and PostProcess, and Print Only. Either Post-
Process Only or Print and Postprocess must be selected to post-process results of the analysis in FEMAP. If
Postprocess Only is chosen, a NO PRINT statement will be included in the Model Definition to prevent output of
results to the printed (*.out) file.
You may also select what type of output to included in the files. If you select Postprocess Only, however, you will
not be able to select any nodal outputs. MSC.Marc does not allow you to select the types of nodal output for the
post-processing file. It automatically writes nodal information to the post file (*.t16 typically); therefore, these
options are not applicable to the Postprocess Only option. Also, the individual elemental output requests are only
applicable to the post-processing file. If a print option is chosen, the default elemental values will be written to the
print file.

Note: Certain output requests such as heat flux and elemental temperature are not currently supported. These
remain on the dialog box for future incorporation into the translator.

8.7.2.3 History Definition

Once the Model Definition has been written, a similar dialog box will appear for the History Definition. You can
select different constraints and load sets for the History Definition, as well as change solution and solver options.
Slightly different dialog boxes will appear based upon whether you are exporting for static or modal analysis.

Hint: When performing a contact or highly nonlinear analysis, it is best to define the initial step size and max-
imum number of increments. This can be done in the load step used for the History Definition under
Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis, Static type. Set the Number of Increments (FEMAP calculates the
initial time step as the reciprocal of this number) and the Max Iterations/Step. If you have not defined
these values, FEMAP will default to an initial step size of 0.1 and maximum increments of 100 for any
analysis involving contact.
 8-90 Analysis Program Interfaces

Static Analysis
When performing a static analysis, the identical dialog box used for the Model Definition is employed for the His-
tory Definition. If you do not need to define a history for your analysis, simply press Cancel and FEMAP will close
the file. This is useful in linear analysis when all constraints and loading conditions have been applied in the Model
Definition section.
The one major difference between the Model Definition and History Definition is that all options in the dialog box
will not be available. Initial conditions and contact property information are unique to the Model Definition, there-
fore these options will be unavailable. Furthermore, the solution method, solver, and output options will default to
No Change. Thus, if you want to keep the current options but want to change the constraints or loading conditions,
simply select the constraint and load sets and press OK. The loading conditions can be either incremental or total,
based upon the Follower Force parameter input in the Parameters section (Default is Incremental).
You can define multiple histories by selecting the desired options and then pressing OK. The same dialog box will
reappear but the History Definition Number on the dialog box is incremented. When you have defined all the
desired histories, press Cancel to end the translation.

Note: When selecting a new constraint set in the History Definition, the DISP CHANGE option will be writ-
ten, removing all previous constraints in the model. Therefore, if you simply need to add constraints,
the chosen constraint set must include all previous constraints, as well as new ones. This can be accom-
plished very easily in FEMAP by copying the Model Definition constraint set by using the Model, Con-
straint, Copy command, and then simply adding additional constraints to this set. Remember, however,
if the total number of constraints is larger in a History Definition than in the Model Definition, you will
need to specify the total number of constraints on the SIZING option contained earlier on the MARC
Write Parameters dialog box.

Modal Analysis
Modal analysis has a slightly different input than static. The Control Definition section is modified to include the
Min and Max Frequency, Number of Modes, and whether to perform Sturm Sequence Checking. All other inputs
are similar to static analysis.

When you press OK for the first history, FEMAP will export this history, as well as create a second history which
simply issues the Recover command to retrieve the modes. You can export multiple histories for modal analysis by
continuing to specify conditions and pressing OK. Cancel will end the input.

8.7.3 Performing an MSC.Marc Analysis

FEMAP can launch MSC.Marc and automatically run your analysis, either from the File Analyze command or
pressing Analyze in Model Analysis, if you first setup the analysis program. To do this, before running FEMAP,
you must establish an environment variable named MARC_EXE. Set the value of this environment variable to the
full path to the location of the files used to start the MSC.Marc solver executable, for example:
SET MARC_EXE = c:\marc\marc2001\tools
 Reading an MSC.Marc Analysis Model 8-91

Note that this does not contain the name of the file used to start MSC.Marc. FEMAP automatically looks for the
file “run_marc.bat” in the directory that you specify. Once this environment variable has been defined, FEMAP
will be able to launch the analysis program and monitor the job until it is complete.
NOTE: Once the analysis has been launched the Analysis Monitor will appear and monitor the job status. Section
4.11.2.2, "Analysis Monitors"

8.7.4 Reading an MSC.Marc Analysis Model

In addition to the ability to write MARC models and read results, FEMAP can also read the nodal locations and ele-
ment connectivity from the MSC.Marc binary post-processing files (typically *.t16). There are two ways to read
this information. First, you can choose File Import, Analysis, Model, and then choose the output file that you want
to read. In addition, if you start with an empty model, and directly select File, Import, Analysis Results, FEMAP
can read both the model and results in one pass.

8.7.5 Post-processing MSC.Marc Results

When you have completed your MSC.Marc analysis, you can load results into FEMAP for post-processing. You
should typically start with a FEMAP model that corresponds to the MSC.Marc analysis; however, FEMAP will
read the nodes and elements form the post-processing file if your model does not contain any nodes or elements.
To load the results, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command and select MARC. FEMAP will display the
standard file access dialog box so you can choose the file you want to post-process. FEMAP reads the binary post-
processing file, typically *.t16. Once you select the file, FEMAP will automatically read and store the results. No
further input is required. Also, if the post-processing file contains information which FEMAP cannot process, such
as die information or NURB rigid surfaces, FEMAP will issue an error message and quit reading. In these cases,
very little data may be recovered.
 8-92 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8 Nastran Interfaces

FEMAP provides direct interfaces to the Simcenter Nastran (formally NX Nastran), MSC/MD Nastran and NEi/
Nastran (now Autodesk Nastran) model and output file formats. Topics include:
• Section 8.8.1, "Writing a Nastran Model with Model, Analysis"
• Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)" (Obsolete)
• Section 8.8.3, "Performing a Nastran Analysis"
• Section 8.8.4, "Reading Nastran Models"
• Section 8.8.5, "Post-processing Nastran Output"
For more information on the entities that are translated, see Section 7.1, "Translation Table for ANSYS, NAS-
TRAN, and MSC Patran".
Nastran from Other Vendors
If you are using COSMIC NASTRAN, CSA/NASTRAN, ME/NASTRAN, SSS/NASTRAN, or UAI/NASTRAN,
you must use the File, Export, Analysis Model command, then select the FEMAP interface that is specifically for
that vendor. For more information, see Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter
Nastran Only)".
You may have to make slight changes to the files that FEMAP produces or requires to make them compatible with
the version that you are using. Depending on how closely your vendor’s Nastran output matches MSC.Nastran out-
put, you may have to make more significant changes before you can post-process.
For more information, see the analysis program vendor’s documentation.

8.8.1 Writing a Nastran Model with Model, Analysis

You can write the FEMAP model into a file that can be read by Nastran through either the Model, Analysis or the
File, Export, Analysis Model commands. Although the commands have a different user interface, they both pro-
duce a file that contains the three required sections: Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data.
Once you select the command, you then select the appropriate version of Nastran:
Simcenter Nastran (formally NX Nastran), MSC Nastran, or NEi/Nastran (now Autodesk Nastran).
• The Simcenter Nastran interface supports Simcenter Nastran version 2019.2 and earlier.
• The MSC/MD Nastran interface supports MSC.Nastran versions 2018 and earlier.
• The NEi/Nastran interface supports version Autodesk Nastran 2016 and earlier.
The remainder of this section describes the steps for defining a Nastran analysis with Model, Analysis. You will:
1. Define an analysis set. (See Section 8.8.1.1, "Analysis Set")
2. Define executive and solution options. (See Section 8.8.1.2, "NASTRAN Executive and Solution Options")
3. Define bulk data options. (See Section 8.8.1.3, "NASTRAN Bulk Data Options") Optionally, define options for
GEOMCHECK and/or Model Check (See Section 8.8.1.4, "NASTRAN GEOMCHECK", Section 8.8.1.5,
"NASTRAN Model Check") For certain analysis types, another step might be to select which monitor points
should be used for the analysis. (See Section 8.8.1.6, "Monitor Points")
4. Define output requests and boundary conditions. (See Section 8.8.1.7, "Master Requests and Conditions and
Analysis Case", Section 8.8.1.8, "Boundary Conditions" and Section 8.8.1.10, "NASTRAN Output Requests").
Optionally, choose direct matrix input entities to write DMIG entries to bulk data and corresponding entries to
the case control section. (See Section 8.8.1.9, "NASTRAN Matrix Input Selection")
5. Optionally, define options for analysis types (See Section 8.8.1.11, "NASTRAN Modal Analysis", Section
8.8.1.12, "NASTRAN DDAM Analysis (Modal Analysis Only)", Section 8.8.1.13, "NASTRAN Rotor Dynam-
ics (Simcenter Nastran SOL 110 and 111 Only)", Section 8.8.1.14, "NASTRAN XY Output for Modal Analy-
sis", Section 8.8.1.15, "NASTRAN Direct Transient Analysis", Section 8.8.1.16, "NASTRAN Modal Transient
Analysis", Section 8.8.1.17, "NASTRAN Direct Frequency Analysis", Section 8.8.1.18, "NASTRAN Modal
Frequency Analysis", Section 8.8.1.19, "NASTRAN Response Spectrum Analysis", Section 8.8.1.20, "NAS-
TRAN Random Response Analysis", Section 8.8.1.21, "NASTRAN Design/Topology Optimization", Section
8.8.1.22, "Heat Transfer Nonlinear Control Options", Section 8.8.1.23, "Nonlinear Static, Nonlinear Transient,
 Analysis Set 8-93

and Creep", Section 8.8.1.24, "Special Notes for Models with Axisymmetric Elements", Section 8.8.1.25, "Spe-
cial Notes for Heat Transfer Analysis", Section 8.8.1.26, "STATSUB Options (Nastran Subcases)", Section
8.8.1.27, "Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)", Section 8.8.1.28, "Advanced Nonlinear
Explicit (Simcenter Nastran Only)", Section 8.8.1.29, "Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran
Only)", Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)", Section
8.8.1.31, "Static Aeroelasticity Analysis", Section 8.8.1.32, "Aerodynamic Flutter Analysis", Section 8.8.1.33,
"Contact Parameters (MSC Nastran Only)", and Section 8.8.1.34, "Superelement Analysis".
6. Optionally, define additional cases that include different load sets and constraint sets. (See Section 4.11.1.6,
"Cases" in FEMAP Commands Manual.)
8.8.1.1 Analysis Set
When you create an analysis set, you define the solution parameters, boundary conditions, and output for the Nas-
tran analysis. An analysis set is stored with the model file, so you can reuse this data. You can also store an analysis
set in a FEMAP analysis library. For more information about using libraries, see Section 4.3.6, "Library Selection".
To define an analysis set:
1. Pick Model, Analyze to open the Analysis Set Manager dialog box.
2. Pick the first item on the list, then pick New. (You can also double-click on the item).
3. Choose the Analysis Program and Analysis Type. These options determine which element types (structural or
heat transfer) will be written, and set the defaults for the other NASTRAN interface dialog boxes.
You can also choose to use the Integrated Solver (Simcenter Nastran only), a Linked Solver, or VisQ. See Sec-
tion 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" or Section 4.11.2.1, "Run Analysis Using Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the
FEMAP Commands Manual for more information.
4. One of the best ways to define an analysis set is to pick Next to work through the dialog boxes in order. Alterna-
tively, you can pick OK to close the dialog box. From the analysis set list, you can then double-click on a
parameter to bring up the dialog box.
For more information about using the Analysis Set Manager, see Section 4.11, "Preparing for Analysis" and more
information about defining an Analysis Set, see Section 4.11.1, "Defining a Analysis Set".
8.8.1.2 NASTRAN Executive and Solution Options
The Executive and Solution Options dialog defines the Executive Control, Solution Control, Restart Control, and
Manual Control text options for your Nastran model.
Solver
Direct Output To
This option is used to specify a location for the Nastran output. Click “...” button to browse to a directory.
Base Filename for Analyze (Blank to Match Model)
If the field is left blank the model name will be used as the ‘base name’ for the Nastran input file. If any text exists
in this field, that text will be used as the ‘base name’. The ‘base name’ and a 3 digit suffix which increments each
time the input file is written to the same directory are used as the input file name (i.e., ‘base name’###.dat).
Additional Command Line Arguments
Allows you to enter any additional command line arguments which are not supported through the FEMAP user
interface. If anything is specified in the Arguments field on the Solvers tab of File, Preferences, for your version of
Nastran, it will also appear in this field. Any command line arguments entered override any other settings, even
those found in the Nastran configuration file (*.rcf file). For more information about using the Solvers tab, see Sec-
tion 2.6.2.6, "Solvers" in the FEMAP Commands Manual and/or consult the documentation for your version of
Nastran to determine available command line arguments to include when launching the solver.
 8-94 Analysis Program Interfaces

Executive Control
Problem ID
Written as a title to the ID command.
Solution Override
Selects the DMAP “solution sequence” that will be executed. FEMAP will automatically define this as SESTATIC,
SEMODES, SEDTRAN, SEMTRAN, SEDFREQ, SEMFREQ, SEBUCKL, NLSTATIC, NLTRAN, NLSCSH,
NLTCSH, AESTAT, SEFLUTTER, “601,106”, “601, 129”, or “701”, but you can change it to any of the solution
sequences that you want to use.
Max Time (In Minutes)
Sets the maximum allowable CPU time for this analysis. Do not set this number too low, or your analysis will ter-
minate prematurely. The TIME statement is optional, so if no value is specified, the TIME statement is not written.
Diagnostics
Allows you to specify any diagnostic lines.
System Cells
Allows you to specify Nastran System Cells using the NASTRAN statement. The must be entered as: SYSTEM
(“system cell #”)=“# of option for specified system cell”. For example, Extended Error Messages is SYSTEM
(319)=1
 NASTRAN Executive and Solution Options 8-95

Extended Error Messages

When enabled, option prints out the extended Nastran error messages to the .f06 file. This will assure that FEMAP
is always using the most current error messages from your version of Nastran. These extended error messages will
also be available when using the Analysis Monitor with the interlocked version of Simcenter Femap with Nastran.
(writes SYSTEM (319) = 1 to the Nastran file)

Note: It is highly recommended to use the Extended Error Messages option when using the Nastran solver.
There is then only one screen used to review Nastran Error Messages. If you do not use this option,
clicking the Help button in Message Review Details dialog box will link to an older file of Nastran
Error Messages which may or may not be accurate for newer Nastran versions.

Extended Solution Status Monitoring

When enabled, option allows the Simcenter Nastran Analysis Monitor in FEMAP to receive additional feedback
from the solver. The type of feedback will be determined by the type of analysis currently being monitored (For
instance, a static analysis will return “Sparse Matrix Solver” information about the number of equations which to
be solved in total and then give updates on how many have been solved so far),

Note: This feedback is only retrieved from Simcenter Nastran every time the Simcenter Nastran Analysis
Monitor is updated, which is once every 5 seconds. Also, the feedback will only start after the number
of equations has been determined, which will differ for each analysis job

MSC/MD NASTRAN Version

Select the version that you are using:
• Ver 2004 and Above (MSC.Nastran 2004 and above), Ver 2001 (MSC.Nastran 2001), or Previous Versions (up
to version 70.7).
Solution Options
Iterative Solver
Specify whether to use the iterative solver or element iterative solver (Simcenter Nastran only).
Number of Processors
Allows you to set the number of processors.
Solver Memory (Mb 0=Default)
Allows you to allocate the amount of memory for Nastran to use when solving. If you leave this field blank, Nas-
tran will use the value currently set in your Nastran resource file (Nast*.rcf located in the “conf” directory), which
by default is often set to “memory = estimate” (Simcenter Nastran estimates how much memory the job requires).
This is usually recommended. The mechanism FEMAP uses to set this option is to add a command line option
(memory = VALUE mb) when the job is submitted. This will override the value currently set in your Nastran
Resource file.

Note: Please refer to Simcenter Nastran documentation for more information on setting the correct memory
value for the solver. Allocating more memory than your machine has can cause the solver to fail and
setting this value too low can cause the solver to be less efficient.

GPU Computing
When enabled, has Simcenter Nastran automatically determine if a device with GPUs exists and, if so, how to use
it during the solve. Three options exist which will write different arguments to the Nastran command line.
• “0..DCMP, FRRD1” - includes “gpgpu=any” on command line, enables all GPU module computations.
• “1..DCMP” - includes “cl_dcmp=1” on command line, enables only DCMP GPU module computations.
• “1..FRRD1” - includes “cl_frrd=1” on command line, enables only FRRD1 GPU module computations.
Restart Control
Save Databases for Restart
When enabled, the *.MASTER and *.DBALL files will be saved to allow for a restart analysis.
 8-96 Analysis Program Interfaces

Restart Previous Analysis and options

When Restart Previous Analysis is enabled, the Read Only Restart option and the From, Version, and Starting Sub-
case fields become available.
From
Use this field to specify a directory path to the *.MASTER file (use the “..” button to browse to find the file).
Read Only Restart
Enabling this option will force Nastran to attach to the *.DBALL file in “Read Only” mode, which will prevent the
*.DBALL from possibly becoming corrupted during the restart.
Version and Starting Subcase
For more experienced users, use the Version field to specify the version of the *.DBALL file (blank is default,
which is “last”, otherwise must be an integer value) and/or use the Starting Subcase field to specify which subcase
to restart from for a nonlinear analysis.
Manual Control
Skip Standard Executive Control
When disabled, standard Executive Control is written to the Nastran input file. When disabled, only the contents of
Start Text and/or End Text in the NASTRAN Executive and Solution Options dialog box is written to the Executive
Controls section of the Nastran input file.
Start Text
Click to add text to the beginning of the Executive Control section. This capability can be used to include standard
DMAP alter sequences, Job Control (JCL) statements, or other standard modifications to the beginning of your
Nastran file. In addition, the Create ASSIGN button allows for creation of various types of ASSIGN statements via
the Create ASSIGN Statement dialog box.
End/DMAP Text
Click to add text to the end of the Executive Control section. This is often where any DMAPs should be included
with your Nastran input file.
Scratch Files... button
Sometimes it may be necessary to “break-up” a large Nastran “Scratch File” into different pieces and place each
piece into a specific directory. This insures the job has enough disk space in which to write the “scratch file”. Usu-
ally, you would use this to place different parts of the Scratch file onto separate hard drives (i.e. the “C:” and “D:”
drive). This button will take you to the NASTRAN Scratch Directories dialog box, which allows you to specify
Scratch Directories by entering the path directly or browsing to it (use the “...” button).
You must also enter a Max Size (in Megabytes) for each scratch file. Once the Max Size has been reached for the
first specified scratch file, Nastran will being writing to the next specified scratch file. This will write the appropri-
ate INIT SCRATCH LOGICAL, ASSIGN SCR, and ASSIGN SCR1 entries to the Nastran deck.

Note: Please be sure the total value of the two Max Size fields is larger than the Nastran “Scratch File” or Nas-
tran could experience issues.
 NASTRAN Bulk Data Options 8-97

8.8.1.3 NASTRAN Bulk Data Options

Use the Bulk Data Options dialog to define only export a potion of the model to write out to Nastran and/or specify
PARAM cards, format, and translator options.

Portion of Model to Write

Allows you to select a previously defined group, then only exports the supported entities in that group to the Nas-
tran input file. In some cases, exporting elements without associated nodes or material/property entries may be
desired, but this will create an input file which cannot be run by Nastran unless additional entities are added to the
file or the file is later referenced by an INCLUDE statement in another Nastran input file.

Note: If a “ready to run” input file is desired, it may be helpful to use the Group, Operations, Add Related
Entities command on the group before selected with this option. See "Group, Operations, Add Related
Entities..." in Section 6.4.3.2, "Group, Operations Menu" of the FEMAP Commands Manual for more
information.

PARAM
FEMAP will write PARAM cards for those options selected. If you want to use additional parameters besides those
listed, you can add them with the Start Text button.
8-98 Analysis Program Interfaces

AUTOSPC - you can also control the format of the AUTOSPC command to the Nastran convention (PARAM,
AUTOSPC, YES). In Simcenter Nastran you have a choice to use the default method (0..Eigenvalue) or a method
available in NX Nastran version 4.1 and higher (1..Singular Value Decomposition). If you use the “SVD” method,
FEMAP will write a system cell to Simcenter Nastran (SVDSPC=1).
GRDPNT - when enabled with value >1, writes PARAM,GRDPNT,(Node ID), which causes the grid point weight
generator to be executed using the specified node ID as the “reference point”. When enabled with value = 0, which
is the default in FEMAP, writes PARAM,GRDPNT,0, which causes the grid point weight generator to be executed
using the origin of the basic coordinate system as the “reference point”. When disabled, writes PARAM,GRDPNT,-
1, which suppresses the computation and output of data from the gird point weight generator. Additional informa-
tion about using this PARAM in certain type of analysis is available in the Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
WTMASS - when enabled, writes PARAM,WTMASS,(value). The terms of the structural mass matrix are multi-
plied by the entered value. This is sometimes used to convert mass to weight and vice versa.
K6ROT - when enabled, writes PARAM,K6ROT,(value). Specifies the stiffness to be added to the normal rotation
for CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements. Default value is 100.0 and parameter is ignored by CQUADR, CTRIAR,
CQUAD8, and CTRIA6 elements.
MAXRATIO - when enabled, writes PARAM,MAXRATIO,(value). The ratios of terms on the diagonal of the stiff-
ness matrix to the corresponding terms on the diagonal of the triangular factor are computed. If, for any row, this
ratio is greater than MAXRATIO, the matrix will be considered to be nearly singular (i.e.,has mechanisms). Default
value is 1.0E7.
NDAMP - when enabled, writes PARAM,NDAMP,(value). Specifies value for numerical damping used by the
TSTEPNL entry to achieve numerical stability when METHOD=”ADAPT” in Nonlinear Transient (SOL 129) or
Transient Heat Transfer (SOL 159). A value of 0.0 means there will be no numerical damping. Default value is 0.01
and recommended range of values is from 0.0 to 0.1.
INREL - controls the calculation or inertia relief or enforced acceleration in Statics (SOL 101), Buckling (SOL
105), and Optimization (SOL 200). Using “-1..On” requests that inertia relief or enforced motion be performed and
requires SUPORT entries. Using “-2..Automatic (Statics)” can only be used for statics and requests automatic iner-
tia relief, in which case SUPORT entries are not necessary.
BOLTFACT - used to reduce bolt stiffness during the first phase of bolt preload analysis (Simcenter Nastran only).
ENFMOTN - for Simcenter Nastran only and is used to control which formulation is used for enforced motion
analysis (and mode acceleration, if requested). This writes out ENFMOTN (i.e., SYSTEM(422)) to the NASTRAN
line. Choosing “0..Constraint Mode” uses the constraint method of enforced motion formulation (and new mode
acceleration method), “1..Absolute” uses the absolute displacement enforced motion formulation (and old mode
acceleration method), and “2..Absolute, Viscous Damping” uses the absolute displacement enforced motion formu-
lation, but includes a modal viscous damping coupling term to improve accuracy.
SWPANGLE - the angular increment, in degrees, at which failure indices and strength ratios are computed and out-
put for laminates in direct frequency (SOL 108) and modal frequency (SOL 111) analysis (Simcenter Nastran
Only).
MGRID and MDOF- used to specify a specific node (MGRID) and degree of freedom (MDOF = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6)
to monitor during direct frequency or direct transient response, plotted in the Simcenter Nastran Analysis Monitor.
MATNL - when enabled, turns on all material nonlinear capabilities in Multi-Step Structural (SOL 401) and Multi-
Step Nonlinear Kinematic (SOL 402), which are Simcenter Nastran only. Material nonlinear capabilities for both
SOLs 401 and 402 include plasticity (MATS1), creep (MATCRP or CREEP) and damage material properties for
cohesive elements (MATCZ). For SOL 402, also includes nonlinear material properties for progressive ply failure
(MATDMG). When disabled, turns off all material nonlinear capabilities for SOLs 401 and 402.
LANGLE - when enabled, writes PARAM,LANGLE,2, large rotations in nonlinear analysis are determined using a
Rotation Vector method, when geometric nonlinearity is defined (PARAM,LGDISP,1). When disabled, large rota-
tions are computed with the gimbal angle method.
LGDISP - when enabled, which is the default when creating a new analysis set for nonlinear analysis, writes
PARAM,LGDISP,1. When running a nonlinear analysis, all elements which have a large displacement capability
are assumed to have large displacement effects (i.e., updated nodal coordinates and follower forces). When dis-
abled, then no large displacement effects will be considered. Becomes unavailable when LGSTRN is enabled.
 NASTRAN Bulk Data Options 8-99

LGSTRN - when enabled, writes PARAM,LGSTRN,1. Only used by the Simcenter Nastran advanced nonlinear
(SOLs 601 and 701), Multi-Step Structural (SOL 402), and Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematics (SOL 402) analysis
types. Assumes large strains, displacements, and rotations (also, automatically sets PARAM,LGDSIP,1). Large
strain formulation only applicable to 2D Axisymmetric, plane strain, 3D solid, and single layer shell elements.
PRGPST - when enabled, which is the default, singularities removed by AUTOSPC are written to the f06 file.
When disabled, printout of singularities is suppressed, expect when they are not going to be removed.
OGEOM - when enabled, writes specific geometry blocks to the results file, depending on the option selected for
PARAM,POST. See entry for PARAM,POST in Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information.
SRCOMPS - controls the computation and printout of ply strength ratios. When ‘on’, ply strength ratios are output
for composite elements that have failure indices requested.
NOFISR - controls the printout of the composite failure indices and strength ratios. When ‘on’, the failure indices
and strength ratios will not be printed.
CNTASET - used to perform a static condensation on the contact degrees-of-freedom for linear contact (Simcenter
Nastran only). Contact iterations are then performed using the reduced matrix, which should decrease solve time.
BAILOUT - used to allow under constrained models continue to run if any mechanism (free motion) is detected.
AUTOMPC - when enabled, writes PARAM, AUTOMPC, YES (Simcenter Nastran only). Allows the software to
automatically select the m-set degrees-of-freedom instead of using the m-set values specified by MPC or on rigid
elements (RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, etc). There are some caveats, see Simcenter Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
DDRMM off- when enabled, writes PARAM, DDRMM,-1, which forces calculation of complete g-set solution
vectors be the mode displacement method in modal transient and frequency response solutions. When disabled,
which is the default, writes nothing, which means the matrix method of data recovery will be used.
MODACC - when enabled, also enables DDRMM off, then writes PARAM, MODACC,0. This specifies the mode
acceleration method for data recovery in dynamic analysis. When off, nothing is written.
RESVEC and RESVINER - allows you to write two forms of the RESVEC PARAM. PARAM,RESVEC,NO
which augments static shapes due to applied loads; or PARAM, RESVEC,YES which computes residual vectors
for applied loads and unit loads (with specified USETi, U6 entries at the desired DOF). When RESVEC is not
checked, the PARAM,RESVEC entry will not be written at all, which is required for some types of analysis. To
augment static shapes due to inertial loads (unit acceleration of mass), check RESVINER to write PARAM,RES-
VINER,YES.
SECOMB - used to control if output will be combined for a superelement analysis, has a number of caveats.
APLHA1 and ALPHA2 - ALPHA1 is the complex scale factor applied to the mass matrix and ALPHA2 to the
stiffness matrix. Used in frequency and transient response analysis, if PARAM,ALPHA1 and/or ALPHA2 are not
equal to complex zero, then Rayleigh’s damping is added to the viscous damping.
Format
These options determine the format that will be used to write your Bulk Data commands. By default, FEMAP uses
small field format (8 character fields). If you want extra precision for some or all of your model, you can choose
one of the large field formats (16 character fields). The large field formats obviously produce a large file that is
harder to read. You should not choose that format unless it is necessary. The “limited” large field formats allow you
to selectively write large field formats for certain entities and small field format for others. FEMAP does not write
free field format.
Translator Options
All Plates as QUADR/TRIAR - Nastran supports two plate formulations:
• The CQUADR and CTRIAR elements have rotational stiffness in the direction normal to the plane of the ele-
ment.
• By default, the CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements will be written. These do not have any rotational stiffness in
the normal direction.
Skip Beam/Bar Cross Sections - Nastran can use PBEAM entries or PBEAML entries to define beam properties.
You can create both PBEAMs and PBEAMLs in FEMAP using the Model, Property... command.
 8-100 Analysis Program Interfaces

• FEMAP computes values for a “Standard Beam” from the cross-section data supplied and enters the values into
the appropriate fields on the Define Property - BEAM Element Type dialog box. When a Nastran input deck is
exported, FEMAP creates a PBEAM entry for each “standard beam” property defined in the model. Nastran
then uses the PBEAM data as it would any other property data to analyze your structure
• When FEMAP creates a “NASTRAN Beam”, the cross-section data supplied is also used to compute values
which are entered into the appropriate fields on the Define Property - BEAM Element Type dialog box. Upon
export to Nastran, FEMAP creates PBEAML entries for each “NASTRAN Beam” property in the model.
PBEAML entries contain cross-section dimension data corresponding to a specific Shape, specified on each
PBEAML entry. Nastran uses this cross-sectional data and PBEAML type internally to analyze the structure.
Sometimes it may be beneficial to only export PBEAM entries out of FEMAP for analysis purposes. By choos-
ing Skip Beam/Bar Cross Sections, FEMAP will use the computed property values from the Define Property -
BEAM Element Type dialog box and only create PBEAM entries in the Nastran input file, regardless of how the
beams were defined.
An example of when this option would be useful would be if a model was created with “NASTRAN Beams”,
which needs to be run by a version of Nastran that does not support PBEAML entries.
Gaps as Contact - In Simcenter Nastran only, checking this option will allow gap elements to be treated as linear
contact elements during a Linear Static analysis (SOL 101). This option creates a BCSET in the case control sec-
tion of the Simcenter Nastran file, which is what tells Simcenter Nastran to use the gaps as linear contact elements.

Note: If you have linear contact defined elsewhere in your model using the entities created on the Connect
menu, there is no need to turn this option on for gaps to work as linear contact elements, as a BCSET is
already being created in the case control.

Dynamic Loads using LOADSET/LSEQ - Writes out loads for dynamic analysis using LSEQ method. This was
the method used in Nastran before direct application of dynamic loads became available.
Write All Static Loads/BCs Sets - When this option is on, ALL loads and constraint sets will be written to the Nas-
tran input file for Linear Static Analysis. This essentially forces FEMAP to write out Nastran input files for SOL
101 the way it has in all versions before FEMAP 10.1.
Rigid Element Method - Both Simcenter Nastran and MSC/MD Nastran support a Coefficient of Thermal Expan-
sion (CTE) for Rigid Elements.
For most Simcenter Nastran solution sequences which support this functionality, this option must be set to
“1..LAGRAN” to have the CTE considered for RBE1, RBE2, and RBE3 (also, RBAR, RROD, and RTRPLT,
which are not directly supported by FEMAP).
For Simcenter Nastran Multi-Step Structural (SOL 401), there are three options: “0..Auto”, “2..Linear”, and
“3..Stiff”, with either “0..Auto” or “2..Stiff” being needed to have the CTE considered for only RBE2 (also, RBAR,
which is not directly supported by FEMAP).
For MSC/MD Nastran, there are three options: “1..LAGRAN”, “2..LINEAR”, and “4..LGELIM, with either
“1..LAGRAN” or “4..LGELIM” needed to have the CTE considered for RBE1, RBE2, and RBE3 (also, RBAR,
RBAR1, RJOINT, RROD, RTRPLT, and RTRPLT1, which are not directly supported by FEMAP)

Note: In FEMAP, the Rigid element CTE is defined by using the “Coefficient” field in the Thermal Expansion
portion of the Define RIGID Element dialog box.

Manual Control
• If the Skip Standard Bulk Data switch is off, the software writes standard Bulk Data. If this switch is on, the
software writes ONLY the contents of Start Text or End Text that you enter.
• Pick Start Text to add text to the beginning of the Bulk Data section, after the BEGIN BULK command.

Note: When using the “bundled” version of Simcenter Nastran which comes with Simcenter Femap with Nas-
tran, only Bulk Data entries AFTER the BEGIN BULK entry may be in this section. The BEGIN
BULK entry itself is a Case Control command and MUST NOT be in this section, even via an
INCLUDE file. Otherwise, the “Checksum”, which is used for licensing, will not be calculated cor-
rectly and the analysis will not run.
 NASTRAN GEOMCHECK 8-101

• Pick End Text to add text to the end of the Bulk Data section after the END DATA command.

Note: Nastran INCLUDE Statements pointing to “Include files” can be used in Simcenter Nastran for
FEMAP

8.8.1.4 NASTRAN GEOMCHECK

The NASTRAN GEOMCHECK dialog box allows you to have Nastran perform element quality checks using the
Tolerance value specified for each selected type of element. These entries are written out to the Executive Control
Section of the Nastran file.
For each test a tolerance is chosen and the action to be performed if the tolerance is surpassed. If Fatal is chosen
then the analysis will stop with a fatal message, if Inform is selected then Nastran will inform you of the entities
that did not pass the quality check. Warn will instruct Nastran to issue warning messages when the tolerance is sur-
passed. Message Limit sets the maximum number of messages that will be issued.
Choosing None in the upper left corner of the NASTRAN GEOMCHECK dialog box will write GEOMCHECK,
NONE to the Executive Control Section.
 8-102 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.1.5 NASTRAN Model Check

Opens the NASTRAN Model Check dialog box which allows you to choose a number of different options to have
Nastran perform a “ground check” or a “weight check”.

The Weight Check section allows you to define the WEIGHTCHECK case control card for the Rigid Body Mass
Reduction Check. Choose the degree-of-freedom set and a reference grid point. If no grid point is selected then the
origin of the basic coordinate system is used.
• CGI (Center of Gravity) option requests output at the center of gravity
• Units chooses weight or mass units
Ground Check defines the options for the GROUNDCHECK case control command. Pick a degree-of-freedom set
and the set the options you want.
• DATAREC will request the recovery of grounding forces that are above the tolerance set.
• Ref Node for the calculation of the rigid body motion, while Max Strain Energy represents the maximum value
which passes the check.
8.8.1.6 Monitor Points
Opens the Select Monitor Point(s) dialog box:
Toggle Selected On Toggle Selected Off Title Filter Clear Title Filter
Toggle All Off

Toggle All On

Delete Monitor
Point
New Monitor Edit Monitor
Point Point
Show Selected

Show Checked
 Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case 8-103

Existing monitor points are shown with their Label, Name, and Type. For more information on Monitor Points, see
Section 4.7.1, "Model, Simulation Entities, Monitor Points..." in the FEMAP Commands manual.
Only the monitor point(s) which have a check box toggled “on” will be written to the Nastran input file. Simply
check the monitor points to include. It is also possible to highlight any number of monitor points from the list.
Holding down the “Ctrl” key will enable highlighting of multiple monitor points. Holding down “Shift” while pick-
ing a “first” row, then a “last” row, will highlight a range of monitor points. Once highlighting is complete, use the
Toggle Selected On or Toggle Selected Off icon buttons to check or uncheck the highlighted monitor point(s).
Click the Title Filter icon button, then enter text into the Title Includes field to reduce the list to only include moni-
tor points whose Titles include that text. Click Clear Filter icon button to return all monitor points to the list.
The Toggle All On button chooses all monitor points currently in the list, so if the list is “filtered”, only those mon-
itor points will be selected. Click Toggle All Off to have no monitor points selected in the list.
The Show Checked and Show Selected icon buttons are used to highlight the included entities for each monitor
point in the graphics window. Using Show Checked will highlight the included entities for each monitor point
checked in the Select Monitor Point(s) dialog box, while Show Selected uses the monitor points currently high-
lighted in the Select Monitor Point(s) dialog box.
The New Monitor Point icon button can be used at any time to display the NASTRAN Monitor Point Manager dia-
log box, which can then be used to create either type of monitor point, while the Edit Monitor Point icon button can
be used to edit the monitor point(s) currently highlighted in the Select Monitor Point(s) dialog box. The Delete
Monitor Point icon button can be used to delete the monitor point(s) currently highlighted.
The Print Aero Monitor Results and Print Load Monitor Results options are used to control if and how many times
the MONITOR entry is written to case control. For Simcenter Nastran, neither of these options is available for
Static Aeroelasticity (SOL 144) and only Print Load Monitor Results is available in the Master Case, or any sub-
case, for Linear Statics (SOL 101) or Normal Modes/Eigenvalue (SOL 103). For MSC Nastran, both requests are
available, but only in the Master Case for any supported analysis type.
8.8.1.7 Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case
Master Requests and Conditions
Master Requests and Conditions define the master output requests and boundary conditions (loads and constraints)
for your analysis. On the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box, you can enter a Title, a Label, and Manual
Control options. Once you have entered this data, pick Next to set up the boundary conditions.

The Manual Control options include:

• Skip Standard: When this option is enabled, the interface does not write text to the input file. If Start and End
Text have been defined, they will still be written to the Case Control section of the input file

Note: When skipping the standard Case Control and using the “bundled” version of Simcenter Nastran which
comes with Simcenter Femap with Nastran, be sure to add the BEGIN BULK entry as the final line in the
End Text dialog box (or Start Text dialog box, if not using End Text or any Subcases) of the Master
Requests and Conditions. If using INCLUDE files, the BEGIN BULK entry MUST be in the INCLUDE
file referenced by the Master Requests and Conditions. Otherwise, the “Checksum”, which is used for
licensing, will not be calculated correctly and the analysis will not run to completion.
8-104 Analysis Program Interfaces

• Ending Text Inside Case: When this option is enabled, the text specified in End Text will be added to Case Con-
trol section at the end of the Master Case (i.e., before any additional subcases).
• Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the Case Control section of the input file.
• End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the Case Control section of the input file.

Hint: One easy way to create cases is to use the MultiSet button on the Analysis Set Manager. Multi-Set
creates one case for each combination of loads and constraints.

Global Requests and Conditions

For both multi-step nonlinear analysis types for Simcenter Nastran (SOL 401 and SOL 402), an Analysis Type
drop-down is added to the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box. For more information on the available anal-
ysis types and these solutions in general, see Section 8.8.1.29, "Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran
Only)" and Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)".
Analysis Case
In addition, you can define cases which let you perform multiple analyses with different load and/or constraint sets.
You can also specify output requests for each case. The analysis program will generate one output set for each case.
Use the Analysis Case dialog box to enter a Case ID, Title, and Label for a case. Sometimes in Nastran each case
may require different “manual control” text. Once you have entered this data, pick Next to continue setting up the
analysis. (The master requests and conditions provide the defaults for the cases.).

• Start Text Inside Case: When this option is enabled, the text specified in Start Text will be added to Case Con-
trol section inside the appropriate subcase.
For Linear Static analysis in Nastran (SOL 101), you have the choice of creating a “Standard Case” or a “SUB-
COM”, which is a combination of other Subcases defined in your model.
 Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case 8-105

When “SUBCOM” is chosen as the Case Type, clicking Next will open the SUBSEQ Factor Definition dialog box.

In this dialog box, all existing subcases will be listed. You can now highlight one or more of the subcases and enter
a Subcase Factor. Clicking the Apply to Selected Subcases button will update the “Factor” in the list window of this
dialog box. The “Factor” is a simple scale factor which will be used by Nastran to combine the selected subcases in
the prescribed manner.

Note: Once your “SUBCOM” has been defined, clicking Next will then take you to the Boundary Conditions
dialog box where you can set a new Initial Temperature using the Load Set (all other will be ignored).

For example, you may want to run a subcase that uses half of “Subcase A” and 2 X “Subcase B”. For this you
would highlight “Subcase A”, enter a Subcase Factor of “0.5”, then click the Apply to Selected Subcases button.
Next, highlight “Subcase B”, enter a Subcase Factor of “2”, then click the Apply to Selected Subcases button.
For Multi-Step Structural Analysis in Simcenter Nastran (SOL 401 and SOL 402), additional options for Analysis
Type and Step Control can also be specified.
 8-106 Analysis Program Interfaces

Analysis Type can be used to change the type of analysis being done on a subcase-by-subcase basis in SOL 401.
Currently, choose from “1..Static”, “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue”, or “29..Bolt Preload”. The Step Control sec-
tion is used to signify if the subcase is Sequentially Dependant on the previous subcase or a “stand-alone” subcase.
8.8.1.8 Boundary Conditions
The Boundary Conditions dialog box lets you select the loads and constraints to apply to your analysis. You can
apply boundary conditions as both master boundary conditions or in cases.

Primary Sets
Depending on your analysis type, you can select constraints and loads.
• Constraints: pick a constraint set for your model or use “-1..Use Active Constraint Set”.
• Loads: pick a load set for your model or use “-1..Use Active Load Set”.
• Temperatures: pick a load set containing temperature loads for the model. Typically, this is used to apply tem-
peratures to a structural model and will create a TEMP(LOAD) entry in Case Control.

Note: If a Nastran LOAD Combination is selected using the Loads drop-down, then it is a good idea to place
any temperature loads in a different load set and select it using the Temperatures drop down.

• Initial Conditions: pick a load set to use for initial conditions.

Note: Although it is often not needed, Initial Conditions can be set up for thermal strain problems in Linear
Static Analysis. The only type of initial conditions supported by Nastran SOL 101 are thermal. Make sure
if you are selecting an Initial Condition Load Set for Linear Static that you have either defined individual
nodal temperatures, set the Default Temperature as a Body Load, or a combination of both. The TEMP
(INIT) card will be written in the Case Control section of the Nastran input file and the temperatures set
in the initial conditions Load Set will override the Reference Temperature (TREF) field on MATi entries.
 Boundary Conditions 8-107

• Constraint equations: pick a constraint set to define constraint equations. If you choose From Constraint Set,
FEMAP will look for constraint equations in the same set as your nodal constraints. This is a convenient way to
manage most models.
• Bolt Preloads: pick a specific load set for bolt preloads in your model. By default, the bolt preloads will be
specified in the “Primary Load Set” and will run fine in Simcenter Nastran. This option simply allows you to
separate the regular loads from the bolt preloads so you can easily run both a “with preloads” and “without pre-
loads” analysis without having to actually modify the “Primary Load Set”.

Note: Having Bolt Preloads in separate Load Set(s) is also very helpful when running the same model with
multiple “bolt preload conditions”. Simply create a Load Set for each “bolt preload condition” and
switch from one to another using this drop-down list.

For heat transfer analyses, you will notice that constraint sets are not used. Rather, loads and constraints are both
selected from a load set. FEMAP translates nodal temperatures, in the same set as the other thermal loads, as ther-
mal constraints (boundary conditions).

Note: If the analysis requires multiple load or constraint sets, cases must be created.

Other DOF Sets

You can select constraint sets to use as various types of DOF sets.
Typically, for static analysis you will not want to choose any of these sets. For some types of modal analysis, you
can choose an ASET to reduce the number of analysis degrees of freedom (Guyan Reduction). The other sets are
used less frequently.
For “Free-Free” Modal Analysis, it is often required to use the Kinematic (SUPORT) set to create “fictitious sup-
ports” which allow Nastran to run with no actual constraints defined.
Specifying the SUPORT1 DOF set will create a SUPORT1 case control entry along with the appropriate number of
SUPORT1 bulk data entries to represent a “fictitious support” set. This can be useful because the SUPORT1 can be
specified in a subcase, while the SUPORT DOF set will be used in all subcases.
OMIT, QSET, CSET, and BSET use constraint sets to write out the appropriate OMIT, QSET, CSET, and BSET
bulk data entries.
Contact/Glue Sets (MSC Nastran)
The upper portion of this section, only available for MSC Nastran, allows you to select which connectors in the
model will be written to the BCTABLE entry in the MSC Nastran input file and if they will be used:
• All Connectors (default) - simply writes all connectors currently enabled in the model to the input file.
• Connection Group - allows you to select a group containing any number of connectors from the drop-down
control, then writes out only those connectors. The Quick Group icon button can be used to quickly create a
new group, then you can choose Edit Group to select connectors in the model to add to the selected group.
• None - writes all enabled connectors out to the input file, but does not write BCONTACT to Case Control.
The BCONTACT Options portion controls how the BCONTACT entry is written in Case Control:
• Default - for All Connectors, writes BCONTACT=107 and sets ID of BCTABLE entry t to 107, while for Con-
nection Group, writes BCONTACT=108 and sets ID of BCTABLE entry t to 108. Can be used for either Linear
or Glued contact.
• Initial Contact - writes BCONTACT=0 and sets ID of the BCTABLE entry to 0. Only for Linear contact.
• All Body - writes BCONTACT=ALLBODY and the BCTABLE is not written at all. Only for Linear contact.
Contact Sets and Glue Sets (Simcenter Nastran - Multi-Step Structural and Multi-Step
Nonlinear Kinematic only)
In Simcenter Nastran Multi-Step Structural (SOL 401) and Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic (SOL 402) contact
conditions can change subcase-by-subcase. This includes the ability to change the Connection Property which will
be used to set the default contact and/or glue values for a particular subcase. See Section 8.8.1.29, "Multi-Step
Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)" and Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis
(Simcenter Nastran Only)" for more information.
 8-108 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.1.9 NASTRAN Matrix Input Selection

Highlighting the Direct Matrix Input item in either the Master Requests and Conditions or in any subcase, then
clicking Edit opens the NASTRAN Matrix Input Selection dialog box:

Check the “Enable Matrix Input” box for the analysis set or subcase to be able to select G-Type Matrices and/or P-
Type Matrices, which will be written to either the Case Control section, either for the Master Case or a specific sub-
case. In order to have items available for selection, Direct Matrix Input entities must exist in the model. A “Single
Matrix” or “Matrix Combination” can be selected for any drop-down in this dialog box. For more information on
Direct Matrix Input entities, see Section 4.7.2, "Model, Simulation Entities, Direct Matrix Input..." in the FEMAP
Commands manual.
If a “Single Matrix” is selected in a drop-down, the appropriate Case Control entry will be written, along with the
Name specified for the direct matrix input entity. If a “Matrix Combination” is selected in a drop-down, the appro-
priate Case Control entry will be written, along with an equation consisting of scale factors and the name of each
direct matrix entity referenced in the combination.

Note: Only direct matrix input entities, “Single Matrix”, which have Source Data set to Internalized Data can
be selected using the drop-downs. If using a “Matrix Combination”, Source Data can be set to either
External File or Internalized Data for the referenced direct matrix input entities. Also, a “Matrix Com-
bination” only requires a single direct matrix input entity to be in the Referenced Inputs section.

The G-Type Matrices section contains five drop-downs:

• Stiffness - Writes K2GG Case Control entry
• Mass - Writes M2GG Case Control entry
• Damping - Writes K2GG Case Control entry
• Structural Damping - Writes K42GG Case Control entry
• Loading - Writes P2G Case Control entry
The P-Type Matrices section contains three drop-downs:
• Stiffness - Writes K2PP Case Control entry
• Mass - Writes M2PP Case Control entry
• Damping - Writes B2PP Case Control entry
 NASTRAN Output Requests 8-109

8.8.1.10 NASTRAN Output Requests

Use the Output Requests dialog box to identify the types of output that you want from the analysis. The type of out-
put that you can request will depend on the analysis program and analysis type.

Output requests can be defined as both master output requests or as part of a case. The options available depend on
the analysis type. In the Customization section, choose whether or not to recover the Element Corner Results. For
modal analysis, specify Output Modes by enabling the field and entering values. For dynamic analyses, output can
be recovered in either Magnitude/Phase or Real/Imaginary format. The Relative Enforced Motion Results can be
used recover relative results from an enforced motion analysis.
Customization also used to specify a Results Destination (PostProcess only = *.op2, Print Only = *.f06, XDB =
*.xdb, etc.) and set options to “echo” the input in the printed output using the Echo Model field.

Note: When “3..Print and PostProcess” is selected as the Results Destination, the results are sent to both the
.f06 and the .op2 file. Normally, this would not be suggested, but the option is there to complete all the
possible combinations for requesting output. When FEMAP runs Simcenter Nastran, it automatically
reads the results (controlled via a preference: File, Preferences, then click Interfaces, then disable the
Automatically Load Results option), but it does this by first reading the .f06 file to attain any error,
warning, or information messages that might have occurred during the analysis.
 8-110 Analysis Program Interfaces

Note: If requesting grid point force data to create Freebody plots in FEMAP, either the “2..PostProcess Only”
or “6..XBD” option must be selected, as the grid point force data is not read from the .f06 file.

8.8.1.11 NASTRAN Modal Analysis

The NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box lets you enter options for Normal Modes, Random, or Buckling Analy-
sis. These parameters are used to define the EIGR (EIGRL, EIGC, EIGB) command that controls modal analysis.

A similar box appears for “3..Transient Dynamic/Time History” and “4..Frequency/Harmonic Response” analysis,
except you have an option to select Direct or Modal solution type (also available when using one of the Complex
Solution Methods).
Skip EIGx
The Skip EIGx option allows you to have FEMAP NOT write any “EIGx” (EIGC, EIGR, EIGRL) entries into the
Nastran input file (*.dat or *.bdf file). If FEMAP does not support a particular option on any of the EIGx entries
which you might want to use, you can “skip” writing an EIGx entry out during export and instead use the “Start
Text” button in the Manual Control section in the NASTRAN Bulk Data Options to “manually” enter an EIGx entry.
Method ID
The Method ID specifies the ID of the EIGR command. It is also used in the Case Control section on the METHOD
command to select the EIGR command.
Real Solution Methods and Legacy Real Solution Methods
The options in these sections allow you to choose the method that will be used for real modal extraction. The
options will be designated using the EIGR, EIGRL, or EXTRACTMETHOD (NEi Nastran only) entry in the Nastran
input file. Depending on which solution method you choose, the various other options can be used in different com-
binations. are “legacy methods”. While the options in Legacy Real Solution Methods section are still valid methods
 NASTRAN Modal Analysis 8-111

of eigenvalue extraction, it may be to your advantage to use one of the options in the Real Solution Method section.
Refer to your Nastran documentation for more information regarding which method will be best for your model.
Complex Solution Methods
The options in this section allow you to choose the method that will be used for complex modal extraction. The
options will be designated using the EIGC entry in the Nastran input file. Depending on which solution method you
choose, the various other options can be used in different combinations.

Note: By selecting a Complex Solution Method, the Imaginary fields in the Range of Interest section will
become available, along with the Direct and Modal options in Solution Type. When using a Complex
Solution Method for NEi Nastran, the Solution Type MUST be set to Modal.

Solution Type
The Solution Type section is used to specify what solution type should be used when creating analysis sets for
“3..Transient Dynamic/Time History” or “4..Frequency/Harmonic Response” Analysis Types. Direct is used to cre-
ate Direct Transient or Direct Frequency, while Modal creates a Modal Transient or Modal Frequency analysis.
If you pick the Modal solution type, you can also enter modal participation information on another dialog box. (See
Section 8.8.1.14, "NASTRAN XY Output for Modal Analysis".)
Range of Interest
These options select the range of frequencies where eigenvectors will be computed. There are fields to specify a
range for both Real (Normal Modes) and Imaginary (Complex Modes). Specifying a value of 0.0 in the From field
will write a “blank” field, which may or may not be desirable, while entering a value of 1.0E-15 will cause Nastran
to use a value which is essentially 0.0.
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors
The estimated number of roots is only used for the Inverse Power solution method (where it is required). The num-
ber of desired vectors is typically an alternative to the frequency range. Instead of specifying frequencies, you can
choose to recover a number of eigenvectors with the lowest frequencies. Entering a value below 0 in the Number
Desired field will write a “blank” field, which may or may not be desirable.
Normalization Method
These options choose the method for eigenvector normalization. Mass normalizes to the unit value of the general-
ized mass. Max normalizes to the largest component of mass in the analysis set, and Point normalizes to the mass at
a specific nodal degree of freedom. If you choose point normalization, you must also specify a node ID and degree
of freedom.
Mass
Allows you to designate if the mass matrices for elements with coupled mass capability (i.e., CBAR, CBEAM,
CHEXA, CPENTA, CPYRAM, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CQUADX4, CQUADX8, CROD, CTETRA,
CTRAX3, CTRAX6, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, and CTUBE) should be “Coupled” or remain “Lumped”
(default for most analyses) by writing the PARAM, COUPMASS entry in the Nastran input file. When “Coupled”
is selected, both structural and non-structural mass are taken into account for the aforementioned elements.
Complex Solution Options
Convergence is a Convergence Criteria (E field in the EIGC entry) which can be entered when using any of the
Complex Solution Methods. The default values for each method is different and are as follows:
Hessenberg = 10-15, Complex Inverse Power = 10-4, Complex Lanczos is machine dependent.
Region Width is only available when using the Complex Inverse Power method and is the width of the j-th Search
Region which by default is 1.0 and is entered in the Lj field on the EIGC entry. Overall Damping (G) - sets the
“Overall Structural Damping” for complex modal analysis using the PARAM, G.

Note: In most cases, a damper element or “G” will be used to provide “Damping” for a Complex Modes anal-
ysis. The PVISC and CVISC entries can be created in FEMAP using the Spring/Damper Property (set
to “Other (NASTRAN CROD/CVISC)”) and Element.

Note: When displaying results for “Complex Modal Analysis” the default Titles displayed in the graphics
window will contain both the Frequency and the Damping Coefficient.
 8-112 Analysis Program Interfaces

Special Note about Pre-stiffened Modal Analysis.

You will notice that during a Normal Modes analysis, that you cannot choose a Load Set in the Boundary Condi-
tions dialog box of the Master Analysis Case. You can run a pre-stiffened modal analysis in FEMAP by adding a
loading condition to your model, but it does require a subcase to be created in order for it to work properly. The
exact process is to go to the bottom of the “tree structure” in the Analysis Set Manager and highlight the “No Case
Defined” branch of the “tree”. Now click the New button and FEMAP will prompt you to create a subcase. Click
Next and you can now add a loading condition to the model using the Loads pull-down menu (you will need to have
a load set for this to work properly). You will notice an additional SUBCASE has been added to the Case Control
section and a STATSUB entry can be found there which will prompt Nastran to run a Pre-stiffened Modal Analysis.
Now run the analysis and your results will reflect pre-stiffened modal analysis. A pre-stiffened modal analysis is
needed when using Linear Contact with Simcenter Nastran SOL 103.

Note: For performing “Stiffened Modes in Nonlinear Analysis” (SOL 106), you will need to “expand” the
Options portion of the tree in the Analysis Set Manager, highlight NASTRAN Stiffened Model from the
list, then click the Edit button. The NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box will appear with the “Enable
Stress Stiffening” option already checked and other modal options can be specified

8.8.1.12 NASTRAN DDAM Analysis (Modal Analysis Only)

The Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) is a list of procedures to determine the modal shock response of
on-board ship equipment due to underwater explosions. In Simcenter Nastran and MSC/MD Nastran, DDAM anal-
ysis has been implemented as a single solution sequence, SOL 187. For NEi/Nastran, the available options will be
written out to a “DDAMDAT” entry (instead of a NAVSHOCK file) and used appropriately.

Note: To access the DDAM options in FEMAP, you will need to “expand” the Options portion of the tree of
an Analysis Set (Modal Analysis only) in the Analysis Set Manager, highlight DDAM from the list, then
click the Edit button. The NASTRAN DDAM Solutions Options dialog box will appear.

You must check the “Enable DDAM Analysis” box for FEMAP to use any DDAM options. By default, the
“Include Path in All Filenames” will be checked.
 NASTRAN DDAM Analysis (Modal Analysis Only) 8-113

This solution sequence has 3 separate phases for SOL 187 which all occur automatically from a single Nastran job
submittal, and can be set-up completely from within FEMAP:
• Phase 1: A modal analysis (SOL 187) runs to calculate the natural frequencies. Then the participation factors and
modal effective weights are calculated for each mode. The modes, participation factors, and modal effective
weights are written to an ASCII OUTPUT4 file.
• Phase 2: The Naval Shock Analysis (NAVSHOCK) FORTRAN program is automatically invoked to compute the
modal shock responses. NAVSHOCK uses the following files as input:
The OUTPUT4 file created in phase 1 by Simcenter Nastran.
• A required, user-created DDAM Control file storing various runtime options
• An optional, user-created DDAM Coefficient file containing the weighting factors used for the response calcu-
lations, the directional scaling factors, as well as the modal mass cutoff value. This file must be listed in the
DDAM Control file for NAVSHOCK to use it.
• An optional, user-created Shock Spectra file which defines the input shock spectrum as data pairs of frequency
and displacement, velocity, acceleration. This file must also be listed in the DDAM Control file for
NAVSHOCK to use it.
FEMAP creates all of the required files and other controls based on what is entered in the NASTRAN DDAM Solu-
tion Options dialog box
• Phase 3: The modal shock responses created in phase 2 are read by Nastran, and results are recovered and output
for post-processing.
Here is a listing of how the “lines and items” of the NAVSHOCK control file correspond to various sections and
options of the NASTRAN DDAM Solution Options dialog box. The names for the options are often very similar or
identical to how they are described in the Simcenter Nastran documentation. The FEMAP option in the NASTRAN
DDAM Solution Options dialog box is in parentheses after the appropriate Line or Item
Spectrum/Coefficient Options and Equation Type
First Line - spectrum control
First Item - Coefficients from File or from compiled source (“Second Item” in MSC/MD Nastran)
T = coefficients from external file (Coefficients from External File Radio Button)
F = use built-in coefficients (Use Built-In Coefficients Radio Button)
Specify Coefficients Radio Button - allows you to click the Specify Coefficients button and enter a the coefficients
in this dialog box. FEMAP will then write the corresponding “Coefficient File” when the analysis is run.
Second item - DDAM or general spectrum run flag (“First Item” in MSC/MD Nastran)
T = General non-DDAM spectrum run (Non-DDAM Spectrum Analysis)
F = DDAM (DDAM)
Third item - Equation Format (MSC/MD Nastran Only)
T = DDS-072 style equations (DDS-072 Radio Button in Equation Type section)
F = NRL 1396 style equations (NRL 1396 Radio Button in Equation Type section)
Second Line - file name (if needed - If neither First Item or Second Item are T, line is not needed)
If 1st item on line 1 is T, Name of coefficient file (Coefficient File field when DDAM is chosen)
If 2nd item on line 1 is T, Name spectrum file (Spectrum File field when Non-DDAM Spectrum Analysis is chosen)

Note: You can use the “...” button to browse to the appropriate file.

Location, Equipment, and Coefficient Type

Third Line - location flags
First Item - Surface or Submarine (“Location” Section)
1 = Surface (Surface Radio Button in Location Section)
2 = Submarine (Submerged Radio Button in Location Section)
 8-114 Analysis Program Interfaces

Second Item - equipment location (“Equipment” Section)

1 = Deck (Deck Radio Button in Equipment Section)
2 = Hull (Hull Radio Button in Equipment Section)
3 = Shell (Shell Radio Button in Equipment Section)
Third Item - coefficient type (“Coefficient Type” Section)
1 = Elastic (Elastic Radio Button in Coefficient Type Section)
2 = Elastic/Plastic (Elastic/Plastic Radio Button in Coefficient Type Section)
Cutoffs, Axis Orientation, and Unit Conversion
4th Line - Weight cutoff percentage - must be from 0. To 100. (Modal Mass Cutoff % in “Cutoffs” Section)
5th Line - Axis Orientation (these options write “6th Line” in NAVSHOCK for use with MSC/MD Nastran)
First Item - F/A axis, X, Y, or Z (Fore/Aft X, Y, and Z Radio buttons in the Axis Orientation Section)
Second Item - Vertical Axis X, Y, or Z (Vertical X, Y, and Z Radio buttons in the Axis Orientation Section.
Minimum Acceleration (Gs) - Minimum G level to use (in Gs). Writes the “5th Line” in NAVSHOCK for use with
MSC/MD Nastran and the “9th Line” for Simcenter Nastran.
Unit Conversion - Force written to “10th Line”, Acceleration written to “11th Line” for Simcenter Nastran.
Dir Sequence (X=1,Y=2,Z=3) and Mass to Weight Factor are for NEi/Nastran only.
8.8.1.13 NASTRAN Rotor Dynamics (Simcenter Nastran SOL 110 and 111 Only)
Rotor Dynamics are available in Complex Modal Analysis (SOL 110) and Modal Frequency Response (SOL 111).

Note: To access the Simcenter Nastran Rotor Dynamic options in FEMAP, you will need to “expand” the
Options portion of the tree of an appropriate Analysis Set in the Analysis Set Manager, highlight
NASTRAN Rotor Dynamics from the list, then click the Edit button. The NASTRAN Rotor Dynamics
Options dialog box will appear.

You must check the “Enable Rotor Dynamic Analysis” box for FEMAP to use any Rotor Dynamics options.
 NASTRAN XY Output for Modal Analysis 8-115

Individual “Rotors” can be created in FEMAP using the Connect, Rotor Region. See Section 4.4.10, "Connect,
Rotor Region..." in the FEMAP Commands Manual.
Rotor Selection
By default, FEMAP will use the Single Rotor - Full Model option. When this is set, only the first two lines of the
ROTORD entry will be written. When Multiple Rotors - All Rotor Regions is chosen, each Rotor Region in your
model will write a separate continuation line for the ROTORD containing all of the Rotor information (RIDi,
RSETi, RCORDi, W3_i, W4_i, and RFORCEi).
Post Files
Checking CSV and/or GPF will write the appropriate “ASSIGN OUTPUT4” statement(s) to the Simcenter Nastran
input file which will generate the rotor.csv and/or rotor.gpf files.
Additional Rotor Dynamics Options
Essentially, each of the other sections of this dialog box specify field(s) on the ROTORD entry for Simcenter Nas-
tran. Choosing an option in the dialog box will write out the appropriate text or number to the corresponding field.
• Reference System - enters either “FIX” or “ROT” to the REFSYS field.
• Rotor Speed - Start Value = RSTART field; Step Size = RSTEP field; Number of Steps = NUMSTEP field.
• Speed Input Units - writes “RPM”, “CPS”, “HZ”, or “RAD” to the RUNIT field.
• Output Units - writes “RPM”, “CPS”, “HZ”, or “RAD” to the FUNIT field.
• Printed Output - writes “0” (None), “1” (Generalized Matrices), “2” (Eigenvalue Summary/Eigenvectors), or
“4” (Both) to the ROTPRT field.
• Mode/Whirl Output - writes “0.0” (None), “-1.0” (All RPM), or “>0.0” (Rotor Speed value) to CMOUT field.
• Other Options - When “checked”, the Steiner Inertia will write YES to the ZSTEIN field (NO if “unchecked”,
which is the Default), while Whirl Threshold will write a value to the ORBEPS field.
• Response Calc, Excitation, and Excitation Order - used for Model Frequency Response (SOL 111) and rep-
resent the SYNC, ETYPE, and EORDER fields on the ROTORD.
• Modes for Dynamic Response (SOL 111 only) - writes appropriate MODSEL and SET Case Control lines.
8.8.1.14 NASTRAN XY Output for Modal Analysis
The NASTRAN XY Output for Modal Analysis dialog box appears if you pick the Modal solution type on the Nas-
tran Dynamic Analysis dialog box for the following solution types: Normal Modes/Eigenvalue, Random, and
Buckling. It also applies to Transient Dynamic/Time History and Frequency/Harmonic response when the system
modes are calculated.

This dialog box controls the type of modal participation information that is written to the PRINT output file (*.f06).
If you enter a Reference Node, Nastran will use it for the calculation. If you leave the value as 0, Nastran will use
the origin of the global rectangular coordinate system.
 8-116 Analysis Program Interfaces

FEMAP will read the output information into a FEMAP function. In FEMAP, you can display this data as an XY
plot using the Charting dockable pane.
8.8.1.15 NASTRAN Direct Transient Analysis
The NASTRAN Dynamic Analysis dialog box provides the control information for Direct Transient dynamic analy-
ses. Direct or Modal is chosen in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box of a the Analysis Set Manager when
Analysis Type is set to “3..Transient Dynamic/Time History” for an analysis set. The Use Load Set Options check
box can be used to ignore this dialog box and instead use the options set with the Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis
command. See Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..."

Equivalent Viscous Damping

This box provides damping information for the structure. Only the Overall Structural Damping Coefficient may be
input for Direct Transient analysis. Overall Structural Damping Coefficient creates the PARAM,G entry
Equivalent Viscous Damping Conversion
Information for both system damping and element damping is provided in this box. These values provide the con-
version from the frequency domain, in which damping is usually defined, into the time domain. The Frequency for
System Damping (W3 - Hz) is divided into the overall damping coefficient, then multiplied by the stiffness to obtain
element (or stiffness) damping. The Frequency for Element Damping (W4 - Hz) is used in combination with the
material damping values to obtain structural damping.
Specify Rigid Body Zero Modes (FZERO) to have modes with values under specified value be considered “0”.
The Rigid Body Zero Modes (FZERO) creates PARAM,FZERO entry, Frequency for System Damping (W3 - Hz)
creates the PARAM,W3 entry, while the Frequency for Element Damping (W4 - Hz) creates PARAM,W4.
Transient Time Step Intervals
These options control the number of steps, size of steps, and the output interval. Creates the TSTEP entry.
Solution Frequencies tab
The Solution Frequencies tab is not used for Direct Transient analysis.
 NASTRAN Modal Transient Analysis 8-117

8.8.1.16 NASTRAN Modal Transient Analysis

The NASTRAN Dynamic Analysis dialog box provides the control information for Modal Transient dynamic analy-
ses. Direct or Modal is chosen in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box of a the Analysis Set Manager when
Analysis Type is set to “3..Transient Dynamic/Time History” for an analysis set. The Use Load Set Options check
box can be used to ignore this dialog box and instead use the options set with the Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis
command. See Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..."

Note: When using the Modal option, the Frequency Range may be set in the Range of Interest section of the
NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box. The number of modes to extract may be specified using Num-
ber Desired in the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors section. See Section 8.8.1.11, "NASTRAN Modal
Analysis" for more information.

Equivalent Viscous Damping

This box provides damping information for the structure. Either the Overall Structural Damping Coefficient along
with a value for Freq for System Damping (W3 - Hz) or a Modal Damping Table may be input for Model Transient
analysis. Overall Structural Damping Coefficient creates the PARAM,G entry, while the Modal Damping Table
will create the SDAMPING entry in the Case Control section and a TABDMP1 entry in the Bulk Data section.
Equivalent Viscous Damping Conversion
Information for both system damping and element damping is provided in this box. These values provide the con-
version from the frequency domain, in which damping is usually defined, into the time domain. When checked,
Convert using Solution Freq (WMODAL) specifies a structural-to-viscous damping conversion method that uses
the solved modal frequencies as conversion factors. Specify Rigid Body Zero Modes (FZERO) to have modes with
values under specified value be considered “0”. The Frequency for System Damping (W3 - Hz) is divided into the
overall damping coefficient, then multiplied by the stiffness to obtain element (or stiffness) damping. The Fre-
quency for Element Damping (W4 - Hz) is used in combination with the material damping values to obtain struc-
tural damping.
 8-118 Analysis Program Interfaces

Convert using Solution Freq (WMODAL) creates PARAM,WMODAL,YES entry, Rigid Body Zero Modes
(FZERO) creates PARAM,FZERO entry, Frequency for System Damping (W3 - Hz) creates the PARAM,W3 entry,
while Frequency for Element Damping (W4 - Hz) creates PARAM,W4.
Limit Response Based on Modes
These options allow you to limit the modes used to analyze the response of the structure by allowing you to set a
subset of the frequency range specified in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box or simply enter a fewer num-
ber of modes to use. This can be useful if restarting from a Modal Analysis which had a larger frequency range or
more modes than are needed to run an accurate Modal Transient analysis.
Number of Modes will write the PARAM,LMODES entry, Lowest Freq (Hz) will write PARAM,LFREQ and High-
est Freq (Hz) will write PARAM,HFREQ.
Transient Time Step Intervals
These options control the number of steps, size of steps, and the output interval. Creates the TSTEP entry.
Solution Frequencies tab
The Solution Frequencies tab is not used for Modal Transient analysis.
8.8.1.17 NASTRAN Direct Frequency Analysis
The NASTRAN Dynamic Analysis dialog box provides the control information for Direct Frequency response anal-
yses. Direct or Modal is chosen in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box of a the Analysis Set Manager when
Analysis Type is set to “4..Frequency/Harmonic Response” for an analysis set. The Use Load Set Options check
box can be used to ignore this dialog box and instead use the options set with the Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis
command. See Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..."

Frequency ID
This value is used to specify the ID of the Frequency Set which is written to Case Control as FREQUENCY=SID
and used as the Set ID (SID) by all lists of solution frequencies (FREQ and FREQi entries) for this Analysis Set.
 NASTRAN Modal Frequency Analysis 8-119

Equivalent Viscous Damping

This box provides damping information for the structure. Only the Overall Structural Damping Coefficient may be
input for Direct Frequency analysis. Overall Structural Damping Coefficient creates the PARAM,G entry.
Frequency Response
This section allows you to specify the Frequencies where you would like to calculate response. When performing a
Direct Frequency analysis, this is simply a “vs. Frequency” function containing all the frequencies in the X column
and a Factor (usually 1.0) in the Y column. Creates the FREQUENCY entry in Case Control and the FREQ entry in
the Bulk Data section.
Solution Frequencies tab
The Solution Frequencies tab in Direct Frequency Analysis may be used to define the Solution Frequencies in an
alternate way for the analysis. Only “0..FREQ”, “1..FREQ1”, and “2..FREQ2” lists of solution frequencies should
be selected for Direct Frequency Analysis. For more information on creating lists of solution frequencies, see
"Solution Frequencies tab" in Section 8.8.1.18, "NASTRAN Modal Frequency Analysis"
8.8.1.18 NASTRAN Modal Frequency Analysis
The Dynamic Control Options dialog box provides the control information for Modal Frequency dynamic analyses.
Direct or Modal is chosen in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box of a the Analysis Set Manager when Analy-
sis Type is set to “4..Frequency/Harmonic Response” for an analysis set. The Use Load Set Options check box can
be used to ignore this dialog box and instead use the options set with the Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis com-
mand. See Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis..."

Note: When using the Modal option, the Frequency Range may be set in the Range of Interest section of the
NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box. The number of modes to extract may be specified using Num-
ber Desired in the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors section. See Section 8.8.1.11, "NASTRAN Modal
Analysis" for more information.
 8-120 Analysis Program Interfaces

Frequency ID
This value is used to specify the ID of the Frequency Set which is written to Case Control as FREQUENCY=SID
and used as the Set ID (SID) by all lists of solution frequencies (FREQ and FREQi entries) for this Analysis Set.
Equivalent Viscous Damping and Equivalent Viscous Damping Conversion
This box provides damping information for the structure. Either the Overall Structural Damping Coefficient along
with a value for Freq for System Damping (W3 - Hz) or a Modal Damping Table may be input for Model Frequency
analysis. Overall Structural Damping Coefficient creates the PARAM,G entry, while the Modal Damping Table
will create the SDAMPING entry in the Case Control section and a TABDMP1 entry in the Bulk Data section.
When checked, the As Structural check box will write out PARAM,KDAMP,-1.
Specify Rigid Body Zero Modes (FZERO) to have modes with values under specified value be considered “0”.
Limit Response Based on Modes
These options allow you to limit the modes used to analyze the response of the structure by allowing you to set a
subset of the frequency range specified in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box or simply enter a fewer num-
ber of modes to use. This can be useful if restarting from a Modal Analysis which had a larger frequency range or
more modes than are needed to run an accurate Modal Frequency analysis.
Number of Modes will write the PARAM,LMODES entry, Lowest Freq (Hz) will write PARAM,LFREQ and High-
est Freq (Hz) will write PARAM,HFREQ.
Frequency Response
This section allows you to specify the frequencies where you would like to calculate response. If you have previ-
ously performed a modal analysis on your model, and have the solution information in the current model, you can
automatically create a solution frequencies table from that output. Simply press Modal Freq, and you will see the
Frequency Table From Modal Results dialog box.

The modal frequency in each output case will be selected for the Solution Frequency table. Additionally, frequen-
cies in a band near each modal frequency can be chosen using the Additional Solution Frequency Points section.
The Number of Points per Existing Mode defines the number of frequencies to be included for each modal fre-
quency, while the Frequency Band Spread defines the placement of the additional frequencies.
Choosing only one point per mode will select just the modal frequencies. Choosing three points per mode will
select the modal frequencies and two additional frequencies at the modal frequency plus and minus the spread
value. The number of points must always be odd so that the modal frequencies themselves are selected.
Solution Frequencies tab
The Solution Frequencies tab may be used to define the “solution frequencies” in an alternate way for direct fre-
quency response, modal frequency response, and random response analysis.
This tab offers two sections: Data, which is used to specify each list of solution frequencies, and Response Fre-
quencies, where, once added, each list of solution frequencies will appear and can be chosen for use in an analysis.
 NASTRAN Modal Frequency Analysis 8-121

Once a list of solution frequencies has been created, you can select it for use in any Analysis Set where the Solution
Frequencies tab is available. Only items which are “checked” in the Response Frequencies list for an Analysis Set
will be written to the Nastran input file.

Data
The options available to specify a list of solution frequencies correspond to the various entries Nastran has to
define a frequency list (FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, and FREQ5). In all cases, you need to click the
Add button to have the list appear in the Response Frequencies list.
Form of Frequency List
This drop-down is used to select the type of “Nastran Frequency List” to create. The inputs needed to define each
type of frequency list vary based on the selected option.
The types of frequency list are:
• FREQ - Can be defined by selecting a function from the Function ID drop-down (only X values will be used)
or by clicking the Frequency Value button, which displays the Frequency Response Input dialog box. In either
case, the entered values are used as the solution frequencies by Nastran.
When Frequency Division is set to “Custom”, enter values directly into the Frequency Value (Fi) field. Values
MUST be greater than or equal to 0.0. Click the Add button to add the current value in Frequency Value (Fi) to the
list of values. Click Update button to change a highlighted value to the value currently in the Frequency Value (Fi)
field. Click Delete button to remove the value from the list. The Reset button can be used to clear all values from
the list. The Copy to Clipboard and Paste from Clipboard icon buttons can be used to copy/paste the current list of
values to the clipboard or paste values from the clipboard into the dialog box, respectively.
When Frequency Division is set to “Bias”, enter a Number, choose a type of Bias (“Bias Equal”, “Bias at Start”,
“Bias at End”, “Bias at Center”, or “Bias at Both Ends”), enter a Bias Factor (if needed), and a Range (lowest value
and highest value). Once all parameters have been specified, click the Add button to add values.
• FREQ1 - Enter First Frequency (F1), Number of Increments (NDF), and Frequency Increment (DF)
 8-122 Analysis Program Interfaces

For example F1 = 20.0, NDF = 5, and DF = 20.0 would produce a list with values of 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 120.
• FREQ2 - Enter First Frequency (F1), Last Frequency (F2), and Number of Log Interval (NF)
For example F1 = 20, F2 = 100, and NF = 4 would produce a list with values of 20, 29.907, 44.7214, 66.874, and
100.
• FREQ3 - Enter First Frequency (F1), Last Frequency (F2), Number of Frequencies (NEF) (number of exci-
tation frequencies between two modal frequencies, value includes both modal frequencies), and Cluster (factor
used for “clustering” of excitation frequencies near the end points of range). Also, you can choose to use Loga-
rithmic (checked) or Linear (unchecked) interpolation between frequencies.
For example, F1 = 20, F2 = 300, NEF = 4, and Cluster = 1.0, Logarithmic not checked, and 2 Modes with fre-
quency values 89.8135 and 243.5258 would solve using a list of 20, 43.271, 66.5421, 89.8131, 141.051, 192.288,
243.526, 262.351, 281.175, and 300. Bold values are first, last, and 2 modal values.
• FREQ4 - Enter First Frequency (F1), Last Frequency (F2), Number of Frequency (NFM) (number of evenly
spaced frequencies per “spread” mode), and Spread (FSPD, +/-%) (specified as a % and is the “frequency
spread”, +/- the fractional amount, for each mode).
For example, F1 = 20, F2 = 300, NFM = 5, and FSPD, +/-% = 3, with 2 Modes of 89.8135 (Mode 1) and 243.5258
(Mode 2) would produce a list of 87.1188 (97% of Mode 1 value), 88.4659 (98.5%), 89.8135 (100%), 91.1603
(101.5%), 92.5075 (103%), 236.22 (97% of Mode 2 value), 239.873 (98.5%), 243.5258 (100%), 247.179
(101.5%), and 250.832 (103%).
• FREQ5 - Enter First Frequency (F1) and Last Frequency (F2). Only modes which fall within the frequency
range between F1 and F2 will be used. Now enter “fractions” of each mode to use by selecting a function from
the Function ID drop-down (only X values will be used) or by clicking the Frequency Fraction button, which
displays the Frequency Response Input dialog box. This dialog box is similar to the one used when creating a
list for FREQ, only you enter values as Frequency Fraction (FRi) values instead of actual frequency values.
Entering a value of 1.0 will create a value equal to 100% of each modal value in the specified range, 0.9 will
create a value 90% of each modal value, while 1.05 will create a value 105% of each modal value.
For example, Frequency 1 = 20, Frequency 2 = 300, with 2 Modes of 89.8135 (Mode 1) and 243.5258 (Mode 2).
Using values of 0.9, 1.0, and 1.05 for the Frequency Fraction (FRi) would produce a list with 80.8318 (90% of
Mode 1 value), 89.8135 (100%), 94.3038 (105%), 219.173 (90% of Mode 2 value), 243.5258 (100%), and 255.702
(105%).
Add Button
Click this button to add a new list of solution frequencies to the Response Frequencies list.
Update Button
When an item is highlighted in the Response Frequencies list, it will appear in the Data section. Make any desired
changes, then click this button to update the current list of solution frequencies.
Response Frequencies
This list shows all available lists of solution frequencies currently in the model. To select a list of solution frequen-
cies, click the check box to the left of the ID. Only “checked” items in a particular Analysis Set will be written to
the Nastran input file and the “checked” items can vary from Analysis Set to Analysis Set. To “check” all available
lists of solution frequencies, click the Select All icon button or click the Select None icon button to “uncheck” all.
Only one item at a time can be highlighted in the Response Frequencies list. When highlighted, the data for that list
of solution frequencies will appear in the Data section and can be updated. Click the Delete button to delete the
highlighted item or click Delete All to delete all lists of solution frequencies.
8.8.1.19 NASTRAN Response Spectrum Analysis
Response spectrum analysis is an approximate method for predicting the peak responses of a transient excitation
applied to a simple structure or component.
There are two basic steps to determining peak responses:
1. Run the Response Spectrum analysis to create spectrum. You then use the spectrum as input to a Normal Modes
analysis.
2. Run a Normal Modes analysis.
 NASTRAN Response Spectrum Analysis 8-123

Before you run the response spectrum analysis, create a group of nodes for the analysis.
To set up the Response Spectrum analysis, use the NASTRAN Output for Response Spectrum Analysis dialog to
pick the DOF for displacement, velocity, and/or acceleration.

The software will then display the Nodal Results dialog box, where you will select the group of nodes to analyze.
NASTRAN Normal Modes/Response Spectrum Application
In a Normal Modes analysis, you can use the NASTRAN Response Spectrum Application dialog box to set up a
response spectrum analysis. This type of analysis predicts the peak responses of a transient excitation applied to a
simple structure or component.

Before you can run the Normal Modes/Response Spectrum analysis:

• Run a Response Spectrum analysis (set the analysis type to Response Spectrum) to create the spectrum that
you’ll need for the Normal Modes/Response Spectrum analysis.
• Use the FEMAP Model, Function command to create a function that applies damping to each input spectra.
Once these two steps are complete, you can set up an Normal Modes/Response Spectrum analysis.
 8-124 Analysis Program Interfaces

Spectrum
Pick acceleration, velocity, or displacement. Use the FEMAP damping/spectra function as the Spectrum Function,
and enter a scale factor.
Modal Combination
• Pick the method used to combine the peak responses into the overall response:
ABS: absolute values
SRSS: square root sum of the square
NRL: U.S. Navy shock design modal summation
NRLO: U.S. Navy shock design modal summation (old method)
• Closeness: The Closeness value applies to all methods except ABS. The natural frequencies that are greater
than this value will be calculated using the method that you selected. However, the software will use the ABS
method to calculate any natural frequencies that are less than the Closeness value.
Base DOF
Pick a constraint (SUPORT) set to define the rigid body DOF to be excluded from the analysis.
Modal Damping
To define modal damping for the analysis, you must first create it with the FEMAP Model, Function command. To
create the function, define the damping value as a function of natural frequency. You can create one of three func-
tion types: structural damping vs. frequency, critical damping vs. frequency, or Q damping vs. frequency.
8.8.1.20 NASTRAN Random Response Analysis
For Random Response analyses, you should specify additional output requests. Random Response results are out-
put through the XY plotting routines, as well as separate output requests which are similar to requests for stress,
strain, etc. In the first NASTRAN Output for Random Analysis dialog box, you can select Power Spectral Density
Functions (PSD), Autocorrelation Functions, Root Mean Square results, or All for both nodal and elemental output.

The information you request will then be exported to OUTPUT2 results file (op2).

Note: Imported nodal results from a random analysis (PSDF, RMS, and Positive Crossings output sets) are
read “as is” from Nastran Results files. The results are not transformed into the global coordinate sys-
tem like nodal results from other types of analysis. Therefore, any command which “transforms”
nodal output will produce invalid output values for the nodal output vectors in these sets.
 NASTRAN Random Response Analysis 8-125

Note: Von Mises Stress results from random response analysis are available from NX Nastran version 9.0
and above, including Simcenter Nastran. They are only found in the Root Mean Square (RMS) output
set, so you will need to request Root Mean Square or All in order to post-process this output vector.
In the second NASTRAN Output for Random Analysis dialog box, you can define each individual output for XY
plots of random analysis results. You should carefully define which output types are required for your analysis
because large amounts of output will be obtained if all output types are requested for a significant portion of a large
model.

After selecting the type of output, you will then select the nodes and/or elements by selecting an existing group of
nodes for items selected in the Nodal Output Requests section and/or an existing group of elements for items
selected in the Elemental Stresses and Elemental Forces sections.
You can also choose to recover Power Spectral Density Functions, which is the default, and/or Autocorrelation
Functions by checking the box PSDF and/or AUTO, respectively.
You may also limit the output to Summary Data Only. The results will not include individual values vs. frequency.
The Summary Data Only option is most useful when you need to recover RMS values for your entire model, but do
not need the contributions from the individual frequencies.
 8-126 Analysis Program Interfaces

NASTRAN Power Spectral Density Factors

In a random response analysis, use the NASTRAN Power Spectral Density Factors dialog box to define complex
cross spectral correlations between the load sets defined for a random response analysis.

Correlation Table and Edit Correlation Table

The numbers of the Correlation Table correspond to the cases that define the loads for your analysis. Where the
cases listed are the same (i.e, Master=>Master or 1=>1), pick the case from the table, then enter a real factor and
select a PSD function to apply to the case. (You create PSD functions using the FEMAP Model, Function com-
mand.)
Once Apply is clicked to update the Correlation Table when the cases are the same (i.e., Master=>Master,1=>1),
the information will appear as follows:
“Real” Factor*(“Real” Function ID) + :PSD Interpolation option (“Real”)
When the cases are different (such as 1=>2), you must decide whether you want to correlate the cases. If you don’t
enter any values for real and imaginary values, the cases will not be correlated. If you do want to correlate the
cases, enter the real and imaginary factors and PSD functions.
Once Apply is clicked to update the Correlation Table when the cases are not the same (i.e.,1=>2), the information
will appear as follows:
“Real” Factor*(“Real” Function ID) + “Imaginary” Factor*(“Imaginary” Function ID) :PSD Interpolation option
(“Real”) :PSD Interpolation option (“Imaginary”)
Autocorrelation Function Time Lag
The items in the Autocorrelation Function Time Lag section are used to define time lag constants for use in calcula-
tion of autocorrelation functions in random response analysis. All three of these values will be written to the same
RANDT1 entry in Nastran, with the value entered for Lag Intervals written to the N field, the value for Starting
Lag written to the T0 field, and the value for Max Lag written to the TMAX field.
 NASTRAN Design/Topology Optimization 8-127

8.8.1.21 NASTRAN Design/Topology Optimization

When Analysis Type is set to “8..Design/Topology Optimization”, a number of dialog boxes become available to
specify various options and controls for either Design Optimization (SOL 200 for Simcenter Nastran and MSC
Nastran) or Topology Optimization (SOL 200 for Simcenter Nastran only). See "NASTRAN Optimization Options
- Optimization Type = Design", "NASTRAN Optimization Options - Optimization Type = Topology", "Select
Optimization Limit(s)", and "Analysis Case"
NASTRAN Optimization Options - Optimization Type = Design
When Optimization Type is set to Design in the Options section, the NASTRAN Optimization Options dialog box
has these options available:

Options
Use the Analysis Type drop-down to select a “global” analysis type from”0..None”, “1..Static”, “2..Normal Modes/
Eigenvalue”, or “4..Frequency/Harmonic Response”. When “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” or “4..Frequency/Har-
monic Response” is selected, an option to Track Modes becomes available. When enabled, a MODTRACK Case
Control entry and corresponding MODTRACK Bulk Data entry are written to the Nastran input file with value of 0
for both LOWRNG and HIGHRNG, thereby using all computed modes to search for designed modes.
Goal is used to select a design response quantity, which defines a set of structural responses that are used for the
objective and/or design constraints, or for sensitivity analysis purposes. If one of the three predefined “goals”,
Weight (default), Volume, or Compliance, is selected, a DRESP1 entry will be written with OBJECTIV in the
LABEL field and the appropriate text, WEIGHT, VOLUME, or CMPLNCE, in the RTYPE field. If a user-defined
response is selected the from the “Optimization Responses” section is selected, an appropriate DRESP1 entry will
be written.
If Minimum is selected, writes DESOBJ(MIN) to Case Control, while selecting Maximum writes DESOBJ(MAX)
to the Case Control. If the value for Cycles is above 0, then DOPTPRM entry is written with DESMAX in the
PARAM1 field and the specified value in the VAL1 field.
When Output Interval is set to “0..First and Last” writes, PARAM,NASPRT,0. When set to “1..Interval” and a
value (“N”) is entered into the field to the right of drop-down, writes PARAM,NASPRT, “N”, which causes output
to be written at the “0 cycle”, then at every “Nth cycle, and the “final cycle”.
 8-128 Analysis Program Interfaces

Optimization Variables
Click the Select Optimization Variables button to open the Select Optimization Variable(s) dialog box:
Toggle Selected On Title Filter

Toggle All Off Toggle Selected Off Clear Title Filter

Toggle All On

Delete Variable

Edit Variable
New Variable
Show Selected

Show Checked

Only the optimization variables which have a check box toggled “on” will be considered in the design optimization
analysis. Simply check optimization variables to process. It is also possible to highlight any number of variables
from the list. Holding down the “Ctrl” key will enable highlighting of multiple variables. Holding down “Shift”
while picking a “first” row, then a “last” row, will highlight a range of variables. Once highlighting is complete, use
the Toggle Selected On or Toggle Selected Off icon buttons to check or uncheck the highlighted variables.
Click the Title Filter icon button, then enter text into the Title Includes field to reduce the list to only include opti-
mization variables whose Titles include that text. Click Clear Filter icon button to return all variables to the list.
The Toggle All On button chooses all optimization variables currently in the list, so if the list is “filtered”, only
those optimization variables will be highlighted. Click Toggle All Off to have no variables selected in the list.
The Show Checked and Show Selected icon buttons are used to highlight elements in the graphics window. Using
Show Checked will highlight the elements controlled by variables currently checked in the Select Optimization
Variable(s) dialog box, while Show Selected uses the variables currently highlighted in the Select Optimization
Variable(s) dialog box.
The New Variable icon button can be used to open the Property Relation dialog box to create a new optimization
variable, while the Edit Variable icon button can be used to edit the variable currently highlighted in the Select
Optimization Variable(s) dialog box. The Delete Variable icon button can be used to delete the optimization vari-
able(s) currently highlighted. For more information about creating and managing optimization variables, see Sec-
tion 4.6.1, "Model, Optimization, Variables and Topology Regions" in the FEMAP Commands Manual.
NASTRAN Optimization Options - Optimization Type = Topology
When Optimization Type is set to Topology in the Options section, the NASTRAN Optimization Options dialog box
is very similar to when is set to Design, but does have some key differences.
First, the default option for Goal in the Options section is Compliance instead of Weight.
Second, there are four options for Output Interval in the Options section. When Output Interval is set to “0..First
and Best” writes, PARAM,NASPRT,0, which causes output to occur at the “0 cycle” the “best design cycle”. When
set to “1..Interval” and a value (“N”) is entered into the field to the right of drop-down, writes PARAM,NASPRT,
“N”, which causes output to be written at the “0 Cycle”, then at every “Nth Cycle”. When set to “-1..No Output”,
writes PARAM,NASPRT,-1, which causes no output to occur. When set to “-2,,All Improved”, writes
PARAM,NASPRT,-2, which causes output to occur at every improved design cycle.
Third, the sections are the bottom are used for specifying Topology Regions and Manufacturing Constraints.
 NASTRAN Design/Topology Optimization 8-129

Topology Regions
Click the Select Topology Regions button to open the Select Topology Region(s) dialog box:
Toggle Selected On Toggle Selected Off Title Filter

Toggle All Off

Clear Title Filter
Toggle All On

Edit Region
Delete Region
New Region
Show Selected

Show Frozen

Show Active

Only the optimization variables which have a check box toggled “on” will be used for topology optimization. The
icon buttons at the top work the same as the Select Optimization Variable(s) dialog box, only topology regions are
being selected instead of optimization variables. For more information, see "Optimization Variables".
The Show Active, Show Frozen, and Show Selected icon buttons are used to highlight elements in the graphics win-
dow. Using Show Active will highlight the elements which are “active” for topology optimization (i.e., considered
during optimization), while Show Frozen will highlight the elements which are “frozen” (i.e., not considered during
optimization). Show Selected highlights the elements in the regions currently highlighted in the Select Topology
Region(s) dialog box.
The New Region icon button can be used to open the “Relation” dialog box to create a new topology region, while
the Edit Region icon button can be used to edit the topology region currently highlighted in the Select Topology
Region(s) dialog box. For more information about creating and managing topology regions, see Section 4.6.1,
"Model, Optimization, Variables and Topology Regions" in the FEMAP Commands Manual.
Manufacturing Constraints
Click the Select Manufacturing Constraints button to open the Select Manufacturing Constraint(s) dialog box:
Toggle Selected On Toggle Selected Off Title Filter

Toggle All Off

Clear Title Filter
Toggle All On

Delete Constraint

Edit Constraint
New Constraint

Show Selected

Show Checked
 8-130 Analysis Program Interfaces

The icon buttons at the top work the same as the Select Optimization Variable(s) dialog box, only manufacturing
constraints are being selected instead of variables. For more information, see "Optimization Variables".
The Show Checked and Show Selected icon buttons are used to show vectors or planes in he graphics window.
Using Show Checked will highlight the elements controlled by variables currently checked in the Select Manufac-
turing Constraint(s) dialog box, while Show Selected uses the variables currently highlighted in the Select Manu-
facturing Constraint(s) dialog box.

Note: Show Selected will not be able to show anything in the graphics window for manufacturing con-
straints with Type set to “Checkerboarding Control”, “Maximum Size”, or “Minimum Size”, as
these manufacturing constraints do not reference entities, vectors, or planes.

The New Constraint icon button can be used to open the “Manufacturing Constraint” dialog box to create a new
manufacturing constraint, while the Edit Constraint icon button can be used to edit the manufacturing constraint
currently highlighted in the Select Manufacturing Constraint(s) dialog box. The Delete Constraint icon button can
be used to delete the manufacturing constraint(s) currently highlighted. For more information about creating and
managing manufacturing constraints, see Section 4.6.3, "Model, Optimization, Manufacturing Constraints".
When enabled, the Delay until cycle option combined with the value (“N”, must be greater than or equal to 1)
entered in the field writes PARAM,BDMNCON,”N” to delay the application of manufacturing constraints. When
disabled, Simcenter Nastran uses the default value to delay application of manufacturing constraints, which is the
lesser of 10 cycles or “the value specified for Cycles-3”. One other caveat is the default value is never lower than 2.
Select Optimization Limit(s)
To access the Select Optimization Limit(s) dialog box, click Next from either the Master Requests and Conditions
dialog box or the Analysis Case dialog box in any subcase. In addition, highlighting the Optimization Limits item in
the tree structure of the Analysis Set Manager and clicking Edit will also display this dialog box:
Toggle Selected On Toggle Selected Off Title Filter

Toggle All Off

Clear Title Filter
Toggle All On

Delete Limit
Edit Limit
New Limit

Show Selected

Show Checked

The icon buttons at the top work the same as the Select Optimization Variable(s) dialog box, only optimization lim-
its are being selected instead of optimization variables. For more information, see "Optimization Variables".
The Show Checked and Show Selected icon buttons are used to show entities in the graphics window. Using Show
Checked will highlight the entities being limited by the optimization limits currently checked in the Select Optimi-
zation Limit(s) dialog box, while Show Selected uses the optimization limits currently highlighted in the Select
Optimization Limit(s) dialog box.
The New Limit icon button can be used to open the “Response” dialog box to create a new optimization limit, while
the Edit Limit icon button can be used to edit the optimization limit currently highlighted in the Select Optimization
Limit(s) dialog box. The Delete Limit icon button can be used to delete the optimization limit(s) currently high-
lighted. For more information about creating and managing optimization limits, see Section 4.6.2, "Model, Optimi-
zation, Limits".
 Heat Transfer Nonlinear Control Options 8-131

Analysis Case
When running optimization in Nastran, SOL 200or SOL DESOPT is written to the Executive Control section of the
Nastran input file, which simply instructs the solver to perform an optimization analysis. Because optimization can
be used by various analysis disciplines, the type of analysis to perform is specified in the Case Control section, via
the ANALYSIS entry, in either the Master Case and/or each subcase,. When specified in the Master Case, a
“global” analysis type is set, which will be used by any subcase which does not contain an ANALYSIS entry. To
specify an ANALYSIS entry in a subcase, use the Analysis Case dialog box for design/topology optimization:

The Analysis Type drop-down is used to specify an analysis type (i.e., ANALYSIS entry) at the subcase level.
When set to “0..Use Global Analysis Type”, the subcase will use the setting for Analysis Type in the NASTRAN
Optimization Options dialog box and nothing is written to the subcase (See "NASTRAN Optimization Options -
Optimization Type = Design"). When set to “1..Static”, writes ANALYSIS = STATIC to the input file, while setting
this to “2.Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” writes ANALYSIS = MODES.
For more information about the Case ID, Subtitle, and Label fields, as well as the Manual Control section, see Sec-
tion 8.8.1.7, "Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case"
8.8.1.22 Heat Transfer Nonlinear Control Options
For heat transfer analysis, you must specify additional iteration control and convergence information.
For transient heat transfer, you must input the desired Number of Time Steps, Initial Time Increment, Output Step
Interval, and Max Iterations per Step. Your choice of the time stepping and time increment are crucial to proper
convergence to an accurate solution. To assist you in defining these values, the Estimate button can be used to
examine the model that you have defined, including material properties, the duration of any functions, and your
mesh, and make a guess at the values for the other options. Remember, this is just an educated guess based on your
model. It may not be what you intended to analyze. It is ultimately up to you to set these values appropriately.
Use Convergence Tolerances for Temperature, Load, or Work criteria within specified values.
You can also choose a Method for Stiffness Updates as well as choose to Include Differential Stiffness in Damping.
For steady state heat transfer, you also have the option of choosing the convergence tolerances, but not the step
control.
8.8.1.23 Nonlinear Static, Nonlinear Transient, and Creep
The nonlinear analysis options for Nonlinear Static, Nonlinear Transient, and Creep may be set in the Master case
or for each individual subcase. A subset of options in this dialog box are also available when contact is used in
MSC Nastran.
When defining a nonlinear analysis, it is possible to add a pre-stiffened modal condition or a buckling condition
using the NASTRAN Modal/Buckling Analysis dialog box. For more information on the available options, see Sec-
tion 8.8.1.11, "NASTRAN Modal Analysis". When Stiffened Model is enabled, all of the options which are avail-
able for a typical modal analysis are available and may be specified (PARAM,NMLOOP,1 is written along with an
appropriate EIGi entry). When Buckling is enabled, the Inverse Power/Strum method will be selected automatically
 8-132 Analysis Program Interfaces

and some additional options are available (PARAM,BUCKLE,2, which requests buckling in a SOL 106 cold start
run, is written along with an EIGB entry).
In either case, the Nonlinear options are controlled by the Nonlinear Control Options dialog box:

Skip NLPARM (Enable NLPARM for MSC Nastran Static Analysis)

When this option is checked, all parameters set in this dialog box for a given subcase will be ignored. Instead, the
parameters set in the Nonlinear Control Options dialog box of the Master Requests and Conditions section of the
Analysis Set Manager will be used. Also, if this dialog box is never accessed for a particular subcase, the options
set in Nonlinear Control Options of the Master Requests and Conditions will be used. This dialog box is also avail-
able in the Master Requests and Conditions section and individual subcases for static analysis when Analysis Pro-
gram is set to MSC Nastran, but should only be used if the model contains linear contact. In that case, this option is
called Enable NLPARM and must be turned on for the subset of available options to be written to the input file.
Creep option (Nonlinear Static analysis only)
Used to indicate if a subcase is a “Creep” subcase (checked) or a “Nonlinear Static” subcase (unchecked).
To perform a creep analysis, two analysis subcases must exist, which reference the same load set (or two load sets
with identical load values). The first subcase should be a “standard” Nonlinear Static subcase (i.e., Creep
unchecked). The second subcase must have Creep checked and a value entered for Time Increment in the Basic sec-
tion. Also, values should be defined on the Creep tab for the material(s) in the model to create accurate results.
Basic
These values provide the time and iteration control information for the nonlinear analysis steps. They control the
Number of Increments and the Time Increment to be used, as well as the Maximum Iterations for each step. No time
increment is used for static analysis.
Stiffness Updates
This specifies the number of iterations to be performed before the stiffness matrix is updated, as well as the update
Method. Five different update methods are available, but not all are appropriate for all each solution type. If an
inappropriate method is selected, the translator will provide an error message and choose the default method.
 Nonlinear Static, Nonlinear Transient, and Creep 8-133

Output Control
Output Control information allows you to request or eliminate output at intermediate steps (static and creep) or
request Output Every Nth Step (Nonlinear Transient only).
Convergence Tolerances
The type of Convergence Tolerances (Load, Displacement, and/or Work) as well as the tolerance values themselves
are defined in these boxes. MSC Nastran has two additional tolerances, Vector and Length, which can be enabled.
Solution Strategy Overrides
This area provides you with the capability to further control the strategy that will be employed to converge toward
a solution.
Defaults button
Defaults are automatically set when the dialog box is entered for the first time. Click Defaults to reset those values.
Advanced Options tab
This tab enables you to access additional nonlinear analysis options as well as damping inputs for nonlinear tran-
sient analysis. For most problems, the nonlinear options are not required, but they are available for experienced
analysts to modify the default solution controls.
Options in the Advanced Options tab, when written to Nastran, are used to define the parameters on the NLPARM
statement. In general, FEMAP does not distinguish between blanks and zeros when you enter values into dialog
boxes, therefore, when the values are written to Nastran it is normally not possible to control whether a blank or a
zero will be written. For some of these fields however this distinction is important, therefore several special cases
have been implemented. If you specify a blank, or zero, in the dialog box for any of these cases, you will get a
blank in your Nastran file. If you specify a negative value for Quasi-Newton Vectors, or for Max Line Searches/Iter,
you will get a “0”. Similarly, if you specify a value that is less than -10, for Max Bisections / Increment, you will get
a zero. Values less than -10 were chosen because values down to this value are valid for that field.
 8-134 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.1.24 Special Notes for Models with Axisymmetric Elements

Since Nastran has some very specific requirements for axisymmetric analyses, FEMAP must ask some additional
questions as you translate your model.
All axisymmetric elements must be located in the global XZ plane (unless you are using hyperelastic elements -
then the model must be in the XY plane). FEMAP allows you to build your model in any global plane, and will
automatically flip your model to the XZ (or XY for hyperelastic) plane when you answer Yes to the above question.
You should never answer No, unless you already know your model is in the proper plane.

Similarly, all axisymmetric element normals must be consistent. Press Yes to automatically check and update your
model to the proper conventions.

Some analysis programs require axisymmetric loads be applied as total loads (i.e. the total force on the full circum-
ference), while others apply loads on a per radian basis, and still others on a per unit length basis. Depending on
how you have defined your loads, this scale factor lets you translate them with the proper values for Nastran.

Finally, because the preference in Nastran axisymmetric analyses is to use CTRIAX6 elements with midside nodes,
FEMAP allows you to automatically convert any elements with no midside nodes to elements with midside nodes
by answering Yes to this question. This also splits any quadrilateral elements into triangles since there are no quad
axisymmetric elements in Nastran. You must therefore press Yes if you have quadrilateral elements. If you answer
No, your elements are not updated. All triangles will still be translated as CTRIAX6 elements with missing midside
nodes.
 Special Notes for Heat Transfer Analysis 8-135

Note: While this automatic update changes the element connectivity to add midside nodes, it cannot automat-
ically update any loads or boundary conditions. This can result in elements that have corners restrained
or loaded, but which have midside nodes that are unrestrained and unloaded. Depending on the condi-
tions you are trying to model, this may be incorrect. You should carefully check the modified model
and decide whether any changes need to be made prior to completing your analysis.

If you have made any of these changes to your model, you will also be asked to save it after the transla-
tion has been completed. To insure compatibility with the results of your analysis for post-processing,
you should always save the updated model.

8.8.1.25 Special Notes for Heat Transfer Analysis

If you are performing a heat transfer analysis, the translator not only produces the Nastran file, it also updates your
FEMAP model to prepare it for post-processing. Since Nastran uses surface elements (CHBDYi) to apply many
thermal loads rather than applying them directly to the structural/conduction elements, most heat transfer analyses
require some model modifications. To simplify load definition, FEMAP always allows you to define heat transfer
loads directly on the faces of the structural/conduction elements. During the translation however, new surface ele-
ments are automatically created in your model as plot-only plate elements. These represent the equivalent CHBYDi
elements that were written to the Nastran model.
If you want to successfully post-process the results of your analysis, you must save this updated model, since many
of the thermal results are reported on the CHBYDi elements. If you do not save these new elements, FEMAP will
not be able to display those results.

8.8.1.26 STATSUB Options (Nastran Subcases)

If performing buckling analysis, and two subcases exist, the STATSUB Options dialog box can be used to select
specific static subcases, which are then referenced by a STATSUB (BUCKLING) and, optionally, a STATSUB
(PRELOAD) written to the case control section of a particular buckling subcase.

Note: To access the STATSUB options for a particular subcase in FEMAP, “expand” the Case portion of
the tree of a a subcase in a Buckling Analysis Set in the Analysis Set Manager, highlight STATSUB
from the list, then click the Edit button. The Subcase # STATSUB Options dialog box will appear.
 8-136 Analysis Program Interfaces

This dialog box can also be used to explicitly choose which static subcase should be used with each buckling sub-
case when setting up a multi-case buckling analysis. In addition, can be beneficial when attempting to “round trip-
ping” a Nastran input files for buckling analysis, which was either A) not created using FEMAP or B) contain
multiple subcases which contain a STATBUB entry referencing the same static subcase.
8.8.1.27 Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)
Simcenter Nastran has ability to perform Advanced Nonlinear Analysis using Solution Sequence 601 (SOL 601).
Specific SOL 601 dialog boxes will appear in the Analysis Set Manager when the Analysis Type has been set to
either 22..Advanced Nonlinear Static or 23..Advanced Nonlinear Transient. These dialog boxes contain Overall
Solver Parameters (including Extra Time Step definition) and Iteration and Convergence Parameters.
SOL 601 has several “solution specific” materials including various Hyperelastic materials (MATHE - Mooney-
Rivlin, Hyperfoam, Ogden, and Arruda-Boyce) and a Gasket material (MATG). These materials are defined using
the “Other Types” material type in FEMAP (For more information See Section 4.2.3.6, "Other Types..." in the
FEMAP commands manual).
NASTRAN NXSTRAT Solver Parameters
This dialog box allows you to set up Solver Parameters for SOL 601 (Simcenter Nastran Only).
 Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-137

Time Steps
Number of Steps - number of time steps (of Time Increment value) in transient or nonlinear static analysis using
SOL 601. Value is entered into the N1 field on the TSTEP entry.
Time Increment - Time increment for steps in transient or nonlinear static analysis using SOL 601. Value is
entered into DT1 field on the TSTEP entry.
Output Every Nth Step - Skip factor for output. Creates NO1 field on TSTEP entry. Every NOi-th step will be
saved for output.
Extra Time Steps button: Allows you to enter additional time step options for certain types of analysis. These
extra time steps are written out on the TSTEP entry as additional Ni, DTi, and NOi fields corresponding to the
number of additional time steps.
Analysis Control
Solver - Lets you choose between 0..Direct Sparse (Direct Sparse Solver), 1..Multigrid (Multigrid Solver), or 2..3-
D Iterative (3-D Iterative Solver). Creates the SOLVER field on the NXSTRAT entry. The Direct Sparse is the
Default Solver.
Multigrid Solver (Only used when SOLVER = 1)
Max Iterations - Maximum number of iterations allowed for the Multigrid solver to converge. Creates the ITE-
MAX field on the NXSTRAT entry. Value must be an integer greater than 0, default = 1000.
EPSIA Tolerance - Convergence tolerance EPSIA. Creates EPSIA field on NXSTRAT entry (Default = 1.0E-6)
EPSIB Tolerance - Convergence tolerance EPSIB. Creates EPSIB field on NXSTRAT entry (Default = 1.0E-4)
EPSII Tolerance - Convergence tolerance EPSII. Creates EPSII field on NXSTRAT entry (Default = 1.0E-8)
Restart Options
Restart Previous Analysis - Indicates mode of Execution. When set to Normal, which is the default, places a 0
(Normal analysis run, no restarts) in the MODEX field of the NXSTRAT entry. When set to Restart Previous,
places a 1 (Restart Analysis) in the MODEX field of the NXSTRAT entry. When set to Recover Results, places a 2
in the MODEX field of the NXSTRAT entry, which simply recovers the results file without running additional time
steps (GPFROCE and SPCFORCES cannot be recovered).
Restart at Time - Solution starting time. Creates the TSTART field on the NXSTRAT entry. IF MODEX=1,
TSTART must equal a solution time in which data was saved in the previous run. IF TSTART = 0.0, the last time
step in the restart will be used.
Results Frequency - Frequency of saving the analysis results in the restart file. Creates IRINT field on the
NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0
• When 0 - IRINT is set to 1 when implicit time integration is used; set to the number of steps in the first step
block when explicit time integration is used.
• >0 - Restart file is overwritten every IRINT time steps
• <0 - Restart file is appended every IRINT time steps
Mass Formulation
Allows you to choose the type of mass matrix to be used in dynamic analysis. Creates the MASSTYP field on the
NXSTRAT entry. Choose Consistent (enters 0 for MASSTYP) or Lumped (enters 1 for MASSTYP). Default = 0
Analysis Options
Large Strain Form - Indicates which large strain formulation is used for 4-node shell elements. Creates the
ULFORM filed on the NSXSTRAT entry. There are three choices:
• 0..Auto (ULFORM = 0, default) - Uses the Updated Lagrangian-Jaumann (ULJ) formulation when the Rigid-
target algorithm for contact is used in SOL 601 or when SOL 701 is run. Otherwise, the Updated Lagrangian-
Hencky (ULH) formulation is used.
• 1..Updated Lagrangian-Jaumann - Forces use of the ULJ formulation.
• 2..Updated Lagrangian-Hencky - Forces use of the ULH formulation
8-138 Analysis Program Interfaces

Shell Thickness Integ - Allows you to choose the integration order for the local t-direction (through thickness) of
shell elements. Creates TINT field on the NXSTRAT entry. Choose from Guass Integration with Integration Order
from 1 thru 6 or Newton-Cotes integration with order (-3, -5, or -7). (Default = 2..Guass Integration)
Shell DOF Factor - Angle used to determine whether a shell mid-surface node is assigned 5 or 6 degrees of free-
dom. Creates SDOFANG field on NXSTRAT entry. (Default = 5.0)
Element Death Time Delay - Sets the Element death time delay. Creates the DTDELAY field on the NXSTRAT
entry (Default = 0.0). When an element is too deformed and becomes “dead”, its contribution to the overall stiff-
ness of the structure is removed. By specifying DTDELAY > 0.0, the contribution from the element stiffness is
gradually reduced to zero over time DTDELAY instead of being removed suddenly. This may help in the conver-
gence of the solution.
Matrix Stabilization Factor - Indicates whether the stiffness matrix stabilization feature is used. When not
checked (Default), places a 0 (Matrix Stabilization is not used) in the MSTAB field of the NXSTRAT entry. When
checked, places a 1 (Matrix Stabilization is used) in the MSTAB field of the NXSTRAT entry.
When MSTAB = 1, you can also specify a value for the Matrix Stabilization Factor. When a value is specified,
FEMAP will write the MSFAC field and the value to the NXSTRAT entry.
u/p Formulation for Almost Incompressible - Indicates whether u/p formulation is used for elements. When not
checked (Default), creates a 0 (u/p formulation is not used) with the UPFORM field on the NXSTRAT entry. When
checked, places a 1 (u/p formulation is used instead of displacement-based formulation) with the UPFORM field
on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: u/p formulation is always used for hyperelastic elements and always NOT used for elastic elements
with Poisson’s ratio less than 0.48. It is also not used for gasket elements. (Gasket elements can not be
created in FEMAP at this time).

Displacements Applied to Deformed - Indicates whether prescribed displacements are applied to the original con-
figuration or the deformed configuration. When not checked (Default), creates a 0 (Applied to original configura-
tion) with the DISPOPT field on the NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Applied to deformed
configuration) with the DISPOPT field on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: This option is only applicable for a restart analysis or when a delay (or arrival) time is specified for the
prescribed displacement.

Loads Change with Deformation - Indicates whether prescribed loads (pressure and centrifugal) are deformation-
dependent (direction and magnitude of the load may change due to large deformation of the structure. When not
checked (Default), creates a 0 (Load is independent of structural deformation) with the LOADOPT field on the
NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Load is affected by structural deformation) with the LOADOPT field
on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: This option is only applicable for large displacement analysis (PARAM,LGDISP,1 in Simcenter Nas-
tran).

Incompatible Modes for 4 Node Shells - When checked (ICMODE = 1), incompatible modes are used for 4-node
shell elements. Creates the ICMODE field on the NXSTRAT entry (Default = 1 for SOL 601, 0 for SOL 701).
Use NXN v8.5 Elastic Beam Formulation - When checked (BEAMALG = 1), the algorithm for elastic beam for-
mulation from NX Nastran 8.5 is used instead of the current algorithm for elastic beam formulation.
Max Disp/Iteration - Specifies a limit for the maximum incremental displacement allowed for any node in any
equilibrium iteration. Creates the MAXDISP field on the NXSTRAT entry (Default = 0.0, which means there is no
limit on displacement).

Note: Limiting the displacement is generally useful for contact analysis where rigid body motion exists.

Drilling DOF Factor - For shell nodes where the drilling stiffness is zero, this factor is multiplied by the maximum
rotational stiffness at the node and assigned as the drilling stiffness. Creates the DRILLKF field on the NXSTRAT
entry and the value must be a real number between 0.0 and 1.0 (Default = 1.0E-4).
 Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-139

Translation Options
9/27-Node Element Conversion - Indicates whether to convert 8-node to 9-node quadrilateral elements and 20-
node to 27-node brick elements. When not checked (Default), creates a 0 (No conversion of elements) with the
ELCV field on the NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Convert elements as described) with the ELCV
field on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: Also converts 6-node to 7-node triangular elements and 10-node to 11-node tetrahedral elements.

RBAR Opt - Allows you to choose how RBAR elements are handled from a drop-down list. Creates the EQRBAR
field on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.
• 0..Small Rigid, Large Flex - RBAR is simulated using rigid option in small displacement analysis and using
flexible option in large displacement analysis (PARAM,LGDISP,1)
• 1..Rigid - RBAR is simulated using rigid option (rigid link or constraint equations as determined by the pro-
gram).
• 2..Flexible - RBAR is simulated using flexible option (spring or beam elements as determined by the program)
• 3..Use Springs - RBAR is simulated by spring elements.
RBE2 Opt - Allows you to choose how RBE2 elements are handled from a drop-down list. Creates the EQRBE2
field on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.
• 0..Small Rigid, Large Flex - RBE2 is simulated using rigid option in small displacement analysis and using
flexible option in large displacement analysis (PARAM,LGDISP,1)
• 1..Rigid - RBE2 is simulated using rigid option (rigid link or constraint equations as determined by the pro-
gram).
• 2..Flexible - RBE2 is simulated using flexible option (spring or beam elements as determined by the program)
• 3..Use Springs - RBE2 is simulated by spring elements.

Note: More information about the handling of RBAR and RBE2 elements can be found in the Simcenter Nas-
tran Theory and Modeling Guide for SOL 601.

Rigid Elem Spring - Stiffness of spring elements that simulate RBAR or RBE2 elements. Creates SPRINGK field
and enters value on NXSTRAT entry (Default=0.0). When SPRINGK = 0.0, the program sets the SPRINGK value
to SPRINK = EMAX * LMODEL, where EMAX is maximum Young’s Modulus of materials in the model and
LMODEL is the largest dimension of the model. If no material is specified in the model, EMAX is set to 1.0E12.
Rigid Elem Young’s Mod - Young’s Modulus of material assigned to beam elements that simulate RBAR or RBE2
elements. Creates BEAME field and enters value on NXSTRAT entry (Default=0.0). When BEAME = 0.0,
BEAME is set to EMAX * 100, where EMAX is maximum Young’s Modulus of materials in the model. If no mate-
rial is specified in the model, EMAX is set to 1.0E12.
Rigid Elem Effective Area - Circular Cross-Section area of beam elements that simulate RBAR or RBE2 ele-
ments. Creates BEAMA field and enters value on NXSTRAT entry (Default=0.0). When BEAMA = 0.0, the pro-
gram automatically sets the BEAMA = (LMODEL * 0.01)2, where LMODEL = largest dimension in the model.
Rigid Elem Critical Length - Critical length for determining how RBAR or RBE2 elements are simulated when
the rigid or flexible option is used to simulate RBAR, i.e, when EQRBAR = 1 (Rigid) or 2 (Flexible) and/or EQR-
BE2 = 1 (Rigid) or 2 (Flexible). Creates RBLCRIT field and enters value on NXSTRAT entry (Default=0.0). If
RBLCRIT = 0.0, then:
• if EQRBAR (or EQRBE2) = 1, RBLCRIT = LMODEL * 1.0E-6
• if EQRBAR (or EQRBE2) = 2, RBLCRIT = LMODEL * 1.0E-3
LMODEL = largest dimension in the model
Other Parameters
Bolt Force Increments - Number of steps for applying the bolt pre-load force. Creates BOLTSTP field on
NXSTRAT entry. This can be used to apply bolt pre-loads incrementally if the solution fails to converge when the
total pre-load force is applied in one step. (Default=1)
 8-140 Analysis Program Interfaces

Num Subgroups - Number of sub-groups to divide large number of elements with same property ID into. Creates
NSUBGRP field on NXSTRAT entry. Normally, elements with the same type and property ID are placed into a
group. If a group contains more than 1000 elements and NSUBGRP>1, the elements are placed into NSUBGRP
sub-groups for more efficient processing. (Default=1)
Convert Dependency to True Stress - Checking this option indicates the values in the TABLES1 entry (created
using Model, Function in FEMAP) will be converted from engineering stress-strain to true stress strain. Creates
CVSSVAL field on NXSTRAT entry. When unchecked, the stress is not converted. (Default=0, unchecked)
Allow Element Rupture - Checking this option indicates the table in the TABLES1 entry (created using Model,
Function in FEMAP) will NOT be extended by linear extrapolation of the two last points, which may be used to
allow element rupture at the last specified strain value. Creates XTCURVE field on NXSTRAT entry. When
unchecked, the table is extended (Default=1, unchecked)
Solid Results in Material CSys - Checking this option indicates the material coordinate system will be used for
output of nonlinear 3D element stress/strain results. Creates ELRESCS field on NXSTRAT entry. When
unchecked, the results are output in element coordinate system. (Nastran Default=0, but the default for FEMAP=1,
checked)
NASTRAN NXSTRAT Iteration and Convergence Parameters
This box allows you to set up Iteration and Convergence Parameters for SOL 601 (Simcenter Nastran Only).

Analysis Control
Auto Increment - Allows you to choose whether an automatic incrementing scheme is enabled. Creates the AUTO
field on the NXSTRAT entry. You can choose from:
• 0..Off - No automatic incrementing scheme is used
• 1..On - Automatic time stepping (ATS) scheme is enabled
• 2..Load-Displacement - Automatic load-displacement control (LDC) scheme is used.
• 3..Total Load - Total load application (TLA) scheme is enabled. Simcenter Nastran ignores any time step and
time function specified. Instead, 50 time steps of 0.2 are used with a linear ramp time function (i.e., 100% of
load at time = 10.0) and parameters are set as follows:
 Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-141

Max Iterations/ Step (MAXITE) = 30, Smallest Step Divisor (ATSSUBD) = 64, Line Search is turned “on”
(LSEARCH=1), MAXSDISP = 0.05*(maximum model dimension).
• 4..Total Load, Stabilize - Total load application with stabilization (TLA-S) scheme is enabled. In addition to
TLA, stabilization is used. The following values are set in addition to the ones set when using TLA:
Matrix Stabilization Factor in NXSTRAT Solver Parameters dialog box turned “on” (MSTAB=1) and corre-
sponding value (MSFAC) set to 1.0E-10.
Low Speed Dyn Damp Factor turned “on” (ATSLOWS=1) and value set by Simcenter Nastran.
Default = 0 (0..Off)
Continue of Non-Positive Definite - Indicates whether analysis continues when the system matrix is not positive
definite. When not checked, creates a 0 (Analysis may stop) with the NPOSIT field on the NXSTRAT entry. When
checked, creates a 1 (Analysis continues) with the NPOSIT field on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: If NPOSIT = 0, analysis stops unless A) the ATS or LDC scheme is enabled (AUTO = 1 or AUTO =2
on NXSTRAT) and B) contact analysis is being performed. It is not recommended to set NPOSIT = 1
for a linear analysis.

Auto Time Stepping (ATS scheme, AUTO = 1 only)

Smallest Step Divisor - Number that limits the smallest time step size when the automatic time stepping (ATS)
scheme is used. Enters the value with the ATSSUBD field on the NXSTRAT entry. For a time step size of DT (on
TSTEP entry), the program will stop if convergence is not achieved and the next subdivided time step size is less
than DT/ATSSUBD (Value must be greater or equal to 1; Default = 10).
Largest Step Multiplier - Factor that limits the maximum time step size when the automatic time stepping (ATS)
scheme is used. Enters the value with the ATSMXDT field on the NXSTRAT entry. The ATS scheme may increase
the time step size after convergence is achieved. However, for a time step size of DT (on TSTEP entry), the pro-
gram will not use a time step greater than ATSMXDT * DT (Default =3.0)
Step Size Flag - Allows you to choose what time step to use once convergence is reached after an ATS subdivision
from a drop down menu. Creates the ATSNEXT field on the NXSTRAT entry.
• 0..Automatic - Automatically set by program. For contact analysis, ATSNEXT = 2, otherwise ATSNEXT = 1.
• 1..Match Convergence- Use the time step size that achieved convergence (the reduced time step size that led to
convergence is used again)
• 2..Original - Returns to the original time step size (original time step size before any subdivisions took place).
• 3..Match Solution Time - Uses a time step size such that the solution time matches the original solution time
specified by the user.
Sub-Inc Division Factor - Division factor used to calculate the sub-increment time step size. Places value with
ATSDFAC field on the NXSTRAT entry. If current time step size is DT (on TSTEP entry) and convergence is not
achieved, the next time step size will be DT/ATSDFAC. (Default = 2.0)
Low Speed Dyn Damp Factor - Indicates whether a low-speed dynamics analysis is performed instead of a static
analysis. When not checked (Default), places a 0 (Low-speed dynamics option is not activated) with the
ATSLOWS field on the NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Low-speed dynamics is performed) with the
ATSLOWS field on the NXSTRAT entry.
When low speed dynamic analysis is activated:
Damping Factor - creates the ATSDAMP field on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 1.0E-4.
Inertia Factor - creates the ATSMASS field on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 1.0.
Load-Displacement Control (LDC scheme, AUTO = 2 only)
Node where Applied - Grid point ID at which a displacement is prescribed for the first solution step. Creates the
LDCGRID field on the NXSTRAT entry. When used, must have an integer value greater than 0.
Displacement DOF - Allows you to choose degree of freedom for prescribed displacement at grid point from the
drop-down menu. Enters integer from 1 to 6 with LDCDOF field on NXSTRAT entry. DOF integers:1 = X transla-
tion, 2 = Y Translation, 3 = Z translation, 4 = X rotation, 5 = Y rotation, and 6 = Z rotation.
8-142 Analysis Program Interfaces

Prescribed Displacement - Magnitude of prescribed displacement at grid point used by LDCGRID for first solu-
tion step. Places value with LDCDISP field on NXSTRAT entry.
Max Incremental Disp Factor - Displacement convergence factor used to limit the maximum incremental dis-
placement during a solution step. Enters value with LDCIMAX field on NXSTRAT entry. (Default = 3.0)
Max Absolute Disp - Maximum (absolute magnitude) displacement (for DOF specified by LDCDOF) at grid point
LDCGRID allowed during the analysis. Enters value with LDCDMAX field on NXSTRAT entry. When the dis-
placement reaches or exceeds LDCDMAX, the program will stop the analysis.
Max Arc-Length Subdiv - Maximum number of arc length subdivisions allowed. Places value with LDCSUBD
field on NXSTRAT entry. Value must be an integer greater than or equal to 1; Default = 10.
Terminate after First Critical Point - Indicates whether the solution will be terminated when the first critical
point on the equilibrium path is reached. When not checked (Default), places a 0 (Solution stops) with the LDC-
CONT field on the NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Solution continues) with the LDCCONT field on
the NXSTRAT entry.
Equilibrium Iteration and Convergence
Max Iterations / Step - Maximum number of iterations within a time step. Enters the value with the MAXITE field
on th NXSTRAT entry. If the maximum number of iterations is reached without achieving convergence (see Con-
vergence Criteria, CONVCRI section for more details), the program will stop unless the automatic time stepping
(ATS, AUTO = 1) or Load-displacement control (LDC, AUTO = 2) scheme is selected. Value must be an integer
between 1 and 999; Default = 15).
Line Search - Allows you to choose the use of line searches within the iteration scheme. Creates the LSEARCH
field on the NXSTRAT entry. (Default = 0). The line search options are:
• -1..Off - Line Search is not used.
• 0..Automatic - Automatically set by program.
• 1..On - Line search used.
Convergence - Allows you to choose convergence criteria from a drop-down list. Creates the CONVCRI field on
the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0
• 0..Energy - Convergence based on energy.
• 1..Energy and Force - Convergence based on energy and force.
• 2..Energy and Displacement - Convergence based on energy and displacement.
• 3..Force - Convergence based on force.
• 4..Displacement - Convergence based on displacement.
Plasticity Alg - Allows you to choose a plasticity algorithm from a drop-down list. Creates the PLASALG field on
the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 1
• 0..Default - Field not written, currently, “Algorithm 1” is default.
• 1..Algorithm 1 - “Algorithm 1” is used. If this algorithm does not allow convergence, try “Algorithm 2”.
• 2..Algorithm 2 - “Algorithm 2” is used. This algorithm has additional convergence checks.
Energy Tolerance - Relative energy tolerance. Enters value with ETOL field on NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.001.
Used for convergence criteria 0..Energy, 1..Energy and Force, or 2..Energy and Displacement (CONVCRI = 0, 1,
or 2)
Contact Force Tol - Relative contact force tolerance. Enters value with RCTOL field on NXSTRAT entry. Default
= 0.05. Used for ALL convergence criteria.
Ref Contact Force - Reference contact force. Enters value with RCONSM field on NXSTRAT entry. Default =
0.01. Used for ALL convergence criteria.
Force Tolerances (CONVCRI = 1 or CONVCRI = 3)
Force Tolerance - Relative force (and moment) tolerance. Enters value with RTOL field on NXSTRAT entry.
Default = 0.01
Reference Force - Reference Force. Enters value with RNORM field on NXSTRAT entry.
 Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-143

Reference Moment - Reference Moment. Enters value with RMNORM field on NXSTRAT entry.
Displacement Tolerances (CONVCRI = 2 or CONVCRI = 4)
Disp Tolerance - Relative displacement (translation and rotation) tolerance. Enters value with DTOL field on
NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.01
Reference Translation - Reference translation. Enters value with DNORM field on NXSTRAT entry.
Reference Rotation - Reference rotation. Enters value with DMNORM field on NXSTRAT entry.
Line Search Settings (LSEARCH = 0 or LSEARCH = 1)
Line Search Tolerance - Line Search convergence tolerances. Enters value with STOL field on NXSTRAT entry.
Default = 0.5
Line Search Energy Thresh - Line Search energy threshold. Enters value with ENLSTH field on NXSTRAT
entry. Default = 0.0
Line Search Lower Bound - Lower bound for line search. Enters value with LSLOWER field on NXSTRAT
entry. Value must be a real number between 0.0 and 1.0 (Default = 0.001).
Line Search Upper Bound - Upper bound for line search. Enters value with LSUPPER field on NXSTRAT entry.
Value must be a real number greater than or equal to 1.0 (Default = 1.0 for contact analysis, 8.0 for analysis with no
contact).
Newmark Time Integration
Alpha Coefficient - Alpha coefficient for the Newmark time integration method. Enters value with ALPHA field
on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.25
Delta Coefficient - Delta coefficient for the Newmark time integration method. Enters value with DELTA field on
the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.25
Contact Control
Impact - Allows you to choose the impact control scheme from a drop-down menu. Writes the IMPACT field and
value on the NXSTRAT entry (Default = 0). The impact control schemes are:
• 0..Default - No Special treatment is applied for impact problems
• 1..Adjust Vel/Accel - Post impact adjustment of velocities and accelerations is applied
• 2..Mod Newmark Param - Modified parameters are used in Newmark time integration scheme.
Iterations for Pairing - Number of iterations for pairing of contactor node to target segment. Enters value with the
NSUPP field on the NXSTRAT entry. If NSUPP>0, during the first NSUPP iterations, the pairing target segment is
recorded for each contactor node. From iteration NSUPP+1, if a target segment in the recorded list is repeated, it is
“frozen” to be the pairing target segment for the remaining equilibrium iterations in that time step. Specifying
NSUPP > 0 may help in the convergence for certain problems. Integer value between 0 and 99; Default = 0.
Segment Type - Selects the type of contact segment to use. Writes the CSTYPE field and value on the NXSTRAT
entry (Default = 1). “Element Based” is only applicable when Contact Type is set to “0..Constraint Function” on the
Adv Nonlin (601) tab of the Connection Property. The segment types are:
• 0..Linear Contact - Use linear contact segment.
• 1..Element Based - Use element-based contact segment which gives better contact traction results.
Disp Formulation - Selects the default displacement formulation used for contact analysis. Writes the CTDISP
field and value on the NXSTRAT entry (Default = 0 or 2). The Formulations are:
• 0 or 2..Large Disp Formulation (default) - Use large displacement formulation (contact conditions are updated)
• 1..Small Disp Formulation – Use small displacement formulation (contact conditions are not updated)
CTDISP is a global option since it applies to all contact definitions in the model. If you would like to prevent/
allow a specific contact set from updating, the DISP option on the BCTPARA bulk entry can be used (See Sec-
tion 4.4.3.4, "Simcenter Nastran Advanced Nonlinear Analysis Contact (Adv Nonlin (601) tab)".
A different formulation may be selected for each individual contact set via BCTPARA entry.

Note: If Disp Formulation is set to “1..Small Disp Formulation”, the search of target segments for the contac-
tor nodes is performed only at the beginning of the analysis.
 8-144 Analysis Program Interfaces

Damping Method - Indicates whether stabilization damping is applied and how it is applied for contact analysis.
This feature is generally useful when rigid body motion exists in a model. Writes the CTDAMP field and value on
the NXSTRAT entry (Default = 0). The damping methods are:
• 0..No Damping – No stabilization damping is applied
• 1..1st Step Damping – Stabilization damping is applied at the first time step only. The specified damping coeffi-
cients (Normal and Tangential Damping) are applied and ramped down to zero by end of the first time step
• 2..All Step Damping – The specified stabilization damping coefficients are applied at all time steps.
Normal Damping Coeff - Specifies the normal stabilization damping coefficient. Enters value with CTDAMPN
field on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.0
Tangential Damping Coeff - Specifies the tangential stabilization damping coefficient. Enters value with
CTDAMPT field on the NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0.0
Do not allow Consistent Contact Forces - Checking this option indicates tensile consistent contact forces will
NOT be allowed on quadratic contact segments. Creates TNSLCF field on NXSTRAT entry. When unchecked, the
tensile consistent contact forces are allowed. (Nastran Default=1, unchecked)
Use Old Rigid Target Algorithm - Checking this option will direct Simcenter nastran to use the “old” (NX Nas-
tran version 4) rigid contact algorithm. Creates RTALG field on NXSTRAT entry. When unchecked, the “current”
rigid target algorithm will be used. (Nastran Default=0, unchecked)
8.8.1.28 Advanced Nonlinear Explicit (Simcenter Nastran Only)
Simcenter Nastran has ability to perform Advanced Nonlinear Explicit Analysis using Solution Sequence 701.
A specific Solution 701 dialog box will appear in the Analysis Set Manager when the Analysis Type has been set to
either 24..Advanced Nonlinear Explicit. This dialog box contains Overall Solver Parameters (including Extra Time
Step definition) and other solution parameters.
NASTRAN NXSTRAT Solver Parameters
This dialog box allows you to set up Solver Parameters for SOL 701 (Simcenter Nastran only)
 Advanced Nonlinear Explicit (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-145

Time Steps
Number of Steps - number of time steps in explicit analysis using SOL 701. Value is entered into the N1 field on
the TSTEP entry.
Time Increment - Time increment for steps in transient or nonlinear static analysis using SOL 701. Value is
entered into DT1 field on the TSTEP entry.
Output Every Nth Step - Skip factor for output. Creates NO1 field on TSTEP entry. Every NOi-th step will be
saved for output.
Time Stepping
Time Step Method - There are two different methods for choosing the time step for explicit analysis. This option
creates the XSTEP field on the NXSTRAT entry. The two methods are:
• 0..Program Calculated (XSTEP = 0, default) - Time step is calculated by the program based on the critical time
step size. The data in the selected specified in the Time Steps section (TSTEP entry) is used to calculate the
total solution time for the analysis.
• 1..User Defined (XSTEP = 1) - The number of time steps and the time step size as specified in the Time Steps
section (TSTEP entry) is used.
Recalculate every Nth Step - When this option is set, the critical time step size will be recalculated every Nth step
(for example, when N = 2, the critical time step size will be recalculated every 2nd time step). Recalculating the
critical time step size often can be computationally expensive, therefore this option is used to decrease solve time
when the Time Step Method is set to 1..User Defined. Creates the XDTCAL field on the NXSTRAT entry.
Crit Time Step Factor - Critical time step size is calculated based on certain assumptions. It is often necessary,
especially for nonlinear analysis, to use a time step size smaller than the calculated critical time step size. This fac-
tor multiplied by the calculated critical time step size gives the time step size used in the analysis. Only used when
Time Step Method is set to 1..User Defined. Creates XDTFAC field on NXSTRAT entry. (Default = 0.9)
Mass Scale Factor - Specifies the factor to scale the mass (densities) of the entire model (at the beginning of the
analysis) to increase the critical time step size required for stability when the explicit time integration scheme is
used. Creates the XMSCALE field on the NXSTRAT entry. (Default = 1.0)
Min T Step For Mass Scale - Minimum time step size used to determine if mass scaling will be applied to ele-
ments (at the beginning of analysis) whose critical time step size is smaller than the given value (XDTMIN1). Cre-
ates XDTMIN1 field on NXSTRAT entry. The amount of mass scaling is calculated for each element so that the
critical time step size is equal to XDTMIN1.
Min T Step to Remove Elements - Minimum time step size used to determine whether an element will be
removed in an explicit time integration analysis. In explicit time integration, the smaller the element size, the
smaller the critical time step size will be for the analysis. If the critical time step size for an element is smaller than
XDTMIN2, the element will be removed in the analysis. Creates XDTMIN2 field on NXSTRAT entry.
Other Parameters
Num Subgroups - Number of sub-groups to divide a large number of elements with the same property ID into.
Creates the NSUBGRP field on the NXSTRAT entry. Normally, elements with same type and property ID are
placed into a group. If a group contains more than 1000 elements and the Num Subgroups > 1, the elements are
placed into that number of subgroups for more efficient processing.
Solid Results in Material CSys - Checking this option indicates the material coordinate system will be used for
output of nonlinear 3D element stress/strain results. Creates ELRESCS field on NXSTRAT entry. When
unchecked, the results are output in element coordinate system. (Nastran Default=0, but the default for FEMAP=1,
checked)
Convert Dependency to True Stress - Checking this option indicates the values in the TABLES1 entry (created
using Model, Function in FEMAP) will be converted from engineering stress-strain to true stress strain. Creates
CVSSVAL field on NXSTRAT entry. When unchecked, the stress is not converted. (Default=0, unchecked)
Allow Element Rupture - Checking this option indicates the table in the TABLES1 entry (created using Model,
Function in FEMAP) will NOT be extended by linear extrapolation of the two last points, which may be used to
allow element rupture at the last specified strain value. Creates XTCURVE field on NXSTRAT entry. When
unchecked, the table is extended (Default=1, unchecked)
8-146 Analysis Program Interfaces

Analysis Options
Large Strain Form - Indicates which large strain formulation is used for 4-node shell elements. Creates the
ULFORM filed on the NSXSTRAT entry. There are three choices:
• 0..Auto (ULFORM = 0, default) - Uses the Updated Lagrangian-Jaumann (ULJ) formulation when the Rigid-
target algorithm for contact is used in SOL 601 or when SOL 701 is run. Otherwise, the Updated Lagrangian-
Hencky (ULH) formulation is used.
• 1..Updated Lagrangian-Jaumann - Forces use of the ULJ formulation.
• 2..Updated Lagrangian-Hencky - Forces use of the ULH formulation
Shell Thickness Integ - Allows you to choose the integration order for the local t-direction (through thickness) of
shell elements. Creates TINT field on the NXSTRAT entry. Choose from Guass Integration with Integration Order
from 1 thru 6 or Newton-Cotes integration with order (-3, -5, or -7). (Default = 2..Guass Integration)
Shell DOF Angle - Angle used to determine whether a shell mid-surface node is assigned 5 or 6 degrees of free-
dom. Creates SDOFANG field on NXSTRAT entry. (Default = 5.0)
Element Death Time Delay - Sets the Element death time delay. Creates the DTDELAY field on the NXSTRAT
entry (Default = 0.0). When an element is too deformed and becomes “dead”, its contribution to the overall stiff-
ness of the structure is removed. By specifying DTDELAY > 0.0, the contribution from the element stiffness is
gradually reduced to zero over time DTDELAY instead of being removed suddenly. This may help in the conver-
gence of the solution.
Incompatible Modes for 4 Node Shells - When checked (ICMODE = 1), incompatible modes are used for 4-node
shell elements. Creates the ICMODE field on the NXSTRAT entry (Default = 1 for SOL 601, 0 for SOL 701).
u/p Formulation for Almost Incompressible - Indicates whether u/p formulation is used for elements. When not
checked (Default), creates a 0 (u/p formulation is not used) with the UPFORM field on the NXSTRAT entry. When
checked, places a 1 (u/p formulation is used instead of displacement-based formulation) with the UPFORM field
on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: u/p formulation is always used for hyperelastic elements and always NOT used for elastic elements
with Poisson’s ratio less than 0.48. It is also not used for gasket elements. (Gasket elements can not be
created in FEMAP at this time).

Loads Change with Deformation - Indicates whether prescribed loads (pressure and centrifugal) are deformation-
dependent (direction and magnitude of the load may change due to large deformation of the structure. When not
checked (Default), creates a 0 (Load is independent of structural deformation) with the LOADOPT field on the
NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Load is affected by structural deformation) with the LOADOPT field
on the NXSTRAT entry.

Note: This option is only applicable for large displacement analysis (PARAM,LGDISP,1 in Simcenter Nas-
tran).

Use NXN v8.5 Elastic Beam Formulation - When checked (BEAMALG = 1), the algorithm for elastic beam for-
mulation from NX Nastran 8.5 is used instead of the current algorithm for elastic beam formulation.
Restart Options
Restart Previous Analysis - Indicates mode of Execution. By default this option is not checked, which places a 0
(Normal analysis run, no restarts) in the MODEX field of the NXSTRAT entry. When checked, places a 1 (Restart
Analysis) in the MODEX field of the NXSTRAT entry.
Restart at Time - Solution starting time. Creates the TSTART field on the NXSTRAT entry. IF MODEX=1,
TSTART must equal a solution time in which data was saved in the previous run. IF TSTART = 0.0, the last time
step in the restart will be used.
Results Frequency - Frequency of saving the analysis results in the restart file. Creates IRINT field on the
NXSTRAT entry. Default = 0
• When 0 - IRINT is set to 1 when implicit time integration is used; set to the number of steps in the first step
block when explicit time integration is used.
• >0 - Restart file is overwritten every IRINT time steps
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-147

• <0 - Restart file is appended every IRINT time steps

Contact Control
Segment Type - Selects the type of contact segment to use. Writes the CSTYPE field and value on the NXSTRAT
entry (Default = 1). “Element Based” is only applicable when Contact Type is set to “0..Constraint Function” or
“1..Penalty Method” on the Explicit (701) tab of the Connection Property. The segment types are:
• 0..Linear Contact - Use linear contact segment.
• 1..Element Based - Use element-based contact segment which gives better contact traction results.
Use Old Rigid Target Algorithm - Checking this option will direct Simcenter nastran to use the “old” (Simcenter
Nastran version 4) rigid contact algorithm. Creates RTALG field on NXSTRAT entry. When unchecked, the “cur-
rent” rigid target algorithm will be used. (Nastran Default=0, unchecked)
8.8.1.29 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)
Simcenter Nastran has the ability to perform Multi-Step Structural Analysis with or without nonlinear effects being
taken into account using Solution Sequence 401 (SOL 401). See "Mass and Damping", "Global Requests and Con-
ditions and Analysis Case", "Multi-Step Control Options", "Arc-Length Control Options", "Time Steps", "Modal",
"Boundary Conditions", and "Bolt Sequence".
When running multi-step structural analysis in Simcenter Nastran, SOL 401or SOL NLSTEP is written to the
Executive Control section of the Nastran input file, which simply instructs the solver to perform a multi-step struc-
tural analysis. Because a multi-step structural analysis can be used by various analysis disciplines, the type of anal-
ysis to perform is specified in the Case Control section, via the ANALYSIS entry, in either the “Global Case”, if no
subcases exist, or in each subcase. To specify an ANALYSIS entry in a subcase, use the Analysis Case dialog box
for multi-step structural analysis.
Options
Global Strategy Parameters
Opens the Multi-Step Global Control Options dialog box. Only the options in the Restart Parameters (SOL 401 and
SOL 402) section are used for SOL 401. For a description of these parameters, see "Global Strategy Parameters" in
Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)".
Mass and Damping
The Mass and Damping Options dialog box is used to specify Equivalent Viscous Damping options, as well as an
option to specify a Mass normalization method for dynamic analysis:

Enable Dynamic Options must be enabled before entering values and only used by the Global Requests and Condi-
tions when Analysis Type is set to “3..Transient” or in any Analysis Case which is set to “3..Transient”.
 8-148 Analysis Program Interfaces

There are three values which can be set in the Equivalent Viscous Damping section: Overall Structural Damping
Coeff (G) creates the PARAM,G entry; Freq for System Damping (W3 - Hz) creates the PARAM,W3 entry; and
Freq for Element Damping (W4 - Hz) creates the PARAM,W4 entry.
The Mass section designates if mass matrices for elements with coupled mass capability (i.e., CBAR, CBEAM,
CHEXA, CPENTA, CPYRAM, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CQUADX4, CQUADX8, CROD, CTETRA,
CTRAX3, CTRAX6, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, and CTUBE.) should be “Coupled” or remain “Lumped”
(default for most analyses) by writing the PARAM, COUPMASS entry in the Nastran input file. When “Coupled”
is selected, both structural and non-structural mass are taken into account for the aforementioned elements.
Global Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case
Global Requests and Conditions
The Analysis Type drop-down is used to specify an analysis type (i.e., ANALYSIS entry) for the Master Case. This
drop-down is only available when no subcases exist in the model. When set to “1..Static”, writes ANALYSIS =
STATIC to the input file, when set to “2.Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” writes ANALYSIS = MODES, and when set
to “3..Transient”, writes ANALYSIS = DYNAMICS
For more information about the Case ID, Subtitle, and Label fields, as well as the Manual Control section, see Sec-
tion 8.8.1.7, "Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case"
Analysis Case
For SOL 401, the Analysis Case dialog box is used to specify Analysis Type and Step Control at the subcase level.

The Analysis Type drop-down has several options all of which will be written to the appropriate subcase in the input
file: “1..Static” writes ANALYSIS = STATIC; “2.Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” writes ANALYSIS = MODES;
“3..Transient” writes ANALYSIS = DYNAMICS; and “29..Bolt Preload” writes ANALYSIS = PRELOAD.
The Step Control section offers two options, Sequentially Dependent and Not Sequentially Dependent, which are
used to specify if this subcase is starting at the end of the previous subcase or not.
• Sequentially Dependent - writes SEQDEP = YES to the subcase, which indicates this subcase uses the end time
from the previous static subcase for its start time. In addition, a sequentially dependent static or modal subcase
uses the displacement/stress/strain state from the previous static subcase for its starting state. This is default and
this multi-step capability offers a different approach than many other Nastran solution sequences.
• Not Sequentially Dependent - writes SEQDEP = NO to the subcase, which indicates this subcase has a start
time of zero. In addition, a non-sequentially dependent static or modal subcase does not use the displacement/
stress/strain state from the previous static subcase. Using this option is similar to having a subcase in a linear
static analysis, as it is not influenced by the previous static subcase.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-149

For more information about the Case ID, Subtitle, and Label fields, as well as the Manual Control section, see Sec-
tion 8.8.1.7, "Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case".
Multi-Step Control Options
The Multi-Step Control Options dialog box defines solution control parameters for SOL 401 and is available in the
Master Case and all subcases:

All of these options correspond to parameters which can be specified as a combination using PARAMi and VAL-
UEi fields on the NLCNTL entry. The name of the parameter, as it appears in the Simcenter Nastran Quick Refer-
ence Guide (version 12 and above), usually appears in parenthesis after the generic name of the parameter in
FEMAP.
Skip NLCNTL
When this option is enabled, all parameters set in this dialog box for the Master Case or a given subcase will be
ignored. If this option is enabled in the Master Case, all “default” values for NLCNTL will be used for the analysis.
If enabled in the Master and also enabled in any subcase, the subcase will also use all of the “default” values for
NLCNTL. If this option is disabled in the Master Case, then those values will be used as “global” values, and any
subcase which has the Skip NLCNTL option enabled will also use the “global” values specified in the Master Case.
Also, if this dialog box is never accessed for a particular subcase, the options set in Multi-Step Control Options of
the Master Requests and Conditions will be used.
8-150 Analysis Program Interfaces

Time Step Control

Auto Time step (AUTOTIM) - Automatic timing scheme ON/OFF parameter. When enabled, which is the
default, writes AUTOTIM with corresponding ON field. When disabled, writes OFF.
Initial Time Step (DTINIT) - Initial time step or constant time step (Default = 0.01). Writes DTINIT field and cor-
responding value.
Min Time Step (DTMIN) - Minimum time step. If the next time step is larger than DTMIN, the software accepts
the next time step. For creep analysis, if the next time step is smaller than DTMIN, the software halves the current
time step, recalculates the current creep strain increment, and reenters the adaptive time stepping algorithm at the
point the creep strain increment is compared to CRICOFF. Must be less than Max Time Set (DTMAX) and the
Default = 0.001*Initial Time Step (DTINIT). Writes DTMIN and corresponding value.
Max Time Step (DTMAX) - Maximum time step. If DTMAX is set to 0.0 (default), the software accepts the next
time step. If DTMAX is nonzero and the next time step is larger than DTMAX, the software uses DTMAX as the
next time step. Otherwise, the next time step is compared to Min Time Step (DTMIN). Must be greater than 0.0 and
Default = 0.0. Writes DTMAX and corresponding value.
Subcase Time Step (DTSBCDT) - Option to use Initial Time Step (DTINIT) or not in a new subcase. A subcase
with a zero start time always uses Initial Time Step (DTINIT). When set to Modify, writes DTSBCDT with a value
of 0, while New writes DTSBCT with a value of 1. Default = Modify.
Equilibrium Min Factor (EQMFMIN) - Minimum time step factor for equilibrium iteration criterion. Must be
greater than 0.0 and Default = 0.2. Writes EQMFMIN and corresponding value.
Equilibrium Min Factor (EQMFMAX) - Maximum time step factor for equilibrium iteration criterion. Must be
greater than 0.0 and Default = 5.0. Writes EQMFMAX and corresponding value.
Time Step Method (TSCCR) - Specifies the time stepping method. Valid for creep analysis only. Writes TSCCR
with the selected option (Default = “12..Combination of 1 and 2”).
• 0..Constant - Use constant time stepping. Writes value of 0.
• 1..Adaptive, Truncation Error - Use adaptive time stepping based on the error truncation method only. Writes
value of 1.
• 2..Adaptive, Maximum Creep Increment to Elastic Strain Ratio - Use adaptive time stepping based on the ratio
of maximum creep increment to elastic strain method only. Writes value of 2.
• 3..Adaptive, Maximum Creep Increment - Use adaptive time stepping based on the maximum creep increment
method only. Writes value of 3.
• 12..Combination of 1 and 2 - Use adaptive time stepping based on both the error truncation method and the
ratio of maximum creep increment to elastic strain method. Writes value of 12.
• 13..Combination of 1 and 3 - Use adaptive time stepping based on both the error truncation method and the
ratio of maximum creep increment method. Writes value of 13.
• 23..Combination of 2 and 3 - Use adaptive time stepping based on both the ratio of maximum creep increment
to elastic strain method and the maximum creep increment method. Writes value of 23.
• 123..Combination of 1, 2 and 3 -Use adaptive time stepping based on the error truncation method, the ratio of
maximum creep increment to elastic. Writes value of 123.
Equilibrium Iteration Stepping (TSCEQ) - Flag to turn ON/OFF stepping based on equilibrium iterations. When
enabled, which is the default, writes TSCEQ with corresponding ON field. When disabled, writes OFF.
Time Unassigned Loads (LVAR) - Specifies whether time unassigned loads are ramped or stepped. Default =
“0..Ramp”, which writes LVAR with corresponding RAMP, while “1..Step” writes LVAR with STEP.
Time Unassigned Loads (TVAR) - Specifies whether time unassigned temperature loads are ramped or stepped.
Default = “0..Ramp”, which writes TVAR with corresponding RAMP, while “1..Step” writes TVAR with STEP.
Other Options
Include Plasticity - Include plasticity effects. When enabled, which is the default, writes PLASTIC with corre-
sponding YES field. When disabled, writes NO.
Include Creep - Include creep effects. When enabled, which is the default, writes CREEP with corresponding YES
field. When disabled, writes NO.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-151

Solution/Convergence... button - click this button to display the "Solution and Convergence Options" dialog box,
which is described below.
Contact/Bolt Preload... button - click this button to display the "Contact/Bolt Preload Control Options" dialog
box, which is described below.
Creep... button - only available when Include Creep is enabled, click this button to display the "Creep Options"
dialog box, which is described below.
Solution and Convergence Options
This dialog box is used to specify Solution and Convergence Options for SOL 401:

Solution Parameters
Disable Mechanical Load (LOADOFF) - Used to disable certain types of mechanical loads. Writes LOADOFF
field with selected option (Default = “0..No Loads Turned Off”).
• 0..No Loads Turned Off - No loads are disabled. Writes NONE.
• 1..Body Loads Turned Off - Disables body loads, which for Simcenter Nastran means any load being applied by
a GRAV, RFORCE, RFORCE1, ACCEL, and/or ACCEL1 entry. Writes BODY.
• 2..Boundary Loads Turned Off - Disables boundary loads, which for Simcenter Nastran means any load being
applied by a PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADE1, PLOADX1, FORCE, FORCE1, FORCE2,
MOMENT, MOMENT1, MOMENT2, and/or SLOAD entry. Writes BOUNDRY.
• 3..Both Boundary and Body Loads Turned Off - Disables both body loads and boundary loads. Writes BOTH.
Solver (SOLVER) - Specifies the solver. Writes SOLVER field with selected option (Default = “0..SPARSE”).
• 0..SPARSE - Use sparse direct solver. Writes SPARSE.
8-152 Analysis Program Interfaces

• 1..PARDISO - Use PARDISO solver, which is NLTRD3 nonlinear solution module. Writes PARDISO.
• 2..ELEMITER - Use element iterative solver. Writes ELEMITER.
Rot. Load Inertia Scaling (RFVAR) - Specifies how the software interpolates the time variation for the rotational
loads RFORCE or RFORCE1. Writes RFVAR field with selected option (Default = “0..Scale Angular Velocity and
Acceleration”).
• 0..Scale Angular Velocity and Acceleration - interpolates time variation using (f(t)). As a result, if a linear time
variation is defined, the angular velocity will vary linearly. Since “omega” is squared in the force computation,
the force will not vary linearly. Writes OMEGA.
• 1..Scale Force - interpolates time variation using (f(t))2. The software then takes the square root of the interpo-
lated value before applying it to the angular velocity. As a result, if a linear time variation is defined, the force
will vary linearly, but “omega” will not. Writes FORCE
Compute Initial Acceleration in Dynamics (INACCN) - Flag to calculate if an initial acceleration should be cal-
culate for a subcase where Analysis Type is set to “3..Dynamics”. This is only used if a dynamics subcase is the first
subcase of a solution or it follows a subcase where Analysis Type is set to “1..Static” or “29..Bolt Preload”. When
disabled, which is the default, nothing is written. When enabled, writes INACCN with corresponding YES field.

Note: See Simcenter Nastran Quick Reference Guide for information about how acceleration is calculated.

Enable Inertia in Dynamics (INERTIA) - Flag to include inertial effects in a subcase where Analysis Type is set
to “3..Dynamics”. When enabled, which is the default, nothing is written. When disabled, writes INERTIA with
corresponding NO field.
Thermal Strain Loading (THRMST) - Flag to include thermal strain in a static analysis. When enabled, which is
the default, writes THRMST with corresponding YES field. When disabled, writes NO.
Diagnostic Level (MSGLVL) - Diagnostic level. When enabled, which is the default, writes MSGLVL with corre-
sponding 1 field. When disabled, writes a value of 0.
Stiffness Parameters
Stiffness Update Strategy (KUPDATE) - Stiffness update strategy. Writes KUPDATE field with selected option
(Default = “0..Auto Stiffness Update”).
• -1..Initial Stiffness - Initial Stiffness approach. Writes value of -1.
• 0..Auto Stiffness Update - Auto stiffness update. Writes value of 0.
• 1..Full Newton-Raphson - Full Newton-Raphson strategy. Writes value of 1
• 2..Quasi Newton-Raphson - Quasi Newton-Raphson strategy. Writes value specified for Quasi Newton-Raph-
son Iterations.
Quasi Newton-Raphson Iterations - Only available when Stiffness Update Strategy (KUPDATE) is set to
“2..Quasi Newton-Raphson”. Specifies the number of quasi Newton-Raphson iterations.
Material Stiffness Matrix (STFOPTN) - Material stiffness matrix option. Writes STFOPTN field with selected
option (Default = “3..Elastic/Tangent Stiffness Matrix”).
• 1..Elastic Stiffness Matrix - The elastic stiffness matrix is used. Writes value of 1.
• 2..Tangent Stiffness Matrix - The tangent stiffness matrix is used. Writes value of 2.
• 3..Elastic/Tangent Stiffness Matrix - The elastic stiffness matrix is used to start each subcase, the elastic stiff-
ness matrix is used if a stiffness update is requested prior to the beginning of a new time step, and the tangent
stiffness matrix is used at any intermediate stiffness update. Writes value of 3.
Follow Stiffness (FOLLOWK) - Flag to include follower stiffness. Follower stiffness is computed from the fol-
lower loads defined with the FORCE1, FORCE2, PLOAD, or PLOAD4 entries. When enabled, which is the
default for modal analysis, writes FOLLOWK with corresponding YES. When disabled, which is the default for
static analysis, writes FOLLOWK with corresponding NO.
Spin Softening (SPINK) - Flag to include spin softening. When enabled, which is the default for modal analysis
writes SPINK with corresponding YES. When disabled, which is the default for static analysis, writes SPINK with
corresponding NO.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-153

Stress Stiffening (STRESSK) - Flag to include stress stiffening. When enabled, which is the default for static and
modal analysis, writes STRESSK with corresponding YES. When disabled, writes STRESSK with NO.
Update Stiffness (TSTEPK) - Flag to have stiffness updated at the beginning of the time step. Only applicable
when Stiffness Update Strategy (KUPDATE) is set to “2..Quasi Newton-Raphson. When enabled, writes TSTEPK
with corresponding YES. When disabled, which is the default, writes TSTEPK with corresponding NO.
Enable Stiffness Matrix Stabilization (MSTB) - Flag to use matrix stabilization. When disabled, which is the
default, writes nothing. When enabled, writes MSTAB with a value of 1.
Matrix Stabilization Factor (MSFAC) - Matrix Stabilization Factor. Default = 1.0E-10. Writes MSFAC field and
corresponding value.
Convergence Parameters
Displacement, Load, Work - Error Tolerances for displacement, load, and work. Depending on the options
enabled, writes the CONV entry with “U” (Displacement), “P” (Load), and/or “W” (Work) in any combination.
Default for CONV is “W” only. Along with CONV, a corresponding entry and value will be written for each toler-
ance. When enabled, Displacement writes EPSU (Default = 0.01), Load writes EPSP (Default = 0.01), and Work
writes EPSW (Default = 1.E-6).
Max Bisections (MAXBIS) - Maximum number of bisections allowed. Must be an integer greater than 0 and less
than 10, Default = 5. Writes MAXBIS field and corresponding integer value.
Max Divergences (MAXDIV) - Number of divergences before solution is assumed to diverge. Must be an integer
greater than 0, Default = 3. Writes MAXDIV field and corresponding integer value.
Max Iterations/Step (MAXITER) - Maximum number of iterations per time step. Must be an integer greater than
0, Default = 25. Writes MAXITER field and corresponding integer value.
Max Quasi Newton Vectors (MAXQN) - Maximum number of quasi-Newton correction vectors to be saved.
Must be an integer greater than or equal to 0, Default = 10. Writes MAXQN field and corresponding integer value.
Norm Criteria for Force (NORMP) - Defines the norm criteria for the force convergence error function. Writes
NORMP field with selected option (Default = “1..Norm 2 Criteria”).
• 0..Norm 1 Criteria - Use Norm 1 Criteria. Writes value of L1.
• 1..Norm 2 Criteria - Use Norm 2 Criteria. Writes value of L2.
• 2..Norm Infinity Criteria - Use Norm Infinity Criteria. Writes value of LINF.
Norm Criteria for Displacement (NORMU) - Defines the norm criteria for the displacement convergence error
function. Writes NORMU field with selected option (Default = “1..Norm 2 Criteria”).
• 0..Norm 1 Criteria - Use Norm 1 Criteria. Writes value of L1.
• 1..Norm 2 Criteria - Use Norm 2 Criteria. Writes value of L2.
• 2..Norm Infinity Criteria - Use Norm Infinity Criteria. Writes value of LINF.
Force Error Function Denominator (REFP) - Optionally replaces the denominator in the force convergence
error function. If set to -1.0, nothing is written. If entering a value, must be greater than 0.0. Writes REFP field and
corresponding value.
Disp. Error Function Denominator (REFU) - Optionally replaces the denominator in the displacement conver-
gence error function. If set to -1.0, nothing is written. If entering a value, must be greater than 0.0. Writes REFU
field and corresponding value.
Time Integration
Integration Scheme (TINTMTH) - Integration scheme. Writes TINTMTH with the selected option (Default =
“1..Newmark”).
• 1..Newmark” implicit predictor-corrector. Writes NEWMARK.
• 2..Hilber-Hughes-Taylor” (HHT) implicit predictor-corrector scheme. Writes HHT.
• 3..Generalized Alpha (with Theta). Writes GENALP.
• 4..Modified Generalized Alpha (with Theta). Writes MGENALP.
 8-154 Analysis Program Interfaces

Newark Param 1 (BETA) - Newmark scheme parameter 1, Beta. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.25. Writes
BETA field and corresponding value.
Newark Param 2 (GAMA) - Newmark scheme parameter 2, Gamma. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.5.
Writes GAMA field and corresponding value.
HHT Scheme Param (ALFA) - HHT scheme parameter, alpha. Must be between 0.0 and 0.333333, Default =
0.05. Writes ALFA field and corresponding value.
Generalized Scheme Param (TETA) - Generalized alpha methods parameter, Theta. Writes TETA field and cor-
responding value. Default = -0.97 for “3..Generalized Alpha” or 0.33 for “4..Modified Generalized Alpha”.
Modified Generalized Alpha Param (RHOINF) - Modified generalized alpha method parameter, Rho Infinity.
Writes RHOINF field and corresponding value. Value must be 0.0, 1.0, or any value in-between 0.0 and 1.0.
Default = 0.8.
Contact/Bolt Preload Control Options
This dialog box is used to specify Contact/Bolt Preload Control Options for SOL 401:

Contact
Num Divergences for Bisection (CNTMDIV) - Number of permissible contact divergences before bisection is
initiated. Must be an integer greater than 0, Default = 9. Writes CNTMDIV field and corresponding integer value.
Frict Threshold (FSYMTOL) - Contact friction coefficient threshold to control if the sliding contact stiffness
includes the unsymmetric stiffness term. (Default = 0.2). When the maximum FRICi on the BCTSET for all contact
pairs is less than FSYMTOL, the unsymmetric stiffness term is not included, and a symmetric stiffness is gener-
ated. Writes FSYMTOL field and corresponding value.
Unsymmetric Matrix option (KSYM) - When an unsymmetric material stiffness is generated as described in the
Frict Threshold (FSYMTOL) description, KSYM controls if the unsymmetric matrix is symmetrized. Writes
KSYM field with selected option (Default = “0..AUTO”).
• 0..AUTO - The unsymmetric matrix is symmetrized if the tolerance is satisfied as described below in Symme-
trizing Tol (KSYMTOL). Writes AUTO.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-155

• 1..SYM - The unsymmetric matrix is always symmetrized. Writes SYM.

• 2..UNSYM - The unsymmetric matrix is never symmetrized. Writes UNSYM.
Symmetrizing Tol (KSYMTOL) - Tolerance for symmetrizing the unsymmetric global stiffness when Unsymmet-
ric Matrix option (KSYM) is set to “0..AUTO”. (Default = 0.001). Writes FSYMTOL field and corresponding
value.
If Kfull is the unsymmetric global stiffness, the symmetric part Ksp is:

The unsymmetric part Kup is:

The ratio of the unsymmetric part to the full matrix is:

The ratio “r” is a measure of the matrix asymmetry. It is compared with the KSYMTOL.
If r < KSYMTOL, the unsymmetric matrix is symmetrized.
If r > KSYMTOL, the unsymmetric matrix is used.

Note: Friction defined with the FRICi field on the BCTSET bulk entry along with sliding contact conditions
can result in unsymmetric stiffness terms in the global stiffness matrix. Including the unsymmetric stiff-
ness terms will slow the solution performance, although the unsymmetric terms are sometimes neces-
sary to achieve solution convergence. You can use the Frict Threshold (FSYMTOL), Unsymmetric
Matrix option (KSYM), and Symmetrizing Tol (KSYMTOL) parameters to control if the unsymmetric
terms are included.

Contact Diagnostics (MSGLVLC) - Diagnostic output for contact. Writes MSGLVLC field with selected option
(Default = “1..Convergence”).
• 0..None - No additional diagnostic output. Writes a value of 0.
• 1..Convergence - Convergence information is printed for each iteration. Changes in contact status are also
printed. Before the first iteration, a summary of the number of sliding/sticking/active/inactive elements is
printed. The number of augmentations and number of pair updates is also printed. Writes value of 1.
• 2..Convergence and Contact Pair - Everything described in “1..Convergence” and after each iteration, detailed
information for every contact pair is printed. Writes value of 2.
Unsymmetric Solver (USOLVER) - Specifies the unsymmetric solver. Writes USOLVER field with selected
option (Default = “2..PARDISO”).
• 0..HYBRID - Use hybrid solver. Writes HYBRID.
• 1..SPARSE - Use sparse direct solver. Writes SPARSE.
• 2..PARDISO - Use PARDISO solver (NLTRD3 nonlinear solution module). Writes PARDISO.
• 3..MUMPS - Use MUMPS solver (MUltifrontal Massively Parallel Sparse direct Solver). Writes MUMPS.
Bolt Preload
Nonzero Preload Convergence Tol (EPSBOLT) - Convergence tolerance for a nonzero bolt preload. Must be
greater than 0, Default = 0.001. Writes EPSBOLT field and corresponding value.
 8-156 Analysis Program Interfaces

Zero Preload Convergence Tol (ZERBOLT) - Convergence tolerance for a zero bolt preload. Must be greater
than 0, Default = 1.0E-7. Writes ZERBOLT field and corresponding value.
Max Iterations for Convergence (ITRBOLT) - Maximum number of bolt iterations before the bolt preload calcu-
lation is considered non-converged. Must be an integer greater than 0, Default = 20. Writes ITRBOLT field and
corresponding integer value.
Bolt Strain Limit (MISFBLT) - Limits the bolt strain from one preload increment to the next. Must be greater
than 1.0E-6, Default = None. Writes MISFBLT field and corresponding value.
Diagnostics (MSGLVLB) - Diagnostic output for bolt preload. Writes MSGLVLB field with selected option
(Default = “1..Summary Each Iteration”).
• 0..Summary at Convergence - Bolt summary messages upon convergence. Writes a value of 0.
• 1..Summary Each Iteration - Bolt summary messages at every bolt preload iteration. Writes value of 1.
• 2..Summary and Load Tol Each Iteration - Bolt summary messages and load/tolerance messages per bolt at
every bolt preload iteration. Writes value of 2.

Note: Using Diagnostic MSGLVLB set to “1..Summary Each Iteration” or “2..Summary and Load Tol Each
Iteration” requires Diagnostic Level (MSGLVL) be enabled. If MSGLVL= 0, MSGLVLB is also forced
to 0, even if MSGLVLB = 1 or 2 are defined. MSGLVLB 1 and 2 also output a table of bolt data show-
ing the forces, moments and strains per bolt. This is only after the bolts converge.

Creep Options
This dialog box is used to specify Creep Options for SOL 401:

All of the parameters in this dialog box are valid for creep analysis only.
Max Creep Ratio (CRCERAT) - For the ratio of maximum creep increment to elastic strain method, the ratio of
maximum creep increment to elastic strain that is used to calculate the next time step. Must be greater than 0.0,
Default = 0.4. Writes CRCERAT field and corresponding value.
Max Creep Inc (CRCINC) - For the maximum creep increment method, the maximum creep increment that is
used to calculate the next time step. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = 1.0E-4. Writes CRCINC field
and corresponding value.
Creep Strain Inc (CRICOFF) - Creep strain increment below which the next time step is the product of the cur-
rent time step and Max Step Factor (CRMFMX). Must be greater than 0.0 and less than 1.0, Default = 1.0E-6.
Writes CRICOFF field and corresponding value.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-157

Integration Factor (CRINFAC) - Integration factor used to calculate incremental creep strain. Must be value
from 0.0 to 1.0, Default = 0.5. Writes CRINFAC field and corresponding value.
Min Step Factor (CRMFMN) - Minimum time step multiplying factor. If the next time step calculated by the
adaptive time stepping algorithm is smaller than the product of the current time step and CRMFMN, the software
halves the current time step, recalculates the current creep strain increment, and reenters the adaptive time stepping
algorithm at the point the creep strain increment is compared to Creep strain inc (CRICOFF). Must be value from
0.0 to 1.0, Default = 0.1. Writes CRMFMN field and corresponding value.
Max Step Factor (CRMFMX) - Maximum time step multiplying factor. See Creep strain inc (CRICOFF) for
additional information. Must be greater than 1.0, Default = 5. Writes CRMFMX field and corresponding value.
Max Truncation Error (CRTEABS) - Maximum absolute truncation error. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0
and less than 1.0, Default = 1.0E-4. Writes CRTEABS field and corresponding value.
Time Step for Next Truncation Error (CRTECO) - For the error truncation method, use Max Truncation Error
(CRTEABS) to calculate the next time step if the creep strain is less than CRTECO, and use Max relative truncation
error (CRTEREL) to calculate the next time step if the creep strain is greater than CRTECO. Must be greater than
or equal to 0.0 and less than 1.0, Default = 1.0E-4. Writes CRTECO field and corresponding value.
Max Truncation Error (CRTEREL) - Maximum absolute truncation error. Must be value great than or equal to
0.0 to 1.0, Default = 1.0E-4. Writes CRTEREL field and corresponding value.
Arc-Length Control Options
The Arc-Length Control methods allow for post-buckling analysis of structures with snap-through instability in
Solution 401, which cannot be achieved through the Newton-Raphson solution strategy.

Note: To access the Arc-Length Control Options dialog box in FEMAP, “expand” the Case portion of the
tree of an appropriate Analysis Set in the Analysis Set Manager, highlight Arc-Length Options from
the list, then click the Edit button. The Arc-Length Options item will only be available under Case
when Analysis Type for that subcase is set to “1..Static”.

The Arc-Length Control Options dialog box contains a number of options which can be used to specify various
parameters on the NLARCL entry for Simcenter Nastran Solution 401:
 8-158 Analysis Program Interfaces

Enable NLARCL must be enabled before any of the options can be specified. The default value for each control
option is specified when entering the dialog box for the first time. Once values have been changed, it is possible to
return the default values using the Defaults button.
Constraint Type - Used to select the arc-length method. Writes TYPE field with selected option (Default =
“2..Modified Riks”).
• 1..Riks - Selects the Riks arc-length method. Writes RIKS.
• 2..Modified Riks - Selects the modified Riks arc-length method. Writes MRIKS.
• 2..Crisfield - Selects the Crisfield arc-length method. Writes CRIS.
Min ArcLen Adjust Ratio (MINALR) - Minimum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for
the adaptive arc-length method. Must be a value from 0.0 to 1.0, Default = 0.25. Writes MINALR field and corre-
sponding value.
Max ArcLen Adjust Ratio (MAXALR) - Maximum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments
for the adaptive arc-length method. Must be greater than or equal to 1.0, Default = 4.0. Writes MAXALR field and
corresponding value.
Load/ArcLen Bound (MAXR) - Defines the overall upper and lower bounds on the load increment/arc-length in
the subcase. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 20.0. Writes MAXR field and corresponding value.
Scale for Constraint Load (SCALE) - Scale factor for controlling loading contribution in the arc-length con-
straint. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = 0.0. Writes SCALE field and corresponding value.
Desired Iterations (DESITER) - Desired number of iterations for convergence to be used for the adaptive arc-
length adjustment. Must be an integer value greater than 0, Default = 12. Writes DESITER field and corresponding
integer value.
Max Load Increments (MXINC) - Maximum number of controlled load increments done in the arc-length sub-
case. Must be an integer value greater than 0, Default = 20. Writes MXINC field and corresponding integer value.
Initial Load Factor (LDFACIN) - Initial load factor. This load factor will be used to compute initial arc-length.
Must be a value greater than 0.0, Default = 1.0. Writes LDFACIN field and corresponding value.
Max Load Factor (MXLDFAC) - Maximum value of load-factor at which solution will be terminated. Default =
1.0. Writes MXLDFAC field and corresponding value.
Output Skip Factor (NOUTAL) - Skip factor for output of the incremental results. Output always occurs at the
final increment. For example, if NOUTAL=2 is defined, output occurs at every other converged solution increment
and for the final increment. If NOUTAL=0 is defined, output only occurs at the final increment.
Time Steps
This dialog box is used to specify Time Steps used for the solution and output increments for SOL 401 and SOL
402 and is available in the Global Case and all subcases:

The values and options in the dialog box are used to create the TSTEP1 entry for Simcenter Nastran. This dialog
box can be accessed when the Master Case or a subcase has Analysis Type set to 1..Static”. It can also be accessed
when a subcase has Analysis Type set “29..Bolt Preload”, where the End Time MUST be set to the same value as the
previous subcase for the analysis to run.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-159

Each row corresponds to set of values on a line of the TSTEP1. Row 0 in the dialog box writes values for Tend1,
Ninc1, and Nout1; Row 1 writes Tend2, Ninc2, and Nout2; etc. Different options can be specified for each row.
End Time - These values specify End Times and are written to the Tendi field on the TSTEP1. Values must be
greater than or equal to 0.0 and less than the End Time specified in the following row, Default = 1.0 for Tend1.
Number of Increments - These values specify number of increments and are written to the Ninci fields on the
TSTEP1. Values must be integer values greater than 0, Default = 1.
Output Frequency and Output Increment - The combination of the option selected for Output Frequency and
the value specified for Output Increment is used to determine what is written to the Nouti fields on the TSTEP1.
There are 5 options available, but only “Skip Factor” uses Output Increment value. Default is “Requested Incre-
ments”.
• Requested Increments - Output occurs at all increments requested by Number of Increments. Writes YES
• Solution Step End Time - Output occurs at the end time. Writes END.
• All Times - Output occurs at all increments requested by Number of Increment and any software sub-incre-
ments. Writes ALL.
• Coupling Times - Output only occurs at coupling times. See Simcenter Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Writes
CPLD.
• Skip Factor - Output is computed for the specified Output Increment in terms of the value specified for Number
of Increments. In addition, the output is also always calculated at the end time. Writes value specified for Out-
put Increment to Nouti field.
Modal
The NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box defines options for model analysis for SOL 401. It is available in the
Master Case or any subcase when Analysis Type is set to “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue”. For more information,
"Modal" in section Section 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)"
Boundary Conditions
The Boundary Conditions dialog box for SOL 401 and SOL 402 is similar to Boundary Conditions dialog boxes for
other analysis types, as it allows selection of Constraints, Constraint Equations, Loads, and Temperatures. Where
it differs is that an additional drop-down has been added to specify Loads (Time), along with an icon button which
can be used to create a load set from displacement and/or velocity output to apply Initial Conditions. In addition,
there are sections to specify Contact Sets and Glued Sets, while the Other DOF Sets section has been removed.

All sections in the dialog box are available for use when specifying boundary conditions for the Master Case. When
specifying boundary conditions for a subcase, the Glue Sets section is not available.
8-160 Analysis Program Interfaces

Loads (Time)
If time-dependent loads (i.e., reference “vs Time” functions in FEMAP) are in defined, select them with this drop-
down instead of using the Loads drop-down. The Load (Time) drop-down will write a DLOAD entry to Case Con-
trol, along with appropriate DLOAD and/or TLOAD1 entries to the Bulk Data.
Create Initial Conditions From Output icon button
Only available when Analysis Type is set to “3..Dynamic” in the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box or the
Analysis Case dialog box for any subcase. Click the icon button to the right of the Initial Conditions drop-down to
open the Create Initial Conditions From Output dialog box:

This dialog can be used to create a load set to specify Initial Displacement and/or Initial Velocity to use as Initial
Conditions. Select an output set using the Output Set drop-down, then select any type of nodal output to use for
enforced displacements (X Vector, Y Vector, and/or Z Vector in Initial Displacement section), enforced rotations
(RX Vector, RY Vector, and/or RZ Vector in Initial Displacement section), velocities (X Vector, Y Vector, and/or Z
Vector in Initial Velocity section), and/or rotational velocity (RX Vector, RY Vector, and/or RZ Vector in Initial
Velocity section). Once the output has been selected, click the Select Nodes... button to use the standard entity selec-
tion dialog box to select nodes to create displacement and/or velocity loads.
Contact Sets and Glue Sets
Contact conditions can change from subcase-to-subcase and can be defined in any subcase where Analysis Type is
set to “1..Static” or “29..Bolt Preload”. For example, contact regions and pairs can be added or removed and con-
tact settings changed, including parameters, from one static or preload subcase to the next. When a subcase has
Analysis Type set to “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalues” and is “Sequentially Dependent”, the final stiffness from a
previous static or bolt preload subcase will be used in calculating the modes, which includes the contact stiffness.
There are several different options which can be used to specify the contact pairs (BCTSET) and/or contact param-
eters (BCTPARM):
• All Connectors (default) - writes all non-glued Connectors currently enabled in the model to the input file.
• Connection(s) - allows you to select a Connector or Connector Set containing any number of non-glued connec-
tors from the drop-down control, then writes out only those connectors. The icon button next to the drop-down
can be used to create a new Connector Set containing only non-glued connectors. See Section 4.4.6, "Connect,
Connector Set...".
• None - does not write any non-glued Connectors or the BCSET entry for the Master case or particular subcase.
• Contact Property - When set to “0..None”, the Connection Property specified for each connector will be used.
When a Connection Property is specified, all non-glued Connectors being written to the input file will use the
parameters of the selected Connection Property.
 Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-161

There are several different options which can be used to specify the glued contact pairs (BGSET) and/or glue
parameters (BGPARM):
• All Connectors (default) - writes all or glued Connectors currently enabled in the model to the input file.
• Connection(s) - allows you to select a Connector or Connector Set containing any number of connectors from
the drop-down control, then writes out only those glued connectors. The icon button next to the drop-down can
be used to create a new Connector Set containing only glued connectors. See Section 4.4.6, "Connect, Connec-
tor Set...".
• None - does not write any glued Connectors or the BGSET entry for the Master case, which means no glued
contact will be taken into consideration during the analysis.
• Glue Property - When set to “0..None”, the Connection Property specified for each connector will be used.
When a Connection Property is specified, all glued Connectors being written to the input file will use the
parameters of the selected Connection Property.
Bolt Sequence
The Bolt Sequence dialog box is used to specify a Bolt Sequence for SOL 401:

This dialog box is only available in subcases which have Analysis Type set to “29..Bolt Preload”. It can be accessed
by clicking the Next button in the Time Steps dialog box or by clicking the “Bolt Sequence” branch in the tree struc-
ture of the Analysis Set Manager, then clicking the Edit button. It is used to write the BOLTSEQ entry in the appro-
priate subcase.
All load sets, whether they contain Bolt Preloads or not, will appear in the Available Bolt Preload list. Any number
of load sets may be moved from the Available Bolt Preload list to the Bolt Preload Sequence list for a particular
subcase by highlighting the load set(s) in the appropriate list, entering a value above 0 in the Number of Increments
field in the Properties section, then pressing the Add Bolt Sequence button. To highlight individual load sets, hold
down the Ctrl key and click on the title of the desired the load set(s). To highlight a range of load sets, hold down
the Shift key, click on the title of the first load set, then click on the title of the last load set in the desired range.
Once a load set is in the Bolt Preload Sequence list, it can be removed from the list by using the Remove Bolt
Sequence button. Any individual load set can be repositioned in the sequence by highlighting it in the Bolt Preload
Sequence list, then clicking the Move Up or Move Down button. Finally, to update the increments for a load set,
enter a value above zero in Number of Increments, select the desired load set(s) in the Bolt Preload Sequence list,
then click the Update Bolt Increments button.

Note: For SOL 401, Bolt Preloads must be specified on Bolt Regions with Bolt Type set to Solid and Defined
By set to Elements (Bolt Preload option set to Force, Strain, or Displacement) or Defined By set to
Nodes (Bolt Preload option set to Force or Displacement only).
 8-162 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.1.30 Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)

Simcenter Nastran has the ability to perform Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis using Solution Sequence
402 (SOL 402). See "Global Strategy Parameters", "Global Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case", and
"Multi-Step Control Options". Also, see "Time Steps" and "Boundary Conditions", which are the same for both
SOL 401 and 402.
When running multi-step structural analysis in Simcenter Nastran, SOL 402 or SOL NLSTEP is written to the
Executive Control section of the Nastran input file, which simply instructs the solver to perform a multi-step struc-
tural analysis. Because a multi-step structural analysis can be used by various analysis disciplines, the type of anal-
ysis to perform is specified in the Case Control section, via the ANALYSIS entry, in either the Master Case, if no
subcases exist, or in each subcase. To specify an ANALYSIS entry in a subcase, use the Analysis Case dialog box
for multi-step structural analysis.
Options
Global Strategy Parameters
The Multi-Step Global Control Options dialog box defines solution global control parameters for SOL 402:

All of these options correspond to parameters which can be specified as a combination using PARAMi and VAL-
UEi fields on the NLCNTLG entry. The name of the parameter, as it appears in the Simcenter Nastran Quick Refer-
ence Guide (version 2019.2 and above), appears in parenthesis after the generic name of the parameter in FEMAP.
The bottom section, which contains parameters for restarts, is available for both SOL 401 and SOL 402. For more
information about SOL 401, see Section 8.8.1.29, "Multi-Step Structural Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only)".
 Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-163

Global Parameters (SOL 402)

Solver (RESO) - Solver type. Writes RESO with the selected option (Default = “0..Auto”).
• 0..Auto - When this options is selected, automatically uses “2..Sparse” when performing sequential computa-
tions or “3..Parallel” when performing parallel computations.
• 1..Skyline - skyline solver. Writes a value of 1.
• 2..Sparse - sparse solver. Writes a value of 5.
• 3..Parallel - parallel solver. Writes a value of 6.
Stress-Strain Measure for Plastic Matl. (STRMEAS) - Choice of the stress-strain measure for all plastic material
laws. Writes STRMEAS with the selected option. Default = “1..Log Strain, Cauchy Stress” for large strains
(PARAM,LGSTRN,1) or “2..Biot Strain, Biot Stress” for small strains (PARAM,LGSTRN,0).
• 0..Green Strain, PK2 Stress - writes a value of 0.
• 1..Log Strain, Cauchy Stress - writes a value of 1.
• 2..Biot Strain, Biot Stress - writes a value of 2.
• 3..Log Strain, Kirchhoff Stress - writes a value of 3.

Note: The Stress-Strain Measure for Plastic Matl. (STRMEAS) parameter is ignored by materials which only
support Kirchhoff stress/strain measure, i.e., Hyperelastic materials. Also, The STRMEAS parameter
will be used to decide if the stress-strain values specified on the TID referenced by the MATS1 or
MATSR bulk entries need to be converted or not. The conversion is performed if the STRMEAS
parameter of the MATS1 bulk entry is set to ENG and if large strains (PARAM,LGSTRN,1) are speci-
fied or if the STRMEAS parameter of the NLCNTLG bulk entry is set to 1. Finally, if large strains are
specified (PARAM,LGSTRN,1) and the STRMEAS parameter of the NLCNTLG bulk entry is set to a
different value than 1, the stress-strain values will be not converted.

Stress-Strain Measure for Output (STROUT) - Choice of the stress-strain measure for the output of stress or
strain simulation results. Writes STROUT with the selected option. If an option is specified for Stress-Strain Mea-
sure for Plastic Matl., it will be the default for STROUT. Otherwise, the default is “1..Log Strain, Cauchy Stress”
for large strains (PARAM,LGSTRN,1) or “2..Biot Strain, Biot Stress” for small strains (PARAM,LGSTRN,0).
• 0..Green Strain, PK2 Stress - writes a value of 0.
• 1..Log Strain, Cauchy Stress - writes a value of 1.
• 2..Biot Strain, Biot Stress - writes a value of 2.
• 3..Log Strain, Kirchhoff Stress - writes a value of 3

Note: Results in metallic shell elements, multi-layered shell elements, and beam elements are always output
in the using the “0..Green strain, PK2 stress” measure, regardless of the option set for Stress-Strain
Measure for Output (STROUT).

Stress-Strain Conversion Method (STRCONV) - Choice of the stress-strain curves conversion from Engineering
to Cauchy. Writes STRCONV with the selected option (Default = “0..Exact Method”).
• 0..Exact Method - writes a value of 0.
• 1..Standard Method - writes a value of 1.

Note: See Simcenter Nastran Quick Reference Guide for information about the “Exact Method” and “Stan-
dard Method”

Computation (IREF) - Choice of the initial static and/or steady-state computation. Writes IREF with the selected
option (Default = “0..No initial static or steady-state computation”).
• 0..No initial static or steady-state computation - writes a value of 0.
• 1..Initial static computation only - writes a value of 1.
• 2..Steady-state computation only - writes a value of 10 (for Dynamic Subcase)
• 3..Initial Static and steady-state computation - writes a value of 11 (for Dynamic Subcase).
 8-164 Analysis Program Interfaces

Unsymmetric Solver (INLY) - Solver symmetry behavior for subcases with Analysis Type set to “2..Normal
Modes/Eigenvalue”. When disabled, which is the default, the symmetric solver is activated, which writes nothing
to the input file. When enabled, activates unsymmetric solver, which writes INLY with corresponding value of 1.
Advanced Parameters (SOL 402)
Threshold for Zero Pivots (PRECPIVO) - Threshold to detect zero pivots. Must be greater than 0.0, Default =
1.0E-8. Writes PRECPIVO field and corresponding value.
Modes to Save as Output (NKINE) - Number of kinematic modes to save as output. Must be greater than 0,
Default = 10. Writes NKINE field and corresponding value.
Version of Param. Defaults (MODEVERS) - Allows the user to change the default behavior of parameters to be
the same as an earlier version of Simcenter Nastran. Writes MODEVERS with corresponding field which specifies
the version in a particular format. For instance, if “1..2019.1” is specified, writes a value of 20191. Default =
“0..Default”, which is the version of Simcenter Nastran which shipped with the version of FEMAP being used.
Restart Parameters (SOL 401 and SOL 402)
Save Restart Data (RSTGEN) - For the initial run, requests that restart data be saved for static, dynamic, and pre-
load subcases. When disabled, which is the default, no restart data is saved, which writes nothing to the input file.
When enabled, restart data is saved, which writes RSTGEN with a corresponding value of YES.

Note: SOL 401 saves the restart data in the output OP2 file. SOL 402 saves the restart data into OP2 file, the
SAMCEF SDB and ADB files, and the SAMCEF Output U18 file.

Restart File Unit Number (SRTUNIT) - For the restart run, defines the unit number of the external restart file.
The unit number must also be specified on ASSIGN statement that references the physical file name of the *.op2
file. Must be greater than or equal to 161, Default = 161. Writes RSTUNIT field and corresponding value.
Subcase to Restart From (SRTFROM) - For the restart run, defines the subcase ID to restart from for the analy-
sis. This subcase ID was defined in the initial run input file. Must be an integer value great than 1 and there is no
default value, therefore it must be specified. Writes RSTFROM and corresponding value.
Subcase to Execute From (EXEFROM) - For the restart run, defines the subcase ID to execute from for the anal-
ysis. This subcase ID is defined in the restart run input file. Must be an integer value great than 1 and there is no
default value, therefore it must be specified. Writes RSTFROM and corresponding value.
Disable Model Validation fro Restart Run (MDLVAL) - For the restart run, allows you to turn off the model val-
idation check. When disabled, which is the default, nothing is written to the input file and the validation check is
performed. When enabled, writes MDLVAL with a corresponding value of NO, which causes the validation check
to not be performed.
Global Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case
Global Requests and Conditions
The Analysis Type drop-down is used to specify an analysis type (i.e., ANALYSIS entry) for the Master Case:
 Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-165

The Analysis Type drop-down is only available when no subcases exist in the model. When set to “1..Static”, writes
ANALYSIS = STATIC to the input file, when set to “2.Normal Modes/Eigenvalue”, writes ANALYSIS = MODES,
and when set to “3..Transient”, writes ANALYSIS = TRANSIENT.
For more information about the Case ID, Subtitle, and Label fields, as well as the Manual Control section, see Sec-
tion 8.8.1.7, "Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case"
Analysis Case
For SOL 402, the Analysis Case dialog box is used to specify Analysis Type and Step Control at the subcase level.

The Analysis Type drop-down has several options, which write the following to the appropriate subcase in the input
file: “1..Static” writes ANALYSIS = STATIC; “2.Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” writes ANALYSIS = MODES,
“3..Transient” writes ANALYSIS = TRANSIENT, “7..Buckling” writes ANALYSIS = BUCKLING, and “29..Bolt
Preload” writes ANALYSIS = PRELOAD.
The Step Control section offers two options, Sequentially Dependent and Not Sequentially Dependent, which are
used to specify if this subcase is starting at the end of the previous subcase or not.
• Sequentially Dependent - writes SEQDEP = YES to the subcase, which indicates this subcase uses the end time
from the previous static subcase for its start time. In addition, a sequentially dependent static or modal subcase
uses the displacement/stress/strain state from the previous static subcase for its starting state. This is default and
this multi-step capability offers a different approach than many other Nastran solution sequences.
• Not Sequentially Dependent - writes SEQDEP = NO to the subcase, which indicates this subcase has a start
time of zero. In addition, a non-sequentially dependent static or modal subcase does not use the displacement/
stress/strain state from the previous static subcase. Using this option is similar to having a subcase in a linear
static analysis, as it is not influenced by the previous static subcase.
For more information about the Case ID, Subtitle, and Label fields, as well as the Manual Control section, see Sec-
tion 8.8.1.7, "Master Requests and Conditions and Analysis Case".
Multi-Step Control Options
The Multi-Step Control Options dialog box defines solution control parameters for SOL 402. It is available in the
Master Case and any subcase, except when Analysis Type for subcase is set to “7..Buckling”
8-166 Analysis Program Interfaces

All of these options correspond to parameters which can be specified as a combination using PARAMi and VAL-
UEi fields on the NLCNTL2 entry. The name of the parameter, as it appears in the Simcenter Nastran Quick Refer-
ence Guide (version 12 and above), usually appears in parenthesis after generic name of the parameter in FEMAP.
Skip NLCNTL2
When this option is enabled, all parameters set in this dialog box for the Master Case or a given subcase will be
ignored. If this option is enabled in the Master Case, all “default” values for NLCNTL will be used for the analysis.
If enabled in the Master and also enabled in any subcase, the subcase will also use all of the “default” values for
NLCNTL2. If this option is disabled in the Master Case, then those values will be used as “global” values, and any
subcase which has the Skip NLCNTL2 option enabled will also use the “global” values specified in the Master
Case.
Also, if this dialog box is never accessed for a particular subcase, the options set in Multi-Step Control Options of
the Master Requests and Conditions will be used.
Time Step
Automatic Time Stepping (AUTOTIM) - Automatic time stepping activation. When enabled, which is the
default, writes CIBL with corresponding value of 1. When disabled, writes 0.
First Time Step Size (DTINIT) - Size of the first time step. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = auto-
matically computed. Writes DTI0 field and corresponding value.
Minimum Time Step (DTMIN) - Minimum time step. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = First Time
Step Size (DTI0)/1.0E-5. Writes HMIN field and corresponding value.
Maximum Time Step (DTMAX) - Maximum time step. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = infinity.
Writes HMAX field and corresponding value.
Maximum Increase Ratio (EQMFMX) - Maximum increase ratio for next time step. Must be greater than or
equal to 0.0, Default = 1.9. Writes RUP field and corresponding value.
Maximum Decrease Ratio (EQMFMIN) - Maximum decrease ratio for next time step. Must be greater than or
equal to 0.0, Default = 2.1. Writes RDOW field and corresponding value.
 Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-167

Number of Iterations (ITEREF) - Number of iterations. Must be an integer value above 0, Default = 0.6 * Max
Iter (ITMA) specified in the Solution and Convergence Options dialog box. Writes ITEREF field and correspond-
ing integer value.
Zero Pivot Time Step Rejection (RJPZ) - Zero pivot time step rejection. When disabled, which is the default,
writes nothing. When enabled, writes RJPZ with corresponding characters, ON.
Negative Pivot Time Step Rejection (RJPN) - Negative pivot time step rejection. Writes RFPN with the selected
option (Default = “0..Never”).
• 0..Never. Writes nothing.
• 1..Last Iteration Only. Writes a value of 1.
• 2..Print State at Last Iteration. Writes a value of 2.
• 3..Always. Writes a value of 3.
Integration Error Control (TSDYN) - Integration error control. When disabled, which is the default, writes noth-
ing. When enabled, writes TSDYN with corresponding characters, ON.
Activate Time Stepping Based on Disp/Temp Error (ERCD) - Flag to activate time step criterion based on the
absolute error of the displacement/temperature change. When disabled, which is the default, writes nothing. When
enabled, writes ERCD with corresponding value of 1.
Allowable Change/Step (PRED) - Only available when Activate Time Stepping Based on Disp/Temp Error
(ERCD) is enabled. Value of absolute allowable displacement/temperature change per time step. Must be above 0.0
and there is no default, therefore it must be specified to write PRED and corresponding value.
Viscous Material Options
Integration Error Control (TSVSC) - Integration error control. When disabled, which is the default, writes noth-
ing. When enabled, writes TSVSC with corresponding characters, ON.
Error Threshold (VSCOTE) - Viscous material integration error threshold. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0,
Default = 0.1. Writes VSCOTE field and corresponding value.
Min Stress Factor (VSCOSN) - Viscous material minimum stress normalization factor. Must be an integer value
above 0, Default = 1. Writes VSCOSN field and corresponding integer value.
Analysis Control
Maximum Displacement (DISLIM) - Maximum displacement. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default =
infinity. Writes DISLIM field and corresponding value.
Maximum Rotation (ROTLIM) - Maximum rotation. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = 0.1 radians
when PARAM,LGDISP,0; otherwise Default = infinity. Writes RDOW field and corresponding value.
Maximum Deformation (DEFLIM) - Maximum deformation. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = 0.1
when PARAM,LGDISP,0; otherwise Default = infinity. Writes DEFLIM field and corresponding value.
Time Unassigned Loads (LVAR) - Specifies whether time unassigned loads are ramped or stepped. Default =
“0..Ramp”, which writes LVAR with corresponding RAMP, while “1..Step” writes LVAR with STEP.
Time Unassigned Loads (TVAR) - Specifies whether time unassigned temperature loads are ramped or stepped.
Default = “0..Ramp”, which writes TVAR with corresponding RAMP, while “1..Step” writes TVAR with STEP.
Predict Displacement (DIPR) - Specifies whether or not to predict displacement using the velocities of previous
time step. When disabled, which is default, writes DIPR with corresponding value of 0. When enabled, writes 1.
Force Normalization (NORM) - Computes the norm of the internal or external forces before or after assembly.
This is useful when only thermal loads are introduced because all the forces would be in a balanced state after
assembly. When disabled, which is default, writes NORM with corresponding value of 0. When enabled, writes 1.
Unsymmetrical Matrices for Complex Modes (MATSYM) - Unsymmetrical stiffness, damping, and mass matri-
ces for complex modes. When enabled, which is the default, writes nothing is written. When disabled, writes MAT-
SYM entry with corresponding characters, NO.
Enable Inertia in Dynamics (INERTIA) - Take inertia into account in nonlinear dynamic subcases. When
enabled, which is default, writes nothing. When disabled, writes INERTIA with corresponding characters, NO.
 8-168 Analysis Program Interfaces

Save Data at Beginning of Computation (IAR0) - Specify if data must be saved at the beginning of the computa-
tion of a sequentially dependent subcase. When enabled, which is default, writes nothing and data is saved. When
disabled, writes IAR0 with corresponding value of -1 and data is not saved.
Plasticity and Creep Control
Enable Plasticity - Include plasticity effects. When enabled, which is default, writes PLASTIC with corresponding
value of YES. When disabled, writes NO

Note: See Simcenter Nastran Quick Reference Guide for information about how to exclude plastic effects in
specific subcases

Enable Creep - Include creep effects. When disabled, which is default, writes CREEP with corresponding value of
NO. When enabled, writes YES.

Note: See Simcenter Nastran Quick Reference Guide for information about how to exclude creep effects in
specific subcases.

Creep Integration Factor (CRINFAC) - Only available when Enable Creep option is enabled. Integration factor
used to calculate incremental creep strain. Must be value from 0.0 to 1.0. Default is 1.0. Writes CRINFAC entry
with corresponding value.
Internal Restart
Restart (RSUB) and Restart Subcase - Restart computation flag for subcases with Not Sequentially Dependent
specified. When disabled, which is default, writes RSUB with a value of 0. When enabled and Restart Subcase is
set to 0, writes a value of -1, otherwise, uses the integer value entered for Restart Subcase.
Iteration and Convergence Button
This dialog box is used to specify Solution and Convergence Options for SOL 402:
 Multi-Step Nonlinear Kinematic Analysis (Simcenter Nastran Only) 8-169

Analysis Options
Stabilization Factor (STAB) - Stabilization factor. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = 0.0. Writes
STAB field and corresponding value.
Maximal Disp Variation (MADI) - Maximal allowed displacements variation. Default = -1.0. Writes MADI field
and corresponding value.
Equilibrium and Convergence
Line Search (ILNS) - Line search. Integer value can be 0 (Default), positive, or negative. When 0, no line search
occurs. When above zero, “N”, line search method based on minimizing the energy (activated at Newton iteration
N). When below zero, “N”, line search method based on minimizing the residue (activated at Newton iteration N).
Writes ILNS with corresponding integer value.
Line Search Convergence Tol (PRLN) - Line search convergence tolerance. If Line Search (ILNS) is set to a pos-
itive value, Default = 100*Realtive Force (PRCR). If Line Search (ILNS) is set to a negative value, Default = 0.1.
Min Line Search Factor (AMIN) - Minimum line search factor. Value must be greater than 0.0. If Line Search
(ILNS) is set to a positive value, Default = 0.5. If Line Search (ILNS) is set to a negative value, Default = 0.1.
Writes AMIN with corresponding value.
Max Line Search Convergence Factor (AMAX) - Maximum line search factor. Value must be greater than 0.0,
Default = 1/Min Line Search Factor (AMIN). Writes AMAX with corresponding value.
Max Iter (ITMA) - Maximum number of iterations for an implicit time step. Integer value must be greater than 0,
Default = 10. Writes ITMA with corresponding integer value.
Relative Force Tol (PRCR) - Relative force tolerance. Value must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.001. Writes
PRCR with corresponding value.
Reference Force (REFP) - Reference force. Value must be greater than 0.0, Default = 1.0. Writes REFP with cor-
responding value.
Relative Disp Force (PRCQ) - Relative displacement tolerance. Value must be greater than 0.0, Default = 1.0.
Writes PRCQ with corresponding value.
Reference Disp (REFU) - Reference displacement. Value must be greater than 0.0, Default = 1.0. Writes REFU
with corresponding value.
Rel Energy Tol (PRCE) - Relative energy tolerance. Value must be greater than 0.0, Default = Relative Force Tol
(PRCR). Writes PRCE with corresponding value.
Reference Energy (REFE) - Reference energy. Value must be greater than 0.0, Default = 1.0. Writes REFE with
corresponding value.
Stiffness Update Param 1 (IT1K) - Stiffness updating strategy parameter 1. Integer value must be greater than 0,
Default = 1. Writes IT1K with corresponding integer value.
Stiffness Update Param 2 (IT2K) - Stiffness updating strategy parameter 2. Integer value must be greater than 0,
Default = Stiffness Update Param 1 (IT1K) +1. Writes IT2K with corresponding integer value.
Stiffness Update Param 3 (IT3K) - Stiffness updating strategy parameter 3. Integer value must be greater than 0,
Default = 1. Writes IT3K with corresponding integer value.
First Iteration Strategy (PLAS) - Choice for the integration of the constitutive law at the first iteration of a time
step for a plastic material. Writes PLAS with the selected option (Default = “1..Plastic tangent matrix, plastic stress
variation”).
• -1..Elastic tangent matrix, plastic stress variation. Writes value of -1.
• -2..Elastic tangent matrix, elastic stress variation. Writes value of -2.
• -3..Plastic tangent matrix, elastic stress variation. Writes value of -3.
• 1..Plastic tangent matrix, plastic stress variation. Writes value of 1.
Rigid Body Motion Convergence (OTRE) - Choice to allow an easier convergence when no external loads are
applied (rigid body motion). Writes PLAS with the selected option (Default = “1..Enable based on PRCE, PRCQ,
and PRCR criteria”).
• 0..Disable Convergence. Writes value of 0.
 8-170 Analysis Program Interfaces

• 1..Enable based on PRCE, PRCQ, and PRCR criteria. Writes value of 1.

• 2..Enable based on PRCE, PRCQ, PRCR, and REFP. Writes value of 2.
Time Integration
Integration Scheme (TINTMTH) - Integration scheme. Writes TINTMTH with the selected option (Default =
“4..Generalized Alpha”).
• 1..Newmark implicit predictor-corrector. Writes NEWMARK.
• 2..Hilber-Hughes-Taylor (HHT) implicit predictor-corrector scheme. Writes HHT.
• 3..Generalized Midpoint (with theta). Writes GENMID
• 4..Generalized Alpha (with theta). Writes MGENALP.
Newmark Param 1 (BETA) - Newmark scheme parameter 1. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.25. Writes
BETA field and corresponding value.
Newmark Param 2 (GAMA) - Newmark scheme parameter 2. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.5. Writes
GAMA field and corresponding value.
HHT Scheme Param (ALFA) - HHT scheme parameter. Must be between 0.0 and 0.333333, Default = 0.05.
Writes ALFA field and corresponding value.
Generalized Scheme Param (TETA) - Generalized midpoint (with theta) and generalized alpha (with theta)
schemes parameter, theta. Default = 0.55 for “3..Generalized Midpoint” or 0.8 for “4..Generalized-alpha”. Writes
TETA field and corresponding value.
Intg Control Param 1 (PRCO) - Integration error control parameter 1 for Newmark implicit predictor-corrector
with automatic time stepping scheme and Hilber-Hughes-Taylor (HHT) implicit predictor-corrector with automatic
time stepping scheme. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.001. Writes PRCO field and corresponding value.
Intg Control Param 2 (HPRCO) - Integration error control parameter 2 for Newmark implicit predictor-corrector
with automatic time stepping scheme and Hilber-Hughes-Taylor (HHT) implicit predictor-corrector with automatic
time stepping scheme. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = 0.0. Writes PRCO field and corresponding
value.
Contact
Relaxation Force (RELC) - Relaxation factor for contact. Relaxation Force (RELC) can trigger more iterations in
contact solving. Values smaller than 1.0 are under-relaxation. Values larger than 1.0 (over-relaxation) are allowed
but for advanced users. Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 1.0. Writes RELC field and corresponding value.
Characteristic Length (DCON) - Characteristic length for contact. Must be greater than or equal to 0.0, Default =
automatically computed from the size of the elements. Writes DCON field and corresponding value.
Intg Regularization Force (PRCS) - Regularization factor p for the augmented Lagrange multipliers. Must be
greater than or equal to 0.0, Default = automatically computed from the average stiffness of the whole model.
Writes PRCS field and corresponding value.
Threshold for Contact Force Variation (PRCF) - Precision threshold for the contact forces variation. This value
can be compared to TESC value in the *.f06 file.Must be greater than 0.0, Default = 0.1. Writes PRCF field and
corresponding value.
Diagnostic
Print frequency (IMPG) - Printing frequency of general results (number of plastic elements, ...). Integer value
must be greater than 0, Default = 10. Writes IMPG field and corresponding integer value.
Max Residual Printout (IMPR) - Number of the greatest residuals to be printed in listing file. Integer value must
be greater than or equal to 0, Default = 0. Writes IMPR field and corresponding integer value.
Max Pivots (IMPV) - Printing frequency of general results (number of plastic elements, ...). Integer value must be
greater than or equal to 0, Default = 5. Writes IMPV field and corresponding integer value.
Modal
The NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box defines options for model analysis for SOL 402. It is available in the
Master Case when Analysis Type is set to “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” and in any subcase which has Analysis
Type set to “2..Normal Modes/Eigenvalue” or “7..Buckling”.
 Static Aeroelasticity Analysis 8-171

Only a subset of the options in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box are available for SOL 402:
Method ID will always be “1” if being used in the Master case, otherwise, it will match the ID of the subcase.
Lanczos in the Real Solution Methods section is the only solution method currently available.
From (Hz) and To (Hz) in Range of Interest are optional to enter.
Number Desired is the only option available in the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors section. Default value is 10.
Normalization Method can be set to Mass or Max.
For more information on these options, see Section 8.8.1.11, "NASTRAN Modal Analysis".
8.8.1.31 Static Aeroelasticity Analysis
Simcenter and MSC/MD Nastran have the ability to perform Static Aeroelasticity analysis using Solution Sequence
144 (SOL 144).
Specific Solution 144 dialog boxes will appear in the Analysis Set Manager when the Analysis Type has been set to
25..Static Aeroelasticity. The NASTRAN Aerodynamic Data (AEROS) dialog box allows you to enter basic parame-
ters for static aeroelasticity and an optional conversion factor PARAM used for all subcases. On the other hand, the
NASTRAN Aeroelastic Trim Parameters dialog box contains a number of “Trim Parameters”, which may be speci-
fied in the “Master Requests and Conditions” for an analysis with no subcases or specified individually for each
subcase.
AEROF and APRES will be written to case control to request results from static aeroelastic analysis.
NASTRAN Aerodynamic Data (AEROS)

Aerodynamic Physical Data

Aerodynamic CSys - specifies the aerodynamic coordinate system. Must be a rectangular coordinate system. Flow
is in the +X direction. Value written to the ACSID field of the AEROS entry.
Ref CSys - specifies the reference coordinate system. Must be a rectangular coordinate system. All AESTAT
degrees-of-freedom defining trim variables will be defined in this coordinate system. Value written to the RCSID
field of the AEROS entry.
Chord Length - specifies reference chord length. Value written to the REFC field of the AEROS entry.
Span - specifies reference span. Value written to the REFB field of the AEROS entry.
Wing Area - specifies reference wing area. Value written to the REFS field of the AEROS entry.
PARAM, AUNITS - writes PARAM, AUNITS to the Nastran input file with the specified value. This parameter is
used to convert accelerations specified in units of gravity on the TRIM entries to units of distance per time squared.
Symmetry
XZ - specifies the symmetry “key” for the x-z plane of the Aerodynamic CSys. Based on option selected for XZ,
writes an integer to the SYMXZ (Symmetry = +1, No Symmetry = 0, Anti-Symmetry = -1).
 8-172 Analysis Program Interfaces

XY - specifies the symmetry “key” for the x-y plane of the Aerodynamic CSys, which can be used to simulate
“ground effects”. Based on option selected for XY, writes an integer to the SYMXY (Symmetry = -1, No Symmetry
= 0, Anti-Symmetry = +1).
NASTRAN Aeroelastic Trim Parameters
The Enable Trim check box may be used to toggle the options set in the NASTRAN Aeroelastic Trim Parameters
dialog on/off in the Master case and for each subcase.
The Trim Parameters in the upper portion of the dialog box are used to define values on the TRIM bulk data entry.
Mach Number - specifies the mach number. Value written to the MACH field of the TRIM entry.
Dynamic Pressure - specifies a value for dynamic pressure. Value written to the Q field of the TRIM entry.
Rigid Trim Analysis - specifies if trim analysis is rigid. When “on” a value of 0.0 is written to the AEQR field of
the TRIM entry. When “off”, a value of 1.0 is written to the AEQR field of the TRIM entry.

The Trim Parameters in the lower portion of the dialog box write AESTAT and/or TRIM entries using values
entered for various “Trim Variables” in the list.
When set to Rigid Body Motion:
a. Select from the list of “Standard Labels Defining Rigid Body Motions” on the AESTAT (ANGLEA, SIDES,
ROLL, PITCH, YAW, URDD1, URDD2, URDD3, URDD4, URDD5, and URDD6)
b. Select a Usage (1..Free or 2..Fixed). If 2..Fixed, enter a magnitude as well (UXi value on TRIM entry).
c. Click Add to add the “Trim Variable” to the list in the lower portion of the dialog box.
When set to Control Surfaces:
a. Select from the list of Aero Control Surfaces in your model, then follow steps b and c above.
 Aerodynamic Flutter Analysis 8-173

To update a “Trim Variable”, highlight one in the list, set the appropriate values, then click Update. The Delete but-
ton is used to delete a single highlighted “Trim Variable” from the list, while Reset will delete all “Trim Variables”
from the list.
8.8.1.32 Aerodynamic Flutter Analysis
Simcenter and MSC/MD Nastran have the ability to perform Aerodynamic Flutter analysis using Solution
Sequence 145 (SOL 145).
Specific Solution 145 dialog boxes will appear in the Analysis Set Manager when the Analysis Type has been set to
26..Aerodynamic Flutter. The NASTRAN Aerodynamic Data (AEROx, MKAEROx) dialog box allows you to enter
basic parameters for unsteady aerodynamics, a table of Mach numbers vs. Reduced frequencies, and some addi-
tional dynamic analysis information. On the other hand, the NASTRAN Flutter Parameters dialog box contains a
number of “Flutter Parameters”, which may be specified in the “Master Requests and Conditions” for an analysis
with no subcases or specified individually for each subcase.
The standard NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box is also used to setup a Flutter analysis. See Section 8.8.1.11,
"NASTRAN Modal Analysis" for more information about the options available in this dialog box.
When using the PK method, results from the Flutter Summery Table will be imported into FEMAP as functions.
NASTRAN Aerodynamic Data (AEROx, MKAEROx)

Aerodynamic Physical Data

Aerodynamic CSys - specifies the aerodynamic coordinate system. Must be a rectangular coordinate system. Flow
is in the +X direction. Value written to the ACSID field of the AERO entry.
Velocity - specifies the velocity for aerodynamic force data recovery and to calculate the BOV parameter. Value
written to the VELOCITY field of the AERO entry.
Ref Length - specifies reference length for reduced frequency. Value written to the REFC field of the AERO entry.
Ref Density - specifies reference density. Value written to the RHOREF field of the AERO entry.
Symmetry
XZ - specifies the symmetry “key” for the x-z plane of the Aerodynamic CSys. Based on option selected for XZ,
writes an integer to the SYMXZ (Symmetry = +1, No Symmetry = 0, Anti-Symmetry = -1).
XY - specifies the symmetry “key” for the x-y plane of the Aerodynamic CSys, which can be used to simulate
“ground effects”. Based on option selected for XY, writes an integer to the SYMXY (Symmetry = -1, No Symmetry
= 0, Anti-Symmetry = +1).
 8-174 Analysis Program Interfaces

Mach Number - Frequency Table

Select a function to specify a list of Mach Numbers vs. Reduced Frequencies (Type of function MUST be
“34..Mach Number vs. Freq”). To create a new function “on-the-fly”, click the New Function icon button. Writes
as many MKAERO2 entries as needed for all XY data pairs in the function (4 data pairs per MKAERO2).
Dynamics Options
These options allow you to limit the modes used to analyze the response of the structure by allowing you to set a
subset of the frequency range specified in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dialog box or simply enter a fewer num-
ber of modes to use. This can be useful if restarting from a Modal Analysis which had a larger frequency range or
more modes than are needed to run an accurate Modal Transient analysis.
Number of Modes will write the PARAM,LMODES entry, Lowest Freq (Hz) will write PARAM,LFREQ and High-
est Freq (Hz) will write PARAM,HFREQ. Specify Rigid Body Zero Modes (FZERO) to have modes with values
under specified value be considered “0”.
When checked, As Structural(KDAMP) will write out PARAM,KDAMP,-1, which causes the viscous modal damp-
ing, specified by the Modal Damping Table in the NASTRAN Flutter Parameters, to be entered into the complex
stiffness matrix as structural damping. When checked, PARAM OPPHIPA will write out PARAM,OPPHIPA,1,
which will output the real vibration modes at all degrees of freedom, including aerodynamic degrees of freedom.
NASTRAN Flutter Parameters
The Model Damping Table can be specified here (function Type must be “6..Structural Damping vs. Freq”, “7..Crit-
ical Damping vs. Freq”, or “8..Q Damping vs. Frequency”) and writes a TABDMP1 entry.

The Enable Flutter check box may be used to toggle the options set in the NASTRAN Flutter Parameters dialog on/
off in the Master case and for each subcase. A FMETHOD= # case control entry will be written to each subcase,
specifying which FLUTTER entry to use for each subcase.
Flutter Parameters
Flutter Method - specifies the flutter analysis method. There are four methods available:
0..K-Method (K written to METHOD field on FLUTTER entry)
1..PK-Method (PK written to METHOD filed on FLUTTER entry). Is the default method.
2..PKNL-Method (PKNL written to METHOD on FLUTTER entry). Is PK-Method with no looping.
3..KE-Method (KE written to METHOD on FLUTTER entry). Is K-Method restricted for efficiency.
 Contact Parameters (MSC Nastran Only) 8-175

Density Ratios - select a function to specify the density ratio vs. aerodynamic factor. Type of function must be
“35..vs.Aerodynamic Factor”. Function values written to FLFACT entry which is then referenced by the DENS
field of the FLUTTER entry.
Mach Numbers - select a function to specify the mach numbers vs. aerodynamic factor. Type of function must be
“35..vs.Aerodynamic Factor”. Function values written to FLFACT entry which is then referenced by the MACH
field of the FLUTTER entry.
Velocity/Reduced Freq - select a function to specify the velocity (PK and PKNL methods) or reduced frequencies
(K and KE methods) vs. aerodynamic factor. Type of function must be “35..vs.Aerodynamic Factor”. Function val-
ues written to FLFACT entry which is then referenced by the RFREQ field of the FLUTTER entry.
Interpolation Method (K and KE methods only) - specify an interpolation method for aerodynamic matrix inter-
polation. Choose between Linear (writes L to IMETH field on FLUTTER entry. Default) or Surface (writes S to
IMETH field on FLUTTER entry).
Number Eigenvalues (PK and PKNL methods only) - specify the number of eigenvalues. Value written to
NVALUE field on the FLUTTER entry.
Convergence (PK and PKNL methods only) - specify a convergence value for k, which a value used to accept
eigenvalues. Value written to EPS field on the FLUTTER entry.
8.8.1.33 Contact Parameters (MSC Nastran Only)
The MSC Nastran Contact Solver Parameters dialog box contains a number of options which can be specified
when performing an analysis in MSC Nastran, which also includes surface-to-surface contact. All of the items in
this dialog box correspond to items (Params) which can be included on the BCPARA entry. For more information,
see the BCPARA (Contact Parameters - SOLs 101 and 400) entry in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Enable Contact Parameters must be enabled for FEMAP to use any options in this dialog box:
 8-176 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.1.34 Superelement Analysis

Simcenter and MSC/MD Nastran have a number of Superelement Solution Sequences. In fact, all the SOLs in the
100 range are actually Superelement Solutions Sequences (For example, SOL 101 for Linear Static Analysis).
While not accessed through the standard “path” of the Analysis Set Manager (i.e., using the Next and/or Previous
buttons), a number of Analysis Types contain External Superelement Creation and External Superelement Refer-
ence options which may be accessed.
External Superelement Creation
Located in the Master Requests and Conditions branch, the External Superelement Creation entry offers the ability
to setup an “External Superelement Creation” analysis run.

The upper portion of this dialog box is used to specify the EXTSEOUT Case Control command, while the DOF
Sets section offers an alternate place to choose a constraint set used to write out the ASET or the QSET. Finally, the
Entity ID Range Checks section simply offers a “check” for duplicate Node and Element IDs, but does not actually
write anything to Nastran. For more information, see Section 5.13, "External Superelements Modeling".
External Superelement Reference
Located in the Options branch, the External Superelement Reference entry offers the ability to setup an “External
Superelement Assembly” analysis run. A Nastran Superelement license is required for this type of analysis. The
External Superelement Reference dialog box contains a number of icons used to create, edit, or delete a reference to
a *.pch file, a *.op2 file + *.asm file combination, or a *.op4 file + *.asm file combination.
In addition, PARAM,SECOMB maybe toggled on/off, and so can Write Full Path. When off, only the name of the
selected *.asm file will be written to the Nastran input file as an INCLUDE statement. Finally, Duplicate Node Tol-
erance can be toggled on/off and a value provided. When turned on, this writes DPBLKTOL=value System Cell to
the NASTRAN line of the input file. For more information, see Section 5.13, "External Superelements Modeling".
 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export 8-177

8.8.2 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export

Note: This method is obsolete and has been removed from the default configuration of FEMAP. If you need to
use it for any reason, you must use the File, Preferences command, click the Interfaces tab, and check
the option for “Enable Old Analysis Interfaces”. The use of this method for translation is NOT recom-
mended. Use the Model, Analysis method instead.

You can write the FEMAP model into a file that can be read by Nastran through either the Model, Analysis or the
File, Export, Analysis Model commands. Although the commands have a different the user interface, they both pro-
duce a file that contains the three required sections: Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data.
For all Nastran analysis types, you will define an analysis set, executive and solution options, bulk data options,
output requests/boundary conditions.
Starting to Export the Model
Use the File, Export, Analysis Model command to export your model to Nastran. Once you select the command,
you then select the appropriate version of Nastran.
If you pick File, Export after you have already created an analysis set with the Model, Analysis command, the soft-
ware uses the active analysis set to create the file. You won’t see any dialog boxes.
If you don’t have an analysis set, you will see the standard file access dialog box where you can choose the name of
the file to create. The default filename extension is “.NAS”, but you can choose any file name.
The remainder of this section describes the dialog boxes for the interface:
• "Analysis Control"
• "Dynamic Analysis"
• "Heat Transfer Analyses"
• "Bulk Data"
• "Special Notes for Nonlinear, Creep, and Dynamic Analyses"
• "Special Notes for Models with Axisymmetric Elements"
• "Special Notes for Heat Transfer Analysis"
Analysis Control
After you choose the file, you will see the Nastran Analysis Control dialog box. Often, this single dialog box is all
that is required to create a Nastran input file.
8-178 Analysis Program Interfaces

Analysis Type
This list specifies the type of analysis that you want to perform. It should always be set to the same type that you
chose in the File, Export Analysis Model dialog box, but this gives you an opportunity to change your mind.
Loads, Constraints and Initial Conditions
These lists are used to choose the load and constraint conditions that you want to analyze. Although most analyses
require these conditions, if you want to skip them, you can simply turn off the check box to the left of the option
that you wish to ignore. Otherwise, you must choose a set from the available lists. The default values will always be
the active load/constraint set.
For heat transfer analyses, you will notice that constraint sets are not used. Rather, loads and constraints are both
selected from a load set. FEMAP translates nodal temperatures, in the same set as the other thermal loads, as ther-
mal constraints (boundary conditions). In addition however, you can choose a constraint set if you have any con-
straint equations to be included in your model. Again however, this is only for constraint equations, not nodal
constraints

Note: If your analysis requires multiple constraint sets, you will have to press Advanced and go through a
more detailed definition of the case control. This dialog box can only be used for a single constraint set
analysis. This is also true for multiple load sets except for static and nonlinear static analysis types. If
multiple load sets are required for these two types, you can still go through Advanced, or press the Loads
button at the bottom right portion of the box. This option allows you to select FEMAP load sets with the
standard Entity Selection dialog box. The load sets will be written as separate subcases in the order in
which they were chosen. Remember, if you use this option, each load set to be analyzed will have the
same constraint set.

Output Types
This list allows you to request the type of output you want. The default - Standard Output - varies depending on the
type of analysis that you are performing. For example, for static analyses it includes displacements, constraint
forces, applied loads, elemental forces and elemental stresses, while for modal analysis it includes only displace-
ments and constraint forces. The list also includes other specific options (Displacements Only, Displacements and
Stresses) and an All option. The All option does not necessarily request all output available in Nastran. It does
request the same output as standard plus some additional types like elemental strains and constraint equation
forces. If you need more control over output selection, you must press Advanced.
For Group
If you want to limit output to a subset of your model, you can define a group which contains the nodes and elements
that you want. When you select that group from this list, all output requests, whether nodal or elemental, will be
based on the entities in that group. If you need more control, such as multiple groups, or limiting only certain types
of output, you will have to press Advanced.
Additional Info
Depending on the type of analysis you are performing, there may be one or more options available in this section
that allow you to further control your analysis.
For static, nonlinear static, nonlinear transient response, and steady state heat transfer, no additional info is required
or even available. For modal or buckling, you can specify the number of modes/eigenvalues that you want to
recover and a frequency range of interest. This is also true for modal transient and modal frequency response anal-
yses.
 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export 8-179

Heat transfer analyses require control over the number of time steps and the time increment at the start of the anal-
ysis. In addition, you can specify an output step interval to minimize the amount of output. For example, an output
step interval of 3 means that output will only be written for every third step.
Your choice of the time stepping and time increment are crucial to proper convergence to an accurate solution. To
assist you in defining these values, the Estimate button can be used. to examine the model that you have defined,
including material properties, the duration of any functions, and your mesh, and make a guess at the values for the
other options. Remember, this is just an educated guess based on your model. It may not be what you intended to
analyze. It is ultimately up to you to set these values appropriately.

Run Analysis
This option is used by the version of FEMAP included in the Simcenter Nastran and MSC.Nastran for Windows
product to automatically begin the analysis, otherwise it is not currently used.
Iterative Solver
When this option is checked, FEMAP will write the necessary commands to invoke the Nastran iterative solver.
Restarts...
... allows you to specify whether you want to perform a Normal Analysis (the default), Save Databases for a
Restart (only currently available in the bundled MSC.Nastran for Windows product), or to Restart from a Previous
Analysis. If you select Restart Previous Analysis, the standard file selection dialog box will appear, and you will
need to select the old Nastran database from which to restart.

Multiple Load Cases

As mentioned previously, this button is only available for static and nonlinear static types and only if your model
contains more than one load set. It is used to select multiple load sets to be written as separate subcases. Each sub-
case will have the same constraint set and print options. If different constraint sets are required, or different print
options for subcases are needed, you must use Advanced.
Advanced
As mentioned above, if your model is more complicated, or you need more control over the file that is produced,
you will have to press the Advanced button. This will lead to a series of additional dialog boxes where you can con-
trol each step of the translation. The remainder of this section will tell you more about those dialog boxes.
Dynamic Analysis
For normal modes, random, or buckling analyses, these parameters are used to define the EIGR (EIGRL) command
that controls your modal analysis. A similar box will appear for transient and frequency response analysis, except
you will have the option to select Direct or Modal Solution Type.
 8-180 Analysis Program Interfaces

For a description of this dialog box, see Section 8.8.1.11, "NASTRAN Modal Analysis".
Executive Control
The next dialog is used to define the Executive Control commands for your Nastran model.

The standard Executive Control includes the version number, four executive control commands and two solution
options. If you want further customization, the other buttons on the dialog box provide that control
 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export 8-181

Nastran Version
Select the version that you are using: Ver 2004 (MSC.Nastran 2004), Ver 2001 (MSC.Nastran 2001) or Previous
Versions (up to version 70.7).
Executive Control
• The Problem ID is written as a title to the ID command.
• The Solution Number selects the DMAP “solution sequence” that will be executed. FEMAP will automatically
define this as SESTATICS, SEMODES, SEDTRAN, SEMTRAN, SEDFREQ, SEMFREQ, SEBUCKL,
NLSTATIC, NLTRAN, NLSCSH, or NLTCSH, but you can change it to any of the numerical sequences that
you want to use.
• The Max Time option sets the maximum allowable CPU time for this analysis. Do not set this number too low,
or your analysis will terminate prematurely. You can also specify andy diagnostic lines, and whether to use the
iterative solver, and set the number of processors. If you simply press OK, this standard Executive Control,
along with a CEND command will be written.
• The Direct Output To option is used by the version of FEMAP included in the MSC.Nastran for Windows prod-
uct to specify a location for the Nastran output; otherwise, it is not used.
Restarts
When you press this button, you will see the Nastran Restart Control dialog box (shown as "Restarts..." in the Nas-
tran Analysis Control dialog box option). You can choose a Normal Analysis, Save Database for Restart, or Restart
Previous Analysis. The Save Database option is only available in MSC.Nastran for Windows product.
Include File
This button lets you include another text file in the Executive Control section. You can select the file with the stan-
dard file access dialog box. This capability can be used to include standard DMAP alter sequences, Job Control
(JCL) statements, or other standard modifications to the beginning of your Nastran file. Just save those standard
changes in a file, and include them with this option.
Type Input
If you want to make “one-time” changes, press Type Input, then enter the line into the following dialog. It will be
added to the Nastran file.

After you type your command, press OK, or press More if you want to continue typing additional commands.
Write Exec and CEND
This button writes the standard Executive Control, but stays in the dialog box so you can add additional commands
(with Type or Include) following the standard commands. If you press this button, use the CEND button when you
want to exit the dialog box. Once you press this button, it and the OK button will be disabled to prevent you from
accidentally writing a second copy of the Executive Control.
Skip
Press this button if you want to go on to the Case Control without writing any additional information.
 8-182 Analysis Program Interfaces

Case Control
After you have finished the Executive Control, the following dialog box will appear if you are doing a structural
analysis:
 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export 8-183

Or if you are performing a heat transfer analysis, a similar, but slightly different dialog box is used:

While these dialog boxes appear complicated, they are divided into three readily understandable areas: Set Defini-
tion, Analysis Case Requests, and Output Requests. For thermal analysis, both analysis case and output requests
areas are combined in the Case Control Requests section.
Defining Sets
Usually you want to recover output for all nodes and/or elements, but if you do want to limit your analysis output,
you must define a Nastran SET that selects the node or element IDs that you want. You can define these sets with
the controls in the Set Definition section of the dialog box. First, specify a Set ID (which you will refer to later in
the Output Requests section of the dialog box for output recovery), then push either the Write Node Set or Write
Element Set button. You will see the standard entity selection dialog box, where you choose the entities that you
want in the set. The Set ID will automatically increment so you can define the next set.
Analysis Case Requests
The standard case control which is written if you simply press OK does not use subcases. All selections are written
directly to the Master Case. To perform multiple analyses with different load and/or constraint sets, you can define
multiple subcases. Subcases are available only for structural non-transient analysis types (i.e. static, normal modes,
buckling, and nonlinear static).
Defining Subcases
You can define multiple subcases by choosing a Subcase ID, setting the desired options, and pressing the Write
Case button. The Subcase ID will automatically increment, and options for the next subcase can be defined. When
you define your last case, press the OK button instead of Write Case to go to the Bulk Data dialog box. If you want
some options to apply to all subcases, you can write them to the master case before defining your first subcase by
simply pressing Write Case before you define a subcase ID.
SUBCASE ID
As stated above, this option should be set to the ID of the subcase you want to create. If it is blank (or 0), the master
case will be created.
 8-184 Analysis Program Interfaces

ECHO
This option determines how the model will be written in the standard output file. The default, SORT, will write
your model in sorted alphabetical order. If you do not want the model to be listed in the output change this to
NONE.
TITLE, SUBTITLE, and LABEL
These three options specify the titles that will be used at the top of every output “page”.
LOAD, SPC and MPC Sets and Initial Conditions
These options choose the loads, constraints, and initial conditions for this case. FEMAP will write all available
constraint sets in the Bulk Data portion of the file. FEMAP will also write all available load sets in the Bulk Data
section except for heat transfer (steady state and transient), and structural transient solution types (transient
response, frequency response, and nonlinear transient). Only load sets which are chosen in the Case Control will be
written in the Bulk Data for these problems. You must choose the combination of sets that you want to analyze in
the Case Control. This is a primary reason for using multiple subcases when this option is available.
The LOAD option allows the selection of a load set to activate for this subcase. The SPC option chooses the con-
straint set for nodal constraints, and the MPC option chooses the constraint set for constraint equations. If you do
not want any of these options, or if you have activated one for all subcases (in the master case), simply turn off the
box at the left of these options.
You can also specify initial conditions for the analysis by defining a separate load set which contains only initial
conditions, such as displacements or velocities. Initial conditions are only available for transient and heat transfer
analyses.
Output Requests
This section controls what output will be calculated and written to the output files. The default output file for this
information is the OP2 file, which is chosen with the PostProcess Only option. You may change this to the F06
Option for Print Only, or select both. If you do not want a certain type of output, switch it to None. If you only want
output for a selected portion of your model, choose Set, and specify the Set ID. Remember, however, you must
define the set using the Set Definition options. If you are going to post-process, you will probably want to choose
All (or None, for those types of output that you do not want). For frequency response analyses, you can also chose
to recover output in either magnitude/phase or real/imaginary format.
Include File and Type Input
These buttons allow you to include additional commands in your Case Control. For details on these buttons, see
"Case Control" in the Executive Control section.
Write Case and BEGIN BULK
This button writes the selected options to the file and increments the Subcase ID. You can then write additional
cases, or include custom commands, before proceeding. When you are finished with the Case Control, you must
then press BEGIN BULK, to go on to the Bulk Data without writing additional cases. If you press OK, you will go
on, but the options that you have set will be written as an additional case.
Skip
Press this button if you want to go to the Bulk Data without writing any additional information.
 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export 8-185

Random Response Analyses

For random response analyses, you must specify additional output requests. The type of output that you request
depends on the version of Nastran that you are using.

For a description of this dialog box, see Section 8.8.1.20, "NASTRAN Random Response Analysis".
Heat Transfer Analyses
For heat transfer analysis, you must specify additional iteration control and convergence information.

For transient heat transfer, you must input the desired number of time steps, initial time increments, frequency of
output and the maximum number of iterations. You can also choose to require convergence on temperature, load, or
work criteria within specified values.
For steady state heat transfer, you also have the option of choosing the convergence tolerances, but not the step
control.
 8-186 Analysis Program Interfaces

Bulk Data
After the completing the Case Control, you will see the NASTRAN Bulk Data dialog box:

Format
These options determine the format that will be used to write your Bulk Data commands. By default, FEMAP uses
small field format (8 character fields). If you want extra precision, for all, or some of your model, you can choose
one of the large field formats (16 character fields). The large field formats obviously produce a large file and one
that is harder to read. You should not choose that format unless it is necessary. The “limited” large field formats
allow you to selectively write large field formats for certain entities and small field format for others. FEMAP does
not write free field format.
Plate and Beam Types
Nastran supports two plate formulations:
• The CQUADR and CTRIAR elements have rotational stiffness in the direction normal to the plane of the ele-
ment.
• By default the CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements will be written. These do not have any rotational stiffness in
the normal direction.
If you are using a version of Nastran other than Simcenter, MSC or NE, you may want to use the CQUAD4/
CTRIA3 option because the CQUADR/CTRIAR elements may not be available.
Nastran can use PBEAM entries or PBEAML entries to define beam properties. You can create both PBEAMs and
PBEAMLs in FEMAP using the Model, Property... command.
• FEMAP computes values for a “Standard Beam” from the cross-section data supplied and enters the values into
the appropriate fields on the Define Property - BEAM Element Type dialog box. When a Nastran input deck is
exported, FEMAP creates a PBEAM entry for each “standard beam” property defined in the model. Nastran
then uses the PBEAM data as it would any other property data to analyze your structure
 Writing a Nastran Model with File, Export 8-187

• When FEMAP creates a “NASTRAN Beam”, the cross-section data supplied is also used to compute values
and enters them into the appropriate fields on the Define Property - BEAM Element Type dialog box. Upon
export to Nastran, FEMAP instead creates PBEAML entries for each “NASTRAN Beam” in the model.
PBEAML entries contain cross-section dimension data corresponding to a specific PBEAML Type specified on
each PBEAML entry. Nastran uses this cross-sectional data and PBEAML type internally to analyze the struc-
ture.
Sometimes you may want to only export PBEAM entries out of FEMAP for analysis purposes. By choosing Skip
Beam/Bar Cross Sections, FEMAP will use the computed property values from the Define Property - BEAM Ele-
ment Type dialog box and only create PBEAM entries in your Nastran input file, regardless of how the beams were
defined.
An example of when this option would be used, would be if you have a model created with “NASTRAN Beams”,
which needs to be run by a version of Nastran that does not support PBEAML entries.
PARAM
If you choose these options, FEMAP will write PARAM cards for those options selected. You can also control the
format of the AUTOSPC command to the MSC.Nastran convention (PARAM, AUTOSPC, YES) or the Cosmic
Nastran convention (PARAM, AUTOSPC, 1). If you want to use additional parameters besides those listed, they
can be added with the Type Input or Include File buttons.
Checking RESVEC allows you to write two forms of the RESVEC PARAM. PARAM,RESVEC,NO which aug-
ments static shapes due to applied loads; or PARAM RESVEC,YES which computes residual vectors for applied
loads and unit loads (with specified USETi, U6 entries at the desired dofs). When RESVEC is not checked, the
PARAM,RESVEC entry will not be written at all, which is required for some types of analysis.
Analysis Sets
These options will write the various mutually exclusive analysis sets to your Bulk Data. Each of these options
allows you to select a constraint set that will be translated to the appropriate format for that analysis set.
Typically, for static analysis you will not want to choose any of these sets. For modal analysis however, you will
often want to choose an ASET to reduce the number of analysis degrees of freedom. The other sets are rarely used.
Include File and Type Input
These buttons allow you to include additional commands in your Bulk Data. (For information on these buttons, see
"Executive Control".)
Write Bulk and ENDDATA
This button writes your model to the Bulk Data portion of the file. You can then use the Include File or Type Input
buttons to include additional information after your model. When you are done, press ENDDATA to write the END-
DATA command and exit the translator.
If you want to add data to the file after the end of your model, write the model with the Write Bulk button, then add
the ENDDATA command manually using either Include File or Type Input. You can then add additional information
with these same two buttons. When you are done, press Skip to leave the translator without writing an additional
ENDDATA command.
Skip
Press this button if you want to leave the translator without writing any additional information (including the END-
DATA command).
Special Notes for Nonlinear, Creep, and Dynamic Analyses
See Section 8.8.1.23, "Nonlinear Static, Nonlinear Transient, and Creep".
Special Notes for Models with Axisymmetric Elements
See Section 8.8.1.24, "Special Notes for Models with Axisymmetric Elements".
Special Notes for Heat Transfer Analysis
See Section 8.8.1.25, "Special Notes for Heat Transfer Analysis".
 8-188 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.3 Performing a Nastran Analysis

Depending on where you plan to run Nastran, the preliminary steps can be somewhat different. You may not be
running Nastran on the same computer as FEMAP, so you may have to transfer the file to the computer where Nas-
tran resides. In some cases, Nastran will also require that your Nastran filename has an extension of “.DAT”. In
these cases, you will have to either rename the file, or choose a “.DAT” name when you translate (since the
FEMAP convention is “.NAS”).
Once these things have been completed however, the basic approach to running Nastran is usually the same, simply
enter the command:
NASTRAN filename

where “filename” is the name of the file you created. Again, this can vary depending on the type of computer sys-
tem you are using. Refer to your Nastran documentation for more information.
If you want FEMAP to launch Nastran and automatically run your analysis, either from the File Analyze command
or pressing Analyze in Model Analysis, you must first setup the analysis program. To do this, before running
FEMAP, you must establish an environment variable to named MSCNAST_EXE. Set the value of this environment
variable to the full path to the Nastran solver executable, for example:
SET MSCNAST_EXE = c:\nastran\nastran.exe

For details on configuring other solvers to run using local settings See: Section 4.11.2.1, "Run Analysis Using
Linked Solver / VisQ / Local Settings" in the FEMAP Command Guide
NOTE: Once this environment variable has been defined, FEMAP will be able to launch the analysis program and
monitor the job until it is complete. Section 4.11.2.2, "Analysis Monitors"

8.8.4 Reading Nastran Models

Just as you can translate a FEMAP model to Nastran, you can also read Nastran models into FEMAP. When you
read a model, FEMAP will read the Executive and Case Control and create a new Analysis Set with the options that
were defined in the input file. If a option is not supported by the Analysis Manager then the input will be read as
text and inserted into the appropriate Start or End Text fields. In the Bulk Data, FEMAP can read small field, large
field, or free format commands.
Limitations
FEMAP cannot currently read some heat transfer specific loads or other commands.
Although support has been added for reading DLOAD, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, NOLINi there is the following limita-
tion:
Each load in the BULK DATA for the dynamics model will be read as a separate load case. You can modify the
bulk data so FEMAP will read all of these loads by changing the SID of each load to the same number. However,
you will still have to modify these loads in FEMAP because their references to functions, will be lost, although the
functions themselves will be read.
FEMAP can directly read most Nastran structural models, but the following conditions are not supported:
• Duplicate element and property IDs cannot be read directly. Some versions of Nastran allow you to use the
same element IDs for multiple elements, as long as the elements have different types. FEMAP will read the
duplicate information and then ask you if you want to renumber elements, properties, etc. so all entities of a
given type (i.e. elements, properties, etc.) have a unique ID.
• MSGMESH commands
• Data replication functions (=, ==, *x, =n, etc.)
• Continuation “cards” that do not directly follow their “parents”. This also eliminates the possibility of having
multiple parents referencing the same continuation.
If you have any of these conditions in your model, FEMAP will issue errors when you read the file. You can use
Nastran to write an expanded, sorted, “punched” data file (use ECHO=PUNCH) which can be read.
In addition to the above limitations, the following conditions are also not supported, but you will have to remove
them manually by editing your model.
 Post-processing Nastran Output 8-189

• Obsolete elements. For more information on the commands that are supported, see Section 7.1, "Translation
Table for ANSYS, NASTRAN, and MSC Patran". If you have other elements, you will have to change them to
a supported type before they can be read.
Reading the Model
When you begin to read a file, you will see the standard file access dialog box. Simply choose the file you want and
press OK. FEMAP will read the file without any further input.

Note: If the Nastran file being imported has INCLUDE files with paths mapped to files on a UNIX drive, a
“Drive Map” can be set using the FEMAP.ini file. Any number of “Drive Maps” using this technique.
In the FEMAP.ini file, simply type:
[DriveMap]
/use/“unix_path_to_replace”=(Drive Letter):\”windows_path_to_use”

8.8.5 Post-processing Nastran Output

To post-process Nastran analysis results, you can read the Binary Output 2 results file (typically called “OP2”), the
Binary External Data Base results file (typically called “XDB), or the standard printed output file in FEMAP (typi-
cally called the “F06” file). There is no special setup, or DMAP, required. FEMAP simply reads the file you would
otherwise read manually or print. In general, when you want to import in the entire results file, you should use
the OP2 reader. It is a little faster than the XDB reader (when reading ALL of the requested results into FEMAP),
and much faster and less prone to errors than the F06 reader, although you may want to read the f06 file to obtain
the warning and error messages. If you would only like to read in a portion of the results, using the XDB reader
may be a better option as FEMAP allows you to pick and choose what to import (See Section 8.8.5.2, "Reading or
attaching to the XDB File").
If dealing with a larger output file, it may be better to “attach” to the output file instead of “internalizing” the output
data in FEMAP. See Section 2.3.2, "File, Attach to Results" of the Commands manual for more information.
Transmitting the File
Since you may have performed the analysis on a different computer, you may have to first transfer the output file to
the computer where FEMAP resides. Since this file can be rather large, you may want to “compress” it first, using
the NASCRUSH program (described later in this section).
When you transmit the file, you must be certain your communications or networking software does not modify the
file in any way. If you are having any problems reading output for post-processing, the first thing to check is the
settings in your communication program. If it is expanding carriage control, truncating lines, or modifying the file
in any other way, you can have problems. The F06 file must be transmitted as an ASCII file, otherwise carriage
returns may not be properly inserted. The OP2 and XDB files should be transferred as a binary file, and FEMAP
will perform any byte-swapping that is required when reading the file.
8.8.5.1 Reading or attaching to OP2 and reading FO6 Files
After you run Nastran, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command, select Nastran and then Simcenter Nas-
tran or MSC Nastran. FEMAP will display the standard file access dialog box, and you can choose the output file
you want to read. When you press OK, FEMAP will immediately open the file and display the first few lines in the
Messages window. FEMAP will then ask if you really want to read the file you selected. If you answer Yes,
FEMAP will read your output.
When results are in the .op2 file (or .xdb file), you can also “attach” to the file instead of “internalizing” the file
using the File, Attach to Results command. See Section 2.3.2, "File, Attach to Results" in the Commands manual
for more information.
You must always read or attach the Nastran output into a model file with FE entities. If you did not create your
model in FEMAP, just use the File, Import, Analysis Model command to create a FEMAP model, then read the out-
put into that model.
 8-190 Analysis Program Interfaces

FEMAP will read many types of Nastran output, including:

DISPLACEMENT - Displacements/Eigenvectors
VELOCITY - Velocities
ACCELERATION - Accelerations
MPCFORCES - Multipoint Constraint Forces
SPCFORCES - Constraint Forces
OLOAD - Applied Loads
FORCE - Element Forces
STRESS - Element Stresses (Linear and Nonlinear)
STRAIN - Element Strains (Linear and Nonlinear)
ESE - Element Strain Energy

FLUX - Temperature Gradients and Fluxes

THERMAL - Temperatures, Heat Flow
ENTHALPY - Enthalpy
HDOT - Enthalpy Change
FEMAP will also read the failure indices and strength ratios for layered composite elements and Grid Point Force
Balance data.
For dynamic analysis, FEMAP will read in Modal Participation Factors, Modal Effective Mass, Modal Effective
Weight, and Modal Effective Mass Fraction functions (XY Output), as well as acceleration and displacement func-
tions (XY Output) for Random Response.

Note: XY Output functions are only read in from the F06 file at this time. The F06 file is created for Error and
Warning information when the OP2 is chosen, so these functions often are available for import if you
requested them from NASTRAN.

FEMAP will also read complex output, in both magnitude/phase or real/imaginary format, for most of the above
structural output types.
In addition to the output in the file, FEMAP can optionally compute additional output during the translation. For
example, FEMAP will always compute the magnitude of all displacements and rotations. Likewise, FEMAP will
automatically compute principal, max shear, mean, and Von Mises stresses, if they were not read, but the data nec-
essary to compute them is available. For large models with significant amounts of output, you may not want to
automatically compute these values. You can skip this computation by turning it off with the File, Preferences,
Interfaces command. The default is to compute these values.
Naming of Output Sets
By default, FEMAP simply titles Output Sets from Static Analyses sequentially - Case 1, Case 2, etc.. For modal
analyses, the mode numbers and frequencies are used, for transient analyses, the time step is included in the title. In
all of these cases, the titles may not convey the information that you need to see, so there is an option that allows
you to control how titles are created. If you refer to the “Output Set Titles” option of the File, Preferences, Inter-
faces command, there are several options that allow you to use the text that you specify as the TITLE, SUBTITLE
or LABEL text in your analysis to be used as the Output Set titles.
Limitations
The following limitations and recommendations apply when you are trying to post-process Nastran output with
FEMAP. Most of these limitation apply strictly to the f06 reader, but a few also are pertinent to both readers.
• Elemental corner forces, stresses, and strains are not read for axisymmetric elements. This data can be in your
file, but it is skipped.
• For modal analysis, you must request the same output for all eigenvalues which are duplicates for the f06
reader. If you do not, FEMAP may associate output data with the wrong one of the duplicate eigenvalues. Since
knowing which eigenvalues are duplicate before the performing the analysis is difficult, it is generally best to
request the same output for all modes/eigenvalues. Although it is not required, it is best to always request dis-
placement output in a modal analysis. If you have displacement output, FEMAP will label all of your output
sets with the mode number and frequency. Otherwise, the output will be labeled with the eigenvalue.
 Reading or attaching to the XDB File 8-191

• For nonlinear static analysis with axisymmetric elements, only the last set of stresses will be read from the f06
file. Therefore, if intermediate step output is contained in your file, FEMAP will create output sets for the dif-
ferent steps, but will only post-process stress results for the last output step.
• Hyperelastic elements return stress and strain data at the Gauss points. FEMAP uses the data at the closest
Gauss point as the data at the center or element corner. No interpolation is done. These are really Gauss point
values. Corner data is not created for 6-node CPENTA Hyperelastic element data. Gauss points for this element
are at element midsides and are not mappable to corner values.
• In general FEMAP requires SORT1 style output for the f06 reader. FEMAP can read some nodal results (dis-
placements, velocities, accelerations, constraint forces, applied loads, temperatures and other heat transfer data)
and elemental heat transfer results in SORT2 format if there are less than 2000 steps.
8.8.5.2 Reading or attaching to the XDB File
After you run Nastran, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command, select Nastran, and then choose
Simcenter Nastran or MSC/MD Nastran from the drop-down list. FEMAP will display the standard file access dia-
log box for you to choose the XDB file you want to read. When you press OK, FEMAP will immediately open the
Select Output to Internalize dialog box, which facilitates selection of output sets and vectors. By default, all output
sets in the Output Sets section will be selected and the All Output Vectors option in the Output Vectors section will
be enabled, thus all output from the XDB file will be imported. To only import a subset of the results from the XDB
file, simply select the desired output set(s) and optionally disable the All Output Vectors option to be able to select
individual output vector(s) for import. For more information on using the Select Output to Internalize dialog box
see Section 8.6.0.1, "Using the Select Output Sets and Select Results dialog boxes" in the Commands manual.
Once you click OK, the Results Import Options dialog box will appear:

In addition to selecting which output sets and output vectors to internalize, groups limiting output to certain nodes
and/or elements may be selected. The “quick group” icons next to the drop-down lists can be used to create a new
group or edit an existing group “on-the-fly”. Depending on which button you select, you will be able to choose
only nodes or elements. If you click the Read More... button, the Select Output to Internalize dialog box will be dis-
played again for selection of additional output set(s) and output vector(s) and this process can be repeated as many
times as needed.
Another option is to use the File, Attach to Results command. Once an XDB file is attached, you can then use the
Save to Model functionality of File, Attach to Results to ‘internalize’ all or a portion of the results data in the XDB
file, much like you can when using File, Import, Analysis Results. See Section 2.3.2, "File, Attach to Results" in
the Commands manual.

Note: In order for the XDB to be able to read in a certain type of output, you must have requested it BEFORE
sending the input file to Nastran to be solved. If the output was not requested, it will not be in the XDB
file and therefore not available to be selected for retrieval.
 8-192 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.8.6 Reviewing Messages and Errors

If you are reading the printed (.f06) file, when FEMAP has finished reading the results, you will see the Message
Review dialog box.

This displays the number of messages of each type found in the file. You will almost always see some warning and
information messages. If you want to review the messages (always recommended), press Show Details to display
the Message Review Details dialog box.
The messages will be displayed at the top in the order they appeared in the file. Initially, the Details will be blank.
Select a message by clicking on it in the top, and the Details section will be filled with the number of Detail Lines
(default is 100 lines to facilitate showing the Extended Error Messages from Nastran) from your output file that
follow the message. The Extended Error Messages are turned on by default.

Clicking Help will take you directly to a list of Nastran error codes and a brief description of the specific error. This
are often helpful in diagnosing what may be causing a Nastran analysis to fail.

Note: It is highly recommended to use the Extended Error Messages option when using the Nastran solver.
There is then only one screen used to review Nastran Error Messages. If you do not use this option,
clicking the Help button in Message Review Details dialog box will link to an older file of Nastran
Error Messages which may or may not be accurate for newer Nastran versions.

The Message Review Details dialog box is resizable for FEMAP.

 Patran Interfaces 8-193

8.9 Patran Interfaces

There are three direct interfaces between FEMAP and MSC.Patran. You can write a FEMAP model to the
MSC.Patran format for analysis, read an existing MSC.Patran model, or read analysis results for post-processing.
The model interfaces use the MSC.Patran neutral file format. As you can see from the table in "Analysis Software
Interfaces", they only support the finite element entities in FEMAP. You cannot transfer geometry (points,
curves, surfaces, or volumes) between FEMAP and MSC.Patran using these interfaces.
For more information on the entities that are translated, see Section 7.1, "Translation Table for ANSYS, NAS-
TRAN, and MSC Patran".

8.9.1 Writing a MSC.Patran Model

To translate your model to MSC.Patran neutral format, select File, Export, Analysis Model and select PATRAN for-
mat. You will see the standard file access dialog box with the default extension set to “.PAT”. Select the filename
that you want and press OK. There are no additional options. FEMAP will immediately write the MSC.Patran file.
A Warning About Conventions
MSC.Patran neutral files allow you to write information in “tables” that are later interpreted by the other
MSC.Patran neutral file translators. For example, section properties values can be written in any order, but must
follow the order required by the neutral file translator that you will select later. We have chosen to follow the con-
ventions required by the MSC.Patran neutral file translators for Nastran (NASPAT and PATNAS). This convention
may, or may not, work with other neutral file translators. Check your data carefully.

8.9.2 Reading a MSC.Patran Model

Reading a MSC.Patran file is just as simple as writing one. You will probably want to start a new model before
beginning, but then just choose the File, Import, Analysis Model command and select PATRAN format. As before,
you will see the standard file access dialog box. You can simply choose the file that you want to read. You must
select a formatted MSC.Patran neutral file. Binary files are not supported.
The only option when reading a MSC.Patran model pertains to constraints. The MSC.Patran neutral file format
does not contain nodal constraints, rather they are written as enforced displacement loads with a zero displacement.
As you read the model, if FEMAP encounters a zero enforced displacement, you will be asked whether to convert
it (and all others) to nodal constraints.
FEMAP versions 9.3 and above read Points, Lines/Curves, Patch/Surface and Named Components/Groups.
The same restrictions on conventions that were described above apply to models that you read. The file must con-
form to the NASPAT/PATNAS conventions.

8.9.3 Post-processing MSC.Patran Output

FEMAP can read the MSC.Patran Displacement (.DIS), Element Results (.ELS), and Nodal Results (.NOD) files.
These files could have come from any analysis program, but if you plan to display the results, you must read them
into an equivalent FEMAP model.
To begin reading files, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command and select PATRAN format. You will be
asked whether you want to read each type of file. If you answer Yes, you will see the file access dialog box and you
can choose the file that you want to read. Answer No to skip that file and proceed to the next type. Since
MSC.Patran writes each output case to a separate file, FEMAP gives you the chance to read additional files after
you have read (or skipped) the initial group.
Working with Output From MSC.Patran
Unlike output from other programs, the type of nodal and elemental results in each field of the MSC.Patran neutral
file are not defined. Just like the conventions in the model files, the order of output in the file depends on the trans-
lator that you used to create it. For this reason, FEMAP simply loads the nodal and elemental output into vectors
that are labelled with the MSC.Patran vector numbers. Refer to your MSC.Patran documentation for a description
of the data in each vector. You can use the FEMAP Model, Output, Vector command to modify the titles after the
output has been read.
Since FEMAP does not know what data is contained in the individual vectors, no additional calculations of princi-
pal, Max Shear, or Von Mises stress are done when you read MSC.Patran output. Displacement magnitudes are cal-
culated since displacement components are specifically defined in the “.DIS” file.
 8-194 Analysis Program Interfaces

8.10 Vendor-Supported Interfaces

All configurations of FEMAP include a set of interfaces that are developed and supported by analysis software
vendors. This topic briefly describes these interfaces and the general process for using them. For details on working
with these analysis programs, see the vendor’s user documentation.

8.10.1 Analysis Software Descriptions

The table lists the vendor-supported analysis software interfaces:

Analysis Software FEMAP FEMAP

Interface Notes
Vendor Writes: Reads:
CAEFEM Concurrent Analysis Corp. FEMAP neutral • CAEFEM results (read
www.caefem.com file automatically if CAEFEM
is launched from FEMAP)
• FEMAP neutral file (if
CAEFEM is run externally)
NEi Nastran Noran Engineering, Inc. FEMAP neutral FEMAP neutral file For more informa-
www.nenastran.com file FEMAP neutral output file tion on the FEMAP
(FNO) interface, see Section
NEi Nastran input files 8.8.1.30, "Multi-Step
Nonlinear Kinematic
Analysis (Simcenter
Nastran Only)".
SINDA/G MSC Software FEMAP neutral FEMAP neutral file
www.mscsoftware.com/ file
Products/CAE-Tools/
Sinda.aspx

8.10.2 Using the Interfaces

This topic describes the general process for using the interfaces in the previous section. Once you create the
FEMAP model, you:
• write the FEMAP data to a FEMAP neutral file
• launch the analysis software (either from FEMAP or externally)
• restart FEMAP and read in the neutral file containing the analysis results
8.10.2.1 Writing Data from FEMAP to the Analysis Software
Use the File, Export, Analysis Model command to write a neutral file to the analysis software. On the Export To
dialog box, pick the interface, then type of analysis, such as static.
The vendor-supported analysis types listed are:
• CAEFEM
• Nastran. Pick NEi/Nastran.
• SINDA/G. On the SINDA/G Write Options dialog box, choose options to define the case control file.
8.10.2.2 Running the Analysis
Generally, you must exit FEMAP to run the analysis software. In some cases, however, you also have the option of
launching the analysis software directly from FEMAP:
• CAEFEM runs as a 32-bit Windows Application. Since it is a true Windows program, you do not have to leave
the Windows environment to perform an analysis. You can launch CAEFEM directly from FEMAP.

8.10.3 Reading Analysis Results into FEMAP

If you launch the analysis software from FEMAP, the results will be recovered automatically. If you run the analy-
sis software separately from FEMAP, however, you must restore or restart FEMAP before you can import the neu-
tral file containing analysis results.
 Comma-Separated Tables 8-195

The way that you write the analysis results in the analysis software determines how you will import the data into
FEMAP for post processing. FEMAP requires that the model information be present before you can import the
analysis results.
• If you wrote the analysis results into a new file, you will have to load the original model file (File, Open) or
open a new FEMAP model file and read in the neutral file that was exported to the analysis software (File,
Import, Analysis Model). Once you have the model, you can import the analysis results (File, Import, Analysis
Results).
• If you appended the results to the original input file, you can load the model and the results at one time by read-
ing this neutral file (File, Import, Analysis Results).

8.11 Comma-Separated Tables

FEMAP contains two translators which allow you to read and write output in a tabular format. This format is easily
exchanged between FEMAP and various spreadsheet and database programs, and also provides a simple and fast
way to load output into FEMAP from your own programs.

8.11.1 Writing a Comma-Separated Table File

To create a comma-separated table, choose the File, Export, Analysis Model command, press the Other Interfaces
button, select the Comma-Separated option in the Analysis Format section, then press OK. You will see the stan-
dard file access dialog box where you can choose the name of the file to create. The default extension is always
“.CSV”. Once you press Save, you will then see the Write Comma-Separated Results dialog box, which contains
the following options:

Format
These options control how the selected output is formatted.
When using Enhanced Multi-Table, the output will be exported using the extended comma-separated table format.
This format is much more powerful and robust than the Single Table format and should be the format used if you
want to output results from multiple output sets and/or plan to import or attach to the results in the CSV file. For
more information on this format, see Section 8.11.4, "The Extended Comma-Separated Table Format".
When using Single Table, all output will be written to a single CSV table. For more information on this format, see-
Section 8.11.3, "The Comma-Separated Table Format"

Note: The Single Table format is not optimal, as only nodal or elemental output can be written to a single
CSV using this format, not both at the same time. Also, if you are exporting output from multiple out-
put sets, all output will be placed into a single output set if later imported into FEMAP. In addition, you
cannot attach to a CSV results file which uses this format.

The Single Table format offers several options. If you choose First Row Contains Titles, the output vector titles are
written at the beginning of the file; otherwise, no titles are given. If you choose First Column Contains IDs, the
node and element IDs will be written along with the output data. It is usually best to write these IDs so you can
relate the output back to the associated nodes or elements. If you choose Include Rows with No Results, it simply
writes out empty rows.
 8-196 Analysis Program Interfaces

For both formats, you can also specify the number of significant digits that will be included in the output. While
you can increase this number from the default, the data can only be as meaningful as the original data that you
loaded into FEMAP. If you originally read output with only 6 significant digits, you can specify a larger number,
but any additional digits are meaningless.
Regardless of the selected Format, you will then prompted to select a combination of desired Output Sets and Out-
put Vectors to write to the CSV file using the Select Results dialog box after clicking OK in the Write Comma-Sep-
arated Results dialog box. For more information on using the Select Results dialog box, see Section 8.6.0.1, "Using
the Select Output Sets and Select Results dialog boxes" of the FEMAP Commands manual.
Finally, the standard entity selection dialog box will be displayed to allow you to select the nodes and/or elements
where output will be written. When using Single Table, you can only select nodes or elements, not both.

8.11.2 Reading or attaching to a Comma-Separated File

To read a comma-separated table, choose the File, Import, Analysis Results command and select the Comma-Sepa-
rated format. You will see the standard file access dialog box, where you can choose the name of the file to read. As
before, the default extension is always “.CSV”. If reading a CSV file in the format described in Section 8.11.3,
"The Comma-Separated Table Format", you will then see the Read Comma-Separated Table dialog box which is
described in detail later in this section. If you are reading or attaching to a CSV file in the format described in Sec-
tion 8.11.4, "The Extended Comma-Separated Table Format" (must be in this format to attach), the Read Comma-
Separated Table dialog box will not appear, as all of the required information is specified within the file.

Read Comma-Separated Table dialog box

Format
If the first row of your file contains vector titles, you must select the First Row Contains Titles option. The titles
will be read from the file and added to the vectors that are created. If the file does not have titles, default titles will
be assigned to each new vector.
If the first column of your file contains node or element IDs, you must select the First Column Contains IDs option.
The IDs will be read from the file and used to properly load the output data. If your file does not contain IDs,
FEMAP will load the output data as if it matched the nodes/elements in your model (i.e. the first output value will
be associated with the first node/element, the second with the second, and so on). You may not have any missing
output values, and they must be in order.
If your file contains both IDs and titles, there must be an extra title (or simply a blank field, specified by a leading
comma), for the ID column. The second title will be associated with the first output vector.
Output Type
These options specify whether the data in the file is nodal or elemental data. Since this file format is basically just a
table of numbers, there is no way for FEMAP to determine what type of data you are loading. You must specify the
correct option here.
 The Comma-Separated Table Format 8-197

Set and Vector Options

You can either read the output into a new output set, by choosing Create New Set, or add it to the active set, by
choosing Add to Active Set. This second option will not be available if you do not have an active set. You must also
specify the ID of the first vector to be created (Default is 24000000). Any additional vectors will be created with
IDs greater than this number. The default will be the first available user-defined vector.
If the file that you are reading contains 3 vectors that are the global X, Y and Z components of some output, or 6
vectors that are the global X, Y and Z components, and the associated X, Y, Z rotations of some output, you should
choose the Vectors are XYZ Components option. When this option is checked FEMAP will automatically calculate
a 4th (or 7th and 8th) vector which is the magnitude of the component data. In addition, FEMAP will make the
appropriate modifications to the vectors so that you can choose the magnitude vector and use it for displaying
three-dimensional deformations and animations. If you have component data, you should always load it in this
manner. Do not calculate the magnitude yourself and include it in the file. The vectors will still not be setup prop-
erly to do the deformation.

8.11.3 The Comma-Separated Table Format

The comma-separated table format that is supported by FEMAP is very simple. The following sample shows the
basic capability, including titles and ID numbers, for a file with three output vectors:
, "title 1", "title 2", "title 3"
1, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
2, 2.2, 3.1, 4.0
5, 1.4E2, 2.3E2, 0.111
10, , , 0.5

This file contains output for four entities (1, 2, 5 and 10). They could be either nodes or elements. There is no way
to tell from the file. Note that since IDs are contained in the first column, the first record which contains the titles
starts with a comma to skip the title for the IDs. You could also specify a title for the IDs, but it will be ignored.
The titles in the first record are text and must be less than 25 characters long each. Typically you should enclose
them in quotes, as shown, but this is not required as long as no commas are contained in the title. If you specify any
titles in the file, you must specify a title for all vectors.
Output data is specified in the remaining records. Each record corresponds to a node or element, and contains one
output field for each vector that will be created. You can skip intermediate fields just by entering a series of com-
mas (like entity 10 above, where the 0.5 is for the third vector). All skipped data will have the value of 0.0. If you
do not specify titles in the file, the first record must contain output for all vectors. Later records can omit data for
trailing output vectors if you want the values to be 0.0. The numeric values can be in floating point or exponential
format. You can enclose the output values in quotes, if you want, but they are not required.
If you do not include the ID column, data for all nodes/elements must be present, and must be in numerical order
corresponding to the entities in your FEMAP model. If IDs are not present, the first title will correspond to the first
output vector (the leading comma should not be present).

8.11.4 The Extended Comma-Separated Table Format

The extended comma-separated table format that is supported by FEMAP is a little more complex than the original
comma-separated format, but offers much more control and flexibility. The data is separated into blocks containing
different “Table Types”, each of which is described in detail below. Repeat blocks in the CSV file for as many
tables as you need.

Note: To attach to output using a CSV files, the files MUST use the extended comma-separated table format.
See Section 2.3.2, "File, Attach to Results" in Commands for more information on attaching to results.

The general format of the Extend CSV Format Blocks:

Table Type
Result Type Info (Not in Table Type 100, 0=Any, 1=Displacement, 2=Velocity/Acceleration, 3=Force, 4=Stress,
5=Strain, 6=Thermal
Set/Vector ID(s) (0 for Auto)
Title(s)
 8-198 Analysis Program Interfaces

...
multiple rows of table data, format depends on table type
...
-1 (delimiter indicating CSV Block is finished)
Available Table Types:

100 - Output Set 100

0 (or Output Set ID)
Set Title
Set Value
-1
___________________________________________________________________

NOTE: If this file is read into FEMAP, the Output Set ID is ignored - a new Output
Set will be created for each Table 100 encountered. All other tables that come after
this are added to that Output Set, until another Table 100 is found. All tables except
this one can come in any order, or have as many occurrences as you need.
200 - Nodal Scalar(s) 200
Result Type (0 for Any)
Column1 Vector ID (, Column2 Vector ID, … ) (0 for Automatic IDs)
Column1 Title (, Column2 Title, ….)
Node ID, Value (, Value, …)
…
Node ID, Value (, Value, …)
-1
__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: While multiple columns are possible in this format, for best performance
when using this file as an external attached file, only 1 column should be used.
300 - Elemental Scalar(s) 300
Result Type (0 for Any)
Column1 Vector ID (, Column2 Vector ID, … ) (0 for Automatic IDs)
Column1 Title (, Column2 Title, ….)
Element ID, Value (, Value, …)
…
Element ID, Value (, Value, …)
-1
__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: While multiple columns are possible in this format, for best performance
when using this file as an external attached file, only 1 column should be used.
400 - Nodal Vector 400
(Global Rectangular) Result Type (0 for Any)
Total Vector ID, X Vector ID, Y Vector ID, Z Vector ID (0 for Auto)
Total Title, X Title, Y Title, Z Title
Node ID, X Value, Y Value, Z Value
…
Node ID, X Value, Y Value, Z Value
-1
__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: Although you specify a vector ID and title for the "total" values, you do not
actually include those in the data. FEMAP will automatically compute the vector
sum of the components and store that as the total.
 The Extended Comma-Separated Table Format 8-199

401 - Nodal Vector with 401

Rotations Result Type (0 for Any)
(Global Rectangular) Total ID, X ID, Y ID, Z ID, TotalR ID, XR ID, YR ID, ZR ID (0 for Auto)
Total Title, X Title, Y Title, Z Title, TotalR Title, XR Title, YR Title, ZR Title
Node ID, X Value, Y Value, Z Value, XR Value, YR Value, ZR Value
…
Node ID, X Value, Y Value, Z Value, XR Value, YR Value, ZR Value
-1
__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: Although you specify vector IDs and titles for the "total" values, you do not
actually include those in the data. FEMAP will automatically compute the vector
sum of the components and store those as the totals.
500 - Elemental With 500
Corner Data Result Type (0 for Any)
Centroid Vector ID, Corner1 VecID, …,CornerN VecID (0 for Auto)
Centroid Title, Corner1Title, …CornerN Title
Element ID, Centroid Value, Corner1 Value, …, CornerN Value
…
Element ID, Centroid Value, Corner1 Value, …, CornerN Value
-1
__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: Care must be taken with this format if you are writing data for Tetra or
Wedge elements. For Tetra elements, corners must be 1,2,3 and 5. For wedge ele-
ments, corners must be 1,2,3,5,6,7. In both cases corner 4 is skipped.

If the table contains purely Tetra or Wedge results, specify the Corner 4 VecID = -1,
skip the Corner 4 Title and the Corner 4 Values with ,, … like…

500
9000000,9000001,9000002,9000003,-1,9000004
“Center Stress”, “Stress C1”, “Stress C2”, “Stress C3”,,”Stress C5”
1, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0,,5.0
…
501 - Elemental This table has the same format as 500 however, if read into FEMAP, the data will be
With Corner Data skipped during linear combinations.
(not linearly combinable)
502 - Elemental Beam/Bar 502
Data Result Type (0 for Any) , OptionalRevFlag (0 for Auto)
End A Vector ID, End B Vector ID
End A Title, End BTitle
ElementI D, End A Value, End B Value
…
Element ID, End A Value, End B Value
-1
__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: The OptionalRevFlag does not need to be specified. If not, the sign conven-
tion assumes that End B Values need to be reversed in sign for consistent display. If
they should not be, specify OptionalRevFlag=1
503 - Elemental Beam/Bar This table has the same format as 502 however, if read into FEMAP, the data will be
Data skipped during linear combinations.
(not linearly combinable)
8-200 Analysis Program Interfaces
9. Geometry Interfaces

FEMAP also contains interfaces to many CAD packages through different geometry formats. These formats
include ACIS solid model file format (*.SAT File), Parasolid solid model format (*.X_T File), STEP, IGES, VDA,
Stereolithography, DXF, VRML and numerous CAD native formats. Each of these formats is discussed in more
detail below. Some of these interfaces are available in all versions of FEMAP; others are limited to specific ver-
sions. If you have not purchased one of the interfaces, you will be presented with a warning message to let you
know that format is not available.
Geometry Format Interfaces
The following table lists the current geometry format interfaces and supported versions.

Geometry Related CAD Latest

Section FEMAP Interfaces
Format Software Supported Version
ACIS Section 9.1.1, "Reading AutoCAD Read ACIS geometry into FEMAP
ACIS 2019 1.0.1
ACIS (SAT) Files" and convert it to Parasolid geometry
Section 9.1.2, "Writing Write FEMAP model as ACIS .SAT
ACIS 2019 1.0.1
ACIS (SAT) Files" solid model file
Parasolid Section 9.2, "Parasolid Solid Edge Write FEMAP as Parasolid .X_T files Parasolid 32.1
Interfaces (*.X_T For- NX
mat)" Unigraphics Read Parasolid geometry .X_T files
CADKEY into FEMAP
IronCAD
Microstation
MSC.Marc
MSC.Patran
Pro/Desktop
SolidWorks
Section 9.2, "Parasolid Read Parasolid geometry into Parasolid 32.1
Interfaces (*.X_T For- FEMAP and convert it to ACIS
mat)" geometry
STEP Section 9.3, "STEP CATIA Write Parasolid data from FEMAP to AP 203
Interface (*.STP files)" I-DEAS STEP file (1994 - Edition 1,)
Pro/Engineer AP203 Edition 2,
AP 214
(Geometry Only)
AP 242 (Minimal)
Section 9.3, "STEP CATIA Read STEP file into FEMAP, and AP 203
Interface (*.STP files)" I-DEAS convert to Parasolid geometry (1994 - Edition 1,)
Pro/Engineer AP203 Edition 2,
AP 214
(Geometry Only)
AP 242 (Minimal)
IGES Section 9.4, "IGES File CATIA Write FEMAP data as IGES files IGES 4.0-5.3
Format" I-DEAS
Pro/Engineer
Section 9.4, "IGES File Read IGES data into FEMAP (types IGES 4.0-5.3
Format" of entities that can be read vary with
FEMAP configuration - see the
FEMAP User Guide for details)
 9-2 Geometry Interfaces

Geometry Related CAD Latest

Section FEMAP Interfaces
Format Software Supported Version
JT Section 9.5, "JT Inter- NX Read JT geometry into FEMAP and
face" Solid Edge convert it to Parasolid geometry
I-DEAS
CREO 10.6
CATIA
Autodesk
Inventor
Section 9.5, "JT Inter- Write FEMAP model as JT solid
10.6
face" model file
DXF Section 9.6, "DXF Inter- AutoCAD Read DXF file into FEMAP -
faces"
CAD Software Interfaces
The following table lists the current CAD software interfaces and supported versions.

Latest
CAD Software Section FEMAP Interfaces
Supported Version
CATIA V4 Section 9.7, "CATIA Read CATIA files into FEMAP CATIA 4.1.9 to 4.2.4
Interface"
CATIA V5 Section 9.7, "CATIA Read CATIA V5 files support is available CATIA V5 R8 - V5-6
Interface" with an add-in module directly in FEMAP. R2019 SP4
Pro/Engineer Section 9.8, "Pro/ Read Pro/Engineer .PRT (single part) and Pro/Engineer 16 -
ENGINEER Interface" .ASM (assembly) files into FEMAP Creo 6
Solid Edge Section 9.9, "Solid Read Solid Edge .PAR (single part), .PSM Solid Edge 2020
Edge Interface" (sheet metal part), .PWD (legacy weldment),
and .ASM (assembly) files into FEMAP
NX Section 9.10, "NX Read NX and Unigraphics data into FEMAP NX 1-NX (version
Interface" 1899)
(for 32-bit, 8.5)
SolidWorks Section 9.11, "Solid- Read SolidWorks .SLDPRT (part) and SolidWorks 2010 -
Works Interface" .SLDASM (assembly) files into FEMAP 2020

File Formats
The following table lists the current file format interfaces and supported versions.

Latest
File Format Section FEMAP Interfaces Supported
Version
Stereolithography Section 9.12, "Stereolithography Write FEMAP data to stereolithography -
Interface" (.STL) files

Read stereolithography files into FEMAP

 ACIS Interfaces (*.SAT Format) 9-3

9.1 ACIS Interfaces (*.SAT Format)

FEMAP can import and export ACIS solid model geometry via the ACIS *.SAT file format. Many popular CAD
packages such as AutoCAD are currently ACIS-based. By reading the ACIS solid model File, FEMAP provides a
simple method to import solid geometry from these popular CAD packages. Since FEMAP does not incorporate
the ACIS solid modeling kernel, it is necessary to convert models that are in this format to Parasolid geometry. This
conversion happens automatically upon import and export and is very robust.

9.1.1 Reading ACIS (SAT) Files

Reading an ACIS File is very straightforward. Simply select the File, Import, Geometry command, and choose the
appropriate file from the Windows Open File dialog box. After opening the file, you will see the Solid Model Read
Options dialog box.

This dialog box contains three main sections: Title, Entity Options, and Assembly Options.
Title
FEMAP will read the Title of the solid model file from the SAT file, and display it. You can choose to keep this as
the title of the solid, or input a new title.
Entity Options
These options affect the individual entities in the model.
Geometry Scale Factor
You can use the Geometry Scale Factor to change the units of the model. This can be extremely useful with some
geometry packages that default to a standard for output units (such as meters) even though you may have used
other units to model the part.
Layer
You can define the layer of the solid model.
Sew Sheets into Manifold Solids
This option controls if sheets (surfaces) should be stitched into manifold solids. If this option is on, then the sur-
faces will only be “sewn” together into manifold solids. It will only create “manifold solids”, as ACIS does not
support “NonManifold Solids” (i.e., General Bodies) like Parasolid. If off, no “sewing” will occur.
 9-4 Geometry Interfaces

You can also specify a number of conversion options by pressing the Options button, which displays the Geometry
Conversion Options dialog box:

• The Conversion Scale Factor sets a scale factor that is applied to the part during conversion. Depending upon
your part size, it might be necessary to modify this value to make sure that the part fits inside the Parasolid
modeling box (+/- 500 units), or to achieve a consistent size, with other geometry. Unlike the geometry scale
factor that is normally applied, this factor actually changes the dimensions of the underlying geometry (the
other is simply a factor used for presenting the dimensions to you).
• Cleanup Input Model can be used to detect and attempt to cleanup sliver faces, or other problem geometry
during the conversion.
• Heal Converted Model attempts to close gaps and correct geometric inaccuracies if it is turned on.
• Check Converted Model will run Parasolid geometry checking on the converted model to attempt to find and
report any remaining problems. If you also turn on Full Checking, checks are also made for any surface discon-
tinuities or irregularities. These checks take longer and may not be necessary, so this option is off by default.
• Delete Invalid Geometry will delete the converted geometry if it does not pass the checking options.
• Output Faces if no Solid will produce unstitched, free faces even if it is not possible to do a full conversion of
the original solid. This allows you to get partial conversion.
Color
You can choose to use the Colors From File, Active Colors, or Single Color. When Colors From File is used,
FEMAP will use color data found in the geometry file and match it as closely as possible to a color in FEMAP.
Active Colors will use the default colors in FEMAP for geometry, while Single Color allows you to choose a color
from the Palette.
Assembly Options
FEMAP also has the capability to read ACIS Assembly files and converts them to Parasolid as well. You can
choose to have each solid from the assembly on a different layer, as well as a different color.
Once you select OK, FEMAP will open the ACIS-to-Parasolid converter and read the file. No other action is
required.

9.1.2 Writing ACIS (SAT) Files

FEMAP can also export an ACIS solid model file. Select the File, Export, Geometry command, and you will see
the Translate dialog box below.
Choose ACIS SAT file and the appropriate version (ACIS 7.0 and above). You should always use the latest version
of ACIS unless you plan to import the file to a CAD package that only supports an earlier version of ACIS. You
will then be prompted for the solids to export and the file name.
 Parasolid Interfaces (*.X_T Format) 9-5

9.2 Parasolid Interfaces (*.X_T Format)

FEMAP can import and export Parasolid solid model geometry via the Parasolid transmit file (*.X_T) format.
Many popular CAD packages such as Solid Edge, SolidWorks and Unigraphics are Parasolid-based. By reading the
Parasolid solid model file, FEMAP provides a simple method to import solid geometry from these popular CAD
packages. Since FEMAP also incorporates the Parasolid solid modeling kernel, they are read by the same modeling
software that originally created them. This makes reading and writing X_T files very robust.

9.2.1 Reading Parasolid (X_T) Files

Reading a Parasolid file is identical to reading an ACIS file, except you must choose the Parasolid Transmit (X_T)
file. For information on the options available, see Section 9.1.1, "Reading ACIS (SAT) Files".

The Update Existing Geometry option is described below.

9-6 Geometry Interfaces

Update Existing Geometry

This option lets you import an updated version of the Parasolid model. For example, if you changed a dimension,
FEMAP will automatically update the following entities to match the new geometry:
• colors and layers
• settings for Mesh, Mesh Control, Approach on Surface
• settings for Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes
• settings for Mesh, Mesh Control, Mesh Points on Surface
• settings for Mesh, Mesh Control, Custom Size Along Curve
• geometric constraints and loads
• connections (surface-based Connection Regions and Connectors)
• boundary surfaces that use updated surfaces or curves
• groups
The mesh itself will not automatically be updated.

Note: FEMAP uses Point, Curve, and Surface IDs to retain FEMAP specific information (mesh sizing,
approaches on surfaces, colors, geometric based loads and boundary conditions, etc.) when a modified
solid is imported into FEMAP using the Update Active Solid option. Most topological changes to the
geometry (fillets, chamfers, thru holes, bosses, notches, etc.) will likely alter some the IDs in the geom-
etry. Once these IDs have been changed, FEMAP is NOT able to “map” the information onto any entity
with an altered ID. Be sure to thoroughly examine the model before analysis in order to assure accuracy.
In some cases, the information on a certain entity will be completely lost and must be re-applied.

For example, an existing model has a geometry-based load on surface 10 in FEMAP. In another Paraso-
lid-based CAD tool, a fillet is placed along the edge of the loaded surface and another surface. The fillet
changes the overall shape and size of the surface and alters the ID to 20. When the modified geometry is
imported into FEMAP, surface 10 does not exist in the new geometry and FEMAP will not be able to
re-apply the geometry-based load to surface 10 and will not make any attempt to “map” the load which
was on surface 10 to surface 20.

Geometry Replacement Options

Pick the Options button to set options on the Geometry Replacement Options dialog box. These include Mesh Siz-
ing and Update Options.
There are three options for Mesh Sizing:
 Writing Parasolid (X_T) Files 9-7

• Match Existing Geometry - keep the mesh sizing the same as that on the original geometry. If there are eight
elements on an original curve, there will be eight elements on the updated curve.
• Resize Curves with Length Changes - resizing will occur when the ratio between new and old geometry exceeds
the tolerance that you enter. The value that you enter is always greater than 1.0, but it applies to curves that
lengthen or shorten.
• Resize All
Under Update Options, by default the software will Delete Original Geometry and Mesh.
You can also choose to have FEMAP Update using Parasolid Identifiers or use the “Solid Edge” method. The
“Solid Edge” method is on by default and will improve efficiency and accuracy when bringing in Parasolid geome-
try from Solid Edge and should have no effect on Parasolid geometry coming from any other CAD package.
If there is an issue using the Solid Edge method, turn Update using Parasolid Identifiers option on. Update Mate-
rial Data will change the material which was automatically created in FEMAP when the model was originally read
in from Solid Edge.

9.2.2 Writing Parasolid (X_T) Files

FEMAP can also export a Parasolid solid model file via the X_T (Transmit) format. Simply select the File, Export,
Geometry command, select Parasolid XMT file, and the appropriate version. You should always use the latest ver-
sion of Parasolid unless you plan to import the file to a CAD package which only supports an earlier version. You
will then be prompted for the solids to export and the file name.
 9-8 Geometry Interfaces

9.3 STEP Interface (*.STP files)

STEP, the Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data, is a comprehensive ISO standard (ISO 10303) that
describes representation and exchange of product information. Product data must contain enough information to
cover a product's entire life cycle, from design to analysis, manufacture, quality control testing, inspection and
product support functions. In order to do this, STEP covers geometry, topology, tolerances, relationships, attributes,
assemblies, configuration and more.
The FEMAP STEP interfaces currently focus on geometry and topology transfer. They can import and export
STEP AP203 Solid Entities and STEP AP214 Class II, III, IV, V, and VI entities. This provides a convenient
method of interfacing with CAD packages that are not ACIS or Parasolid based.

9.3.1 Reading STEP (*.STP) Files

Reading a STEP file is procedurally identical to reading an ACIS or Parasolid file, except you must choose a STEP
(*.STP) file. For more information on the options available, see Section 9.1.1, "Reading ACIS (SAT) Files".
FEMAP automatically creates Parasolid geometry from the data in the STEP file.

Read Options are available to control how the translations of specific STEP entities are controlled.
Options include (all options on by default unless otherwise noted):
• Bodies - when on, imports manifold solid B-Rep entities
• Faceted Bodies - when on, imports faceted B-Rep solid entities (i.e.,often found in a JT file)
• Surfaces - when on, imports shell-based surfaces and surfaces without topology
• Curves - when on, imports wireframe curves
• Points - when on, imports wireframe points
• Optimize Bodies - when on, attempts to heal edges, remove redundant topology, and share geometry
• Simplify Geometry - when on, attempts to recover the analytic definitions for the B-spline geometry in the part
(Off by default)

9.3.2 Writing STEP (*.STP) Files

FEMAP can also export a STEP file. The STEP file translator converts a Parasolid solid into a STEP format. Select
the File, Export, Geometry command, select STEP in the Format section, then select the version of STEP to use
from AP204, AP203 Edition 2, or AP214. You will then be prompted for the solids to export and the file name.

Note: The STEP option, which converts between a Parasolid solid to a STEP format, is only available when
Geometry Engine is set to “1..Parasolid” on the Geometry/Model tab in the Preferences dialog box.
 IGES File Format 9-9

9.4 IGES File Format

IGES stands for Initial Graphics Exchange Specifications. IGES is a neutral file format defined by ANSI for
exchange of CAD data across heterogeneous systems. IGES has been a very popular way of exchanging data and
many systems provide interfaces to exchange information through this format. The IGES file supports representa-
tion of 3D geometry and topology information. It also allows representation of drawing information, symbols
views etc. IGES files do not support representation of assembly and features information of models.
The IGES standard version 4.0 does not support representation of solids. So solids are represented as trimmed sur-
faces in IGES files produced having compliance to standard 4.0. But, later IGES standards (version 5.2 onwards)
are enhanced to represent solid information (called MSBO-Manifold Solid B-Rep Object).
IGES Files with no “Start Section” may be imported as well.

9.4.1 Reading IGES Files...

FEMAP actually contains several levels of IGES read interfaces with capabilities that are appropriate to the other
geometry capabilities of the version of FEMAP that you are using.
FEMAP IGES Readers
Standard Alternate
IGES Entity Type
Interface Interface
100 - Circular Arc X X
102 - Composite Curve X X
108 - Bounded Plane X X
110 - Line X X
112 - Parametric Spline Curve X X
116 - Point X X
118 - Ruled Surface X X
120 - Surface of Revolution X X
122 - Tabulated Cylinder X X
124 - Transformation X X
126 - Rational B-Spline Curve X X
128 - Rational B-Spline Surface X X
104 - Conic Arc X X
142 - Curve on Parametric Surface X X
144 - Trimmed Surface X X
106 - Copious Data X
114 - Parametric Spline Surface X
123 - Direction X
130 - Offset Curve X
140 - Offset Surface X
141 - Bounded Entity X
143 - Bounded Surface X
186 - MSBO (Solid) X
190 - Plane Surface X
192 - Right Circular Cylinder X
194 - Right Circular Conical Surface X
196 - Spherical Surface X
198 - Toroidal Surface X
308 - Subfigure Definition Entity X
402 - Associative Instance Entity X
408 - Subfigure Instance Entity X
502 - Vertex List X
504 - Edge List X
508 - Loop X
510 - Face X
514 - Shell X
 9-10 Geometry Interfaces

Although the Parasolid option is the preferred method of importing complex solid and surface geometry into
FEMAP, the FEMAP IGES interfaces provide a robust capability to import complex geometry from non-Parasolid
based CAD packages.
FEMAP can read simple IGES curves and surfaces, as well as trimmed surface or solid data. In general, when
working with solid models from CAD systems, or complex surfaces models, one of these systems will be required.
In these cases, the geometry will be loaded into the Parasolid geometry engine.
Standard IGES Interface
To read an IGES file, select the File, Import, Geometry command and choose the appropriate file. You will then
see the IGES Read Options dialog box. The Standard IGES translator will read in all of the entity types listed in the
table at the beginning of this section.
When you are using the IGES translator, you will see the Alternate button at the bottom of the dialog box. If you
press Alternate, you will only have access to the entities at the Alternate interface level listed above. Note that these
are two distinct interfaces - if you are having trouble with one of them, it can still be worthwhile trying the other.
The IGES Read Options dialog box is partitioned into three major sections:

Entity Options
The options available to you in the IGES interface include the ability to read or skip free points, free curves,
trimmed or untrimmed free surfaces and solids. If you are having trouble reading solid data, you should try turning
off solids, and reading just the trimmed surfaces.
Surface Options
You have the ability here to control which trimming curves to read - default, 2D or 3D. In some cases, taking the
default will not work, because the curves written to the file will be incorrect, even though the writing system spec-
ified them as the default. In this case, explicitly picking the other type of trimming curves will probably work bet-
ter.
Customization
Finally, if you are trying to read an IGES file from some older versions of AutoCAD, you should specify the Auto-
CAD customization. In particular, this option corrects several problems that exist in solids written by AutoCAD
Release 13.
 Reading IGES Files... 9-11

Alternate IGES Interface

The Alternate IGES Read Options dialog box is also broken into three sections:

Entity Options
These options allow you to read (or omit) colors and layers from the IGES file. If you do not read the color and
layer information from the IGES file, FEMAP will assign default values to each entity.
You may also select the Read Geometry Only option to simplify the model. This can be a convenient method of
removing much of the construction lines and other non-geometry information that may interfere with the viewing
of the model.
Surface Options
These options provide control over reading of surfaces. In general you will want to read surfaces and choose
Default Trim Curves. If FEMAP is encountering problems with the trimming, you may want to choose 2-D Trim
Curves or 3-D Trim Curves. Each trimmed surface in the IGES file has both 2-D (curves in surface space) and 3-D
(curves in 3-D space) trimming curves, as well as a suggestion on which curve to use. If you select Default Trim
Curves, FEMAP will use those suggested by the IGES file. The other options will use all 2-D Surface or 3-D space
curves for trimming. The Trim Curves section is grayed if you choose not to read surfaces.
The Internal Scale Factor is used to reduce the size of the part in the FEMAP database. The internal engine of
Parasolid requires all positions be in a box of +/- 500. If you have entities outside of this box, Parasolid cannot per-
form operations on them. By using an internal scale factor, you can have FEMAP scale the part internally to pre-
vent the part from extending beyond this box. You will not see changes in the dimensions of the part since FEMAP
will do all scaling internally. This option allows the input of very large dimensions for the model, without exceed-
ing the limits of the Parasolid geometry engine.

Hint: If FEMAP cannot trim some of your surfaces, it may be advantageous to read the IGES file a second
time, selecting Read Geometry Only and deselecting Read Surfaces. FEMAP will import the original
curves, and you can then use these curves in FEMAP to modify (or trim) the surfaces which were not
trimmed in the importing process.

Processing Options
When Merge Coincident Points is on, FEMAP will eliminate points that are within the Geometric Tolerance from
each other after the model has been translated. If you leave this option off, you can still merge the points later with
the Tools, Check, Coincident Points command. The default minimum distance is loaded from the IGES file that
you are reading, but you may modify this value.
 9-12 Geometry Interfaces

9.4.2 Writing IGES Files...

When you are using the IGES translator, you will see an IGES option when you choose File, Export, Geometry.
When you select that option, you will also see an Options button. Normally, to write an IGES file, you will not need
to change any of these options unless you want to customize how the data will be written.

Only Parasolid geometry can be written using the IGES interface. You can export the geometry as solids, trimmed
surfaces or wireframe data. The option that you choose will depend on the system where you will be reading the
IGES file. Options to export non-solid geometry such as free points and/or curves are also available.
If your system does not support solid data, switch the Export As option to trimmed surfaces for best results. Simi-
larly for trimming curves, if you want to use either 2-D or 3-D curves exclusively, pick one of those surface options
- otherwise both will be written. If you want to write all curves or surfaces as splines (not lines, arcs, circles...) then
check one or both of those surface options. Finally, the Trimmed Surfaces as Bounded Surfaces option controls
which surface entities are created. If this option is off, surfaces will be converted to Type 144 - trimmed surfaces. If
it is on, they will be converted to Type 143 - bounded surfaces.
If you are trying to send data to a particular CAD system, or using a particular standard, you may want to choose
one of the Customization methods for better results. These flavors will tend to override other settings that you make
for the Surface Options and Export As Options.

9.5 JT Interface
JT is a Teamcenter Visualization file, a “lightweight” file often used for visualization and collaboration, which
stores geometry as a faceted representation, as precise geometry and topology (point, curve, surface, face, loop,
edge, vertex) and/or boundary representation (B-Rep). In addition to geometry, other information, such as finite
element data, can also be stored in the file. The geometry portion of the JT file can be written and read by many
CAD Systems, including NX, Solid Edge, I-DEAS, Creo, CATIA, and Autodesk Inventor.
To import a JT file, choose File, Import, Geometry and choose the appropriate filename (has jt extension). To
export, simply use the File, Export, Geometry command.

9.6 DXF Interfaces

FEMAP can also import geometry (points, curves...) from most popular CAD systems via a DXF formatted file.
Although the DXF format originated in AutoCAD, most CAD systems can export data in this format. FEMAP can-
not currently export a DXF file.
Reading the File
Choose the File, Import, Geometry command and select the desired DXF file. You will then see the DXF Read
Options dialog box:
 DXF Interfaces 9-13

The entity options allow you to selectively read, or skip, certain entities that are in the DXF file.
Read Text
If you turn this option on, any text or notes that are in your DXF file will be read and converted to text in your
FEMAP model.
Read 3Dfaces as Elements
3Dfaces are used to represent triangular or quadrilateral polygons. If you turn this option on, FEMAP will read the
faces and convert them to plate elements. If the option is off, FEMAP simply creates the lines that define the edges
of the face.
Read Polygon Meshes as Elements
This is similar to the previous option except it applies to polygon/polyface meshes that are in the file.
Read Blocked Entity References
If your DXF file contains blocked entities, FEMAP will only read them if this option is on. Normally, you will want
to read the entire model so leave this option on. If you want to skip blocked entities however, you can turn this off.
You can then control what will be read by selectively exploding block references before you create the DXF file.
FEMAP cannot read arrays of inserted blocks. In this case you will have to explode at least those references. Simi-
larly, blocks that are inserted with different scale factors in different directions cannot be read. If possible, you can
try exploding them (AutoCAD cannot explode this type of block reference).
Read Trace Boundaries
Traces are lines that have a width defined, and therefore are represented by a rectangular boundary. If you turn this
option on, four lines are created to represent the edges of the trace. If you turn it off, you can still get the centerline
of the trace with the next option.
Create Trace Centerlines
If you turn this option on, lines are created to represent the centerlines of all traces.
Read Colors and Layers
If you want FEMAP to assign colors and layers to the geometry and text that it reads based on the information in
the DXF file, turn this option on. When it is off, colors and layers will be assigned using FEMAP’s defaults. Since
DXF layers can have any name, and FEMAP layers are purely numbers, FEMAP will create a unique number for
 9-14 Geometry Interfaces

each unique layer name. The first layer name will be assigned to the layer number that you choose in the First
Layer Number option.
Merge Coincident Points
When FEMAP reads geometry from your file, each curve will have unique endpoints, even if they are coincident
with the end of another curve. To use the geometry in FEMAP, you will probably want to join curves that have
coincident ends to the same point. If you turn on this option, FEMAP will do this for you. In addition, you can
define the Maximum Distance that points can be apart and still be considered as coincident.
Supported DXF Entities
The following entities are supported by the DXF Read Translator:

Entity Group Codes Description

POINT 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Point
38 Elevation
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
LINE 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Start Point
11,21,31 End Point
38 Thickness
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
Lines are always translated to FEMAP lines. If a thickness is specified, a single DXF line creates 4
FEMAP lines which represent the original “thick” line.
CIRCLE 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Center Point
40 Radius
38 Elevation
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
Circles translate to FEMAP circles. Additional points are created as required to define the FEMAP
circle.
ARC 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Center Point
40 Radius
50 Start Angle
51 End Angle
38 Elevation
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
Arcs translate to FEMAP arcs. Additional points are created as required to define the FEMAP arc.
 DXF Interfaces 9-15

Entity Group Codes Description

TRACE 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Corner Points
11,21,31
12,22,32
13,23,33
38 Elevation
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
Traces are read as FEMAP lines. Options are available to create the outline and/or the centerline of
the trace, as specified by the four corners.
TEXT 1 Text Value
6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Insertion Points
38 Elevation
62 Color
72,73 Horizontal and Vertical Justification
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
Text can be read as FEMAP text entities. It is usually best to skip text however, since font and orien-
tation information cannot be translated.
SOLID 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Corner Points
11,21,31
12,22,32
13,23,33
38 Elevation
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
Solids are read just like 3DFACEs.
3DFACE 6 Linetype
8 Layer
10,20,30 Corner Points
11,21,31
12,22,32
13,23,33
38 Elevation
62 Color
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
3DFACES can either be translated to lines which define the outline of the face, or directly to Plate
elements.
POLYLINE 6 Linetype
8 Layer
38 Elevation
62 Color
70 Polyline Flag
71, 72 Polygon Mesh M and N Vertex Counts
73, 74 Smooth Surface M and N Densities
75 Smooth Surface Type
210,220,230 Extrusion Direction
 9-16 Geometry Interfaces

Entity Group Codes Description

POLYLINE 8 Layer
VERTICES 10,20,30 Point
38 Elevation
62 Color
70 Vertex Flag
71,72,73,74 Vertex Indices for Polyface Mesh
DXF Polylines represent a variety of curve and surface types. FEMAP converts all polylines which
represent curves to a series of line segments (either lines or plot-only elements). FEMAP converts
polygon and polyface meshes into lines or plate elements (depending on your selection for the Read
Polygon Meshes as Elements option). FEMAP does not create spline curves, or surfaces from
polylines.
In addition to the above entities, the LAYER table is read if it is present. This enables FEMAP to translate from the
DXF layer names into FEMAP layer numbers and supports reading the Group Code 8 blocks defined above.
Exploding DXF Blocked Entities
Other than the LAYER table, FEMAP only reads the ENTITIES section of the DXF file. The BLOCKS section is
skipped. If you have blocked data, you should use the EXPLODE command prior to writing the DXF file for
FEMAP. If you read a DXF file, and portions of the geometry are missing, go back to AutoCAD, EXPLODE that
portion of your model, and write a new DXF file. You may have to use EXPLODE several times if you have nested
BLOCKS (if you have a solid model in AutoCAD you will have to use EXPLODE at least twice to obtain the
points and curves). You can also use this process in reverse. If there are portions of your model that you want to
ignore as you translate to FEMAP, simply BLOCK them before you write the DXF file.
DXF Paper Space and Viewports
FEMAP does not support AutoCAD Paper Space, but will read all entities as if they were defined in model space.
If you have “Paper Space” geometry, it will probably be positioned incorrectly relative to your model. In general,
Paper Space geometry should not be included in the DXF file since it is usually not part of the defining model
geometry. Likewise, FEMAP ignores Viewport information since it is trying to transfer the model rather than the
correct “drawing”.

9.7 CATIA Interface

A CATIA model typically contains following categories of data:
• geometry elements (SPACE / DRAW)
• standard / user-defined attributes
• parts/assemblies
• surface and solid history information
• solid feature information
• header information (user comments, dates, name, purpose, etc.)
• model information (version number, unit, scale, tolerance, etc.)
A model file is the native CATIA file format containing basic geometry. It may point to a project file for accessing
some table related to annotation styles, etc. (like the hatch pattern style). The file extension is *.model. The
*.model file may contain either single or multiple solids, with or without a combination of space and/or draw enti-
ties.
 Reading CATIA V4 Files... 9-17

About CATIA Export Files

An export file is a combination of all model file data and all necessary information from project files referenced by
model files. The extension is typically .exp. It can contain single or multiple models and project information
(CATIA setups). The files are created with the CATIA CATEXP utility.
CATIA Entity Supported
SPACE elements
Point Yes
Line Yes
Circle Yes
Ellipse Yes
Parabola Yes
Hyperbola Yes
Polynomial Curve Yes
Bspline Polynomial Curve Yes
NURBS Curve Yes
Composite Curve Yes
Cloud of points No
Plane Yes
Polynomial Surface Yes
Bspline Polynomial Surface Yes
Polyhedral Surface No
NURBS Surface Yes
Edge Yes
Face Yes
Volume Yes
Polyhedral Solid No
Exact Solid Yes
Transformation Yes
Skin Yes
Net Yes
Ditto No
MODEL Information
Unit Yes
Scale Yes
Tolerance Yes
HEADER Information
Version Yes
User Yes
Date Yes

9.7.1 Reading CATIA V4 Files...

To import a CATIA V4 file, choose File, Import, Geometry and choose the appropriate filename. If your file has a
different filename extension than the defaults (.MDL, .MODEL, .EXP or .DLV), drop down the File Type list and
choose CATIA V4 (rather than All Geometry), then specify the complete filename - this will allow FEMAP to rec-
ognize that you are reading a CATIA model.
Use the CATIA Read Options dialog box to define options for reading in the CATIA file.
9-18 Geometry Interfaces

Read Analytical Surface Definition

Set this option to use analytical surface definition for surfaces represented as splines.
Use CATIA Topology
Pick this option to read the CATIA topology. Generally, it is better to leave this option off and read the surfaces in
as individual surfaces. You can then use the Stitch into Solid option to create the solid.
Use 2D Trim Curves/Use 3D Trim Curves
Use these options to specify whether to use 2D (parametric) or 3D trim curves.
Read No Show Entities/Read No Pick Entities/Read Workplanes
These options may be used in any combination to import “No Show Entities”, “No Pick Entities”, and /or “Work-
planes” (as a surface).
Stitch into Solid
Turn on this option to have the Parasolid conversion stitch surfaces together as a solid. If this option is off, the
model will be transferred as a collection of surfaces which can later be stitched in FEMAP.
Heal Geometry
Turn on this option to let the interface repair tolerance and gap problems.
Running the Interface
If you open the CATIA Import window while the interface is running, you will often see many messages being dis-
played. You should not be alarmed by this, it does not necessarily indicate that there are any problems that cannot
be converted.
For example, you may see the message “discontinuous 2D curve”. This indicates that the interface has found some
discontinuity in the CATIA definition that cannot be represented in Parasolid. In many cases, if you see this mes-
sage you will get better results if you convert again using 3D trim curves.
Likewise, you might see messages that say “PK_ERROR_mild”. These normally indicate that some function in the
Parasolid conversion is finding some problems with the geometry, but the geometry can usually be recovered. If
you see, “surface geom check failed”, “surface not created”, “PK_ERROR_serious”, “PK_ERROR_fatal” or a sim-
ilar message, it indicates that a more significant error has occurred on one or more surfaces and that the geometry
 Reading in CATIA V5 Geometry 9-19

may not be completely translated. Even if you do get one or more of these messages, the interface will still attempt
to translate as much geometry as it can.

9.7.2 Reading in CATIA V5 Geometry

To import a CATIA V5 file, choose File, Import, Geometry and choose a file with a .CATP (CATIA Part) exten-
sion.
Use the CATIA V5 Read dialog box to define options for reading in the CATIA V5 file.

Read Options
There are several options available to you in order to get only the portions of the CATIA part that you need read
into FEMAP. Points, Curves, Surfaces, and Bodies are simple on/off toggles for those geometric entity types.
• Optimize Bodies - when on, attempts to heal edges, remove redundant topology, and share geometry
• Simplify Geometry - when on, attempts to recover the analytic definitions for the B-spline geometry in the part
(Off by default)
• Read No Show - when on, No Show entities will be converted to Parasolid (Off by default)
• Read Inactive Layers - when on, entities on Inactive Layers will be converted to Parasolid (Off by default)
• Extended Titles - when on, the “titles” of parts which have a “title” in the geometry file(s) will be appended to
include Part Number (including Embedded Revision), Nomenclature, and Description information (Off by
default). For any part which does not have a “title” in the geometry file(s), a title will be created using Part
Number (including Embedded Revision), Nomenclature, and Description information, regardless of the setting
for Extended Titles.
Assembly Search Path
This functionality allows you to read in an assembly file from CATIA V5 and designate search paths to individual
parts located in different directories. This allows you to have the individual parts associated to an assembly file
located in any number of directories.
You can use the Add... button to specify different directory locations or choose a listed path and remove it with the
Remove button.

Note: Special note about the CATIA V5 translator - This product includes software developed by the Apache
Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
 9-20 Geometry Interfaces

9.8 Pro/ENGINEER Interface

Pro/E model data is stored in .prt files. There are two types of .prt files; uncompressed and compressed files.
The FEMAP Pro/E translator supports reading of solid, surface and wire-frame entities into FEMAP Parasolid
geometry. The interface is completely independent of Pro/E - you do not need a copy of, or a license for Pro/E on
your system to be able to read the part files.
Pro/E .prt files can be output in compressed or uncompressed formats. Currently only uncompressed files can be
supported by this interface. If you normally save your files in compressed format, you will have to change your set-
tings to output an uncompressed file for conversion to FEMAP.
The interface supports all geometric and topological entities available in the Pro/E files. It does not include support
for Assembly and Parametric information present in the Pro/E file. Similarly the attributes are system specific and
hence they will not be supported.
Assembly files (.asm files) can be read into FEMAP. Each part of the assembly will come in as a separate solid in
FEMAP.

Note: In order for an assembly (.asm) file to be read into FEMAP correctly, all of the part (.prt) files which are
referenced in the assembly file MUST be in the same directory as the assembly file.

9.8.1 Reading Pro/E Files...

To import a Pro/E file, select File, Import, Geometry and choose the appropriate filename. Since Unigraphics also
uses the .PRT extension, when you have the File Type set to All Geometry, FEMAP attempts to automatically dis-
tinguish and choose the right interface to read the file that you select. If it cannot determine the type automatically,
it will ask you to choose which interface you want. If you are having problems with this, open the File Type list and
directly choose the Pro/E interface.
There are no additional options to specify for this interface. It simply reads the Pro/E file and loads it into FEMAP.

Note: If you are having trouble importing a model with the direct Pro/E interface, or if it is a problem to pro-
duce an uncompressed model file, try using the IGES interface. The IGES files written by Pro/E work
very well with the IGES interfaces in FEMAP.

9.9 Solid Edge Interface

Importing Solid Edge Files
Solid Edge uses Parasolid as its geometry engine. This interface extracts the existing Parasolid geometry from the
Solid Edge file and loads it, just like loading a native Parasolid (X_T) file. This makes the conversion very robust.
To use the FEMAP Solid Edge interface, select the file that you want, and it will be loaded into FEMAP as Paraso-
lid geometry.
If there is an existing solid, the interface will ask you if you want to update it. If you answer Yes, FEMAP will dis-
play the Geometry Replacement Options dialog box. For more information on this dialog box, see Section 9.2,
"Parasolid Interfaces (*.X_T Format)"
The Solid Edge interface can read part (.PAR), sheet metal (.PSM), legacy weldment (.PWD), and assembly
(.ASM) files. Likewise, it only transfers current geometry. Feature and other attribute information is not supported.

Note: As an alternative to directly reading the Solid Edge part file, you can use Solid Edge to export a Paraso-
lid (X_T) file which FEMAP can read. In Solid Edge, you will typically use the File, Save As com-
mand, set the File Type to Parasolid, and write your part.

Using the FEMAP Add-in inside Solid Edge

When the Applications, Simulation, FEMAP command is used in Solid Edge V18 and above, the Solid Edge part,
sheet metal part, legacy weldment, or assembly will be automatically sent to FEMAP. A new instance of FEMAP
will be opened, if one is not currently open, and the part will be imported.
During import, FEMAP will first ask “OK to Adjust Geometry Scale Factor to Match Part? If you do not adjust the
scale factor, geometry will import at the wrong size.” Clicking Yes will adjust the scale factor to the one which has
been set in Solid Edge, while clicking No could result in your model being imported into FEMAP in the incorrect
scale. Once the scale factor has been accepted or declined, the geometry will be read into FEMAP
 NX Interface 9-21

If your part or assembly contains multiple part representations (i.e. a Design Model and a Simplified Model),
FEMAP will ask which representation you would like to read into FEMAP. Depending on whether you are trying to
read in a part or assembly may dictate which option you will want to use.
For a single part, choosing “Design Only” will read in the Design Model only, choosing “Simplified Only” will
only read the simplified part if one exists, and choosing “All” will read in both the Design and Simplified Models.
The “Simplified or Design” option will read in a Simplified Model if there is one for the part, but if not, will read in
the Design Model.
For assemblies, these options work pretty much the same, except “Design Only” will only read in Design Models,
so if a Simplified Model has been used in the assembly, it will not be read into FEMAP. The opposite is true if
“Simplified Only” is selected, as only Simplified Models will be imported. “Simplified or Design” will scan the
assembly and import a Simplified Model if one exists, but if not, the Design Model will be read in instead. “Simpli-
fied and Design” is the default, as it will read in the most simplified assembly available, while assuring that a rep-
resentation will be read in for each part in the assembly.

9.10 NX Interface
NX is a high end integrated CAD/CAM software from Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software, Inc.,
which also develops FEMAP. NX is based on Parasolid geometry kernel. As such, the FEMAP NX interface sim-
ply extracts the existing Parasolid geometry out of the file and loads it into FEMAP. No conversion is required
because both systems are using the same geometry engine. The translator also supports files from Unigraphics ver-
sions 11 to 18.
To import a NX file, choose File, Import, Geometry and choose the appropriate filename. Since Pro/E also uses the
.PRT extension, when you have the File Type set to All Geometry, FEMAP attempts to automatically distinguish
and choose the right interface to read the file that you select. If it cannot determine the type automatically, it will
ask you to specify the type. If you are having problems with this, open the File Type list and directly choose the NX
interface.

9.11 SolidWorks Interface

SolidWorks uses Parasolid as its geometry engine. This interface extracts the existing Parasolid geometry from the
SolidWorks file and loads it, just like loading a native Parasolid (X_T) file. This makes the conversion very robust.
To use the FEMAP SolidWorks interface, select the file that you want, and it will be loaded into FEMAP as Para-
solid geometry.
If there is an existing solid, the interface will ask you if you want to update it. If you answer Yes, FEMAP will dis-
play the Geometry Replacement Options dialog box. For more information on this dialog box, see Section 9.2.1,
"Reading Parasolid (X_T) Files".
The SolidWorks interface can read part (.SLDPRT) and assembly (.SLDASM) files. Likewise, it only transfers the
current geometry. Feature and other attribute information is not supported.

Note: As an alternative to directly reading the SolidWorks part file, you can use SolidWorks to export a Para-
solid (X_T) file which FEMAP can read.
 9-22 Geometry Interfaces

9.12 Stereolithography Interface

In addition to traditional CAD data, FEMAP can also read files that were generated for StereoLithography produc-
tion. These files are usually text files, but can be binary as well. FEMAP can read all text versions, and binary files
if they were generated on a PC. The facets in the StereoLithography file are converted to triangular surface ele-
ments during the translation.
When you select the File, Import, Geometry command and select a Stereolithography file, you will see the Read
Stereo Lithography dialog box.

In addition to just translating the triangular facets, however, FEMAP can automatically merge all coincident points
and split any facets that are necessary to eliminate free edges in the mesh. The options on this dialog box control
merging, definition of short edges, as well as closing of gaps. This results in a valid finite element mesh, although
typically with very bad aspect ratio elements. The facets can be remeshed with the Mesh, Remesh commands.
Use the PATRAN STL File option to read PATRAN STL files. This option will also let you read any STL file where
the negative coordinate locations are written without spaces between the X,Y, and Z components.
Writing Stereolithography Files
FEMAP can also write Stereolithography files as well. FEMAP will ask you to select the elements to be translated.
You will usually want to pick plane element types for this command, solids may be selected as well.. If you have
quadrilateral plane elements, FEMAP will still write the triangular facets by first splitting these quads. This split-
ting procedure does not modify the elements themselves. FEMAP simply writes the triangular results to the STL
file. If you choose solid elements, FEMAP will write each face as a triangular facet, splitting quadrilateral faces
when required. If any plane elements are coincident with the face of solid elements, only one of these faces will be
exported. Any line elements that are chosen in this procedure are simply ignored.
10. Customization
This topic contains information on customizing FEMAP. There are three basic sections:
• The first section describes the use of shortcut keys in FEMAP. You can define any letter, function key, or key-
board combination (i.e., CTRL, SHIFT, ALT + letter or function keys) to be a FEMAP command. This option
enables you to quickly access your most commonly used commands from your keyboard.
• The second section describes customizing the Toolbars. You can create your own toolbars and add whatever
existing or user commands you would like to a toolbar by dragging and dropping icons and menus onto a blank
or existing toolbar. You can also to toggle certain icons on and off temporarily from toolbars as well.
• The third section briefly describes the FEMAP Application Programming Interface (API) and how it can be
used to create user commands. There is much more information about the API in the FEMAP API Reference
document included on the FEMAP CD.
A description of each of these customizable options is provided below.

10.1 FEMAP Shortcut Keys

FEMAP has both certain keys defined as commands for quick implementation as well as providing you the capabil-
ity to define your own shortcut keys. Commands which can be accessed through standard shortcut keys have the
shortcut key listed next to their name. Some of the most commonly used shortcut keys include F5 for View Select,
F6 for View Options, and Ctrl+Q for View, Visibility. These shortcut keys enable you to access these commands
without going through the menu substructure.

In addition to the standard shortcut keys, FEMAP also allows you to define letter keys in FEMAP as FEMAP com-
mands. You can also assign currently unused function keys and keyboard combinations (i.e., CTRL, SHIFT, ALT +
letter or function keys) as FEMAP commands as well. You can therefore quickly customize FEMAP to use letter
10-2 Customization

and function keystrokes, as well as keyboard combinations, to represent your most often used FEMAP commands
To set up your own shortcut keys, click the “customize” triangle on any toolbar and choose the Customize... com-
mand or use the Tools, Toolbars, Customize... menu. In both cases, the Customize... command is at the bottom of
the menu. Once in Customize dialog box, choose the Keyboard tab.
To define a shortcut key, first choose the Category from the drop down list, then highlight the command from the
Commands list. After the command is highlighted, click in the “Press new shortcut key:” field and press a key or
keyboard combination. Once you have chosen the correct key or keyboard combination, click the Assign button.

If the key or keyboard combination has already been defined, FEMAP will let you know and bring up a dialog box
stating “This shortcut is currently assigned. Do you want to re-assign this shortcut?” By clicking the Yes button, the
key or keyboard combination will be added to the “Key assignments:” list and REMOVED from the command that
was previously using that shortcut key or keyboard combination. Clicking the No button allows you to select an
unused shortcut key or keyboard combination and leaves all other shortcut keys unchanged.
Shortcut keys can be saved by clicking the Save All button. FEMAP will prompt you to create a “Keyboard Short-
cut File” (*.KEY file). This file will contain all of the keyboard shortcuts you have currently set in FEMAP. You
can then click the Load button to load a *.KEY file and your shortcuts will be restored. For FEMAP versions 9.3
and above, you can load a *.KEY file from the previous version and quickly customize the new version.
Shortcut keys can be manually removed by highlighting a key or keyboard combination from the “Key Assign-
ments:” list and then clicking the Remove button. The Reset All button will return all shortcut keys to their default
commands.
Defining shortcut keys for your most used commands, you can save time moving through the FEMAP menu struc-
ture. Shortcut keys are only available from the FEMAP menu level. If you are already in another command or dia-
log box, pressing these keys will not have the desired effect. In most cases, it will simply result in typing the letter
that you pressed
See Section 4.2.2.2, "Customizing toolbars" for some more information on creating shortcut keys.
A few of the more useful but less obvious shortcut keys are listed below. These keys work within a text or drop
down list box in a FEMAP dialog box or list boxes in FEMAP. They do not apply to other Windows applications
except for those noted as Windows commands. For a complete list of shortcut keys, see Section A, "Using the Key-
board".

Key(s) Function
Ctrl+A Measure an angle.
Ctrl+C Copy (Windows command)
Ctrl+D Measure a distance.
Ctrl+E Display FEMAP Equation Editor for
interactive definition of variables and
equations.
Ctrl+F List functions.
Ctrl+G Snap cursor selections to snap grid.
Ctrl+L Display a list of the existing entities of the
desired type.
Ctrl+N Snap cursor selections to nearest node.
Ctrl+P Snap cursor selections to nearest point.
 Customizing Toolbars 10-3

Ctrl+S Snap cursor selections to screen (snap

off).
Ctrl+T Redefine snap grid.
Ctrl+V Paste (Windows command)
Ctrl+W Redefine workplane.
Ctrl+X Cut (Windows command)
Ctrl+Z Use standard coordinate selection dialog
box to define location.

10.2 Customizing Toolbars

FEMAP gives you the ability to customize the toolbars in several different ways. All customization begins by
clicking on the small triangle (“Customize” triangle) that is on every visible toolbar (It appears in a different place
depending on whether the toolbar is docked or floating). When the “Customize” triangle is clicked, a menu will
drop down which says “Add or Remove Buttons”. When the “Add or Remove Buttons” menu is highlighted, it will
bring up a second level menu with two options, Add/Remove from current toolbar or “Customize”.

Customize Triangle
Add/Remove List
Add/Remove Option

Add or Remove Buttons Menu

Customize option (Opens

Customize Dialog Box)

Reset command (restores defaults)

Add/Remove option
The add/remove option will show as the current toolbar name, which when highlighted will bring up another menu
level which allows you to individually turn existing icons on or off (You can turn multiple icons on or off while the
menu is open and the toolbar will dynamically change). When the icon and command name have a check mark next
to them, the icon is visible on the toolbar. To restore the default settings for a toolbar, choose Reset at the bottom of
the menu.
Customize... option
The Customize... option will bring up the Customize dialog box when clicked. Once open, this dialog box contains
five different tabs which represent various methods to customize your toolbars. Also, while the Customize dialog
box is open, you can right mouse click on any icon in any visible toolbar and a “Customize Icon” menu will appear.
We will discuss the Customize dialog box and Customize Icon menu in greater detail below.
Customize Dialog Box
...The Customize Dialog box is broken into five different sections: Toolbars, Commands, Keyboard, User Com-
mands, and Options. Each of these sections pertains to a specific area of toolbar customization. There is a tab for
each heading that can be clicked to bring up the specific options for each section.
10-4 Customization

Toolbars
...Allows you to turn toolbars on and off by clicking the check box next to the toolbar name. This allows you to turn
multiple toolbars on and off while in the same command. As each toolbar is checked or unchecked, it will appear or
disappear in the FEMAP interface. This tab also allows you to create new, personalized toolbars by pressing the
New button. FEMAP will prompt you to give the new toolbar a name and will bring up a “blank” toolbar in the
FEMAP interface, which you can then add icons for exiting commands or user commands. “Personalized” toolbars
can be renamed at any time using the Rename button or deleted using the Delete button. Using the Reset button will
reset the toolbar highlighted in the list to the default configuration.
 Customizing Toolbars 10-5

Commands
...The Commands tab contains all the commands available in FEMAP through the Main Menu structure. Choose
the type of command you are looking for from the Categories list, then locate the specific command in the Com-
mands list. Once the specific command is located, click and hold the left mouse button to “grab” the command.
Now you can drag the “grabbed” command onto a visible toolbar and place it on that toolbar. Along with the com-
mands available through the Main Menu structure, categories such as “Additional Commands” and “View Popup”
allow access to specific view options and “right mouse menu” selections. You may also add an entire existing
FEMAP menu to a toolbar using the “Built-in Menus” category or create a new menu of existing and user com-
mands by dragging the New Menu command onto a toolbar and then filling the blank menu with commands. Any
user commands will show up in the “User Commands” category. Any combination of icons and commands can be
put together on a “personalized” toolbar.

Many commands have icons which do not appear on any existing standard toolbar. These icons are in FEMAP spe-
cifically so you can add commands to existing toolbars and create your own “personalized” toolbars.
An example of a “personalized” toolbar can be seen below. Notice that there is a “New Menu” containing a few
existing commands from different menus and toolbars that appear on a drop-down menu. Also included on this
Custom toolbar are the Visibility icon from the “View” category, View Regenerate All command from the “Addi-
tional Commands” category, the Snap to Point and Snap to Node icons from the “View Popup” category, the entire
Mesh menu from the “Built-in Menus” category, and Spider (a user command) from the “User Commands” cate-
gory.
10-6 Customization

User Commands
...The User Commands tab allows you to create command names for user commands created using the FEMAP
Applications Programming Interface (API).

In order to locate a file to be used as a program, you can browse through windows directories using the “...” browse
button next to the Program field. Choose the file to be used as the “program” file, click OK, and then the entire
directory path will be shown in the Program field. There are several different files which can be used as a “Pro-
gram” files including Executable (*.exe), Command (*.com), Information (*.pif), and Batch (*.bat, *.cmd) files
Once the file for the actual command has been located, the command must be given a unique Command Name.
After the command has been given a name, click the Add button to place it into the list of User Commands. If you
would like to change the name or directory path of a User Command, highlight it in the list, make any modifica-
tions, then click the Update button to confirm the change. To remove a User Command from the list, highlight it,
then click the Remove button.
Along with the “Program” file itself, you may optionally enter other necessary files and command line entries into
the Arguments field. In addition, if any program file needs to use an external directory, the path to that directory can
be entered into the Initial Directory field.
Once the commands and are added to the User commands list, they will appear in the “User Commands” category
in both the Commands and Keyboard sections of the Customize dialog box. User commands can now be added to
existing toolbars or “Personalized” toolbars using the methods described in the Toolbars and Commands sections.
 Customizing Toolbars 10-7

Options
....Allows you to select options to make the toolbars more useful. At the current time, the “Personalized Menus and
Toolbars” options in the Options tab have no effect on any existing or custom FEMAP menus or toolbars. These
options will be available in future versions.

To make the icons on all the toolbars larger, select the “Large icons” option.
By default, the “Show ScreenTips on toolbars” option is on, you can uncheck the box to turn the ScreenTips off. If
you would like the ScreenTips to also show all associated shortcut keys, use the “Show shortcut keys in Screen-
Tips” option.
You can select the style of how the menus drop-down by selecting a style from the drop-down “Menu animations”
list. The options are (System default), Unfold, Slide, Fade, or None for a particular style or choose Random, for a
different “drop down” style each time.
Customize Icon menu
...The Customize Icon Menu is available only when the Customize dialog box is open. In order to use the com-
mands on the Customize Icon Menu, right mouse click any icon on any visible toolbar. Only the icon that you
selected will be altered by the commands on the Customize Icon Menu. This menu contains commands used to
delete icons from a toolbar, reset the default icon, and change the name of an icon. It also allows you to copy, paste,
reset, edit, or change the button image of an icon. Along with these functions, icon style can be selected, and icons
can be separated into “groups” on toolbars using partitions.
10-8 Customization

A brief description of the commands on the Customize Icon Menu:

• Reset - Resets all icon options (name, button image, style, group) to default values.
• Delete - Removes icon from the toolbar it is currently on. If the icon appears on multiple toolbars, it will only
be deleted from the toolbar that you initially right mouse clicked to open the Customize Icon Menu.
• Name - Allows you to change the name of an icon. This name will appear on the toolbar when the Icon style is
set to Text Only or Image and Text
• Copy Button Image - Copies the button image to the clipboard.
• Paste Button Image - Once an icon image is on the clipboard, it can be pasted onto to another icon to replace
that icon’s current image.
• Reset Button Image - Resets the button image to the default button image.
• Edit Button Image - Brings up the Button Editor dialog box. In this dialog box, there are many tools to alter
the appearance of a button image.
 Introduction to the FEMAP API 10-9

Button Image size is limited to a 16 X 16 square “picture”. The existing picture can be modified by changing the
colors or moving the image, a new picture can be drawn, a copied button image can be pasted in, or a picture from
a file can be imported. Any combination of these methods can be used to create custom icons. There is a preview
window that dynamically changes as you modify the icon and Undo and Redo tools to help modification. Once the
image is finished, it can be copied to the clipboard as well.

Note: Any imported image will be reduced to a 16 X 16 pixel resolution image, so be sure to inspect all
imported images to make sure they still resemble the image after the resolution reduction.

• Change Button Image - Allows you to choose a button image from a set of images provided by FEMAP.
• Default Style - Resets the icon style to the default setting. (Usually Button Image only)
• Text Only - Shows Icon Name only (no Button Image)
• Image and Text - Shows both the Button Image and the Icon Name together. (View Orient toolbar default)
• Begin a Group - When checked, creates toolbar partition line to the left (horizontal toolbars) or above (vertical
toolbars) the icon being customized.

10.3 Introduction to the FEMAP API

FEMAP provides a robust set of finite element modeling and post-processing functionality. At times, however, you
may need a specific capability that is not included in the standard product. The FEMAP Application Programming
Interface (API) lets you customize FEMAP to meet your specific needs.
The FEMAP API is an OLE/COM-based programming interface to FEMAP. It contains hundreds of functions that
can be called from API Programming Dockable Pane in FEMAP or other applications such as Visual Basic, VBA
(Excel, Word, Access...), C, or C++. The FEMAP API Reference documents the objects and functions that are
available in the FEMAP API.
For More information on the API Programming Pane, see Section 7.2.12, "Tools, Programming, API Program-
ming" in the FEMAP Commands Manual
To use the FEMAP API successfully, you need to understand:
• Objects, Methods, and Properties (See Objects, Methods and Properties)
• Data Types (See Data Types)
• Memory Allocation (See Memory Allocation)
• Global Constants (See Global Constants)
For examples of how to use the FEMAP API, see the FEMAP API Reference Manual
10-10 Customization
A. Using the Keyboard

Command Keys
These keys provide shortcut methods for accessing the FEMAP commands. In addition to the keys described here,
menu commands can also be activated by using the Alt key in combination with the underlined letter in the com-
mand (or by selecting them with the mouse). Many of these shortcuts are shown on the right side of the menus.

Key(s) Command
Ctrl+A View, Autoscale, Visible
Ctrl+Shift+A View, Autoscale, Regenerate All
Ctrl+B Mesh, Between
Ctrl+C File, Picture, Copy
Ctrl+Shift+C File, Message, Copy
Ctrl+D Window, Redraw
Ctrl+E Model, Element
Ctrl+F Modify, Fillet
Ctrl+G Window, Regenerate
Ctrl+H Help
Ctrl+I Modify, Trim
Ctrl+J Modify, Join
Ctrl+K Modify, Break
Ctrl+L Tools, Variable
Ctrl+M View, Magnify
Ctrl+N Model, Node
Ctrl+O View, Options
Ctrl+P View, Pan
Ctrl+Shift+P File, Preferences
Ctrl+Q View, Visibility
Ctrl+R View, Rotate
Ctrl+S View, Select
Ctrl+T File, Export, Analysis Model
Ctrl+Shift+T File, Import, Analysis Model
Ctrl+U Docks/undocks Messages window
Ctrl+Shift+U Open/close Graphics Window
Ctrl+Y Last menu command
Ctrl+W Tools, Workplane
Ctrl+Z Tools, Undo
Ctrl+Shift+Z Tools, Redo
Ctrl+Ins File, Picture, Copy
Ctrl+Alt+Ins File, Message, Copy
Alt+Backspace Tools, Undo
Alt+Shift+Backspace Tools, Redo
 A-2 Using the Keyboard

Function Keys
These keys provide additional shortcut methods for accessing the FEMAP commands. In addition to the keys
described here, menu commands can also be activated by using the Alt key in combination with the underlined let-
ter in the command (or by selecting them with the mouse), or through various Ctrl-key combinations.

Key(s) Command
F1 Help
F2 Workplane
Ctrl+F2 Model, Load, Create/Manage Set
Shift+F2 Model, Constraint, Create/Manage Set
Alt+F2 Group, Create/Manage
F3 Print
Ctrl+F3 Save, Picture
Shift+F3 Page Setup
Alt+F3 Replay, Picture
F4 File, Save
Ctrl+F4 Window, Close
Shift+F4 File, Open
Alt+F4 File, Exit
F5 View, Select
Ctrl+F5 View, Visibility
Shift+F5 View, Post Data
Alt+F5 View, XY Data
F6 View, Options
Shift+F6 View, Visibility
F7 View, Zoom
Ctrl+F7 View, Magnify
Shift+F7 View, Autoscale, All
Alt+F7 View, All Views
F8 View, Rotate, Model
Ctrl+F8 View, Align by, Along Vector
Shift+F8 View, Center
Alt+F8 View, Pan
F9 Model, Line Coordinates
Ctrl+F9 Model, Arc, Points
Shift+F9 Model, Surface, Edge Curves
Alt+F9 Model, Volume, Surfaces
F10 View menu bar
Shift+F10 Mesh, Size Along Curve
Alt+F10 Last menu command
F11 Mesh, Between
Ctrl+F11 Mesh, Transition
Shift+F11 Mesh, Geometry, Surface
Alt+F11 Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Curves
F12 Window, Redraw
Shift+F12 Window, Show Entities
Alt+F12 Mesh, Geometry, Solid
 Using the Keyboard A-3

Dialog Box Keys

The following keys are implemented by Windows and are typical for most “well-behaved” Windows applications.
They allow you to move around the dialog box, select options, enter and modify data, and execute additional com-
mands.

Movement
Key(s) Function
Tab Moves to next list box, text box, check box, command button, or group of
option buttons. Moves from field to field (left to right and top to bottom).
Shift+Tab Moves from field to field in reverse order.
Alt+letter Moves to the option or group whose underlined letter matches the one you
type.
Letter key Moves to next item beginning with that letter in an active list or drop-down
list box.
Direction key Moves from option to option within a group of check boxes, command
(Up, Down, Right, Left) buttons, or option buttons. Also moves selection in a normal or drop-down
list box.
Selection or Operation
Key(s) Function
Enter Executes the currently active command button. This is typically the OK
button when the dialog box is first displayed. The currently active com-
mand button has a wider, darker border than the other buttons.
Esc Closes a dialog box without completing the command. (Same as clicking
the Cancel button.)
Alt+Down Opens a drop-down list box.
Space (SpaceBar) Turns on or off active check box or option button, or chooses the active
command button.
Editing
Key(s) Function
Left or Right Moves one character.
Home Moves to beginning of line.
End Moves to end of line.
Ins Turns on/off overtype.
Shift+Direction key Extends selection in a text box.
Shift+Home Extends selection to first character in a text box.
Shift+End Extends selection to last character in a text box.
Alt+Backspace Single level undo/redo of the changes made to the active text box or drop-
down list box.
Ctrl+Enter Add a new line in a multi-line text entry control.
Editing with no characters selected
Key(s) Function
Del Deletes character to right of insertion point.
Ctrl+Del Deletes to end of line.
Ctrl+Shift+Del Cuts to end of line.
Shift+Del Cuts character to right.
Backspace Deletes character to left of insertion point.
Shift+Ins Pastes Clipboard data.
Editing with characters selected
Key(s) Function
Del Deletes selection.
Ctrl+Del Deletes from beginning of selection to end of line.
 A-4 Using the Keyboard

Ctrl+Shift+Del Cuts from beginning of selection to end of line

Shift+Del Cuts selection to Clipboard.
Backspace Deletes selection.
Ctrl+Ins Copies selection to Clipboard.
Shift+Ins Replaces selection with Clipboard data.

Special Dialog and Toolbox Field Keys

The following keys work within text or drop-down list boxes in FEMAP. A * at the end of the description in the
Function column below indicates the keys do NOT work in any fields found in the various Toolbox-style Dockable
Panes. They do not apply to other Windows applications except for Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V...

Key(s) Function
Ctrl+A Measure an angle
Ctrl+C Copy (Windows command).
Ctrl+D Measure a distance
Ctrl+E Display FEMAP Equation Editor for interactive definition of variables
and equations.*
Ctrl+F List, Functions*
Ctrl+G Snap cursor selections to snap grid.
Ctrl+I Measure the radius of a circular arc
Ctrl+L Display a list of the existing entities of the desired type.*
Ctrl+M Measure the length of a selected curve
Ctrl+N Snap cursor selections to nearest node
Ctrl+P Snap cursor selections to nearest point
Ctrl+R Enable Smart Snap, which snaps cursor selections to the nearest point,
node, midpoint of a curve, or center point of a circular arc
Ctrl+S Snap cursor selections to screen (snap off)
Ctrl+T Redefine snap grid.
Ctrl+V Paste (Windows command).
Ctrl+W Redefine workplane.
Ctrl+X Cut (Windows command).
Ctrl+Z Use standard coordinate selection dialog box to define location.*

Dialog Function Keys

These keys provide additional shortcut methods for modifying the orientation and position of the model in the
graphics window when a FEMAP dialog box is open. F1 brings up “context sensitive” help for the command that
currently has the dialog box open.

Key(s) Command
F1 Context Sensitive Help
F2 Magnify Up 110%
Shift+F2 Magnify Up 150%
Ctrl+F2 Magnify Up 200%
Alt+F2 View, Autoscale, Visible
F3 Magnify Down 110%
Shift+F3 Magnify Down 150%
Ctrl+F3 Magnify Down 200%
Alt+F3 View, Autoscale, Visible
F4 Box Zoom
F5 Pan Left 10%
Shift+F5 Pan Left 25%
Ctrl+F5 Pan Left 50%
 Using the Keyboard A-5

Key(s) Command
Alt+F5 Pan Left 100%
F6 Pan Right 10%
Shift+F6 Pan Right 25%
Ctrl+F6 Pan Right 50%
Alt+F6 Pan Right 100%
F7 Pan Up 10%
Shift+F7 Pan Up 25%
Ctrl+F7 Pan Up 50%
Alt+F7 Pan Up 100%
F8 Pan Down 10%
Shift+F8 Pan Down 25%
Ctrl+F8 Pan Down 50%
Alt+F8 Pan Down 100%
F9 Rotation Direction Toggle (positive/negative)
F10 Rotate about X by 10 degrees (model axis)
Ctrl+F10 Rotate about X by 90 degrees (model axis)
Shift+F10 Rotate about X by 10 degrees (screen axis)
Alt+F10 Rotate about X by 90 degrees (screen axis)
F11 Rotate about Y by 10 degrees (model axis)
Ctrl+F11 Rotate about Y by 90 degrees (model axis)
Shift+F11 Rotate about Y by 10 degrees (screen axis)
Alt+F11 Rotate about Y by 90 degrees (screen axis)
F12 Rotate about Z by 10 degrees (model axis)
Ctrl+F12 Rotate about Z by 90 degrees (model axis)
Shift+F12 Rotate about Z by 10 degrees (screen axis)
Alt+F12 Rotate about Z by 90 degrees (screen axis)

Menu Keys
The following keys allow you to access and move within the FEMAP menus. You can also access the menus using
the mouse.

Key(s) Function
Alt or F10 Activates menu bar.
Esc Cancels menu.
Underlined letter Displays menu.
Left or Right Highlights the menu to the left or right.
With menu displayed
Key(s) Function
Underlined letter Chooses command or sub-menu.
Enter Chooses highlighted command.
Esc Cancels menu.
Up Highlights previous command.
Down Highlights next command.
Left or Right Displays the menu to the left or right.
 A-6 Using the Keyboard

Selection Keys
The following keys are used in FEMAP to assist in selection of multiple entities. They are used in combination
with pressing the left mouse button and dragging the mouse.

Key(s) Function
Ctrl Select all entities within a circular area.
Shift Select all entities within a square/rectangular area.
Ctrl+Shift Select all entities within a polygon area.

Windows Keys
The following keys allow you to switch between applications, or between windows within a single application, and
to scroll data within a window with scroll bars, such as the FEMAP Messages window.

Key(s) Function
Alt+Esc Next application
Alt+Shift+Esc Previous application
Alt+Tab Next windowed application
Alt+Shift+Tab Previous windowed application
Ctrl+Esc Display the Windows task list
In FEMAP Messages Window
Key(s) Function
Direction keys Scroll in appropriate direction.
PgUp and PgDn Scroll window up/down one screen.
Ctrl+PgUp Places cursor in current, visible top line of Messages window
Ctrl+PgDn Places cursor in current, visible bottom line of Messages window
Home Beginning of line.
End End of line.
Ctrl+Home Scroll to first line of the Messages window
Ctrl+End Scroll to last line of the Messages window
B. Using the Mouse and Touch

At the FEMAP Menu Level - Mouse

While FEMAP is waiting for you to choose a command, you can perform certain “FEMAP-specific” functions with
the mouse. These are in addition to the normal Windows functions that you can perform by clicking and dragging
the mouse in the window borders and menus. All references to left and right are for a standard “right-handed”
mouse configuration.

Action Result
General
Click button in window Activate that window. If you have multiple graphics win-
dows on the screen the one you click on will become active.
All view changes will be made to that window.
Graphics Window
Click, hold and drag left mouse button in Dynamic Rotate, Pan and Zoom. Works identical to the
Graphics window. Dynamic Rotate, Pan, and Zoom View Toolbar command,
except you do not have to enter a command to do it.
Double click left mouse button in Graph- Redraws that window.
ics window.
Click, hold and drag middle mouse but- Dynamic Rotate, Pan and Zoom. Works identical to the
ton or mouse wheel in Graphics window. Dynamic Rotate, Pan, and Zoom View Toolbar command,
except you do not have to enter a command to do it.
Spin Mouse Wheel in Graphics Window Zooms in and out. If the mouse wheel is spun with Ctrl key
down, model will rotate around the screen X-axis; with Shift
key down it will rotate around the screen Y-axis; with both
Ctrl and Shift keys down at the same time, it will rotate
around the screen Z-axis.
Double click middle mouse button or Autoscales to show all currently visible entities. If holding
mouse wheel in Graphics window. Shift key down, Autoscales to show all extents of all entities
in the model, visible or not.
Click right mouse button in Graphics Display quick access menu.
window (Select Toolbar not active)
Click right mouse button in Graphics Displays Context Sensitive menu for the entity type which is
window (Select Toolbar active) currently active in the Select Toolbar.
Press Shift key, then press and drag left Select all entities inside the square (rectangle) that is formed
mouse button in a graphics window as you drag the mouse. This only works in the standard
(Select Toolbar active). entity selection dialog box.
Press Ctrl key, then press and drag left Select all entities inside the circle that is formed as you drag
mouse button in a graphics window the mouse. This only works in the standard entity selection
(Select Toolbar active). dialog box.
Press Ctrl + Shift key, then press left Begins selection of all entities inside a polygon of any num-
mouse button one time in a graphics win- ber of sides that is formed as you click the left mouse button.
dow (Select Toolbar active). as many times as needed. Double-click of click Done in
Polygon Picking dialog box to finish selection. This only
works in the standard entity selection dialog box.
When model in animating, click left Temporarily pause the animation, begins again when finger
mouse button in the graphics window is removed from screen
Messages window
Click left mouse button in Messages Select the line that you were pointing at for transfer via File,
window. Messages, Copy or File, Messages, Save. Also, press Shift +
the left mouse button to select a range of lines.
B-2 Using the Mouse and Touch

Action Result
Press and drag left mouse button in Mes- Select all lines between where you press and release the
sages window. mouse button.
Click right mouse button in Messages Brings up a Context Sensitive menu for the Messages win-
window. dow.
Double click left mouse button on Mes- Toggles the Messages window between Docked and Float-
sages window Title Bar. (Docked or ing.
Floating)
Double click left mouse button on Mes- While the Messages window is “flown-out”, will change the
sages window Title Bar. (Docked and Messages window from Docked and Tabbed (Retracted) to
Tabbed, during “fly-out”) simply Docked.
Entity Editor, Meshing Toolbox, and
PostProcessing Toolbox
Click left mouse button in any field or +/ Makes the field active for editing (except Read-Only fields).
- toggle Entity Editor, Meshing Toolbox, Clicking on the “Down arrow button” will bring up a drop-
or PostProcessing Toolbox. down menu and clicking on the “Action button” will bring
up a dialog box. Also can be used to expand and collapse
different sections by pressing the “+/-” toggle.
Click left mouse button on title bar of an Makes the selected tool the “active” tool.
individual in Meshing Toolbox or Post-
Processing Toolbox.
Click left mouse on title bar of an indi- Makes the selected tool the “active” tool.
vidual in Meshing Toolbox or PostPro-
cessing Toolbox.
Press and drag left mouse button in any Selects all characters in the field between where you press
field Entity Editor, Meshing Toolbox, or and release the mouse button.
PostProcessing Toolbox.
Double click left mouse button on win- Toggles the Dockable Pane between Docked and Floating.
dow Title Bar. (Docked or Floating)
Double click left mouse button on win- While the Dockable Pane window is “flown-out”, will
dow Title Bar. (Docked and Tabbed, change the Dockable Pane window from Docked and
during “fly-out”) Tabbed (Retracted) to simply Docked.
Data Table and Connection Editor)
Click left mouse button on a row. Selects and highlights the row the cursor is currently over.
(Press Ctrl + the left mouse button to select multiple rows
one at a time or Shift + the left mouse button to select a
range of rows.)
Click left mouse button on a column Toggles the Sort Method from lowest to highest (numerical
heading. and alphabetical) and vice versa.
Click left mouse button on a column Allows you to move the column headings around and place
heading and drag the heading them in the order you wish. Also, dragging a column header
off the row of column headers until an “X” appears over the
column heading will remove the column from the Dockable
Pane.
Click right mouse button on a row. Brings up a Context Sensitive menu allowing you to perform
show, filter, or delete the selected rows.
Click right mouse button on a column Brings up a Context Sensitive menu with sorting, alignment,
heading. and other options.
Double click left mouse button on win- Toggles the Dockable Pane between Docked and Floating.
dow Title Bar. (Docked or Floating)
Double click left mouse button on win- While the Dockable Pane window is “flown-out”, will
dow Title Bar. (Docked and Tabbed, change the Dockable Pane window from Docked and
during “fly-out”) Tabbed (Retracted) to simply Docked
Model Info tree
 Using the Mouse and Touch B-3

Action Result
Click left mouse button in Model Info Selects and highlights the entity in the tree the cursor is cur-
tree on an entity. rently over. Also can be used to expand and collapse the dif-
ferent branches of the “tree”, by pressing the “+/-” toggle
and toggle visibility check boxes on/off.
Click right mouse button in Model Info Displays Context Sensitive menu for the entity which is cur-
tree on an entity. rently highlighted in the Model Info tree.
Click right mouse button in Model Info Brings up a Context Sensitive menu with New, Open, and
tree below the “Selection List”. Exit options.
Double click left mouse button on Model Toggles the Model Info tree between Docked and Floating.
Info window Title Bar. (Docked or Float-
ing)
Double click left mouse button on Model While the Model Info tree window is “flown-out”, will
Info window Title Bar. (Docked and change the Model Info tree from Docked and Tabbed
Tabbed, during “fly-out”) (Retracted) to simply Docked
Status Bar
Click left mouse button over an entity Brings up a Context Sensitive Menu depending on the entity
name in the “Tray” portion of the Status type the cursor is currently positioned over.
Bar.
Click right mouse button anywhere on Brings up a Context Sensitive Menu which allows you to
the Status Bar. turn different entity types on and off in the “Tray”.
During a Command
When a command dialog box is displayed, the mouse can perform the following functions. These are also in addi-
tion to the normal Windows functions which allow you to move between dialog controls, and manage your win-
dows.

Action Result
Click right mouse button in graphics Display quick access menu.
window.
Click left mouse button in graphics Graphically select the closest entity or location. This only
window. works when you would normally be typing in a text, list or
combo box which references a selectable entity.
Click, hold and drag middle mouse Dynamic Rotate, Pan and Zoom. Works identical to the
button or mouse wheel in Graphics Dynamic Rotate, Pan, and Zoom View Toolbar command,
window. except you do not have to leave the open command to do it.
Spin Mouse Wheel in Graphics Win- Zooms in and out. If the mouse wheel is spun with Ctrl key
dow down, model will rotate around the screen X-axis; with Shift
key down it will rotate around the screen Y-axis; with both
Ctrl and Shift keys down at the same time, it will rotate
around the screen Z-axis.
Click middle mouse button or mouse When Middle Button Click for OK option is enabled on the
wheel in graphics window. User Interface tab of File, Preferences, presses OK on any
open dialog box.
Press Shift key, then press and drag Select all entities inside the square (rectangle) that is formed
left mouse button in a graphics win- as you drag the mouse. This only works in the standard entity
dow. selection dialog box.
Press Ctrl key, then press and drag left Select all entities inside the circle that is formed as you drag
mouse button in a graphics window. the mouse. This only works in the standard entity selection
dialog box.
Press Ctrl + Shift key, then press left Begins selection of all entities inside a polygon of any num-
mouse button one time in a graphics ber of sides that is formed as you click the left mouse button.
window. as many times as needed. Double-click of click Done in Poly-
gon Picking dialog box to finish selection. This only works in
the standard entity selection dialog box.
 B-4 Using the Mouse and Touch

At the FEMAP Menu Level - Touch

While FEMAP is waiting for you to choose a command, you can perform certain “FEMAP-specific” functions by
using touch gestures. These are in addition to the normal Windows functions that you can perform with touch ges-
tures.

Action Result
General
Touch in window Activate that window. If you have multiple graphics win-
dows on the screen the one you touch will become active.
All view changes will be made to that window.
Graphics Window
Press, hold, and drag with one finger in the Dynamically rotates the model
Graphics Window
Press, hold, and drag with two or more fingers Dynamically pans (translates) the model up, down, left, or
together in the Graphics Window right with minimal rotation of the model.
Press with two fingers apart from one another Zooms out.
and move fingers towards each other (works with
more than two fingers, but easiest with only two)
Press with two fingers together and move fingers Zooms in
away each other (works with more than two fin-
gers, but easiest with only two)
Press with two fingers and move one finger Rotates around the “Z-Axis of the screen” using the location
“around” the other finger (fingers apart from one of the stationary finger.
another is easiest)
When model in animating, press and hold any Temporarily pause the animation, begins again when finger
number of fingers in the graphics window is removed from screen
Messages window
Press, hold, and drag with one finger in Messages Select all lines between where you first touch and then
window. remove finger
Double tap one finger on Messages window Title Toggles the Messages window between Docked and Float-
Bar. (Docked or Floating) ing.
Double tap one finger on Messages window Title While the Messages window is “flown-out”, will change the
Bar. (Docked and Tabbed, during “fly-out”) Messages window from Docked and Tabbed (Retracted) to
simply Docked.
Entity Editor, Meshing Toolbox, and PostPro-
cessing Toolbox
Tap one finger in any field or +/- toggle Entity Makes the field active for editing (except Read-Only fields).
Editor, Meshing Toolbox, or PostProcessing Tapping on the “Down arrow button” will bring up a drop-
Toolbox. down menu and clicking on the “Action button” will bring
up a dialog box. Also can be used to expand and collapse
different sections by pressing the “+/-” toggle.
Tap one finger on title bar of an individual in Makes the selected tool the “active” tool.
Meshing Toolbox or PostProcessing Toolbox.
Press, hold, and drag with one finger in any field Selects all characters in the field between where you press
Entity Editor, Meshing Toolbox, or PostProcess- and release the mouse button.
ing Toolbox.
Double tap one finger on window Title Bar. Toggles the Dockable Pane between Docked and Floating.
(Docked or Floating)
Double tap one finger on window Title Bar. While the Dockable Pane window is “flown-out”, will
(Docked and Tabbed, during “fly-out”) change the Dockable Pane window from Docked and
Tabbed (Retracted) to simply Docked.
Data Table and Connection Editor
 Using the Mouse and Touch B-5

Action Result
Tap one finger on a row. Selects and highlights the row the cursor is currently over.
(Press Ctrl + the left mouse button to select multiple rows
one at a time or Shift + the left mouse button to select a
range of rows.)
Tap one finger on a column heading. Toggles the Sort Method from lowest to highest (numerical
and alphabetical) and vice versa.
Tap one finger on a column heading and drag the Allows you to move the column headings around and place
heading them in the order you wish. Also, dragging a column header
off the row of column headers until an “X” appears over the
column heading will remove the column from the Data
Table.
Double tap one finger on window Title Bar. Toggles the Dockable Pane between Docked and Floating.
(Docked or Floating)
Double tap one finger on window Title Bar. While the Dockable Pane is “flown-out”, will change the
(Docked and Tabbed, during “fly-out”) Dockable Pane window from Docked and Tabbed
(Retracted) to simply Docked
Model Info tree
Tap one finger in Model Info tree on an entity. Selects and highlights the entity in the tree the cursor is cur-
rently over. Also can be used to expand and collapse the dif-
ferent branches of the “tree”, by pressing the “+/-” toggle
and toggle visibility check boxes on/off.
Double tap one finger on Model Info window Toggles the Model Info tree between Docked and Floating.
Title Bar. (Docked or Floating)
Double tap one finger on Model Info window While the Model Info tree window is “flown-out”, will
Title Bar. (Docked and Tabbed, during “fly-out”) change the Model Info tree from Docked and Tabbed
(Retracted) to simply Docked
Status Bar
Tap one finger over an entity name in the “Tray” Brings up a Context Sensitive Menu depending on the entity
portion of the Status Bar. type the cursor is currently positioned over.
During a Command
When a command dialog box is displayed, touch can perform the following functions. These are also in addition to
the normal Windows functions which allow you to move between dialog controls, and manage your windows. All
picking must be done with a pointing device such as a mouse, styles, or “pen”.

Action Result
Graphics Window
Press, hold, and drag with one finger in the Dynamically rotates the model
Graphics Window
Press, hold, and drag with two or more fingers Dynamically pans (translates) the model up, down, left, or
together in the Graphics Window right with minimal rotation of the model.
Press with two fingers apart from one another and Zooms out.
move fingers towards each other (works with
more than two fingers, but easiest with only two)
Press with two fingers together and move fingers Zooms in
away each other (works with more than two fin-
gers, but easiest with only two)
Press with two fingers and move one finger Rotates around the “Z-Axis of the screen” using the location
“around” the other finger (fingers apart from one of the stationary finger.
another is easiest)
B-6 Using the Mouse and Touch
C. Function Reference

This appendix defines the predefined FEMAP functions which can be used to create equations for any numeric
input. The functions are listed in alphabetical order. All function arguments are always required. Multiple argu-
ments must be separated by a semi-colon ( ; ), not a comma ( , ).
ABS(x)
returns the absolute value of the argument x. If x was positive, ABS(x) = x.
ACOS(x)
returns the inverse cosine (arc cosine) of x. The inverse cosine is the angle, between 0 and 180 degrees, which has
a cosine equal to x.
ACTID(type)
returns the active set or ID for the selected entity type. The argument, “type”, must be one of the predefined entity
types (any other value of “type” returns an undefined result):

Type Entity Type Entity

1 Coordinate System 10 Material
2 Point 11 Property
3 Curve 12 Load Set
4 Surface 13 Constraint Set
5 Volume 14 View
6 Text 15 Output Set
7 Boundary 16 Report Format
8 Node 17 Connection
9 Element 18 Connection Property

ASIN(x)
returns the inverse sine (arc sine) of x. The inverse sine is the angle, between -90 and 90 degrees, which has a sine
equal to x.
ATAN(x)
returns the inverse tangent (arc tangent) of x. The inverse tangent is the angle, between 0 and 180 degrees, which
has a tangent equal to x.
CELL(row; column)
returns the value of the selected cell in the current table control when used in a table control. When used in any
other dialog box, returns value of the selected cell in the Data Surface Editor.
CNPR(cnpropID; index)
returns a property value from connection property “cnpropID”. The value of “index” determines the property value
that will be returned. Refer to the table of Connection Property Values in Data Block 918 of the FEMAP neutral file
documentation for proper values of “index”.
CNPRID(cnID)
returns the ID of the connection property that is referenced by connection “cnID”. The return will always be 0, if
the connection does not reference a property.
COS(theta)
returns the cosine of the angle theta. Theta must be specified in degrees.
COUNT(type)
returns the number of entities of the selected type in the current model. Type must be one of the predefined entity
types (see ACTID( ) function).
C-2 Function Reference

ELND(index;elemID)
returns a nodeID which is referenced by an element. The first argument, index, selects which node on the element
to report. The second argument, elemID, selects which element to report. For example ELND(3,45) returns the ID
of the third node on element 45. If either the element does not exist, or the index is too large an error message will
be given and the return will be undefined.
ELTHK (elemID;cornerID)
returns the element thickness specified at a corner node of an element. The first argument, elemID, can be any valid
element ID however any elements other than planar elements with thickness will return a thickness of 0.0. The sec-
ond argument, cornerID, must be a value of an element corner from 1 through 4. Corner 4 for triangular elements
will always return a value of 0.0. For example, ELTHK(45;2) returns element thickness at corner 2 or element 45.
EXP(x)
returns the value of the exponential function, ex.
FNI(functionID;x)
returns a Y value which has been linearly interpolated from existing data points in a user-defined FEMAP XY
function. The type of function defined will have no effect on the values. For example, an XY function with the ID
of “1..FNI Function” is defined using the Model, Function menu. The linear curve ranges from coordinates (0,0) to
(10,5) with a data point a every integer X value (i.e. delta X is equal to “1”). A Y value is needed somewhere
between two existing data points, for instance, at X=5.25. The function FNI(1;5.25) would return a value of 2.625.
In addition, if an interpolation point is entered outside the range of the function (for the example, X values below 0
or above 10 would be out of the range), FEMAP will use either the first two or final two data points to determine
the slope of the curve outside the range, and that curve only will be used to return Y values for out of range interpo-
lation points.

Interpolation Point

FNV(functionID;x)
returns a Y value of the closest defined XY data point in a user-defined FEMAP XY function based on the target
value of “x” in FNV(functionID;x). The target value “x” is used to determine which existing XY point has the clos-
est X coordinate numerical value in the function. The type of function defined will have no effect on the values. For
example, an XY function with the ID of “1..FNV Function” is defined using the Model, Function menu. The linear
curve ranges from coordinates (0,0) to (10,5) with a data point a every integer X value (i.e. delta X is equal to “1”).
A Y value is needed somewhere between two existing data points, for instance, at X=5.25. Since 5.25 is closer to 5
than it is to 6, the data point at X value 5 will be used, therefore the function FNI(1;5.25) would return a value of
2.5. In addition, if a target “x” value is entered outside the range of the function (for the example, X values below 0
or above 10 would be out of the range), FEMAP will use the start of end data point to determine the value of Y, and
that Y value will re returned for all target “x” values outside the range of the function
 Function Reference C-3

.
Existing XY Point with
closest X coordinate to
target “x” value

Target “x” Value

INT(x)
returns the closest integer value (whole number) which is lower than the real number argument, x.
LN(x)
returns the natural logarithm of x.
LOG(x)
returns the base 10 logarithm of x.
MAT(matlID; index)
returns a material value from material “matlID”. The value of “index” determines the material value that will be
returned. Unlike the PROP( ) function, the values of “index” in this case are the same, no matter what type of mate-
rial is being referenced. You should use the following values for “index”.

Index Index Index

Returns Returns Returns
Value Value Value
0 Ex 1 Ey 2 Ez
3 Gx 4 Gy 5 Gz
6 NUxy 7 NUyz 8 NUzx
9 G_3D[1,1] 10 G_3D[1,2] 11 G_3D[1,3]
12 G_3D[1,4] 13 G_3D[1,5] 14 G_3D[1,6]
15 G_3D[2,2] 16 G_3D[2,3] 17 G_3D[2,4]
18 G_3D[2,5] 19 G_3D[2,6] 20 G_3D[3,3]
21 G_3D[3,4] 22 G_3D[3,5] 23 G_3D[3,6]
24 G_3D[4,4] 25 G_3D[4,5] 26 G_3D[4,6]
27 G_3D[5,5] 28 G_3D[5,6] 29 G_3D[6,6]
30 G_2D[1,1] 31 G_2D[1,2] 32 G_2D[1,3]
33 G_2D[2,2] 34 G_2D[2,3] 35 G_2D[3,3]
36 alpha[1,1] 37 alpha[1,2] 38 alpha[1,3]
39 alpha[2,2] 40 alpha[2,3] 41 alpha[3,3]
42 k[1,1] 43 k[1,2] 44 k[1,3]
45 k[2,2] 46 k[2,3] 47 k[3,3]
C-4 Function Reference

Index Index Index

Returns Returns Returns
Value Value Value
48 thermal cap 49 density 50 damping
51 ref Temp 52 tension limit[1] 53 tension limit[2]
54 compression 55 compression 56 shear limit
limit[1] limit[2]
MAX(x;y)
returns either x or y, whichever is larger. Positive numbers are always larger than negative numbers. If you want to
compare in an absolute sense use MAX(ABS(x);ABS(y)).
MAXID(type)
returns the maximum ID in the current model of the selected entity type. Type must be one of the predefined entity
types (see ACTID( ) function).
MID(propID)
returns the ID of the material that is referenced by property “propID”. This function should not be used with lami-
nate properties which can reference multiple materials - use MLAM( ) instead.
MIN(x;y)
returns either x or y, whichever is smaller. Negative numbers are always smaller than positive numbers. If you want
to compare in an absolute sense use MIN(ABS(x);ABS(y)).
MINID(type)
returns the minimum ID in the current model of the selected entity type. Type must be one of the predefined entity
types (see ACTID( ) function).
MLAM(propID; ply)
returns the ID of the material that is referenced by layer “ply” of property “propID”. This function can only be used
if “propID” selects a laminate property. “ply” must be between 1 and the maximum number of allowable plies for a
laminate, however the return will be 0 if you choose a ply that is not defined for the selected property.
NEXTID(type)
returns the ID of the next entity to be created of the selected type. Type must be one of the predefined entity types
(see ACTID( ) function).
PID(elemID)
returns the ID of the property that is referenced by element “elemID”. The return will always be 0, if the element
does not reference a property.
POW(x; y)
returns the value of x to the y power, xy
PROP(propID; index)
returns a property value from property “propID”. The value of “index” determines the property value that will be
returned. Refer to the table of Property Values in Data Block 402 of the FEMAP neutral file documentation for
proper values of “index”. As you can see from this table, the “index” values differ depending on the type of prop-
erty that you are using.
For example, if propID selects a Bar property, setting index = 0 will return Area, index = 4 will return J, the tor-
sional constant. For a plate, index = 0 will return the thickness.
RND(x)
returns the closest integer value (whole number) which is either lower or higher than the real number argument, x.
SIN(theta)
returns the sine of the angle theta. Theta must be specified in degrees.
SQR(x)
returns the square of x. SQR(x) = x * x
 Function Reference C-5

SQRT(x)
returns the square root of x.

Note: Please be very careful when using the SQR and SQRT functions in different portions of FEMAP. When
working within the FEMAP interface, such as creating an equation for loading, SQR is “square”, while
SQRT returns the “square root”. When creating a “script” using the API Programming window (see
Section 7.2.12, "Tools, Programming, API Programming"), SQR will actually return the “square root”,
not “square” the value.

TAN(theta)
returns the tangent of the angle theta. Theta must be specified in degrees.
VEC(setID;vectorID;entityID)
returns an output data value. SetID defines the output set to be selected. VectorID selects an output vector in that
set. EntityID is either the element ID or node ID (depending on the vector type) of the data to be selected. For
example, VEC(2,1,33) returns the output value for node 33, in Output Set 2, Output Vector 1 (Total Translation).
XCUCEN(curve ID)
returns the X coordinate of the center of the selected curve, in the active coordinate system. In a cylindrical or
spherical system this is the radial value.
XCUMID(curve ID)
returns the X coordinate of the midpoint of the selected curve, in the active coordinate system. In a cylindrical or
spherical system this is the radial value.
XEF(elemID;faceID)
returns the X coordinate of the centroid of the selected element face. The X coordinate is always returned in the
active coordinate system. In a cylindrical or spherical system, this is the radial value. The available values for
faceID depend on the element type. Refer to the Element Library for more information on face numbers for each
element type.
XEL(elemID)
returns the X coordinate of the centroid of the selected element, in the active coordinate system. In a cylindrical or
spherical system this is the radial value.
XND(nodeID)
returns the X coordinate of the selected node, in the active coordinate system. In a cylindrical or spherical system
this is the radial value. If you specify a negative nodeID, FEMAP selects the node with an ID equal to the next node
to be created minus the value you specified. For example, if you specify XND(-1), and the next node to be created
is 43, you will get the X coordinate of node 42, if node 42 exists.
XPT(pointID)
same as XND( ), only returns the coordinates of a point.
YCUCEN(curve ID)
same as XCUCEN( ), only returns the Y coordinate.
YCUMID(curve ID)
same as XCUMID( ), only returns the Y coordinate.
YEF(elemID;faceID)
same as XEF( ), only returns the Y coordinate.
YEL(elemID)
same as XEL( ), only returns the Y coordinate.
YND(nodeID)
returns the Y coordinate of the selected node, in the active coordinate system. In a cylindrical system this is the
angular value theta, in degrees. See XND( ) for additional information.
YPT(pointID)
same as YND( ), only returns the coordinates of a point.
C-6 Function Reference

ZCUCEN(curve ID)
same as XCUCEN( ), only returns the Z coordinate.
ZCUMID(curve ID)
same as XCUMID( ), only returns the Z coordinate.
ZEF(elemID;faceID)
same as XEF( ), only returns the Z coordinate.
ZEL(elemID)
same as XEL( ), only returns the Z coordinate.
ZND(nodeID)
returns the Z coordinate of the selected node, in the active coordinate system. See XND( ) for additional informa-
tion.
ZPT(pointID)
same as ZND( ), only returns the coordinates of a point.
D. Converting Old Models

Conversion from v4.4 and Later

FEMAP binary database (.MOD) files from previous versions of FEMAP are not compatible with this version. The
current version of FEMAP, however, can automatically translate model files from FEMAP v4.4 and later to the cur-
rent version. No action is required by the user. FEMAP will automatically read the database, translate to a FEMAP
neutral file, and then convert the neutral file to the latest database format.
Conversion of v4 files - Prior to v4.4
If you have been using a version of FEMAP prior to v4.4, you will probably have existing models that you want to
use with this new version. Your old model (.MOD) files are not compatible with this version of FEMAP and cannot
be read by the latest version of FEMAP. You can convert your models to FEMAP neutral files, however, so they
can be used with this system.
The best approach to doing the conversion is to do the following:
1. Using your old version of FEMAP, open the model that you want to convert.
2. Use the File, Translate command (pre Version 5), or the File, Export, FEMAP Neutral command, to write a
FEMAP neutral file. You can choose any filename for this command. If your model contains output for post-pro-
cessing you can also write that to the neutral file for automatic conversion.
3. Exit your old version of FEMAP.
4. Start the new version of FEMAP with a new, empty model.
5. Choose the File, Import, FEMAP Neutral command.
6. When the list of files is displayed, enter the name of the neutral file that you just created. You can set any of the
other translation options that you want, but usually you will just want to press OK and accept the defaults.
FEMAP will now read the neutral file and build your converted model.
7. Before you exit FEMAP, remember to save your model. Either use the File, Save As command or just respond
Yes to the question about saving your model as you exit FEMAP.
Other Methods to Convert Models
The above approach used a FEMAP neutral file to convert your model. You can follow the same steps using any of
the other translator formats that are supported in your earlier version of FEMAP. If you use one of these alternate
formats however, no colors, groups, or other FEMAP-specific data will be converted.
Converting from Version 3 and Before
If you still have the output files from your analysis program, it will probably be better to skip writing the output to
the neutral file. Due to the large number of changes in this version of the program, output that is translated from
neutral files that were written by earlier versions of FEMAP will be moved to output vectors that it would not oth-
erwise occupy. You will still be able to post-process this output, but if you later read additional analysis output into
new output sets, it will not be in the same vectors as the output converted via the neutral file. For maximum com-
patibility, it is therefore best to skip writing output to the neutral file and reread your analysis output directly into
this version of FEMAP.
If you do this, you will have to use File, Import, Analysis Results to read the output files into the newly converted
model.
Due to the extensive enhancements that were made between Version 3 and 4 of FEMAP, significant changes had to
be made to the neutral file format. Therefore, even though you follow the procedure defined above, your complete
model cannot be converted exactly. Again, these limitations only apply if you are converting a neutral file from
Version 3 or before - not a Version 4 neutral file. The following items will either not be converted, or will be modi-
fied during the conversion:
D-2 Converting Old Models

• As noted above, all output will be moved to new output vectors. The new vectors will all have IDs above
300000, just like user-defined output.
• Display, Window, and Post options will be skipped. The new views, which combine all of these features and
many more, are so different that it is impossible to convert these old options. You must define new views.
• PostProcessing report formats will be skipped. Again, these have changed so much that they cannot be con-
verted. Either select new standard formats or redefine them in your new model.
• Groups will be converted, but the format has changed dramatically. Some types of group definition, like con-
straints by DOF, cannot be converted because they are no longer supported. If you see any messages when read-
ing the neutral file, you should check your groups carefully.
Index

Symbols ANSYS (Legacy) 8-52

ASIN( ) C-1
! 4-66 ATAN( ) C-1
@ 4-66 axial spring 6-8
axis vector 4-52
A axisymmetric 6-18
axisymmetric elements
ABAQUS 7-23, 7-30, 8-5
NASTRAN 8-134
analysis overview 8-7
boundary conditions 8-13
export 8-15 B
group contact 8-20 bar 6-3
import model 8-25 BCDCNV 8-51, 8-67
master requests and conditions 8-10 beam 6-5
model options 8-9 section properties 6-5
output requests 8-15 beam diagram 5-36
overrides 8-20 bend 6-3, 6-7
postprocessing 8-25 bending element 6-12
prepare for dynamic analysis 8-6 bisect 4-51, 4-56
prepare model for contact 8-5 boundary conditions
prepare model for nonlinear 8-5 NASTRAN 8-106
rigid surface 8-17, 8-22 boundary surface 5-5
slide line 8-24 break 5-3
specify frequency 8-7 brick 6-20, 6-22, 6-23
step options 8-11 bulk data 8-97, 8-186
steps 8-18
tolerance control 8-6
write model 8-5 C
ABS( ) C-1 C,C++ 10-9
ACIS 2-1, 9-3 cache pages 3-11
ACOS( ) C-1 Cadkey 9-5
ACTID( ) C-1 calculator 4-66, C-1
align 4-58 Case Control 8-182
analysis control CATEXP 9-17
NASTRAN 8-177 CATIA 9-16
ANSYS 7-12, 8-26 reading 9-17
analysis process 8-26, 8-52, 8-69 CATIA export files 9-17
buckling analysis 8-28, 8-54 CELL( ) C-1
export 8-50, 8-62 chamfer 5-3, 5-6
frequency analysis 8-28, 8-54 CNPR( ) C-1
heat transfer 8-65 CNPRID( ) C-1
import model 8-51, 8-66 color 4-59
modal analysis 8-63 command keys A-1
model write 8-50, 8-62 command line options 3-8
nonlinear contact analysis 8-56 Command Toolbars 4-62
nonlinear static analysis 8-29, 8-56 comma-separated table 8-195
nonlinear transient analysis 8-29, 8-56 Connections 5-18
normal modes analysis 8-28, 8-54 constraint 5-18
postprocessing 8-51, 8-66 continuation 8-188
prepare model 8-27, 8-53 contour 5-36
random analysis 8-55 data conversion 5-39
static analysis 8-28, 8-54, 8-63 elemental 5-39
steady state heat transfer analysis 8-29, 8-55 options 5-38
transient analysis 8-28, 8-54 view options 5-43
transient and nonlinear transient analysis 8-63 conversion table 7-1
transient heat transfer analysis 8-56 converting old models 8-3, D-1
translator 7-2 coordinate selection 4-65
translator - legacy 7-2 coordinates 4-40
write model 8-26, 8-52 COS( ) C-1
 I-2

Cosmic NASTRAN 7-17, 8-92 export output 8-195

COUNT( ) C-1 Express 9-16
creating elements 5-8 extend 5-3
criteria 5-36
CSA/NASTRAN 8-92
cursor B-1
F
cursor position 4-63 FEMAP Basic Scripting 10-9
curve 5-2 FEMAP neutral file 8-3
from surface 5-3 FILE12 8-51, 8-67
intersection 4-47 FILE14 8-51, 8-67
modify 5-3 fillet 5-3, 5-6
curved beam 6-3, 6-7 FNI( ) C-2
FNV( ) C-2
free edge 5-23
D free face 5-23
damping 8-116, 8-117, 8-119, 8-120 freebody display 5-43
damping element 6-8, 6-9 function 5-20
damping matrix 6-27 function keys A-2, A-4
damping to ground element 6-24, 6-25 functions for calculator C-1
DDAM
NASTRAN 8-112, 8-114
deformed view options 5-42, 5-45
G
dialog boxes 4-59 gap 6-9
coordinates 4-40 general matrix 6-27
entity selection 4-25 global plane 4-57
graphical selection 4-38 graphical selection 4-38, 4-39, A-6, B-3, B-5
keys A-3 box,circle,polygon,freehand 4-28
library 4-60 graphics boards 3-1
method 4-35, 5-1 graphics window 4-7
plane definition 4-54 group 5-21, 5-26
special keys A-4
vector definition 4-48
display 5-23
H
hardware requirements 3-1
DOF spring 6-9
heat transfer analysis
DOF spring to ground 6-25
NASTRAN 8-135
DXF 9-12
hexa 6-20, 6-22, 6-23
dynamic analysis
hidden line 5-23
NASTRAN 8-110, 8-179
hyperelastic 5-15

E I
editing keys A-3
I-DEAS 7-33
elbow 6-3, 6-7
IDEAS 7-23, 8-67
element
IGES 2-1, 9-9
creation 5-8
Installation
distortion 5-11
PC Network 3-5
line 5-6, 6-1
PC Stand Alone 3-1
others 5-7, 6-24
INT( ) C-3
plane 5-7, 6-11
Interface
volume 5-7, 6-18
ANSYS (Legacy) 8-26, 8-52
element library 6-1
Interfaces
ELND( ) C-2
ABAQUS 8-5
ELTHK( ) C-2
ACIS 9-3
entity selection 4-25, A-6, B-3, B-5
CATIA 9-16
by titles 4-65
comma-separated table 8-195
equation editor 4-67
DXF 9-12
equations 4-66, C-1
FEMAP neutral file 8-3
errors starting 3-10
I-DEAS Master Series 8-67
executive and solution options
IGES 9-9
NASTRAN 8-93
LS-DYNA 8-69
Executive Control 8-180
MARC 8-77
EXP( ) C-2
MSC/NASTRAN 8-92, 8-162
Export 9-16
Parasolid 9-5
NASTRAN 8-177
PATRAN 8-193
export
Pro/ENGINEER 9-20
ANSYS 8-50, 8-62
Solid Edge 9-20
 I-3

SolidWorks 9-21 MINID( ) C-4

STEP 9-8 MLAM( ) C-4
stereolithography 9-22 model
Unigraphics 9-21 export 8-15
intersecting curves 4-47 model orientation 4-26
IronCAD 9-5 mouse B-1, B-3, B-5
IsoSurface 5-36 MSC/NASTRAN 7-17
isotropic,anisotropic 5-15 bulk data 8-186
case control 8-182
K executive control 8-180
export model 8-92, 8-162
keyboard A-1 postprocessing 8-189
keys A-1 MSGMESH 8-188

L N
laminate 6-14 NASCRUSH 8-189
layer 5-21, 5-26 NASPAT 8-193
library NASTRAN 7-2, 7-17, 8-92
palette 4-60 analysis control 8-177
selection 4-60 analysis set 8-77, 8-93
license file 3-5 axisymmetric elements 8-134
line 5-2 boundary conditions 8-106
line elements 6-1 bulk data 8-97, 8-186
link 6-7 case control 8-182
LN( ) C-3 DDAM 8-112, 8-114
load 5-16 dynamic analysis 8-110, 8-179
locate center coordinates 4-43 executive and solution options 8-93
LOG( ) C-3 executive control 8-180
LS-DYNA 7-23, 7-31, 8-69 File, Export 8-177
heat transfer analysis 8-135
M master requests and conditions 8-103
Model Analysis 8-92
Main Menu 4-9
normal modes analysis 8-123
Main Window 4-1, 4-23
output requests 8-109
MARC 7-23, 7-32, 8-77
power spectral density factors 8-126
mass element 6-24
random analysis 8-124
mass matrix 6-24, 6-27
response spectrum analysis 8-122
master requests and conditions
write model 8-92
NASTRAN 8-103
nastran general matrix 6-29
Master Series 7-23, 8-67
NE/NASTRAN 7-17, 8-92
MAT( ) C-3
network licensing 3-5
material 5-15
neutral file 8-3, D-1
matrix
NEXTID( ) C-4
damping 6-27
nonlinear gap 6-9
general 6-27
normal 4-51, 4-56
mass 6-27
normal modes analysis
stiffness 6-27
NASTRAN 8-123
MAX( ) C-4
numerical input 4-66
MAXID( ) C-4
ME/NASTRAN 8-92
membrane 6-12 O
menu keys A-5 offset coordinates 4-43
merging models 8-4 old models D-1
mesh 5-8 orientation
control 5-8 model 4-26
solid 5-10 orthotropic 5-15
surface 5-9 output export 8-195
mesh locations 4-46 output requests
mesh sizing 5-8 NASTRAN 8-109
Messages and Lists Window 4-4
method 4-35, 5-1
selection 4-35 P
MID( ) C-4 page setup 5-27
midpoint 4-46 palette 4-59
MIN( ) C-4 Parasolid 2-1, 9-5
 I-4

PATNAS 8-193 shortcuts

PATRAN 7-22, 8-193 equation editor 4-67
Patran 7-2 Simcenter Nastran 2-1
penta 6-20, 6-22, 6-23 SIN( ) C-4
picking 4-38, 4-39, A-6, B-3, B-5 SLA 9-22
box,circle,polygon,freehand 4-28 slide line 6-28
PID( ) C-4 Snap To 4-63, 5-1
planar elements 6-11 coordinate selection 4-65
plane definition 4-54 solid 2-1, 5-5
plane strain 6-16 ACIS 9-3
plane stress 6-16 create 5-6
plate 6-13 modify 5-6
plot only element 6-10, 6-17, 6-18 Parasolid 9-5
plot style 5-23 solid cohesive elements 6-23
plys 6-14 Solid Edge 9-5, 9-20
point 5-2 solid elements 6-20
postprocessing solid laminate elements 6-22
data selection 5-36 SolidWorks 9-5, 9-21
display options 5-40 spline 5-3
graphical 5-35 spring 6-8
reporting 5-46 spring/damper to ground 6-24
POW( ) C-4 SQR( ) C-4
power spectral density factors SQRT( ) C-5
NASTRAN 8-126 SSS/NASTRAN 7-17, 8-92
PREP7 8-26, 8-52 standard dialog boxes
print 5-27 color palette 4-59
Pro/ENGINEER 9-20 coordinate definition 4-40
project entity selection 4-25
onto curve 4-44 library 4-60
onto surface 4-47 plane definition 4-54
PROP( ) C-4 vector definition 4-48
property 5-15 Starting FEMAP 3-8, 3-10
status bar 4-23
Q STEP 9-8
stereolithography 9-22
quick access menu 4-20, 4-62, 4-63 stiffness matrix 6-27
STL 9-22
R surface 5-4
boundary 5-5
RAM Management 3-11
trimmed 2-1
random analysis
NASTRAN 8-124
recursive equations 4-66 T
replication 8-188 table 8-195
reports 5-46 TAN( ) C-5
response spectrum analysis tangent 4-52
NASTRAN 8-122 tetra 6-20
right mouse button 4-20, 4-62, 4-63 torsional spring 6-8
rigid element 6-25 touch B-4
RND( ) C-4 transferring models 8-3
rod 6-1 translation table 7-1
ABAQUS 7-23
S LS-DYNA 7-23
MARC 7-23
SAT 9-3
trim 5-3
saved 4-58
trimmed surfaces 2-1
SDRC 8-67
tube 6-2
section cut 5-36
section property generator 6-5
security device 3-2, 3-9 U
upgrading 3-4 UAI/NASTRAN 7-17, 8-92
selection keys A-6 UG 9-21
shear panel 6-11 Unigraphics 9-5, 9-21
shell 6-13 using old models D-1
shortcut keys 4-22, 10-1, A-1
 I-5

V XCUCEN( ) C-5
XCUMID( ) C-5
VBA 10-9 XEF( ) C-5
VEC( ) C-5 XEL( ) C-5
vector 4-48 XND( ) C-5
vector plot 5-36 XPT( ) C-5
view XY Plot 5-45
options 5-21, 5-24, 5-40
select 5-21, 5-35
View Toolbar 4-63 Y
Visual Basic 10-9 YCUCEN( ) C-5
volume 5-5 YCUMID( ) C-5
volume elements 6-18 YEF( ) C-5
YEL( ) C-5
W YND( ) C-5
YPT( ) C-5
wedge 6-20, 6-22, 6-23
weld/fastener 6-28
window B-1 Z
windows keys A-6 ZCUCEN( ) C-6
working with old models D-1 ZCUMID( ) C-6
workplane 4-62, 5-1 ZEF( ) C-6
ZEL( ) C-6
X ZND( ) C-6
ZPT( ) C-6
X_T 9-5